'^'^ 



5r^.= 



mWmi 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. 
¥?'- ^mm\i i?o 



Shelf, 



If . n^ 



UNITED STATES OF AMEEICA. 




K^'^^ 



5^7?iWK'l= 



%"^ 



r4 



I 



CEEEMONIAL. 



Bg.A 



, 


.^ 




«li^ 


^ Ij 


'MfMi 



iSCustocUam. nBomine 10Fone 






"24 ^^ 95 C"* 2<>v<* 






Manuum 
Elevatio 




(h B E N E D t C TU 

4 : I I I I I I ~ __ 

{6 ^ AD TE T) O M I y E 



.iB 



l/VV 



^\ . ... I in I'^^^L^ I ■ ' I 



CEREMONfAL 



/.. 



FOR THE USE OF THE 




CATHOLIC CHURCHES 



IN THE 



UNITED STATES OF AMERICA. 



SEVENTH REVISED EDITION, 



r > 




(NOV 17 10;; 
PHILADELPHIA: \,^^^^,^%^ , 

H. L. KiLNER <& Co., u'-f^^h'^ 

Publishers. 



jiyf^H 



1^^.==. 




3^ •v^'^^ 



Copyright 

JOHN B. PIET & CO. 

1882. 



Copyright 

H. L. KILNER & CO., 

1894. 




This edition of the Ceremonial, for the use of the Catho- 
lic Churches in the United States of America, having been 
carefully revised and corrected, is hereby approved o£ 

Given at Baltimore this 30th day of November. 

>{. JAMES CARD. GIBBONS, 

Archbishop of Baltimore. 

Feast of St. Andrew, A. D. 189a 



(V) 



PREFACE TO THE FIFTH EDITION. 



This volume of the Ceremonial is something 
more than a mere reprint from former editions. 
While it cannot be expected that any novelty 
should be found in a work treating of the ritual of 
the Church, yet it is quite possible to make many 
changes in the order of the material; and this 
volume affords evidence of the feasibility of cor- 
recting mistakes. 

With regard to the arrangement of the matter, 
it has been deemed preferable to place together the 
various articles treating of ceremonies in which the 
priest is not assisted by deacon and sub-deacon ; and 
hence the first and second parts of the present 
volume treat of the ceremonies of Low Mass, 
Missa Cantata, Yespers and Benediction, and the 
ceremonies for Holy Week and other occasions as 
given in the small Ceremonial of Benedict XIII. 
In the article on Missa Cantata will be found the 
ceremonies of the Asperges, which should take 
place every Sunday, unless the Bishop officiates. 



VIU PEEFACE. 

The former editions placed the directions for the 
Asperges after the ceremonies prescribed for Holy 
Saturday, and made no reference to it in the article 
on Missa Cantata ; and in consequence the Asperges 
was omitted in many churches, whilst in others a 
lack of uniformity in carrying it out was found. 

Among the many corrections in the first part is 
one concerning the singing of the Epistle in a Missa 
Cantata. The Missal prescribes that in such cir- 
cumstances a lector in surplice shall sing the Epistle, 
and the former editions of this work contained the 
provision that the first acolyte should at the proper 
time sing the Epistle. This was scarcely, if ever, 
observed ; and in some churches the celebrant sang, 
whilst in others he read, the Epistle. The Koman 
authorities being consulted on this point, replied 
(in an informal answer received through the Prop- 
aganda) that in case the rubric of the Missal could 
not be observed, the celebrant might read the 
Epistle. The same reply contained the following 
decisions, which have been used in preparing this 
edition : 

I. The Missal may be left on the altar before- 
hand at a Low Mass, where such is the custom ; 
though the rubrics require that the server should 



PREFACE. IX 



carry it to the altar when accompanying the cele- 
brant. 

II. When the sacristy is behind the altar of the 
church, the celebrant enters the sanctuary by the 
Epistle and leaves by the Gospel side. 

III. The salutations prescribed in the GcBremo- 
niale, and elsewhere^ need not be made to mere 
sanctuary boys. 

lY. When the Blessed Sacrament is not kept at 
the altar where Mass is celebrated, the server on 
arriving, or when passing before the middle of the 
altar, should not genuflect, but bow profoundly. 

The article on Votive Masses in the first part 
has been entirely rewritten. 

The ceremonies for Solemn High Mass, Solemn 
Vespers and Solemn Benediction have been left in 
the third part, but many corrections and additions 
have been made ; all of which are in consonance 
with Roman custom, especially as interpreted by 
the latest Roman liturgical writer, Mgr. Martinucci. 

No alteration, so far as the order is concerned, 
will be found in the fourth, fifth and sixth 
parts, nor in the Appendix ; but many corrections 
have been made and some new matter introduced. 



X PREFACE. 

Writers on liturgical questions have differed and 
will continue to hold divergent opinions on minor 
points regarding which neither the Gceremoniale 
Episcoporum, the Missal nor the Pontifical give 
definite instructions. In treating such, it has been 
considered that the safest plan was to follow the 
approved Eoman writers. Bj deferring to the 
authority of Mgr. Martinucci, the present edition, 
it is believed, has attained that end. 

The closest fidelity to approved Roman custom 
will insure perfection in carrying out any ceremony, 
and for this reason it is expected that the present 
edition of the Ceremonial will prove even more 
acceptable than its predecessors. 

As in duty bound, this volume is published with 
due submission to Ecclesiastical authority, and 
especially the Sacred Congregation of Rites. 



CONTENTS 



PART I. 



Jeremonies of Low Mass, Missa Cantata, Vespers and 
Benediction. 



I. — Art. I. What is to be prepared, . 

II. Oa the Preparation for Mass by the Priest, 

III. Oa Leaving the Sacristy, . 

IV. On Approaching the Altar, 
V. From the Commencement of the Mass to the 

Introit, ..... 
VI. From the Introit to the Epistle, . 
VII. Prom the Epistle to the Offertory, 
VIII. From the Offertory to the Canon, 
IX. From the Canon to the Consecration, 
X. From the Consecration to the Pater Noster, 
XL From the Pater Noster to the Communion, 
XII. From the Communion to the End of Mass, 
XIII. On Votive Masses, 
IT. — Order to be observed in celebrating two Masses on the 

same day, ..... 

III. — Low Mass for the Dead, .... 
IV. — Low Mass when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 
V. — Of Low Mass in the presence of Prelates, 
VI. — Giving Communion, .... 

Art. I. Giving Communion during Mass, 
IL Purification of the Ciborium, 

III. On giving Communion at other times, 
VII. — Manner of Serving a Priest at Low Mass, 

Art. I. General Remarks, ... 

IL Of the Vesting of the Priest, 
III. From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it 
VIII. — Manner of Serving a Bishop at Low Mass, 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, 

II. Of the preparation and Vesting of the Bishop, 
III. When there is but one Chaplain, 
IX. — Manner of Celebrating High Mass without Deacon or 
Sub-deacon ; the Asperges, 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, 



1 
3 

6 
8 

9 
11 
13 

15 
20 
24 
26 
33 
34 

40 
42 
44 
46 
48 
48 
51 
51 
54 
5i 
55 
56 
60 
60 
60 
65 

67 
67 



xu 



CONTENTS. 



X. — Vespers sung without Cope-bearers, 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, 

III. When Benediction follows, 
XI. — Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament 
Akt. I. Things to be prepared, 

II. When there is but one Priest, 
III. When another Priest, or a Deacon assists, 



73 
73 
73 
78 
79 
79 
80 
83 



PART II. 



Ceremonies for Holt Week and other Festivals. 



I. — Blessing of Candles on Candlemas Day, 
Art. I. Of what is to be prepared, . 

II. Ceremonies to be performed on Candlemas Day, 
II. — Of the Benediction of Ashes on Ash Wednesday, 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, 

II. Of the Sacred Rites to be performed, 
III.— Of Palm Sunday, , . . . 

Art. I. What is to be prepared, 

II. Of the Ceremonies to be performed, 
rV.— Of Maunday-Thursday, . 

Art. I. What is to be prepared, 
II. Of the Sacred Rites, 
v.— Of Good Friday, 

Art. L Of what is to be prepared, . 
II. Of the Sacred Rites, 
VI.— Of Holy Saturday, .... 
Art. I. What is to be prepared, . 
11. Of the Sacred Rites, 



87 

93 

93 

93 

96 

96 

97 

103 

103 

104 

liO 

110 

ni 

133 
133 
125 



PART III. 

Ceremonies of High Mass, Solemn Vespers and Solemij 
Benediction. 



L. — Rules to observed by the Clergy in Choir, . 
Art. I. The order of going to the Choir, 
II. The order to be observed in Choir, . 

III. Internal dispositions, 

IV. The order to be observed in receiving Holy 

munion, 
V. The order in going from the Choir, 
n.— Instructions for the Officers, 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, 

II. Instruction for the Censer-bearer, . 

III. Instruction for the Acolytes, 

IV. Duty of the Master of Ceremonies, 



Com 



135 

135 
136 
138 

139 
140 
141 
141 
143 
146 
150 



CONTENTS. Xlll 



V. Instruction for Sab-deacon, . . . .158 

VI. Instr iction for the Deacon, . . . .160 

VII. Instruction for the Celebrant, . . . 176 

III.— High Mass for the Dead, . . . . .188 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 183 

11. What is to be particularly observed, . . 183 

IV. — Solemn Vespers, . . . . . . 18(' 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 186 

II. General Kules to be observed, . . . 187 

III. Instruction for the Acolyte=», . . . 188 

IV. Instruction for the Censer-bearer, . . . 19C 
V. Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies, . . 192 

VI. Instruction for the Cope-bearers, . . . 195 

VII. Instruction f^r the Celebrant, . . . 198 

V. — Solemn Benediction when the Celebrant is assisted by 

Deacon and Sub deacon, .... 200 

VI. — Of Solemn Vespere, and of the Procession on Corpus 

Christi, . . . . . .202 

Art, I. Of Solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament, ex- 
posed, . . . . . .202 

II. Of the Procession on Corpus Christi, . . 206 

VIL — Vespers for the Dead on the 1st of November, . . 208 

Art. I. Things to be prepared .... 208 

II. Ceremonies peculiar to these Vespers, . . 209 

PART IV. 

Ceremonies for the Principal Festivals. 

I. — Feast of the Purification, ..... 311 

Art. I. Necessary Preparations, . . . .211 

II. From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Distribu- 
tion of the Candles, .... 212 

m. From the Distribution of the Candles to the Pro- 
cession, ...... 213 

IV. The Procession, . . . . .215 

n. Ash Wednesday, ...... 217 

Art. I. Necessary Preparation'^, .... 217 

II. Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes, . 218 
III. Of the Mass, . . . . . .231 

III.— Sundays LaBtare and Gaudete, .... 222 

IV.— Palm Sunday, . . . . . . .222 

Art. I. Prepara'ions, . . . . . . 222 

II. From the Bea^inning of the Ceremony to the Dis- 
tribution of the Paim«, .... 223 

III. or the Distribution ot Palm^, . . . 2"..*j 

IV. Of the Procession, ..... 227 
V. Of the Mass and Passion, . . . .230 

v.— Officeof theTenebrse, . . . . . .233 

Akt. I. Preparations, ...... 233 

II. From the Commencement to the End of the OiSce, 233 



XIV CONTENTS. 

VL—Maunday-Thursday, . . . , ; .235 

Art. I. Preparations, . . . . . . 235 

II. Of the MiSS, . . . . . .236 

III. Of the Procession, • . . . . .239 

IV. Of Vespers, and of the Stripping of the Altars, . 241 
VII.— Of Good Friday, . . . . . .243 

Art. I. Preparations, ...... 243 

II. From, the Vesting of the Ministers to the Uncover- 
ing of the Cross, . . . .244 

III. From the Uncovering of the Cross to the Pro- 

cession, ...... 247 

IV. Of the Procession, . . . , . .250 
V. Of the remaining Part of the Office, . . 252 

VIIL— Holy Saturday, . . . . . .256 

Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 256 

II. From the Benediction of the New Fire to the 

Exultet, . ..... 258 

in. From the Exultet to the Prophecies, . . 261 

IV. From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the 

Baptismal Font, ..... 263 

V. From the Banediction of the Font to the Begin- 

ning of- Mass, ..... 264 

VI. The Mass, . . . . . .267 



PART V. 

Ceremonies for Mass and Vespers, Solemnly Celebrated 
BY the Bishop, or in His Presence. 

I. Solemn Pontifical Vespers, ..... 270 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 270 

II. From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy to 

the beginning of Vespers, . . . 271 

III. From the beginning to the end of Vespers, . 272 

IV. Benediction ot the Blessed Sacrament given by the 

Bishop, ...... 275 

II. Solemn Vespers, in the presence of the Bishop, . . 276 

HI. Complins, when the Bishop officiates, . . . 277 

IV. Matins, when the Bi:«hop officiates, . . . 278 

' V. Lauds, when the Bishop officiates, . . . 280 

VI. Solemn Pontifical Mass, . . . . .281 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, . . . .281 

II. Of the Vesting ot the Clergy and of the Bishop, 2:^4 

III. The Pontifical Mass, . , . .288 

VII. Solemn Mass, celebrated in the presence of the Bishop, 

dressed in Cope, . . . . . . 300 

VIII. Solemn Mass in presence of the Bishop, in Rochet and 

Cappa, ....... 304 

IX. Vespers for the Dead, celebrated by the Bishop, . . 305 



CONTEKTS. 



XV 



CHJP. PAGE. 

X. Matins and Lauds for the Dead, celebrated by the 

Bishop, 306 

XI. Solemn Pontificai Mass for the Dead, . . . 307 

Art. I. Tilings to be prepared, .... 307 

II. From the beginning to the end of Mass, . . 308 
III. The Absolution after Mass, . . . 310 

•XII. Solemn Mass for the Dead, in the presence of the Bishop, 313 
XIII. Particular Instructions for the Officers who attend the 

Bishop 313 

Art. I. Instruction for the assistant Priest, . .313 

11. Instructions for the two assistant Deacons, , 318 

III. Instruction for the officiating Deacon, . . 331 

IV. Instruction for the Sub deacon, . . . 328 
V Instruction for the inferior Ministers, . . 332 



PART VI. 

Other Different Solemnities at which the Bishop Offici- 
ates OR IS Present. 



I. Commemoration of all the Faithful departed, . . 336 

II. Sundays in Advent, . . . . . . 337 

III. Christmas, . . . . . . .338 

IV. Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas, . . 339 
V. Candlemas, . . . . . . .340 

VI. Ash- Wednesday, . . . . . .343 

VII. Sundays in Lent, . . . . . .345 

VIIL Palm Sunday, 346 

IX. Matins of the Tenebrae, . . . . .349 

X. Maunday-Thursday, . . . . . .350 

XI. Good Friday, 361 

XIL Holy Saturday, . . . . . .369 

Xlll. Ceremonies to be observed in Provincial Councils, . 376 

Art I. What is to be done before it opens, . . 376 

II. How tlie Metropolitan Churcli is to be adorned 

and arranged, ..... 377 

III. The opening of the Council, . . . 378 

IV. Mode of Procedure of the Council, . . 384 
V. Second Solemn Session, .... 385 

VI. Third Solemn Session, . . . .387 

Ceremonies to be observed in Diocesan Synods, . . 390 

—Solemn administration ol the Sacrement of Confirmation, 395 
Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... 895 

II. Tlie administration of the Sacrament, . . 398 

— Episcopal Visitation of Parishes, .... 399 
Art. I. The Bishop's Reception when he visits the Par- 
ishes, . . . . . .399 



XIV. 
XV. 



XVI 



XVI CONTENTS. 



APPENDIX, 



I. Forty Hours' Exposition, ..... 406 

Art. I. Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Expo- 
sition, . . . . . .406 

11. Of the Mass of the Exposition, . . .407 

IIL. Of the Procession for the Exposition, . . 409 

IV". Qf the Mass ^ro Pace, . . . .413 

V. Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Reposi- 
tion, ...... 414 

VI. Of the Mass for the Reposition, . . . 414 

VII. From the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours, . 418 

II.— Dififerent Intonations for Vespers and Solemn Mass, . 422 

Elenchus Defectuum ...... 430 



'Note, — The following foot note was inadvertently 
omitted on page 137 : 

Mgr. Martinucci, following the directions of the Uceremoniale E]nscoj)orv7n, 
prescribes that the clergy, with the exception of Prelates and Canons in their 
own church should kneel while the Incamatus is being sung. A contrary 
custom prevails in many places, even in some churches in Rome; hence it 
has been thought better to leave the text as in former editions, and insert 
this note. 



CEREMONIAL. 



PART I. 



^n$mtxnUt xif Snut ||ln$$* 



CHAPTER I. 
Article I. 

"WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. 

On the Altar. 

1. The altar, wlucli should be of stone or marble, con- 
secrated by the Bishop, or, at least, having on it an 
altar-stone consecrated by the Bishop, should be covered 
with three clean altar-cloths. The first two, long enough 
to cover the whole top, and the uppermost should reach 
the base of the altar on both sides. {Rub. Ifiss., part i, 
n. XX.) 

2. In the middle of the altar, a crucifix sufficiently 
large to be distinctly seen. {Bub., ib.) 

3. At least two candlesticks, with wax candles, which 
should burn during the whole time of the Mass.* 

4. In front of the altar, the antipendiutn of the color 
of the vestinents.f This does not seem strictly necessary, 
especially when the front of the altar is iiandsomely 
ornamented. {llub.,ib.) 



*A11 priests (even prelates, who arc not Bishops) should have at 
their private Mass only two candles and one server. (S. R C 27th 
fcsept., 1659.) ■' 

t As the word antipendium is generally accepted to signify altar- 
Veil, or frontal, it shall be made use of in this manual. 



2 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

5. If the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle, the 
veil covering the tabernacle should also be of the color 
of the vestments, unless black vestments be used. No 
veil is needed over the tabernacle when the canopy is of 
marble or stone. {C(Br. Ep., lih. /, c. xiii, n. 3.)^ 

6. The altar cards. 

7. At the Epistle side, the book-stand. 

8. On the credence^-\ or any suitable place, the cruetsj 
with wine and water on a plate, the finger-towel and the 
hand-bell. Should the priest be obliged to celebrate 
Mass without the assistance of a server, the plate with 
cruets and towel should be placed on a stand near the 
altar, at the Epistle side, not on the altar. 

In the Sacristy. % 

1. The sacred vestments, of the color prescribed. 
They should be, placed on the sacristy table, || or vest- 
ment case ; they should be so disposed that the priest 
may find them in order as he vests. The chasuble 
should be adjusted first, so that the lower half of the 
front part will hang down, and the lower part of the 
back be folded over the upper. Next, the stole, folded 
in four parts, should be laid across the chasuble, and the 
maniple across the stole. The girdle, in a serpentine 
form, should be placed on the maniple. The upper 
part of the alb should lie on the vestments, and over it 
the amice extended, the strings of which may be arranged 
on the amice itself. 

2. The Missal, unless it be already on the altar. 

* " Tabernaculum, in quo aspidue Divinissima servatur Eucharistia 
conopeo serico, vel simili materiae vestiri debet, ejus item coloris cujns 
est altaris Pallium ; quanquam pro colore nigro violaceus congrueniior 
eiit in honorem Cliristi viventis." {Merati.) 

t Credence, generally used for the side table near the altar. 

X Cruets should be of glass, not of silver. {Gavin., P. 1, 7, xx.) 

§ If there is no sacristy, the sacred vet^tments are prepared on a 
table near the altar, or, if there is no table, on the Gospel side of the 
altar it«elf; not in the middle of it, unless a Bishop is to celebrate. 
{Rub. Miss) 

II St. Charles Borromeo recommends that the table or vestment case, 
on which the sacred vestments are laid, be covered with a while linen 
cloth. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 3 

3. The chalice,* and paten with particle, the pnrifi- 
cator, the chalice-veil, the pall, and the burse with the 
corporal in it. 

4. The priest's cap near the vestments ; not on them, 
nor on the chalice. 

. 5. A surplice for the server. 

6. A place for the priest to wash his hands. 

Article II. 
On the Preparation for Mass, 

1. The priest, wishing to celebrate the m.ost Holy 
Sacrifice, should prepare himself by prayer. Aliquan- 
tulum orationi vacet, {Bub. Miss.) He should also 
have said matins and lauds. 

2. The suitable prayers, for the occasion are those 
suggested by the Ciiurch, and laid down in the Missal, 
that is, the anthem, Ne reminiscaris, with the psalms 
and prayers that follow them. Should the priest say 
these prayers, he will take notice that the anthem above 
named is said entirely on feasts of double rite ; and 
during Paschal time the Allehda is added to it. 

3. It is well not to omit the pious protestation. Ego 
volo celehrare Missam. By reciting this, not only he 
can gain the indulgences annexed to it, but he may then 
also direct his intention. 

4. The priest, clad in his cassock, opens the Missal, 
and marks the places of the Mass and prayers, that he 
may not lose time at the altar. {Rub. Miss.) After 
which he washes his hands, saying at the same time, in 
a low voice. Da Domine, etc. 

* The chalice ought not to be carried to the altar, and fixed oo it 
by any person before Mass, but the priest ought to carry it himself to 
the altar, not before he goes thitlier to begin Mass, but when vested 
with the sacred vestments he goes from the sacristy, or from the place 
where he put on the vestments, to the altar, as directed. (lb , tit. ii, 
ii. 1.) '* Sacerdos omnibus paramentis indutus accipit manu sinistra 
calicem ut supra nraeparaium, quem porta t. elevatum ante pectus, 
bursam manu dextra super calice tenens, et facta reverenlia cruci, et 
capite cooper o accedit ad altare cum ministro, cum Missali," etc.; 
any contrary custom is to be looked upon as an abuse, which should 
be abolished, (ee S. C. 11, n. 4i85.) 



4: CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

5. Having washed liis hands, lie prepares the clialico 
by placing on it a clean puriiicator,* in such a way that 
it will hang equally on both sides. On the purificator 
he places the paten, and on the paten the large bread, 
which should be round, entire, and free from loose par- 
ticles, to remove which the priest will pass his thumb 
and forefinger around the edge.f {Ruh. Miss.) Then 
he puts on it the pall,;}; which he covers with the veil. 
If the veil is not large enough to cover the whole chalice, 
he will arrange it so that it will hide that part of the 
chalice that will be towards the people while going to 
the altar. Last of all, he places the burse, containing 
the corporal,§ on the veil. The opening of it should be 
towards himself as he proceeds to the altar. Nothing 
should be laid on the burse. {S. V. R., 1st Sept., 1703.) 

6. Everything being prepared, the priest proceeds to 
vest. He will do well to make the sign of the cross, 

* The pnrificatnr should be of plain linen, neither coarse nor very 
fine. It may be about thirteen and a half inches square, with a very 
sma'l cross worked in the centre. It requires no special blessing, but 
after use should not be handled by laics, until washed by some one 
in major orders. 

t Some authors recommend that a slight line be traced on the large 
bread before Mass, so that the priest may more easily brc^ak. it. Tliere 
is noihing for or against this in the Rubrics. 

j According to the Rubric, the pall should be of linen. Fi)rmerly 
the pall formed a part of the corporal, which was large enough to 
cover the chalice. The inconvenience of its being too light ran be 
obviated by having it made out of a piece of linen which when folded 
is about six inches square, in(;luding large edging if there be anv^. 
" In :-acrificio missse uti non licet palla a parte superiori drapo serico 
cooperta." (S E. C, 2d Jan., 1701.) Nevertheless, by a late decision 
of the S. R. C.,the pall m-dv be of silk cloth, ornamented on the outside, 
while the inside is of linen; but it shouhl not be black. " Permitti 
posse dummodo palla linea subnecta calicem cooperiat, ac pannus 
superior non sit nii^jri coloris, aut referat aliqua mortis signa." (S. B. (?., 
10th Jan., 1853 ) 

§ The corporal should be of fine white linen, very dean, and 
starched. Ii shou'd have a small cross worked in the middle of ihe 
front part, but not with gold or silver. It is generally folded by bend- 
ing first one third of it over, so as to cover the second third part; 
again, the other third folded over the first. Then one-third of its 
length over the middle third part, and the last part bent over the rest. 
A corporal will be found sufficiently large if it l)e from twenty-two 
to twenty-four inches square. The corporal is blessed as well as iLe 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

allliongli tlie Enbric does not say so. If lie does, bo 
should make it without the amice in his hand. He then 
takes the amice by the two corners where the strings are 
connected, raises it so that he may kiss the cross in the 
middle ; he puts it on his head, saying at the same time, 
Impone^ Domine^ etc. ; and as he continues the prayers, 
he adjusts the amice around his neck, so that every 
article of his neck-dress be entirely covered by it ; and 
after crossing the strings upon his breast, the left being 
under the riglit, he passes them behind, and ties them in 
front with a loose knot.* ^Rvh Miss.) 

7. He puts on the alb (without kissing it) by passing 
it over his head ; then he puts his right arm into the 
right sleeve, and his left into the other. He adjusts it 
about his neck, and fits it around so that it descends 
about one inch above the floor all around, at the same 
time saying, Dealba me, Domine, etc. {Muh. Miss.) 

8. As he girds himself with the cincture,t he says, 
I^rcBcinge me, etc. {Rub. Miss.) The common practice 
is to leave the tassels hanging down as low as possible, 
to be able afterwards to fasten the stole with the two 
ends of the cord. 

9. He takes the maniple and kisses the cross on it, 
and passing it over his left arm, fastens it half way 
between the hand and the elbow, saying, Merear^ 
Domine, etc. 

10. Tlien having taken the stole, he kisses the cross 
on it, and, with both hands, he passes it over his head, 
fits it around his neck, so that both ends of the stole hang 

* In putting on the amice, he ought not to forget that the object of 
it is to cover entirely the usual dress, and that part of the cassock 
which is near the collar, and the collar itself; and, therefore, he ought 
to put it on so as to answer this purpose as directed. {lb., tit. i, n. 3.) 
"Ac prlmiun accipiens amiciura circa extremitates et chordulas, oscu- 
latur illud in medio ubi est crux ec ponit super caput, et mox declinat 
ad coUum, et eo vestium coVaria circumtegens,''' etc. The first Council 
of Baltimore has strictly enjoined the observance of this Rubric. 
Indusia vero privati apparatus sub amictu et alba lateant, ita ut noa 
iniecoro vel mundano more appareant. {Con. Bait. 1, Deer. 24.) 

t Cinctures may be made of either silk or cotton, and ot any color 
except black. Uongruentior est uti cingulo lineo. {^S. B. C, n. 3436 
ad. 7 ) 



6 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

down at equal distances. Afterwards he crosses both 
ends of the stole, first passing towards his right the end 
that hangs on his left side, and drawing over it the other 
end which hangs upon his right. Then he confines tho 
stole with the extremities of the cincture, which ho 
allows to hang on each side under his arms, and not 
behind his back. In the meantime he says, Redde mihi^ 
Domine^ etc. 

11. Lastly, he puts on the chasuble without kissing it, 
saying, Dornine, qui dixisti, etc. He will take care to 
fit it around the neck and slioulders, and tie it in front 
with the strings. He may then fasten a clean whito 
handkerchief to the cincture, but it should not bo 
visible. 

Article III. 

Oil Leaving the Sacristy, 

12. The priest being vested, puts on his cap. Then, 
taking with his left hand the chalice ^^t* nodum, he lays 
his right, flat on the burse, holding the chalice before his 
breast, neither too far nor too near himself, but in a 
natural position. He jnakes a low bow * to the cross or 
image in the Sacristy, and, preceded by the server, who 
carries the Missal, he proceeds to the altar with a grave 
and modest deportment, his mind and heart occupied 
with the great mystery he is going to celebrate. 

Vd. It is a laudable custom for the priest to take holy 
water and make the sign of the cross going to the altar. 
{S. E. a, 9th April, 1808.) ISfevertbeless the Eubric 
does not prescribe it. 

14. If the priest passes before the tabernacle contain- 
ing the Blessed Sacrament, he will make a genuflectionf 

*Rubricians distinguish three kinds of bows — the low, the moderate 
and the simple. A low bow is made by bending the head and thn 
shoulder^, so that the person mfiking it could touch his knees with 
the extremities of his fingers. The moderate is made by sufficiently 
lowerint? the head, and somewhat bending the shouldei"S. The simple 
bow consists in simply bending the head, without perceptibly moving 
the shoulders. 

t A simple genuflection is made by bending the right knee to the 
floor, as near as possible to the left foot. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 7 

w'tlioiit removing liis cap. If lie passes before the liigli 
altar, be makes a low bow to the cross. Should he pass 
before an altar where there is a relic of a saint whose 
feast is celebrated, or some other remarkable relic, he 
makes a low bow without taking his cap off. {Rub. 
Miss.) If it be a relic of the true cross, he will make a 
genuflection with his head covered. {S. H. (7., 7th Maj, 
1766.) 

15. If he should pass before the Blessed Sacrament 
exposed, or at the time of the elevation, or when Holy 
Communion is given, he will take off his cap, and kneel 
on both knees, being careful, in the last two named 
instances, not to rise until after the elevation, or before 
the priest giving (yommunicn has returned to the altar, 
and placed the ciborium on the corporal. {Bub. Miss.) 
If, however, in the latter case, the communicants should 
be too numerous, a genuflection on both knees will be 
sufficient, without remaining until the end. {8. H. C.^ 
6th July, 1698.) 

16. When, on these occasions, the priest takes off his 
cap, either he will give it to the server to hold until he 
is to put it on again, or he will hold it between his 
thumb and forefinger, with the opening of it towards 
himself, and with the last two fingers holding the burse, 
that it may not fall. 

17. While the priest is going to or coming from the 
altar, he should salute no one except his Bishop or other 
great prelates, or some distinguished person, and then 
he should do so by a simple bow. He will do the same 
on meeting another priest clad in sacred vestments, 
going to or returning from saying Mass. If the two 
priests meet in a narrow passage, the one going to cele- 
brate will give way to the one returning. 

18. If, perchance, the priest should go to or return 
from the altar without the chalice (whenever he is to 
bow or make a genuflection), he should take off his cap. 



o ceremo:n"ies of low mass. 

Article TV. 
On Approaching the Altar. 

19. The priest, having reached the foot of the altar 
on which he is to celebrate, stops in the middle, takes 
off his cap, gives it to the server, and makes a low bow 
to the cross. If the Blessed Sacrament be in the taber- 
nacle, he makes a genuflection on the floor, not on the 
step. (I^uh. Miss., Part ii. Tit. ii, n. 2.) 

20. Then he ascends the steps, and, having arrived in 
front of the middle of the altar,^ without making any 
bow, he places the chalice on the Gospel side. If the 
veil, being large, is turned over the burse, he will lower 
it immediately, with both hands. Then he takes the 
biirse, brings it to the middle of the altar, holds it with 
his left hand, and with his right he takes the corporal 
from it, which he lays on the altar; after which, with 
his right hand, he will place the burse at the Gospel side, 
against the gradus^ so that the aperture of it be towards 
the tabernacle, unless some figure be marked on it, requir- 
ing another position. His left hand he will keep on the 
altar.f 

21. Then with both hands he will spread out entirely 
the corporal in the middle of the altar, suflSciently, but 
not too near the edge, that neither the maniple nor the 
chasuble may disturb it.J 

22. Having spread the corporal, with his left hand he 
will take the chalice per nodum, and, putting his right 
on the chalice covered with the veil, he will place it in 
the middle of the corporal at such a distance that he may 



*Some Rubricists direct that the priest, upon arriving at the altar, 
Bhould make a bow to the cross. Neverthele.<s, neither the R.ibrics 
of the Miiisal, nor any decree of the Sacred Congregation, makes such 
a prescription. 

t As a general rule, when only one hand is employed, the other is 
kept on the altar; before the consecration and alter communion, ott 
Ihe corpora] ; from tlie consecration to the communion, on the corporal. 

t If there be an altar stone set in the table of the altar, the priest 
should be careful to tiud out its dimensions. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 9 

afterwards convenieTitly kiss tlie altar'^ without touching 
the chalice. He will he careful to extend the lower ex- 
tr-emities of tlie veil, that the chalice may not be seen. 
(S. E. C, 12th Jan., 1669.) After this, vvithout making 
any bow, having liis hands joined, he goes to the Epistle 
sidejt opens the Missal where the Mass of the day is to 
be found {liub. Miss , n. 4), and then returns with his 
hands joined to the centre of the altar, where, having 
bowed moderately to the cross, he moves a little towards 
the Gospel side, in order to avoid turning his back to 
the cross, and descends to the foot of the altar, still keep- 
ing his hands joined. {Iiuh. Miss.) 

Article Y. 
From the Commencement of the Mass to the Introit. 

23. Having arrived in front of the last step, the priest 
turns on his right to the altar, and makes a low bow to 
the cross, or, if the Blessed Sacrament is in the taber- 
nacle, he makes a genuflection on the last step, without 
making any other bow. Then standing modestly erect, 
he will commence Mass, by making on himself the si<2:n 
of the cross {^Ruh. Miss.)^ pronouncing the words dis- 
tinctly, and sufficiently loud to be heard by the faithful 
near the altar. 



*Some writers on Rnhrics are of opinion that the front part of the 
corporal should be laid over the foot of the chalice, giving as a reason, 
tliat there miglit remain on the corp,)raI some consecrated particles; 
but the Rubrics of the Missal, Part 2, Art. 2, speakinii' of the corporal, 
says, qi-iod extendlt super allare. The general practice in Rome and 
Italy is to spread it entirely. The Church supposes that every priest 
will follovv^ exactly the Rubrics prescribed, and that, consequently, no 
consecrated particles will be left on the corporal. 

t To join the hands, the palm and the fingers extended, of both 
hands, should be brought together, the thumb of the right to be 
crossed over the thumb of the left, except from the consecration till 
after the ablution. The hands, thus joineil, should not be kept either 
too near or too far from the breast, nor too much turned towards the 
face, nor towards the floor, but naturally directed upwards. The 
elbows should recline gently towards the sides. 



10 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

24. Having signed himself,* he says, in the same tone 
of voice, the antiphon, Introiho, and the psabn, Judica 
me Deus. While he sajs the Gloria Fatri^ he inclines 
his head, and stands erect at the Bicut erat. At the 
Adjutorium nostrum^ etc., he makes the sign of the cross. 

25. At the Confiteor^ he inclines profoundly, still keep- 
ing his hands joined. At the words, Vobis fratres and 

Vos fratres, he does not turn towards the server, this 
being only done at Solemn Mass. In saying mea culpa^ 
he strikes gently and unaffectedly his breast with the 
extremities of the fingers of his right hand, while he 
holds his left extended below his breast. {^Rub. Miss.) 
After the Mea maxima culjpa, he rejoins his hands, and 
remains inclined until (the server having said Misereatur 
tui, etc.) he answers, Amen, upon which he resumes his 
former attitude. 

26. The server, having terminated the Confiteor, the 
priest says, Misereatur vestri, etc.; and while he says 
Indulgentiam, etc., he makes the sign of the cross. 
{Rub. Miss.) Then, inclining moderately, he says, Deus 
tu Gonversus, etc., and remains in that attitude till 
Oremus inclusively, which he says in the same tone of 
voice, extending his hands f and immediately rejoining 
them, and standing erect, he ascends the steps slowly, 
sayirig at the same time, in a low voice, Aufer a nobis.X 

27. Having arrived in front of the altar, he inclines 
moderately, puts his hands joined on the edge of the 
altar, so that the little fingers, joined and extended, 
touch the front of it, and the other fingers, being also 

* He makes the sign of the cross by putting his left hand extended 
under his breast, then he raises his right to his forehead, and, touching 
it with the extremity of his fingers, he says, In nomine Patris ; then, 
with the same hand, touching his breast, says, Et Fdii ; touching his 
lelt and right shoulders, Ei Spiritus Sanctl j and again joining his 
hands, he says. Amen. 

fin expending the hands, the priest should not allow them to pass 
the Nvidth of his body. 

t The Missal (vvith many Rubricists) does not prescribe any eleva- 
tion of the hands in this case. The ceremonial of Bishops, however, 
enjoins it, perha; s only for Bishops; nevertheless, it would seem that 
priests cou.d also do so. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 11 

joinecl and extended, rest on the top. (In tin's manner 
the hands are to be placed, whenever the Rubric pre- 
scribes them to be joined npon the altar.) In this posi- 
tion he sajs, O ramus te^ and at the words. Quorum 
reliquicB hie sunt^ he extends his hands npon the altar, 
on either side of the corporal, and kisses the altar. "^ 
After which, standing erect, he joins his hands and turns 
towards the Epistle side, to which place he goes to com- 
mence the lutroit, without making any bow to the 
cross. 

Article YL 
From the Introit to the Epistle, 

28. Having arrived opposite to the Missal, he com- 
mences the Introit aloud, making on himself the sign of 
the cross, and then, having joined his hands, he con- 
tinues in the same tone of voice ;t as he says Gloria 
Patri, etc., he makes a simple bow to the cross, turning 
himself a little towards it, without, however, moving his 
feet. 

Should the holy name of Jesus occur during the Introit, 
he bows to the cross. If the name of Mary is men- 
tioned, or the Saint whose feast is celebrated on that 
day, he bows towards the book. After the Sicut erat, 
he repeats the Introit, but does not make the sign of the 
cross. 

29. At the end of the Introit^ lie returns to the mid- 
dle, having his hands joined ; and, facing the chalice, he 
says alternately with the server, the Kyrie, {Ruh, 
Miss.)X 



*It is to be remirkecl, that whenever the priest kisses the altar he 
does so in the middle, not on one side nor on the edge of it; and that 
lo do this properly he should neither be too near nor too far from the 
altar, lest he be awkward or aflfecteJ. Neither is it sufficient in these 
cases to put the fingers on the altar, and it is too mucli to place the 
wrists there; yet it is required to lay the hands on the altar-cloth. 

t Sufficiently loud so as to be heard by the faithful who assist near 
the altar. 

X Should tliere be no server the celebrant will recite all. 



12 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

30. After the last Kyvie^ if there are no Prophecies to 
be read, and the Gloria is to be said, he will disjoin his 
hands, and raise them as high as liis shoulders, and with- 
out raising his ej^e-, he says, Gloria in excelsis^ etc., and 
in the same tone of voice, in saying Deo^ he joins his 
hands again, making a simple bow to the cross, and 
remains in that position till the end of the Gloria. At 
the words, Ador amies te^ Gr alias aginius tiM,, Jesn 
Christe^ Suscipe dejprecationem nostram^ Jesu Christe^ he 
makes a simple bow to the cross. Whilst he says Cum 
San do Sjnritii, etc., he makes the sign of the cross on 
himself, and having said Amen^"^ he kisses the altar in 
the usual way, joining his hands afterwards. 

31. If there are Prophecies to be read, as is the case 
on the Ember days, the priest, after the Kyrie (without 
making any bow), returns to the Missal, and says Oremiis, 
etc. He reads the Prophecies in the same tone of voice, 
having both his hands either on the Missal or on the 
stand. The Prophecies being concluded, he returns to 
the middle of the altar to say the Gloria. 

32. After having kissed the altar, the priest standing 
erect, turns on his right, facing the people, and extend- 
ing his hands and rejoining them again, he says Doniinus 
vohiscum.\ ( Ituh. Miss.) 

33. Then he returns towards the Missal as before, 
extends his hands, and rejoining them he says renins, 
at the same time making a simple bow towards the 
cross; and again extending his hands not higher than, 
nor beyond his shoalders, as has been already said, he 
says the prayers. if 

*The priest is not to join his hands after making the sign of the 
cross after the Gloria, Credo and Beuedictus qui venit, S. 0. R., in 
una Marsornm, 12th Nov. 1831 (4520.) 

t Wlienever the priest says Domiiius whucum, lie does not look at 
the pi ople, nor does he raise or lower the haods, and in extending 
them, he does not bring them beyond the limits of his body, but 
simply opens them so that the palm and fingers of one hand face the 
otlier, and lejoins them again. Neither does he ben i the head towards 
the p- ople, nor does he re^t his bick against the altar. 

X The same thing is to be done whenever Oremiis is to be said, unless 
something else is pre.-cribed. Also, in pronouncing that word, care 
should be taken not to prolong the letter O, nor should it be said in 
any way affLCiedly. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 13 

34. x^.t the conclusion of tlie prayer or prayers, when 
Per Dominum nostruMi is to be said, the priest joins his 
hands and bows simply to the cross, while saying Jesum 
Christum; he remains erect, with hands joined, till the 
end of the conclusion of the prayer. If, however, the 
prayer concludes with the words. Qui vivis et regnas^ or, 
Qui tecum vivit et regnat^ without making any bow, he 
joins his hands while saying, m unitate Sjnritus Sancti. 
{Rub. Miss.) 

35. When there is more than one prayer, he says 
Oremus only at tlie commencement of the tirst and of 
the second ; so, also, the conclusion is said at the end of 
the first prayer and of the last. 

If, during the prayers, he pronounces the holy name 
of f/esiis, or of Mart/, or the Saint whose feast is cele- 
brated that day, or the name of the Pope, he makes a 
simple bow, in the first case to the cross, in the others 
towards the Missal.''"' 

Article YII. 
J^rom the Epistle to the Offertory, 

36. At the end of the prayer or prayers, the priest 
reads the Epistle in the same tone of voice, having his 
hands on the book or book-stand, in such a manner, 
however, that he touches the Missal. {Bub. Miss.) If, 
in reading the Epistle, he happens to pronounce the 
holy name o^ Jesus ^ he will bow as was said before. If 
he is to make a genuflection, as is the case when he says. 
In nomine Jesa geniojiectatur^ etc;., or, Adjuva nos Deus^ 
he bends only the right knee to the flour, placing his 
hands meanwhile on the altar. The last words of the 
Epistle he may say in a lower tone, as an indication to 
tlie serv^er that he is to answer, Deo Gratias^ but he 
should not turn his head towards him. After which, he 
reads, in the former tone of voice, the Gradual, the 
Tract, or the Sequentia, if these are to be read. 



*In the prayer, A cunctis, the Patron Saint to be named is that of 
the place in which he celebrates. 



14 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

37. This done, he goes, with his hands joined, to the 
middle of the altar, where, having raised his eyes to the 
cross, he inclines profoundly, keeping his hands joined 
between his breast and the altar, and in that attitude he 
says, Munda cor meurti. Then, Jube^ Domine^ etc. 
i^Rub Miss.) 

38. Should there be no server, the priest will move the 
Missal to the Gospel side, so that the opening of it be 
somewhat towards the middle of the altar. In moving 
the book, he makes a simple bow to the cross, and 
having adjusted it in its place, he returns to the middle 
to say the prayer above named. {Rub. Miss.) 

39. The prayer being over, standing erect, and, 
having his hands joined, he goes to the book, his face 
turned partially towards the Gospel side, and in the 
same loud tone of voice he says, Dominus vohiscuvi. Jn 
saying Sequeidia^ . or Initium Sancti Evangelii^ he dis- 
joins his hands, and, with the thumb of his right, the 
lingers extended, he makes a cross on the commence- 
ment of the Gospel he is to read, at the same time keep- 
ing his left hand extended on the Missal. {S. R. 6"., 
17th Sept., 1816.) Then he forms a cross with the same 
thumb on his forehead, his lips, and his breast, holding 
his left hand on his breast. {Ruh. Miss , n. 2.) 

40. After this, he joins his hands, and continues to 
read the Gospel in the same tone of voice. Siiould the 
holy name oi Jesus ^ or any other name at which (accord- 
ing to what has been said before) he is to bow, lie men- 
tioned, he does so towards the book. So, also, should he 
be required to make a genuflection, it is to be made 
towards the book, his hands supported on the altar. 
{Rub., lb.) The Gospel being read, he raises the Missal 
with both hands, at the same time bending a little over 
it, and kisses the commencement of the same Gospel, 
saying, in a low voice, Per Evangelica dicta, etc. 

41. When he is feo read the Passion, he makes a 
simple bow to the cross, as he goes from the Epistle side 
to the Gospel ; he reads the Passion in the same attitude 
as at the Gospel, without, however, making any sign of 
the cross. At the words, Emisit Spiriium, he kneels on 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 15 

both knees, liis hand supported upon the altar, and again 
joins bis hands, in which position he meditates for a tew 
moments on the passion of our Lord. Then, resting his 
hands on the altar, he rises, rejoins the hands, and con- 
tinues to read until where he is to say the Munda cor 
meum, which he says in the middle of the altar, in the 
same attitude prescribed above. After the Munda cor 
meum, he returns to the book, his hands being joined, 
and finishes reading the Passion ; at the end of which 
(except on Good Friday) he kisses the Missal as above, 
saying, I^er Evxngelica dicta, etc. 

42. Having kissed the Missal, he replaces it on the 
stand, and, with both hands, he places it nearer to the 
corporal, so that he may conveniently read in it there- 
after, and having rejoined his hands, he returns to the 
middle. 

43. There (if the Credo is to be said) he extends his 
hands, raises them (not higher than his shoulders) at the 
word Credo, and joins them again at the words, In 
nnnni Deum, making at the same time a simple bow to 
the cross. In this position he continues the Credo to 
the end, in the same tone of voice, except that at the 
words, JEt Incarnaius est, having placed his hands upon 
the altar, on either side of the corporal, he makes a 
genuflection on his right knee only {S. R. C, 22d 
August, 1818), in snch a manner that, by commencing it 
at the JEt Incarnaius^ he touches the floor with his knee 
at the words Et Homo f actus est ; as he makes the 
genuflection, he does not bend his head. He makes a 
bow at Jesum Christum, Simul adoratur ; whilst he says 
Et mtam, etc., he makes on himself the sign ot the cross, 
as at the end of the Gloria, 

Article YIII. 
From the Offertory to the Canon. 

44. After the Credo, if it has been said, or after having 
arranged the Missal, the priest kisses the altar; and, 
turning towards the people, he says, Dominus vohiscum. 
He turns again to the altar, and, with the usual moving 



16 CEEEMOXIES OF LOW MASS. 

of the hands and bowing of the head, he says, Oremus^ 
and, keeping his hands joined, he reads the OHertorj. 
{Buh. Miss.) 

45. At the end of the Offertory, he removes the veil 
from tlie chalice with both hands, folds it, and places it 
at the right hand, near the corporal (on \vhich he may 
afterwards place the pall, if he cIioopcs), or, without fold- 
ing it, he gives it to the server. Then, Jiaving placed 
liis left hand on the altar, near the corporal, he takes the 
chalice 7;^^ nodum with his right, and places it outside 
of the corporal."^ Then, with the same hand, he removes 
the pall from the paten, and places it on the folded veil, 
or on the corporal against the al tar-card. f Tiien, taking 
the paten, upon which the large particle is, between the 
thumb and tlie forefinger of his right hand, he brings it 
opposite to him, over and in tlie middle of the corporal, 
at the height of his breast, and there he takes it also 
with the thumb and forefinger of his left hand, in such a 
manner that the paten is supported by the named four 
fingers at equal distances from each other, and that the 
other fingers are extended and joined underneath it^ 
after this, he raises his eyes, immediately lowering them 
on the large particle, and saj's, Suscijpe^ Sancte Pater^ 
etc. {Rub. Miss.) 

46. The prayer being entirely finished, still holding 
the paten in the same manner, but nearer to the cor- 
poral, he forms a cross in straight lines of about eight 
inches in length ; then bending the paten towards the 
corporal, he causes the large particle to slide on the 
middle ot* the front part of the corporal. Then he puts 
the paten somewhat under the corporal at the right, 
placing at the same time his left hand on the altar.:j: 
{Rub.^Miss.) 



*If the chalice is not purified, he puts the pall first, where the 
chalice is to be placed. 

fit is always with the right hand that the priest uncovers and 
covers tiie chalice. 

X It is not permitted to make any marks with the paten, or anything 
else, on the luiiie bread during Mass. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 17 

If there are small particles to consecrate, either in a 
ciborium'" or on the corporal, he directs his intention to 
the offering of tliem, having previously opened the 
ciboi'ium, and drawn it nearer towards the middle. 
After saving Suscipe^ etc., he covers it, and places it in 
its former position, having previously put the paten 
under the corporal. If he should be presented with 
any small particles after coming to the altar, he puts 
them on the corporal, a little higher up than the large 
particle, at the Gospel side. 

47. Next, having joined his hands, he goes to the 
Epistle side. Thence he takes the chalice per nodum 
with the left hand, brings it before him, and, with the 
fingers of his right hand, he puts a portion of the purifi- 
cator in the cup of the chalice, and purities it, while he 
holds it with his left hand. 

48. Then, holding the chalice, with his left hand on 
the altar, he places the purificator between the cup and 
the thumb of his left hand, that it may serve to catch 
any drops, which might fall from the cruets. 

Then, with his right hand, he receives the cruet with 
wine from the server, and pours a sufficient quantity of 
it in the Chalice.f Then, having returned the cruet to 
the server, he forms with the same hand, extended, a 
cross over the cruet containing water, saying, Deus qui 
humcuKE suhstantioB. He takes the same cruet, and pours 
a little water in the chalice,:}: saying at the same time, 
Da nobis per luijus aquoe et vini mysterium {Ruh. Miss.^ 
n. 4), he returns the cruet to the server, continuing the 
prayer, taking care to make a simple bow towards the 
cross, at the holy name of Jesus. It is advisable to 

*■ According to Guvantus, Be Mensuris^ l\\e, ciborium should have 
a veil, or cover made out of ricli maierials, either of silk or silver, or 
even gold cloth, through rcsp ,'Ct for the Blessed Sacrament. 

fit 13 generally suppcjsed, that the quantity of the wine should 
cover the bottom of the chalice, or such quantity that the priest, in 
consuming it, may be able,.without effort, to talie it all at one draught 
without lowering the hand {^tno haustu). 

X The quantity of water poured in the chalice should be very small, 
three or fowr drops of it are suflBcient. (See Pope Eugenius IV^iw 
Decreto pro Armenis.) 



18 CEREMONIES OE LOW MASS. 

absorb with the purificator the drops within the chalice, 
that might have gathered around the cup. (jS. R. (7., 
7th Sept., 1816.) 

49. This done, he places the chalice sufficiently near 
the corporal with his left hand, goes to the middle of the 
altar, and laj's the purificator, folded in two, on that part 
of the paten that remains outside of the corporal. Then, 
having placed his left liand on the altar, he takes with 
his right the chalice per nodum^ carries it over the cor- 
poral, and places his left hand under the foot of it ; then, 
holding it raised, so that the top of it may not be higher 
than his eyes, he says, Offerimus tibi, Domine^ etc., 
looking at the cross the whole time of the offering. 
{Rub., ib.) 

50. After the Offerimus, the priest forms with the 
chalice a cross over the corporal, without passing over 
the particle. Then, having placed the chalice in the 
middle of the corporal, behind the particle, he covers it 
with the pall. {Rub., ib.) 

51. Then he inclines moderately, and places his joined 
hands on the edge of the altar, and says. In Sjjiritu 
humilitatis^QiQ. {Rub.,ib.) Having finished the prayer, 
standing erect, with his eyes raised to the cross, he 
extends his hands, and, having raised them as higli as 
his eyes, he joins them again, in the meantime saying, 
Veni Sanctf'Jicator, etc. Then he forms a cross with his 

right hand over the chalice and the particle together, 
saying, I^t bene ^ die hoc sacrificium tuo Sancto nornini 
prejparatum,'^ while he holds his left hand on the altar 
near the corporal. 

52. After this, he joins his hands again, and goes to 
the Epistle side, where, a little beyond the altar, he 

* When the prie:^! is to mnke a c.rn=s over the ofFcrin.2;s, the hands 
are first joined before his breast, and, in forming the cross, the left 
liand is placed on the altar, and tiie riirht should be straight, and the 
fingers united, according to the decree of the S. R. C, 24 iiJulv, 1683. 
Also, wh( ti the cross is made on tlie chalice and Host conjointly, the 
fiist line is commenced from the middle of the pall, and, without low- 
ering the hand, it is drawn over the fdo-t; and the second, or tlie 
transversal line, is drawn between the Host and the chalice, from one 
Bide of the pall to the other, or not any longer than the first line. 



CEEEMONIES 3F LOW MASS. 19 

washes the extremities of the thumbs and forefino:ers of 
liis hands, at the same time ssiy\u(^, Zavaho^ etc. Having 
washed his fingers, he turns towards the altar, meanwhile 
drying them, and concludes the Psalm. 

53. At the Gloria Patri he bows to the cross, and, 
may conchide it, going to the middle of the altar. 

Si. Having reached the middle of the altar, with liis 
hands joined, he raises his eyes to the cross, and, having 
lowered them immediately, he puts his hands, joined, on 
the edge of the altar, inclines moderately, and says, Sus~ 
cipe^ Sancta Trinitas ; at the end of which, extending 
his hands on the altar, he kisses it. 

55. Then, standing erect, and rejoining his hands, he 
turns to the people, and, extending and joining the hands, 
as at the Dominus vohlsGum, with a voice a little louder, 
he says, Orate^ Fratres ; and, having rejoined his hands, 
he turns to the altar by the Gospel side, making a com- 
plete circle, and saying, at the same time, in a low voice, 
ut meuni ao vesU'um sacrificiurny etc. {Ruh., ih.) Tiie 
server having answered Suscipiat^ etc., the priest answers, 
to himself, Ame7i. 

66. Here he extends his hands, as at the prayers, and, 
without saying Oremus, he reads the Secrets in a low 
voice. The number of these should equal that of the 
prayers said before the Epistle. If there is only one of 
them, he does not read the conclusion, but stops after 
liaving said Spiritus Sanctis Deus. If there are more 
than one, he will say the conclusion of the first, saying, 
also, Ameii ; and at the conclusion of the last Secret, he 
stops at the above-named words, which are considered as 
the commencement of the Preface. Then he turns the 
pages uf the Missal for the Preface with his left hand, 
whilst his right is laid on the altar, ofi' the corporal, 
unle?s, through necessity, he should be obliged to use 
both hands to find the Preface. 

57. Having found the place for the Preface, he lays 
both hands on the altar, and says, with a loud voice. 
Per omnia scecula sceculorum, JJoniinus vohlscum, etc. 
At the Sursuni corda, he raises his extended hands as 
high as his brea-t, so that both palms face each other. 



30 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

At the Gratias agamiis, he rejoins his hands with.>ut 
raising them anj higher. At I)eo nostra, he looks at the 
cross and bows. {Rub., ib.) 

58. When he commences Yere dignum et justum est, 
he opens his hands again, and holds them as he did 
during the prayers until he reaches the Sanctus, etc., 
whereupon he rejoins his hands, inclines moderately, 
and says, in a moderate voice, Saiictus, Sanctus, etc., 
without, however, placing his hands upon the altar. 
At the words, Benpdictus, etc., he stands erect, and 
makes on himself the sign of the cross in the usual 
manner. 

Article IX. 
From the Canon to the Consecration, 

59. After the sign of the cross, the priest raises his 
hands as high as the shoulders, and his eyes to the cross, 
lowering them immediately. Then, joining his hands, 
places them on the edge of the altar, and inclines pro- 
foundly, whilst he says, Te igitur, in a low voice. 
{Rub. Miss.) At the words, Ac petimus, he extends his 
hands upon the altar, and kisses it. Then, standing 
erect, and with joined hands, at the words, IIoeG dona, 
etc., he makes three signs of the cross on the offerings 
conjointly, saying at the lirst, hmc ^ dona, at the second, 
hcBG ^ munera, and at the third, hceo *J« sancta sacri- 
ficia illibata ; and, having extended his hands without 
joining them, he continues. In primis quoe tibi offeriniuSf 
etc. {Rub. Miss.) In pronouncing the name of the 
Fope, he makes a simple bow toward the Missal, but 
does not bow at the name of the Bishop in whose diocese 
he says Mass; or if the See is vacant, he does not say 
Papa nostro nor Antistite 7Wstro.^ {Gav., p. 2, Tit. 
viii, n. 2.) 



* The. Bishop nainef:! is Miat of the diocese in which the priest cele- 
brates, although he may not be hisB shop. In case he does uot know 
the name, it is suffi'^ent to form his intention to pray for him. In 
Rome, the vvords El antistite nostro are omitted, as the Pope is the 
Bishop of Runie. 



CEREMOl^IES OF LOW MASS. 21 

60. In saying Memento^ Domine^ he raises liis liands 
only as high as his breast or face, and joins them slowly, 
and having somewhat bent his head (it is not requisite 
to look at the large particle, it not being consecrated), 
he pra3^s in silence for a short time, making li's Memento 
for the living. Then, having extended his hands, he 
continues to read, in a low voice, Et omnium circum- 
stantium^ etc., till muniaimir auxilio. {Bub. Miss.) 

61. During Communiamtes, he makes a simple bow 
towards the book, at the name of the Blessed Yirgin, 
and towards the cross, at that of Jestcs ; he also bows 
towards the book at the name of the Saint whose Mass 
he says, or of whom he makes a commemoration. {Hub. 
Miss.) 

62., At the conclusion, Per eundem Dominum., etc., he 
joins his hands without bowing. Then, on commencing 
HauG igitur^ etc., he extends his two hands over the 
particle and chalice together, without touching the pall, 
the thumbs still crossing each other above the hands, and 
the forefingers being united. {8. E. (7., 4th Au^., 1663.) 
At the conclusion of the praj^er, he joins his hands, 
closing them without separating them previously, and 
draws them to himself before his breast, at the same 
time continuing to read, Quam oblationem, etc., till the 
words Benedictam, etc. {Rub. Miss.) 

63. Then, having placed his left hand on the altar, 
near the corporal, he makes three crosses on the ofi'er- 
ings, in the same manner spoken of in n. 56. The first, 
as he says Bene'^dictam^ the second at Ad scri^iJiam^ 
and the third (which is to be made slowly) during the 
words, raii^tam^ rationahilem^ accejptabilemque faccre 
digneris I and as he continues, he makes another cross 
on the large particle at the words, ut nobis Cor^]}us^ 
and another on the chalice whilst saying et San^guis ; 
and immediately after, raising and joining his hands 
before his breast, he continues, fiat dilectissimi Filii 
tui Domini nostri Jesu Chridi., bowing at the same 
time that he pronounces the sacred name. {Bub. Miss.) 

64. If there are particles to be consecrated, he uncov- 
ers the Clboriunij and moves it a little in advance of the 



22 CEREMOYIES OF LOW MASS. 

chalice; sliould they be iipon the corporal, and not in a 
Ciboriuni, he does not move them. 

65. After this (if need be, says the Missal) the priest 
purifies his fingers, which is done by rubbing the thumbs 
and the forefingers on the front of the corporal, while he 
says, QvA pridie quam jpateretur. He takes the large 
particle between the thumb and tlie forefinger of his 
right hand [Rub. Miss.), pressing it a little for that 
purpose with the forefinger of his left (which lie should 
do, Baldeschi says, whenever he is to take it up), and 
immediately after, taking it on the other side with the 
thumb and foreiinger of his left, extends and joins the 
other fingers together; and, standing erect, holding the 
large particle somewhat raised, above the corporal, he 
says in the meantime, accepit panem in sanctas ac ven- 
erahiles manus suas (Buh. Miss). 

QQ. In saying, Et elevatis oculis in ccblum, he raises his 
eyes to the cross, and lowers them immxcdiately. At 
Tibi gratias agens he bows, and at bene'^dixit he makes 
with his right hand a cross on the large particle ; while 
he still holds it w^ith his left, he takes it again with the 
right han<l, Gonimum^, fregit, deditque discipulis stiis, 
etc. {jRub. Miss.) 

67. In this position of the hands, having ended the 
said words, not before, he leans w^ith his elbows on the 
edge of the altar, in an unafiected manner, bends his 
head, and distinctly and reverently, without any twist- 
ing of the body or of the mouth, without at all raising 
his voice, or breathing violently on the particles, he pro- 
nounces the words of consecration, saying. Hoc est eniin 
Corpus meuni. [Rub. Miss.) 

68. After pronouncing these words, continuing to hold 
the Sacred Host in the same manner, he stands ere t drawl- 
ing his banc's a little more towards the edge of the altar, 
bends his right knee to the floor and adores the l31essed 
Sacrament in silence. {Rub. Miss.) After the genuflec- 
tion, following the Sacred Host with his eyes, he raises It 
respectfully in a perpendicular line over the corporal, a 
little higher than his head, that the people may adore It ; 
then J without stopping, he lowers It slowly towards the 



CEREMON"IES OF LOW MASS. 23 

corporal, on which he places It, with his right hand, in 
Its former position;"^ and, having placed his hands on 
the altar, the thumbs and forehngers being united, he 
makes another genuflection. 

69. After rising, he uncovers the chalice, taking the pall 
with the fore and middle fingers of his right hand (in this 
manner he covers and uncovers the chalice hereafter), 
and having purified his fingers bj rubbiug them over the 
cup of the chalice, he sajs, Simili modo loostquawx 
cm 1 latum est ; then, with both hands taking the chalice 
between the cup and the nodum^ he raises it a little over 
the corporal, and replaces it immediately, saying, in the 
meantime, accipiens et huno jpvmclaruni callceni / and 
without taking his hands ofit', he will make a bow to the 
consecrated Host, at the words, Tihi gratias agens. In 
saying, l)ene<^dixit^ he makes a cross over the chalice 
with his right hand, still holding it with his left, and 
immediately holding it with both hands, he continues, 
deditgue discipulis suis. {Rub. Miss.) 

TO. Having finished saying these words, he leans his 
elbows on the edge of the altar, and holding the chalice 
per nodum with his right hand, and supporting it at the 
foot with the last three fingers of his left, without bend- 
ing it (as some do) having his head inclined, he devoutly 
pronounces the words of consecration, JHic est enim calix^ 
etc. [Bub. Miss.) 

71. After the words of consecration, he places the 
chalice upon the altar, stands erect, and, in a low tone of 
voice, says, Hcec guotiescumgue feceritis, etc., then he 
makes a genuflection, his hands being placed on the 
altar as at the consecration of the Host, and adores the 
Precious Blood. Standing erect, he takes the chalice 
with his right hand per nodum^ and, with his left at the 

*rrom this moment until after the ablution, the thumb and the fore- 
finger of each hand are kept united, and are not separated, unless to 
touch the consecrated Host; consequently, in turning the pages of 
the JMissal, he does so with the fore and middle tingers. Neither are 
the hands placed out of, but on the corporal (as was said belbre), 
except when they rest against the edge of the altar as before, with 
the exception that the thumbs and forefingers continue to be united 
together. 



24 CEREMONIES OP LOW MASS. 

foot, and following it with his eyes, he raises it above his 
head, that the people may see it ; then he puts it back on 
the corporal, in its former position, covers it with the 
pall, holding the foot meanwhile with his left hand, and 
makes a genuflection [Bub. Miss.), paying attention in 
this, as in any other case, that the maniple may not 
touch the Host. 

Article X. 

From the Canon after the Consecration to the Pater Noster. 

72. Standing erect, and, having extended his hands as 
before, he says, in a low voice, (Jnde et memores, etc. 
{JRuh. Miss.), to the \vords de tuis donis ao datis, when 
he joins his hands. Then, having placed his left hand 
on the corporal, at the Gospel side, he makes three signs 
of the cross over the chalice and Host conjointly, saying, 
Hostiam ^ jpurarfi, Hostiam ^ sanctam, Hostiaon •!• 
immaculata'm ; then he makes one on the Host only, 
saying Panem ♦{♦ sanctum mtoe ceterncB, and one on the 
chalice alone, saying, et Calicem ^J* salutis perpetuoi ; 
after which, he extends his hands, and in that position 
he continues the Canon, in the same low tone of voice, 
saying, Siopra quce propitio, etc. 

73. After the words, immaculataQn hostiam, he inclines 
profoundly, and puts his hands joined on the edge of the 
altar, and in that attitude he saye, Supj>liGes te rogam^us 
(S. R. C, 7th Sey.)t., 1816) till ut quotquot ; and in saying, 
ex hac altaris jparticijpatione, having extended his hands 
on the corporal, he kisses the altar in the middle, being 
careful not to touch the Host. {Bicb.,ih.) Then, stand- 
ing erect, and joining his hands at the words sacrosanc- 
tum. ^ilii tui, he places his left hand on the corporal, 
making with the other a cross on the Host at the \vord, 
Cor^jpiiS, and another immediately after, on the chalice 
alone, at the woy^q, Sawi^guinem sum^pserimus ; then, 
having placed his left hand under his breast, so that the 
thumb and forefinger do not touch the chasuble, he 
makes with his right hand a sign of the cross on himself, 
saying omni henedictione coelesti, et gratia repleamur ; 



CEREMON^IES OF LOW MASS. 25 

anrl iinmediately after, he joins his hands before his 
breast, while saying, Per eundem Christiom Dominuin^ 
etc. {^Riib. Ifiss.) 

74. In saying. Memento, Domine, etc., he extends and 
closes his hands slowly, so that they be joined at the in 
somno jpacis. Then, thus joined, he raises them as high 
as his chin, without touching it, and somewhat lowers his 
head, and, his eyes being fixed on the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, he makes the Memento of the dead for whom he 
desires to pray. 

75. After the Memento, he raises his head ; and, having 
extended his hands as before, he continues, Ipsis Domine, 
etc. At Per eundem Christum, he again joins his hands; 
and, in this particular case, although the holy Name is 
not mentioned, he makes a simple bow. [Rub. Miss.) 

76. Then, having raised his head, and placed his left 
hand on the corporal, with the last three fingers of his 
right he strikes his breast, saying, in a moderate voice, 
.Nobis quoque peccatoi'ibus ;^ then extending his hands, 
lie continues in the low tone famuUs tuis. [Pub. Miss,) 
>Should the name of the Saint, whose feast he celebrates, 
o?cur in this prayer, lie will bow* on reading it.f 

77. At Per Christum Dominum nostrum he joins his 
hands as usual, without saying Amen ; continuing with 
joined hands, Per qicem, etc., to ere is, after which he 
places his lefc hand on the corporal, and with his right 
he forms three crosses on the chalice and Host conjointly ; 
the first at sanctii^fioas, the second at vivi^ficas, and 
the third at bene^dicis et proestas nobis. 

78. Then holding the foot of the chalice with his left 
hand, he uncovers it with his right, and having placed 
his hands on the corporal, he makes a genuflection. 
Standing erect, he takes the Host at the lower part, with 
the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, and having 

*Ia this ca^e, as well as at tlie Agnus Z)gi, and Djinlne non sum 
dignus, when ai^ain he is to strike his br ast, he should take care that 
the thumb and the ton-finirer shall neither separate, no- touch thj 
chasuble. {JDuranduii, Lib. IV, cap. 46.) 

fThe Sic. Conij. Kit. lia>! decid-d the St. John, here mentioned, 13 
St. John, the B ipnst. (Mar. 27, 1824.) 



26 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

brought It over the chalice, he forms with the Host, within 
the cup, and without touching It, three crosses, holding, 
at the same time, with his left hand the chalice ])eT 
nodurn^ saying. Per ip^suTR^ et cum ip^so^ et in ip^so / 
and immediately bringing the Sacred Rost out of the 
chalice, but still with his left holdinor the chalice, he 
makes two more crosses at the words, Est tihi Deo Patri 
i^omnipotenti^ in unitate Spiritus-i^Sancti (These 
crosses are formed between the chalice and himself.) 
Then bringing the Host over the chalice, and leaning 
the thumb and the foreiinger on the edge of the cup, he 
raises the chalice a little with his left hand, at the same 
time saying, Omnis honor et gloria. Then having re- 
placed the chalice and the Host in their respective 
places, he lightly rubs his fingers over the chalice, which 
he covers immediately after with the pall, at the same 
time holding the chalice with his left hand. After which 
having placed his hands extended on the corporal, he 
makes a genuflection. 

Artici.e XL 
From the Pater Noster to the Communion, 

79. The priest having risen, with his hands still on the 
corporal, says aloud. Per omnia soBCula sceculorum. The 
server having answered Am^en^ the priest joins his hands 
as usual, and says, Oremus^ at the same time bending his 
head somewhat to the Blessed Sacrament. Having 
raised his head, he continues, with hands joined, the 
prayer till Pater Noster^ when, having extended his 
hands before his breast, he continues it to the end, at the 
same time keeping his eyes fixed on the Blessed Sacra- 
ment. {Rub. Miss.) 

80. Tlie server having answered Sed libera nos a malo, 
the priest says in a low tone. Amen. Then he takes the 
puriticator in his right hand, and cleans or wipes the 
paten drawn from under the corporal ; afterwards he 
places the purificator at some distance from the corporal 
at the Epistle side. During this action his left hand is 
held on the corporal. Then, having taken the paten 



CEREMON-IES OF LOW MASS. 27 

between tlie fore and middle fingers, he holds it upright, 
its ed^ra resting near the corporal, and the concave ],)art 
towards the Sacred Hoct, at the same time saying, Libera 
710S, etc. [jRuh Miss.) In pronouncing Jfarice he bows 
to the book. 

81. In saying, Petro et Paulo^ he places his left hand 
under his breast, and with his right, holding the paten, 
lie makes with it the sign of the cross on himself, at the 
same time that he says, Da propitius pacem in dlehus 
nostris. After the sign of the cross he kisses the paten, 
not in the middle, but on the border [S. B. C.^ 24:th 
July, 1683), where it is not to touch the Sacred Host. 
Then, as he continues, saying, ttt ojpe ^nisericordim tuce^ 
he places the paten under the Host, using to that effect 
the forefinger of the left hand. [Buh,^ ib.) Then, in 
the nsual manner, he uncovers the chalice, and makes a 
gennflection. Having risen, he takes the Host with the 
thumb and forefinger of his right hand, raises It over the 
chalice, and with the help of the thumb and forefinger 
of his left hand carefully and reverently breaks It in the 
middle, commencing from the upper part, and saying in 
the meantime, Per eundein Dominiim Nostrum Jesu7n 
Christu7n I^ ilium tuum.^ Having divided the Host, he 
places the portion remaining in liis right hand on the 
paten, still holding the other half over the chalice; then 
with the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, he breaks 
a small piece from the lower part of the second half, at 
the same time saying. Qui tecuin mmt et regnat ; and 
holding the small piece over the chalice, he places the 
portion that is in his left hand on the paten, near the 
other half, saying. In unitate Spiritus Sancti Deus. 
Then, with his left hand taking the chalice j96r nodum^ 
he says in a loud voice. Per omnia smoula saiculorum. 
Aineii being answered, he makes three crosses within the 
cup of the chalice with the small piece of the Host, 

* To break It properly, It should be gently bent in and out two or 
three times, commencing at the top, then in the middle, and lastly at 
the end; and r turning to the middle, bent again carefully, till It 
separates. In this manner there is less danger of causing small 
panicles to break off. 



28 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

sa}irjg, Pax iH^ Domini sit ^semper vohis^cwin. In 
foniiiiip; these crosses he should not allow the Particle to 
touch the chalice. The server having answered, Etcum 
sjpirUxi tuo^ the priest lets the Particle fall into the 
chalice, at the same time saying in a low voice, Hcbg 
commixtlo^ etc. Then having purified his fi.ngers as 
usual, within the cup of the chalice, he covers it, hold- 
ing his left hand on the foot of the chalice, after which 
he makes a genu iiect ion. 

82. Having risen, he inclines moderately before the 
Blessed Sacrament, his hands being joined between his 
breast and the altar; and, in a loud voice, he says, Agnus 
Dei qui tollis jpeccata miindi ; and, having placed his 
left hand on the corporal, he strikes his hreast with the 
three fingers of his right hand that have not touched 
the Sacred Host, at the same time saying, miserere nobis. 
In the same manner (without joining the hands), he 
strikes his breast again at the second miserere nobis, and 
at the dona nobis pacem. (Bub. Miss.) Then, having 
joined his hands, and placed them as usual on the edge 
of the altar, but not on the corporal, according to the 
decree of the Sacred Congregation (7th Sept., 1816), he 
says, in a low voice, the three prayers prescribed before 
Communion, his eyes being fixed at the same time on 
the Sacred Host. [Eub. Miss.) 

83. Having said the prayers, the priest makes a genu- 
flection, saying, as he rises, Panem codestem accipiam., 
et nomen Domini invocabo. [Pub. Miss ) Then, with 
his right hand he takes both parts of the Host at the 
upper ends, from the paten, and places them between 
the forefinger and the thumb of his left hand, in such a 
manner that the Host preserves its round appearance as 
much as possible. After this, he takes the paten between 
the index and middle finger of the left hand, and holds it 
between himself and the chalice, a little above the corpo- 
ral, and under the Host, and being somewhat inclined 
towards the middle of the altar, without renting the 
left elbow on it, he says three times, in a moderate voice, 
Domine^ non smn dignus, etc., slightly striking his brea&t 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 29 

witli the last three finojers of his right hand as many 
times. Then he continues, in a low voice, ui intres^ etc. 
(Euh. Ifiss., n. 4.)^ 

8-J:. Standing erect, he pLaces one part of the Sacred 
Host on the other; then, with tlie thumb and forefinger 
of his right hand, having taken both parts of the Host, 
th.iis joined at the bottom, lie forms a perpendicular 
cross, at the same time holding the paten under It. He 
does not raise the Host so high as to allow the people to 
see It, nor does he pass the limits of the paten in draw- 
ing the transverse line ; while he forms the cross, he says, 
Corpus Domini No4ri Jesu Christi (inclining at the 
word Jesu) custodiat anima^m meam in vitam CEternam,. 
Amen. (^Buh.^ ib.) After this, he inclines moderately, 
rests his elbows on the edge of the altar; and, thus in- 
clined, and holding the paten under the Host, he rever- 
ently receives the Sacred Body.f Should the Host ad- 
here to the palate, he must use his tongue, not his fingers 
to loosen It. 

85. Having received the Sacred Host, the priest stands 
erect, lays the paten on the corporal near the edge of the 
altar, and joins his 'hands, which he raises toward his 
chin, without touching it, and, his head being a little 
inclined, he meditates for a few moments. {J^ab., ih.) 

86 After a short meditation, he lays the left hand on 
the foot of the chalice, and, with the right, takes the 
pall from the chalice, saying, in a low voice. Quid retri- 
l)uarfh Domino pro omnihus gucB retrihuit mihif and 
makes a genuflection. Then, having taken the paten 
between the first and the second fingers of the right 
hand, and holding it inclined, he passes it gently several 
times from right to left over the corporal, to gather the 

* To give himself time to pronounce these words, the priest may- 
lay his right hand on the corporal, immediately after striking the 
bie'ist, or he may move the hand slowly as he pronounces the words. 
{Bal'iesclii.) 

t Rubricians differ in describing the method of communicating. It 
would be extremely diflBcult to reduce to practice what some of Ihera 
prescribe on the sabject. It is sufficient to say, that such an action is 
to be done with a-^ much respect and reverence, and, at the pame time, 
as unatiectedly, as possible. 



30 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

frafriTients that miglit liave fallen on it, for tliat purpose, 
raising, with his left hand, the extremitj of the corporal. 
{Euh., ib.) 

87. Having gathered the fragments, he brings the 
paten over the chalice, and, holding it there, sutHciently 
inclined, he takes it between the first and second fingers 
of his left hand, as near as lie can to the place where he 
held it with his right hand ; then, with the thumb and 
forefinger of his right, ruhs the paten from top to bottom, 
so as to bring all the fragments into the chalice ; then 
rubs the same thumb and forefinger together in the 
middle of the chalice-cup, in order to remove any parti- 
cle that may have remained on them. (Btib., ib.) Here 
the priest places his left hand (still holding the paten) on 
the corporal, and with the three free fingers of liis right, 
he takes the chalice under the nodus^ saying, CaUcem 
salutaris^ etc., till salvits ero^ inclusively. Then he 
raises the chalice' until the top of it reaches as high as 
his forehead, and with it he forms a perpendicular cross, 
in the same manner as he did with the Sacred Host, 
saying, at the same time. Sanguis Domini Nostri^ etc., 
bowing at the word Jesu. {Rub.^ ib.) He then raises 
the paten nnder his chin, and brings the chalice to his 
mouth to take the Precious Blood, which he does uno 
vel duiplici haustu^ together with the Particle previously 
placed in the chalice. It is well to remark, that it is 
more becoming to hold the chalice steady to the mouth 
than to move it ofiT and replace it again w4iile the priest 
consumes the Precious Blood. 

88. Having received the Precious Blood, or after the 
communion of the people,"''" the priest having placed on 

* Attention should be paid to renew frequently the Sacred Species 
preserved in the Ciborium. St. Charles B.)rronieo ordained tliat they 
should be renewed every eighth day. The Sacred Congregation (3d 
Sept., 1662) prescribed the same thing. "In renovations qtia3 qnoli- 
bct octavo die fieri debet de Anguslissimo Sacranienio," etc. Clement 
VIII (Const Sanctissimus, 3i Maii, 1595) sa>s, that the Sacred Species 
stionld be renewed at least every fifteen days, and more fieqnently in 
damp places. " Hostiae consecrates post quindecim dies ad t^ummuni 
(quod in locis humidis, praeseriim pUivioso aut hiemali tempore, fre- 
quentius fieri debet), una cum miuutissimis fragmenlorum pariiculis, 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 31 

the corporal his left hand liolding tlie paten, presents 
the chalice to the server, in order to receive wine for the 
purification, and at the same time he sajs, Quod ore 
samjjsifaus^ etc. Then he takes the wine, holdincr the 
paten under his chin, as he did in consumin<i: the Preci- 
ous Blood. If the Sacred Particle should adhere to the 
chalice, it inay be brought near the mouth of the same, 
with the fingci', or taken with the first puiification. 

89. After receiving the purification, he puts the chalice 
and the paten on the corporal, so that the chalice be in 
the middle, and the paten a little towards the Gospel 
side ; then taking the chalice below the cup with the last 
three fingers of both hands, he puts the tliumbs and fore- 
fingers, still joined, over the cup of the chalice, and in 
this manner he carries the chalice to the Epistle side, 
where, holding it a little raised above the altar, the 
server pours on the fingers wine and water, while the 
priest says, Corpus taum Domine^ etc. It is well to re- 
mark that the Pul)ric says, ahluit polUces et indices^ 
therefore the priest not only washes the extremities of 
the fingers, but the fingers, by rubbing them against each 
other, as the server pours wine and water on them. 
Then holding the chalice in the same manner, he carries 
it near the purificator, where he places it; and still keep- 
ing the thumb and forefinger of the left hand on the cup, 
he takes the purificator with his right, and places it on 
the fingers of his left, and as he goes to the middle of 
the altar he dries his forefingers with the purificator. 

qnae in ciborio rem mserunt, a saceivJcte consumpntnr, et in ip<iim 
I ihoriiim, MiU pyxi'lem ab iilis Iragmetitij- et pirticulis inuudatrttn, 
novae Imstiae coiibtciatae ipponantnr ; nee unquam iliee recentes cnni 
hijj veUis'ioribns misceHntur." The same tnuig is to be oboerved re- 
garding the Sacred fl >sL vvliicli is liept lor Benediction, 

*From a letter (if Pins V, Stli Jannar\% 1571, quoted bv Benedict 
XIV {de Sac'if. Miks., lib. 2, cli. 21), we gather tliat the quantity ot 
wine poured in Llie ch ilice tor the p iriiicalion should at least be equal 
to tliat consecrated ; also that the purification should be received at 
that pan of tiie chalice wh< re the Precious Blood was laken. Should, 
however, the wine tor the purificit;on liappen to be less, it will sutUce 
to move the chalice gently, so that it may touch the parts where the 
Blessed Sacrament reached. 



32 CEREMOiflES OF LOW MASS. 

90. Having reached the middle of the altar, he places 
the puriticator between the thumb and the forefinger, so 
as to cover the fingers of the left hand, and v/ith his right 
he takes the chpAiceper 7iodu?n, and takes tlie last ablu- 
tion, at the same time holding the purificator under his 
chin. Then he puts the chalice in the middle of the 
corporal, wipes his lips gently with the purificator, and 
witli the same in his right hand wipes the interior of the 
cnp of the chalice, holding it by the nodus with his left. 

91. Lastly, the chalice being dried, he places it at the 
Gospel side (bat not on the corporal); he extends the 
puriiicator over the cap as before, and places on it the 
paten and the pall. Having folded the corporal with 
both hands, and taken the burse with his right hand, he 
puts the corporal in it, which he lays on the middle of 
the altar. Then he covers the chalice with the veil, on 
which he places the bur?e, and taking the chalice with 
both hands, he pats it in the middle of the altar, and 
adjusts the veil in front as at the commencement of Mass. 
{Bub., ib. ; and Sao. Con., 5th March, 1698.) Then he 
joins his hands and goes to the Epistle side, to which the 
server should have removed the Missal.* 

Article XII. 
From the Commu7iion until the End of Mass. 

92. Having arrived at the Epistle side, the priest, with 
his hands still joined, reads the Communion in a low 
voice; then he returns to the middle of the altar, kisses 
it, turns to the people and says in a loud voice, Doininus 
vohiscum He rejoins his hands, returns to the Missal, 
and reads the prayer (or prayers) in the same manner 
and order in which he had previously read at the com- 
mencement of Mass. 



* The Sacred Congregation, consulted by the Bishop of Pay : " Aq 
in Missis privatis, perniitti posf-'it ministro si fucrit sacerdos, vel Dia- 
conus, vel Siibdiaconus, ut prseparet calicem, et ipsum extergat in 
fine post oblationes sicut in Missa solemni ? " Answered : " Negative, 
et perventur Rubricse." (7th Sept., 1816, no. 4526, ad 12.) 

The above refers to priva e Masses of piiesls. 



CEREMO^^IES OP LOW MASS. 33 

93. At the end of the last prayer (unless there is a 
proper Gospel to be read), the priest closes the book in 
such a manner that the leaves be turned towards the 
chalice. 

94. Then he goes to the middle of the altar, kisses it, 
and turning towards the people, he says, Daminus vohis- 
cum ; and having rejoined his hands, he says, Ite Missa 
est^ or if the season or particular Mass requires it, he 
says, Benedicaraus Domino. And in this case he says it 
turned towards the altar. 

95. Having said Ite Missa est^ he turns to the altar, 
inclines moderately with his hands joined on the edge of 
the altar, and says in a low voice, Placeat tibi Sancta 
Trinitas. [Rub. Miss.) 

96. Then he kisses the altar, and having risen, he 
raises his eyes, extending his hands (which he has 
elevated as high as his shoulders), and then joining them 
again before his breast, he says, Benedicat vos ornnipo- 
tens Deus ; at this last word he inclines his head and 
turns by the Epistle side towards the people, having his 
hands joined and his eyes modestly lowered. Then 
having placed his left hand extended below his breast, 
lie blesses the people with his right hand, by forming a 
cross and saying in a loud voice. Pater- et Filius^ et 
Sjjiritus Saiictus. 

To give the blessing properly and unaffectedly, he 
extends his right hand, having all the fingers united, and 
the little linger turned towards the people; then without 
haste drawing a straight line from his ejes to his breast, 
he says, Pater et Filius ; he raises his hand vertically to 
his shoulders, and crosses the first line transversely from 
left to right, saying, Pt Spiritus Sanctus. Then he 
rejoins his hands, and turns towards the Gospel side to 
the altar corner to say the Gospel of St. John. 

97. The last Gospel is read in the same tone of voice, 
and with the same ceremonies as the first Gospel, except 
that, when the Gospel of St. John is read, in saying 
Initium Sancti Evangelii^ the priest forms the cross on 
the altar, or on the card instead of the book. At the Et 
Verhum cai'o factum est^ he makes a genuflection, having 



34. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

the hands extended, and laid on the altar. He also 
makes a genuflection, if on reading other Gospels there 
are words requiring it, as is the case on the feast of the 
Epiphany. 

98. The Gospel being ended, the priest goes, with his 
hands joined, to the middle of the altar, takes the chalice 
by the nodus with his left hand, puts his right on the burse, 
and, turning on his right, he descends to the foot of the 
altar, where he makes a profound bow, or a genuflection 
on the floor, if the Blessed Sacrament be in the taber- 
nacle. Having risen, he takes the cap presented to him 
by the server. As he leaves the altar, he says the 
anthem Trkcm Puerorum^ — the whole of it when the 
Mass is of double rite, or only commences it, when the 
Mass is semidouble, to which, in Paschal time, he adds 
Alleluja. Then he says the Benedicite^ [Buh. Miss.)* 

99. On arriving in the sacristy, he m.akes a low bow 
to the cross or other image ; then he places the chalice on 
the sacristy table, or press, takes ofl' his cap and unrobes. 
In taking ofl* the vestments, he observes the contrary 
order from that observed in vestins:; for in removing 
the alb, he draws ofl" the left sleeve first, then passes the 
alb over his head, and, lastly, draws ofl" the right sleeve. 
He kisses the cross on the stole, maniple, and amice, as 
he did when vesting. 

100. Finally, having washed his hands (a praiseworthy 
practice, not ordered by the Rubric, but recommended 
by most Rubricists), without speaking to any person, he 
goes to make his thanksgiving. If he vested at the 
altar, he unvests there also, at the Gospel side, as soon 
as he has read the Gospel, without previously returning 
to the middle of the altar. 

Aeticle XIII. 
On Votive Masses, 

101. Ry a Votive Mass, is generally understood one 
which does not conform to the oflice of the day. 

Yotive Masses are of tw^o classes : Solenm and Private. 

*lf the sacristy is bebind the altar, the priest enters the sanctuary at 
the Epistle side and leaves at the end of Mass at the Gospel side. 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 35 

102. A solemn votive Mass is one which is said ^^ro 
re gravis vel pro puhlica EcclesicB causa. The S. C. R. 
having been asked to dechire the significance of these 
words, replied as follows (May 19, 1607, in Placentina): 
In omnibus casihus propositis potest did res gravis 
guando ah Episcopo et Universo Clero et Civitate Missa 
votiva solemniter celebretur cum interventu Magistratus 
etpopuli. 

The cases proposed to the S. C. R. were : propter 
plumam lyretendam^ pro serenitate^ pro guacumgue neces- 
sitate^ pro Principe infirrtio^ et sirmlibus. 

103. A solemn votive Mass can be said on any day 
except doubles of the first class, Sunday of the first class, 
Ash Wednesday, during Holy Week, and on the vigils 
of Christmas and Pentecost. (8. 0. R. Mar. 27, 1779.) 

104. A private votive Mass may be said on any day 
on which a low Mass for the dead is allowed. 

More latitude is accorded by the Church with regard 
to the Mass j?r6> sponso et sponsa^ which can be said any 
day except Sundays and feasts of precept, doubles of 
fi.r3t and second class, during the octaves of Epiphany, 
the vigil of Pentecost and during the octave, the octave 
of Corpus Christi, and days which exclude doubles of the 
second class. Neither the Gloria nor Credo is said ; 
three prayers are said, the iirst of the Mass and the 
second and third of the day as prescribed in Ruh. Miss, 
tit. VII de commem. No. 3. jBenedicanius Domino is 
said, and at the end of Mass the Gospel of St. John. 
{^Dec. Gen., 2S?;A Feb., 1818.) 

On days which do not allow the Mass pro sponso et 
sponsa, the Mass of the day is said w^ith the commemora- 
tion of the nuptial Mass, non sub unica conclusione sed 
post omnes commemorationes a liubrica prmscriptas. 
{April 20, 1822, and General Decree, Dec. 20, 1783.) 
The Sacred Congregation has also decreed {Mar. 3, 1761, 
in Aguen ad 4) ; Si mulier est vidu t, no7i solum debet 
oinitti henedictio nuptiarum sed etiain Missa p^ropria pro 
sponso et sponsa. 

105. In a solemn votive Mass one prayer only is said, 
but in the ^[ass jrro gratiaruui actione (which is that de 



36 ceiiemo:n"ies of low mass. 

SSma Trinitate, vel de S.Sancto^ vet de B. Maria Yirglne) 
the prayer, Deus^ cujus misericordiae is added suh una con- 
clusione. When the conventual Mass (the Mass which is 
sung each day in cathedral and collegiate churches is so 
called) is not celebrated, if the solemn votive Mass take 
its place, the commemoration of the day is added. 

In a solemn votive Mass, j?r<9 re gram ov pro publica 
EcclesicB Causa the Gloria is said, unless the Mass be 
celebrated in purple vestments. {Rub. Miss.^ tit. YIII^ 
No. 4). The Credo is said in such Masses, even though 
the Mass be said on Sunday and in violet vestments. 
[Ruh. Miss. tit. XI de Symbols.) 

The proper Preface (if there be one) is said ; other- 
wise the Preface de tempore^ of the octave, or the com- 
mon. The Gospel of St. John is said at the end of Ma-s. 

106. In private votive Masses, including nuptial ones, 
three prayers are said ; the first of the Mass, the second 
of the day and the third the one which would have been 
said in the second place in the Mass of the day. In 
votive Masses of the E. Y. M., however, the third prayer 
is that de Spiritu Sancto ; on Saturdays when the office is 
de B. Y. M., the second prayer is de Spiritu Sancto and 
the third Ecclesim vel pro Papa. In votive Masses of 
the Apostles when the third prayer would be a cunctis^ 
in its place is said the prayer Concede nos ; and in any 
case if there is a commemoration of a simple, the third 
prayer prescribed above is not said, but in its place the 
commemoration of the simple. In votive Masses of the 
13. Y. M. on Saturday, when her office is said the com- 
memoration of the simple is put in the second place and 
the third prayer is de Spiritu Sancto. The Gloria is 
never said unless in Masses B. Y. M. on Saturday, and 
in Masses de Angelis. The Credo is always omitted. 
The Preface is as in solemn votive Masses. The Gospel of 
St. John is said at the end. The vestments are of the 
color prescribed for the Mass which is said. 

107. The S. G. P., by order of Pope Paul Y, has de- 
clared that certain Masses cannot be said as votive ones, 
in which the prayers, etc, have regard to certain fixed 
days; as for example, the Masses of Christmas, Circum- 



CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 37 

cision, Epiphany, Easter, Ascension, the Nativity, Puri- 
fication and Assumption of the Blessed Virgin, the feast 
of St. John the Baptist and others having proper introits 
or collects. Tliese Masses can only be said on the day 
assi2;ned to them or during their octaves. 

Votive Masses of other festivals not having this objec- 
tion, may be used, yet it would be better that priests 
should only say those Masses which are classed as Votive 
in the Missal. 

108. A priest, who on Saturday, witliin the octave of 
some feast of the B. V. M. has recited the office of a 
saint occurring on that day, desirous of saying a votive 
Mass of the B. V. M., must say the Mass of the feast of 
the B. V. M. (Dec. 1, 1684). This Mass is said with 
Gloria but without Credo. Jf a priest have the office of 
double rite and celebrates Mass in a church where a 
semidouble occurs, he cannot say a votive Mass. (Sept. 
7, 1816.)^ 

109. The three Masses which a newly ordained priest 
is directed to say must be said on days when the Rubrics 
permit. For a reasonable cause their celebration may 
be delayed. The quality of the Mass and not the appli- 
cation is prescribed, hence the priest may apply them 
for whomsoever he pleases. (St. Alphonsus, lib. iv, Tract 
5, deOrd. §829.) 

110. Requiem Masses maybe classed among votive in- 
somuch as they do not conform to the office of the day, 
but the Missal distinguishes between the two : ''''Extra 
ordinein Officii^ potest esse votiva vel defunctorumy 

Requiem Masses cannot be said at an altar where the 
Blessed Sacram nt is exposed, nor in a church where It 
is exposed (21 June, 1670 ; 12 Sept. 1671.) If the expo- 
sition, however, h not pro re gram., a requiem Mass can be 
said at another altar in a church where the Blessed 
Sacrament is exposed (n 4181 ad 9 die 7 Mali, 1716). Jf 
the Blessed Sacrament is exposed for the Forty Hours' 
iJevotion on All Soul's day, it is allowed to celebrate 
solemn and even private Masses of the dead. (n. 4177 
ad. 1 die 16 Sept. 1801.) 

111. Rrqiiiein Masses, both private and soleiim (the 



38 CEREMOKIES OF LOW MASS. 

body not being present) are forbidden on all doubles ] 
Sundays; the vigils of Christmas, Epiphany and Penti- 
cost; within the octaves of Christmas, Epiphany, Easter, 
Pentecost and Corpus Christi; Ash Wednesday and Holy 
Week. 

112. Solemn Reqniem Masses, even thon^li the body 
be present, are not allowed on doubles of the first class 
which are feasts of precept. 

The S. C. K. has declared {die 23, Man, 1835 in Na- 
muTcen) that such Masses, the body being present, are 
also prohibited on the suppressed festivals. 

If the body has been already buried. Solemn Masses 
are forbidden on doubles of the first and second class 
and feasts of precept. 

In those places where only one Mass is said on Sun- 
days and feast days, even though the body is present, a 
Kequiem Mass cannot be sung in place of the usual 
Mass; but the Mass of the day must be sung, and the 
liequiem Mass may be said on the first day on which it 
is allowed, {n. 4148 ad. 7, 2G Jan. 1793.) 

A Solemn Requiem Mass, the body being present, can 
be said on doubles of the first class which are not of 
precept, unless the feast be that of the titular of the 
church. {Ajpril 8, 1808.) 

Solemn Masses of Requiem, then, the body being 
present, can not be said on the following days: Easter, 
Pentecost, Christmas, Epiphany, Ascension, Corpus 
Christi, Assumption and Immaculate Conception B.Y.M., 
Nativity of St. John the Baptist, SS. Peter and Paul, 
All Saints, the titular saint of the church, the principal 
patron saint of the place, the last three days of Holy 
Week, and when there is Exposition of the Blessed 
Sacrament ^ro re gravi. 

113. On the day of the death or burial of a person, 
tliough the body is not present, a solemn Mass of 
Requiem may be said on greater and less doubles, not of 
precept, on Ash Wednesday, Monda}^, Tuesday and 
VVednesday of Holy Week, and the vigils of Christmas 
and Pentecost. Before the burial of the body a solemn 
Mass may be said. — the body being present — on Sundays 



CEREMOiflES OF LOW MASS. 39 

and feasts of precept and doubles of the second class. 
In which case a catafalque should be erected in church 
with some symbol or mark that the body is not yet 
buried. (25 April^ 1781, in Florentina^ 

114. On the third, seventh and thirtieth day from the 
death or burial a Requiem Mass may be sung on any day 
except Sundays and feasts of precept, doubles of the 
lirst and second class, the eves of Christmas and Pente- 
cost, within the octaves of Christmas, Epiphany, Easter, 
Pentecost and Corpus Christi, Ash Wednesday and Holy 
Week. The same rule holds with regard to anniversary 
Masses. 

115. We may add under this heading a few particu- 
lars with regard to the Mass which a priest ought to say 
in a church when a different ollice occurs. 

As a general rule, the Mass should conform to the 
office of the day, but this cannot always be followed. 
Hence, a priest saying Mass in a church where the office 
is different, should accordins; to circumstances either 
follow his own Ordo or conform to that of the church in 
which he celebrates. 

116. If the office of the church does not allow votive 
and requiem Masses, all the Masses should conform to 
the color of the office. [S. C. E. Sept. 4, 1845.) An 
exc^eption is made in favor of privileged requiem Masses, 
nuptial Masses and votive Masses, which the priest 
mi^ht be privileged to celebrate on forbidden days. A 
priest, who in virtue of a special permission, says the 
Mass of the Blessed Virgin every day, should use white 
vestments 

117. If he say Mass in a church, where a festival is 
celebrated solemnly and with concourse of people, for 
instance, on tlie feast of its patron or on the day of its 
dedication, he ought to conform to the rite and to the 
color of this church. He would even do better to say 
the Mass of such church, without taking any notice of 
his own office, unless on a Sunday or a privileged feria, 
a commemoration of which is never omitted. If he 
celebrate High Ma?s, on a day of obligation, or even 
on a day when devotion attracts a concourse of 



40 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

people, he is obliged to follow, exclusively, the 
rite of the Church where he is, without paying any atten- 
tion to the office he has recited. 

118. If he go, through devotion, to say Mass in a 
church, where the festival of a saint is solemnly cele- 
brated, he can say the proper Mass, if it have been 
granted to the whole Church ; or, if not, he can say the 
common. This has been decided, with some exceptions, 
by many decrees of the Congregation of Sacred Kites.* 

119. On other days, not celebrated with such solem- 
nity, if the color be the same as that of his own church, 
he can say Mass conformably to his office. 

If his own office be of double rite, he cannot say a 
votive Mass, altliough the office of the place be compati- 
ble with it; nor a requiein Mass, unless there be in the 
same church, on that day, solemn Exequies for the dead.f 



CHAPTEE 11. 

ORDER TO BE OBSERVED IN CELEBRATING TWO MASSES 
CN THE SAME DAY. 

1. When a priest is authorized to say two Masses 
(which can only be done on Sundays and feasts of obli- 
gation), in order to afibrd an opportunity for a consider- 
able number of people to comply with the precept of 
assisting at the Holy Sacrifice, he may be much per- 
plexed as to how he should act with regard to the chalice 
and the ablution of the fingers, especially if he has to 
say the second Mass in another church, and at some 
distance. The Sacred Congregation of Rites, in an 

* See Traite. des SS. MysUres, ch. 12, d. 5. 

t All these rules have been extracted from several decrees of th( 
Congrecration of Rites; llth June, 1701; 4th Sept., 1745; 7(li Mav 
1746; 29th Jan., 1752; n. 3437, ad 2, et 8 ; 402G, ad 8: 4032, ad 13 
4074, ad 10, et 11. See also Komsee, torn, i, art. 5, and torn, v, u. 39 



CELEBRATIXQ TWO MASSES ON" THE SAME DAY. 41 

instruction approved by Pope Pins IX the 11th day of 
March, 1S5S, prescribes that when a priest is obliged to 
celebrate Mass in two different churches on the same 
day, he should, in consuming the Precious Blood (during 
the first Mass), use the utmost diligence to take the 
whole of It. Then he places the chalice on the corporal, 
covers it ^vith the pall, and with his hands joined, stand- 
ing in the middle of the altar, he says. Quod ore sumjpsi- 
971US. After which, drawing towards him the little w^ater 
vase, he ^vashes his fingers, saying at the same time. 
Corpus tuu?n Do?n{?ie, etc., and then wipes them. The 
chalice being still on the corporal, removing the ])all, he 
l)laces on the chalice the parificator, then the paten, the pall, 
and lastly the veil. He then continuestheMass, and having 
finished reading the last Gospel, goes to the middle of 
the altar, where, uncovering the chalice, he examines 
whether any of the Precious Blood has collected at the 
bottom, which often happens, for although the Sacred 
Species were at first carefully consumed, nevertheless, in 
the very act of consuming, drops are spread around the 
jmrface, and will not collect at the bottom, until the 
chalice is again in its position for awhile. If, then, there 
still remains a drop of the Divine Blood, he will care- 
fully take It from the same side of the chalice, from 
which he had consumed It. He should by all means do 
so, as the sacrifice still morally lasts, and by divine pre- 
cept is to be completed by the consummation of the spe- 
cies still existing. After this, the priest will pour into 
the chalice at least as much water as he had before 
poured wine, and by gently moving the chalice cause the 
water to pass around, and then empty it in the vessel 
used for that purpose by the same side of the chalice 
from which he received the Precious Blood. Then,w^iping 
the chalice with the puriticator, he covers it as usual, 
and leaves the altar. 

2. The priest having unvested and made his thanks- 
giving, if he is to say Mass on the following day, in the 
same place, he w^ill preserve that water, and pour it in 
the chalice at the second purification ; or he will cause 
it to be absorbed by raw cotton, or tow, which he burns ; 



42 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

or if it be left to evaporate, he puts it in the Sacrarium^ 
or in the Piscina.. 

3. Tiiis chalice having been used by the priest, being 
now purified, if he needs it for the second Mass he can 
take it with him, or lie can use another. {^S. M, C.^ lltii 
March, 1858.) 

4. When a priest is obliged to say two Masses in the 
same church, he may observe the rules given above, cr 
at the first Mass reserve the purification in a vessel used 
for that purpose and take it at second Mass. 



CHAPTER III. 



1. In a Kcquiem Mass there is no change to be made 
in the psalms and prayers which are a preparation for 
Mass. The Amice, Maniple, and Stole should be kissed 
as usual. 

2. At the commencement of Mass, the priest having 
made the sign of the cross and said the anthem Introiho, 
omits the psalm Judica and the Gloria Patri^ etc., and 
says, Adjutorium nostrum in Nomine Domini^ making 
at the same time the sign of the cross. 

3. He does not make the sign of the cross at the 
Introit, but having placed his left hand on the altar, f 
with the right extended, he makes the sign of the cross 
on the Missal, without, however, touching it. Instead 
of the Gloria Patri, he says. Requiem ceternam^ etc. 
Tlie Gloria in Excelsis is not said. {Puh. Miss., part ii, 
rit. xiii.) 

*Low Mass for the dfiad, even prossente cadavere, cannot be said on 
Snndhys, festivals of double rite, nor during the octaves of Cliristmas, 
Epiph i.ny, Eus'cr, Pentecost, and Corpus Ctiristi, nor on tlie vigils of 
(/liristmas, Epipiiany, Pentecost, or on Asli-Wednesday, nor during 
Holy Weelc. " Missae privatoe de requiem, etiani corpore pn^sente et 
insepulto, dici non possunt diebus quibus tit de otfido duplici, vel 
aliis a Ivubrica exceptis." [S. R, C, 29ib Jan., 1752.) 

t S. R. C, Sept. 7th, 1816. 



LOW MASS FOR THE DEAD. 43 

4. At the Munda cor meum^ the Juhe Domine^ witli 
Domimis sit^ etc., are omitted. After the Gospel he does 
not kiss the book, nor does he say. Per JSvangelica, etc. 
{Euh.^ ib.) 

5. While saying Deus^ qui humanm suhstanticB^ he 
does not bless the water ; at the end of the Psalm Lavcibo 
he omits the Glo^^ia Pair i^ \Yit\iow.t saying anything in 
its place. (Pub., ib.) 

6. At the Agnus Dei, instead of saying miserere nobis^ 
he says, Z^(9na eis requiem; and at the third he says. 
Dona eis requiem semjpiternam. He does not strike his 
breast in pronouncing these words, but keeps his hands 
joined before him, without touching the altar. 

7. He omits the first of the three prayers before Com- 
munion. [Pub., ib.y^ 

8. At the end of tlie Mass, instead of Ite missa est, he 
says, Peqidescant in pace, turned towards the altar, not 
to the people. {Pub., ib.) Having said the prayer 
Placeat, he does not say Benedicat vos, nor does he give 
the blessing to the people (even had he given Communion 
during Mass), but having kissed the altar, he goes to the 
Gospel nde, where he says, Dominus vobiscum, and the 
Gospel of St. John. 

9. It is to be remarked, that as often as only one prayer 
is to be said, the Dies i/-«3 should be said; and this occurs, 
1st, on All Souls' Day; 2d, on the day of the death or 
interment ; 3d, on the third, seventh and thirtieth day 
after interment, and on the first anniversary, which are 
called privileged days for the dead. When more than 
one prayer is said, it is ad libitum sacerdotis. 

10. Although the Requiem be celebrated for one per- 
son, the Introit, Gradual, Tract, Offertory, Commutiio 
and Pequiescant in pace, are to be in the plural. f 

* (Jommunion maybe given at Masses for the dead, eitlier witU 
particles coDsecrated at the same Mass, or vvilb otliera v/liich bad 
been re?erved in tlie tabernacle. 

fin Missis quotid. quae pro defiinctis ce'ebrentur possunt qnidem 
plures dici orationes qnani tres, sed curandnm est ut sint mimcro 
impares, et aliqnando pro ilia: Deus venicB larijitor, impone snbrMoabi- 
tur alia v. gr. pro patre, matre etc., dummodo ultimo loco dicaliir 
ilia: '■'■ FblcUvm omnium.'" S. R. C.,2d Sept., 1741. 



44 CEREMOJS^IES OF LOW MASS. 

CHAPTER lY. 

LO^' MASS AVIIEN THE BLESSED SACKAMENT IS EXPOSED. 

1. It should be remarked, that it would be better not 
to celebrate Low Mas- at an altar on which the Blessed 
Sacrament is exposed, according to the ceremonial of 
Bishops (lib. i, ch. xii, sec. 9), which states, that the dis- 
cipline of the Church is very ancient, to which the prac- 
tice of the Patriarchal Churches of Rome, and of the best 
regulated churches, is conformable. E'evertheless, when 
there is a just reason to celebrate at such" an altar, the 
following ceremonies should be exactly observed. 

2. In going to the altar, as soon as the priest comes in 
sight of the Blessed Sacrament, he takes off his cap, and 
gives it to the server. When he comes to the foot of the 
altar, he kneels on both knees, and bows profoundlv; he 
then goes up to the altar, sets the chalice thereon, Uiakes 
a genuflection only on one knee (wliich kind of genu- 
flection is made when it is to be made on the platfonn), 
and arranges the corporal and chaliee. He again makes 
a genuflection, goes to the E])ist]e side, opensthe Missal, 
returns to the middle, makes a genuflection, and turning 
a little towards the Gospel side, he descends to the foot 
of the steps, makes a genuflection on one knee only, and, 
without bowing, begins Mass. 

3. After the confession, without making a genuflec- 
tion, lie goes up to the altar, and makes there a genu- 
flection, before he commences the Orainus te Dohiine. 
After the Oramiis^ he again niakes a genuflection, and 
goes to the Missal for the Introit 

A General Rule. — A genuflection is to be made when- 
ever the celebrant goes from the middle to either side of 
the altar; the same when he goes from either side to the 
middle, with this difference only, that when he goes from 
the middle, he first kisses the altar or performs any action 
prescribed, and then makes the genuflection, this being 
the last thing to be done. When he leaves any side to 



WHEN THE BLESSED SACRAMENT IS EXPOSED. 45 

go to the middle, the first act on arriving there is to 
niake the genuiiection, then to kiss the altar, or perforin 
any other duty. 

4. At the Dominns vohiscufn^ he turns back a little 
towards the Gospel side; and only half turned towards 
the people, he says, Dominus vooiscum^ which must be 
observed whenever he turns towards the people. 

5. When he is about to wash his hands, he makes first a 
genuflection, then goes down the steps by tiie Epistle side, 
and taking care not to turn his back to the altar, turns 
so that his right side be next to the corner of the Epistle, 
and his face towards the people ; and there he washes 
and wn'pes his hands, then returns to the middle of the 
altar, and makes a genuflection. 

6. He says Orate fratres in the same way as the Dom- 
invs vobiscum^ without completing the circle. The re- 
maining part, till Communion, is tlie same as in other 
Masses. 

7. After the first ablution, without removing from his 
place, he receives the second ablution, having his face 
turned as much as possible tow^ards the Blesssed Sacra- 
ment. {BavMiry, part iv, ch. ix, art. ii, n. 12.) Then 
he wipes his fingers, takes the ablution, and adjusts the 
chalice as usual. 

8. He then continues the Mass, observing the genuflec- 
tions prescribed, and the manner of turning himself at 
the Dominus vohiscum^ and lie, missa est. i^hould lie 
have to say, Benedicamus Domino^ intead of the Ite^ 
missa est^ he turns round to the altar, and makes a genu- 
flection before he says it. 

9. After the Placeat tihi^ he kisses the altar, says Benc- 
dicat vos omnijyotens JJeus^ and, instead of the usual 
bow, makes a genuflection, and turning towards the peo- 
ple, he gives his blessing. He does not, however, com- 
plete the circle, neither does he make another genuflec- 
tion ; but turning to the Gospel side, he says, Bominus 
vohisoum, and reads the last Gospel as usual. 

10. At the Verhiim caro factum est^ as on all other 
occasions without exception, he turns a little toward the 
Blessed Sacrament when he makes the genuflection. 



46 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

11. At the end, he ^ocs to the middle, makes a geiin- 
flection, descends, a little on the right, to the floor, makes 
a genuflection on both knees, and bows. He then returns 
to the sacristy, putting on his cap at the place he had 
taken it off when "roino; to the altar. 



CHAPTER y. 

OF LOW MASS m PRESENCE OF PRELATES. 

1. By Prelates, are here understood Cardinals in every 
part of the world. Archbishops throughout their whole 
province, Bishops in their dioceses, and Apostolic Dele- 
gates in the countries to which they are accredited. 
Others are not ^o considered ; neither are the above when 
they are incogniti^ or not in their robes. 

2. If possible, the priest should be vested, and at the 
altar, before the arrival of the Prelate, and should be 
standing on the floor of the sanctuary, at the Gospel 
side, with his hands joined, waiting for him, having pre- 
viously prepared the chalice and Missal on the altar. 

3. On the arrival of the Prelate, the priest salutes him 
with a low bow, and on receiving the sign to begin Mass, 
he again bows to him; then turns a little towards the 
altar, makes a low bow, and begins Mass in the same 
place and position. {Buh. Miss., part ii, tit. iii, n. 2.) 

The pra(;tice introduced, is to commence Mass imme- 
diately after the salutation, without waiting for a t^ign 
from the Prelate, 

4. If the Prelate arrive before, at the altar, the priest, 
whether he has the chalice or not, salutes him from a 
convenient place; then, bowing to the altar, he arranges 
on it whatever is necessary, descends on the floor to the 
place above mentioned, and after bowing to the Prelate, 
lie commences Mass. 

5. At the Conjiteor, instead of saying, et voMs fr aires, 
et vosfratres, turning and bowing to the Prelate, he sa;. s. 



LOW MASS IN PRESENCE OF PRELATES. 4? 

et tibi Pater ^ et te Pater. {Biih.^ ib.^ n. 8); if there be 
more than one, et vohis Patres, et vos Patres. 

G. After the confession, having said Orennis^ he bows 
to the Prelate, then ascends to the altar, and continues 
Mass as usual. {Pub.., ih., n. 10.) 

7. At the end of the Gospel he does not kiss the book, 
neither does he say, Per Eoangelica dicta. The attend- 
ant takes the book to the Prelate to kiss. {Buh., ib., tit. 
vi, n. 2.) Even should the Pi-elate not kiss it (which 
happens when there are many, no one kisses it), the 
priest should also omit to kiss it. 

8. After the Agnus Dei, except in Masses for the 
dead, when he has said the first prayer before commu- 
nion, he kisses the altar, then the instrument of peace 
(which the attendant presents, kneeling at his right hand), 
saying Pax tecum^ the attendant answers, Et cum spiritu 
tuo (Pub., ib., tit. X, n. 3), and takes it, covered with a 
cloth, to the Prelate to kiss; or, to several, saying to 
each one. Pax tecum / they answering, Et cum spiritu 
tuo. He makes a bow to them after the}^ have kissed it, 
not before. {Coerem. Episc^ lib. i, ch. xxix, sec. 8.; The 
priest continues the other prayers. 

9. ]n giving the blessing, after having said Benedicat 
vos Omnipotens Deu^, he bows to the cross; then turning 
to the Prelate, he makes a low bow, as if requesting per- 
mission to bless the people, and says. Pater., et Eilius, et 
Spiritus Sanctus, blessing the people only on the side 
opposite the Prelate. [Bub., ib., tit. xii, n. 3.) If the 
Prelate should be in the middle, he blesses on the Gospel 
side. 

10. After the last Gospel, without going to the middle 
of the altar, he turns to the Prelate, and makes a low 
bow (Bub.yib., ii, 5), and remains there until the Prelate 
leaves. 

11. Should the Prelate remain, the priest goes to the 
middle, takes the chalice, descends from the altar, makes 
a low bow to the cross, and another to the Prelate, puts 
on his cap, and proceeds to the sacristy. 

12. The instrument of peace is not presented to 
Prelates out of their diocese. A bow is made to them 



48 CEREMOJ^'IES OF LOW MASS. 

in going to and coming from the altar, and, according to 
the opinion of some Rubricists, at the end of the Gospel. 
In otlier respects, everything is done as if thej were not 
present. 



CHAPTER YI. 

GIVING COMMUNION. 

Article I. 
Giving Communion during 

1. TnR practice of giving Commnnion to the people 
during Mass, being more conformable to antiquity, is 
preferable to that of giving it before or after Mass. A 
quantity of small particles should be prepared, corres- 
ponding with the number of persons to receive. If there 
are many, it is better to make use of a ciborium ; if only 
a few, they may be phiced on the corporal at the left 
side; but, in all cases, they should be on the altar before 
the Olfertory. In making the Oifertory, the priest 
extends the intention also to the small particles, which, 
unless in a ciborium, should be on the corporal, and 
not on the paten (as the rubric clearly prescribes). 

2. If the ciborium is used before the Oifertory, he 
brings it nearer to himself and uncovers it. After the 
Offertory, he covers it again, and places it a little in the 
rear of the chalice, but not oif the corporal. 

3. At the consecration, if the small particles are on 
the corporal, he does not touch them. If the ciborium 
is there, he uncovers it before pronouncing the words of 
consecration, as was said abo"e for the Offertory; and 
after the elevation of the Sacred Host, having made the 
genuflection, he covers it, and puts it in its place. 

4. Having consumed the Precious Blood, and placed 
the chalice on the corporal, he covers it with the pall. If 
the small Hosts are on the corporal, he makes a genuflec- 
tion before touching them, and then he reverently j)lace3 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 49 

them on the pateii, and again makes a geniillection. 
Meanwhile the server says the C on jit ear ; after which 
the priest turns to the right, and, facing the corner of 
the Epistle, says, in a loud voice, Mlsereatur vestri (not 
tiii^ although there may be only one communicant). The 
server having answered Amen^ he says, Indulgentiam., 
etc., at the same time making a sign of the cross with his 
right hand over the communicants, in the same manner 
as he gives the blessing at the end of Mass. If the small 
Hosts are in a ciborium, after having covered the chalice 
w^ith the pall, he places the ciborium between himself 
and the chalice, uncovers it, makes a genuflection, and 
turns towards the people to say Mlsereatur, etc. 

5. Having said Indidgentiam, etc., he turns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection, and takes the paten between 
the middle and forefinger of his left hand, or the ciborium 
by the nodus ; and, having taken one of the Hosts with 
the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, he raises It 
a little above the paten or ciborium, and in that position 
turns to the people. Then, having his eyes modestly 
fixed on the Blessed Sacrament, he says, in a clear and 
unaffectedly devout tone of voice, Acce Agnus Dei, ecce 
qui tollit ])eccata rnundi ; and then, three times, Z^6'mm6 
non surn dignus, ut intres suh tectum nieum, sed tantum 
die verho, et sanabitur anima mea. {Bub. Miss., part 
ii, tit. X, 6.) 

6. Having said these words, he descends by the middle 
of the altar, not by the side {S. B. C, Sept., 1737), and 
approaches the communicants, beginning at the Epistle 
side. Before giving Communion, the priest makes, each 
time, a sign of the cross with the Host, above the paten 
or ciborium, taking care not to pass the limits of either; 
while he says. Corpus Domini Nostri>i^Je>^u Christi, 
bowing at these last words, he puts the Host on the 
tongue of the communicant, saying, custodiat animam 
tuam m mtam mternam. Amen. In giving Holy Com- 
munion, the priest w411 be careful to lay the Host on the 
tongue of the communicant in such a nianner that It will 
adhere to it; at the same time he will carefully avoid 
touching the communicant's lips or tongue with his 

6 



50 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 

fingers.* When there are many commnnicants, and tlie 
first row have received, the priest should not continue to 
give Coinmnnion by retrograding, but should recom- 
mence at the Epistle side; and, as he passes by the 
middle of the altar, he makes no genuflection, even 
should the Blessed Sacrament be exposed. 

7. Having given Communion, the priest returns to 
the altar, without saying anything, keeping the thumb 
and forefinger of his right hand united over the paten 
or ciborium. If any Hosts remain, and there is no place 
to put Them, he makes a genuflection and consumes 
Them. If They had been on the corporal, he gathers the 
fragments with the paten, and causes them to fall in the 
chalice; then, receiving the purification, continues Mass 
as usual. 

8. Should the priest give Comnmnion with Hosts 
already consecrated, having consumed the Precious 
Blood, he puts the chalice at the Gospel side, on the 
corporal, and covers it wdth the pall. Then, having 
removed the altar-card, he opens the door of the taber- 
nacle, and makes a genuflection. Then he takes out the 
ciborium, places it in the middle of the cor})Oral, 
closes the tabernacle door, uncovers the ciborium, 
and makes another genuflection. Meanwhile the 
server says the Confiteor^ after which the priest says, 
MisereatuT^ etc., and then continues as described above. 

9. After having given Communion, he returns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection, covers the ciborium, opens 
the tabernacle, and places the ciborium within, makes 
another genuflection, closes the door, and replaces the 
card before it. Then he receives the purification, and 
continues Mass. 

* If there are ecclesiastics in surplice to receive Holy Communion, 
they kneel on the top step of the altar. If there are priests or deacons, 
they should wear a stole, and receive first. Lay persons should kneel 
at ihe railing, or any other place where the communion cloth is pre- 
pared. It is not permitted to use the chalice veil or linger-towel fur 
a nommunion cloth. 



MANNER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION. 51 

Article II. 
Purification of the Ciborium. 

10. The priest having received the Precious Blood, 
and given Holy Communion (if it had to be given), he 
consumes the small Hosts tliat remain in the ciborium. 
Then, taking with his left hand the ciborium by the 
nodus^ brings the opening of it over the chalice, and, 
with the forefinger and thumb of his right hand, causes 
the particles to fall from the ciborium into the chalice. 
If necessary, a little wine is poured into the ciborium, 
and he gently moves it in such a manner that the wine 
may pass all around, and detach the small particles that 
may still remain. To do tliis more thoroughly, he may 
use the forefinger of his right hand ; and then he pours 
that wine into the chalice, after which he wipes the 
interior of the ciborium with the purificator. If newly 
consecrated Hosts are to be placed in the ciborium, he 
does so ; after which he makes a genuflection, covers the 
ciborium, and replaces it in the tabernacle. Otherwise, 
he covers the empty ciborium, and puts it ofi" the corpo- 
ral. This being done, he presents the chalice to the 
server, to receive wine for the purification, and continues 
Mass."^ 

Article III. 

On giving Communion at other times. 

11. When circumstances require that Communion 
should be given immediately before Mass, the priest pro- 
ceeds to the altar, clothed in the vestments in which he 
is to celebrate (provided, however, that they are not 
black) ; he places the chalice on the Gospel side, the veil 

* Quarti, Murati and other Rubrici-ts remark that, in purTying the 
ciborium, such particles as may be found in it should not be brought 
to the moulh with the fingers, nor received with the mouth at the 
edge of the ciborium ; for, besides tlie impropriety of so doing, there 
is danger of losing some of the particles. It is bette-, however, not to 
use any wine in purifying the ciborium, especially when newly con- 
secrated Hosts are to be immediately put in it. 



52 CEllEMO^IES OF LOW MASS. 

concealing it from the people, and then, having taken 
the corporal from the burse, extends it upon tlie altar. 
After which he opens the tabernacle, makes a genuflec- 
tion, takes the ciborium, places it on the corporal, and 
proceeds as directed in Nos. 4, 5 and 6. Communion 
being over, should he perceive any particle on his fingers, 
he must let it fall into the ciborium. Tlien he makes a 
gennflection, purifies his fingers in the little water-vase, 
which is kept near the tabernacle for this purpose, wipes 
them with the purificator, and says during this time, "6^ 
sacrum convivmm in quo Chrishis sumitur, recolitiir 
memoria jPassio?iis ejus, mens imfpletur gratia, et futu- 
re glorice nohis jpigmis datur?'' During the Paschal 
time, Alltluja is added to the above anthem. Then he 
says. Partem, de Cmlo prestitisii eis, and the server 
answers, Omne delectamentum in se hahentem, with 
AUelvja in Paschal time and during the octave of Cor- 
pus Christi. Then adding, Domine exaudi, etc., and 
Dominus vobiscum {S. R. (7., 24th Sept., 1842), he says, 
Oremus. 

^'Deus qui nobis sub Sacramento mirahili Passionis 
turn memoriam.' reliquisti ; tribiie qucEsumus, ita nos 
Corporis et Sanguinis tui sacra mysteria venerar'i, ut 
redemptionis tuoe fructum in nobis jugiter sentiamus. 
Qui vivis et regnas cum Deo Patre;'' etc., and the server 
answers, Amen. During Paschal time, instead of the 
above prayer, the following is said : Oremus. '•'Spiritum 
nobis, Doming tucB caritatis infunde, ut quos Sacra- 
mentis Paschalibus satiasti, tua facias pietate Concordes. 
Per Christum Dominum nostr%Lm.P The server answers. 
Amen. After this he replaces the ciborium in the taber- 
nacle, makes another genuflection, closes the door, locks 
it, and removes the key. (Should the priest foresee that 
he is to give Communion during Mass, or immediately 
after, the key may be left in the door of the tabernacle.) 
Then he places the chalice in the middle of the altar, on 
the corporal, and gives the blessing (to those who received 
Communion in the following manner: 

12. The chalice being arranged, the priest extends, 
elevates, and rej">ins his hands, raising his eyes at the 



MANi^ER OF GIVING HOLY COMMUNION". 53 

same time, and ^2ij^^ Benedictio Dei omnipotentis ; at 
these words bowing to the cross. Having turned to 
those who received Holy Communion, lie continues, 
Patris^ et Fillip et Spiritus Sanctis and he makes the 
sign of the cross, adding the words, descendat super vos, 
et maneat semper. The server answers. Amen. Then, 
without turning to the altar, he descends the steps, and 
having made the requisite genuflection or bow, he com- 
mences Mass. 

13. When Communion is given immediately after 
Mass, the priest, having finished the last Gospel, goes 
to the middle of the altar, and puts the chalice on the 
Gospel side; then, taking the corporal from the burse, 
opens the tabernacle, and proceeds as in E"o. 11. The 
ciborium being replaced in the tabernacle, the door of it 
should be locked, and the key placed on the altar. 
After the blessing, the corporal is again put in the 
burse, which the priest places on the chalice, and on the 
burse he puts the key of the tabernacle, and returns in 
the usual manner to the sacristy. 

14. When Communion is given at other times, the 
priest washes his hands, puts on a surplice and a stole of 
the same color as that used for the day, or white ; should 
the priest wear a cape, he takes it off for the occasion. 
(aS'. R. G, 12th July, 1628.) He goes to the altar with 
his head covered and his hands joined, being preceded 
by the server, who should have lighted the candles pre- 
viously, and carried to the altar the burse, with the key 
of the tabernacle and the communion cloth, unless the 
latter had been already prepared. If the server be a 
layman, the priest will carry the burse before his breast, 
and take along also the key of the tabernacle. Having 
arrived in front of the altar, he gives his cap to the 
server, and makes a genuflection before ascending the 
steps. Then he goes up to the altar, unfolds the cor- 
poral, and places the burse against the step as at Mass. 
He opens the tabernacle, makes a genuflection, takes the 
ciborium from the tabernacle, and places it on the cor- 
poral ; he uncovers the ciborium, places the cover on the 
corporal, and again he makes a genuflection. He con- 



54 MARKER or SERYIE-G 

tinues the rest as before noticed in No. 11. After Cora- 
miinion he replaces the ciborium in the tabernacle, 
gives the blessing to those who have communicated, puts 
the corporal into the burse, bows to the cross, and, after 
descending the steps, he makes a genuflection, and puts 
on his cap ; the burse is carried either by the priest or 
the server. He returns to the sacristy, where, having 
bowed to the cross, he takes ofl" the stole and surplice, 
and the server returns to extinguish the lights. 



CHAPTEE YIL 

MANNEE OF SERVING A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 

Article I. 
General Memarlcs. 

1. The server should consider himself highly honored, 
being permitted to attend on a priest offering the most 
Holy Sacrifice. He should therefore perform this im- 
portant office with great purity of conscience., rectitude 
of intention, devotion, and decorum. 

2. In making the sign of the cross, he should put his 
left hand a little below the breast, and touching the fore- 
head, the breast, and the left and right shoulders with 
the fingers of his right hand, he should say : In nomine 
Patris^ et Filii^ et Spiritus Sancti. Amen. 

3. A simple inclination is made by bending the head 
moderately. A simple bow implies an inclination of the 
head and a moderate bending of the body. A low bow 
is made by bending the head and body profoundly, yet 
not so much as to render the action unseemly. A bow 
is considered sufficiently profound when the person that 
makes it, being in that position, can reach the knee with 
the extremity of his hand. 

4. To make a genuflection, one should bring the right 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 55 

knee down to the floor near the left foot, without in- 
clining the body, and then rise up again naturally, with- 
out too great haste. 

5. A genuflection on both knees is made by first bend- 
ing the right knee to the floor, then the left likewise to 
the floor; and having made a low bow, the person rises 
by lifting the left knee first, and then the right. 

6. To join the hands properly, the palm of one hand 
should be applied to the palm of the other, and both 
held upwards against the breast. The thumb of the 
right hand should cross the thumb of the left. During 
the Holy Sacrifice, whenever the hands are not neces- 
sarily employed, they should be joined. 

7. The server should make an inclination when ever he 
liears the priest pronounce the holy name of Jesus, of 
Mary, or of the saint whose festival is celebrated, and on 
other occasions marked in the third article. 

8. In answering, he should take care to pronounce dis- 
tinctly, and not too loud, nor too quickly. His manner 
should be grave, without afiectation. He should hold 
his head a little inclined, and his eyes modestly lowered. 

9. To put on the surplice in a proper manner, the ser- 
ver should open the lower part of it, and with both his 
hands pass it over the head upon his shoulders. After- 
wards he puts first the right arm in the right sleeve, and 
then the left in the other sleeve; and having adjusted it 
about his person, fastens it in front. In taking it ofl", he 
should first loose the strings, then withdraw his left arm 
from the sleeve, and lifting the surplice from the left side 
above the head over his right shoulder, he takes it off 
from the right arm. 

Article IL 

Of the Yesting of the Priest. 

1. At the appointed time the server puts on the sur- 
plice, and if no one is appointed to prepare the cruets, 
light the candles and make other necessary preparations, 
he should attend to it. Then he places himself at the 
left of the priest and, if it be the custom, helps him to 



56 MARKER OF SERVIKQ 

vest. Wliilst the priest puts on the amice, the server 
prepares the alb, and then puts it on him and assists him 
by holding up first the right sleeve of the alb and then 
the left. Afterwards he takes the girdle (keeping the 
tassels at his right) and gives it to the priest, so that he 
maj easily gird himself. He should take care to adjust 
the alb in such a manner as to let it hang equally around, 
about an inch from the floor. After that iie presents to 
him the maniple to kiss, and fastens it on his left arm. 
Then he hands him the stole, and finally he assists him 
in putting on the chasuble. After the priest is vested, 
he takes the Missal (unless it be already on the altar), 
holding it with both his hands before his breast, having 
the back of it to his right. He makes a low bow to the 
cross or chief image in the sacristy, with the priest, and 
goes before him to the altar. 

Article III. 
From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it. 

1. Having arrived before the lowest step of the altar, 
the server places himself at the right of the priest, from 
whom he receives the cap. He makes a genufiection on 
the floor with the priest, or (if the Blessed Sacrament be 
not there) a profound bow ; and raising a little the priest's 
vesture, he ascends the steps with him. He places the 
book on the stand, so as to have the back of it turned to 
the right. (The server does not open the book.) Then 
he puts the cap at a suitable place, and goes to the Gos- 
pel side, kneels on the floor at the left of the priest, a 
little in the rear, and joins his hands. 

2. He makes the sign of the cross with the priest, and 
answers at the confession. He bows at the Gloria Patri. 
After the priest has said the Confiteor^ the server, inclining 
a little towards the priest, says Misereatur tui^ etc.; then, 
bowing profoundly towards the altar, he says the Con- 
fiteor. At the words et tibi Pater, et te Pater, he turns 
his head somewhat towards the priest. He strikes his 
breast when he says mea culpa, raea culpa, mea maxima 
cvlpa. When the priest has said Misereatur vesiri, etc., 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 57 

the server raises his head. At the words Deus tu con- 
ve?'sus, he inclines a little. At the words Dominus 
vohiscum^ lie rises and raises a little the priest's alb, 
while he ascends the steps. Then he kneels on the lo^^est 
step, and remains there till the end of the Epiith. 

3. He says the Kyrie eleison alternately with the 
priest. If the celebrant says ^lectarmis gemia^ the server 
answers, Levate. If there be more than one epistle, he 
answers, Deo gratias, at the end of each of them. The 
Epistle or Epistles being read, he rises, makes a genu- 
flection or a bow in the middle, and goes to the book. 
If the priest makes a genuflection, as happens during 
Lent, the server makes also a genuflection. When the 
priest has done reading, the server carries the book w^ith 
the stand to the Gospel side, making a genuflection or a 
bow in the middle, as he passes. Having placed the 
book on the altar, he turns it a little to the right, and 
goes below the platform near the book. He answers at 
the Dominus vohiscuvi ; and at the words Sequentia 
Sancti Evangelii he puts his left hand on his breast, and 
with the thumb of the right he makes a cross on his 
forehead, lips, and breast. As the priest pronounces the 
name of Jes-^is in the beginning of the Gospel, the server 
bows towards the book, and goes down on the floor to the 
Epistle side, making a genuflection or a bow in the middle. 
If the name oi Jesus be not mentioned, then he bows to 
the priest, and goes to his place, and there he stands during 
the Gospel, at the end of which he answers, Laus tibi 
Christe, and kneels down. 

4. If the Credo be said, the server kneels down during 
it, and makes a low bow at the words, Et incarnatics est^ 
etc. Having answered at the Domimis vohiscum, he rises 
and goes to the side-table, takes the cruets, and carries 
them to the altar on the Epistle side. (He folds the veil 
of the chalice, if the priest leaves it unfolded.) When the 
ceL'brant approaches the corner of the Epistle, the server 
bows to him, and presents the cruet with wine to him, after 
first kissing it; he receives it back, kissing it, and presents 
to him the cruet with water, kissing it both before giving 
it and after receiving it. (He does not kiss the priest's 



5S MANNEK OF SERVII^G 

hand.) At the words Yeni sanctificator^ he talces in hig 
right hand the cruet with water, and the plate in the left, 
holding the towel on his left arm, and pours water on 
the piiest's fingers, bowing to him before and after. 

5. Having placed the cruets on the side-table, he kneels 
on the first step in front of the altar at the Epistle side; 
bowing slightly he answers at the Orate fratres ; after- 
wards he answers at the Preface, and moderately rings 
the little bell at the Sanctus. It is the custom here to 
ring the bell at the llano Igitur. 

6. At the words, Qici pridie^ etc., the server goes up 
and kneels on the edge of the platform, at the right of 
the priest. He inclines during the consecration of both 
species, and makes a low bow when the priest adores the 
Blessed Sacrament. At each elevation the server raises a 
little the extremity of the chasuble with his left hand, 
and with his right gives three strokes ot the bell. 

7. The elevation being over, he rises, and goes to kneel 
at his place. He strikes his breast at the words, Nobis 
qicoque jpeccatoribus. He answers at the Per omnia 
soBGula scBGulorum, and at the end of the Pater Noster. 
He answers again at the Per omnia^ etc., and at the Pax 
Domini^ etc. When the priest says Domine non sum 
dignus, the server inclines, and rings the bell moderately, 
that if there be persons to go to Communion, they may 
approach the holy table. When the priest uncovers the 
clialice after receiving the Sacred Body, the server rises, 
goes to the side-table, takes the cruets, carries them up 
to the altar, and inclines when the priest takes the Sacred 
Blood ; after which he ministers wine and water with the 
usual bows and kisses. AVhen the server goes from the 
credence-table to the altar, he genuflects on the floor at 
■the Epistle side. He stands on the platform to minister 

wine at the first ablution, and returns to the highest step 
for the second. 

8. If there are communicants, after the priest has re- 
ceived the most Precious Blood, the server, kneeling on 
the step at the Epistle side, bows profoundly, and says 
the Conjiteor. He inclines and answers at the Miser eatur 
vestri. and makes the sign of the cross at the words In- 



A PRIEST AT LOW MASS. 59 

didgentiam^ etc. The Communion being over, he raises 
the priest's alb while he ascends the steps, and kneels 
again until the priest has closed the tabernacle; after 
wliich he presents the cruets as is said above. 

9. Having placed the cruets on the side-table, the server 
goes to the Gospel side; thence he takes the book and 
carries it with the stand to the Epistle side, making a 
genuflection in the middle as he passes; after which he 
kneels on the lowest step at the Goepel side. He answers 
the prayers, etc. When the priest gives the blessing, the 
server, remaining at his place, bows and makes the sign 
of the cross, at the end of which he answers, Amen. 
Then he rises, answers at the Dominus vohiscum^ and at 
the beginning of the Gospel signing himself, as men- 
tioned in n. 3. Towards the end of the Gospel, he goes 
for the priest's cap; he bends the knee at the words Et 
Yerbiim caro^ etc. Then he goes up to the altar, takes 
the book, bows to the cross with the priest, and with him 
he goes down and makes a genuflection on the floor, or a 
bow. He gives the cap to tiie priest, and goes before him 
to the sacristy. There, after making a low bow to the 
cross or image with the priest, he bows to him. After 
that he puts the book in its place, and, if customary, helps 
the priest to disrobe. Finally, he takes ofi' his surplice, 
and retires. 

10. If there be a last Gospel peculiar to the day, after 
tlie priest has said Ite^ missa est^ the server takes the 
book to the Gospel side, taking care to kneel when the 
priest gives the blessing. When the priest has done 
reading, he carries the book back to the Epistle side. 

11. Should the Mass be celebrated in presence of 
the Blessed Sacrament exposed, the genuflection in going 
to and leaving the altar, is made on both knees. The 
server pours water on the priest's hands, standing on the 
floor at the Epistle side, with the towel on his arm. 
The cruets are not kissed. 

12. When Mass is for the dead, the psalm, Jiidica me, 
etc., is not said. The usual kisses are omitted. At the 
end of Mass, the priest, instead of Ite, m,issa est, says, 
Requiescant in jpace, to which the server answers, Amen, 



GO iiAis^iH^ER OF SERvnro 



CHAPTEK YIII. 

MANNER OF SERVING A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prejpared. 

1. The vestments for saying Mass, viz., chasuble, stole, 
cincture, alb, and amice, should be prepared on the mid- 
dle of the altar. Near the vestments on the Epistle side, 
the pectoral cross on a plate, and the maniple on tho 
Gospel side. The Missal open at its place. (The altar- 
cards should be removed, if the Canon ^" be used.) On 
common days ouly two candles need be lighted; on fes- 
tivals, four or more., On the side-table two large candles 
should be placed, to be lighted at the end of the Freface.f 

2. On the side-table should be prepared the chalice, 
the cruets, and the basin and ewer, with a towel. 

3. In the sanctuary, towards the middle, the kneeling- 
desk, covered with a green or violet cloth; also, two 
cushions, one placed on the upper part of the desk, the 
other on the lower part. On the kneeling-desk should 
be placed the Canon, and the hand candlestick with 
lighted candle. 

4. If the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, the vestments 
should be prepared in the sacristy, or on a side-table in 
the sanctuary ; as on such occasion the Bishop does not 
vest at the altar. 

Article II. 

Of the Preparation and Vesting of the Bishop. 

1. Two chaplains, at least, are requisite to serve a 
Bishop's Mass. 

* A book containing the Canon and some otiier parts of the Mass, 
is so called. It is placed on the altar instead of the Missal during the 
most solemn part of the Mass, when a Bishop celebrates. 

t Vid Oer. Episc, lib. i. c. 29, n. 4; MarLinucci, lib. 5, c. 5, ?1. 



A BISHOP AT LOW ilASS. 61 

2. At the appointed time tlie two chaplains put on 
their surplices, and go to receive the Bishop at the door. 
They bow to him when they meet him, and walk before 
him towards the middle ot the sanctuary, where they bow 
to the cross, or make a genuflection it* the Blessed Sacra- 
ment be in the tabernacle. The Bishop goes to the 
kneeling-desk ; the iirst chaplain takes the hand candle- 
stick, and stands at his left, whilst the second at hisriglit 
turns the leaves of the Canon. 

3. After the preparation, all go to the lowest step of 
tlie altar, where they bow or make a genuflection. When 
the Bishop has finished, the second places the Canon open 
in the middle of the altar, against the tabernacle, and. the 
first puts the hand candlestick to the right of the Missal 
on the altar. The first takes the pectoral cross and cape 
from the Bishop, and places the latter on the kneeling- 
desk. He takes the ring "from the Bishop's fino^er with 
the usual kisses; and having taken the towel from the 
second, each kneeling on one knee, they give the water 
and towel for the washing of the Bishop's hands, and rise 
after having received his blessing. (If they are priests, 
they do not kneel.) After which, the second puts the 
basin, ewer, and towel on the side-table. 

4. The first goes up to the altar, takes the vestments 
one after the other, and with the assistance of tlie second, 
vests the Bishop. Taking first the amice, he presents it 
to the Bishop to kiss, who puts it around his neck, and, 
passing the string around the waist, fastens it in front. 
Then he puts the alb on him ; afterwards he girds him 
with the cincture; Then he presents to him the pectoral 
cross to kiss, and suspends it from his neck ; then the 
stole is also kissed, and suspended from the neck down 
on each side and fastened with the cincture ; after that, 
the chasuble is put on him and fastened in front; lastly, 
the ring is put on his finger with the usual kisses. When 
the Mass is for the dead, the maniple is put on him after 
the cincture.. If, in vesting, the Bishop wishes to read 
•:he prayers, the second chaplain should hold the book 
and the hand candlestick before him. 

5. The Bishop being vested, the first chaplain goes to 



G2 MANNER OF SERVING 

Ills right, and tlie second to his left; thej make a genu- 
flection or a low bow with him (the second having on his 
arm the maniple). They answer and bow as usual dur- 
ing the confession. After the words Indulgentiam^ etc., 
the second rises and presents the maniple to the Bishop 
to kiss, and fastens it on his arm. When he ascends the 
steps, they raise the alb a little, go up with him, and re- 
main on each side of him, moving with him to and from 
the middle of the altar, as may be prescribed; the first, 
pointing out what is to be read, holds the hand candle- 
stick. They answer, make on themselves the sign of the 
cross, and bow. When the Bishop makes a genuflection, 
they do likewise, supporting him by placing each his 
hand under his elbow.* 

6. While the Bishop says Munda cor r)ieiirri^ the sec- 
ond chaplain carries the book and the first the hand can- 
dlestick to the Gospel side, making the usual genuflec- 
tions or bows; and the first, stands at the Bishop's left, 
and holding the hand candlestick, points the text to the 
the Bishop. (Should a Cardinal be present, the first, as 
soon as the Bishop has kissed the text, takes another 
Missal, and observing the usual ceremonies, brings it to 
be kissed. If there be several hi.uh dignitaries, the Gos- 
pel is only given to the highest in dignity ; if they be 
equal in rank, it is given to no one.) When the Missal 
is not to be carried, the first chaplain remains at the left 
of the Bishop. If the Credo be said, they remain by the 
Bishop during its recital. 

T. After the Dominus "voliscum, the second goes 
to the side-table, takes the chalice and carries it up 
to the altar on the Epistle side, he takes the cor- 
poral out of the burse and extends it in the iriiddle 
of the altar. He gives the paten to the bishop, kissing 
it and his hand. He then wipes the chalice with a 
purifier. Having brought the cruets, he pours wine 
into the chalice; takes the water cruet and liolds it 
up to the Bishop, saying, Benedicite^ Beverendis- 

*Tlie first, who holds the hand candlestick, docs not genuflect dur- 
ing Epistle, Gospel, Incarnalus est, nor during Canon. 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. G3 

sime Pater, and puts some drops of water into the chalice, 
and having wiped the chalice, presents it to the Bishop 
with the nsiial kisses. (In Masses for the dead the water is 
not blessed.) Then he puts the pall on the chalice, and 
the paten partly under the corporal, covering the remain- 
ing part with the purifier; after which he takes back the 
cruets to the side-table. When the Bishop sajs. In 
sjpiritu hitmilitatus, the second chaplain takes the basin, 
ewer, and towel, and goes to minister to the washing ot 
the hands, the first receiving and returning the ring with 
the usual kisses. Tlie second, having carried the ewer 
back to the side-table, goes to the right of the Bishop, 
and the first goes to the book. Whilst the Bishop recites 
the Secreta, the second will have the Canon ready ; the 
Secreta being read, the first takes the Missal from the 
stand, and in its place the second puts the Canon, open 
at tlie prepace. They answer at the preface, and bow at 
the Sanctus, the second ringing the little bell. After- 
wards the second liglits two large candles on the side- 
table, which are put out after the Bishop's Comnmnion, 
or after he has given Communion. (It would be more 
conformable to the Ceremonial of Bishops, if two clerks 
hold two large candles or torches.) AVhilst the Bishop 
is making his memento for the living, thefirst leaves the 
hand candlestick on the altar, and both retire a step from 
the altar, still remaining on the platform: the same is 
done at the memento tor the dead. At the words. Qui 
pridie, they both kneel on the platform ; they bow and 
raise the chasuble as usual, the second giving three 
strokes of the bell at each elevation. He also uncovers 
and covers the chalice; afterwards they both rise, make 
a genuflection on the platlbrm, and stand on each side of 
the Bishop as before. 

8. Towards the end of the Pater IVoster, the second 
wipes the paten with the purifier, and gives it to the 
Bishop w^ith the usual kisses. Then he uncovers and 
covers the chalice. They incline and strike their breast 
at the Agnus Dei. Should the Pax be given, the second 
chaplain takes the instrument of peace, kneels at the 
Bishop's right, holding the instrument before him, which 



C4 main^Js"er of serving 

lie kltscs, saying, Pax tecum. Having answered, Et cum 
sjnritu tuo, he rises and brings the Pax to the dignitary 
to kiss. In presenting it, he says, Pax tecum ; and being 
answered, Et curti sjjiritu tuo^ he bows to him. Then he 
covers the instrnment witli its veil, carries it back to the 
side-table, and returns to the Bishop's side. 

9. At the Domine non sum. dignus^ tliey bow and 
strike their breasts; afterwards the second chaplain un- 
covers the chalice, and both make a genuflection ; then 
the second goes for the cruets, gives the wine and water 
with the usual kisses, and puts back the cruets on tlie 
side-table. Meanwhile the first puts the Canon in the 
middle of the altar, and the Missal on the stand, and car- 
ries it, together with the hand candlestick, to the Epistle 
side. The Bishop washes his hands as usual, the second 
giving the water, and the first attending to the ring and 
presenting the towel. After which the first assists the 
Bishop at the book, and the second goes and arranges 
the chalice, carries it to the side-table, and returns to the 
lei't of the Bishop. Should the Bishop give Communion, 
when he has taken the Sacred Blood, they kneel on the 
edge of the platform and say the Confiteor. They 
answer and sign tliemselves with the sign of the cross at 
the Indulyentiarn.. When the Bishop returns to the altar, 
they raise his alb while he ascends the steps. The first 
chaplain takes the paten and holds it below the month 
of the communicants, while they receive; after which he 
places it on the corporal, on returning to the altar. 

10. When the Bishop is about giving the blessing, 
the chaplains go on the step below the platform, where 
they kneel, and answer at the blessing. If there be a 
last Gospel specially prescribed, the first takes the book 
Rnd the hand candlestick to the Gospel side. If the 
Gospel of St. John be said, the second chaplain at the 
Bishop's left, holds the Canon, and the first, at his right, 
the hand candlestick. After the last Gospel, the first 
cloF3S the book ; all bow to the cross and go down on the 
floor, where they make a genuflection, or a low bow. 
Then the first, assisted by the second, disrobes the Bishop, 
placing the vestments on the altar. Afterwards the first 



A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 65 

chaplain puts the cape on the Bishop, and buttons it in 
front. The Bishop returns to the kneeling-desk, and the 
chaplains attend him as in the beginning. If he desires 
to assist at another Mass, tliey remain kneeling at either 
side a little behind him. Finally, they accompany him 
to the door, where they bow to him, and return to take 
off their surplices. If the Bishop wear a calotte, the 
first chaplain takes it off at the Saiictus, and puts it on 
him again after the Communion. 

Akticle III. 

When there is but one Chaplain. 

1. If there be no more than one chaplain, he goes to 
receive the Bishop at the door, and accompanies him to 
the kneeling-desk. Then he takes the Canon and the 
hand candlestick. He opens the book and puts it on the 
desk, and holds the hand candlestick. The preparation 
being over, he puts the Canon and the hand candlestick 
on the altar, and attends to the washing of the Bishop's 
hands. He vests him in the manner above described. 
He takes the maniple, goes to the left hand of the 
Bishop, and answers during the confession as usual. He 
rises and puts the maniple on the Bishop's arm, after he 
has said Indulgentiam. After the confession he goes to 
the Missal and assists the Prelate, answering, kneeling, 
inclining, etc. After the Bishop has done reading, the 
chaplain carries the book and the hand candlestick to the 
Gospel side. After the Dorninus vobiscum^ he takes the 
chalice to the altar, spreads the corporal, and gives the 
paten to the Bishop with the usual kisses. He takes the 
cruets and puts wine into the chalice. Then, presenting 
the water cruet to the Prelate, he says, Benedicite^ Rev- 
erendissime Fater, and puts a few drops of water in the 
chalice, which he gives to him with the usual kisses. He 
covers the chalice and prepares for the washing of the 
Bishop's fingers. He answers at the Orate fratres^ and 
as^^ists at the book, pointing out to the Prelate what is to 
be read. After the Secreta, heputs the Missal aside, and 
places the Canon on the book-stand. He answers at the 



G(j MANis^ER OF SERVING A BISHOP AT LOW MASS. 

Preface, and rings the bell at the Sanctus. At the 
words Qui pridie^ he goes to the right of the Bishop and 
assists him, as marked in the second article. After 
covering the chalice he makes a genuflection, and goes 
to the Gospel side, makes a genuflection, and asssists at the 
book. Towards the end of the Pater Noster lie makes a 
genuflection, and goes to the Epistle side, makes a genu- 
flection, again takes the paten and gives it to the Bishop 
with the usual kisses. He uncovers and covers the 
chab'ce. He bows during the Domine^ non sum dignus, 
and strikes his breast. He makes a genuflection and un- 
covers the chalice. He presents the cruets with the usual 
kisses, and carries them back to the side-table. Then he 
puts the Canon, open, against the tabernacle, and places 
the Missal, open, on the stand, and carries it, with the 
hand candlestick, to the Epistle side. He afterwards at- 
tends to the washing of the Bishop's liands. Afterwards 
he repairs to the Gospel side, arranges the chalice, and 
takes it to the side-table; after which he returns to the 
book, and assists the Bishop as usual. He kneels and 
answers at the Bishop's blessing, and makes the sign of 
the cross. Then he assists the Bishop during the last 
Gospel, by holding the Canon and the hand candlestick 
before him. If there be a special Guspel, he takes the 
Missal to the Gospel side after the Bishop's blessing. 
After the Gospel he bows to the cross with the Bishop, 
and with him he descends the steps, and makes a genu- 
flection or a bow. Then he disrobes the Bishop, and 
assists him at the thanksgiving in the manner mentioned 
in the second article. 

2. Should there be a boy dressed in surplice, he will 
generally hold the hand candlestick near the book, attend 
to the washing of the Bishop's hands, bring the cruets, 
ring the bell at the Sanctus, at the elevation, and at the 
Domine^ non sum dignus. He kneels during the con- 
fession, at the elevation, during the communion of the 
people, and when the Bishop gives the blessing. 



CELELRATIXG HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 67 



CHAPTER IX. 

MANNER OF CELEBRATING HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACON 
OR SUB-DEACON. 

THE ASPEROES.* 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

On the Altar, 

1. The chalice, all prepared, should be placed on the 
extended corporal in the middle of the altar. 

2. The bnrse against the gradus. 

3. The Missal opened on the book-stand. 

4. The altar-cards. 

5. If Communion is to be given, the ciboriam on the 
corporal. 

6. The antipendinm and the veil (if the Blessed Sacra- 
ment be there) over the tabernacle, of the color of the 
day. 

7. Six candlesticks with candles. 

8. The cross prominently located in the middle of the 
candlesticks. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The cruets with wine and water. 

2. The finger-towel on the plate. 

3. The hand-bell. 

The celebrant's bench may be covered with a green 
cloth, and on it the chasuble and maniple are placed. 

*Tbe Asperges, or sprinkling of the holy water, takes place ^very 
Sunday of the year, except when the Bishop solemnly celebrates. 
{Cmrem. Ejns., 1. ii, c. xxxi ) The water may be blessed in tlie church, 
or in the sacristy. {Ruh. Mtss.) The holy water should be changed, at 
lea;t, once a week. {Ccerem. Epis.^ 1. i, c. vi.) 



68 ma:n'xer of celebrating^ 

In the Sacristy. 

1. The sacred vestments for the priest, except the 
maniple and chasuble. 

2. A cope. 

3. The holj-water vase. 

4. The sprinkle. 

5. The Missal, or Asperges-card. 

6. Surplices for the acolytes. 

1. At the appointed time the acolytes put on their 
surplices, the priest washes his hands, and then puts on 
the amice, alb, girdle, and stole, assisted bj the acolytes. 
The first acolyte takes the holy-water vase, and the sec- 
ond the Asperges card, placing themselves a little behind 
the celebrant, who takes off his cap, and all bow to the 
cross or image in the sacristy. The celebrant, having 
again put on his cap, goes to the altar, preceded by the 
acolytes; they bow to the clergy, should they be in the 
sanctuary.* 

2. Having arrived in front of the lowest step of the 
altar, the first acolyte at the right, and the second at the 
left, the celebrant gives his cap to the first acolyte, and 
all make a genuflection on the floor,t rise, and kneel on 
the lowest step. The priest having received the sprinkle 
from the acolyte, intones the Asperges, or the Yidi aquam^ 
according to the season, and then S])rinkles the altar 
three times, first in the middle, then at the Gospel, and 
lastly, at the Epistle side; in the n:eantime, the choir 
continues to sing the Asperges. Then the celebrant 
sprinkles himself, after which, he rises and sprinkles tlie 
acolytes, first the one at his right, and then the other, 
while these remain kneeling. 

3. Then turning at their right, they go as far as the 
railings of the sanctuary, the first acolyte carrying the 
holy-water vase, at the right of the celebrant, and the 
second at his left, both raising the borders of the cope. 

* These bows are not to be made to mere sanctuary bo3's. 

t It is supposed that the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle. 



niGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 60 

From th(3 railings the priest sprinkles the people three 
times, tirat in the middle, then at the Epistle, and lastly, 
at the Gospel side, or if usual, he passes down the aisles ; 
after which, turning at the right, they go back to the 
front of the lowest step, and there make a genuflection. 
During the sprinkling the celebrant recites the Miserere 
or Confitemini. 

4. When arrived at foot of altar, the first acolyte car- 
ries the holy-water vase and sprinkle to sacristy or 
credence-table, and immediately returns. They stand 
until the Antiphon Asjperges is sung and repeated by the 
choir ; after which the celebrant sings in the ferial tone 
the versicles, and the prayer from the book or card ; the 
choir having answereJ, Ainen, all make a genuflection, 
and go to the bench, where the priest takes ofl* the cope, 
assisted by the second acolyte, who carries it and the 
card away ; if the Missal has been used for the Asperges, 
he places it on the book-stand upon the altar. In the 
meantime, the celebrant, assisted by the first acoljte, 
puts on the maniple and the chasuble; after which, be- 
tween the two acolytes, he goes in front of the lowest 
step, where all make a genuflection, the acolytes kneel- 
ing on the floor, a little behind the priest. 

5. The celebrant does everything as at Low Mass, ex- 
cept that he sings all that is sung at the solemn Hi2;h 
Mass, and also the Gospel. There is no incense used at 
any time at the High Mass celebrated without deacon 
an 1 sub-deacon, as it it is only Mlssa Cantata. 

6. Towards the end of the confession, at the words 
Domini exaudi orationem mearro^ both acolytes rise to 
i-aise the alb a little, while the priest is ascending to the 
])latforni ; they then kneel on the last step and answer 
attentively. 

7. After the priest lias said the Kyrie^ if he wishes to 
sit down, they rise, meet together before the altar, make 
a genuflection (always ^n the floor of the sanctuary), 
and go to the seat, the first at the right, the other at the 
left; they raise the chasuble, so that he may not sit upon 
it; the first presents the cap with the usual kisses, and 
they remain standing, one at each side, nearly face to 
face, so that their shoulders be not turned to the altar. 



70 MAN'N-ER OF CELEBRATIN-G 

8. At the last Kyrie^ the first gives notice to the cele- 
brant to rise ; he takes his cap, lays it on the seat, both 
accompany the priest before the altar, they make a 
genuflection on the floor, raise the alb, and then kneel 
at their places.* 

9. When the priest leaves the altar at the Kyrie^ 
Gloria^ or Credo^ he goes to the bench per hreviorem. 
When the priest begins the last prayer, the first, if he be 
in minor orders, goes to the side-table and takes the 
Missal, and returns to his place until the concluding 
words of the prayer, when he goes to the middle, genu- 
flects, and salutes the clergy if any are present in the 
sanctuary, then returning to his place, sings the Epistle, 
which being finished, he again goes to the middle, genu- 
flects, bows and replaces the Missal on the credence-table. 
If neither of the acolytes is in minor orders, the cele- 
brant will read the Epistle.f 

10. The second acolyte removes the book at the pro]:>er 
time, going by the lowest step of the altar, and returns 
to kneel at his place; when the Grospel commences both 
rise, and at the end answer, Laus Tihi Christe, and again 
kneel down until the end of the Credo ; then the cele- 
brant goes to sit down. 

11. After the Credo^ while the celebrant is singing the 
Dominus vohiscum and Oremus^ they rise, make a genu- 
flection together in the middle, and repair to the side- 
table to put the cruets on the altar. The first hands the 
cruet with wine, and then that with the water, with the 
usual kisses, and afterwards the second pours the water 
on the celebrant's hands ; the first presents the towel, 
and both bow to the priest, before and after. 

"^Tbey should observe the saaie at the Gloria and Credo, hoxn^ 
punctual to rise as soon as the priest bows, before going to tal^e his 
seat, alter reciiing the Olorm and Credo. When those parts are sung 
at which the head is bowed, they bow to the cross, and the urst gives 
notice to the celebrant to uncover his head, and to cover it. While 
the words of the Credo, Et incarnatus est, are sung, they kneel down 
witli tlieir laces turned towards the altar, and rise after the words, Et 
Homo facias est. 

t If there be a Sequeniia, or long Tract after the Epistle, the cele- 
brant, after having read it, sits down, as at the Kyrie, and, at the last 
verso, returns to the altar (by the Epistle side), to siy the Manda cor 
meiim. 



HIGH MASS WITHOUT DEACONS. 71 

12. After putting away tlie cruets, they return to the 
middle of the altar, make a genuflection on the floor, and 
kneel at their respective places, on each side, fronting 
the altar. 

13. At the elevation, they ri^e, make a genuflection in 
,the middle, ascend the steps and kneel on the edge of the 

platform, and both raise tlie chasuble, and perform every- 
thing as in other Masses. 

14. When the priest has communicated, and made the 
genuflection, the first acolyte rises and goes to give the 
wine and water; which being finished, he returns to the 
middle and genuflects with the second acolyte, who goes 
up to the altar and removes the Missal to the Epistle 
side. Meanwhile the first goes to his place and kneels. 

15. At the last Gospel, they both stand up, and the 
first goes to get the cap. At the Verhum caro factum 
est^ they both make a genuflection, and when the priest 
descends from the altar, they all genuflect, and the first 
acolyte, presenting the cap with the usual kisses, they 
return to the sacristy, both going before, as at the be- 
ginning. 

16. When they arrive at the sacristy, they bow to the 
cross or image; the first acolyte remains to assist the 
priest in taking off" his vestments; the other goes to put 
out the candles, and put away the things which are on 
the altar. 

17. If Communion be given, after the priest has com- 
municated and made a genuflection, the first acolyte goes 
alone to get the communion-cloth, returns to the middle, 
and kneels down on the floor with his companion. When 
the celebrant is receiving the Precious Blood, they bow, 
and recite the Confiteor. After the Indulgentiam^ they 
rise, make a genuflection at the same time with the cele- 
brant, and kneel on the platform to receive Communion; 
afterwards they rise, make a genuflection, separate and 
kneel, holding each end ot the communion-cloth, for the 
communion of the clergy; after which, the first acolyte 
takes away the cloth. When Communion is over they 
meet in the middle, make a genuflection together, and go 
to give the wine and water for the ablution, as said above. 



72 YESrERS. 

18. Should there be no Asperges, as on holidays, tlie cel- 
ebrant puts on all the vestments in the sacristy, then pre- 
ceded by the acolytes, he goes to the altar. At the foot 
of the altar the acolytes separate to leave space for the 
celebrant, the first takes the cap to the bench, both hav- 
ing previously made a genuflection with celebrant. The 
two acolytes kneel a little behind and at either side of 
celebrant, and answer as prescribed. 



CHAPTER X. 

VESPERS. SUNG WITHOUT COPE BEAEEKS. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. Six candlesticks on the altar, and the cross in the 
middle. 

2. In the middle of the sanctuary, against the railings, 
three stools for the two acolytes and the censer-bearer, or 
a bench sufiiciently long to accommodate the three 
clerks.* 

3. Kear the bench for the officiating priest, a stool for 
the master of ceremonies. 

4. A book-stand, with the book, in front of the priest's 
bench, for the officiating clergyman, which may be cov- 
ered with a cloth of the color of the day. 

5. At the altar the antipendium, and if the Blessed 
Sacrament is there, the veil on the tabernacle, of the 
color of the day. 

*If the clerks are to wear caps during vespers, they should be put 
on Uie stools belbrehand. 



VESPERS. 73 

In the Sacristy. 

1. A surplice and a cope of the color of the day, and 
if the otKciatino: priest is to give benediction immediately 
after Vespers without previously returning to the sac- 
risty, a stole of the color of the cope.^ 

2. Four surplices for the master of ceremonies and 
the three servers. 

3. The censer and incense-boat with incense. 

4. Two candlesticks, with candles, for the acolytes. 

Article II. 

1. The instructions given in the first article of the 
fourth chapter on solemn vespers, should be observed 
also during vespers without cope-bearers. 

* As to the use of the stole, it may be well to remark that the Sacred 
Congregation of Rites, on the 7lh September, 1816, isssued flie Ibllow- 
ing decree, which was approved by His HoUriess on the 20; h of the 
same mouth: " Stolam non esse adhibendam pr^'erqnam m colla- 
tioue et confectioue Sacramentorum ; ideoque confeiietudinem in con- 
trariura esse abusum, per locorum OrJinarios omnino eHmii)andnm." 
The stole is less the mark of jurisdiction than of the sacerdotal 
character; hence it should be used only in performing s icerdotal func- 
tions, as is prescribed by the Roman Missal and Ritual. An alb or 
surplice should always be put on under the stole. Priests should not 
wear a stole while assisting at High Mass, Vespers, or Benediction ; 
especially as Bishops themselves do not wear it when they assist in 
cope, the' Ceremonial of Bishops not prescribing its use on .such oc- 
casions. A priest should not use it even in offioiating nt solemn ves- 
pers, though he is to give benediction with th- Blesseil Sacra- 
ment immediately afier. He may wear it on the feast of Corpus 
Christi, wiien solemn vespers are sung, the Biessed S icrament being 
exposed, since the Blessea Sacrament is to be incensed at the Mug- 
nijicat. The Ceremonial does not prescribe that a canon should put 
on the stole or alb for solemn vespers. '"Canonicus hebdomadarius 
indntus amictu et Dluviali supra coitam 3eu rochetura," According 
to Gavaiitus, the priest may put on the stole immediately before going 
to preach, if such be the established usage, since the Sacred C(;ngre- 
gation allows it to be fc^llowed. The priest who acts as mas'er of 
ceremonies at the Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, should put 
on the stole when he is to open the tabernacle and touch the Blesse I 
Sacrament and tlie remonstrance that contains it. He should take it 
off as soon as these actions are performed, and not wear it during all 
the time of the ceremony. For a priest to wear a stole vvhile assisting 
in the sanctuary, even if he bj the pa^st )r of the congregation, is im- 
proper. 

7 



74 VESPERS. 

2. A little before the last bell, the master of corr- 
monies and the three servers put on their surplices. 
The master of ceremonies helps the officiating priest to 
vest. The first acoljte lights the candles on the altar, 
and the two candles in the sacristy. The censer-bearer 
sees to the fire, that it may be ready when wanted. 

3. The censer-bearer in the midst of the two acolytes 
carrying the candlesticks ; the first, being at his right, 
goes behind the officiating priest. As a general rule, the 
acolyte at the right will carry the candlestick by hol-ling 
the foot of it with his left hand, and the middle of the 
stem with his right; and vice versa^ the one at the left 
should hold the foot with his right, and the stem with 
his left, in such a way that the candlestick be carried 
straight in front of the bearer, without awkwardness or 
afiectation. 

4. At the sign of the master of ceremonies, all bow to 
the cross, and proceed to the altar in the following order: 
First walks the censer-bearer with his hands joined, then 
the two acolytes, carrying the candlesticks, then the 
master of ceremonies, and lastly, the officiating priest. 

5. Having arrived before the lowest step of the altar, 
the servers place themselves in front, sufficiently distant 
from the step to leave space for the officiating priest. 
The priest gives his cap to the master of ceremonies, who 
receives it with the usual kisses. Then all make a genu- 
flection on the floor. All having risen, the priest and 
master of ceremonies kneel on the lowest step, and the 
acolytes go on each side of the altar, and place the can- 
dlesticks on the lowest step, one at the Gospel side, the 
other at the Epistle side, and put out the candles; after 
which they go in the middle, one on each side of the 
censer- bearer, where they all make a genuflection and go 
to their bench. 

6. In the meantime, the priest says the Aperi, Domine, 
after which he rises, makes a genuflection and the mas- 
ter of ceremonies accompanies him to the bench.* Being 
arrived at the bench, the priest says, in a low voice, the 

*It is customary in Rome for the celebnnt to sit clovvu for a brief 
time before commeucing the Vespers, 



VESPERS. 75 

Pater SLiid A'vey after \Y\nGh lie intones, Deus in adju- 
torium meurn intende^ at the same time making the sign 
of the cross on himself, while the master of ceremonies 
raises the right border of the cope. All bow at the 
Gloria Patri^ towards the altar, and at the common ct)- 
ment of the Fsalm all sit. The priest, having received 
the cap from the master of ceremonies, puts it on, and 
the master of ceremonies also sits."^ 

7. Whenever the Gloria Patri is snng, the priest takes 
off his cap, the master of ceremonies giving him notice to 
that effect each time, bj rising and bowing to him. He 
also raises the border of the cope, and inclines towards 
the altar during the Gloria Patri^ or at any similar occur- 
rence, and does not sit till the former replaces the cap on 
his head. The officiating priest takes oif his cap at the 
names of Jesus^ Mary, and of the saint whose feast is 
celebrated, and at the words, Sit nomen Dotnini hene- 
dictum. 

8. Towards the end of the last Psalm, the censer- 
bearer rises, making a genuflection before the altar^ bows 
to the officiating priest, and goes to the sacristy to pre- 
pare the censer. The acolytes also rise, make a genu- 
flection and a bow with the censer-bearer. They light 
the candles on their candlesticks, and with them they 
proceed to the middle before the lowest step, make a 
genuflection, and go to the officiating priest, to whom 
they bow, and then place themselves one on each side 
of the book-stand, facing each other, where they stand 
till the commencement of the hymn, unless it is the 
Ave Maris Stella, or Veni Creator Spiritus, in which 
case they will wait till the end of the flrst strophe, after 
which they salute the officiating priest, go to the middle 
of the altar, make a genuflection, and go to replace the 
candlesticks in their place, but do not put out the can- 
dles ; then they return to their seats. 

9. The Psalms being ended, the priest rises, after giving 
his cap to the master of ceremonies, sings the chapter 
out of the book, before him, during which he remains 

*Tbe master of ceremonies should not sit on the celebrant's bench, 
but on a stool near it. 



76 VESPERS. 

standing. Then, in tlie same ])o.-ition, tlic liymn being 
tinished, he intones tlie antiphon of tlie Miognijicat. 
^Vhilst the choir sings the said antiphon, the prie&t sit^, 
and puts on his cap. 

10. As soon as the -Magnificat is commence d, the priest 
takes off his cap, rises, and, with his hands joined, goes 
to the altar, accompanied by the master of cerenionie?^, 
and makes a genuflection on the floor. {Cer. Ep.) TJien 
he goos up to the altar, while the master of ceretTionies 
raises a little the lowest part of his vestments. Having 
arrived on the platform, the priest bows to the cross, and 
kisses the altar. At this time the censer-bearer, having 
made a genuflection on the lowest step at the Epistle side, 
goes up to the priest, gives the incense-boat to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, and raises the censer so that th.e priest 
may put incense in it. The master of ceremonies pre- 
sents the little spoon, kissing it first, and then the priest's 
hand (unless the Blessed Sacrament be exposed), and 
says, Benedicite^ Pater Eeverende. The priest having 
put incense into the censer, returns the spoon to the 
master of ceremonies, and makes a sign of the cross on 
the censer, saying Ah illo henedicaris, etc. Then the 
censer-bearer lowers the censer's cover, gives it to the 
master of ceremonies, from whom he receives the incense- 
boat, and steps down to the floor, where he places the 
boat on the credence-table, and quickly passes to the 
Gospel side to raise the border of the cope for the cele- 
brant. The master of ceremonies presents the censer to 
the officiating priest in the usual manner, and with the 
usual kisses. 

11. The officiating priest incenses the altar in the man- 
ner prescribed in Ko. 6, Art. 7, of the chapter on High 
Mass. While he incenses the altar he says the Mag- 
nificat i''^ at the same time, the master of ceremonies 
and censer-bearer acconipany him, supporting the bor- 
ders of the cope. 

12. Having incensed the altar, the priest gives the 
censer to the master of ceremonies, who receives it witli 

*Tliis recitatii^n of the Magnificat is not prescribed, 3'L't il is the cus- 
tom in Rome. 



YESPRRS. 77 

the usual kisses, and returns it to tlie censer-bearer. Then 
lie i^oes to the middle of the altar, where he s i ys the 
Gloria Fairly bowing at the same time; after which lie 
descends the steps from the middle, makes a genuflection 
on the lowest step, and returns to his bench, where lie is 
incensed with three swings by the master of ceremonies, 
who, for that purpose, shall have stopped at a convenient 
distance from the priest's bench, bowing to him before 
and after incensing, and the priest returning the bow 
after being incensed. 

13. Then the master of ceremonies returns the cen?er 
to the censer-bearer, and bowing to the priest, he goes to 
his place. The censer-bearer from the midd le of the s.inc- 
tnary, incenses the master of ceremonies and the two 
acolytes, the former with two swings and the others with 
one, bowing to them, and they to him. 

11-. Then, having made a genuflection in the middle of 
the floor, he goes to tiie railings, and from there he in- 
censes the people, first towards the middle, then at the 
Gospel side, and lastly, at the Epistle side, bowing before 
and after the incensing. After which he returns to the 
sacristy, making a genuflection as he passses before the 
altar, and bowing to the ofliciating piiest. 

15. The priest, being incensed, remains standing at his 
place till the end of the Magnificat^ bowing w^ith the 
rest at the Gloria Patri. 

16. If the choir sings the antiphon, the priest will sit 
and cover his head; he rises at the end of it to sing 
Dominus vohiscum and the prayer or prayers out of the 
book before him, bowing at the Per l)ominiim nostrum 
Jesum^ etc. 

17. The two acolytes, after the Magnificat^ at the Sicut 
erat, take the candlesticks, go to the middle, where they 
make a genuflection, thence to the officiating priest; 
they salute him, place themselves as before mentioned, 
and remain there till after all the prayers are sung. 
After the DowAnus vobiscum^ they salute the priest, and 
go to the middle, make a genuflection, and there they re- 
main standing daring the anthem of the Blessed Virgin 
and its prayer. After the Pivinum auxilium^ they 

7* 



T8 VESPERS. 

make a genuflection with the priest, and walk before 
him to the sacristy. 

18. The priest, having snng the prayers, sings Dominus 
vohiscurri. The Benedicamtis Domino is sung by one or 
two members of the choir, after which the priest says, in 
a lower tone of voice, Fidelium anmioe,^ etc., and goes to 
the ahar, accompanied by the master of ceremonies. 

19. At the foot of the altar, the priest and master of 
ceremonies make a genntlecticn, after which lie says. 
Pater Noster^iw a low voice; and then intones i?r)mmw5 
det nohis siiam jpacewi. Then the anthem of the Blessed 
Virgin is said or sung by the choir, during w^hich time 
the priest stands or kneels, according to the season. At 
the end of the anthem, he says, or sings, in the ferial 
tone, standing, the prayer, and, after it, Diviniim auxil- 
ium. After which, all make a genuflection, and w^alk 
to the sacristy, the priest with his cap on ; and there, 
they bow to the cross, and unvest. 

Article III. 

Should Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament be given 
immediately after Vespers, the priest retains the cope he 
wore at Vespers and, after singing Dimnuiii auxUiuni^ 
lie piUs on the stole. 

The acolytes, having left the celebrant after theDo77ii- 
nus vohiscum^ which is said after the prayer, go to the 
middle ; there, they genuflect with the thurifer (who 
will await them if necessary after having incensed the 
people) and accompany him to the sacristy. During the 
anthem of the Blessed Virgin they will light the candles 
on the altar. They return to the sanctuary with the 
thurifer, and after genuflecting with him, kneel on either 
side of the altar. The thurifer stands or kneels in the 
middle, behind the celebrant. If steps are used to place 
the Blessed Sacrament on the throne, one of the acolytes 
will attend to this. If there are torch bearers (four or 
six would do), these acconipany the thurifer to the sac- 
risty also, and returning, kneel at either side of him 
behind the celebrant during Benediction. The humeral- 
veil, card with prayers, and stole may be placed on the 
side table before Vespers. 



BEl^EDICTIOi^ OF THE BLESSED SACRAMEI?^T, 79 

CHAPTER XL 

benediction of the blessed sackament.* 

Article L 

What is to he Prejpared, 

1. There should be, at least, twelve lighted candles 
on the altar whenever the Blessed Sacrament is exposed 
in the monstrance, and Benediction given with it.f 

2. Likewise a throne, or small canopy, shonld be placed 
on the highest step over the altar, between the candle- 
sticks ; and in the canopy, a corporal or pall, on which 
the Blessed Sacrament is to be placed. 

3. On the altar, a burse with another corporal, the 
monstrance covered with a white veil, and the key of 
the tabernacle.:!: 

4. On the side-table, a white benediction veil, and the 
book containing the prayers. 

5. In the sacristy, a surplice, white stole, and cope for 
the officiating priest.§ 

6. A surplice and white stole, for the priest or deacon, 
if there be one, who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament. 

7. A sufficient number of surplices for the clerks that 
are to assist the priest, and for the torch-bearers. 

8. Two, four, or even eight torches, to be carried by 
as many clerks. 

9. The censer, and the incense-boat. 

* Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament shonld not be ffiven 
without permission from the Ordinary. (Bdnedict XIV, Instit. XXX 
n. 9, and S. R. C, 28th April, 1640, 18th Dec, 1647.) 

t Benedict XIV, Instit. XXX, 22, 24. 

i The cross, unless it be too difficult to remove, the altar cards, and 
reliquaries should be removed from the altar. {Benedict XIV ibid , 
n. 17.) 

§ According to Merati (Part iv, tit. xii, n. 30), it is commendable for 
the priest to wear an amice, alb, cincture, stole, and cope. 



80 LENEDICTIOJif OF THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 



Article II. 

CEREMONIES TO BE PERFORMED WHEN THERE IS BUT 
ONE PRIEST. 

1. The officiating priest"' having put on his surplice, 
stole and cope, preceded by the censer-bearer and the 
acolytes carrying the lighted torches, tvro by two, goes 
to the altar, makes a genuflection, rises, and kneels on 
the lowest step ; the acolytes with their torches, forming 
a line at some distance behind the officiating priest, make 
a genuflection with him, and then kneel in the same place 
till the end of the ceremony. f 

2. The priest rises, goes up to the altar, unfolds the 
corporal, and extends it in the middle; then he opens 
the tabernacle, makes a genuflection on one knee, takes 
the Blessed Sacrament from the tabernacle,^ and puts it 
in the monstrance. § By this time, if necessary, one of 
the servers shall have carried the stool or steps to the 
platform of the altar, that the priest may reach the place 
of exposition ; the priest makes another genuflection on 
one knee, and exposes the Blessed Sacrament, then he 
joins his hands, and makes a low bow, and another genu- 
flection having reached the platform ; after which, turn- 
ing to his right, he descends, kneels on the lowest step, 
bows, rises, and turns to his right, to put incense in the 

*When Benediction is given immediately afrer Vesper?, the cele- 
brant keeps the same cope which lie wore at Vespers. Also, when 
the Benediction is given immediately after High Mass, the celebrant 
keeps the stole he had on, and having taken ofl" the chasuble and 
maniple at his usual seat, he puts on a cope of the color used at Mass. 
If High Mass be celebrated with deacon and sub-deacon, thpy take 
off their maniples only, and assist at the Benediction of the Blessed 
Sacrament. 

fThe censer-bearer may kneel in the middle, between the torch- 
bearers. 

t At this time, where such is the custom, the choir commences the 
hymn, iSalutaris Ilostia ! 

§ Should the piiest touch the Blessed Sacrament, he ought to purify 
his fingers in the little vase l^ept for that purpose near the tabernacle, 
and wipe them with the purificator. 



BENEDICTION OF THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 81 

censer; the censer-bearer goes to the priest with the 
censer, who puts incense in, without, however, blessing 
it. If there are clerks assisting the priest, they rise with 
him: the one at the right receives the incense-boat from 
the censer-bearer, and presents the spoon to the priest ; 
the other, at the left, supports the border of the cope, as 
the priest puts incense in the censer. 

3. Then the priest kneels on the lowest step, takes the 
censer, and in the usual manner, incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament with three swings,"^* bowing before and after. 
During the incensing, the censer-bearer, if there are no 
assisting clerks, kneels at the right of the priest, hold- 
ing the border of the cope; then he receives back the 
censer, and goes to his place, where he kneels. 

4. In the meantime, the choir may sing such hymns 
and antiphons as are approved by the Church,'!' or by 
ancient usage; nevertheless they should be in the Latin 
language. The corresponding versicles and responses 
may be sung also; last of all, the whole hymn, Pange 
lingua^ etc., or the two last strophes, Tantum ergo^ etc., 
and Genitori, etc., should be sung, and after it, the ver- 
sicle, Panem de ccbIo, etc., and the prayer, Deus qui 
nobis, etc. 

5. During the Tantmn ergo, at the words, veneremur 
cernui, all make a low bow, without, however, pros- 
trating themselves. :j: 

6. All remain kneeling, unless the Te Deum be sung, 
during which they stand, except at the verse, Te ergo quce- 
sumus, etc., during which verse they kneel; at the com- 
mencement of Genitori,% the priest, his assistants, and 
the censer-bearer bow, rise, and incense is put in the 
censer, as is said in n. 2, and the Blessed Sacrament is 
incensed again, as before indicated.! 

■•''Tbe B'essed Sacrament is to be incensed '■'tripUci dnctu.'^ 

f Alex. VIL comiit. Fice SoUcitudinis. Benedict XI V^ cjnstit. Inter 
omnigenas. Gardell. 

X Such is the practice in Kome and through all Italy, and it seems 
very becoming as an expression of deep sentiment ol" reverence. 

§ Merati, pars, ix, lit. xii, 31. Gardell, I xxxiv, 17. 

II The officiating priest incenses the Blessed Sacrament only twice, 
as is indicated. lUL Rom., Coerem. Epis.^ and Instruct., Clem. XI, 
n.2. 



82 BEi?"EDICTI02T OF THE BLESSED SACBAMENT. 

7. The liymn being finished, the singers, or the cele- 
brant, intone the versicle, Panem de coelo, etc. ; the clioir 
answers, Omne delectamenUim^ etc. During Paschal 
time and the Octave of Corpus Christi, Alleluia^ is added 
both to the versicle and response. After this, the priest 
rises and without making a genuflection or bow, sings, 
Oreinus^^ Deus qui nobis sid> Sacramento^ etc., out of 
the book, which, in the absence of sacred ministers, he 
holds in his hands. 

He concludes the prayer with these words, Qui vivis 
et regnas in scbcuIo sceculorum ;X neither before nor after 
this prayer Domimis vobiscum is said. 

8. After the prayer, the priest kneels, and if there is 
no one assisting, the censer-bearer goes to the side-table, 
takes the benediction-veil, and extends it on the priest's 
shoulders; then, if necessary, he carries the steps to the 
middle of the platform ; then the priest bows, rises, goes 
to the platform, makes a genuflection on one knee, takes 
down the Blessed Sacrament from the throne, places it 
on the corporal, and makes another genuflection. In the 
meantime the steps are removed. 

9. The priest then turns the back of the monstrance 
to his face; then covering his hands with the extremities 
of the veil, he takes hold of it at the highest part of its 
foot with his right hand, and at the lowest with his left; 
then he turns to his right on the Epistle side towards the 
people, raises the monstrance as high as his eyes, brings 
it down lower than his breast, then he raises it in a 
straight line as high as liis breast, afterwards brings it to 
his left shoulder, and completes the circle, turning him- 
self to the altar to his right, on the Gospel side. At last, 
he places it on the altar, turns its forepart towards his 
face, and makes a genuflection.§ 

* Merati^ pars iv, tit. xii. Gardell., g xxxiv, 17. 

t Garden, xxiv, 22. 

% Other prayers taken from the Missal may be added (especially the 
collect ordered by the Ordinary), under the same conclusion. (S. B. 
a, 7th Sept., 1850.) 

§"Sacerdos, ostensorium manibus tenens, verlit se a parte Epis- 
tQlae, ita ut in medio Altaris populam respiciat. T^^c Ulud elevi\t 



BENEDICTION?" OF THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 83 

10. During Benediction the priest is silent,* but a few 
strokes of the hand-bell may give notice of Benediction 
being given ; also, the censer-bearer raay incense the 
Blessed Sacrament with three swings.f The organ may 
play a grave and sweet melody during Benediction, as 
at the elevation, during Mass. 

11. The priest having replaced the monstrance on the 
altar, makes a genuflection on one knee, and is in the 
meantime divested of the benediction-veil ; having risen, 
he takes the Blessed Sacrament out of the monstrance, 
puts It in the tabernacle, makes a genuflection, closes 
the tabernacle, goes down to the lowest step, makes a 
genuflection with the clerks, and in the same order as he 
came to the altar, returns to the sacristy. 

12. Whilst the Blessed Sacrament is replaced in the 
tabernacle, the psalm, Laudate Dominum omnes gentes, 
or anything suitable for the occasion, may be sung. 

Article III. 

WHEN THE OFFICIATING PRIEST IS ASSISTED BY ANOTHER 
PRIEST, OR BF DEACON AND SUB-DEACON. 

1. If a priest or deacon assist at the Benediction, he 
walks from the sacristy before the officiating priest. He 
carries the stole folded on his left arm. At the altar, he 

decent! mora, non supra caput, sed tantum usque ad oculos, et eodem 
modo illud dimiltit infra pectus; mox iterum recte illud attoUit usque 
ad pectas; et deinde ad siaistrutn humerum dacit, et reducit ad dex- 
terum, nee ante pectas reducit, sed continue se converlit ad coruu 
Evangelii; perficiens circulum, nee tamen, dutn Orucuni efFormat, 
movens pedes." {Co&r. Epis.) 

*The Benediction wiili tlie Blessed Sacrament is to be given in 
eilence by tbe celebrant, wliether he be a Bishop or a priest, according 
10 the Roman Ritual, tbe Ceremonial of Bishops, and several decisions 
ot tlie Sacred Congregation of Rites, 9th Feb., 1762. 

t Neither the ringing of the bell, nor the incensmg during Bene- 
diction is prescriced by the Rubrics, yet, in many well-regulated 
churches in Europe, the custom prevails of doing either or both. In 
fact it would seem that, the priest having already incensed the Blessed 
Sacrament, an inferior should not afterwards incense it; yet, the es- 
tablished custom may be followed. In some places even, the large 
chiirch bell announces to the people that, at that moment, God, in Hia 
mercy, blesses them. 



8i BEi?"EDICTIOJq- OF THE BLESSED SACRAirEN"T. 

tates his place at the right of the officiating clergyman. 
After making the genuflection with the otliers, he puts 
on the stole,* goes up to the predella, unfolds the corpo- 
ral in the middle of the altar, opens the door of the 
tabernacle, and makes a genuflection on one knee. In 
making a genuflection on the predella, he turns his body 
a little towards the Epistle side to avoid turning his back 
to the officiating priest. He exposes the Blessed Sacra- 
ment in the manner prescribed in Art. II, n. 2. 

2. Having made the genuflection after the exposition, 
he turns to his left, goes down, kneels on the lowest step, 
and takes off the stole without kissing it. Then, having 
bowed with the officiating priest, he rises, moves a little 
backward so as to allow the censer-bearer to pass at his 
right in going to the officiating priest w^ith the censer. 
He receives the incense-boat, and presents the spoon to 
the officiating priest w^ithout kisses. Incense having 
been put in the censer, the assistant priest receives back 
the spoon, returns the boat to the censer-bearer, and from 
him he receives the censer, which he presents to the 
officiating priest in the usual manner, but without kisses. 
He bows with the officiating priest, and holds up the 
border of the cope during the incensing. He bows again 
with him, takes the censer, and returns it to the censer- 
bearer. 

3. At the GenitoT% he bows, and rises with the offi- 
ciating priest for the incense, in which he proceeds as 
before. 

4. After the prayer, Deus qui nobis sub Sacramento^ 
etc., he puts on the stole, goes up to the altar, and, with 
the usual genuflections, he takes the monstrance, places 
it on the corporal, extended in the middle of the altar, 
and makes another genuflection. In the meantime, the 
benediction-veil is extended on the shoulders of the offi- 
ciating priest by a clerk, or by the censer-bearer. He 
rises when the celebrant arrives at the predella, hands 
to him the ostensorium, and assists in adjusting the 
humeral-veil. 

* If a deacon assists, he should put on the stole, suspending it from 
his left shoulder to his right tide, under his arm. 



BE2!?'EDICTI0N' OF THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 85 

5. During the Benediction he kneels on the predella,"^ 
and removes the stole. After Benediction lie puts on 
the stole, rises, and takes the ostensorium from the cele- 
brant, places it upon the altar, and genuflects. Ho 
remains in that position, having his back a little towards 
the Epistle corner, until the officiating priest has gono 
down to the foot of the altar and bowed to the Blessed 
Sacrament ; then having risen he takes the Blessed Sac 
rament out of the monstrance, and puts it in the taber- 
nacle. Then he makes another genuflection, closes the 
door of the tabernacle, folds the corporal, places it in 
the burse, and, having gone down to his place, he takes 
off the stole and kisses it. Having given the cap to the 
officiating priest, he makes with him a genuflection on 
the floor, and all return to the sacristy. 

*If it is not the custom for the assisting priest to give the mon- 
strance into the hands of the celebrant, th s need not be done. The 
Form of Exposition and Benediction of the Bless d Sacrament for the 
ArcMiocese of Baltimore does not prescribe it ; hence it is optional 
with the pastors of churches to observe what we have given above, 
or adhere to their Diocesan regulations or customs if opposed to it. 
The custom in Rome is the one we have given. 



PART II. 

According to the small Ritual of Benedict XIII, S. M. 

TO BE USED IN CHURCHES WHERE THERE IS BUT ONE PRIEST. 



(Note. — Tbe acolj^te who, thronghont all these ceremonies, is 
instructed to touch the chalice or ciboiiam, is supposed to be in 
minor orders.) 



CHAPTEE I. 

BLESSING OF CANDLES ON CANDLEMAS DAT. 

Article I. 

OF WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE BENEDICTION, PROCESSION, 

AND MASS. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The chalice for Mass, witli white ornainents, unless 
this festival should fall on one of tlie privileged Sundays; 
in which cat^e the ornaments must be violet. 

2. The chasuble, stole, and maniple, either of white 
or of violet color, as directed above."^ 

3. The censer with the incense-boatf filled with in- 
cense. 

4. The vessel containing holj water, and the sprink- 
ling-brush. :|: 

*Tlie vestments should more properly be placed on the bench. 
fThe box is so called from its form. 

J We shall hereafter use the simpler term ''sprinkle," as in Wor- 
cester's Dictionary. 

(W) 



BLESSIITG OF CANDLES. 87 

5. A plate with some bread, and a basin with a pitcher 
of water, to wash the hands of the priest, after the dis- 
tribution of the candles. 

6. A towel. 

7. A plate containing the cruets with wine and water, 
and a small towel to w4pe the fingers. 

At the Altar, 

1. A violet altar-veil,* that can be easily removed ; or, 
white, if the Mass be of the Blessed Yirgin. 

2. The Missal on the Epistle side, supported by a 
violet cushion, or a small bookstand. 

At the Epistle Side on the Floor of the Sanctuary, 

1, A table covered with white linen ; and on it, the 
candles to be blessed, covered likewise with another 
white linen cloth. 

2. The processional cross. 

In the Sacristy, 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, with stole and cope of 
violet color, for the celebrant. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

CEREMONIES TO BE PERFORMED ON CANDLEMAS DAY. 

Section I. — Of the Blessing of the Candles, 

1. At the stated time, the acolytes put on their cas- 
socks and surplices, in the sacristy, and prepare every- 
thing as in the preceding chapter. 

2. The faithful should be called to church by the ring- 
ing of the bells. 

3. The celebrant, having made his preparation for 

*The Latin term, "antipendium," is generally used for the veil 
which covers the front of the altar. 



88 BLESSING OF CANDLES. 

Mass, and washed liis hands in the sacristy, being assisted 
by the second and third acolytes, puts on over his cas- 
sock the amice, alb, stole and cope of violet color.* 

4. In the meantime, the first acolyte removes from the 
altar the flower-pots, and lights the candles that are 
on it. 

5. The celebrant, having made a low bow to the cross, 
or to any other sacred image placed in the sacristy, puts 
on his cap, and, being preceded by the first acolyte, walks, 
with his hands joined, to the altar, between the second 
and third acolytes, who raise the lower part of the cope 
at each side. 

6. When he comes to the middle of the altar, he gives 
his cap to the first acolyte, who, having placed it on the 
celebrant's bench, uacovers the candles which are to be 
blessed. 

7. Then the celebrant, still standing on the floor of the 
sanctuary, makes a low bow to the cross (or a genuflec- 
tion on the lowest step, if the Blessed Sacrament be in 
the tabernacle), ascends the altar, and kisses it in the 
middle. If the holy water is to be given, the celebrant, 
kneeling on the lowest step, intones the anthem, Asperges^ 
and does as is prescribed in the Missal, and afterwards 
goes up to the altar. 

8. The celebrant, having kissed the altar, goes to the 
Epistle side, having always the two acolytes at his sides, 
as in No. 5. 

9. There, having his face turned towards the altar, and 
his hands joined, he says in the ferial tone, Dominus 
vohisGicm, Oremus^ the prayer, Domine Sancte^ with the 
tour following prayers. 

10. In the meantime, the first acolyte puts fire in the 
censer, holding it and the incense-boat in his hands. 

11. While the celebrant is saying the fifth prayer, the 
third acolyte, who is on his left side, having made a genu- 
flection towards the altar, goes to the side-table, takes 
from it the holy-water vase, and, with the acolyte who 
carries the censer, goes to him. 

* Should this festival fall on Sunday, the celebrant, vested as above 
blesses the water for the Asperges, as in the Missal. 



DISTRIBUTION^ OF CANDLES. 89 

12. The celebrant, after the fifth prayer, receiving the 
incense-spoon from the second acolyte, wlio is at his right 
side, and who, as usual kisses first the spoon and then 
his hand, takes the incense-boat, puts the incense in the 
censer, and blesses it. 

13. Then having received the sprinkle from the second 
acolyte, he sprinkles the candles thrice, viz., in the mid- 
dle, at the right, and at the left, saying with a low voice, 
Asperges me^ etc., without the Miserere. 

14. Afterwards he incenses the caudles thrice, savinor 
Drilling. 

i5. The blessing being ended, the celebrant bows in 
the middle of the altar, and retires to the Gospel side, 
and then explains the institution of this solemnity, the 
meaning of the ceremonies, and the use of the candles, 
that the faithfal may come and receive them in a proper 
and respectful manner. 

Section II. — Of the Distribution of the Candles. 

1. After the sermon, the first acolyte takes from the 
table a candle for the celebrant, and, if there is no other 
priest present, puts it on the middle of the altar. 

2. The celebrant, having bowed in the middle of the 
altar, kneels on the platform, with his face turned towards 
the cross. 

3. Whilst kneeling down, he takes from the altar the 
candle, kisses it, and hands it to the first acoljte.* 

4. Then he goes to the Epistle side, and recites alter- 
nately with the acolytes, in a loud and even voice, 
Lumen^ etc., and the Canticle, Nunc dimittis^ etc. 

5. The anthem, Lumen^ etc., having been repeated 
after Sicut erat^ the celebrant bows to the cross, turns 
towards the people, distributes the candles, first to the 
priests (if any be present), then to the acolytes kneeling 
on the edge of the platform, who all kiss first the candle, 
and then his hand. 



*If there is another priest, he gives the candle to the celebrant, 
who stands, having his face turned towards the people: the priest 
kisses the candle only, which is also done by the celebrant on 
receiving it. 



90 PROCESSIOI^ OF CANDLEMAS DAY. 

6. The celebrant having bowed to the altar between 
the acoljteSj goes to the chancel, or rails, at the Epistle 
side. 

7. There he begins to distribute the candles, which are 
brought thither by the second acoljte, and handed to the 
celebrant by the third. 

8. The distribution of the candles being ended, the 
celebrant washes his hands at the Epistle side; the first 
acolyte pours the water, and the two others offer the 
towel. 

9. The celebrant, having washed his hands, goes to 
the middle of the altar, bows to the cross, and then 
ascends in a straight line with it, until he arrives at the 
centre of the platform, when he turns to the book at the 
Epistle side. 

10. There he recites with the acolytes the anthem, 
Exurge Domine^ etc., with a loud voice. 

11. Then standing in the same place, he says, Oremus^ 
and if Candlemas day comes after Septuagesima, and 
not on a Sunday, he subjoins, Fleciamt/s genua^ kneeling 
at the same time with all the others; and the second 
acolyte, first rising, answers, Levate. 

12. Afterwards the celebrant says the prayer, Exaudi 
qucBSumus, etc., keeping always his hands joined. 

Section III. — Of the Procession. 

1. The prayer being ended, the celebrant goes to the 
middle of the altar, where he receives from the first aco- 
lyte a lighted candle, and a copy of this Ceremonial^ or 
the Kitual for the anthems, to be recited during the pro- 
cession. 

2. The two other acolytes take likewise lighted can- 
dles, and copies of this Ceremonial. 

3. The celebrant turns towards the people, and says, 
Procedamus in pace ^ and the acolytes answer, In nomine 
Christi. Amen. 

4. The celebrant begins to recite the anthem, Adorna, 
etc., as below, and continues all the anthems with the 
acolytes alternately. 



PROCESSION OF CANDLEMAS DAY. 91 

5. After the acolytes have, as directed above, an- 
swered. In nomine Christi. A7nen ; the first acoljte 
takes the processional cross, and having made a genu- 
flection before the altar, turns towards the people, and 
leads the procession either ont of the church, or within 
it, as may be customary, and turning to his right, and 
going roimd, returns to the altar. 

6. The celebrant follows him between the other aco- 
lytes, reciting with them the following anthems, which, 
for greater convenience, are divided into verses: 

Antiph. Adorna thalamum tuum^ Sion ; et suscijpe 
Hegem Christum. 

Am^plectere Mariam : quae est codestis porta. 

Ipsa enim regem portat glo^'ice, novi luminis. 

Subsistit Yirgo, adduceiis manihus Filium ante luci- 
ferum genitum : quem acoipiens Simeon i7i ulnas suas, 
prcedicavit populis : Dominmn eum esse vitcB et mortis, 
et Salvatorem Mundi. 

Responsum accepit Simeon de Spiritu Sancto : non 
msurum se mortem, nisi videret Christum Domini : 

Et cum inducer ent puerwm in templum j accepit eum 
in ulnas suas, et henedixit Deum^, et dixit : 

Nunc dimittis servum tuum, Domine : secundum ver- 
hum tuum in pace. 

Cum inducerent puerum Jesum parentes ejus, ut face- 
rent secundum consuetudinem legis pro eo^ ipse accepit 
eum in ulnas suas. 

7. As the procession enters the church, if it was made 
outside; or the sanctuary, if it did not go out of the 
church, the following Response is recited : 

Resp. Ohtulerunt Domino par turturum, aut duos 
pullos columbarum : 

Sicut scriptum est, in lege Domini. 

Postquam impleti sunt dies purgationis Marioe : se- 
cundum legem Moysis : 

Tulerunt Jesum in Jerusalem: ut sister ent eum 
Domino. 

Sicut scriptum est : in lege Domini. 

Gloria Patri et Filio : et Spiritui Sancto. 

Sicut scriptum est: in lege Domini, 



92 ASH-WEDN-ESDAY. 

8. The acolyte, who carries the cross, after having 
made a genuflection before the altar, leaves it at its 
place. 

9. The celebrant ends the Eesponses before the altar. 

Section TV. — Of the Mass after the Procession, 

1. The Responses being ended, the first acolyte re- 
ceives the candles from the celebrant, and from the other 
acolytes, and places them on a table. 

2. The celebrant goes to the bench, whereon he iisuallj 
Bits in solemn Masses, attended by the second and third 
acolytes, puts off the cope, and puts on the violet chas- 
uble and the maniple for the Mass of the Sunday. 

3. In the meantime, in case the Mass is to be said of 
the festival, the first acolyte removes from the altar the 
violet front veil, leaving the white one, and places the 
flower-pots between the candle-sticks. 

4. The celebrant goes to the altar to say Mass, in the 
course of which, if it be of the testival, the acolytes hold 
lighted candles during the Gospel, and from the elevation 
till after the communion. 

5. Mass being ended, the celebrant, preceded bj the 
acolytes, returns to the sacristy. 

There he makes his thanksgiving as usual. 

6. The acolytes take everything from the altar and the 
table, and carry them to the sacristy, arranging them in 
their proper places. 

CHAPTER II. 

OF THE BENEDICTION OF THE ASHES ON ASH-W^EDNESDAT. 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE BKEPARED FOK THE BENEDICTION AND MASS. 

On the Side-table near the Altar, 

1. A CHALICE, with a veil of violet color. 

2. A violet maniple and chasuble.* 

* These should be placed on the beach. 



ASH-WED>?'ESDAY. 93 

3. The censer and boat, with incense. 

4. The holy-water vase, with a sprinkle. 

5. A plate, with crumbs of bread ; and a basin, with a 
pitcher of water, to wash the hands of the priest after 
the distribution of the ashes. 

6. A toweh 

7. A plate containino^ the cruets with wine and water, 
and a small towel to wipe the fingers. 

On the Altar, 

1. A violet altar-veil, the cross, and candlesticks with 
candles, but no flower-pots. 

2. The Missal on the Epistle side, supported bj a book- 
Btand. 

3. A vessel containing the ashes, made out of the 
boughs blessed on Palm Sunday, which should be dry 
and sifted, covered cither with a lid of the same material 
as the vessel, or with a violet veil, and placed between 
the Missal and the Epistle side. 

In the Sacristy, 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and copG. 

3. A chafing-dish with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO EE PERFORMED ON ASH- 
WEDNESDAY. 

Section I. — Blessing of the Ashes, 

1. Everything having been prepared, as above, by the 
acolytes in surplices, the people should be called to 
church by the usual ringing of the bells. 

2. The celebrant, having washed his hands in the sac- 
risty, attended by the second and third acolytes, puts on 
over the surplice, the amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and 
co])e. 

3. The first acolyte lights the eandles on the altar, and 
returns to the sacristy. 



94 ASH-WEDITESDAY. 

4. All having bowed to the cross, or the principal pic- 
ture in the sacristy, go to the altar. 

5 The first acolyte, having his hands joined, walks 
before, then the celebrant with his head covered, between 
the second and third acolytes. 

6. The celeljrant gives his cap to the first acolyte, and 
bows to the altar. 

7. He goes up to the altar, having at his side the 
second and third acolytes, and kisses it in the middle. 

8. In the meantime, the first acolyte, having placed 
the cap on the celebrant's bench, uncovers the ashes. 

9. The celebrant goes to the Epistle side, and says, 
with the acolytes, the anthem, Exaudi. 

10. In the meantime, the first acolyte prepares the 
censer with the fire. 

11. The anthem, Exaudi^ having been repeated, the 
celebrant, standing in the same place, without turning 
tow^ards the people, says in a ferial tone, and having his 
liands joined, Dominus vobisciiin^ and the four prayers, 
as in the Missal. 

12. Whilst the celebrant is saying the fourth prayer, 
the third acolyte, having made a genuflection before the 
altar, takes the holy-w^ater vase, and wdth the censer- 
bearer, goes to the celebrant. 

13. The celebrant, assisted by the second acolyte, puts 
the incense in the censer, blesses it, and afterwards 
sprinkles and incenses the ashes, as usual. 

14. The blessing being ended, the vessel containing 
the ashes is placed in the middle of the altar. 

15. The celebrant addresses the congregation from the 
altar, on the ceremony of the ashes. 

Sechon II. — Of the Putting on the Ashes. 

1. The celebrant, if no other priest is present, having 
made a reverence to the cross, kneels down in the middle 
of the platform of the altar, and wdiilst thus kneeling, 
puts ashes on his own head, saying nothing. 

2. Bnt if another priest is present, this priest without 
stole goes to the altar, and puts ashes on the head of the 
celebrant, who stands, bowing, and having his face turned 



ASH- WEDNESDAY. 95 

towards the people, tlie priest saying, Memento homo, 
quia pulvis cs ; et in jpulverem reverter is. 

3. The celebrant liaving received the ashes, goes to 
the Missal on the Epistle side, and recites, with the aco- 
lytes, the anthem, Iminutemur^ with all that follows. 

4. Then the celebrant puts the ashes on the clergy (if 
any are present), who kneel at the edge of the platform 
of the altar, the first of them in dignity being the nearest 
to the Epistle side. He says to each one, Memento^ etc. 

5. Tlie celebrant having bowed to the altar, goes 
between the second and third acolytes, to the railing at 
the Epistle side, and puts the ashes first on the men, 
then on the women. 

6. After the putting on of the ashes, the celebrant, 
standing on the floor of the sanctuary at the Epistle side, 
attended by the acolytes, washes his hands, cleaning 
them with crumbs of bread, and wipes them. 

Y. Then he goes np to the altar by the steps that are 
in front of it, having made a bow in the middle, and 
goes to the Epistle side. 

8. Thus, having his face turned towards the altar, with 
his hands joined, he says, Dominus vobiscum^ and the 
prayer, Concede nobis, Domine, and having made a bow 
to the altar in the same place, descends to the Epistle 
side. 

Section III. — Of the Mass. 

1. The celebrant, going to the Epistle side, near the 
bench, assisted by the acolytes, takes off the cope, puts 
on the maniple and chasuble. 

2. He goes to the altar for the Mass, in which every- 
thing is to be done as in the Missal. 

3 After Mass, the celebrant, preceded by the acolytes, 
returns to the sacristy with his hands joined, puts oli* tlie 
|acre4 yestmentSj and m^kes his thanksgiving. 



96 PALM SUNDAY. 



CHAPTER HI. 

OF PALM SUNDAY. 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED CEREMONIES OF 
THIS SUNDAY. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The chalice, with its ornaments of violet color for 
Mass. 

2. The maniple and chasuble, of violet color.* 

3. The censer, with the incense-boat. 

4. A basin, with a pitcher of water, and a towel. 

5. A plate, with cruets containing wine and water, and 
a iiDger-towel. 

6. Copies of this Ceremonial^ for what is to be recited 
at the procession. 

On the Altar, 

1. The violet antipendium. 

2. The Missal, on the Epistle side, on a cushion, or a 
small stand. 

3. Branches of palms in place of ilowers, between the 
candlesticks. 

By the side of the Epistle on the floor. 

1. A table, covered with a white linen cloth, and on it 
the palms to be blessed. 

2. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, stole and cope of violet 
color for the celebrant. 

3. A chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

4. The holy-water vase, with the sprinkle. 

* As before said, these should more properly be placed on the bench. 



PALM SUis"DAY. 97 

Article II. 

OF THE CEREMONIES TO BE PERFORMED ON PALM SUNDAY. 

Section l.— Of the Blessing of the Palms. 

1. Everything beins^ prepared in its proper place, the 
people should be called to the church by the ringing of 
the bells. 

2. The celebrant, attended by the second and third 
acolytes, puts on in the sacristy the amice, alb, cincture, 
violet stole and cope. 

3. lie blesses the water, as in the Missal; and in the 
meantime the first acolyte lights the candles on the altar. 

4. The celebrant, preceded by the first acolyte, who 
carries the holy-water vase, proceeds to the altar, with 
his head covered, walking betwen the second and third 
acolytes, and kneels on the lowest step, for the sprink- 
ling of the holy water. 

5. When the sprinkling is done, the first acolyte 
removes the holy-water vase and card of the Asperges: 
if the Missal has been nsed,he replaces it on the small 
stand, on the Epistle side of the altar. 

6. The third acolyte puts the maniple on the cele- 
brant's arm. 

7. The celebrant, between the second and third aco- 
lytes, goes up to the altar, kisses it in the middle; retires 
to the Epistle side; and there, in a high and even tone, 
begins the anthem, Hosanna^ which is continued by the 
acolytes. 

8. The celebrant standing in the same place, with his 
hands joined, says Dominus vohiscum, and the prayer, 
Deus, quern diligere, etc. 

9. Then he recites the lesson, and after it he says, with 
the acolytes, the Response, Collegerunt, etc. In monte 
Oliveti, etc. 

10. Having said in the same place, Munda cor meum, 
etc., he reads the Gospel; then kisses the Missal, and 
takes oft* the maniple. 

11. Then he says, Dominus vohiscum^ the prayer, and 



98 PALM SUlTDxiY. 

the preface, keeping his hands joined, whilst he recites 
the above-mentioned and the following prayers. 

12. The acolytes say Sanctus, Sanctus, etc. 

13. The celebrant having said Dominus vohiscum, re- 
cites the five other prayers that follow. 

14. In the meantime, the first acolyte puts fire in the 
censer, and takes the incense-boat. 

15. Whilst the celebrant says the fifth prayer, the 
third acolyte, having made a genuflection towards the 
altar, takes from the side table the holy-water vase, and 
with the censer-bearer goes to the celebrant. 

16. The celebrant, attended by the second acolyte, puts 
incense in the censer, and blesses it. 

17. Then he sprinkles the palms thrice, saying in a low 
voice. Asperses me, etc., without Miserere, and incenses 
them. 

18. The celebrant says again, Dominus vohiscum, and 
then the sixth prayer. 

19. The first acolyte carries back to the sacristy the 
censer, and the second and third acolytes remain with 
the celebrant. 

20. The celebrant addresses to the congregation an 
appropriate instruction. 

Section II. — Of the Distribution of the Palms, 

1. The first acolyte carries from the side-table the 
palms for the celebrant and the acolytes, and lays them 
on the altar. 

2. The celebrant, having bowed to the cross, kneels in 
the middle of the platform before the altar, and takes 
his palm from the altar ; kisses it, and hands it to the first 
acolyte.* 

3. He goes to the Epistle side and recites with the 
acolytes the anthem, Fueri Ilebroeorum, etc. 

4. Then, having bowed to the cross, he turns towards 
the people, and distributes the palms, first to priests, if 

* In case another priest is present, the palm should be given by him 
to the celebrant, as it has been said of the candle, on the feast of the 
Purification. 



PALM SUNDAY. 99 

any are present, then to the acoljtes, who all kneel on 
the edi^e of tlie platform of the altar, beginning from the 
first in. dignity, at the Epistle side ; they all kiss, first the 
palm, then the hand of the celebrant. 

5. The celebrant goes down from the altar, bows before 
it, and goes to the railing of the sanctuary, at the Epistle 
side. 

6. Then the palms are handed to him by the first aco- 
lyte, and he distributes them, first to the men, and then 
to the women. 

7. After the distribution, the celebrant, standing on 
the floor of the sanctuary, attended by two acolytes, 
washes his hands. 

8. He goes by the front steps to the altar, and at the 
Epistle side says, Dominus vobiscum, and the last prayer. 

9. In the meantime, the first acolyte ties with a violet 
ribbon a palm on the top of the processional cross. 

10. After the prayer, the first acolyte gives to the cele- 
brant and to the other acolytes the palms, and a copy of 
this Ceremonial^ to read what is to be recited at the pro- 
cession. 

Section III. — 0/ the Procession. 

1. The celebrant, holding the palm in his hands, turns 
towards the people, and says in the middle of the altar, 
Procedamus in pace. The acolytes answer. In nomine 
Christi. Amen. And the celebrant begins, Cum ap- 

propinquaret, etc. 

2. The acolyte with the cross walks first; then the 
celebrant, between two acolytes, reciting alternately, in 
a loud voice, the following anthems divided into verses. 

3. The procession goes by the right side out of the 
principal door; they recite the following 

A7ithem. 

Cum appropinquaret Dominus Jerosolymam : misit 
duos ex discipulis suis dicens : 

lie in castellamj^ quod contra vos est: et invenietis 
pullum asincB alUgatum, super quern nullus hominum 
sedit : 



100 PALM SUNDAY. 

Solvite eum : et adducite mihi. 

Si quis vos interrogaverit^ dlcite : Opus Domino est. 

Solventes adduxerimt ad Jesuin: et imjposuerunt illi 
vestimenta sua, et sedit super eum. 

Alii expanderunt vestiTnenta sua in via: alii ramos 
de arhoribus sternebant. 

Et qui sequebantur, clamahant : Hosanna, henedictus 
qui venit in nomine Domini. 

Benedictiim regnum patris nostri David: Hosanna in 
excelsis : miserere nobis, Jili David. 

Another Anthem. 

Cum audisset populus, quia Jesus venit Jercsolymam : 
acceperunt ramos paVw.arum, 

Et exierunt ei obviam : et clamahant pueri dicentes : 

Hie est, qui venturus est in salutem popidi. 

Hie est salus nostra, et redemjjtio Israel. 

Quantus est iste : cui Throni et Dominaiiones occur- 
Tunt I 

Noli timer e,filia Sion, ecce Rex tuns venit tibi sedens 
super pullum asince ; sicut scriptum est. 

Sal/ce Rex I'abricator mundi : quivenisti redimere nos. 

Another Anthem. 

Ante sex dies solemnis Paschoe : quando venit Dominus 
in civitatem Jerusalem, 

Occurrerunt ei pueri / et in manibus portabant ramos 
palmarum. 

Et clamabant voce magna dicentes: Hosanna in ex- 
celsis. 

Benedictus qui venisti in multitudine misericordicB 
tucB : Hosanna in excelsis. 

Another Anthem. 

OcGurrunt turbce cum floribus et palmis Redemptori 
obviam: et victori triumphanti digna dant chsequia. 

Eilium Dei ore gentes predicant : et in laudem Christi 
voces tenant per nubila: Hosanna in excelds. 



PALM SUNDAY. 101 



Another Anthem, 

Cum Angelis et p^ieris fideles inveniamiir, triumphatori 
mortis clamantes : Hosanna in excelsis. 

Turha multa^ quce convener at ad diemfestum: clama- 
hant Domino : 

Benedictus qui venit in nom^ine Domini : Hosanna in 
excelsis. 

1. The first acolyte, carrying the cross, stops before the 
principal door, having his face turned towards it. 

2. The second and third acolytes go into the church, 
shut the door, and. turning towards the procession, say : 

Gloria^ Lous et honor Tihi sit, Rex Christe Redemj^tor : 
Cui puerile decus prompsit Hosanna pium. 

3. The celebrant outside of the church, turning towards 
the door, and having on his cap, repeats : 

Gloria, laus et honor, etc. 

Clerks. Israel es Ta Rex, Davidis et inclyta proles, No- 
mine qui in Domini, Rex benedide, venis. 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

Clerks. Ccelus in excelsis Te laudat coelicus omnis, et mor- 
talis homo, et cuncta creata simul. 

CeL Gloria, etc. 

Clerks. Flebs Hcbrcea Tibi cum palmis ohviam venit: 
cum prece, voto, hymnis adsumus ecce Tibi. 

CeL Gloria, laus, etc. 

Clerks. Hi Tibi passuro solvebant munia laudis : nos 
Tibi regnanti pangimus ecce melos. 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

Clerks. Hi pacuere Tibi ; placeat devotio nostra : Rex 
bone, Rex clemens, cui bona cuncta placent, 

Cel. Gloria, etc. 

4. The preceding verses being ended, the first acolyte, 
with the foot of the cross, knocks at the bottom of the 
door; and the two acolytes within the chnrch open the 
door, and place themselves at each side of it. 

5. The first acolyte, carrying the cross, enters the 
church, and the celebrant follows him, beginning the Re- 
sponse, Ingrediente Domino, etc. 



102 PALM SUKDAY. 

6. The second and third acolytes receive the celebrant, 
place him in the middle, and with him continue the Re- 
sponse — 

Ingredlente Domino in Sandam Civilatem, Hebrceorum 
pueri resurredlonem vitce pronunciantes. 

Cum ramis palmarum : Hosanna damahant in excelsis. 

Cam audlssent quod Jesus veniret Jerosolymam : ex- 
ierunt obviam ei. 

Cum ramis palmarum : Hosanna in excelsis. 

7. The procession and Responses are ended before the 
altar. 

8. The first acolyte leaves the cross, takes the palms 
from the celebrant and the clerks. 

9. The celebrant stands on the floor of the sanctuary 
at the Epistle side, where he is accustomed to sit during 
Mass; takes off the cope, puts on the maniple and 
chasuble. 

10. The celebrant proceeds to the altar to celebrate 
Mass. The acolytes hold palms in their hands whilst the 
Passion is read, and during the Gospel. 

11. After Mass, the celebrant, preceded by the acolytes, 
returns to the sacristy. 

12. There he takes off the sacred vestments, and makes 
his thanksgiving. 

13. The acolytes take everything from the altar, and 
from the side-table, and putting them in their proper 
places, retire modestly. 



MAUNDAY-THUESDAY. 103 



CHAPTEK lY. 

OF MAUN DAY-THURSDAY. 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED CEREMONIES OF 
MAUNDAY-THURSDAY. 

On the Altar. 

1. The altar is to be adorned as for solemn festivals ; 
the front veil is to be white. 

2. The cross between the candlesticks is to be covered 
with a white veil. 

3. The Missal to be placed on a white cushion, or 
bookstand, on the Epistle side. 

On the Side-table, 

1. The chalice for Mass, with white ornaments, and 
two large particles. 

2. Another chalice with a pall, a paten, a white veil, 
and a white silk ribbon. 

3. A pjx with small particles to be consecrated for the 
communion of the people. 

4. A small plate with the wine and water crnets, and 
a towel for wiping the fingers. 

5. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

6. The censer with the incense-boat. 

7. A white veil for the shoulders. 

8. The communion-cloth. 

9. The canopy for the procession. 
10. The wooden clapper. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. The surplices for the clerks. 

2. The amice, alb, cincture, maniple, stole, and chas- 
uble; all white. 



104 MAUND AY-THURSDAY. 



3. A white cope. 

4. A violet stole. 



4. A violet stole. 

5. A cliaiing-disb, containing fire. 

6. Candles for the procession. 



In the Repository for the Blessed Sacrament. 

1. This repository is to be prepared apart from the 
principal altar of the church, and hung with precious 
tapestry, which should by no means be of black color ; 
adorned with flowers and lights, but not with relics or 
images of saints. 

2. The repository or urn, in which the chalice witli the 
Blessed Sacrament is to be placed, should be prepared in 
the centre of the altar. It should be finely adorned, and 
secured with lock and key. 

3. There should be a corporal in the repository. 

4. Another corporal on the altar. 

5. Steps to reach to the repository, where the chalice 
is to be placed. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACEED KITES TO BE PERFORMED ON MAUNDAY- 
THURSDAY. 

Section I. — Of the Mass, 

1. The bells, which call the faithful to church, should 
be rung as on festivals. 

2. The acolytes prepare everything as above, in their 
proper place. 

3. Meanwhile the priest hears confessions. 

4. At the stated hour the parish priest of the church 
puts on the sacred vestments for Mass. 

5. The first clerk lights the candles on the altar, and 
the priest places the chalice in the middle of it; and be- 
hind it the pyx containing the small particles. 

6. The celebrant, with his head covered, preceded by 
the first acolyte, and then by the second and third, who 
walk together, each having his hands joined, proceeds to 
the altar for Mass. 



MAUXDAY-THURSDAY. 105 

7. Beginnins: Mass, he does not say the psalm, Judica 
me Dt'us^ nor the Gloria Fatri. 

8. Whilst the Gloria in excelsis is said, they ring the 
bells, which are not rung any more until Holy Saturday. 

9. Besides the usual large particle, another large one, 
and a sufficient number of small ones, are consecrated. 

10. The Agimcs Dei is said, as usual, but the Pax is 
not given. 

11. AVhilst the .lelebrant is saying the prayers before the 
Communion, the first acolyte comes from the side-table to 
the altar, with the empty chalice, pall and paten. 

12. The celebrant having consumed the Sacred Species 
in both kinds, and covered the chalice out of which- he 
communicated, places the other chalice in the middle of 
the altar, and uncovers it. 

13. He kneels, places the consecrated Host in the 
chalice, covers it with a pall and paten on the concave 
side, covers the whole with the veil, and kneels. 

14. He takes the pyx, places it before the chalice 
covered with a veil, uncovers it, kneels, retires to the 
Gospel side, having his face turneii towards the Epistle 
side. 

15. One of the acolytes, kneeling at the Epistle side, 
recites the Confiteor^ the other acolyte and the people 
also kneeling. The celebrant subjoins the Misereatur 
and Indulgentiam, as usual. 

16. The celebrant going to the middle, kneels, takes 
the pyx, and turns round towards the people, and says as 
usual, Acce Agnus Dei, etc. 

17. The acolytes receive Communion at the altar, then 
the peuple at the rails, holding the communion-cloth 
before them. 

18. After the Communion the celebrant retires to the 
altar, covers the pyx, and puts it into the tabernacle. 

19. Then having said, Qiood ore^ etc., he takes the 
first ablution ; kneels, w^ashes his fingers over the chalice, 
returns to the middle, kneels, and takes the second 
ablution. 

20. The chalice which has served for Mass, is brought 
to the side-table; the candles at the repository are lighted, 



106 MAUNDAY-THURSDAY. 

the canopy is prepared outside the railing, and candles 
are distributed to some of the people. 

21. In the meantime, the celebrant continues Mass, in 
which the following things are to be observed : 

Having purified the chalice, he kneels, goes to the 
Epistle side, and reads the Commvnio ^ then goes to the 
middle, kneels, kisses the altar, withdraws to the side of 
the Gospel, and says, Dominus vohiscurn. 

He returns to the middle, kneels, goes to the Epistle 
side, and there reads the Post Communio. 

He again goes to the middle, kneels, kisses the altar, 
turns, says, Dominus vodkcum^ and Ite missa est 

Tlien he turns to the middle, kneels, says, Placeat^ etc., 
kisses the altar, and says, Benedicat vos^ etc., and kneels. 

He turns to the Gospel side and gives the blessing, 
without turning round entirely, but only towards the 
Gospel side, and he does not return to the middle. 

He says the Gospel of St. John, making the sign of 
the cross, not on the altar, but on the book, or altar-card, 
out of which he reads it. 

At the words Verhum caro factum est, he kneels 
towards the Blessed Sacrament. 

22. Mass being ended, the celebrant goes to the mid- 
dle, kneels and by the shortest way goes down, on the 
Epistle side, to the floor. 

23. There, assisted by the acolytes, he takes off the 
chasuble and maniple, and puts on the white cope. 

Section II. — Of the Procession with the Blessed Sacra- 
ment to the Rejpository. 

1. The celebrant goes before the altar, and having 
made a genuflection, he kneels on the lower step, and 
prays for awhile. 

2. The first acolyte takes the censer with fire, and the 
boat with incense, to the celebrant. 

3. The celebrant rises, puts incense into the censer 
without blessing it, the second acolyte ofl-ering the boat, 
without kissing it or the celebrant's hand. 

4. The celebrant goes up to the altar, and, kneeling on 
the platform, incenses the Blessed Sacrament in the 
chalice. 



MAUNDAY-THURSDAY. 107 

5. Then the veil is put over his shoulders, and he rises, 
goes to the altar, kneels, rises, ties with a white ribbon 
the veil around the chalice that contains the Sacred Host. 

6. He takes the chalice with his left hand covered with 
the veil, places Jiis right hand on the chalice, and the 
second acolyte extends over it both corners of the veil. 

7. The celebrant, holding the chalice in this manner, 
turns his back to the alt^r, and begins the hymn, Pange 
lingua. 

8. They proceed to the repository in the following 
order: 

1st. The banner, if there be any. 

2dly. Some of the faithfal, two by two, carrying can- 
dles in their hands. 

3dly. The processional cross, carried by the third 
acolyte. 

4:thly. The first acolyte with the censer, having incense 
in it. 

5thly. The celebrant under the canopy ; having at his 
right hand the second acolyte, who should take care to 
raise a little the celebrant's alb in front, when he goes 
up or down the steps. They say the hymn, Pange lingua. 

9. When the procession has arrived at the repository, 
it divides into two lines, one on each side of it, so that 
the censer-bearer and the celebrant, under the canopy, 
may pass between them. 

10. The cross-bear jr stops at one side of the repository. 

11. The celebrant goes up to the altar of the reposi- 
tory, places the chalice on it, kneels, goes down one of 
the steps ; kneels on the platform ; the veil is taken from 
his shoulders. 

12. In the meantime, those who carried the canopy, 
leave it in some convenient place. 

13. The celebrant arises, puts incense in the censer, 
without blessing it, and without the usual kisses, and 
kneeling on the platform, incenses the Blessed Sacra- 
ment. The acolytes recite the verse, Tantum ergo, etc. 

11. The celebrant gives the censer to the censer-bearer, 
rises, goes up to the altar, kneels, takes the chalice, 
places it in the repository; the second acolyte placing 



108 MAUNDAY THURSDAY. 

tlie steps near the altar, if it is necessary to reach the 
repository. 

15. The celebrant kneels again, shuts up the reposi- 
tory, kneels, and goes down to the floor of the chapeL 

16. Then the celebrant, kneeling on the lower step of 
the altar, prays for awhile, rises, kneels on both knees on 
the floor of the chapel, and having covered his head, 
preceded by the cross, he returns, between the acolytes 
to the altar. 

Section III. — Of the Removal of the Pyx. 

1. All being come to the altar, the cross is put in its 
place; the second and third acolj'tes take lighted candles. 

2. The celebrant having made a genuflection, goes up 
to the altar, takes out of the tabernacle the ^^^^ with the 
Blessed Sacrament, places it on the corporal, and kneels. 

3. Going down, he kneels on the platform, and puts 
on the veil, assisted by the first acolyte. 

4. The celebrant goes up to the altar, kneels, having 
his hands covered with the veil, takes the pyx, and pre- 
ceded by the clerks holding lighted candles in their 
hands, he carries the pyx to the altar of the repository, 
places it on the corporal, and kneels dow^n. 

5. Then going down, he kneels on the platform; there, 
assisted by the clerks, he takes off the veil ; again goes 
up, kneels, opens the repository, and places in it the pyx 
behind the chalice. 

6. The celebrant kneels, shuts up the repository, and 
having prayed on the lowest step of the altar, he kneels 
on the floor of the chapel, and, with his head covered, 
returns to the sacristy. 

7. There, the celebrant takes off the cope and the 
white stole, and puts on a violet one, crossing it on his 
breast as usual. 

Section IV. — Of the Stripping of the Altars. 

1. The celebrant vested as above, attended by the aco- 
lytes, goes to the altars, with his hands joined. 

2. Standing on the floor of the sanctuary at the foot 
of the altar, he begins witli a loud voice the anthem, 



MAUXD AY-THURSDAY. 109 

Dlmserunt sibi^ wliicli he continues with the Psahn, 
Deus^ Deus meus, resjpice in me^ Ps. xxi ; reciting it 
with the acolytes. 

3. In the meantime, the celebrant goes up to the altar, 
strips it, taking off the altar-cloths. 

4. The acolytes receive the cloths, and remove from 
the altar the flower-pots, the front veil, and the carpet, 
so that nothing but the cross and six candlesticks, with 
their candles, but rrot lighted, is left on the altar. 

5. Tlie celebrant, having stripped the principal altar, 
goes to strip the others, if there be any. 

6. The altars being stripped, the celebrant returns to 
the principal one; there, after the last verse of the 
Psalm, the anthem Divisermit is repeated, and he waits 
for the Angel us Domini. 

7. One of the acolytes gives the sign for it with the 
usual clapper; and all kneel down. 

8. Then the celehrant arises, bows to the cross, and the 
acolytes kneel ; all return to the sacristy. 

9. There, the celebrant takes ofi' the sacred vestments, 
makes the usual thanksgiving, and causes everything to 
be put in its place. 

10. The first acolyte takes from the cross of the high 
altar the white veil, and covers it with a violet one. 

11. The priest should procure some of the faithful to 
pray before the Blessed Sacrament, whilst It remains in 
the repository; and he should have a number of candles 
burnino: before It. 



110 GOOD FRIDAY. 



CHAPTER y. 

OF GOOD FRIDAY. 

Article I. 

OF WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE OFFICE OF GOOD 

FRIDAY. 

At the High Altar 

1. On the altar, which is to be altogether bare, six 
candlesticks, with candles of brown wax, not lighted. 

2. A wooden cross, covered with a black veil, lixed in 
such a manner as to be easily removed. 

3. A violet cushion on the second step of the altar. 

On the Side-table. 

1. A towel, covering the side-table, without hanging 
down. 

2. An altar-cloth, folded, large enough to cover the 
altar, without hanging down. 

3. A book-stand with a Missal. 

4. A black burse containing a corporal, pall, and 
purifier. 

5. The censer, with the box containing incense. 

6. A black veil for the chalice, to be used at the end of 
the office. 

7. A little plate with the cruets and finger-towel. 

Near the Table. 

1. A carpet with a cushion of violet color, and a white 
veil, adorned with golden and violet silk fringe. 

2. The processional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

3. The wooden clapper. 

At the Repository, 

1. A white veil for the shoulders. 

2. The canopy. On the altar a corporal. 

3. Torches and candies for the procession. 



GOOD FRIDAY. Ill 

In the Sacristy. 

1. Three surplices for the acolytes. 

2. Tlie amice, alb, cincture, black maniple, stole, and 
chasuble. 

3. A chafing-dish with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON GOOD 
FRIDAY. 

Section I. — Fi^om the Beginning of the Office to the Un- 
covering of the Cross. 

1. At the stated hour, the signal being given, the aco- 
lytes put on their surplices in the sacristy, and every- 
thing is prepared as above. 

2. The celebrant washes his hands, puts on the amice, 
alb, cincture, black maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

3. Preceded by the acolytes, with his hands joined, he 
goes to the altar with his head covered. 

4. He takes ofi" his cap, kneels on the floor of the sanc- 
tuary before the altar, and y^rostrates himself, laying his 
hands on the cushion placed on the second step, and 
prays for the space of a minute. 

5. The first acolyte takes the altar-cloth, unfolds it 
over the altar, assisted by the second acolyte, but they 
do not unfold it in its width, as they must leave the fore- 
most part of the altar uncovered. 

6. The third acolyte places the bookstand with the 
Missal on the Epistle side of the altar. 

7. The celebrant rises, and the cushion being removed 
by one of the acolytes, he goes up to the altar and kisses 
it in the middle. 

8. He goes to the Epistle side, and reads the first 
lesson, with the Tract. 

9. He says, Oremus, and, kneeling down with all the 
clergy and people, ssljs, I^lectamus genua; the second 
acolyte, who rises first, answers, Levate ; and the cele- 
brant says the prayer, Deus a qico^ etc. 



112 GOOD FRIDAY. 

10. ThcD ho reads the second lesson and Tract, and 
immediately the Passion. 

11. Having said in the same place, Munda cor meurn^ 
lie continues to read that part of the Passion which is 
snng as the Gospel. 

12. At the end he does not kiss the book, bnt imme- 
diately (in case there be no sermon) he reads the prayer, 
as in the Missal. 

13. Before every prayer, with the exception of the 
eighth, the celebrant says, Flectamus genua^ on which 
all the clergy and people kneel; and the second acolyte, 
rising up before the other, saj^s, Levate. 

14. About the end of the prayers, the first acolyte, 
assisted by the third, extends before the steps of the 
altar, or of the sanctuary, a carpet, and on the first 
steps, a violet cushion, and over all, the white veil. 

Section II. — Of the uncomring and Veneration of the 

Cross. 

1. The prayers being ended, the celebrant goes down 
at the Epistle side, and takes off the chasuble only. 

2. Then he kneels at the middle of the altar, takes the 
cross from it, and the first acolyte takes the Missal. 

3. The celebrant goes to the Epistle side, at foot of the 
steps, and having his fiice turned tow^ards the people, 
the clerk holding the Missal before him. 

4. The celebrant, with his right hand, uncovers the 
top of the cross, as far as the transverse piece, and raising 
the cross a little with both his hands, he says or sings 
with a solemn voice, Ecce Lignum Crucis ; and the aco- 
lytes, in the same tone of voice continue. In quo Sahis 
wMndi pependit ; and all but the celebrant kneel down, 
and the acolytes say, Venite, adoremus ; after which 
words, all arise. 

5. The celebrant, in front of the altar, at the side of 
the Epistle, uncovering the right arm of the cross, and 
the head of the crucifix, raising his voice and the cross 
higher, says again, L^cce Lignum Crucis. 

6. The clerks continue, Ln quo salus^ etc. ; then all 
kneeling, they say, Venite, adoremus, as before. 



GOOD TRIDAY. 113 

7. The celebrant, finally, in the middle of the altar, 
uncovering tlie whole cross, and raising his hands and 
his voice still higher, says the third time, Ecce Lignum 
Crucis^ etc. 

8. The acolytes also answer, and kneel as before. 

9. The first acolyte uncovers the processional cross, 
and all other crosses in the church are now uncovered, 
and the second acolyte replaces the book on the book- 
stand on the altar. 

10. The celebrant, going down from the altar by the 
Gospel side, carries the cross devoutly, holding it raised 
up with both his hands, to the place prepared for it. 

11. There, kneeling down, he places it on the cushion 
covered with the white veil, and, if necessaiy, he fastens 
it w 1 1 some strings. 

12. The celebrant rises, kneels, goes to the bench, 
takes off the maniple, sits down, and, with the assistance 
of the acolytes, takes off his shoes. 

13. The celebrant, thus without shoes, goes to venerate 
the cross, to which, at suitable distances, he bows, kneel- 
ing on both knees, the first, second, and third time, and 
then he kisses it. 

14. The celebrant rises, and having knelt to the cross, 
returns to his seat at the Epistle side, and puts on the 
maniple and his shoes. 

15. The clerks also take ofl" their shoes, and after the 
celebrant, and before the people, venerate the cross in the 
same manner as the celebrant, then return to their places, 
and put on their shoes. 

16. After the acolytes, the people venerate the cross, 
first the men, and then the women. 

17. The first acolyte remains by the cross whilst it is 
venerated by the people, and the second and third aco- 
lytes go to the celebrant, and with a loud and distinct 
voice, recite with him the verses and responses called the 
Impro^eria. 

The Improper ia to be recited by the celebrant, with 
the second and third acolytes, are as follows : 

10* 



114 good friday. 

Part 1st. 

Celebrant. Popule mens quid feci, tihi, aut in quo eontri^ 
stavi te f Responde mihi. 

V. Quia eduxi te de terrd ^gypti : parasti crucem Sal- 
vatori tuo. 

Clerk 2. R. Agios o Theos, 

CI. 8. Sandus Deus. 

CI. 2. R. Agios ischyros. 

CI. 3. V. Sandus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas. 

CI. 3. Sandus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Cel. Quia eduxi te per desertum quadraginta annis; et 
mannd oibavi te, introduxi te in terram satis bonam : parasti 
crucem Salvatori tuo. 

CJ. 3. Agios Theos. 

CI. 2. Sandus Deus, 

CI. 2. Agios ischyros, 

CI. 3. Sanctus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas, 

Sandus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Cel. Quid ultra debui facer e tibi et non fecif Ego 
quidem plantavi te vineam meam speciosissimam ; et tu facta 
es mihi nimis amara; aceto namque sitim meam potastiy et 
lanced perforasti latus Salvatori tuo. 

CI. 2. Agios Theos, 

CI. 3. Sandus Deus. 

CI. 2. Agios ischyros, 

CI. 3. Sanctus fortis. 

CI. 2. Agios athanatos, eleison imas, 

Sanctus immortalis, miserere nobis. 

Part 2d. 

Cel. V. Ego propter te fiagellavi ^gpptum cum primo- 
genitis suis; et tu me flagellatum tradidisti. 

CI. 2 and 3. R.. Popule meus quid feci iibif aut in quo 
contristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego eduxi te de JEgypto, demerso Pharaone in mare 
rubrum; et tu me tradidisti principibus sacerdotum. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 115 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule mens quid feci tibi'i aut in quo con- 
iristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego ante te aperui mare; et tu aperuisti lanced laius 
mevm, 

CI. 2 and 3. Popide meus quid feci tihif aut in quo con- 
iristavi te f Responde mihi, 

Cel. Ego ante te prceivi in columna nubis; et tu me dux- 
isti ad prcelorium Pilati. 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule meus quid feci tibif aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te pavi manna per desertum; et tu me cecidisti 
alopis etflageUis. 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule meus quid feci tibif aut in quo con- 
iristavi tef Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te potavi aqua salutis de petrd: et tu me potasti 
felle et aceto. 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule meus quid feci tibif aut in quo con- 
iristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego propter te Chananceorum reges percussi: et tu 
percussisti arundine caput meum. 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule meus quid feci tibif aut in quo con- 
iristavi tef Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego dedi tibi sceptrum regale : et tu dedisti capiti meo 
spineam coronam. 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule meus quid feci tibif aut in quo con- 
tristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Cel. Ego te exaltavi magna virtute ; et tu me susjpen- 
disti in patihulo crucis. 

CI. 2 and 3. Popule meus quid feci tibi f aut in quo 
contristavi te f Responde mihi. 

Part 3d. 

Cel. Crucem tuam adoramus Domine ; et sanctam 
resurrectionem tuam laudamus et glorificamus : ecce enim 
propter lignum venit gaudium in unive7'sum mundiom. 

Psal. JJeus misereatur nostri et benedicat nobis. 

CI. 2 and 3. llluminet vultum suum super nos : et mis- 
ereatur nostri. 

Cel. Crucem tuam adoramus Domine : et sanctam res- 



116 GOOD FRIDAY. 

urrectionem tuam laudamus et glorificamus ; ecce enim 
jprojpter lignum venit gaudium in universum mundum. 

CI. 2 and 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes^ arhor una nohi- 
lis ; nulla sylva talem j^'^'ofert^ fronde^ flore, g ermine. 
Dulce lignum^ dulces clavos, dulce jpondus sustinet. 

Cel. Pange lingua gloriosi lauream certaminis^ et 
super crucis trojphaeo die triumjohum nobilem / qualiter 
Redevajptor orhis immolatus vicerit. 

01. 2 and 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes arhor una ndbi- 
lis : nulla sylva talem prof ert^ fronde, flore^ g ermine. 

Cel. De parentis protoplasti fraude factor condolens ; 
guando pomi noxialis in necem morsu ruit ; ipse lignum 
tunc notavit, damna ligni ut solver et. 

CI. 2 and 3. Dulce lignmn, didces clavos, dulce pondus 
sustinet. 

Cel. Hoc opus nostrcB salutis or do depoposcerat^ mul- 
tiformis proditoris ars ut artem f alter et : et medelam 
ferret inde^ hostis unde Imserat. 

CI. 2 and 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes., arhor una nohi- 
lis ; nulla sylva talem prof ert^ frvnde^ flore., germine. 

Cel Quando venit ergo sacri plenitudo temporis : mis- 
sus est ah arce Patris^ natus orhis Conditor : atque ven- 
tre virginali, came amictus prodiit. 

CI. 2 and 3. R. Dulce lignum^ didces clavos^ dulce 
pondus sustinet. 

Cel. Y. Yagit infans inter arcta^ conditus proesepia^ 
memhra pannis involuta Virgo mater alligat, et Dei 
manus pedesque stricta cin git fascia. 

CI. 2 and 3. R. Crux fidelis inter omnes^ arhor una 
nohilis ; nulla sylva talem profert^fronde, fiore, germine. 

Cel. Y. Lustra sex qui jam peregit^ tempus implens 
corporis: sponte lihera Pedemptor passioni deditus j 
Agnus in Crucis levatur immolandus stipite. 

CI. 2 and 3. Dulce lignum, dulces clavos, dulce pondus 
sustinet. 

Cel. Felle potiis ecce languet ; spina, clavi, lanced^ 
mite corpus perforarunt, undd manat et cruor ; terra 
pontus, astra, mundus, quo lavantur fiumine. 

CI. 2 and 3. Crux fidelis inter omnes, arhor una nohi- 
lis : mdla sylva talem prof ert, fronde, flore, germine. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 117 

Cel. Flecte ramos arbor alta^ tensa laxa viscera: et 
rigor lentescat ille^ queiii dedit nativitas ; et sujperni 
tnemhra regis tende r^viti stipite. 

CI. 2 and 3. Dulce ligmim, dulces clavos^ dulce pondus 
sustinet. 

Cel. Sola digna tu fuisti ferre mundi mctimain ; 
atgue portum prapjarare area mundo nauftagOj quern 
sacer cruor periinxit^fusios Agyii corpore. 

CI. 2 and 3. Crux jidelis inter omnes, arlor una nohi- 
lis ; nulla sylva talemprofert^fronde^Jlore^ gennine. 

Cel. Sempiterna sit Beatoe Trinitati gloria: cequa 
Patri^ Filioque par deous Faraclito ; Unius Triniqice 
nomen laudet universitas. Amen. Dulce lignum, is 
repeated. 

18. Towards the end of the veneration of the cross, 
the first acolyte lights the candles on the altar, and the 
third takes from the altar the book-stand, with the 
Missal. 

19. Then the second and third acolytes go, one to the 
Epistle side, and the other to the Gospel side, and unfold 
the altar-cloths. 

20. This being done, the second acolyte, if in orders, 
brings to the altar the burse with the corporal, and the 
purifier over it; he takes the corporal out of the burse, 
unfolds it, and places the purifier near it, on the Epistle 
side. 

21. The third acolyte places on the altar, at the Epis- 
tle side, the book-stand, with the Missal opened. 

22. The veneration being over, the celebrant brings the 
cross back to the altar, places it between the candlesticks, 
and makes a genuflection. 

23. The acolyte removes the cushion and the veil from 
the place where the cross lay, and one of them puts fire 
in the censer. 

21. The celebrant again puts on the chasuble at the 
bench, on the Epistle side, and goes up to the altar, with 
his head uncovered. 



118 GOOD FllIDAY. 

Section III. — Of the Procession to the Remository^ and 
the return to the Altar with the Blessed Sacrament. 

1. The celebrant, standing before the altar, puts the 
incense in the censer, without the iisnal blessing. 

2. The procession goes to the repository in the follow- 
ing order : 

The banner. 

Some pious men of the congregation. 

The censer-bearer. 

The cross, uncovered, carried by the third acolyte. 

The celebrant, with the second acolyte at his left hand. 

3. At the repository, the banner and tlie cross top on 
one side of tlie altar, the others who compose the proces- 
sion divide themselves into two lines, one on each side of 
the altar. 

4. The celebrant, having made a genuflection before 
the repository, kneels down on the lowest step of the 
altar, and, with others, prays awhile. 

5. Then he arises, opens the repository, kneels, goes 
down the first step, and, standing, puts incense in the 
censer without blessing it, and without the usual kiss. 
The candles for the procession are lighted, and the canopy 
is prepared. 

6. The celebrant, kneeling on the platform of the 
altar, incenses the Blessed Sacrament in the repository, 
arises, makes a genuflection, takes out of the repository 
the chalice, and places it on the altar. 

7. The celebrant inakes a genuflection, shuts the repos- 
itory, in which he leaves the pyx with the consecrated 
Hosts; makes another genuflection, and then goes down 
the first step. 

8. There kneeling, he puts on the veil, rises, makes a 
genuflection, and. takes the chalice as he did the day 
before, which the second acolyte covers with the veil. 

9. The celebrant, turning his back to the altar, and his 
face to the procession, with a loud voice, begins the h}^mn, 
Yexilla Regis, which he continues with the second clerk, 
as follows : 



GOOD FRIDAY. 119 

Vexilla regis prodeunt, 
Fulget Orucis mysterium : 
Quo vita mortem pertulitf 
Et mo7'te vitam protulit, 

QucB vulnerata lancece 
Mucrone diro, eriminum 
Ut nos lavdrat sordibus^ 
Manavit undd et sanguine, 

Impleta sunt quce concinit. 
David fideli ear mine, 
Dicendo nationibus, 
Regnavit a ligno Deus 

Arbor decora etfulgida, 
Ornata regis purpura, 
Electa digno stipite 
Tarn sancta membra tangere, 

Beata, eujus brachiis 
Pretium pependit sceculi, 
Statera facta corporis, 
Tulitque prwdam tartaric 

O Crux, ave, spes unica ! 
Hoc passionis tempore, 
Piis adauge gratiam, 
Reisque dele crimina. 

Te fans salutisj Trinitas ! 
Collaudet omnis spiritus : 
Quibus crucis victoriam 
Largiris, adde prcemium. Amen, 

10. The procession returns to the altar in the follow- 
ing order : 
The banner. 
Some pious men with candles. 



120 GOOD FRIDAY. 

The processional cross. 
The censer-bearer with the censer. 
The celebrant under the canopy, and the second aco- 
Ijte at his left. 

11. Four candles should be left burning at the reposi- 
tory. 

12. The banner and the canopy are left outside the 
railing; the processional cross is put near the side-table. 

13. The men of the congregation carrying candles, 
stop outside the railing in regular order, holding the 
candles in their hands to the end of the office. 

14. The celebrant goes up to the altar, and places the 
chalice on the corporal ; he then kneels, rises, and goes 
down the first step of the altar. 

15. There he takes oif the veil, and standing, puts 
incense in the censer without blessing or kissing ; then 
kneeling down on the platform, he incenses the Blessed 
Sacrament. 

Sectk N lY. — Of the last part of the Ceremony. 

1. The celebrant arising, goes to the altar, makes a 
genuflection, takes off the veil from the chalice, and 
places the paten on the corporal. 

2. Then he takes the chalice, lays the consecrated 
Host on the paten, takes the paten with both his hands, 
and places the Host on the corporal, not saying any- 
thing; and not making the sign of the cross, he places 
the paten on the corporal at his right hand. 

3. The celebrant, having made a genuflection, takes 
the chalice, goes to the Epistle side, and holding the 
chalice in his left hand, puts in it wine and water, with- 
out blessing, and without saying anything. 

4. The chalice is not wiped, but is placed on the side 
of the corporal. 

5. The celebrant goes to the middle, and having made 
a genuflection, replaces the chalice in the usual place, 
without making the sign of the cross, and covers it with 
the pall. 

6. Remaining in the same place, the celebrant puts 
incense in the censer, without blessing. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 1'21 

7. Then taking the censer, he kneels, incenses the 
offerins:, sa3'ing, as usual, Iiiceiisum isiicd^ etc. 

8. Having incensed the offerings, lie kneels again, and 
incenses the cross (ex Deer. 8. jR. C. 14: Jlaii, ITOTj, say- 
ing Dlrigatur Do?nine, etc., and having again knelt to 
the cross, continues, as usual, the incensing of the altar, 
kneeling every time he passes by the middle of the altar. 

9. The celebrant then gives the censer to the censer- 
bearer, saying, Acceiidat in nobis^ etc.; he is not in- 
censed. 

10. Immediately, taking care not to turn his back to 
the Blessed Sacrament, he goes from the platform down 
to the second step, a little back of the altar on the Epis- 
tle side, having his face turned towards the people, and 
washes his hands, saying nothing. 

11. He returns to the middle of the altar, kneels, rises, 
and placing his hands joined on the altar, bowing, says 
with a low, but intelligible voice. In sjpiritu hurailitatis, 
etc. 

12. He kisses the altar, kneels, and turning towards 
the people on the Gospel side, he says. Orate fratres ; 
and returns by the same way to the middle, without 
completing the circle, and kneels again. 

13. The words, Suscipiat^ are not answered. 

14. The celebrant, with his hands joined before his 
breast, in a ferial tone says, Oremus. PrcBceptis, etc. ; 
and whilst he says, Pater Noster^ he extends his hands. 

15. The clerks answer, Sed libera nos a malo^ and the 
celebrant. Amen; with a low voice, still holding his 
hands extended, he continues in the ferial tone as before, 
Libera nos^ etc., and at the end, the acolytes answer, 
Amen. 

16. The celebrant kneels, arises, uncovers the chalice, 
puts the paten under the Host, and holding with his left 
hand the paten on the altar, with the right he raises the 
Host, so that it may be seen by the people. 

17. Immediately after, he raises the Host over the 
chalice already uncovered, and forthwith divides it into 
three parts, as usual, saying nothing; the last part he 

u 



122 GOOD FRIDAY. 

puts into the chalice, in silence, and v.-ithout making the 
sign of the cross. 

18. The chalice being covered, he kneels, rises, and with 
his hands joined over the altar, his body inclined, he says 
eecretlj, Fercejptio Corj>oris^ omitting the two other 
prayers. 

19. He again kneels, then taking the paten with the 
Host, says, as usual, Panein Coalestem^ etc., and also the 
Domine^ non sum dignus^ etc., striking liis breast. 

20. He signs himself with the Host, saying, Curjpus 
D(j7nini nostri^ etc., and communicates. 

21. Having meditated a little, he uncovers the chalice, 
and kneels. 

22. He rises, and having gathered, as usual, the frag- 
ments, he takes the chalice with both his hands, not say- 
ing anything, and without making the sign of the cross, 
he reverently takes the particle of the Host with the 
v/ine. 

23. Omitting the usual ablution of the chalice, he 
washes his fingers, as customary, over the chalice, with 
wine and water. 

24. Meanwhile, all rise, and the candles are put out. 

25. Having taken the ablution in the middle of the 
altar, the celebrant wipes the chalice, covers it with the 
small black veil, arranges it, and bowing, with his hands 
joined before his breast, he says secretly. Quod ore surnj^ 
simus^ etc. 

26. The first acolyte, if in holy orders, carries the 
chalice to the side-table. 

27. The celebrant, going down, makes with the clerk a 
genuflection to the cross, and having covered his head, he 
returns to the sacristy. 

28. There he takes off the sacred vestments, and puts 
on a white stole over his surplice. 

Section Y. — Of the hringing haclc the Pyx to the 

Altar. 

1. The celebrant, preceded by the first acolyte, with 
the veil, and the other two with candles, goes to the 
repository. 



HOLY SATURDAY. 133 

2. Having made a genuflection on the floor of tlie 
cliapel, lie kneels on the lowest step, and praj^s for 
awhile. 

3. Then he rises, goes up to the altar, opens the reposi- 
tory, kneels, takes the pjx, and places it on the corporal, 
and kneels again. 

4. Going down the first step, he kneels on the platform, 
and receives the veil from the first acoljte. 

5. He goes np to the altar, kneels, and with his hands 
covered with the veil, takes the pyx, and preceded by the 
clerks with lighted candles, brings back the pyx, which 
should be kept in a tabernacle, in some remote chapel 
within the church, or in the sacristy, placing it there with 
the accustomed genuflections. 

6. When the pyx is shut up in the tabernacle, all kneel 
down, and the sign for the. Angelus Domini is given with 
the usual wooden instrument. 

7. Lastly, the candles of the altar are put out, and 
everything is put in its proper place. 

8. Should there be no chapel or sacristy, the pyx must 
be left in the repository, with a lamp burning before it. 



CHAPTEE YI. 

OF HOLY SATURDAY. 

Article I. 

WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED FOR THE SACRED RITES TO BE 
PERFORMED ON THIS DAY. 

Outside the Door of the Church. 

1. A TABLE covered with a white cloth, and on it, 

2. A small book-stand with a Missal. 

3. A plate with five grains of incense. 

4. The censer, with the box, containing incense. 



124 HOLY SATURDAY. 

5. A vessel witli holy-water and the sprinkle. 

6. A white maniple, stole, and dalmatic. 

7. A lantern with a candle. 

8. Also, near the table, a chafing-dish with coals, or 
wood to be lighted for the new lire. 

9. Tongs. 

10. A long ornamented rod, with the triple candle 
fastened on the top. This has bat one common stock, 
from which three candles, of equal length, rise. 

At the High Altar, 

1. The altar is to have on it the candlesticks and cross, 
as on solemn festivals. 

2. its front is to be covered with two altar-veils, a 
white one under another of violet color. 

3. A stand on the Gospel side, to fix in it the rod with 
the triple candle. 

4. On the same side, a high book-stand for the Exultet. 

5. The paschal candle on a large candlestick, the wick 
of which should be so prepared as to be easily lighted ; 
^YQ holes in the form of a cross should be made in the 
candle. 

6. The lamps prepared at proper and convenient places. 

On the Side-table. 

1. The side-table should be covered with a white cloth. 

2. A Missal for the Exultet and for Mass. 

3. The chalice covered with a white burse and veil. 

4. A plate with the cruets of wine and water, and a 
small linen towel. 

In the Sacristy, 

1. Fonr surplices for the acolytes ; the amice, alb, cinc- 
ture, violet stole and cope; also, a violet maniple, stole 
and chasuble. 

2. A white maniple, stole and chasuble. 

3. A white veil. 

4. Candles, to accompany the ciborium, when the 
priest brings it back to the altar. 



HOLY SATURDAY. 125 

At the Baptis7nal Font. 

1. A table covered with a white cloth. 

2. The towels. 

3. The holy-water vase, with the sprinkle. 

4. Vessels to fill water from the font, 

5. The ve333ls containing the oil of tlie catechumens 
anJ the holy chrism. 

6. A pitcher of water, with a basin for washing the 
hanls, and a few slices ot* bread without crust on a small 
plate, for the same purpose. 

7. S )me clean cotton on a plate, for wiping the fingers. 
If baptism bi alministered, besides what is above- 
mentioned, the following things ought to be prepared: 

1. The Iloman Ritual. 

2. A small plate with salt. 

3. The vessels with the oil of the catechumens, and the 
holy chrism. 

4. A white stole and cope. 

5. A towel to wipe the head of the baptized person. 

6. Another piece ot* linen for the white garment. 

7. A candle, to be lighted. 

Article II. 

OF THE SACRED RITES TO BE PERFORMED ON HOLY SATURDAY. 

Section I. — From the heginning of the Office to the 
blessing of the Paschal Candle. 

1. Outside the church, fire is struck from a flint, and 
with it the charcoals in the pan are kindled. 

2. At a proper hour, four clerks put on their surplices 
in the sacristy, and prepare everything at their proper 
places. 

3. The sign being given with the clapper, the celebrant 
washes his hands, puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole and cope. 

4. They proceed to the principal door in the followino- 
order : 

The first acolyte with his hands joined. 



126 HOLY SATURDAY. 

The third acolyte with the processional cross. 

The celebrant between the second and fourth acolytes. 

5. When outside, the acolyte with the cross stops, tnrn- 
ing and holding the crucifix turned towards the celebrant. 

6. The celebrant places himself before the table, which 
is between him and the cross. 

7. There, standing, he reads out of the Missal, placed 
on the book-stand on the table, the three prayers for the 
blessing of the fire, and then the prayer for the blessing 
of the incense. 

8. Whilst the celebrant blesses the incense, the first 
acolyte takes, with the tongs, some of the new blessed 
tire, and puts it in the censer. 

9. The celebrant, with the usual blessing and kiss, 
puts the incense in the censer, then he sprinkles the fire, 
and the grains of incense, saying the anthem Asperyes 
me^ and incenses them. 

10. The censer-bearer, having received the censer, 
puts some more new fire into it. 

11. The celebrant takes off the cope and stole, puts 
on a maniple, and a stole on his left shoulder, as deacons 
wear it, and a dalmatic of white color. 

12. Meanwhile the second acolyte lights a candle with 
the new fire, and places it in a lantern, and the fourth 
acolyte takes the plate with the grains of incense. 

13. The celebrant again puts incense in the censer 
with the usual blessing and kisses, and takes the rod 
with the triple candle. 

14. They go to bless the paschal candle in the follow- 
ing order: 

The acolyte, carrying the grains of incense on the 
right hand, and the censer-bearer on the left. 

The third acolyte with the cro~s. 

The celebrant, holding the rod with the triple candle, 
and the second acolyte, with the lighted taper, at the 
left. 

15. The acolytes, carrying the grains of incense, the 
censer, and the cross, go into the church, and stop when 
the celebrant has entered the door. 

16. The celebrant having entered the church, lights 



HOLY SATURDAY. 127 

one of tlie three candles with the lighted taper, and 
kneels with the rest of the clergy and the people, the 
cross-bearer excepted. 

17. Thus kneeling, the celebrant says with a distinct 
voice. Lumen Christi ; then he rises, and the acolytes 
also arising, answer, Deo gratias. 

18. They go as far as tl e middle of the church, where 
again the second candle being lighted, everything is done 
as before, except that the celebrant raises his voice higher. 

19. At last they go as far as the steps of the altar, and 
the third candle being lighted, everything is done the 
third time, as before, but tiiey raise their voice still higher. 

Section II. — Of the Uessing of the Pa^^dud Candle. 

1. The acolytes having answered for the third time, Deo 
gratias^ all rise, and form a straight line, with the cele- 
brant in the middle, before the altar. 

2. The second acolyte retiring, lays the taper on the 
table, takes the Missal f')r the Exidtet^ gives it to tiie cele- 
brant, who gives him the rod with the triple candle. 

3. The celebrant, holding the Missal in his hands, 
kneels on the lowest step of the altar, and without saying 
Munda cor memn^ says only, Jube^ D amine., Benedicere. 
DorninxLS sit in corde nieo^ et iri labiis rneis, lit digne 
et comjjetenter annuntiem suwm jpaschcde jproeconium. 
Amen. 

4. Then rising, and having made with the others a 
genullection to the altar, they go to the book-stand, which 
is covered with a white veil, and placed at the Gospel 
side, in the following order: 

The censer-bearer, having at his right the fourth aco- 
lyte, with the grains of incense. 

The third acolyte, with the cross, having at his left the 
second acolyte, with the triple candle. 

The celebrant with the Missal. 

5. Being arrived at the book-stand, they range them- 
selves by it in the following order, in a straight line, with 
their faces turned towards it: 

The celebrant lays the Missal on the book-stand. 
The cro.s bearer at the rii^ht of the celebrant. 



128 HOLY SATURDAY. 

The censer-bearer at the ri^i^ht of the cross-bearer. 

The acolytes, holding the triple candle, at the left of 
the celebrant. 

The acolytes, with the grains of incense, at the left of 
the triple candle. 

6. The celebrant, receiving the censer from the censer- 
bearer, incenses the Missal open on the book-stand, and 
with a clear and joyfnl voice begins the Exultet. 

7. At the words, Curvat irnjperia, he puts the 1 
grains of incense in the side of the paschal 4 2 5 
candle, in the following order: 3 

8. The fourth acolyte leaves on the side-table the plate, 
in which the grains were, and takes a rod, with a wax 
taper fastened at the top, and returns to his former place, 
at the left of the triple candle. 

9. At the v:ords, Rutilans ignis accendit, the celebrant 
lights the candle from the triple candle. 

10. At the word's, A^is mater eduxit, the celebrant 
stops, until the fourth acolyte has lighted a taper to light 
the lamps of the church. 

11. The Exultet being ended, the celebrant shuts the 
Missal, and the second acolyte puts the triple candle in 
the stand prepared for it at the Gospel side. The third 
acolyte leaves the cross at the Epistle side. 

12. Then, preceded by the censer-bearer, with the aco- 
lyte that carried the grains of incense, at his left, and also 
by the second and third acolyte, he kneels before the altar 
with them all, and returns to the sacristy. 

13. There, having taken off the w^hite vestments, he 
puts on the violet maniple, stole, and chasuble. 

Section III. — Of the Prophecies. 

1. The celebrant thus vested, preceded by the acolytes, 
goes to the altar. 

2. Having bowed to the cross, he goes up to the altar, 
kisses it in the middle, and goes to the Epistle side. 

3. There, with a loud voice, he reads the twelve prophe- 
cies, with the prayers and tracts; he kneels with all the 
clergy and the people, whilst he says, l<lectainus genua^ 
before every prayer, the last one excepted ; and the clerk, 
arising, says, Levate. 



HOLY SATURDAY. 129 

4. After the last prayer, tlie celebrant, having made, 
from tlie place wliere he stands, a bow to the cross, goes 
down to his seat at the Ej^istle side, and takes oil' tiie 
chasuble and maniple. 

5. If the church has a baptismal font, the celebrant 
puts on a violet cope, and sits down. Otherwise he goes 
before tlie altar for the litany, as below. 

Section IY. — Of the Blessing of the Font. 

1. The celebrant being seated as above, the first acolyte 
takes from its stand the paschal candle, lighted, and goes 
before the altar. 

2. The third acolyte takes the cross, and likewise goes 
before the altar. 

3. The two other acolytes go to the celebrant. 

4. The celebrant, arising, begins with a loud voice the 
tract, Siciit cervus^ as here below, which he continues 
slowly with the acolytes. 

5. When the tract is begun, the procession moves to 
the front, bowing to the altar, in the following order : 

The acolyte with the paschal candle. The cross-bearer. 
The celebrant, between the two other acolytes, with his 
head covered, reciting the tract: 

" Sicus cerviis desiderat ad fontes aqiiarumh : ita 
desiderat anima mea ad te Deus. 

" Sitivit anima mea ad Deam vlvum : quando veniam, 
et appareho antefaciem Deif 

" Fuerunt mihi lacrymoB jpanes die ac nocte, dum 
dicitur mihi per singulos dies, ubi est Dcus tuus V 

6. All stop before the railing of the font, and the cele- 
brant having his face turned to the cross, after the tract 
is over, says, Dom^inus vohiscum, and the prayer, Om- 
nipotens sempiterne Deus, etc., the fourth acolyte hold- 
ing the Missal before him. 

Y. The acolyte carrying the paschal candle, and the 
cross-bearer, go within the railing, if the place is spacious 
enough ; they, however, stand opposite tiie celebrant. 

8. The celebrant goes near the font, and says the 
second prayer and the preface, as in the Missal, holding 
always his hands joined. 



130 HOLY SATURDAY. 

9. During the preface, at the proper places, as pointed 
out by the Rubrics, he perfornris the following rites : 

1. At these words, Gratiam de Spiritu Sancto, with 
his right hand he divides the water in the form of a cross, 
and immediatel}^ after wipes his hand. 

2. After the words, Non inficiendo corrumpat, he touches 
the water with his hand and wipes it. 

3. After the words. Indulgent lam conrpquatur, with his 
right hand he makes three crosses over the font. 

4. After the words. Super te ferebatur he divides the 
water with his right hand, and sprinkles it towards 1 
the four parts of the world, east, west, north, and 3 4 
south, in the following manner: 2 

5. After the words, In nomine Patris, etc., he changes 
his voice in the tone of a lesson. 

6. After the words, 2u bem'gnus aspira, the celebrant 
breathes thrice over the water in the form of a cross. 

7. After the words, Parificandls mentibus efficaces, he 
dips the paschal candle a little into the water, saying, 
Descendat in hanc plerntudinem fontis, etc., and draws it 
forth. He dips it deeper the second time, saying louder, 
Descendat^ etc., and takes it out again. Lastly, he dips 
the paschal candle to the bottom of the font, and says 
still louder, Descendat, etc. 

8. The celebrant breathes three times over the w^ater, 
in the form marked in the Missal, and continues, Totam- 
que hujus aqucB, etc. 

9. At the words, Foecundet effedu, he takes the paschal 
candle out of the font, and it is wiped. 

10. He continues the preface, and in a lower tone con- 
cludes it, saying, Per Dominum nostrum^ etc., and the 
assistant acolytes answer. Amen. 

11. The second acolyte takes the holy-water vase, and 
with it takes some water out of the font. 

12. The celebrant having received the sprinkle, already 
dipped into the water of tlie font, sprinkles both himiself 
and the bystanders ; then, accompanied by two clerks, he 
sprinkles the people in the church and returns to the 
font. 

13. Holy water is abo taken out of the font for the 
vessels that are by the doors of the church. 



HOLY SATURDAY, 131 

14. The celebrant, having returned to the font, puts in 
the water the oil of the catecliuraens in the form of a 
cross, sayin<r, Sanctificeteur ^ etc.* 

15. Then he puts in the chrism, saying, Infusio chris- 
matls^ etc. 

16. Lastly, he puts in both oils together, in the form of 
a cross, saying, Commixtio chrismatis, etc. 

17. He mixes with his liands in the font the oils with 
the water, spreading them all over the font. 

18. He wipes his hands with some cotton, and cleanses 
them with some crumbs of bread. 

Section Y. — Baptism of Infants, 

^^ Duo potissimum (these words are from the Roman 
Kitual) ex aiitiquissimo Ecclesioe ritu, sacri sunt dies^ in 
qitibus solemni cmremonia hoc Sacr amentum administrare 
maxime convenit^ nempe Sabhatum Sanctum. Paschoe^ et 
Sabbatum Pentecostes^ quibus diebus Bajptismatis fontis 
aqua rite consecratiiry 

The celebrant, having finished the blessing of the font, 
proceeds to the baptism of the infants, if any are to be 
baptized. 

1. After the blessing of the font, the children to be 
baptized should be with their sponsors outside the door 
ot the church. 

2. The celebrant, having waslied his hands, preceded 
by an acolyte with the cross, another acolyte remaining 
by the font with the paschal candle, goes between the 
two other acolytes, to the door of the church. 

3. There the celebrant performs all that is prescribed 
by the Ritual, as far as the introducing of the child into 
the church. 

4. Then he lays on the infant the extremity of the stole 
which hangs from his left shoulder, and introduces it into 
the church, saying, iV^. Ingredere in Templum Dei^ etc. 

5. Then having said the Credo and Fater^ with his 

* Ap, generally, the font is not snfiiclently large, the water is blessed 
in a more capacious vessel; in wliicli case the font is filled with 
blessed water by means of vases prepared for that purpose. 



132 HOLY SATURDAY. 

back turned to the railing of the font, he says the Exor- 
cism ; touches the ears and nostrils of the infant, and 
anoints it with the oil of catechumens on the breast, and 
between the shoulders. 

6. Remaining still outside the railing, the celebrant 
takes off the violet cope and stole, and puts on the white. 

7. Preceded by the cross, and followed by the infants 
to be baptized, with the godfathers and godmothers, he 
goes inside the railing of the font. 

8. The celebrant makes the usual questions before the 
font, N. Credisf etc., N. Vis haptizarif etc. 

9. The godfather having answered, Yolo^ he adminis- 
ters baptism in the manner prescribed in the Kitual, etc. 

10. After the baptism, the celebrant washes his hands, 
and having put off the white cope and stole, puts on the 
violet. 

Section YI. — Of the Litany , Mass, and Vespers. 

1. The celebrant, preceded by the cross and paschal- 
candle bearers, and attended by the other acolytes, 
returns before the altar. 

2. The paschal candle is placed on its stand, and the 
cross laid against the wall on the Epistle side. 

3. The celebrant, standing before the altar, takes off 
the cope only. 

4. Then kneeling down with the clergy and people he 
recites or sings the Litany from the Missal, which is placed 
on a stool before him. 

5. The acolytes repeat all that is said by the celebrant. 

6. At the verse, Peccatores, the violet front veil is 
removed from the altar, the candles are lighted, and 
£o\ver-pots are placed between the candlesticks. 

7. The celebrant continues the Litany, as far as Christe 
exaudi nns, inclusively. 

8. Then he rises, and, preceded by the acolytes, goes to 
the sacristy ; where, having taken off the violet stole, he 
puts on a white maniple, stole and chasuble. 

y. Accompanied by the acolytes, as above, he returns 
to the altar, before the step of which he makes his con- 
fession as usual, saying the Psalm, Jadloa mc, Beus, and 
the Gloria Fatri. 



HOLY SATURDAY. 133 

10. He goes up to the altar, and having said the prnyer, 
Aufer a nohis^ in the middle of it, he says immediately , 
Kyrie eleison^ there being no Inlroit. 

11. At the Gloria in exoelsis^ the bells are rung. 

12. After the Epistle, the celebrant says thrice, Alle- 
luia^ raising his voice gradually each time; and the aco- 
lytes repeat it in the same tone of voice as the celebrant, 
who continues the verse and the tract. 

13. Credo is not said, neither the Offertorium after the 
Dominus vohiscum^ nor the Agnus Dei ; the Pax is not 
given. 

14. In place of the Commiiiiio^ vespers are said as in 
the Missal, viz. : 

15. The celebrant, at the Epistle side, says the anthem 
Alleluia, and with the acolytes continues tlie Psalm, Lau- 
date, after which he repeats, Alleluit. 

16. Then he says the antiphon, Vespere autem, etc., 
with the canticle. Magnificat. 

17. The antiphon, Vespere, etc., having been repeated, 
the celebrant goes to the middle of the altar, kisses it, 
and, turned towards the people says, Domimos vohiscum, 
and then the prayer, as usual, at the Epistle side. 

18. At the Ite, Missa est, is added. Alleluia, Alleluia. 

19. After the Gospel of St. John, the celebrant returns 
to the sacristy, and puts off the sacred vestments. 

Section YIL — Of hringing hack the Pyx to the Altar. 

1. The celebrant puts on a white stole over his surplice, 
and, preceded by two acolytes with candles, and by 
another with the burse and veil, he goes to the place 
where the pyx with the Blessed Sacrament is kept. 

2. There with the usual genuflections, he takes the 
pyx with his hands covered with the veil, and brings it 
back to the usual tabernacle. 

3. He returns to the sacristy, in which he puts off the 
sacred vestments, and reads the anthem, Trium puerorum, 
with Alleluia and the Canticle, Psalm, prayers of 
thanksgiving, as in the Missal. 

4. Meanwhile the candles of the altar are put out. 



134 HOLY SATURDAY. 

5. Likewise the triple candle, which is uot lighted any 
more ; and the rod is removed. 

6. Also the paschal candle is extinguished, but it is left 
in its stand. It is to be lighted on all Sundays and festi- 
vals of obligation at Mass and Vespers, until the Gospel 
of Ascension-day, inclusively ; after which it is put out, 
and after Mass removed from its stand. Afterwards, it is 
lighted only on the eve of Pentecost, for the blessing of 
the font. 




PART III. 



0[$rimaub$ tl gig^ ^m^. 



CHAPTER I. 

KULES TO BE OBSERVED BY THE CLERGY IN CHOIR. 

Article I. 
T%e Order of going to the Choir, 

1. The clergy, dressed in their cassocks and surplices,* 
go out of the sacristy, two by two, so close toj:ether that 
the right shoulder of the one may almost touch the left 
shoulder of the other; and they proceed gravely, with 
regular step, holding their caps with both hands below 
their breasts, each pair keeping at equal distance from 
the other. 

2. When they arrive at the altar, they make a genu- 
flection to the cross, both taking care to make it at the 
same time, and to rise slowly, and with gravity; in this, 
the uniformity and decorum of the ceremonies consist. 
Each pair make their genuflection in the same place that 
the flrst made theirs; it will, tlierefore, be necessary that 
those who are behind should advance slowly, so as to 
allow those before them time to make the genuflection 

*It is difficult to give any precise rule rcgardincj the size and shape 
of the surplice. It would, however, seem more fiftini; t:iat lace sur- 
plices should not be used exc;pt by Prelates. The surplice might 
verj- properly have a nirr-^w edging of lace. 

(135) 



136 HIGH MASS. 

with decorum. After the genuflection, they turn and 
salute each other, and tlien proceed to their place,"^ one 
on one side of the choir, the other on the other, and 
remain standing. 

Article IT. 
Tlie Order to he observed in Choir, 

1. There are three different postures to be observed in 
choir, viz., to stand, sit, or kneeh When it is time to 
stand, all must stand, and no one must sit down or kneel ; 
so all must be uniform, when it is time to sit or kneel. 

The clergy should remember not to kneel down during 
the elevation at Low Masses that may be celebrated whilst 
they are in the choir. [Sac. Con. Elt., 5rh Mar., 1667.) 
And they should conform to the directions of the master 
of ceremonies, in whatever regards divine worship. {Sac. 
Con. Bit, 4th June, 1817.) 

2. During High Mass, the clergy remain standing, from 
the end of the confession, until the celebrant has said tiie 
Kyrie eleison, whilst he is singing the Gloria in excelsis^ 
and until he is seated after reciting it; whilst he is sing- 
ing the prayers ; whilst the deacon is singing the Gospel ; 
whilst the celebrant is singing the Dominus vohiscurri, 
and the Oremus^ at the Offertory ; during the incensing 
of the choir; during the preface, until the Sanctus is 
recited; alter the elevation, until after Communion; at 
the prayer, or prayers, after Communion, and at the last 
Gospel. 

* There should be no chairs in the sanctuary, except that of the 
Bishop, or some very distinguished personage. Priests, even Canons, 
and others belonging to the clergy, should sit on benches. These 
should be neatly made, witli high baclis, especially when attached to 
the walls. The bench for the celebrant should be near the altar on 
the Binstle side, and should be suffii-.iently large to acicommodate the 
cele^ rant, deacon and sab-deacon. It may be richly ornamented with 
carved work, but should never look like a thron'^. 

" Sacerdos, Diaconus, et Subdiaconus, celebrantes solemniter, pos- 
sunt et debent sedere in banco, duin canitur Gloria, Credo, etc.; non 
obstante qualibet consuetudine." {S. R. C, 15th Jan., 1611.) 

"Canonici Missam celebrantes coram Episcopo, non debent sedere 
in sede cam posteriiali, sed in aliqno scamno oblongo, tapete, vel panno 
cooperto in latere Epistolaj." (6'. R. C, 19lh Maii, 1614.) 



RULES FOTl THE CHOIR. 137 

3. The clergy kneel from the beginning of Mass until 
the end of the confession ; whilst the deacon sings the 
Flectaiaus genua^ rising again when the sub-deacon sings 
Lecaie ; whilst the sub-deacon sings in the Epistle, la 
nomine Jesu omne genu flectatiir^ etc., to the word infer- 
novum, inchisivelj; in time of Lent, at the verse. Ad- 
jiiva nos ; at Pentecost, at tlie verse, Veni Sanctus Spir- 
itxis ; at the Verhiun car o factum est^ and at the Incar- 
natus est of the Credo in the Masses of Christmas and 
of the Annunciation of the Blessed Yirgin ; froin the 
Sanctiis^ till after the consecration ; at the Communion 
of the clergy, after the celebrant has said Indulgentiam ;^' 
in the ferial Masses of Advent, Lent, ember days and 
vigils, which are fast days; and in Masses for the dead, 
at the prayers, at the Sanctus^ till the Pax Domini^ in- 
clusive; at the Post CoinmuRW^ except the vigils of 
Easter, Pentecost, Christmas, and the ember days of 
Pentecost. [^Ruh. Miss., part 1.) The clergy remain 
seated with their caps on, at all times when it is not pre- 
scribed above for them to stand or kneel unless the 
Blessed Sacrament be exposed. 

4. The clergy take off their caps whenever they stand 
up ; when they are saluted by the officiating clergy, or by 
others, who come to and from the choir, to return the 
salutation ; whenever they have to bow their he; ds In 
the above cases, it is understood that the cap only siiouid 
be taken oif. Should any wear the calotte,! it is taken 
off also when a genuflection is m.ade ; when the deacon 
sings the Gospel ; at the Incarnatus est ; when the choir 
is incensed ; at the consecration ; in giving and receiving 
the Pax; at the Communion of the clergy; when the 
celebrant gives the blessing. 

5. They bow the head during Mass at the following 
times : at the Gloria Patri, till the Sicut erat exclusively; 
whilst it is sung by the choir ; wdien the name of Jesus or 

*Oaly those of the clergy kneel who are to receive Holy Com- 
munion, the rest stand, even when Holy Communion is being 
given. 

t This is a small cap, used for covering Ihe crown of the head, where 
the clerical tonsure is made. 



138 HIGH MASS. 

Mary, or of tlie saint whose office is recited, or of whom a 
coininemoratioii is made, is pronounced ; and at the name 
of the Pope; during the Gloria in excelsis. at the words, 
Adoramus te^ Gratias agimus tibi^ Jesu Christe^ Suscipe 
depreaatioivm nostram ; during the Oredo^ at the words, 
Jesum Christum^ Et incarnatus est,^ etc., adoratur, 

6. During the time of singing, all sliould sing in a 
uniform manner, not elevating or lowering the voice more 
than the rest, and if any be unable to keep tune, it is 
better to be silent. They should also be attentive not to 
be faster, or slower than the others, but all should utter at 
the same time, the same syllable and note, and each one 
should be attentive not to get out of tune. 

7. When the sub-deacon goes to give the PaXy the first 
of the choir should, on his approach, bow to him, and 
lean his head towards his left cheek, placing at the same 
time his hands under his elbows, and the sub-deacon, lay- 
ing his hands on tlie shoulders of the others, says, Pax 
tecum ; to which he answers, Et cum spiritu tuo^ and 
again Ijows to the sub deacon, then turning to the one 
next, he gives the Pax in the same way that the sub- 
deacon gave it to him, and so on, each one to the one 
next to him. 

8. The clergy in choir should always observe silence, 
with modesty and recollection, shunning anything that 
mio-ht have an air of levity or irreverence. 

Article III. 

Tke Internal Dispositions required of those who attend 
the Choir. 

1. A right intention to worship God purely for His 
glory, and not for interest or vanity. 

2. Reflection on what is to be done, in order that 
no mistakes may be made, wdiich are the cause of many 

* Liturgical writers are divided on the question as to what position 
should be assumed by the clergy whilst the choir sings Et incarnatus 
est. The Cer. Ep. prescribes that all, except prelates and canons in 
their own church, should kneel. However, from vari(nis decrees of 
the S. C. R. it would seem that the clergy who are seated need not 
genuflect while these words are being sung. Of coiirse tliis dt)e3 not 
apply to the Masses of Christmas and the Annunciation, when all kneel. 



RULES FOR THE CHOIR. 139 

defect?. Tills preparation should be inade before going 
to the choir, bj reading the instructions for the cere- 
monies, and impressing them upon the mind by serious 
recollection, and, even in time of choir, at leisure 
moments, bj reflecting on what ceremony comes next, and 
how it is to be performed. Thus nothing will be un- 
foreseen, and all will be done w^ell. 

3. Attention to what is doing ; not giviniz; way to 
thoughts, even good in themselves, foreign to the present 
occupation, as such thoughts do not come from God, but 
proceed from some evil cause, to divert us from the good 
we are doing. The presence of God will aid us to have 
proper attention, that we may apply our mind to what is 
done, or said, attending to the signification ; exciting 
sentiments corresponding to those, which the words ex- 
press, as St. Augustin beautifully recommends in his com- 
mentary on the tenth Psalm: SI oratpsalrmis, orate ; et 
si ge?nity gemite ; et si timet^ timete ; omnia enim qiim 
hie conscripta sunt, speculum nostrum sicnt. What St. 
Augustin recommends in singing the Psalms, we should 
do in regard to whatever is recited or sung in Mass, or 
any other sacred function. 

4. Devotion is required, making us delight in those 
sacred duties, lest we be as those who perform them reluc- 
tantly and with tepidity, to whom that sentence is applica- 
ble: Jfalediotus homo, qui facit opus Domini fraudu- 
lenter. 

Article IY. 

The Order to he observed in receiving Holy Communion. 

1. After all have received the Pax, all who go to Com- 
munion meet together in the middle, two by two, with 
their caps and calotte oft', with their hands joined, bowing 
at the Lonfiteor, and striking their breast, etc. The oftici- 
ating clergy, who assist at Mass, communicate first; as 
also the priests (if any wish to communicate), with their 
stoles of the color of the day. Whilst the acolytes, after 
their Communion, are descending the side-steps on each 
side, the two first of the clergy, who are yet to commu- 
nicate, approach, making their usual genuflection, on the 



140 HIGH MASS. 

floor, before tliey ascend the steps, and after descending, 
they separate in coining down tlie steps, so as to leave 
space for the two who follow them to communicate; and 
so on, throughout. All kneel on the eclo;e of the plat- 
form to receive Communion; and, afterwards, with 
gravity and devotion, return to their places in the choir, 
and conform themselves to the rest of the clergy. If any 
of the laity communicate, they do it at the railings of the 
choir, or on the floor, at the foot of the altar ; and the 
celebrant descends to the lowest step to give them Com- 
munion, beginning always at the Epistle side. 

2. The same order is likewise observed in going to 
receive candles from the celebrant, ashes, or blessed palms, 
or in going to kiss sacred relics, and in similar ceremonies ; 
each one holding in his hand his cap and calotte, and 
kissing first the candle, or blessed palm, and then the 
celebrant's hand. , 

Article V. 
The Order in going from the Choir. 

1, No one should leave the choir without necessity ; in 
which case, he goes to the middle, makes a genuflection, 
salutes the choir, first on the Gospel side, then at the 
Epistle side. If the celebrant is sitting at the Epistle side, 
he should bow first to that side, then to the other. The 
same is done when any one enters the choir after the 
functions have commenced; he should, however, remain 
some time kneeling, saying some prayers, then make a 
genuflection, and bow to the choir, as mentioned above. 
No one should go out of the choir or enter it, whilst the 
celebrant is reciting the Confession, during the sinking 
of the prayers, the Gloria Patri, Incarnatus est^ Veni 
Sancte Sj)irihis, Adjuva 7ios, etc. Should any one enter 
the choir at these times, he must stop, and kneel, or stand, 
conforming himself to the rest of ttie choir; during the 
Confession, at the beginning of Mass, he must remain 
kneeling tdl it is finished. 

2. After the service, the acolytes go out of the sanc- 
tuary, and after them the members of the choir; those 



i:S^3TilUCTI0^^3 FOR THE OI^FICERS. 141 

who are last on the Gospel side, and the last on the Epistle 
side, advance in a straight line, and meet together in the 
middle, make a gennliection, and turning, follow the aco- 
Ivtes ; the others^do the same, and proceed to the sacristy, 
in the same order as they left it. When they arrive at 
the sacristy, they separate ; one going on one side, and 
the other on the other, forming two lines: when the 
celebrant arrives, he bows to them, and they return a 
similar bow, and then with modesty, gravity, and in 
silence, unvest. 



CHAPTER II. 

insteuctions for the officers. 

Article L 

things to be prepared. 

At the Altar. 

1. The altar should be decorated according to the 
solemnity of the festival. 

2. Six candlesticks with candles, and the cross with 
image of the Crucified, in the middle, prominently 
located. 

3. Kelic-cases with relics, or flowers, between the can- 
dlesticks. 

4. The Anilpendium and the veil of the Tabernacle 
of the color of the vestments. 

5. The altar-cards. 

6. The book-stand, with the Missal opened at the 
proper place. 

On the Side-iaUe. 

1. The table is to be covered with a linen cloth. 

2. A plate with the cruets containing wine and water, 
the finger-towel, and the hand-Dell. 

3. The chalice with the pnrificator, paten, host, pall, 
covered with the chalice-veil, on w^hich is placed the 
burse having in it the corporal. 



142 HIGH MASS. 

4. The Book for Epistle and Gospel, or Missal, with 
marks in the right place. 

5. The veil for the snb-deacon should cover the chalice, 
and hang down on each side of the side-table. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. A carpet on the steps, and platform of the altar. 

2. A carpet on the platform of the celebrant's bench. 

3. The celebrant's bench may be covered with a trreen 
cloth. (Merati.) On the bench, the chasuble and m.aniple 
of the celebrant, and the maniples of the sacred ministers. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. On the sacristy altar the sacred vestments for the 
celebrant, viz. : the amice, alb, cincture, stole and cope, 
of the color of the day. 

2. On one side of the chasuble the dalmatics for the 
deacon and sub-deacon, the stole for the deacon, two cinc- 
tures, two albs, and two amices. 

3. In a convenient place, the surplices for the master 
of ceremonies and for the three clerks ; also as many sur- 
plices as there are clergymen to assist. 

4. Two candlesticks with candles, for the acolytes. 

5. The censer and the incense-boat. 

6. The fire ready for the censer. 

7. A number of torches for the elevation, if they are 
to be used. 

8. The holy- water vase and sprinkle. 

ARTICLE II. 

Instruction for the Censer- Bearer, 

1. The censer-bearer goes to the sacristy a quarter of 
an hour before Mass, puts on his surplice, and, if no aco- 
lytes be present, assists the deacon and sub-deacon to 
vest.^ 

* Should the clergy proceed to the altar in solemn procession, pre- 
ceded by tlie cross, liie censer-bearer will have incense blessed by the 
celebrani (or by tlie Bisliop if present) bel'ore leaving the sacristy; 
and then, with smoking censer, will walk immediately before the 
cross-bearer. i^Cazrem. Epis., lib., ii, ch. viii.) 



CENSER-BEARER. 143 

2. Before Mass, he prepares the fire in tlie censer ; and, 
at the signal from the master of ceremonies, he goes to the 
sacristy before tlie acolytes, and carries the holy water 
vase and sprinkle; he goes to the deacon's right and 
presents to him the sprinkle; he accompanies the celebrant 
and sacred ministers during the sprinkling of the people, 
always remaining at the right of the deacon. When the 
deacon hands him the sprinkle, on returning to the altar, 
he genuflects, and goes back to the sacristy and puts 
away the holy-water vessel and sprinkle; and, having 
prepared the thurible, he re-enters the sanctuary, and 
may so time his entry as to arrive during the Confiteor ; 
and, at the end of the Confession, he approaches the 
altar and goes up to the platform at the Epistle side, hands 
the incense-boat to the master of ceremonies, and when 
the incense is put in, and blessed, he adjusts the cover ^ot' 
the censer, and hands it to the deacon ; he takes the boat 
in his left hand, and goes down holding his right hand 
on his breast.* 

*As the censer-bearer moves either alone or with the clerory. he 
carries the censer in his right hand, holding it at the top jnst under 
the chain-holder, having previously palled tlie cover chain sulDoienily 
high that the fire may burn. Unless there is another clerk for ihe 
incense-boat, he carries it in his left hand, otherwise he keeps his le!tt 
hand extended on his breast, as he moves along modestly and gravely. 
Should there be two censer-bearers, the one at the left carries the 
censer in his left hand. In making a genuflection, wliile holding the 
censer, he will so raise his hand ihat the censer will not touch the 
floor. Wh^n his hands are not employed, they should be joined. 
When incense is to be put in the censer, with his lefl hand h« will 
present the boat to whom he should; then, with the same hand, he 
takes from his right the top of the censer's chains, and brings it to 
bis breast, and with his right he takes the censer's chains near the top 
of the cover, and raises the censer sufficiently high that he who is to 
put incense in it may easily do so. After the blessin % if a blessing 
is to be given, he lowers the censer, and takes it in his right hand at 
the top. When the censer-bearer puts incense in it, he will hold the 
chains at the top, and also near the cover with his left hand, and with 
his right will put in incense. If he presents the censer to one of the 
ministers who is to give it to some one else, he w 11 present it with 
his right hand. If to the officiating priest, or to a minister who is to 
incense, he will present the top wiih his right hand, and the middle 
of the chains near the cover with his leit. If to the celebrant or 
officiating priest, and the Rubrics require it, he will kiss first the top 
of the chain, and then the right hand of the receiver. VVuen he re- 



114 HIGH MASS. 

3. He stands near the deacon, wliilst lie is incensing 
tlie celebrant, and bows to the priest both before and 
after; then takes the censer in his right hand (he should 
make a genuflection, if he is obliged to pass before the 
altar, to put away the censer, and the Blessed Sacrament 
is present), puts it in its proper place, and returns to the 
choir, or waits in the sacristy. 

4. When all the prayers are sung, he goes to prepare 
the censer ; and as soon as the priest has finished the 
Gospel (unless there be a long tract), he goes to the altar, 
to have incense put in and blessed ; then, holding the 
censer in his right liand, and the boat in his left, he 
descends to the floor, and goes before the acolytes, in the 
middle of the choir, before the altar at some distance 
from the steps, and stands between the acolytes. If there 
be a second master of ceremonies the thurifer stands on 
his left, in front of the acolytes. When the master of 
ceremonies gives the sign, he makes a genuflection, then 
bows to the clergy,* together with the ofliciating ministers; 
passes before the first acolyte, and goes on the left of the 
deacon, a little in the rear, so that he may be opposite 
the first acolyte. 

5. At the proper time lie gives the censer to the master 
of ceremonies, and takes it again in the same mamier ; he 
raises the lid of it a little, in order to keep the coals 
alive, having to use it to incense the priest. 

6. At the end of the Gospel, he approaches the deacon, 
and presents him the censer, making with him the usual 
bows before incensing the celebrant and after. He then 

ceives back the ceuser, he does so with his right hand. To incense in 
a proper manner, haviug lowered the cover of ilie center, he takes 
the top of the chains in his left hand, and brings it to his breast; with 
the fingers of his light hand, he takes the chains clo^e to the cover, 
and brings it as high as his eyes, then he lowers it, and stretches his 
arm, while he raises it again towards the one whom he is incensing, 
canting the censer to swing forward, and then lowers it agaui towards 
himself. He will repeat the same as often as he is to give tnrows, or 
swings. He bows before and after incensing. Tliis manner of in- 
censing is the same practiced in Rome and throughout Italy, in well- 
regulated churches. 

*Such bows, as we have before stated, are not to bo made to mere 
sanctuary boys. 



CEi^SER-BEARER. 145 

goes slowly before the altar, behind the snb deacon, and 
remains there while the celebrant intones the Credo^ if 
it is to be said, bowing at the word Deum^ and, having 
made a genuflection, he goes to the sacristy ; if the Credo 
is not said, after receiving the thurible from the deacon 
he goes to the Epistle side. 

7. Towards the end of the Credo, he goes to prepare 
the censer, and is ready at the altar after the oblation of 
the chalice. The incense is put in as usual ; he takes 
the incense-boat and places it upon the credence-table, 
and remains there at the Epistle side, with his hands 
joined before the breast. He attends the deacon whilst 
he is incensing the celebrant, the choir and sub-deacon ; 
and he stands at his left hand, a little in the rear, making 
the bows and genuflections at the same time with him. 
He receives the censer from the deacon, and wdien he 
arrives at his place behind the celebrant, incenses him 
tv.'ice; then he incenses the master of ceremonies, and 
the acolytes once each ; he goes then to the entrance of 
the sanctuary, and incenses the people thrice, once in 
the middle, tlien on the left, and last on the right, making 
the usual bows both before and after, and the genuflec- 
tions to the altar, passing and repassing. He then goes 
to the credence-table, takes the incense-boat, and places 
liimself just behind the sub-deacon, where he awaits the 
torch-bearers, with whom he goes to the sacristy, having 
saluted the clergy as usual. 

8. He again returns with the torch-bearers, and genu- 
flecting v/ith them, not omitting the usual bows to the 
clergy, he approaches the altar at the Epistle side, to th(^ 
right of the master of ceremonies, to have the incense 
put into the censer ; when that is done, he kneels on the 
floor, and, at the eJevation of the sacred Host, incenses 
it three times, making a low bow, both before and after. 
He does the same at the elevation of the chalice. (Euh. 
Hiss., part ii.) After this, he goes to the middle, genu- 
flects with the torch-bearers, and goes, without saluting 
the clergy, to the sacristy. 

9. Here his duty ends, but he may accompany the sub- 
deacon when he gives the Pax. 



146 HIGH MASS. 

10. If the clergy communicate, and the torch-bearers 
remain after the elevation, he should receive the humeral 
veil from the sub-deacon at the end of the Pater noster, 
and, after the celebrant's Communion, attend to the wine 
and water. "^ 

Should there be no Asperges, as on holidays, the 
thurifer may enter the sanctuary before the acolytes, 
and, having genuflected with them, he may go at once 
and prepare the thurible; or he may carry the thurible 
when entering, and remain at the Epistle side iintil after 
the Confession. 

The censer-bearer makes a genuflection on one knee, 
when he goes from the choir, or returns to it; when ho 
leaves or approaches the altar, after the consecration only, 
not before it ; in passing from one side of the altar to the 
other. 

When the incense is not blessed, the censer is held in 
the left hand ; otherwise in the right, and the boat in the 
left. When it is carried for any particular function, viz , 
when the Gospel is sung, or in processions, the censer- 
bearer puts his little finger in the ring of the small 
cover, and the thumb through that of the large cover. 
On other occasions — for instance, when he goes to have 
incense put into it, etc. — it is usual to hold it by the 
chains below the small cover, with the large cover a 
little raised, except in the act of incensing. 

Article III. 

Instruction for the Acolytes, 

1. The acolytes, who should be of equal size {CoBrew,. 
EjpisG.^ lib. i), put on their surplices a quarter of an 
hour before Mass, and prepare, and take to the altar 
whatever is necessary; they assist the deacon and sub- 
deacon in vesting, after they have lighted the candles 
on the altar (unless some other person do this), one 
on one side, the other on the other, beginning from 
the candle nearest to the cross ; and in putting them 
out, they begin with the furthest. If there be only 
one to light them, he will begin on the Epistle side, 

* II is supposed that the acolytes are acting as torch bearers. 



ACOLYTEP. 147 

and end with those on the Gospel side ; and vice versa, 
in extinguishing thein. 

2. Thej must take care not to let the wax fall upon 
the altar-cloth. 

3. The «econd acolyte lights the candles in the sacristy. 

4. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, 
they take their candles, and, meeting together, make 
a bow to the cross, or to the chief picture in the sacristy, 
then with their eyes modestly cast down, with a moderate 
pace, they go before the clergy to the altar. [Eub. 
Miss.^ part ii.) 

5. The first acolyte, at the right of his companion, 
holds the knob of the candlestick with his right hand, 
and the foot with his left; the second with his left holds 
the knob, and the foot with his right. [Casrem Eplsc.^ ib.) 

6. AYhen they arrive at the altar, they make a genu- 
flection on the floor; they then se[)arate, and go to the 
corners of the steps, and stand facing each other. 

7. \Yhen the sacred ministers have arrived, they turn 
towards the altar, make with them a genudection, and 
then go to place their candles on the table and kneel 
down ; and as soon as the celebrant and sacred ministers 
go to the bench after the Asperges, they assist the 
deacon and sub-deacon to pat on their maniples. Then 
the first may take the cope from the sub-deacon or 
master of ceremonies and carry it to the sacristy. They 
answer in a low voice to the priest ; at the end of the 
Confession they rise, and stand near the table. 

AVhenever the sacred ministers go tu sit down, the 
acolytes raise the dahnatic and chasuble over the back 
of the seat, so that they may not sit upon them ; this, 
however, depends upon its situation ; should it be neces- 
sary to pass before the celebrant, they bow to him. If 
the celebrant makes a genuflection during the Epistle, 
they do the same; and they make the usual signs of 
the cross at the Sequentia Sancti Eoangelii, while the 
celebrant reads the Gospel, but not when it is sung by 
the deacon. 

If the deacon and sub-deacon use the folded chasuble, 
the second acolyte, during the singing of the prayer, 



148 HIGH MASS. 

takes off the sub deacon's chasuble, and puts it on again, 
after he has kissed the celebrant's hand. In like 
manner he takes off that of the deacon, while the 
priest is reading the Gospel ; the lirst acolyte puts on 
him the large stole, and takes it off after removing the 
book for the Post Communio; and then the second 
acolyte puts on him the folded chasuble. 

8. Whilst the celebrant is putting incense into the 
censer for the Gospel, they take their candlesticks, and 
the censer-bearer having descended from the altar, they 
follow him to the middle of the choir; he then goes 
between them (if there is no second master of cere- 
monies), they make a genuflection to the altar, and 
salute the clergy, together with the sacred ministers. 
In these, and in similar actions, uniformity as to man- 
ner and time is requisite, that tliey may appear as one 
person moving and bowing. Then they go to the 
place where the Gospel is to be sung. 

9. AYhen the sub-deacon arrives at the y^lace where 
the Gospel is usually sung {Rub. 2Iiss., part ii), the 
first acolyte places himself at his right, and the second 
at lifs left, in a straight line, facing the left part of the 
choir. During this time, they never kneel down {Rub. 
Miss., part i), neither do they make the sign of the 
cross, but remain motionless. 

10. At the end of the Gospel, they go to the middle of 
the choir, three or four steps from the lowest front step 
of the altar, according as the space will allow, and make 
there a genuflection, and then return to the side-table. 
Having placed the candlesticks there, they remain stand- 
ing, and kneel at the Incarnatus, on one knee, wlien it is 
repeated by the priest; and on both, when it is sung. 

11. While the celebrant sings Oremus at the Offertory, 
the second acolyte takes the humeral- veil and puts it on 
the sub-deacon, who has come for the chalice; the first 
follows the sub-deacon with the cruets and towel,* 
{Rub. Miss., part ii), places all upon the altar, and 

*This towel is used in Rome for the purpose of protecting the altar- 
cloih, and is spread on the altar and the cruets are p'aced on ii. 



ACOLYTES. 149 

presents the cruets to the sub-deacon. When the wine 
and water are put into the chalice, he takes them back, 
and remains standing at his place. 

12. AVliilst the deacon is incensing the celebrant, they 
prepare the water to wash his hands. The first acolyte 
takes the towel ; the other the cruet and basin. When 
the deacon has done incensing, they attend to the wash- 
ing of the celebrant's hands {jRuh.,ihid.), bowing to him 
both before and after. They then put everything on the 
side-table, and remain there standing. 

13. They bow to the censer-bearer both before and 
after being incensed ; and the first acoiyte bows to his 
companion before being incensed. 

11:. At the commencement of the Preface, they go to 
the sacristy to liglit the torches, and return at the Scoictus 
{Rub., ib., tit. vii) ; and both enter together in the middle 
of the choir before the altar; they make a genafiection, 
then bow to the clergy, and to each other, and kneel at 
some distance apart, in a straight line.^ 

15. After the elevation, if there be no one to go to 
Communion [JRuh.)^ and it is not a privileged feast, 
according to the Rubrics, they meet together, make a gena- 
fiection, and take away the torches. Otherwise, they 
remain with the torches, kneeling until after Communion. 
(I^ub., ib.) 

16. The first acolyte takes the veil off the sub-deacon 
at the proper time, and folds it, and lays it on the table. 
They bow when the celebrant is communicating. 

17. The first acolyte takes the cruets to the altar at 
the proper time for the ablations, taking care to genu- 
flect before ascending the steps at Epistle side; and, in 
the meantime, the second takes the veil of the chalice to 
the other side of the altar, making a genuflection in pass- 
ing and repassing. If they hold the torches till after 
Communion, the censer-bearer supplies their place. 

18. Daring the blessing, at the end of Mass they kneel 
down on both knees; at the beginning of the Gospel, 
they rise and make the sign of the cross on themselves, 
as usual, at the Initium Sancti Evangelii, 

* It would be better to have four others to act as torch bearers, in 
which case the acolytes would remaia at their places. 



150 HIGH MASS. 

If the clergy remain in choir after the Gospel, the aco- 
lytes take the candles, go together to the middle, make a 
genuflection, and, with the sacred ministers, bow to the 
choir. 

19. Towards the end of the Gospel, tliey take the can- 
dlesticks and go to the middle; they make a genuflection 
at the words, J^t Verhum caro, or at the end of any other 
Gospel, and move towards the sacristy; there they bow 
to the cross, and with the candlesticks in their hands 
wait until the sacred ministers arrive, and then make a 
bow together. They put out their candles afterwards, 
and assist the deacon and sub-deacon in unvesting, and 
then go to put out the candles on the altar, unless some 
other person do it. 

The acolytes remain always standing by the side-table, 
except when they are engaged, as on the occasions men- 
tioned above. AVhilst the celebrant is singing, or read- 
ing, they keep their hands joined before their breast; at 
other times they keep them folded. In the choir the 
bow is generally made, first on the Gospel side, then on 
the Epistle side, beginning always with the greater dig- 
nitary. In holding the torches, or carrying them, they 
should hold them always as follows: the first acolyte 
being always on the right hand of the other, holds the 
torch in his right hand, and his companion holds his 
torch in his left. When one hand only is occupied, the 
other is held open upon his breast. "When they present 
anything to the celebrant, they kiss it before they present 
it ; and also when they receive it from him (except in 
Masses for the dead). If they pass before the altar in 
going for the torches, they make a genuflection. Should 
they communicate in time of Mass, after the deacon and 
eub-deacon, and the priests, if any communicate, they 
make a genuflection on one knee, before and after Com- 
munion. During their Communion, they hand their 
torches to others. 

Article IY. 
Duty of the Master of Ceremonies. 

1. The Master of Ceremonies should be acquainted 
with the duties of all the clergy, and be attentive to 



MASTER OF CEREM0i5"IES. 151 

their performance, making signs to them, but not pull- 
ing or pushing them ; and in case some mistake be not 
of much importance, it is better to let it pass. 

2. He should go to the sacristy, a quarter of an hour 
beforehand, and after a short prayer, put on his surplice, 
and prepare the chalice,* together with the pyx (in case 
the clergy communicate), and put in as many particles 
as there are persons to communicate. He prepares two 
Missals w^ith the marks at their proper places, and takes 
all to the side-table, which should be covered witli a 
white cloth {Bub. Miss., part ii), and there, aided by 
the acolytes, he arranges everything : he should see that 
the cruets are prepared, together with the towel, and 
that a humeral-veil of the color of the vestments 
of the day covers the chalice, etc., and hangs 
down on each side of the table. He should also see 
that the holy water vase and sprinkle, the thurible and 
boat, torches, etc., are prepared. He leaves one Missal 
on the table; the other he places on the bookstand at 
the Epistle side, and opens it at the' Mass of the day. 

3. He gives notice in time to the clergy that are to 
officiate, and with the acolytes assist them in vesting. 

4. When it is time, he gives notice to the acolytes 
to move towards the sanctuary ; when the clergy have 
passed on, he makes a sign to the officiating clergy 
to proceed ; they bow to the cross, and he precedes 
them, without either cap, or calotte, on his head; which 
is to be observed in all other functions. {Cong. Rit.^ 
17th Jul., I73i.) 

5. He takes the deacon's and celebrant's caps from 
the former, and passing to the other side, takes also 
the sub-deacon's, all of which he places on the bench. 
He then kneels at the Epistle side. During the Asperger 
he may remain there, or, it' the people are sprinkled 
only from the railing, he may accotnpany the thurifer 
who carries the holy water vase. When the celebrant 
has returned to the foot of the altar, he will have the 
card for the prayer ready and will hand it to the deacon. 

* If he be a cleric. 



152 HIGH MASS. 

Wlien tlie prayer is finished lie goes to the bench and 
assists the celebrant, and returning with him and sacred 
ministers to the altar, he kneels down at the E,jistle 
side, with his face turned to the Gospel side, and 
answers the celebrant in a low voice, making the usual 
signs of the cross, and bows. 

6. At the end of the Confession, he goes up to the 
altar with the ministers, to have the incense put in; 
an'i comes down again to the Epistle side. When the 
celebrant is incensing that side, he takes off the Missal, 
Hiid afterwards replaces it, without making any genu- 
tlecti(>n. 

7. If in time, after the incensing of the altar and the 
celel)rant, he points out the beginning of the Introit^ as 
he should do, whenever he attends to the book, raising 
or lowering it as may be necessary, and pointing out 
what is to be read or sung, turning the leaves, etc. 

8. When the celebrant has said the Kyrle Eleison^ if 
the singing is to continue for any length of time, the 
master of ceremonies makes him the signal to go and 
sit down on the bench {Cmrein. Episc , lib. i), as is 
expressly ordered by the Sao. Cong. Hit. 17th Sept., 
1S22. He descends to the floor, and w^ith his hands 
modestly folded before his breast, stands at the right 
hand of the deacon ; he should observe the same at the 
Gloria and Credo^ whilst the clergy are sitting. 

9. When the choir is singing the last Kyrie^ he 
makes a moderate bow, to invite the ministers to the 
altar, and he goes to the Epistle side. AVhen the 
ministers do not sit, during the singing of the Kyrley 
he gives them notice to go to the middle of the altar, 
and to stand in a line, one after the other; when the 
Gloria in Excelsis Deo is intoned, he directs them to go 
on each side of the celebrant to recite it with him. 

10. When they have said the Gloria in Excelsis^ he 
gives them notice to sit down ; but not wliilst the choir 
is singing, Adoramus te^ Gratias agimas tibi. When 
they are seated, by a moderate bow, he gives them 
notice to take off their caps, whilst the choir is singing 
the above-mentioned words, Adoramus te^ Gratias 



MASTEE OF CEREMONIES. 153 

agimiis iioi ; Jesu^ etc., Suscij)e, etc., during wliicli time 
he bows to the altar. 

11. At the Cum Sancto Spirits ^ he makes them a 
sign to go to the altar, and he goes to the Missal to find 
the prayers which are to be sung, pointing them out to 
the celebrant, and turning the leaves of the Missal. 

12. At the beginning of the last prayer, he goes to the 
side-table, takes the Missal in both hands, so as to turn 
the opening of it to his right, and presents it to the sul> 
deacon, bowing both before and after. He then pla es 
himself at his left, standing a little in the rear, and at the 
conclusion of the last prayer, at the words Jesum Chris- 
tinn^ he bows, and goes to the middle of the altar with 
the sub-deacon, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy, 
returns to the same place, and points out the Epistle, 
supporting his left whilst he is singing. lie makes a 
genuflection at the words In nomine Jesu, etc., and 
bows at the names of Jesus and Mary, and of the saint 
whose feast is celebrated; giving notice to tlie clergy, 
immediately before, to kneel down, or take oflT their 
caps. 

13. When the Epistle is finished, he accompanies the 
Bub-deacon to the middle of the altar, makes a genuflec- 
tion and bows to the clergy, then goes with him to the 
Epistle side, to receive the celebrant's blessing. He 
receives the Missal from the sub-deacon, and gives it to 
the deacon, at the beginning of the Gospel. When the 
celebrant has recited the Gospel, he goes up to the plat- 
form, or to the highest step at the Epistle side, to have 
incense put in, and he hands the incense-boat, open, to 
the deacon. 

Should the choir sing a Sequentia^ or long Tracts he 
makes a sign to the ministers to sit down, and he stands 
near the bench, as at the Gloria. At the end of it he 
makes a sign to rise, and goes to the Epistle side to have 
incense put in. 

During the Ferial days in Lent, the ministers kneel 
on the edge of the platform, at the words Adjava nos 
JJeus, so that it is well to have the incense put in 
before, to give time to the deacon to say the Manda cor 



154 HIGH MASS. 

vieum. And as the organ is not plajed on tliose days, 
he can request the choir to prolong their chant, so as to 
have time to perform these ceremonies without con- 
fusion . 

14. Whilst the deacon is receiving the celebrant's bless- 
ing, the master of ceremonies stands at the Epistle side, 
'^ritli his face towards the altar. He then peaces himself 
ut the right hand of the deacon, and makes a genuflec- 
tion with all the other ministers, and goes to the Epistle 
side, always at the right hand of the deacon, a little in 
the rear; he presents him the censer after the Sequentia 
Sancti Evangelii, he takes it again after the Missal is 
incensed, givts it to the censer-bearer, and remains at 
the side of the deacon to turn the leaves of the Missal. 

If it be necessary to make a genuflection, or bow, 
during the singing of the Gospel, he makes it towards 
the altar, which will serve as a notice to the celebrant. 

15. At the end of the Gospel, he goes to the Epistle 
side, and there makes a genuflection with the others. 
He receives the Missal from the sub-deacon, with the 
usual bows, and places it on the side-table, then returns 
to the Epistle side, and remains there until the Credo is 
recited, he bows at the same time with the celebrant, and 
also makes the sign of the cross with him. 

16. When the celebrant says, Et incarnatus est^ the 
master of ceremonies makes a genuflection on one knee 
only, and at the end of the Credo^ makes a sign to sit 
down ; he stands in order to give notice when they are 
to take ofi* their caps. When the Incarnatus est is sung 
by the choir, he kneels on both knees, together with the 
acolytes and censer-bearer; the sacred ministers take off 
their caps. In the Masses of Christmas and the feast of 
the Annunciation, all kneel down at those words; he, 
therefore, should prepare cushions for tlie occasion. 

17. After JEt homo f actus est, he makes a sign to the 
deacon to come for the burse, and after giving it to him, 
he returns to the bench of the sacred ministers. At the 
words, Et vitam ve^ituri, etc., or a little before, he gives 
notice to the celebrant and others to go to the altar, and 
goes to the Epistle side. 



MASTER OF CEREMON-IES. 155 

18. When the coleb ant has said the Orevius^ at tlie 
Offertory^ he makes a sign to the sub-deacon to make a 
genullection, and go to the side-table. When there, he 
puts the veil upon liim, letting it hang down somewhat 
lower on the right than on the left. He accompanies 
him to th 5 a'tar, taking the pjx with him from the side- 
table; he assists in unrovering the chalice, and when the 
sub-deacon has taken the paten, he should have the 
incense put in as usual. 

19. He afterwards goes to the Epistle side, and when 
the celebrant is incensing the cross or the Epistle side, 
he passes to the Gospel side, m iking a genudection in 
the middle, and removing the Missal, goes down to the 
floor. After the celebrant has incensed that side, he 
replaces it and remains there to a; tend to the book, 
pointing to the prayers, and turning the leaves. 

20. At the end of the Preface, he gives notice to the 
de-icon to go up on the platform to the right of the cele- 
brant to recite the Sanctus.^ At the Te ijitur^ the 
deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, and the mister 
of ceremonies to the Epistle side, both making a genu- 
flection m the middle, as they pass. The master of cere- 
monies remains there until the w^ords, Qui pridie quam 
pateretur ; when after putti ig incense in the censer, he 
kneels down with the censer-bearer, and, at the elevation, 
rings the bell three distinct times. He makes a low bow 
with the censer-bearer, both before and after each 
elevation. 

21. After this he rises, and remains there until the 
JVobis quoque ]_ eccatoribus and then passes to tiie other 
side, making a genuflection in the middle, always behind 
the sub-deacon. 

22. When the deacon goes from the left side of the 
celebrant, the master of ceremonies takes his place, makes 
a genuflection with the celebrant and deacon, who should 
be at the right hand of the celebrant. The master of 



* Should the sub-deacon go up to recite the Sanctus, the master of 
ceremonies will retire, and, at the commencement of the Canon, take 
Ills place as above. 



156 HIGH MASS. 

ceremonies remains at the left, attending to the Missal, 
"an til the Agnus Dei^ making the genuflections with him, 
and turning the leaves, etc. 

23. Before the Pater Noster is commenced, he makes 
a sign to the deacon to make a genuflection and go behind 
the priest, on the usual step; and at the words, Dimitie 
nobis^ he again gives notice to the deacon and sub-deacon 
to make a genuflection, and go up to the altar at tiie 
Epistle side; the sub-deacon leaves there the paten, and 
takes off* the veil; the master of ceremonies makes him 
a sign to make a genuflection there, and return to his 
place on the floor. The deacon remains at the right of 
the celebrant, and he at the left until the Pax Domini 
is sung, at which time he gives the sub-deacon notice to 
make a genuflection at his place, and come up to the left 
of the celebrant, where he makes again a genuflection, 
and says the Agmm Dei. {Bub.^ Miss., part ii.) The 
master of ceremonies makes a genuflection at tlie same 
time, goes down to the floor, and waits to accompany the 
sub-deacon when he goes to give the Pav to the choir, 
beginning at the Gospel side, giving it to the first in 
dignity, and then passing to the Epistle side, making a 
genuflection in the middle. 

24. When this ceremony is over, he returns to the 
altar, makes a genuflection on the floor with the sub- 
deacon, and receives the Pax from him, bowing both 
before and after. He then gives it to the flrst acolyte, 
or to the censer-bearer, when he assists at the side-table 
in place of the acolytes, who are occupied in holding the 
torches. He remains after this in his usual place, at the 
Epistle side, until tiie celebrant has comnmnicated. 

Jf the clergy communicate, the sub-deacon covers the 
chalice, after the ce.ebrant has received the Precious 
BU^od. The two sacred ministers make a genuflection 
and change places. The deac* n uncovers tlie pyx, and 
they both again make a genuflection with the celebrant. 
Alter this, the deacon stands upon the highest step at 
the Epistle side, facing the Gospel side, and bowing 
low, he sings the Conjiteor, and the celel^rant, turning 
on the platform, towards the deacon, says the Misereatur 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 157 

and Indulgentiam^ making the sign of the cross over 
those who are to communicate, and holding his left 
hand on his breast. "When the deacon is about to sing 
the Coiifiteor, the sub-deacon retires to the highest step 
on the Gospel side, with his face turned towards the 
deacon, and with his hands joined; he remains there till 
after the Indulgentiam ; both of them then change 
places, making a genuflection as they pass the middle of 
the altar, one behind the other, at the same time with 
the celebrant, and place themselves by the side of the 
celebrant, the deacon at the Gospel side, the sub-deauon 
at the Epistle side. 

It the sacred ministers communicate, after the Indul- 
gentiam^ they kneel upon the edge of the platform in 
front of the celebrant; after Communion, they make a 
genuflection in the same place, and place themselves by 
the side of the celebrant as mentioned above, taking the 
communion cloth from those who hold it, as they pass, 
and giving it back when they have passed. The deacon 
takes the paten, and holds it at a just distance below the 
Sacred Particle, and accompanies the priest's hand in 
giving Communion. The sub-deacon stands near the 
priest, with his hands joined, and face turned towards 
the people, during the Communion ; at the end of 
which, the censer-bearer takes the communion cloth, 
and places it on the side-table, and the master of 
ceremonies assists at the ablution on the Epistle side. 

25. When the celebrant returns to the Epistle side, 
the master of ceremonies stands by him at the Missal, 
w^iicli he closes after the last prayer, if there be not 
a particular Gospel at the end of Mass. In case there 
be, after the deacon sings the Ite^ missa est^ the master 
of ceremonies hands the Missal to the snb-deacon for 
greater convenience, to take to the other side. 

26. In time of the blessing, he and all the ministers 
kneel down, and rise after it is given. Towards the 
end of the last Gospel, he makes a sign to the acolytes 
to take the candlesticks, and go to the middle of the 
altar. They make a genuflection there at Verhum caro 
factum est, or at the end of any other Gospel, and move 



158 HIGH MASS. 

towards the sacristy, followed by the clergy. He takes 
the caps of the sacred ministers, with whom, at the 
proper time, he makes a genuflection, and gives them 
their caps, presenting first to the deacon that of the 
celebrant. 

27. They return to the sacristy in the same order 
as they came ; he salutes the clergy at the same time 
with the sacred ministers, and having bowed to the 
cross, or picture, in the sacristy, he assists in disrobing 
the celebrant, and then removes the things from the 
side-table. 

]f the clergy remain in choir, the acolytes take the 
candlesticks at the end of the Gospel, and go to the 
middle. When the sacred ministers descend, all make 
a genuflection together, and salute the choir; the master 
of ceremonies presents the caps, and they proceed in 
the above mentioned order to the sacristy. 

The sacred ministers make a genuflection on the floor, 
when they first come to the altar before Mass, and 
at the end before they leave the sanctuary ; at other 
times they make it on the step, as far as practicable. 

Article Y, 
Instruction for the Sub-deacon, 

1. The sub-deacon should repair to the sacristy a 
quarter of an hour before Mass; and, after a short 
prayer, wash his hands, and put on the vestments, 
except the maniple, w^iich he puts on at the bench 
after the celebrant is vested. After assisting the cele- 
brant to vest, he puts on his cap. 

2. On a sign made by the master of ceremonies, he 
bows before the ])icture in the sacristy, holding his cap 
in his hand ; he makes also a moderate bow to the cele- 
brant, and then puts on his cap, and holding the edge 
of the celebrant's cope, goes at his left to the sanctuary 
or choir. 

3. When he enters the choir, he goes to the left of the 
celebrant, gives his cap to the master of ceremonies, and 
proceeds with the other ministers. 



SUB-DEACON. 159 

4. He kneels with the celebrant while the Asperges 
is being intoned, and then accompanies him during the 
sprinkling of holy water. The prayer being ended, he 
goes to the bench, where he puts on the maniple. He 
may hold the cope while the celebrant puts on the 
maniple and chasuble, and then give it to the acolyte. 
Then he goes to the foot of tlie altar. 

He makes a genuflection with the deacon before the 
altar, and answers with him during the Confession, 
making the sign of the cross, and bowing with the 
celebrant. He stands erect when the celebrant says 
the Confiteor ; bows moderately when he says Misereatur 
vestri ; and bows profoundly when he recites the Con- 
fiteor ; turning a little towards the celebrant at the 
w^ords, Et tlhi Pater, and Et te Pater. {Buh. Miss , 
part ii.) He stands upright when the celebrant says," 
Indidgentiam ; and again bows moderately at the Deus, 
tu conversus, until the Oreinus. 

He holds his hands joined before his breast, except 
when he sits down, or is engaged, w^hen he performs some 
sacred rite with his right hand, he keeps his left open 
upon his breast; and when the priest makes a low bow, 
or a genuflection, he also bows, or makes a genuflection, 
and supports the priest's arm as he rises. 

5. When the celebrant has said the Oremus, he goes 
up to the altar with him, raising a little the extremity of 
his alb. When the celebrant incenses the altar, he raises 
the chasuble with his hand, and makes a genuflection 
every time he passes before the cross. (Rub., ih., iv.) 
When the celebrant returns the censer to the deacon, he 
goes down to the Epistle side, and stands at the left of 
the deacon facing the celebrant, and makes with him a 
a low bow, both before and after incensing. 

6. After that, he gees to the Epistle side, and stands 
on the step below that on which the deacon stands at 
bis right, so that, with the celebrant and deacon, who 
otands at his right, an imperfect semi-circle may be formed. 

7. He makes the sign of the cross at the beginning of 
che Introit, and answers to the Kyrie, and remains 
there, or goes to sit down {Rub. Miss., part i), accord- 



160 HIGH MASS. 

ing to the directions of the master of ceremonies, making 
a moderate bow to the altar. 

8. On notice given by the master of .ceremonies, when 
the clioir is at the last K^jrie^ he goes with the deacon to 
the altar, the celebrant being between them ; tliey bow 
to the choir. When they arrive before the altar, he 
makes a genuflection at the same time with the deacon, 
on the lowest step, and then he stands behind the deacon. 
[Rub. Miss.^ part ii.) 

9. He bows at the word Deo, w^hen the celebrant sings 
the Gloria ; then he goes np to the platform, to the left 
of the celebrant, and says the remainder of the Gloria 
with him. (Ruh., ih.) He should take care not to say 
it faster than the celebrant. He ought also to bow and 
make the sign of the cross with him. 

10. At the end of the Gloria, he makes a genuflection 
with the deacon, and, turning on his left, goes down the 
steps with the celebrant, whose arm he apparently sup- 
ports, to the bench. He takes his cap, makes a moderate 
bow with the deacon to the celebrant, and then sits down 
at his left ; puts on his cap, keeps his hands open on his 
lap, and takes off his cap, when directed by the master 
of ceremonies. 

If the choir is singing a verse, at which it is necessary 
to bow, whilst he is going to the bench, he stops, and 
bows towards the altar. 

11. At the sign made by the master of ceremonies, he 
rises, takes off his cap, places it on the bench, and, after 
two or three steps, salutes the clergy, together with the 
deacon and celebrant; first on the Epistle side, then on 
the Gospel side. 

12. When he arrives at the altar, he makes a genu- 
flection with the others, raises the celebrant's alb, as he 
goes up to the altar, and then stops at his place behind 
tlie deacon. 

13. After the Dominus voMscum, he goes behind the 
deacon at the Epistle side. {Rub., ih.) He bows with 
the celebrant during the prayers ; but does not answer 
Amen, which he should observe whenever the choir 
responds. 



sub-deaco:n". 161 

"When Flectamus genua is to be said, the deacon sings 
it in the act of bending the knee, and the sub-deacon 
sings Levate; and rises before the rest. All kneel down 
except the celebrant. {Bub.^ ib., lib. v.) If the sub- 
deacon has on the folded cliasnble, he will take it off to 
sing the Epistle and put it on after receiving the cele- 
brant's blessing. 

14. He takes the book, when it is presented by the 
master of ceremonies, bowing a little in the act of 
receiving it. He rests the upper part of the Missal on 
his breast, holding it below with both hands [Ruh.^ ib., 
lib..vi, n. 4), with the edge to his left, and turning towards 
the altar, he waits until the celebrant has said the words, 
Jesam Christum; when they occur in the conclusion, 
he bows at them, and then goes to the middle of the altar, 
makes a genuflection on the lowest step, bows to the 
clergy at the Gospel side, and at the Epistle side ; he 
returns behind the celebrant, opens the book, and sings 
the Epistle {Rub. ib.), and when these words occur, J/i 
nomine Jesu omne genio Jlectatur, etc., he makes a genu- 
flection, on one knee only, upon the step. 

15. AVlien the Epistle is ended, he shuts the book, 
and holding it, as was mentioned above, he returns to the 
middle of the altar, makes a genuflection, salutes the 
clergy as he did before the Epistle, goes to the Epistle 
side, kneels upon the upper step, and kisses the cele- 
brant's hand placed on the Missal. (Rub., ibid.) 

16. After receiving his blessing, he rises, gives the 
book to the master of ceremonies, then puts on the folded 
chasuble if he has worn it, and removes the Missal to the 
Gospel side {Rub., ibid., u. 5), making a genuflection in 
passing before the altar. 

17. After placing the book upon the altar, he remains 
on the upper step with his face turned towards the Epis- 
tle side, and there answers to the priest, making the sign 
of the cross, and bowing with him, and turning the 
leaves, if necessary. He answers, Zaus tibi, Christe, at 
the end, and goes upon the ph.tf jrin, and turns the book 
for the convenience of the celebrant, leaving room to 
spread the corporaL 



162 HIGH MASS. 

If the choir sings the Adjuva nos, the Yeni, Sancte 
Sjpiritus^ etc., he kneels on the edge of the platform at 
the celebrant's left until it be finished. {Rub. Miss., 
part i.) 

18. When the incense is put into the censer, and 
blessed, he goes down to the floor, and waits for the 
deacon. He makes a genuflection with the other min- 
isters, salutes the clergy, and proceeds before, or if the 
space will allow, at the left of the deacon, to the place 
where the Gospel is to be sung, and there stands between 
the acolytes, holding the book open (Bub. Miss., part ii), 
and leaning it upon his forehead or upon his breast, as 
may be more convenient for the deacon. Being occupied 
in holding the book, he does not bow, nor make a genu- 
flection, when the name of Jesus occurs, although the 
others do. {Bub. Miss., part i.) 

19. At th@ end of the Gospel, he takes the book open 
to the celebrant {Bub., ibid.), by the shortest w^ay (he does 
not make a genuflection, even if he pass before the 
Blessed Sacrament), and presents it to hira to kiss, point- 
ing out wdth his right hand, the beginning of the Gospel, 
which w^as sung. He shuts the book after the priest has 
kissed it, withdraws a little, salutes the celel)rant, and 
then goes down to the floor in front of the Epistle side, 
where, without making a genuflection, he gives the 
Missal to the master of ceremonies, and remains there a 
little turned towards the deacon whilst the latter incenses 
the celebrant. 

20. At the intoning of the Credo, he stands behind the 
deacon, and having made a genuflection with him on 
arriving at the middle of the altar, he bows at the word 
Deum, and goes up to the celebrant's left, observing the 
same that was prescribed for the Gloria. {Bub., ibid.) 

21. At the Incarnatus est, he makes a genuflection, 
and at the end of the Creed goes to sit down, as he did 
at the Gloria. When the Incarnatus est is sung, he 
takes ofi* his cap, and bows moderately till Homo f actus 
est is finished. 

In the three Masses of Christmas, and on the feast of 
the Annunciation, even if the office is not said on this 



SUB-DEACO^r. 163 

festival, on account of its occurring on some privileged 
day, he kneels down with the other ministers, whilst the 
words Et incarnatus^ etc., are sung. 

22. When the deacon goes for the burse, the sub-deacon 
rises, and stands with liis cap in his liand until the 
deacon has passed with the burse, and bowed to the cele- 
brant; then sits down, and puts on his cap. When the 
deacon returns to sit down, the sub-deacon rises a little 
before, bows with him to the celebrant, and sits down 
again with him. He takes off his cap whenever the 
master of ceremonies gives notice. 

23. At the end of the Credo^ when the sign is made, 
he returns with the other ministers to the altar, observing 
what was prescribed at the end of the Gloria. 

2i. When the celebrant says Oremus at the Offertory^ 
he bows, then makes a genuflection, and goes to the 
table, receives the veil upon his shoulders, takes the veil 
off" the chalice, and gives it to the second acolyte; he 
takes hold of the chalice at the knob with his left hand, 
covers it wnth the right end of the veil, places his right 
hand over it, goes upon the platform to the deacon's 
right, and there places the chalice upon the altar. [Ruh., 
ibid. ) 

When there is no Credo, he takes the burse upon the 
chalice. [Eub., ibid.) 

25. After the deacon has taken ofi" the pall and paten, 
he wipes the chalice with the purilier, and presents it to 
the deacon. He receives the cruets from the acolyte, 
presents wine to the deacon, and receives back the cruet 
in his left hand. AVhen the deacon has poured the wine 
into the chalice, he presents the cruet of water to the 
celebrant, and bowdng a little toward him, says. Bene- 
dicite Pater Beverende {Bub. Miss., ibid); but if he is 
a prelate, he says, Benedicite Beverendissime Pater. 
After the celebrant has blessed it, he pours a few drops 
into the chalice, and gives back the cruets to the acolyte. 
{Bub., ibid.) 

26. He does not cover his hands with the veil before 
he receives the paten from the deacon ; after receiving it 
in his right hand, he covers it with the end of the veil, 



1C4 HIGH MASS. 

whi(tli is at his right, and tlien rests it against his breast, 
as he slioiild do whenever he moves from one place to 
another, when he is incensed, while he is kneelirig, and 
wlien he responds to the Orate Fr aires, lie goes in front 
of the altar, makes a gennflection on the lowest step, 
and then remains standing until the words of the Pater 
Koster, Dimitte nobis dehitta nostra ; holding the paten 
on a level with his eyes, with his left hand under his 
right elbow. The end of the veil at his left hangs down 
at his side.^ 

27. When the deacon kneels at the elevation, he also 
kneels at his place, on the lowest step, nntil it is over. 
{Ruh.^ ibid.) 

28. At the words Dimitte nobis, he makes a genuflec- 
tion at his place, and goes up to the altar at the Epistle 
side, near the deacon, and presents him the paten. When 
the acoljte or censer-bearer has taken off the veil, he 
makes a genuflection there, and returns to the floor 
behind the celebrant, and without making another genu- 
flection, stands there with his hands joined. (Bah., ibid.) 

29. When the celebrant sajs Pax Domini, he makes 
a genuflection, and goes up to his left, makes there a 
genuflection with the others, and then bowing towards 
the Blessed Sacrament, says, Agnus Dei, etc., striking 
his breast at the Miserere nobis, and at the end of the 
third he makes a genuflection, and returns where he was 
at first. {Rub., ib.) 

30. AVhen the deacon comes to give him the Pax, he 
salutes him both before and after, then makes a genu- 
flection at his place (at the same time that the deacon 
makes it on the platform), and accompanied by the 
master of ceremonies, he proceeds to give the Pax to the 
clergy, beginning with the flrst one on the more worthy 
side, and then on the other. [Rub., ibid.) Laying his 
hands on the shoulders of the one to whom he gives it, 
he says. Pax tecum, bowing to each of them after having 
given it, but not before. If there be several rows of 

■^/S. 11. C, Nov. 12, 1831, has decreed that the sub-deacon should 
prf<:eed to say the Sanctus with the celebrant in churches where the 
custom exists ; otherwise, he remains in his place. 



SUB-DEACON. 165 

clergTinen, he sives it to tlie first in each row, and makes 
his genutlection before the Blessed Sacrament when he 
passes in the middle of the choir. 

Should he liave to ^ive tlie Fax to prelates, he puts 
his hands under their elbows. 

31. After giving the Fax to the clergy, he returns to 
the middle of the altar, makes a genuflection on the step, 
and gives it to the master of ceremonies; then goes up 
to the right of the celebrant, and there makes again a 
genuflection. {Riib.^ ibid.) 

32. At the Domine non sum digmis^ he strikes his 
breast, and bows moderately to the Blessed Sacrament. 
He bows profoundly to the Blessed Sacrament whilst the 
celebrant is receiving both species. {Ruh.^ ibid.) 

33. He uncovers the chalice at the proper timic, makes 
a genuflection, and presents wine and water for both 
ablutions, observing the usual ceremonies. [Bub.., ibid.) 
After giving the water, he lays the purifier on the cele- 
brant's fingers. 

31:. He gives back the cruets to the acolyte, and 
changes place with the deacon, making a genuflection 
only in the middle of the alcar behind the deacon. When 
he comes to the Gospel side, he wipes the chalice, and 
adjusts it in the usual manner, putting the purifier upon 
it, the paten with the pall, the veil, and lastly the burse, 
with the corporal in it; then holding the chalice with 
his left hand, and placing his right upon the burse, he 
takes it to the table, makes a genuflection in the middle 
of the altar, and returns behind the deacon. (Fub., 
ibid.) 

35. After the lie, inlssa est., or Benedicamiis Domino^ 
wliilst-the celebrant is saying the Flaceat, he goes up to 
the second step, and he kneels on the edge of the plat- 
form, at the words Benedicat vos, and bowing, receives 
the blessing. 

36. He rises and goes to the Gospel side, and there 
holds the card for the celebrant, or attends to the book, 
if necessary. (Bub.,ib.) He does not make a genuflec- 
tion towards the altar, at the Verhum caro^ being obliged 
to hold the Gospel-card with bjth hands for the con- 



16G HIGH MASS. 

venience of the celebrant, and for the same reason he 
does not make the sign of the cross at Initium Sancti 
JEvangelii^ etc. 

If any other Gospel is read, after the lie, missa est^ or 
Benedicamus Domino^ he receives the Missal from the 
master of ceremonies, makes a genuflection, and takes it 
to the Gospel side, and kneels down as was said, at tlie 
left of the deacon, upon the edge of the platlbrm, to 
receive the blessing. • He rises, and attends at the cele- 
brant's left, making the sign of the cross, genuflection, 
etc. ; at the end, he shuts the Missal, and leavt s it tliere. 

37. At the end of the Gospel, he goes upon the plat- 
form at the celebrant's left, and, on notice given by the 
master of ceremonies, bows to the cross, goes down to 
the floor with the other ministers, makes a genuflection 
w^ith them, puts on his cap, and proceeds immediately 
after the clergy towards the sacristy. 

38. When in the sacristy, he stands at the left of the 
celebrant; he salutes the clergy, bows to the picture or 
cross in the sacristy, and to the celebrant, then takes off 
his maniple, and the folded vestment when it is used, 
and assists the celebrant to disrobe. 

If the clergy remain in the choir, he bows to them 
after having bowed towards the altar, then puts on his 
cap, and proceeds as above. 

39. Should there be no Asjperges^ as on holidays, the 
sub-deacon puts on the maniple in the sacristy, and goes 
to the sanctuary before the deacon, and does as directed 
above after the Asjperges at the foot of the altar. 

Article Vi. 

Instruction for the Deacon, 

1. The deacon goes to the sacristy a quarter of an 
hour before Mass, makes a short prayer, and looks over 
the Gospel, and Ite^ missa est^ or Benedicamus Domino, 
which he has to sing; he then washes his hands, and 
puts on all the vestments, except the maniple (and the 
folded vestment when it is used), which he puts on after 
the Asjyerges, He assists the celebrant in vesting, 



DEACON. 1G7 

linnding him the sacred vestments, by turns with the 
sub-deacon. 

2. Wlien the celebrant is vested, and has put on liis 
cap, lie also puts on his, and remains standing at the 
celebrant's right, with his hands joined, until the master 
of ceremonies gives the signal, he then descends, bows to 
the cross or image, with his cap in his hand, and again 
bows moderately to the celebrant, and, with his cap on 
and hands joined, and sustaining the edge of the cope, he 
goes to the sanctuary. 

3. He gives his cap to the master of ceremonies, then 
receives the celebrant's cap with both hands, with the 
usual kisses (except in Masses for the dead), and hands 
it to the master of ceremonies. 

4. He kneels down with the celebrant, and having 
received the sprinkle, hands it to him. He accompanies 
him during the sprinkling of holy water, holding the 
border of the cope. On their return to the foot of the 
altar, he receives back the sprinkle, and hands it to the 
thurifer. The prayer being concluded, he goes to the 
bench and puts on the maniple. 

5. He goes to the altar at the celebrant's right, makes 
a genuflection, answers with the sub-deacon, and makes 
the sign of the cross on himself, with the priest, etc. 
He bows moderately towards him when he says the 
Misereatur, and makes a low bow towards the altar 
when he says the Confiteor^ turning a little towards the 
celebrant at the words, £t tibL Pater ^ and Et te, Pater. 
{Ruh. Miss., part ii.) 

He rises at the Indulgentiam, and bows again at Deus^ 
tu conversus, continuing in this posture to the Oremus, 
inclusively. 

He generally holds his hands joined before his breast, 
except when he is sitting, or enaged. When he uses his 
right hand, he keeps his left upon his breast. When the 
celebrant makes a genuflection, if he be by his side, he 
makes it with him, and with one hand supports his arm 
whilst he is rising. 

6. After the Or emus ^ he goes up to the altar at the 



168 HIGH MASS. 

celebrant's right, raising the alb a little in front. Tie 
receives the incense-boat from the master of ceremonies, 
takes the spoon, kisses it, and presents it to the celebrant, 
kissing his hand, and says, Benedicite^ Reverende Pater. 
If he be a Prelate, Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater. 
(Rub.^ ib.) 

7. After the incense is put in, he receives the spoon 
from the celebrant, and kisses it, after kissing his hand. 
(Ruh., ib.) He should observe this on similar occasions. 
When the incense is blessed, he takes the censer, holding 
with his right hand the top of the chain, with his lett 
the other extremity, and presents it to the celebrant, kiss- 
ing first the upper part of the chain, then the right hand 
of the celebrant, which is placed between his own hands. 
{Rub., ib.) 

8. Whilst the celebrant is incensing the altar, the deacon 
stands a little in the rear at his right, and with his left 
hand holds np the back of the chasuble. He makes a 
genuflection every time he passes belbre the cross. 
{Rub., ib.) 

9. At the end of the incensing, he receives the censer 
from the celebrant, kissing his right hand and the upper 
part of the chain, as above ; then with the top in his left, 
and with his right holding the botttom of the chain near 
the cover, he descends to the floor at the Epistle side, 
and incenses the celebrant thrice, making a low bow 
both before and after ; he gives the censer to the censer- 
bearer, and goes up to the step, near the platform, to the 
celebrant's right. {Rub.^ib.) Kq \^oini^o\\i\}\Q Ritro it, "^ 
makes the sign of the cross with the celebrant, and 
answ^ers at the Kyrie, etc. He remains in the same 
place, or, if the master of ceremonies gives notice, he 
goes to sit down with the other sacred ministers, making 
Srst a bow towards the altar, from whatever place he is 
standing. [Rub. Miss.) 

10. At the last Kyrip, if he is sitting, he returns to 
the altar in the same manner as at the end of the Gloria 
and Credo. If he is not seated, at the sign made by the 

* Unless the master ol ceremonies alteuds lu Lliis. 



DEACOIS. 160 

master of* cej'emonies, he goes behind the celebrant (Ruh. 
Miss.^ part ii), in the middle, on the step next to tlie ph;t- 
form, and at the word Deo in the Gloria^ he bowr^, and 
goes up to the celebrant's right, and continues the Gloria 
with him {Ruh. Miss.^ ib,)^ making the bows together, 
and at the end the sign of the cross; he makes a genu- 
flection with the rest; he goes with the sub-deacon, the 
celebrant being between thein, to the seat. 

11. On arriving at the bench, he takes the celebrant's 
cap, and presents it with the usual kisses, he then takes 
his own cap, and bows to the celebrant at the same time 
with the sub-deacon, site down, and puts on his cap. He 
keeps his hands open on his knees, and when the master 
of ceremonies gives notice, he takes off his cap and rests 
it on his right knee. 

12. Towards the end of the hymn, at the words. Cum 
Sancio Sjnritu, etc., he takes off his cap and rises, places 
liis cap on the bench, receives the celebrant's, first kiss- 
ing his hand, then the cap, and lays ic on the bench. 
Going to the altar, he salutes the clergy at the same time 
with the other ministers, first on the Epistle side, then, 
after a few steps, on the Gospel side, and at the cele- 
brant's right. 

13. When he comes before the altar, he makes a genu- 
flection on the first step, and raises the celebrant's alb ; 
he remains behind on the upper step, and after the 
Dorniniis vohiscuin, goes behind him to the Epistle side, 
[Ruh. ^ ibid.), without making a genuflection, or bow; 
and remains there whilst the celebrant is singing the 
prayers, bowing when he bows. 

If the Flectaw.us genua is to be sung after the Oremus.^ 
the deacon sings it in the act of bending the knee, and 
rises, after the sub-deacon has sung Levate. [Rub.., ih.) 

1-1. As soon as the celebrant terminates the last prayer, 
the deacon goes to his right on the upper step, and at the 
end of the Epistle, which the celebrant reads in a low 
voice, he answers, Deo gratias^ and remains there until 
the celebrant begins the Gospel. (Rub., ih.) 

15. On notice from the master of ceremonies he goes 
down to the floor, and receives from him the Missal, and 



170 HIGH MASS. 

holds it nearly on a level with his eyes, the edge of the 
book being at his left; he salutes the clergy first on the 
Epistle side, then on the Gospel side, and goes to the 
middle of the altar, makes a genullection on the lower 
step, then goes up and places u])on the altar the closed 
book {J^ub.j ih.), with the edge towards the Gospel side; 
and he remains there without repeating the genuflection. 
If the deacon has on a folded vestment, at a signal 
from the master of ceremonies, whilst the celebrant is 
reading the Gospel, he comes down, takes it off, assisted 
by an acolyte, and puts on the large stole, which he 
keeps on until he removes the Missal, at the Post Com- 
WMuio ; and then he puts the vestment on again. After 
putting on the large stole, he receives the Missal from 
the master of ceremonies, and proceeds as above. 

16. When the master of ceremonies directs, the in- 
cense is blessed, at which he assists as before; then the 
deacon goes upon the upper step, kneels on the edge of 
the platform, and bowing profoundly, says: '^ A/tmda 
cor raeum^ ao labia mea^ Omnipotens Deus^ qui labia 
IsaicB ProphetcB calculo mundasti ignito : ita me tua 
grata 7niseratione dignare mundare^ ut Sanctum Eoan- 
gelium tuum digne valeam nuniiare. Per Christum 
Dorainum- nostrum. Amen?'' After this prayer he 
rises, takes the book, and turning towards the celebrant 
(who also turns towards the deacon), kneels on the plat- 
form and says, Jube^ Domne^ benedicere. {Rub.^ ib.) 

17. He kisses the celebrant's hand plac. d on the book, 
after receiving his blessing; then he rises, bows to the 
celebrant, and goes down to the floor; he makes a genu- 
flection at the sub-deacon's right, bows to the clergy, 
and proceeds abreast with, or after the sab-deacon, to 
the place where the Gospel is to be sung; then he gives 
the sub-deacon the Missal open, and with his liands 
joined, he intones the Domiiiics vobiscum. After 
Sequentia Sancti JEvangelii^ placing his left hand open 
on the book, with his right thumb he makes the sign of 
the cross on the beginning of the GosdcI, and then on 
his forehead, lips and breast, putting his left hand on 
his breast. After this, he takes the censer, and incenses 



DEACON". 171 

tlie hook, first in the middle, theii at his rifjht, and lastly 
at his left ; he returns the censer to the master of cere- 
monies, and sino^s the Gospel with his hands joined. 
{Rah., ib.) He bows and genuflects wherever it is pre- 
scribed. {Euh. Miss., part i.) 

18. Having finished the Gospel, he points out the text 
to the sub-deacon, and incenses the celebrant thrice, as 
usual, from the Gospel side, making a low bow, both 
before and after. {Buh., ih.) 

19. He then gives the censer to the censer-bearer, and 
goes up to the second step, or to the top one, behind the 
celebrant, and makes a genuflection there, at the same 
time with the sub-deacon and censer-bearer. When the 
celebrant intones the Credo, he bows at the word Deum, 
and goes up to the celebrant's right, and observes all the 
ceremonies prescribed for the Gloria in excelsis ; then 
he goes to his seat. [Bub. Miss., part ii.) 

20. After the choir has sung At homo f actus est, he 
rises, leaves his cap upon the bench, with his hands 
joined, bows to the celebrant, and goes to the 
table, takes the burse, holding it up with both hands, 
and keeping the open part of it towards his eyes. He 
bows to the celebrant as he passes him by, then to the 
clergy, first at the Epistle side, next at the Gospel side; 
after which he makes a genuflection on the lowest step, 
and goes up to the altar. 

21. After taking out the corporal, he places the burse 
at the Gospel side, and spreads the corporal ; then adjusts 
the Missal for the convenience of the celebrant. (Ivub. , ib.) 
He makes a genuflection there, without putting his 
hands upon the altar, and goes^^r breviorem to his seat, 
bowing to the celebrant before he sits down. Towards 
the end of the Credo, at the words J^t vitam, or a little 
before, he returns to the altar with the others, as at the 
end of the Gloria. 

In the three Masses on Christmas day, and on the day 
of the Annunciation, even if this festival be not then 
celebrated, all kneel when the Incarnatus est is sung. 

22. He bows when the celebrant says Oremus ; then 
goes up to his right ; and when the sub-deacon brings the 



172 HIGH MASS. 

chalice, lie uncovers it (if it be a Mass in which there is 
no Credo^ he takes the burse, and spreads the corporal, 
takes off the pall, and places it near the corporal,) tlien 
takes the paten with the particle, and presents it, kissing 
first the paten and then the celebrant's hand. {I2ub., ib.) 

23. If it is necessary to consecrate particles for the 
Connn union of the clergy, he uncovers the pyx, and 
dnririg the oblation of the particle, he raises it up a little 
in his right hand, and with his left supports the cele- 
brant's arm ; he then covers it, and places it upon the 
corporal, behind the foot of the chalice. When the sub- 
deacon lias purified the chalice, he takes it in his left 
hand, and pours in the wine, and the sub-deacon pourd 
the water. (Rub., ib.) 

24. After having wiped off the drops of wine and 
water from the side of the chalice, he takes it, holding 
it below the cup, with his right hand, and the foot with 
his left, and presents it to the priest, with the usual kisses. 
He supports with his right hand the foot of the chalice, 
or the celebrant's arm {Bitb.^ ib.), and with his left on 
his breast, he says with him, '' Ojferimus tlbi, Domine, 
calicer)i salutaris, tuam deprecantes cleraentiam, ut in 
Gonsjpectu devincB majestatis turn, pro nostra et totius 
mundi salute cum odore suavitatis ascendat. Amen.^^ 
At the end, he covers the chalice with the pall, and puts 
the paten in the sub-deacon's right hand, and covers it 
with the right extremity of the veil. {Rub., ibid.) 

25. The incense is put in and blessed, as was explained 
above. When the celebrant incenses the offerings, the 
deacon raises the chasuble with his left hand, and places 
liis right hand on the foot of the chalice. After the 
genuflection, he removes it from the middle towards the 
Epistle side, but not outside of the corporal ; after the 
incensing of the cross he })uts it back in its place. 
{Rub., ib.) lie makes a genuflection with the celebrant 
and proceeds as at the Introit. 

26. After having incensed the celebrant, he incenses 
the clergy, beginning at the Gospel side, and ending at 
the Epistle side; he makes a genuflection in the middle 
of the choir, in passing from one side to the other. 



PEACOK. 173 

27. In incensing, lie makes a moderate bow to those ho 
is going to incense; and then incenses each one once; 
he bows to them wlien he is done. After incensing tiie 
clergy at the Epistle side, he incenses tlie sub-deacon 
twice ; he then gives the censer to the censer-bearer, and 
goes np behind the celebrant, on the highest step, makes 
a genuflection, and turns, that he may be incensed by the 
censer-bearer. {Ruh.^ ib.) 

If there be Prelates in the choir, they are incensed 
with a double swing of the censer, as the sub deacon, and 
a bow is made both before and after. 

28. AVhilst- the Preface is sung, the deacon remains 
behind the celebrant; at the words Supplici confessione 
dicentes^ he goes up to the platform at his right, says 
with him the Saiictus^ makes on himself the sign of the 
cross at the Benedictus, passes to the left to turn the 
leaves of the Missal, and as he passes across he makes 
a genuflection on the edge of the platform. 

29. At the words, Qitam oblationem^ the deacon goes 
to the celebrant's right, making a gennflectiou, as he 
crosses to the other side; if the pyx be there, he places 
it before the celebrant, uncovers it, kneels on the plat- 
form during the elevation of the Sacred Host, raises the 
celebrant's chasuble with his left hand, and rises with 
liim, after he has adored the Blessed Sacrament, covers 
the pyx, replaces it behind the chalice, uncovers the 
chalice, kneels down again, and raises the celebrant's 
chasuble. 

30. When the celebrant is about to place the chalice 
on the altar, the deacon rises, covers it, makes a genu- 
flection with him, and returns to his left. He does not 
make the genuflection as he recrosses, but only after he 
has arrived at the celebrant's left, where he attends him 
at the Missal. 

31. At the words. Per quern hceo omnia^ the deacon 
makes a genuflection, and goes to the right of the cele- 
brant; at the words, Frcestas nohis^ he uncovers the 
chalice, and makes a genuflection with the celebrant. 
After the words, Omnis honor et gloria, he covers it, 
makes a genuflection with the celebrant, and remains 



174 HIGH MASS. 

there till he begins the Pater. Then, having made a 
genuflection, he retires behind the celebrant, on the 
highest step. 

32. At the words, Et dhnitte nobis^ tlie deacon makes 
a genuflection with tlie siib-deacon, and goes to the right 
of the celebrant, where, having received from the sub- 
deacon the paten, he wipes it with the purifier, kisses 
and presents it to the celebrant, kissing liis hand. He 
then uncovers the chalice, makes a genuflection, covers 
the chalice again as soon as the celebrant has put into 
it the small particle of the consecrated Host, makes 
again a genuflection, bowing together with the celebrant, 
and says the Agnus Dei^ striking his breast, after which 
he kneels at the right of the celebrant. 

33. After the celebrant has finished the first prayer, 
the deacon rises at the same time with the celebrant, 
kisses the altar outside of the corporal; receives from 
him the Pax^ supporting meanwhile the celebrant's 
elbows and making to him a bow before and after, and 
answers, Et cum spiritu tuo. Then, having made a 
genuflection, the deacon goes down as far as the last 
step, and standing on it, gives to the sub-deacon the 
Pax^ makes to him a bow, goes up to the left of the 
celebrant, makes a genuflection, and remains tliere till 
after the last ablution. Whilst the celebrant communi- 
cates under both species, the deacon bovs^s profoundly. 

34. After the last ablution, the deacon carries the 
Missal to the Epistle side, making a genuflection at the 
same time with the sub-deacon as they pass before the 
middle. And when he uses the large stole, takes it off 
and puts on the folded chasuble. Then he goes on the 
highest step behind the celebrant, follows him when he 
goes to the middle, and returns to the Epistle side. 

35. When the celebrant has said Dominus vohlscum^ 
after the last prayer, the deacon turns to the people, and 
sings, Ite, missa est. 

When the Benedicamus Domino or Pequiescayit in 
pace is sung, the deacon does not turn round to the 
people. In Lent, when Humiliate capita vestra Deo is 
to be sung, after the third prayer of the Post Com^mxinio^ 



DEACON^. 175 

the celebrant having sung Oremus^ the deacon tnrns 
round to the people by his left hand, sings Humiliate^ 
and turns again to tlie altar by the same side. 

36. Whilst the celebrant says the Flaceat^ the deacon, 
retiring towards the Epistle side, turns to the altar. 
When the celebrant says Benedicat vos^ the deacon, 
kneeling on the edge of the platform, receives the bless- 
ing, making on himself the sign of the cross; he then 
rises, makes with his thumb the usual crosses on his 
forehead, lips and breast, at the beginning of the Gospel, 
and makes a genuflection at the words, JEt Verhum caro. 

37. After the Gospel, the deacon goes up to the right 
of the celebrant ; at the sign made by the master of 
ceremonies, he bows to the cross, descends with the rest 
below the steps, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy, 
if they remain in the sanctuary, presents the cap to the 
celebrant with the usual kisses, first of the cap, and 
secondly of the hand, receives from the master of cere- 
monies his cap, puts it on, and walks to the saeripty 
behind the sub-deacon. 

38. When arrived at the sacristy, the deacon takes off 
his cap, salutes the clergy, if they have also left the 
sanctuary, makes a bow to the crucifix and to the cele- 
brant, takes off" his maniple (alsu the folded chasuble 
when used), helps the celebrant to disrobe, salutes him, 
and takes off" his sacred vestments. Should there be no 
Asperges^ the deacon puts on the maniple in the sacristy 
and goes to the altar just behind the sub-deacon, and at 
the door he gives holy water to the celebrant, having 
first taken oft* his cap. Having arrived at the foot of 
the altar, he gives his cap to the master of ceremonies, 
takes the celebrant's, and commences Mass as directed 
above. 

When the sacred ministers have to pass from one side 
of the altar to the other, before the consecration, they 
make the genuflection in the middle ; but after the con- 
secration, they make it on each side near the celebrant, 
both before and after, without placing their hands, which 
they hold joined, upon the altar. Only at the Dimitte 
nobis they make the genuflection in the middle, before 



ITG HIGH MASS. 

they go lip to the altar. The first and last geiinilcction 
is to be made on the floor, below the lowest step; ail the 
others on the lowest step. 

Article YIT. 
Instruction for the CelehranL 

1. The priest who is to celebrate High Mass should 
foresee everything that is to be sung, especially the 
Gloria^ the prayers, the Preface, and the manner of 
singing them, according to the quality of the Mass, and 
the festival which is celebrated. 

2. At the proper hour, the celebrant, having spent 
some time in prayer, and washed his harids, puts on tlie 
sacred vestments, attended by the ministers, who should 
have previously put on their own. 

3. The celebrant, after he has put on th.e stole, blesses 
the water, then, having received the cope, he puts on his 
cap, and on notice given by the master of ceremonies, 
takes it off, goes below the steps, makes a bow to the 
crucifix, or to the principal image of the sacristy, salutes 
the sacred ministers at his right and at his left, covers 
his head, and, with his hands joined and his eyes 
modestly cast down, walks towards the sanctuary. 

If, on their way to the altar, where High Mass is to 
be celebrated, the celebrant pass before the high altar, 
he should make a profound bow^ to it, and in case the 
Blessed Sacrament be kept there, he should make a 
genuflection. If he pass before an altar whilst Mass is 
celebrated, and in time of the elevation, as the bell 
rings, the celebrant, with ministers on each side of him, 
should stop, and kneel on both knees, till after the 
elevation. 

4. As the celebrant enters the sanctuary, he takes off 
his cap, gives it to the deacon, and kneels down. He 
intones the Af^perges or Vidi Aquam, and having 
received the sprinkle from the deacon, sprinkles the 
altar, first in the middle, then at the Gospel, and lastly 
at the Epistle side. He signs himself with the sprinkle, 
and rising, he sprinkles the sacred ministers. Then he 



CELEBRANT. 177 

goes, accoip.panied bj them, to sprinkle the clergy, and 
afterward the people. Returning to the altar, he hands 
the sprinkle to the deacon, and having sung the versicles 
and prayers, he genuflects and goes to the bench, where 
he puts off the cope and receives the maniple and 
chasuble. He returns to the foot of the altar (making 
the "usual bows), and there makes a profound bow to the 
cross, or a genuflection, if the Bleseed Sacrament be kept 
there, and begins the Confession^ having the deacon at 
his right and the sub deacon at his left. 

Vi the clergy are already in the sanctuary, the cele- 
brant should salute them as he enters it. 

5. At the words, Vobis^ fratres — Et vos, fr aires ^i\\Q 
celebrant turns towards the deacon and sub-deacon. 
After the Confession^ he goes up to the platform, kisses 
the altar, puts incense thrice into the censer, saying. Ah 
illo benedicaris in cujus honor e cremaberis. Ameji, and 
makes the sign of the cross on the censer with his right 
hand, holding the left on his breast. 

6. The celebrant, having received the censer from the 
deacon, makes a profound bow to the cross, or a genu- 
flection to the Blessed Sacrament (if it is on the altar), 
in the latter case, laying his left hand on the altar ; he 
then incenses the cross with three swings"^^ (as directed 
in the plates,t n. 2, 3); after this, he again makes a bow 
to the cross, or a genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament, 
and, remaining in the same place, incenses the relics (if 
there be any) with two swings, between the candlesticks 
at the side of the Gospel (as in n. 4, 5), makes again 
a bow or genuflection, and with two other swings, 
incenses the relics at the Epistle side (as in n. 7.) If 
there are more or less than two cases of relics on each 
side, the celebrant incenses them all ^vith two swings. 
If the relic of the saint whose festival is celebrated is 
placed in the middle of the altar, the celebrant, after 
having incensed the cross, incenses it with two swings, 

*The Rubrics and Ceremonial prescribe the incensing ol the Cross, 
etc., to be done tripiicl ductu. 
t Sec frontispiece. 



178 HIGH MASS. 

bowing to it before and after. Having incensed the 
relics, the celebrant proceeds to incense the altar ; he 
incenses the table of it, at the Epistle side, with 
three swings, corresponding to the places wliere the 
three candlesticks stand (as in n. 8, 9, 10), walking one 
step at each swing. On arriving at the Epistle side, 
the celebrant lowers his hand, and incenses with one 
swing, the lower part of that side of the altar, and 
with another the upper part (as in n. 11, 12). Then, 
turning to the altar and raising his hand, he incenses 
the table of the altar with three swings as far as the 
middle (as in n. 13, 14, 15), advancing in like manner, 
one step at each swing; when he is arrived at the 
middle, he makes the bow or gennilection, and incenses 
the other side of the altar with three swings (as in 
n. 16, 17, 18), then he incenses the lower and the upper 
part of the Gospel side with two swings (as in n. 19, 20) ; 
without moving from that corner, he raises the censer, 
and incenses with three swings the table of the altar 
towards the middle (as in n. 21, 22, 23) ; then lower- 
ing his hand, he incenses with three swings the front 
of the altar on the Gospel side (as in n. 24, 25, 26), 
advancing one step at each swing; having arrived at 
the middle, he makes a bow or genuflection, and con- 
tinues to incense the front of the altar with three 
other swings (as in n. 27, 28, 29), advancing likewise 
one step at each swing ; when he is arrived at the 
Epistle side, he stops, gives the censer to the deacon, 
and, standing with his face turned towards him, is 
incensed by him. 

7. After the incensing, the celebrant reads the Introit, 
says the Kyrie^ and if the music is long, makes a bow 
to the cross, and goes per hreviorem to sit down. He 
should be sitting when he receives his cap from the 
deacon, as also when he gives it back to him. Whilst 
sitting, the celebrant holds his hands spread on his 
lap, and when he returns to the altar, he salutes the 
clergy, first at the Epistle side, then the Gospel side, 
before he arrives at the middle. 

8. AVhen he is arrived before the lowest step, the cele- 



CELEBRANT. 179 

brant ma^ces a profound bow or a genuflection, goes up 
to the platform, and there, in the middle, intones the 
Gloria in excelsis Deo^ and continues it with the ministers 
in a low voice. Having finished it, at the signal from 
the master of ceremonies, the celebrant makes a bow, 
and by the nearest way goes to the bench as before. At 
the end of the Gloria he takes oft his cap and returns to 
the altar, as directed above, he kisses it in the middle, 
turns to the people, sings Dominus vohiscum. Then he 
goes to the Missal and sings the prayers. 

9. If the altar is fixed in such a maTiner that the 
priest is always turned to the people, the celebrant, say- 
ing, Dominus vobisciom, Orate fratres^ Ite^ miasa est, 
and giving the blessing, ought not to turn. 

10. After the sub-deacon has sung the Epistle, the 
celebrant places his hand on the Missal, to be kissed by 
the sub-deacon, and then gives him the blessing; after- 
wards he goes to the middle, says, Munda cor 7/teum, 
goes to the Missal, reads the Gospel, but after reading it 
he does not kiss the book, nor does he say Per evangelica 
dicta; then he returns to the middle of the altar to put 
the incense into the censer, and to bless it. 

If there is in the Gradual any verse at which the 
clergy kneel, when the choir sing it, the celebrant kneels 
on the edge of the platform, with the ministers at his 
side, till the verse is sung. 

11. When the deacon, having said Munda cor meum, 
kneels before the celebrant, and says, Juhe Domne hene- 
dicere, the celebrant turned towards him, with his hands 
joined, says, ^'■Dominus sit in corde tuo, et in Idbiis tuis, 
ut digne et comvetenter annunties JEvangelium suum: 
In nomine Patris^ et Filii, et Spiritus Sancti. Amen.^^ 
In saying l7i nomine, etc., he makes on him the sign of the 
cross, then he places his right hand on the book, to be 
kissed by the deacon. 

12. VVhen the deacon goes down below the steps, the 
celebrant retires to the Epistle side, and remains turned 
to the altar, with his hands joined, till the deacon begins 
to sing the Gospel ; then he turns round towards the 
deacon, makes the usual signs of the cross at the words, 



180 HIGH MASS. 

Sequentia^ etc., bows to the cross at the name of Jesns, 
bows also towards the book, at the name of Mary, and 
of the saint whose feast is celebrated. 

13. When the sub-deacon offers l)im the Missal, the 
celebrant kisses it, saying, Per evangelica dicta^ etc., 
remains in the same place till he is incensed by the 
deacon, goes to the middle, intones the Credo^ if it is to 
be said, and continues it in a low voice with liis ministers. 

14. Having said the Oredo^ the celebrant goes to sit, 
as said above; at the Incarnaius he takes off his cap, 
and bows towards the cross, till the verse is finished ; he 
takes it off also at the words, Simul adoraiur^ and at the 
end of the Credo returns to the altar, kisses it in the 
middle, and sings Dominus vobiscum and Oremus, 

15. After having said the Offertory^ the celebrant 
receives from the deacon the paten with the particle, 
offers it, saying the usual prayer, blesses the water, say- 
ing Deus, qui humance substantioe ; receives from him 
the chalice, offers it, saying, Offerirnus^ etc. 

16. The celebrant having said. In spiritu humiliiaiis 
and Veni sanctificator^ puts incense into the censer, say- 
ing the prayer, '^ Per inter cessionem Beati Michaelis 
Archangeli^ stantis a dextris altaris incensi, et ontnium 
Klectorum suorum incensum istud dignetur Dominus 
henedicere^ et in odor em suavitatus accipere. Per 
Christum Dominum nostrum. AmenP At the word 
henedicere, the celebrant makes the sign of the cross on 
the incense, then he receives the censer, and without 
making any reverence, he incenses the sacred offerings, 
forming with the censer three crosses on both chalice 
and particle, saying at the first, Incensum istud ; at the 
second, a te benedictum ; at the third, asoendat ad te^ 
Domine ; and afterwards making three circles round 
the chalice and particle, beginning the first two from 
the right to the left, and the third from the left to the 
right (see the plate), and saying at the first, et descendM 
super nos ; at the second, mistricordia ; and at the 
third, tua. 

17. After the incensing of the sacred offerings, the 
celebrant makes a profound bow, or a genufiection, and 



CELEBRANT. ISI 

incenses the eross and the altar, as dh-ected above, but 
with this difference, that at each swing he says the 
prayer, distributed as follows: at n. 1 (see the plate), 
Dirigatur ; 2, Domins ; 3, Oratio mea ; S, SI cut ; 9, 
Incensum ; 10, In conspectu tuo ; 11, Elevatio ; 12, 
Manuum ; 13, Mearum ; 14, Sacrificium ; 15, Vesper- 
tinum ; 16, Pone; 17, Domine ; 18, Custodlam ; 19, 
Ori ; 20, Meo ; 21, J^t ostium ; 22, Circiimstantioe ; 23, 
Labiis meis ; 21, Ut non declinet / 25, Cor meum / 26, 
In verha malitice ; 21, Ad excusandas ; 28, Excusd- 
tiones ; 29, In pecoatis.^ 

18. When the celebrant gives back the censer to the 
deacon, he says, Aocendat in nobis Dominus ignem sui 
amor is et fiammam cBternm charitatis. Amen. After- 
wards he is incensed, he washes his hands, and continues 
Mass ; he sings the Preface, the Pater, etc. After the 
Agnus Dei, having said the first of the three prayers 
before the Communion, he kisses the altar, gives the 
Pax to the deacon, saying, Pax tecum, and goes on as 
usual. 

19. After having received the Precious Blood, if Com- 
munion is to be given, the celebrant, after the deacon 
has uncovered the pyx, makes a genuflection with him; 
then turns towards the deacon whilst he says the Con- 
fiteor ; after which, he says, Miser eatur and Indulgen- 
tiam, etc. As usual, he turns to the altar, makes a genu- 
flection, takes the pyx in his left hand, and one of the small 
Hosts in his right, and, turned to the people, says, Ecce 
Agnus Dei, etc. Then he gives the Communion, first 
to the deacon, afterwards to the sub-deacon ; and like- 
wise he gis^es the Communion to the others, tirat to him 
who kneels at the Epistle side, then to the other who 
kneels at the Gospel side. 

For the Communion of the people, the celebrant goes to 
the railing of the sanctuary, and there gives the Com- 
nmnion, beginning from the Epistle side. 

20. After Communion, the celebrant either consumes 

* Thii distribution of the words is neither prescribed by the Rubrics 
nor by the Ceremonial, yet it is well to do as recommended here. 



182 HIGH MASS. 

the Hosts that are left, or, if the Blesserl Sacrament is 
kept at that altar, he puts them in the pyx with the 
others in the tabernacle. When requisite, he removes 
from the pjx into the chalice the small particles that 
may be there, takes the purification and ablution as 
usual, wipes the chalice with the purifier, leaves it to 
the sub-deacon, and goes to the Epistle side, to read the 
Communio. 

21. When the choir has sung the Communio^ the cele- 
brant sings, Dominus vohiscum^ Oremus^ and the 
prayers; then he sings again, Dominies vohiscum^ and 
remains turned towards the people, whilst the deacon 
sings Its, missa est^ or he turns to the altar, if the 
Benedicamus Domino be said, and he says it in a low 
voice. {Deer. S. E, C, Tth Sept., 1816.) 

22. The celebrant then says, Placeat, gives the bless- 
ing, and reads the last Gospel, as usual ; after which he 
goes to the middle, makes a bow to the cross, goes down 
below the lowest step, makes a profound bow or a genu- 
flection. If the clergy remain in the sanctuary, the cele- 
brant salutes them on each side, receives from the deacon 
the cap, puts it on, and walks to the sacristy, after the 
deacon. 

23. At the door of the sacristy, if the clergy have 
returned thither, the celebrant takes ofi' his cap, having 
his ministers at his side, salutes them, first at the right, 
then at the left; makes a bow to the cross, salutes the 
ministers, and, assisted by them, takes off the sacred 
vestments, salutes them again, and retires to make his 
thanksgiving. 

21. Should there be no Asperges^ the celebrant puts 
on all the vestments for Mass in the sacristy. Then, 
having bowed to the cross, he goes after the deacon to 
the sanctuary. He receives holy water from the deacon 
at the door. At the foot of the altar he bows or genu- 
flects and commences Mass, having first given his cap to 
the deacon. 



HIGH MASS FOE THE DEAD. 18^ 



CHAPTER III. 

HIQH MASS FOR THE DEAD.* 

Article I. 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

1. In the sacristy, black vestments. 

2. The bench of the ministers should be bare. 

3. Antipendium of black; a carpet of purple color, 
covering the platform only. 

4. The side-table is to.be covered with a cloth, hang- 
ing down a little on each side ; besides everything neces- 
sary for the celebration of Mass, the candles to be dis- 
tributed to the clergy should be prepared on it. The 
chalice is not to be covered with the long veil, which is 
not used by the sub-deacon at this Mass. 

Article II. 

What is to he particularly observed at High Mass for 
the Dead, 

1. During the Confiteor^ the master of ceremonies 
kneels below the steps at the Epistle side ; after the 
Confiteor^ the deacon and sub-deacon, going up to the 
middle of the altar, pass at once to the Epistle side, to 
attend, as usual, the celebrant for the Introit. There is 
no incensing at the beginninci: of this Mass. The clergy 
and the minor ministers kneel down, while the celebrant 
sings the prayers. 

2. The sub-deacon, after having sung the Epistle, does 

* Solemu Mass for the Dead prcBsente cadavere is permitted every 
day, except on great festivals of precept of first class, on the last three 
davs in Holy Week, and on the feast of the titular saint. IS. U. O., 
29 Jan., 1752.) 



184 HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

not carry the Missal to the celebrant, but immediately 
gives it to the master of ceremonies, and does not kiss 
the celebrant's hand nor receive his blessing. 

3. While the Seqiientia is sung, the celebrant having 
read it, goes with the ministers to sit on the bench ; then 
candles are distributed to the clergy, who keep them 
lighted in their hands whilst the Gospel is sung, and 
from the Sanctus till after the communion of the 
celebrant. 

4. Five or six strophes before the end of the Scquentia, 
the ministers and the celebrant go to the middle, bow 
or genuflect, and the celebrant ascends the steps, and 
says, Munda cor raeum^ etc. ; the sub-deacon removes 
the book with the stand from the Epistle side to the 
Gospel, and the celebrant reads the Gospel. The 
deacon, at the proper time, carries, as usual, the Missal 
to the altar, lays it in the middle, kneels on the edge of 
the platform, and says, Munda cor meum^ but does not 
ask the blessing of the celebrant nor kiss his hand. 

5. After the celebrant has read the Gospel, the deacon 
and sub-deacon go down below the steps. The acolytes, 
without candlesticks, go behind the deacon and sub- 
deacon. All make a genuflection, and go to the usual 
place, where the deacon sings the Gospel. Incense is 
not used at the Gospel. 

6. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon does not carry the 
book to the celebrant to kiss, but gives it back at once to 
the master of ceremonies. 

7. After the celebrant has said Oremus^ at the 
Offertory^ the sub-deacon goes to the side-table, and 
carries from thence to the Epistle side the chalice, with 
its veil and burse. 

8. The deacon takes the corporal out of the burse, 
and spreads it on the altar, as usual; the sub-deacon 
takes the veil off the chalice, and gives it to the acolyte ; 
w4ien he presents the water, he does not offer it to the 
celebrant to be blessed. 

9. At the Mass for the Dead, neither the celebrant's 
hand nor anything given to or received from him is to 
be kissed. 



HIGH MASS FOR THE DEAD. 185 



10. While the celebrant is making the oblation of the 
chalice, the sub-deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, 
making a genuflection in the middle. The sub-deacon 
does not hold the paten, as at the other Masses. 

11. After the oblation of the chalice, the deacon places 
the paten partly under the corporal, and covers the rest 
of it with the purifier; at the proper time he presents 
the censer for the incense, and both ministers attend 
the celebrant at the incensing, which is done in the usual 
manner; the celebrant only is incensed by the deacon, 
after the incensing of the altar. 

12. The celebrant being incensed, the sub-deacon 
receives from one of the acolytes the water-cruet and tlie 
basin ; the deacon having given the censer to the censer- 
bearer, receives from the other acolyte the towel, and 
both assist the Lavabo ; afterwards they go to the middle, 
as usual, behind the celebrant. The deacon at the proper 
time answers, SusGij)iat^ etc. 

13. At the end of the Preface, the deacon goes up to 
the right of the celebrant, and the sub-deacon to the left, 
and say with him the Sanctus ; then the sub-deacon 
returns to his place below the steps, and the deacon goes 
to the left of the celebrant to attend to the book. 

14. At the words, Quam oblationem^ the deacon goes 
to the right of the celebrant, and the sub-deacon to the 
Epistle side, where he kneels on the second step. He 
receives the thurible from the censer-bearer, and incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament thrice, at each elevation ; after- 
wards he gives back the censer to the censer-bearer, 
returns to his place in the middle, makes a genuflection, 
and remains there till Pax Domini. 

The acolytes remain kneeling on each side of the altar, 
holding their candles until after the celebrant's com- 
munion. 

15. At the words, Dimitte nohis^ the deacon only 
makes a genuflection, and goes up to the right of the 
celebrant, to give him the paten. 

16. A little before the celebrant says Agnus Dei^ the 
sub-deacon makes a genuflection, and goes to the left of 
the celebrant; there he makes a genuflection with the 



186 SOLEMK VESPERS. 

Others, who profoundly bowing towards the Blessed Sac- 
rament, say the Agnus Dei^ without striking their breast. 

17. After the Agnus Dei, the deacon and sub-deacon 
exchange places, making a gennflection both belore and 
after; the Fax is not given ; the rest goes on as usual. 

18. After the last JJominus vobiscum, the deacon, with- 
out turning himself to the people, sings, Jiequiescani in 
jpace (always in the plural number). The celebrant, 
turned likewise to the altar, says the same in a low voice. 
{Beer, S. R, (7., Sept. 7th, 1816.) The blessing is not 
given ; the rest is as usual. 



CHAPTER lY. 

SOLEMN VESPERS. 

Article I, 

THINGS TO BE PREPARED. 

In the Sanctuary. 

1. Six candlesticks on the altar, and the cross in the 
middle. 

2. In the middle of the sanctuary, at a proper distance, 
two or four stools for the cope-bearers. 

3. Against the railings in the middle, three stools, or 
a bench sufficiently long to accommodate the censer- 
bearer and the two acolytes. 

4. Near the bench for the officiating priest, a stool for 
the master of ceremonies.* 



*If the servers are to wear caps, they should be put on the bench 
beforehand. 



CLERGY. 187 

5. A book-stand with the book, in front of the priest's 
bench, for the officiating priest, which may be covered 
with a veil of the color of the day. 

6. The celebrant's bench, covered with a green cloth. 

7. On the side-table may be placed the humeral-veil 
and stole, if Benediction of the Blessed Saci'ament im- 
mediately follows. 

8. At the altar the antipendium ; and if the Blessed 
Sacrament is there, on the tabernacle the veil, of the 
color of the day. 

In the Sacristy. 

1. A surplice and a cope of the color of the day. 

2. Two or four surplices and copes of the same color 
for the cope-bearers. 

3. Four surplices for the master of ceremonies and the 
three servers ; and surplices for the clergy. 

4. The censer and incense boat. 

5. Two candlesticks with candles for the acolytes. 

Article II. 

General Rules to he observed hy the Clergy in the 
Sanctuary for Solemn Vesjyers and Compline. 

1. Besides what has already been said concerning 
High Mass, clergymen should observe what follow^s, in 
Solemn Yespers : They should not enter the sanctuary 
whilst Deus i7i adjutorium, Gloria Patri^ prayers, 
Capitulum^ the first verse, and the last strophe of any 
hymn, the first strophe of the Ave Maris Stella, and 

Veni, Creator Spiritus, and the last two strophes of the 
hymns, Pange Lingua, Yexilla Regis jprodeunt, are 
sung. 

2. At Compline, they should not go into the sanctuary 
whilst the Confession is being made ; should, however, 
any one enter the sanctuary at the above-mentioned times, 
he should kneel, or bow, or stand, during the singing of 
the aforesaid verses or strophes, in conformity with the 
clergy already in the sanctuary. 



188 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

3. As soon as tlie officiating clergyman arrives at tlie 
altar, the clergy kneel to say, each in particular, the prayer, 
Aperi; they should kneel likewise during the first strophe 
of the hymns, Ave Maris Stella^ and Vcni Creator; during 
the hymn, Tantum ergo; when the Blessed Sacrament is 
exposed ; wdiile they sing the strophe, O Crux ave^ spes 
unica^ even if it be said during the Paschal time; at the 
ferial prayers; at the anthem of the Blessed Virgin, said 
at the end of the office, and at the Pater, Ave, and 
Credo, recited after said anthem, except all Saturdays 
after Vespers, and all Sundays and the Paschal time, in 
wliich the clergy kneel only at the prayer SacrosanctcB. 

4. The clergy should stand while the Pater and Ave 
are said; and from the be^^^inning of Vespers till the 
first Psalm is intoned. When the antiphon is intoned, 
all the clergy who are on the same side with the clergyman 
that intones it, rise as soon as the chanters in cope come 
to give the tone: the clergy should stand also during 
the chapter, the hymn, and from the hymn till the end 
of Vespers, only except whilst the choir sing and repeat 
the antiphon of the Magnificat; at which time they 
sit, if the incensing be over. They should likewise 
stand during the prayer and commemorations, and tUl 
the end of Vespers. 

5. At Compline, the clergy stand from the beginning 
till the intonation of the first Psalm; from the intoning 
of the hymn till the end of Compline. 

6. The clergy bow, and take ofi" their caps at the 
Gloria Patri, at the names of Jesus and Mary, at the 
last strophe of the hymns, when it contains the doxology; 
at the words. Sit nomen Domini henedictum, of the 
Psalm, Laudate pueri Dominum, and whilst the Con- 
fiteor is said at Compline. 

Article III. 

Instruction for the Acolytes, 

1. Before the beginning of Vespers, the acolytes go to 
the sanctuary, and put their caps at their places. Having 
lighted the candles on the altar, they afterwards light 



ACOLYTES. ISO 

those of their own candlesticks, and go to the sanctuary, 
as when High Mass is to be celebrated. 

2. When the officiating clergyman lias arrived at the 
altar, the acolytes turn themselves to the altar, make 
with the others a genuflection, and immediately after go 
to place the candlesticks on the steps near the altar, each 
on his own side ; they put out the candles of their can- 
dlesticks, and go to their place. 

3. Towards the end of the last Psalm, the acolytes, 
leaving their caps at their places, go to light the candles 
of their candlesticks, and with them go to the middle 
before the lowest step, make a genuflection with the cope- 
bearers, if there be any, and go with them to the offici- 
ating clergyman, unless the celebrant intones the anti- 
phon of the Magnificat^ in which case they remain by 
their candles, and at the conclusion of the hymn return 
to the celebrant's bench as before; and, the antiphon 
being intoned, they place their candles where they for- 
merly were, and remain by them during the incensing of 
the altar. 

4. Having made a bow to him, the acolytes, turned 
towards each other, stop on each side of the book-stand 
which is before him, till he has intoned the hymn, and 
when the Ave Maris Stella or the Veni Creator Spiritus 
is said, they stand during the first strophe; then they 
go, after having saluted the celebrant; they should take 
care to turn in such a manner that each one remains on 
his own side; that is, the first acolyte at the right, and 
tlie second acolyte at the left ; then they return to the 
altar, where, having made a genuflection, they carry the 
candlesticks to their place, and leave them lighted; 
afterwards they go to their seats. 

5. After the Gloria Patri of the Magnificat^ the 
acolytes take the candlesticks, and go, as before, to the 
celebrant, salute him, j)lace themselves as before, and 
remain there till after all the prayers are sung; after 
which, when the celebrant has said Doininus vobiscum, 
having saluted him, they go to the middle; and when he 
has arrived at the same place, they make a genuflection 
together with him, salute the clergy, and walk to the 
sacristy. 



190 SOLEMN" VESPERS. 

If tlie clergy also immediately after Yespers return to 
the sacristy, wlien tlie celebrant has arrived before the 
altar, they remain standing during the anthem of the 
Blessed Virgin, and its prayer ; after the celebrant has 
said Divinum auxUiam^ they make a genuflection, and 
walk to the sacristy, as directed. 

6. Should Benediction follow, the acolytes light the 
candles on the altar whilst the choir is sin^j-ino^ the 
anthem of the Blessed Virgin, and then kneel near their 
candles during Benediction. 

Should the steps be needed, one of them will attend 
to this. 

Article IV. 

Instruction for the Censer- Bearer. 

1. The censer-bearer prepares everything as directed 
for High Mass. 

2. lie goes to the sanctuary with the clergy, and sits 
in such a place of the sanctuary as may be most con- 
venient, that he may go to the sacristy when required. The 
liymn being intoned, or if there be no hymn, as in 
Easter- week, about the end of the lifth Psalm, he takes 
olf his cap, leaves it at his place, and having made a 
genuflection to the altar, goes to the sacristy to prepare 
the censer. 

3. AVhen the celebrant, after intoning the antiphon of 
the Magnificat^ arrives at the altar, the censer-bearer also 
goes thither, making a genuflection below the steps; the 
incense having been put into the censer, and blessed as 
usual, the censer-bearer gives the censer to the master of 
ceremonies, from whom he receives the incense-boat; 
then, without making a genuflection in the middle, he 
goes immediately to the left of the celebrant, having 
first placed the boat on the side-table; there he makes a 
genuflection, keeps the celebrant's cope raised on his 
side during the incensing, and follows him, making a 
genuflection at the same time with the master of cere- 
monies, whenever the celebrant makes it; or if the 
Blessed Sacrament be not on the altar, whenever he 
makes a bow in the middle. 



CENSER-BEARER. 191 

4. After the incensing of the altar, the censer-bearer 
goes to the Epistle side, receives the censer from the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, gives back the censer to the master of 
ceremonies when the celebrant has arrived at the bench ; 
remains at his left, makes with him a profound bow to 
the celebrant before and after he is incensed ; receives 
the censer, and incenses the clergy, as directed in the 
instruction for the deacon. 

5. The censer-bearer having incensed the clergy, in- 
censes the master of ceremonies, and then incenses the 
people, as directed for High Mass ; he then goes for the 
boat, and returning, genuflects in the middle and carries 
the censer to the sacristy, and returns to the sanctuary, 
making the usual genuflections. 

If there be chanters in cope, the censer-bearer hands 
the boat to the first of them when he goes up to the 
altar at the Magnificat ; he then receives back the boat, 
and going down, stands at the Epistle side during the 
incensing. The incensing being finished, he places the 
boat on the credence-table and receives the censer; he 
goes to the bench and hands the censer to the first cope- 
bearer, w^ho incenses the celebrant ; then if there are 
more than two cope-bearers the thurifer accompanies 
one during the incensing of the cler/y and holds the 
border of his cope ; otherwise the thurifer incenses the 
clergy ; the thuriter, however, in any case incenses the 
people, and then returns to the sacristy. 

If, besides the high altar, any other altar is to be in- 
censed, the censer-bearer will follow the directions of the 
master of ceremonies. 

This ends his duties, and he returns to the sacristy 
and puts away the censer and boat. Should Benediction 
follow, the thurifer is accompanied to the sacristy by the 
torch bearers, who return with him when the Dimnum. 
auxilium has been sung ; he kneels behind the celebrant 
between the torch-bearers and assists as usual. 



192 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

Article Y. 
Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies, 

1. The master of ceremonies havino; prepared every- 
thing, and placed the marks in the book of the celebrant, 
■which is to be placed on a stand covered with a long veil 
of the same color of the vestments, and w^iich should be 
sufficiently light to be easily removed, goes to the sac- 
risty, helps the celebrant to put on tlie surplice and cope ; 
and everything being ready, gives the signal to the aco- 
lytes to walk to the sanctuary, having first, in an audible 
voice, announced to the clergy the Yespers, the com- 
memorations to be made, and other particulars. 

2. As the clergy walk out of the sacristy, the master 
of ceremonies bows to the celebrant to follow them, and 
walks with him to the altar ; at the door of the sacristy 
he gives him the holy water; when they arrive at the 
altar, he makes a genuflection at the right of the cele- 
brant below the steps, kneels during the AjMri^ and rises 
with the celebrant. 

3. When the celebrant bows to the altar, the master of 
ceremonies makes a genuflection, salutes the cler<ry at 
the Gospel side and at the Epistle side; accompanies the 
celebrant to his seat, stops there at his left, receiving 
from him and giving him at the proper times his cap, 
with the usual kisses, turning the leaves of tiie book 
when necessary, pointing out to him everything that he 
has to read or sing, and raising his cope whenever he has 
to make the sign of the cross. 

4. The master of ceremonies sits on a stool near the 
celebrant, whilst he is not employed in attending him 
particularly, and whilst the Psalms are sung; he rises 
and bows to him at the Gloria t^atri as a signal tor him 
to remove his cap; he likewise makes the same signs to 
the clergy in the sanctuary, unless another be appointed 
fur this purpose, which is desirable. 

5. Towards the last Psalm, the master of ceremonies 
makes a sign to the acolytes to light their candles, and 
to come before the celebrant, whilst the antiphou is 



MASTER OF CEREMONIES. 193 

repeated ; lilvcwisc he makes tliem a sign wlien they 
should iz;o. 

6. When the Magnificat is intoned, the master of 
ceremonies receives the celebrant's cap, accompanies him 
to the altar, havini^, with him, sainted the clergy, first on 
the Epistle side, then on the Gospel side. 

7. When arrived at the altar, the master of ceremonies 
makes a genutlection below the steps at the right of the 
celebrant, raises his cassock a little in front, and the 
lower extremity of the cope, whilst with him he ascends 
to the platform, presents the in cense- boat and the spoon, 
as usual, with the customary kisses, for the benediction 
of the incense, saying, Benedicite^ Pater lievcrende.' 

8. The incense being blessed, the master of ceremonies 
gives the boat to the censer-bearer, receives from him the 
censer, and gives it to the celebrant; whilst the latter 
incenses the altar, the master of ceremonies raises his 
cope on his side, and with the censer-bearer makes a 
genuflection whenever the celebrant makes a bow, or a 
genuflection. 

9. After the incensing, the master of ceremonies 
receives the censer from the celebrant, gives it to the 
censer-bearer, goes again by the celebrant on the platform, 
makes with him a bow to the cross, goes down below 
the steps, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergj, accom- 
panies the celebrant to the bench, and there incenses 
him with three swings, gives the censer to the censer- 
Learer, goes near the celebrant, and points to him what- 
ever he has to read or sing. The master of ceremonies 
is incensed after the clergy on each side of the sanctuary. 

10. When the celebrant has ^2iid 2^ ideliuTn animce, the 
master of ceremonies gives him the cap, and goes with 
him to the altar, after having saluted the clergy. 

11. If Compline is not said after Vespers, the master 
of ceremonies, having made a genuflection before the 
altar, presents to the celebrant the book, to intone the 
anthem of the Blessed Virgin, either kneeling or stand- 
ing, as required by the particular time; then, at the left 
of the celebrant, he returns to the sacristy, salutes the 



19 i SOLEMN VESPERS. 

clergy, makes a bow to the cross, and assists the cele- 
brant to take off the sacred vestments. 

12. If there be chanters in co] e, thej attend the cele- 
brant at tlie altar for the incensing, and the first of them 
incenses the celebrant and the clergy. 

13. If, besides the high altar, any other be incensed, 
as for instance that of the Blessed Sacrament, which 
ought to be incensed first, the master of ceremonies 
should observe what follows : whilst the hymn is sun^:, 
he should invite two or four of the clergymen in the 
sanctuary, who are the first in dignity, to assist at the 
incensing. 

14. The Magnificat having been intoned, the acolytes 
will be ready with their candlesticks in the middle of the 
sanctuary, and the censer-bearer between them, and the 
two or four clergymen behind the acolytes, all turned to 
the altar. 

15. The master of ceremonies accompanies the cele- 
brant to the altar between the two chanters in cope; 
whither being arrived, they make the genuflection, salute 
the clergy, and walk out of the sanctuary in the follow- 
ing order: 

16. The censer-bearer walks first, then the acolytes, 
the chanters in cope, having the celebrant in the midst, 
and raising his cope on each side. They put on their 
caps before they move forward. 

17. If there be four cope-bearers, the two chanters 
walk first, and the two others after them, at the side of 
the celebrant. The four clergymen follow the celebrant, 
two by two. 

18. Having arrived at the altar of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, they make a genuflection. The acolytes and the 
cope-bearers, with the celebrant in their midst, place 
themselves in a row before the lowest step. The cele- 
brant, with the two cope-bearers next to him, ascends to 
the altar to incense it, and the others remain standing 
below. 

19. After the incensing, having made a genuflection, 
they return to the high altar as they came. The aco- 
lytes having arrived at the sanctuary, divide and retire, 



COPE-BEAIIZRS. 195 

the first witli the censer-bearer at Ins right towards the 
Epistle side, the second towards tlie Gospel side, so also 
the chanters in cope; and the celebrant between the two 
assistant cope-bearers, having arrived, and all forming 
one line, they salute the clergy on each side, walk to the 
altar, and make a genuflection below the steps. 

20. The acolytes immediately put the candlesticks at 
their places on each side of the altar; the others remain 
as before till after the incensing of the high altar, for 
which the incense is not again put into the censer. 

21. After the incensing, they all make the genuflection 
(the celebrant only makes an inclination, if the Blessed 
Sacrament be not at the high altar), salute the clergy, 
and the four clergymen return to their places, after 
having bowed to each other. 

22. When Benediction follows after Yespers, the mas- 
ter of ceremonies will bring the stole from the side-table ; 
he will assist when the incense is put in, and during the 
incensing he wall raise the border of the cope. After 
the prayer he will put the humeral-veil on the celebrant's 
shoulders; whilst the priest is giving the Benediction, 
he bows profoundly ; at the close he returns to the sac- 
risty with the celebrant as prescribed above. 

Article YI. 
Instruction for the Coj)e- Bearers. 

On some festivals, Yespers are sung with the assistance 
of two or four clerics, according to the greater or 
less degree of solemnity of the festival, dressed in sur- 
plice and cope. When there are four, two of them, who 
are interior in dignity, should perform the oftice of 
chanters, and go to the celebrant and clergy to pre-intone 
the antiphon and intone the Psalms in the middle of the 
sanctuary. The two others attend immediately the cele- 
brant; when there are only two, these perform the oflice 
of assistants and chanters. 

1. The cope-bearers having put on their surplices, 
assist the celebrant to put on his surplice and cope ; then, 
attended by the acolytes, they put on their own copes, 



196 SOLEMN" YESPERS. 

which should be of the proper color and uniform, as also 
their caps. 

2. At a sign made bj the master of ceremonies, they 
come down, bow to the cross, and with their caps on, 
walk after the clergy, at the side of the celebrant, raising 
his cope on each side ; if there be four cope-bearers, the 
two chanters walk togetlier first. 

3. As they enter the sanctuary, they take off their 
caps, and when arrived at the altar, all in one line make 
a genuflection below the low^est step (the celebrant bow- 
ing, if the Blessed Sacrament be not at the altar) ; they 
kneel on the lowest step ; at a sign made by the master 
of ceremonies they rise, make a genuflection, sahite the 
clergy, accompanying the celebrant to the bench, they 
stop before him, being turned towards him, without 
turning entirely their back to the altar, until the first 
cope-bearer chanter has pre-intoned to him the first 
antiphon. 

4. Then they all go to the middle to intone the 
Psalm, taking care always to make a genuflection to 
the altar, in going to and from it, and a bow to the cele- 
brant every time they pass before him. Having intoned 
the first Psalm, they make a genuflection, salute each 
other, and go to sit down on the stools prepared fur 
them in the middle of the sanctuary, before tlie altar, 

5. The cope-bearers put on their caps only after having 
seated themselves, and sing togetlier with tlie rest of the 
clergy. 

6. After the first Psalm, both chanters go to pre- 
intone the antiphon to the clergyman who occupies the 
first place on the Gospel side ; and when having intoned 
it, they go to the middle to intone the Psalm, and thus 
successively and alternately on each side of the sanc- 
tuary; the two assistants remain sitting during all this 
time. 

7. All the Psalms being sung and the last antiphon 
repeated, the four cope-bearers go to the celebrant, and 
remain before him, whilst he sings the chapter ; then the 
first chanter pre-intones to him the hymn ; which being 
done, they return to their places, after having made a 



COrE-BEARERS. 197 

bow to tlie celebrant and a genuflection to the altar. 
They remain there ?tandini2^, with their heads uncovered. 
When the Ave Marls Stella, or Veni Creator, is sung, 
tlie cope-bearers go to the middle, and kneel during the 
first strophe. 

8. After the hymn, the cope-bearers go to the middle, 
and sing the verse ; then they go to pre-intone the anti- 
phon to the celebrant, return to the middle, intone the 
Magnificat, make a genuflection, and go to the celebrant. 

9. As they accompany him to the altar, he being 
between them (in case no other altar is to be incensed), 
they salute the clergy, and make together a genuflection 
to the altar; the two assistant cope-bearers, with the 
celebrant, go up to the altar, and the others, if there be 
any, remain below the steps; the first assistant cope- 
bearer presents the incense-boat for the benediction of 
the incense, and the second raises the celebrant's cope a 
little on his right. 

10. During the incensing, they hold the celebrant's 
cope raised a little on each side ; after which they return 
to the middle, make a bow to the cross, go below the 
steps, make a genuflection to the altar, salute the clergy 
and accompany the celebrant to the bench; the first 
assistant cope-bearer incenses the celebrant, then the 
clergy, beginning at the Gospel side ; and the others go 
to their places. 

11. After having incensed the clergy, who are on the 
first or highest row of benches, or stools, on ea(;h side, 
the first assistant cope-bearer incenses tlie cope-bearers, 
each with two swings; then he continues to incense 
those who are in the inferior rows ; then, having returned 
to his place, he is incensed by the censer-bearer. 

12. When the celebrant is about to say the prayer, all 
tlie cope-bearers rise, go to attend him at the conclusion, 
bowing at the name of Jesus, and having bowed to the 
celebrant, they go to the middle to sing the Benedicarrius 
Domino ; or if there be any commemorations, after the 
first prayer, they go to the middle to sing the verses; 
they remain there, and sing the Benedicamus Domino, 

l?j. Having sung the Benedicamus, the cope-bearera 



198 SOLEMK VESPERS. 

go again to the celebrant, make with him a bow to the 
clergy, go to the altar, make a genuflection to the cross, 
go to the sacristy in the same order as they had come 
from it, or assist to recite the nsnal anthem. 

14. The cope-bearers go to the sacristy, and if the 
clergy also have left the sanctuary, and are already in 
the sacristy, they salute them, and take off their copes, 
after having assisted the celebrant to disrobe. 

If, besides the high altar, any other is to be incensed, 
they follow the directions of the master of cerem^onies. 

Article YIL 
Instruction for the Celebrant 

1. The officiating priest, having made an inclination to 
the cross, walks with his cap on, to the altar, attended by 
the master of ceremonies ; when arrived there, he takes 
off his cap, makes a profound bow to the cross, or if the 
Blessed Sacrament be at the high altar, makes a genu- 
flection below the steps, and kneels down to say the 
Aperi Domine^ which he, as well as each of the clergy, 
say submissd voce. 

What has been said about the profound bow or genu- 
flection, is to be observed whenever we say that the cele- 
brant makes a profound bow ; for if the Blessed Sacra- 
ment is kept at the high altar, the celebrant should make 
a genuflection. 

2. After the Aperi, the celebrant rises, makes a pro- 
found bow, salutes the clergy at each side of the sanctuary, 
and goes to the bench, which is the same where he sits 
with the ministers at High Mass, and should be placed 
at the Epistle side near the wall, facing the Gospel side, 
and near the altar. There, standing, he says. Pater et 
Ave i"^ intones i>6W5 in adjutorixim ; bows at the Gloria 
Patri^ towards the altar ; sits when the first Psalm is 
begun, and, having received the cap from the master of 
ceremonies, he puts it on, 

3. Every time the Gloria Patri is sung, he takes off" 

* See note, page 74. 



CELEBRANT. 199 

Ins cap, and bows during that verse, tlien he puts on his 
cap; likewise he talvcs it oir, and bows at the names of 
Jesus, Mary, and of the saint whose feast is celebrated. 

4. After tlie Psalms have been sung, the celebrant 
rises, sings the chapter, intones the livmn, during which 
he remains standing, and intones the antiplion of the 
Magnificat. 

5. Whilst the choir sings the antiplion of the Mag- 
nificat^ the celebrant sits down ; when the Magnificat is 
begun, he rises, goes to the altar with his hands joined, 
and salutes the clergy as usual ; when he has arriv^ed at 
the altar, he makes a profound bow to the cross, goes 
lip, kisses the altar, and makes the incensing as directed 
for High Mass. After it, he gives the censer to the mas- 
ter of ceremonies (if there be no cope-bearers), goes to the 
middle, bows to the cross, goes below the steps, makes a 
profound bow, and goes to his place, where he is in- 
censed with three swings. 

6. After the Magnificat is sung, the celebrant sits 
down, with his cap on, w^hilst they sing or repeat the 
antiplion of the Magnificat; then he rises, sings the 
prayers, and the Dominus vohiscum ; the Benedicarnus is 
to be sung either by the cope-bearers or the choir ; and 
having said Fidelium animoe^ etc., he goes to the altar 
in the usual manner. 

7. The celebrant when arrived at the altar, if Com- 
pline is not to be sung, after having said the Pater noster, 
secretly, says, Dominus det nobis suam pacem ; then the 
anthem of the Blessed Yirgin is said or sung, either 
standing or kneeling, according to the different prescrip- 
tions of the Rubrics for the different times ; the cele- 
brant standing, says or sings, in the ferial tone, the prayer, 
and after it, JJivinutn auxiliuin. 

8. If the clergy leave the sanctuary, the celebrant 
waits till the last couple have made the genuflection, then 
at the sign made by the master of ceremonies, having 
made a profound bow to the altar, he walks, with his cap 
on, to the sacristy, and on his entering it, he takes it off, 
salutes the clergy, and disrobes, as usual. 

9. If Compline is to be sung after Vespers, then the 



200 SOLEATN" VESPERS. 

celebrant leaves the sanctuary after having said Fidelium 
anirncB^ etc., and returns to the sacristy preceded by the 
acolytes, and attended by the master of ceremonies and 
cope-bearers, if tliere be any. 

At the hymn, Ave Maris Stella^ or Veni Creator 
Spiritus^ the celebrant, after having intoned them, kneels 
at his place before his seat, during the first strophe. He 
kneels also there on similar occasions. For the incensirior 

o 

of another altar besides the principal one, he follows the 
directions of the master of ceremonies. 

The celebrant should never put on his cope in the 
sanctuary during Yespers ; but he must do it in the 
sacristy, before he goes to the sanctuary for Yespers. 
Neither should he incense the bishop, or any other 
superior prelate; but after having incensed the altar, he 
must be incensed at his place, with three throw^s, but if 
the bishop be present, only with two throws, after which 
the bishop is incensed with three throws. 

If Benediction follows immediately after Yespers 
(which is the general custom in this country), the cele- 
brant, after having suno; Divininn Auxiliiim, etc., will 
put on the stole; then he proceeds as directed in Part I, 
Chap. XI, Art. II, JSTo. 2, page 80. Jq case he is assisted 
by another priest or by a deacon, he will follow what is 
prescribed in Art. Ill of same chapter, page 83. 



CHAPTER Y. 

OF SOLEMN BENEDICTION, WHEN THE CELEBRANT IS ASSISTED 
BY DF:AC0N and SUB-DEACON. 

1. When the celebrant is assisted by a deacon and sub- 
deacon in giving Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, 
besides what is prescribed in the first part of this cere- 
monial, page 79, in the sacristy are prepared a cope and 
stole, dalmatic and stole, dalmatic for sub-deacon, three 
cinctures, three albs, and three amices. 



SOLEMX BENEDICTIOiT. 201 

2. The celebrant and sacred ministers having vested, 
and having, together with the clerics, made a bow to the 
cross or image of the sacristy, they proceed to the altar in 
the foUovring order: The thurifer carrying the censer 
and boat ; four or six torch-bearers w^ith torches ; the 
celebrant between the deacon and sub-deacon, who raise 
the borders of his cope. 

3. The deacon exposes the Blessed Sacrament and 
assists tiie celebrant when he pnts incense in the censer, 
the sob-deacon meanwhile holding the edge of the cele- 
brant's cope. During the incensing both of them hold 
the edge of the cope. 

4. Tlie deacon and sub-deacon, still kneeling, hold the 
book or card from which the celebrant sings tiie prayer, 
and this being concluded, the deacon, having received 
the humeral-veil from the master of ceremonies, rises 
and puts it on the celebrant's shoulders, and the sub- 
deacon fastens it. Then the deacon goes up to the altar, 
genullects, and having risen, ascends the steps which one 
of the attendants shall have brought ; he takes the 
monstrance and places it on the corporal and kneels 
down, his face a little turned towards the Gospel side. 
Meanwhile the steps are removed. 

5. The celebrant and sub-deacon ascend the platform, 
and the sub-deacon remains kneeling at the Gospel side. 
The celebrant and deacon rise, and the deacon hands the 
monstrance to the celebrant and arranges the veil and 
then genuflects, and both he and the sub-deacon remain 
kneeling during the Benediction. This being over, the 
deacon rises and takes the monstrance from the celebrant 
and places it on the altar, and makes a genuflection w^ith 
the celebrant. 

6. The celebrant rises and goes down the steps with 
the sub-deacon, and w4th him kneels on the lowest step 
and bows profoundly. The sub-deacon takes olf the 
humeral-veil and gives it to the master of ceremonies. 

T. The deacon rises as soon as the celebrant and sub- 
deacon have knelt dowm, and takes out the Blessed Sac- 
rament and replaces It in the tabernacle, taking care 
"when genuflecting not to turn his back to the celebrant. 



202 SOLEMI^- VEGPERS. 

8. When the deacon goes down the steps the celehrant 
and sub-deacon rise, and all having made a genuliectiun, 
the J return to the sacrist j. 



CHAPTEK YI. 

OF SOLEMN VESPERS, AND OF THE PROCKSSTON ON CORPUS 
CHRISTI, AND DURING THE OCTAVE OF THIS FEAST. 

Article I. 
Of Solemn Yesj)ers, the blessed /Sacrament heing exposed. 

1. TfiE master of ceremonies should see that every- 
thing necessary, for this solemnity be prepared ; and 
besides what is required for Solemn Vespers, a stole for 
the clergyman who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament. 

2. If the Blessed Sacrament be not kept at the high 
altar, but at another, the master of ceremonies should 
have the ombrellino,* long veil and candles ready to 
carry It to the high altar. 

3. On the altar he should prepare a corporal, the key 
of the tabernacle, and monstrance. 

4. On the side-table, the long veil, and the Missal 
with a mark in it, at the place where the prayer of the 
Blessed Sacrament may be found. 

5. The cope-bearers and the celebrant, having put on 
their copes — the celebrant, besides the cope, should have 
on a stole — the clergy walk to the sanctuary preceded by 
the acolyte, and the censer-bearer with his censer and 
boat before them. 

6. Arrived before the altar, they make a genuflection ; 
the acolytes carry their candlesticks to the usual place; 
the celebrant, with the cope-bearers, kneels on the lowest 
step; the priest who is to expose the Blessed Sacrament 

*A small ornamented canopy, somewhat in the shape of an 
umbrella, which is carried over the Blessed tSacrameut. 



BEFORE THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 203 

puts on tlie stole, goes up to the altar, extends the cor- 
])orai in the middle of it, opens the tabernacle, makes a 
genuflection turning towards the Gospel side, takes the 
Blessed Sacratnent, puts It in the monstrance and places 
it in the middle, makes a genuflection, and places it on 
the throne; then he goes below the steps at the Gospel 
side, takes off' the stole, and remains there kneeling. 

7. The celebrant, with his two assistants, having made 
a profound bow, rises; he then puts incense into the cen- 
ser, the first assistant holding the incense-boat and 
presenting the spoon, without kissing it, and the second 
holding the cope at his right, kneels down again ; receives 
the censer from the first assistant, makes a profound bow, 
incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament, the two assistants 
raising in the meantime his cope on each side; makes 
again a profound bow, gives back the censer to the first 
assistant, who gives it to the master of ceremonies; and 
liaving said the Aperi Domine, they rise, make a genu- 
flection below the steps on both knees, and a profound 
bow, and go as usual to the bench. 

8. But if the Blessed Sacrament be kept at another 
altar, a little before Yespers, a priest in surplice and 
stole, with his cap on, carrying the burse with a corporal 
in it, and the key of the tabernacle before his breast, 
preceded by some acolytes with candles, and attended 
by the master of ceremonies, carrying the long veil and 
the ombrellino, goes from the sacristy to the altar where 
the Blessed Sacrament is kept. 

9. When they have arrived at the altar, they all make 
a genuflection ; the priest gives his cap to the master of 
ceremonies, goes up to the altar, extends the corporal 
on it, opens the tabernacle, and having made a genuflec- 
tion, takes out the Blessed Sacrament, kneels, receives 
the veil, which the master of ceremonies puts on his 
shoulders, rises, covers his right hand with the veil, takes 
the Blessed Sacrament, covers it with the other extremity 
of the veil, and carries It w^ith both his hands before his 
breast, reciting some Psalms, to the high altar preceded 
by the acolytes with lighted candles, who alternately 
with the priests say the Psalms ; and follow^ed by the 



204 SOLEMN" VESPERS. 

master ol ceremonies, who carries tlie ombrellino opened 
over him. 

10. Having arrived at the altar, the acolytes kneel 
below the steps at a short distance from them ; the priest 
p:oos np, ph^ces the Blessed Sacrament on the corporal, 
kneels, and in the meanwhile takes off the veil, which 
the master of ceremonies carries to the side-table, leavino- 
the ombrellino in some convenient place. 

11. The priest rising, places the Blessed Sacrament in 
the monstrance, makes a genuflection, places it on its 
throne, goes below the steps, makes a genuflection on 
both knees on the lowest step, rises, puts incense into 
the censer, but does not bless it; kneels again, makes a 
profound bow, incenses the Blessed Sacrament with three 
throAVs; after a short prayer, rises, and all make a genu- 
flection on both knees, and go to the sacristy. 

12. After the exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, at 
a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the clergy go 
into the sanctuary, and make a genuflection on both 
knees in the middle ; they go to their places without 
bowing to each other; there they stand, and wait till the 
celebrant, with the cope-bearers, have arrived before the 
altar; then they kneel on the lowest step. The latter, 
as soon as they arrive within sight of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, take off their caps and carry them in their hands ; 
they make a genuflection on both knees below the lowest 
step. 

13. After having made a profound bow, wdiile kneel- 
ing, the celebrant and his assistants rise with the master 
of ceremonies, and the acolytes; tlie acolytes carry their 
candlesticks, each to his side of the altar, and place them 
on the highest step near it; the celebrant with his 
assistants kneels on the lowest step; and at the same 
time all the clergy in the sanctuary kneel at their places; 
say the Aperi ; at the sign made by the master of cere- 
monies, all rise, and the celebrant with the cope-bearers 
goes to the bench. It is to be remarked, that when the 
Blessed Sacrament is exposed, no bow is made to any 
one in the sanctuary. 

14. Yespers are sung as usual as far as the Magnificat, 



BEFOilE THE BLESSED SACRAMEXT. 205 

cxoept tliat no one should put on his cap, and the singers 
and cope-beaiers do not bow to each other. 

15. At the Magnificat, the celebrant with the cope- 
bearers goes to the altar, where, having made a genuflec- 
tion on both knees, he goes up with his assistants, kisses 
tlie altar, puts in the incense, kneels on the edge of the 
platform, incenses the Blessed Sacrament, rises, makes a 
genuflection, and incenses the altar as usual. 

16. After the incensing of the altar, the celebrant and 
his assistants go to the middle, make a genuflection, 
bending one knee, go below the steps, the celebrant with 
the second assistant by the Gospel side, and the lirst 
assistant by the Epistle side; make a genuflection, bend- 
ing both knees on the floor below the steps, and return 
to the bench. Ko other altar is incensed ; but the cele- 
brant, clergy and people are incensed as usual ; the 
censer-bearer incenses the people, not from the middle, 
but from one side, taking care not to turn his back to 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

17. After the prayers, the acolytes carry the candle- 
sticks to their place, and after the Benedicamus Domino, 
the celebrant does not say Fideliurn anurias, but goes 
with the cope-bearers immediately to the altar, makes a 
genuflection on both knees below the steps, and a pro- 
found bow, rises, and kneels with them on the lowest step. 

18. In the meanwhile the acolytes come to the sanc- 
tuary with lighted candles, and kneel on each side; the 
singers intone the Tantum ergo ; the celebrant incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament as usual, and after the verse, 
Panem de cmlo, etc., says the prayer, Deus qui nobis, 
etc, with the short conclusion. Qui vivis et regna.s in 
soicula, etc.; then a priest in surplice puts on the stole, 
goes up to the altar, and with the usual genuflection 
places the Blessed Sacrament on the corporal, in the 
middle of the altar, and assists as at page 84. 

19. The celebrant receives the long veil, makes a pro- 
found bow, goes up to the altar, makes a genuflection, 
rises, receives with both his hands, covered with the veil, 
the Blessed Sacrament, and turning by his left to the 
people, gives the Benediction as usual. 



206 SOLEMJ^ VESPERS. 

20. After the Benediction, the celebrant makes a genu- 
flection, goes down, kneels on the lowest step, makes a 
profound bow and takes off the humeral-veil. Then the 
assistant priest makes a genuflection, puts the Blessed 
Sacrament in the tabernacle, makes again a genuflection, 
and sliuts it. 

If there be no tabernacle at the high altar, the priest 
above mentioned, having taken the sacred Host from the 
monstrance, and put It into a pyx, covers It with a veil, 
and after the clergy have left the sanctuary, he carries It 
to the altar where the Blessed Sacrament is kept, in the 
manner described above. 

21. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the 
acolytes with the candles go back, or, if necessary, leave 
them in a convenient place, take their candlesticks, go to 
the middle, make a genuflection, and walk to the sac- 
risty, as usual. , 

Article II. 

Of the Procession on Corpus Christi^ and its Octave, 

1. The master of ceremonies should take care to have 
prepared in the sacristy, the cope, stole, cincture, alb, 
and amice for the celebrant; dalmatic, etc., for the 
deacon ; tunic, etc., for the sub-deacon, but without 
maniples; the candlesticks for the acolytes, the proces- 
sional cross, and, according to custom, the sacred vest- 
ments for the priests and other clergymen who attend — 
such as copes, chasubles, dalmatics, tunics, etc., but 
without stoles and maniples. 

2. The canopy should be prepared in a convenient 
place, and the ombrellino, two censers with their boats, 
and at least four lanterns, with candles within. 

3. The Blessed Sacrament being exposed, when every- 
thing is ready, at the sign made by the master of ceresno- 

*This ceremony should more regularly take place immediately 
after Mass, in wliich case the celebrant and ministers will go down 
to the bench at the end of Mass and take off the maniples; the cele- 
brant will also take off the chasuble and put on the cope. Then he 
will proceed as directed in No. 5. 



PROCESSION" 01^ CORPUS CHRISTI. 207 

nies, the acolytes, preceded by the censer-bearers, walk 
from the sacristy to the sanctuary, followed by the clergy, 
two by two, according to their order and dignity, and 
the celebrant walking between the deacon and sub- 
deacon, who raise his cope on each side. 

4. When they arrive within sight of the Blessed Sac- 
rament, they take off their caps, and, when they have 
arrived before the altar, they make a genuflection on 
both knees; the clergy go to their places, and the cele- 
brant and ministers kneel on the lowest step. 

5. At a sign made by the master of ceremonies, the 
ministers rise, the celebrant puts incense in the two 
censers, and incenses the Blessed Sacrament. The deacon 
takes from the throne the Blessed Sacrament, puts It on 
the corporal in the middle of the altar, makes a genu- 
flection, and goes down. 

6. The celebrant, having put the long veil on his shoul- 
ders goes up with the ministers, and kneels on the edge 
of the platform ; there he receives the Ostensorium from 
the deacon, rises, turns to the people, having the min- 
isters at his side, who raise the extremities of his cope; 
and the chanters intone the Pange Lingua^ and the pro- 
cession moves, and makes the usual tour. 

7. If there is a repository with an altar, where the pro- 
cession is to stop, when the ministers arrive before it, the 
deacon kneeling receives the Blessed Sacrament from the 
celebrant, rises, puts it on the altar, or on the throne, if 
there is any, makes a genuflection, returns to the right of 
the celebrant, who takes ofi* his veil ; the choir sings the 
Tantum ergo^ and the Blessed Sacrament is incensed as 
usual. 

8. After the Panem de coelo^ etc., the celebrant sings 
the prayer with the short conclusion, puts on the veil, 
but does not give the Benediction, and the procession is 
continued. "^ 

*The Benediction is to he given at tlio end of the procession, as a 
reading of the Cceremoniale Episcjp>ram (Lib. II, C.ip. XXXIIl, 'i 22) 
•will show; and it is pirmilled, m c ise tlie route is lon^;, U) ^t-)p once 
or twice; the S. C. R. has declared, M ly 11, 1652, that Benedic- 
tion shall be given '"in finn Procemoais.'^ Allervvaids the Sacred 



208 YESPEr.S FOR THE DEAD. 

9. The procepsion having returned to the church, and 
tlie sacred ministers having arrived at the altar, the 
deacon receives the Ostensorium, etc. The Tani^tm 
ergo^ etc., the verses, and the prayers are sung, and the 
Benediction given as usual. 



CHAPTER YII. 

VESPEKS FOR THE DEAD ON THE FIRST DAT OF NOVEMBER. 

Article I. 
Things to te Prejjared. 

1. In the church, a cenutaph,* or representation of a 
tomb, covered with a black cloth, with candlesticks and 
candles of unbleached wax around it. 

2. At the altar, the black antipendium under the white 
one, if possible, otherwise it should be kept ready in the 
sacristy; also, if the tabernacle with the Blessed Sac- 
ment is on the altar, the violet veil under the 
white one. 

3. On the side-table, a black cope for the celebrant. 

4. A book-stand, or desk, in a convenient place. 

Congregation, not wishing to disturb any very ancient customs, 
merely permitted that where such a condition (Vetustissima consue- 
tude) was verified, the Benediction might, wiih many restrictions, be 
given once, or even twice. As no such condition can exist here, we 
have thought it right to observe what is prescribed above. 

*This should not be placed in church until after the Vespers of All 
Saints, anil, strictly speaking, the cenotaph need only be erected in 
time for the Mass of All Souls, when the absolution takes place. It 
would seem better and more convenient to use a black cloth covered 
during the Vespers of All Saints, and at the proper time the cov.r 
might be removed; or the black cloth might be kept in the sac- 
risty and brought out when needed. 



VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. 209 

Article II. 
Ceremonies peculiar to these Yespers. 

1. TVhiist the Magnificat of the Yespers of All Saints 
is sung, tlie candles around the tomb are lighted, and 
whilst the cope-bearers sing the Benedicamus Domino, 
the acolytes go from the celebrant's bench, place their 
candlesticks as usual at each side of the altar, put out their 
candles, go behind the cope-bearers, make together a genu- 
flection to the altar, and bow to the clerg.y, and go before 
them with their hands joined, to the sacristy, where the 
cope-bearers take off their copes. 

2. After the Benedicamus Domino, the celebrant does 
not say Fidelium animoe j he takes off his white cope, 
and puts on the black ; the acolytes take the carpet from 
the steps of the altar, and remove the white antipendium 
and the white veil. 

3. The celebrant having put on the black co])e, all rise, 
and the choir begin Placeho Domino, and sing it entirely, 
the Yespers being of double rite; and when they begin 
the Psalm, all the clergy sit, till the beginning of the 
Magnificat. 

4. At the beginning of the Magnificat, they all rise, 
and the acolytes light their candles. After the Mag- 
nificat, they all sit down whilst the antiphon is repeated ; 
the acolytes take their candlesticks, make a genuflection 
in the middle, and go before the celebrant.* 

5. The antiphon being repeated, all the clergy kneel, 
except the acolytes, the celebrant intones Pater Noster, 
which is continued in a low voice; then the celebrant 
says, Et ne nos inducas, with the other verses, and the 
choir answers them. After the Dominus vohiscum, the 

*Mgr. Martinncci directs that the acolytes shall not assist with can- 
dles, since tUe Cceremonirile Episcoporam only prescrib^^s this when the 
Bishop is pres-iit in his seat in iLie choir. '■'Ad preces et orationem non 
as'ii^tent Acolytki candel/ibra ge tcnites. quoniam Ca&remoniale Episcopo- 
ram nequaqaam hoc prmcvibit pro ExLoinadario, sed taatummodo pro. 
Episcopo quum aderit in priirio cJuri stulb." (Martinucci, Lib. 11, Cap. 
lX.No.^1.) 



210 VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. 

celebrant rises and says the prayer, Fidelium Deus^ and 
alter it Requiem OBternam^ etc. 

6. The ajolytes make the usual bow to the celebrant, 
go to the middle, make a genuflection, put the candle- 
sticks in the proper place, return to the middle, and 
when the singers have sung Requiescant in pace, they 
make a genuflection, and with their hands joined, go to 
to the sacristy, followed by the clergy and the celebrant. 




PART IV. 



THROUGHOUT THE YEAR. 



CHAPTER I. 

FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

Aeticle I. 
Necessary FTejparations, 

1. In tlie sacristy, a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
amice for the officiating clergyman ; a folded chasuble, 
stole, cincture, alb, and amice for the deacon ; likewise a 
folded chasuble, cincture, alb, and amice for the sub- 
deacons. The sacred vestments should be violet. 

2. On the altar, six candlesticks and the cross as usual, 
and a violet altar-veil over a white one. 

3. A small table covered with a white cloth should be 
placed near the altar, at the Epistle side; and on the 
table the candles to be blessed, covered also with a white 
linen cloth. 

4. On the small table, a vessel with holy water, a 
sprinkle, and a basin, ewer, and towel ; also the chalice 
with everything else necessary for Mass; the whole 
covered during the blessing of the candles with a violet 
veil. 

5. In any convenient place, the processional cross, the 
censer with the incense-boat, and a chafing-dish with tire 
and tongs. 



212 FEAGT OF THE PURIPICATIOi^. 

6. At the bench of tlie officiating clergyman, a whiite 
chasuble, stole, and maniple for him; on those of the 
ministers, a white dalmatic, stole and maniple for the 
deacon ; and also a white tunic and maniple for the sub- 
deacon. 

7. If the Mass be not of the Blessed Yirgin, but of the 
Sunday, the sacred vestments ought to be such as are 
required for the Sunday. 

Article II. 

From the vesting of the Ministers to the distribution of 
the Candles. 

1. At a stated hour, the ministers put on the amice, 
alb, and cincture; then the officiating clergyman, at- 
tended by them, puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
stole, and cope ; lastly, the ministers put on the folded 
chasubles without maniples. The signal being given by 
the master of ceremonies, the ministers, with the offici- 
ating clergyman between them, bow to the cross, put on 
their caps, and go to the sanctuary ; the deacon at the 
right of the officiating clergyman, and the sub-deacon at 
the left. Both sacred ministers raise the cope of the 
officiating clergyman. 

2. Having arrived at the sanctuary, the celebrant 
gives his cap to the deacon, and the deacon and sub- 
deacon give theirs to the master of ceremonies, and, 
having knelt on the floor of the sanctuary, they go up to 
the altar; the celebrant kisses it, and the ministers at 
the same time make a genuflection, and all go to the 
Epistle side, where the deacon stands on the first step, at 
the right of the celebrant, and the sub-deacon at the left, 
on the platform. Then the master of ceremonies un- 
covers the candles. 

If the B'essed Sacrament be not kept on the great 
altar, the celebrant bows profoundly to the cross, and the 
ministers and the other clergymen make a genuflection. 

3. The celebrant thus between the ministers, with his 
hands joined, sings in a ferial tone, Dominus vohlscuTn^ 
Oremus^ and the prayer Domine Sancte, with the other 



DISTRIBUnOIT OF THE CANDLES. 213 

four that follow. When he blesses the candles, he lays 
his left hand on the altar; the deacon in the meantime 
raising the hem of his cope ; as also when the celebrant 
uses the censer and the sprinkle. 

4. At the beginning of the prayers, the censer-bearer 
puts fire into the censer, and at the end he goes to the 
Epistle side, having at his right hand the first acolyte, 
carrying the vessel with holy water and the sprinkle. 

5. The fifth prayer being ended, the censer-bearer 
makes a genuflection, goes up to the highest step of the 
altar, to have incense put into the censer and blessed as 
usual by the celebrant, and goes down with the censer 
and the incense-boat ; then the first acolyte makes like- 
wise a genuflection, goes up to the highest step, gives 
the sprinkle to the deacon, who, taking it in the middle, 
with the usual kisses, gives it to the celebrant, who 
sprinkles the candles thrice, first in the middle, then at 
the right, and lastly at the left of the candles, saying 
the anthem, Asjperges me, etc., without the Fsalm. The 
deacon, having received the sprinkle from the celebrant, 
gives it back to the first acolyte ; then takes the censer 
from the censer-bearer, gives it with the usual kisses to 
the celebrant, who incenses the candles thrice, in the 
same manner as he sprinkled them, but without saying 
anything. 

6. Afterwards the censer-bearer takes back the censer, 
and with the first acolyte makes a genuflection to the 
altar, and they carry the censer and the vessel with holy 
water to their proper places. 

Article III. 
From the distribution of the Candles to the Procession. 

1. After the blessing of the candles, the celebrant and 
ministers go to the middle of the altar, and having bowed 
to the cross, turn to the people ; the first acolyte at the 
Epistle side hands the candles to the deacon, who stands 
at the left of the celebrant. 

2. Before the celebrant turns towards the people, the 
second master of ceremonies calls the clergyman first in 



214 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION-. 

dignity amongst those who are present in the sanc- 
tuary, who, without stole, goes to the highest step of the 
altar; where, standing, he receives from the deacon a 
candle, kisses it, and gives it to the celebrant, without 
kissing his hand ; the celebrant also kisses the candle, 
but not the hand of the clergyman from whom he receives 
it ; and gives the candle to the sub-deacon, who, having 
received it with the usual kisses, lays it on the altar. 
The celebrant having received another candle from the 
deacon, gives it to the clergyman highest in dignity, 
who receives it kneeling with the usual kisses, and having 
made a genuflection to the cross, and bowed to the cele- 
brant, retires, r.ccompanied by the second master of 
ceremonies. The latter should direct the clergy to go 
in proper order to receive the candles. 

If there be not a priest to offer the candle to the cele- 
brant, the deacon, having received it from the acolyte, 
places it on the middle of the altar; then the celebrant, 
having bowed to the cross, kneels on the platform 
towards the cross, and thus takes the candle from the 
altar, kisses it-, and gives it to the sub-deacon ; then, 
rising, he continues the distribution as is hereafter 
directed. 

8. At the beginning of the distribution of the candles, 
the choir sings the antliem. Lumen ad revelationem^ and 
the canticle, Nunc dimittis. 

4. If the distribution be not finished at the end of the 
canticle Nuno dimittis^ the canticle ought to be repeated, 
and the Gloria Patri sung at the end of the distribution. 

5. The clergyman hignest in dignity having retired, 
the deacon and sub-deacon go on tlie highest step, kneel 
on the platform, receive with the usual kisses their can- 
dles from the celebrant ; rise, and return to their former 
places, that is, the deacon to the left, to hand the candles 
to the celebrant, and the sub-deacon to the right, to hold 
up the border of his cope. The ministers give their 
candles to the acolytes, and then the celebrant distributes 
the candles, first to the priests, then to the clergy in 
inferior orders, who go up to the altar, two by two, kneel 
on the platform, kiss first the candle, then the celebrant's 
hand. 



THE PROCESSION". 215 

6. Towards the end of the distribution, at a sio-nal 
given by the master of ceremonies, the acolytes li^^ht the 
candles of the clergy for the procession. 

7. The distribution being ended, the celebrant and the 
ministers turn towards the altar, bow to the cross, go 
back in the same order as before, to the Epistle side, 
where the celebrant washes his hands, and in the mean- 
time the choir sings the anthem, Exurge, etc., which is 
repeated. 

8. After the anthem, the celebrant, standing at the 
Epistle side, without saying Dominus vobiscum^ sings 
Or emus, and the prayer, Exaudi. 

After Septuagesima, provided it be not on Sunday, 
before the celebrant says Oremus, the ministers place 
themselves behind the celebrant, the deacon sings Eleo- 
tamus genua, immediately after the Oremus has been 
sung; he and all in the church kneel; the sub-deacon 
sings Levate, and they all arise, and stand till the prayer 
is linished. Where it is customary that the candles 
should be distributed to the people by the celebrant, he 
shall do it at the railing ; the men first kiss the candle, 
then the hand of the celebrant; but the women kiss 
only the candle. After the distribution, the ministers 
go back to the altar, make genuflections on the lowest 
step, and the celebrant bows to the cross. They then go 
to the Epistle side, where the celebrant washes his hands 
at the small table. In case the number of people be 
great, another priest, in surplice and violet stole, may 
distribute the candles with the celebrant. 

Article IY. 

The Procession, 

1. Whilst the celebrant sings the last prayer, the 
censer-bearer puts fire into the censer; when the prayer 
is finished, he goes to the Epistle side, the incense is 
put into the censer, and blessed by the celebrant as usual. 
Then the sub-deacon bows to the altar, and goes by the 
shortest way, to take the cross, which he receives from 
the second master of ceremonies, and walks between the 



216 FEAST OF THE PURIFICATION. 

acolytes to the middle of the sanctuary, where he stands 
turned towards the altar. 

2. In the meanwhile, the deacon receives from the 
master of ceremonies the celebrant's candle, gives it to 
him, kissing it and the celebrant's hand, and having 
received his own- candle, at the signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, turned towards the peo])le, he sings 
with a loud voice, Procedamus in pace. The clergy 
answer, In nomine Christi, Amen. 

3. The procession then moves in the following order : 
first, the censer-bearer, who makes a genuflection ; then 
the cross bearer between the acolytes, none of whom 
make a genuflection; then follow the singers, and the 
rest of the clergy, who make genuflections, two by two, 
and carry their candles lighted ; then the deacon and 
the celebrant, who likewise carry their candles lighted, 
and, when notified by the master of ceremonies, descend 
the steps, and bow to the altar; the deacon then gives 
the cap to the celebrant, kissing it first, then the cele- 
brant's hand. He afterwards places himself at the left 
of the ofiiciating clergyman, raising the border of his 
cope. The singers sing the anthems as in the Missal. 

If, during the procession, a Low Mass is said in the 
church, the bell should not be rung at the elevation ; but 
if the bell should be inadvertently rung, the procession 
passing before that altar should kneel till the end of the 
elevation. {Deer. E. S. (7., 1 Mar., 1681.) 

4. When they are out of the door of the church, they 
all put on their caps, the censer-bearer, cross-bearer, 
acolytes and master of ceremonies excepted ; but as soon 
as they re-enter the church, they uncover their heads, the 
celebrant and deacon only excepted. 

5. Coming into the church, the singers chant the 
response, Ohtulerunt^ even if the anthems be not yet 
finished. 

6. The censer-bearer makes a genuflection in the 
middle of the sanctuary, and carries the censer back to 
its place. The cross-bearer and the acolytes do not 
kneel ; they go to the side-table, on whicii the acolytes 
place their candlesticks, and the cross-bearer the cross; 



ASn WEDN'ESDAY. 217 

the latter sroes to the minister's bench, where he waits 
for the celebrant and the deacon. 

7. The clergy having made a genuflection in the mid- 
dle of the sanctuary, go to the r places, and extinguish 
their candles. The celebrant and deacon, as they come 
into the sanctuary, take off their caps, go to the middle 
of the sanctuary, put out the candles, give them to the 
master of ceremonies, make the usual bows, go to the 
ministers' bench, turn towards the altar, and the min- 
isters take the cope from the celebrant, help him to put 
on the chasuble, put on their own vestments, accompany 
him to the altar, and having made the usual bows, begin 
Mass, which is said as usual, and is to be sung by the 
priest that officiated at the distribution of the candles. 
{Deer. 8. C. R, 12 Jun., 1627.) If a Bishop bless the 
candles, a priest may say the Mass. 

AVhen the Mass of the Feast of the Purification is to 
be celebrated, an acolyte should remove from the side- 
table and the altar all the violet ornaments. 

Also, when the Mass of said festival is celebrated, the 
celebrant and the clerg}? hold lighted candles in their 
hands during the Gospel; the clergy, moreover, hold 
them from the Sanctus till after the Communion. 



CHAPTEE II. 

ASH- WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 

Necessarij Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, the violet cope and stole, also the 
cincture, alb, and amice for the celebrant; the folded 
chasuble and stole of violet color, with the cincture, alb, 
and amice for the deacon ; the same things (the stole ex- 



218 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

cepted) are to be prepared in the usual place for tlie snb- 
deacon. 

2. On the altar, six candlesticks, with the cross and the 
violet altar-veil. At the Epistle side, a vessel containing 
ashes, and covered either with a violet veil or with its 
own cover. 

3. On the side-table, besides the things that are neces- 
sary for High Mass, the holy-water vase with the sprinkle ; 
a small plate with some bread ; a ewer and basin with a 
towel. 

4. On the ministers' bench, the chasuble and maniple 
for the celebrant ; two other maniples for the ministers, 
who put them on, after having assisted the celebrant to 
put on his vestments. 

5. In any convenient place, the censer with the in- 
cense-boat, and a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes. 

1. The deacon and sub-deacon, having put on, as usual, 
all their vestments (the maniples and folded chasubles 
excepted), help to vest the celebrant with the amice, alb, 
cincture, stole, and cope; then they put on their folded 
chasubles. The signal being given by the master of 
ceremonies, they all bow to the cross, put on their caps, 
go out of the sacristy, having the celebrant in the middle, 
and raising his cope on each side. 

2. Having arrived at the altar, they give their caps to 
the master of ceremonies, kneel, go up to the platform, 
the celebrant kisses the altar in the middle, and the 
ministers make a genuflection ; then they go to the 
Epistle side, the celebrant having the sub-deacon at his 
left, and the deacon at his right ; the master of ceremonies 
uncovers the ashes. 

3. There the celebrant, with his hands joined, reads 
the anthem, Exaudi^ while it is sung by the choir. 

4. After the anthem has been repeated by the singers, 
the celebrant, in the same place, without turning to the 
people, sings, in a ferial tone, with his hands joined, 



DISTRIBUTION OF THE ASHES. 219 

Dominus voMsGum^ Oremns^ bowing as usual to the 
cross, and then the four following prayers; when he 
blesses the ashes, he places his left hand on the altar, 
and the deacon raises his cope, which is also to be 
observed whenever the celebrant uses the sprinkle or 
the censer. 

5. At the beginning of these prayers the censer-bearer 
prepares the censer, and at the end of them he goes to 
the Epistle side, having on liis right the first acol^yte, 
who carries the holy- water vase and the sprinkle; they 
both kneel, and the censer-bearer goes up to the highest 
step, that the incense may be put into the censer, and 
blessed; he then descends, and gives his place to the 
acolyte, who presents to the deacon the sprinkle, which 
is presented by him to the celebrant, whose hand, as well 
as the sprinkle, is kissed by the deacon. The celebrant 
sprinkles the ashes thrice, first in the middle, then on 
the right, and lastly on the left, saying Avith a low 
voice, Asjperges me^ etc., but not the Fsalm, Miserere. 
The deacon returns the sprinkle, and having received 
the censer from the censer-bearer, gives it to the cele- 
brant, who incenses the ashes thrice. 

6. The censer-bearer, having received the censer, makes 
a genuriection to the altar with the acolyte, and they 
carry the censer and the holy-water vase to their proper 
places. 

7. The celebrant and the ministers proceed to the mid- 
dle of the altar without their caps ; the deacon, on the 
left, holds the vessels with the blessed ashes, and the 
sub-deacon, turned towards the people, stands at the 
celebrant's right. 

8. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, 
the clergyman who is first in dignity amongst those that 
are present, goes, without stole, to the highest step, when, 
forming as usual the sign of the cross, and saying. 
Memento homo, etc., he places the ashes on the forehead 
of the celebrant, who stands with his hands joined. 

9. The celebrant then forming the sign of the cross, 
and saying, Memento homo, places the asiies on the head 
of the same clergyman, who kneels to receive them, and 



220 ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

after havino- made the usual bows and gennflection, 
returns to his place, accompanied by the master of cere- 
monies, who directs the clergy in what order they are to 
proceed to the altar. 

If there be no priest present dressed in surplice, the 
celebrant kneeling on the platform of the altar makes 
the sign of the cross on his own head, with the ashes, 
without saying anything ; which must be observed 
even if the ministers be priests. 

10. At the beginning of the distribution of the ashes, 
the singers chant the anthem, Immutemur habitu^ etc., 
which they repeat, if necessary, during the distribution. 

11. The priest who is first in dignity having retired, 
the deacon gives the vessel containing the ashes to the 
master of ceremonies, or lays it on the altar. He then 
kneels on the highest step at the right of the sub-deacon, 
where they both receive the ashes ; then the deacon goes 
to the right side of the celebrant, wliere he holds the 
vessel with the ashes, and the sub-deacon proceeds to the 
left. The celebrant puts the ashes on the foreheads of 
the clergymen, who go to the altar, two by two, accord- 
ing to their respective dignity and order. 

12. After the distribution of the ashes, the deacon 
returns the vessel in which they are contained to the 
master of ceremonies, who places it on the table; the 
celebrant, attended by the ministers, goes to the Epistle 
side, where he washes his hands, rubbing them also with 
bread prepared for that purpose, one of the acolytes 
pouring the water, and a minister holding the towel 

Where it is customary, the celebrant may distribute 
the ashes to the people at the railing. 

13. Then, the ministers standing at the side of the 
celebrant, he sings, JJomimcs vohiscina^ and the prayer, 
Concede nobis^ in a ferial tone. The prayer being ended, 
and the singers having answered, Ameii^ they bow to 
the cross, and go by the shortest way to their seats, 
where the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, takes off 
the cope, and puts on the maniple and the chasuble. 
The ministers also put on their maniples. They then 
go to the altar to sing Mass, which must be sung by the 



THE MASS. 221 

same priest who has blessed tlie ashes. {Deer. S. C. B., 
12 Jun., 1627.) 

Article III. 
Of the Mass. 

1. The ministers having left their seats, bow, as nsnal, 
to the clergy, and on arriving at the steps of the altar, 
kneel before the cross. Mass is celebrated as usual, with 
the following exceptions: at the Confession^ and at the 
prayers, the clergy, as well as the acolytes, who serve at 
the altar, remain kneeling; the same is to be observed 
from the Sanctus to the Agnus Dei. 

2. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer before the last 
previously to his reading the Epistle, the second acolyte 
takes off the sub-deacon his chasuble, and lays it on the 
bench, and assists him in putting it on again after he has 
sung the Epistle, and kissed the hand of the celebrant. 
Whilst the celebrant is reading the Gospel, the same 
acolyte helps the deacon to take off the chasuble and 
put on the large stole; taking care to assist him again in 
taking off the large stole and resuming the chasuble, 
after he has removed the Missal from the Gospel side to 
the Epistle side, after the Communion. 

3. The celebrant should not kneel whilst he reads the 
Adjuva nos^ etc., but after having read the Gospel, he 
goes as usumI to the middle of the altar, where he 
remains till the Adjuva nos, etc., then he and the min- 
isters kneel on the platform; when i\\Q Adjuva nos^ etc., 
is ended, they all arise, incense is then put into the 
censer, and the rest proceeds as usual. 

4. The acolytes holding their candles, remain kneel- 
ing from \\\Q Sanctus to the communion of the celebrant. 

5. At the prayer, Sajyer pojpulum^ the celebrant having 
sung Oremus^ the deacon at his right side, turned towards 
the people, sings, Humiliate caj>ita. 



222 SUi^DAYS L^TAllE AXD GAUDETE — PALM-SUXDAY. 

CHAPTER III. 

Sundays L^etare and Gaudete. 

On these Sundays three things are particularly to be 
observed : 

1. The organ, which is silent during Lent, is played at 
High Mass and Yespers. 

2. The sacred vestments should be of rose color. 

3. The deacon and sub-deacon, instead of folded chas- 
ubles, make use of the dalmatic and tunic. 



CHAPTEE lY. 

PALM-SUNDAY. 

Article I. 
Preparations, 

1. In the sacristy, for the celebrant, the violet cope 
and stole, the cincture, alb, and amice; for the deacon, 
the folded chasuble, stole, and maniple of violet color, 
the cincture, alb, and amice; for the sub-deacon, the 
violet folded chasuble and maniple, the cincture, alb, 
and amice. Also, three amices, albs, and cinctures, and 
three violet maniples and stoles ; besides three books for 
the three deacons who sing the Passion. 

2. On the altar, the cross and six candlesticks, without 
any ornaments; where the custom prevails, branches of 
olive or palm trees may be placed between the candle- 
sticks. 

3. Near the altar, on the Epistle side, a small table 



BLESSING OF THE PALMS. 223 

for the palms, covered with a linen cloth ; on the Gospel 
side, in any convenient place, three bookstands for the 
Passion. 

4. On the table, the holj-water pot with the sprinkle, 
the chalice in the middle, covered as usual with the veil, 
the cruets, bell, the Missal for the Epistle and Gospel, the 
large stole for the deacon, a basin with a pitcher of 
water, and a towel. 

5. In any convenient place, the processional cross, 
covered with a violet veil, a cliafing-dish, with fire and 
tongs. 

6. On the minister's bench, the violet chasuble and 
maniple, for the celebrant. 

Article II. 

From the beginning of the Ceremony to the Distribution 
of the Palms. 

1. The ministers dressed as usual, with amice, alb, and 
cincture, and the deacon having put on his stole, assists 
the celebrant in putting on the amice, alb, cincture, stole, 
and cope; they then put on their folded chasubles. The 
master of ceremonies having given the signal, they bow 
to the cross; and proceed to the altar, having their 
heads covered, walking at each side of the celebrant, 
and raising the border of his cope. 

2. Having arrived at the altar, and given their caps 
to the master of ceremonies, they kneel, and the Asperges 
having taken place as usual, they go up to the platform, 
where the celebrant kisses the middle of the altar, and 
the sacred ministers make a genuflection; they imme- 
diately go to the Epistle side, where they remain ; the 
sub-deacon standing at the left hand of the celebrant, 
and the deacon on the highest step at his right. The 
palms are then uncovered by the master of ceremonies. 

3. The celebrant, with his hands joined, and without 
making the sign of the cross, reads from the Missal the 
anthem, Ilosanna^ which is sung by the chanters. 

4. The anthem being sung, the celebrant remaining 



224: palm-su:n'day. 

turned towards the Missal, and with his hands joined, 
sings in a ferial tone, Dominus vohiscum^ and the prayer 
that follows ; during this, the ministers at each side 
raise the celebrant's cope. At the beginning of the 
prayer, the sub-deacon, bowing to the cross, descends to 
the floor, and standing below the steps, behind the cele- 
brant, %vith his face turned towards the altar, with the 
assistance of the second acolyte he takes ofi' the chasuble, 
and receives the Missal from the second master ot cere- 
monies. 

5. At the end of the prayer, having made the usual 
bows to the clergy, he sings the lesson that follows it in 
the tone of the Epistle; then, bowling as before the 
lesson, he goes to the celebrant, and kneeling kisses his 
hand, and receives his blessing. Having put on the 
chasuble, he goes by the shortest way to the left of the 
celebrant, and remains there. 

6. After the lesson, the singers chant one of the two 
responses with its verses, and in the meantime the deacon 
having bowed to the cross, goes down, and taking ofl" his 
chasuble, puts on the large stole, receives from the second 
master of ceremonies the Missal, which he places on the 
middle of the altar; then making a genuflection, he 
returns by the shortest way to the right of the celebrant, 
to hold the incense-boat whilst he puts the incense into 
the censer; in the same time the sub-deacon raises the 
border of the celebrant's cope. 

7. The incense being blessed, the sub-deacon goes 
down the steps, and the deacon goes by the shortest way 
to the middle of the altar; there, kneeling on both 
knees, he says, Munda cormeum; then takes the Missal, 
and saying, Jube Domiie^ etc., asks the blessing of the 
celebrant, who, turning himselt* to the Gospel side, 
gives it in the usual words, Dominus sit, etc. The 
Gospel is sung, as usual in High Masses; at the end of 
which the sub-deacon carries the book to the celebrant, 
who kisses it, and the deacon incenses him as cu-tomary ; 
he then takes oflf the large stole, puts on the folded chas- 
"iible, and returns to the right of the celebrant, the sub- 
deacon beimz; on his left. 



BLESSING OF THE PALMS. 225 

8. After the celebrant lias been incensed, he turns 
towards the altar, and sings in a ferial tone the prayer 
that follows; after which he sings the Prmfatio. After 
this, standing at the Epistle side witli the ministers, and 
bovving at the same time, he says in a low voice the 
jSa?ictus, which is sung by the choir. 

9. The celebrant, with his hands joined, sings in a 
ferial tone, Domimis vohlscum, and the prayers for the 
blessing; w^hen he makes the sign of the cross on the 
palms, he lays his left hand on the altar, and the deacon 
raises the border of his cope; the same is to be observed 
when he makes use of the sprinkle or the censer. 

10. At the beginning of the prayers, the censer-bearer 
prepares the censer, and when they are ended, he goes 
to the Epistle side, having at his right the first acolyte, 
who carries the vessel with holy water. Both bow at 
the lowest step, and the censer-bearer goes up to the 
highest step ; and after the celebrant has put the incense 
into the censer, and blessed it, he retires; the acolyte 
then takes his place, gives the sprinkle to the deacon, 
who, holding it in the middle of its handle, kisses it 
and presents it to the celebrant, whose hand he also 
kisses. The celebrant sprinkles the palms three times, 
first in the middle, afterwards at the right, and lastly at 
the left, saying, at the same time, Asjperges me; the 
deacon returns the sprinkle to the acolyte, and receives 
the censer from the censer-bearer, kisses and gives it to 
the celebrant, whose hand he also kisses; the celebrant 
incenses the palms also three times, in the same manner 
as has been said for the sprinkling, but without say- 
ing any words. 

11. The censer-bearer receives the censer from the 
deacon, makes a genuflection with the acolyte, and both 
retire to place the censer and the vessel in their proper 
places. 

12. After incensing the palms, the celebrant sings 
Dominus vobisGum^ and the prayer that follows. 



226 PALM-SUKDAY. 

Article III. 
Of the Distribution of the Palms, 

1. After the prayer, the ministers and the celebrant 
proceed to the middle of the altar, bow to the croPS, and 
turn towards the people ; the first acolyte, at the Epistle 
side, holds the palms, which he gives to the deacon. 

2. The clergyman who is first in dignity amongst 
those who are present at the ceremony, when invited 
by the second master of ceremonies, goes in his nsiial 
choir-dress, without stole, to the highest step of the altar; 
there, standing, he receives from the deacon the palm, 
which he kisses and gives to the celebrant, without kiss- 
ing his hand; the celebrant also kisses the palm only, 
and gives it to the sub-deacon, who, having kissed the 
celebrant's hand and the palm, lays it on the altar. The 
celebrant having received from the deacon another 
palm, gives it to the clergyman who is first in dignity. 
He kneels on the platform to receive it, and kisses both 
the celebrant's hand and the palm. [Deer. S. R. C, 
14th Feb., 1703.) After which, bowing and making a 
genuflection, he returns to his place, attended by the 
second master of ceremonies, who invites the clergy to 
go to the altar in proper order. 

3. When the distribution of the palms commences, the 
anthem Pueri IlebrcBorum is sung by the chanters, and 
repeated, if necessary, during the distribution. 

4. The deacon and sub-deacon then go to the highest 
step, and, kneeling on the platform, receive the palm 
from the celebrant, and kiss his hand and the palm ; 
afterwards they arise, and make a genuflection ; the sub- 
deacon returns to the right, and the deacon to the left 
of the celebrant, to give him the palms that are to be 
distributed, having previously placed their own on the 
altar, or given them to the acolytes. The celebrant dis- 
tributes the palms to the clergy, beginning with the 
priests and ending with the inferior clergy, who must 
come, two by two, and kiss first the palm, then the 
hand of the celebrant. 



/ 



THE niocEssiON". 227 

5. After the distribution, tlie celebrant and tlie 
ministers tnrn towards the altar, bow to the cross, and 
go in the same order as before to the Epistle side, wlierc 
the celebrant washes his liands, and sings the prayer, 
Omnipotens sempiterne Deus^ etc. 

The celebrant, where it is customary, may go to the 
railing to distribute the palms to the people; the 
men kiss the palm and the celebrant's hand, but 
the women kiss only the palm. After the distribu- 
tion, the ministers return to the altar, make a genu- 
flection on the lowest step, but the celebrant merely 
bows, if the Blessed Sacrament is not present, after 
which they all go to the Epistle side, as in the preceding 
number. 

Should the congregation be large, another priest, dressed 
in surplice, and having on a violet stole, may assist the 
celebrant in distributing the palms; the same is to be 
observed with respect to the distribution of the candles 
and of the ashes. 

Article IY. 

Of the Procession. 

1. When the ministers go to the Epistle side, the 
censer-bearer prepares the censer; after the prayer, he 
goes to the Epistle side, where tlie incense is put in o 
the censer, and blessed by the celebrant. Then the sub- 
deacon goes to the side-table, where, taking oiF his 
maniple, he takes the processional cross, and, preceded 
by the censer-bearer, walks between the acolytes to the 
middle of the sanctuary, where he remains with his face 
turned towards the altar. 

2. In the meantime, the deacon, having taken off his 
maniple, gives the palm to the celebrant, at the same 
time kissing it, and also the hand of the priest; then he 
takes his own palm, and withdraws to the highest step 
behind the celebrant; and at a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, he turns towards the people, and 
eino-s, Frocedamus in pace, to which the clergy answer. 
In nomine Christi, Amen. 



228 PALM-SUXDAY. 

3. Tliey tlien walk in procession out of the door of the 
church in the following order: the censer-bearer, having 
made a genuflection, proceeds first; then come the aco- 
lytes, (on each side of the cross- bearer),^^ who also genu- 
flect; after them the chanters and the rest of the clergj^, 
two by two, who all make a genuflection in the middle 
of the sanctuary, and carry their palms in their right 
or left hand, according to their position ; if they are on 
the left, they must carry them m the left hand ; but if 
on the right, they must bear them in their right. Last 
of all, the deacon and the celebrant, who at the signal 
given by the master of ceremonies, go down the steps, 
the celebrant bows, and the deacon kneels before the 
cross; he then gives the cap to the celebrant, kissing it 
and the celebrant's hand ; and having received his cap 
from the master of ceremonies, he goes to the left of the 
celebrant, whose cope he raises with his right hand, 
holding in his left his own palm. They follow the pro- 
cession with their caps on. 

4. As the procession goes out of the door of the church, 
all the clergy, except the cross-bearer, the acolytes, the 
censer-bearer, and the master of ceremonies, put on 
their caps. The procession is made through the usual 
places round the church, and the chanters sing either all 
or only a part of the anthems that are in the Missal, 
according to the length of the way. 

5. On their return to the door of the church, some of 
the singers enter the church, and shut the door; the 
censer-bearer goes to the right of the first acolyte, the 
cross-bearer stops between the acolytes near the door, 
and turns the crucifix towards the people. Tlie clergy, 
as they arrive, keep their respective rows, but draw 
near the acolytes, and form a circle, which is completed 
by the celebrant, with the ministers at his side, who 
remain turned towards the door; all may wear their 
caps. 

6. The singers within the church, turned towards the 
door, sing Gloria^ laus^ which is repeated by the clergy, 

*The cross-bearer does not genutlect. 



THE PROCESSION". 229 

who are witliont; then the other strophe? are sunir by 
those within, the clergy altern:itely repeating Gloria^ 
laus. 

7. When all tlie verses have been sung, tlie sub-deacon, 
turning the crncilix, knocks at the door with the foot of 
the cross ; the door is immediately opened, the procession 
enters the church, and the anthem Ingrediente Domino 
is sung. 

If the procession cannot be made out of the church, 
it should be made within; and should stop at the door 
of the sanctuary. 

8. As the clergy enter the church, all, with the excep- 
tion of the celebrant and ministers, uncover their heads, 
and proceed to the sanctuary. The censer-bearer arriving 
at the middle of it, makes a genuflection together with 
the acolytes, and carries, the censer to its place. The 
cross-bearer and acolytes go to the side-table, the aco- 
lytes place their candlesticks on it, the sub-deacon 
leaves the cross near it and goes to the bench, waiting 
there for the celebrant and deacon. The clergy having 
made a genuflection in the middle of the sanctuary, go 
to their respective places, carrying the palms in their 
hands. 

9. The celebrant and deacon, as they enter the sanc- 
tuary, uncover their heads, go to tlie middle, make a 
genuflection, and go to the bench of the ministers; there 
the deacon receives from the celebrant his palm, kissing 
it and the celebrant's hand, and gives it with his own 
to the master of ceremonies ; then, having turned towards 
the altar, the ministers take ofl' the cope from the cele- 
brant, and put on his maniple and chasuble ; after 
which, they put on their own maniples, and having 
bowed to the clergy as usual, go to the altar, and begin 
Mass, which ought to be celebrated by the same one 
who blessed the palms, unless they were blessed by the 
Bishop. 



230 palm-sun^day. 

Article Y. 
Of the Mass and Passion. 

1. Mass is celebrated as on other Sundays dnrinir Lent, 
with the followmg exceptions: the Psalm Judica is not 
said, nor the Gloria Pair I at the Introit and Lavaho. 

2 Only one prayer is said. Whilst the sub-deacon 
sings the Epistle, the clergy, deacon and celebrant, unless 
the latter should actually be reading the Gradual or 
Tracts kneel at the words. In nomi7ie Jesu omne genu 
flectatur^ till the words, £t infernoruni are sung. 

3. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon waits till the cele- 
brant has read the Tract, he then receives liis blessins^, 
descends the steps, puts on his chasuble, and goes to the 
right of the deacon, as observed for the Introit. The 
celebrant and ministers sit at their seats, whilst the Tract 
is sung. 

4. During the Passion and Gospel, the celebrant and 
all the others, except the deacons who sing the Passion, 
the acolytes and the master of ceremonies, hold palms 
in their hands ; the same is to be observed by all, except 
the sacred ministers, when they return to the sacristy. 

5. The Gospel of St. John is read at the end of the 
High Mass. 

6. Whilst the Epistle is sung, the deacons, who are to 
sing the Passion, put on the amice, alb, cincture, violet 
maniple, and stole. The acolytes place in a straight line, 
at a little distance from each other, the three book-stands, 
in the place where the Gospel is usually sung. 

7. Towards the end of the Tract, the three deacons 
appointed for the Passion, each holding in both hands 
his book, which he lays against his breast, accompanied 
by the second master of ceremonies, bow to the cross, 
put on their caps, and go out of the sacristy in the fol- 
lowing order: lirst, the master of ceremonies, with his 
hands joined ; next the deacon, who sings the words of 
the Evangelist; then he who sings the w^ords of the 
multitude; and, lastly, the one who sings the words of 
our Saviour. 



MASS AND PASSION. 231 

8. When tliey enter the sanctuary, they uncover their 
heads, and give their caps to the master of ceremonies; 
then the deacon, who sings the words of our Saviour, is 
placed in tiie middle; he wlio sings the part of the 
Evangelist, at the riglit; and he who sings the words of 
the multitude, at the left; they make a genuflection 
before the altar, bow to the celebrant, and the clergy go 
to the booi^-stands, place their books upon them, so that 
he who personates the Evangelist, be in the middle ; 
he who sings the words of our Saviour at the right; 
and the one who represents the multitude at the left. 
Then the Evangelist begins, Passio Domini^ et(i. ; during 
the Passion, they stand with their hands joined, and 
near tliem the second master of ceremonies. 

9. When he who is in the middle begins the Passion, 
the clergy take off their caps, rise, and stand during it; 
the celebrant and the ministers rise, and go by the 
shortest way to the Epistle side, place themselves as for 
the Introit ; the deacon gives, as usual, the palm to the 
celebrant; the ministers receive it from the master of 
ceremonies, and all hold them in their hands ; then the 
celebrant, turning a little towards the singers, reads the 
Passion at the Epistle side [Deer. S. B. C.^ 4 Aug., 
1663), turning a little, as far as that part which is sung 
like the Gospel, exclusively; but when he arrives at the 
words Emisit Spiritum, he makes no genuflection. 

10. When the celebrant has read the Passion, the min- 
isters place themselves behind each other, and, with the 
celebrant, turn towards the singers. In their right 
hands they hold their palms, and place their left on their 
breast; at the name of Jesus they bow to the cross; at 
the words Emisit Spiritum they all kneel, where they 
are, but turned towards the altar; the deacons, however, 
who sing the Passion, kneel towards their books ; they 
all ri^e at the signal given by the master of ceremonies. 

11. At the end of the Passion, the clergy sit down, 
the deacons, by whom it was sung, go to the middle of 
the altar in the same order in which they came, kneel to 
the cross, bow to the clergy, receive their caps from the 
second master of ceremonies, and leaving the sanctuary, 



.232 PALM-SU>rDAY. 

they cover their heads, go to the sacristy as they came 
out, and the acolytes remove the bookstands from tlie 
place where the Passion was sung. 

12. In the meantime, the sub-deacon gives his pahn to 
the first master of ceremonies, and carries the Missal to 
the Gospel side. The celebrant gives his palm to the 
deacon, who gives it and his own to the master of cere- 
monies, goes to the middle of the altar, and says, Munda 
COT meiim^ Juhe Domne Benedicere, as usual ; he then 
reads the Gospel, as in the Missal, without saying 
Doininus vobiscum^ or making the sign of the cross 
either on himself or on the book; at the end, the sub- 
deacon anwers, Laiis tibi Christe. In the meantime, the 
deacon having taken off his chasuble, puts on the lar^G 
stole, and carries the book to the altar. 

13. The celebrant having read the Gospel, everything 
is performed as usual, except that the acolytes do not 
carry the candlesticks, but they go, either with their 
hands joined, or, if it be customary, holding the palm in 
their hands ; the deacon does not say, Dominus vohiscwn^ 
neither does he make the sign of the cross on himself 
or on the book, but having incensed it, he begins by 
singing, Altera autem^ etc., in the usual tone of the 
Gospel. In the meantime, the celebrant holds the palm 
in his right hand; and at the end of the Gospel he 
kisses the Missal, which the sub-deacon presents at these 
words, Altera die, and Mass is continued as usual. 



OFFICE OF THE TEi^EBR^. 233 



CHAPTER V. 

OFFICE OF THE TENEBR^, 
ON WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, AND FRIDAY, IN HOLY-WEEK. 

Article I. 

Preparations. 

1. At the altar, tlie carpet, violet altar-veil, six candle- 
sticks with brown wax candles; the Blessed Sacrament 
is to be removed to another altar, in case it is usually 
kept at the principal altar. The altar-cards also should 
be removed. 

2. In the place where the Epistle is sung, a triangular 
candlestick, with fifteen candles of unbleached wax, and 
a rod with the proper instrument to extinguish them. 

3. In the middle of the sanctuary, a book-stand, for 
the lessons that are to be sung. 

Article XL 
From the CommenGement to the End of the Office. 

1. At the stated hour, the candles of the altar and 
those of the triangular candlesticks being lighted, at the 
signal given by the master of ceremonies, the clergy 
leave the sacristy. When they are arrived at their places 
in the sanctuary, they all kneel down for awhile, to say 
in secret the Ajperi Domine ; then they arise, and say 
in secret, Pater ^ Ave, and Credo. 

2. At the signal trom the presiding clergyman, the 
chanters sing the anthem, Zelus domus ; after which 
they begin the Pisalm, and all sit down. 

At the end of every Psalm, Gloria Patri is not said, 
but the anthem is immediately repeated. 



231: OFFICE OF THE TEiJ"EBRJE. 

3. At the end of the first Psalm, tlie acoljte appointed 
to put ont the candles, puts out the last candle of the 
triangle at the Gospel side; at the end of the second, he 
extinguishes that on the Epistle side, and so on at the 
end of each Psalm alternately, leaving lighted only the 
candle at the top of the triangle. 

4. After the verses at the end of the third Psalm and 
anthem of each nocturn, the clergy rise, and say. Pater 
noster ; at the end of which, they sit down, and put on 
their caps. 

5. In the meanwhile, the second master of ceremonies 
invites the clergyman who is to sing the first lamenta- 
tion, by bowing to him; he then places himself at his 
left, accompanies him to the bookstand, where both make 
a genuflection, and bow to the clergy. Then the lamen- 
tation is sung, without asking the blessing, and ended 
without saying - Tu autem Domine. Afterwards they 
make a genuflection, bow to the clergy, and the master 
of (Ceremonies accompanies the singer back to his place, 
and bows to him. The same is to be done for each 
lesson. 

6. Whilst the singers begin the Benedictus, all rise, 
and stand till they begin to sing Christus^ etc. ; at the 
verse Ut sine timore^ the same acolyte extinguishes the 
last candle of the altar at the Gospel side; at the yqi-^q 
In sanctitate that at the Epistle side, and so at each of 
the following verses alternately. 

Whilst the Benedictus is sung, all the lights in the 
church are put out, except the lamps before the Blessed 
Sacrament. 

7. When the anthem of the Benedictus is repeated, 
the top candle is taken from the triangular candlestick 
by the acolyte, who carries it to the Epistle side, and 
holds it lighted at the corner of the altar. AV^hen they 
begin Christ us f actus est^ he hides it behind the altar. 

8. At the beginning of Christus^ etc., all kneel and 
say in secret. Pater noster ; then the Psalm Miserere is 
either said or sung, at the end of which the presiding 
clergyman recites, without Oremus^ the ])rayer Respice 
qucesumus^ but says, in a low and inaudible voice, Qui 



MA U:N^ DAY-THURSDAY. 235 

9. At the end of the prayer, tlie celebrant taps his 
book with his hand, as the others also do; then the 
lighted candle is brought from under the altar, and all 
rise and depart in silence, after the usual genutiection. 

10. The same is to be observed on the two following 
days, except that the altar is without a cloth, altar-veil, 
or carpet; having only the cross and six candlesticks 
on it. 



CHAPTEK YI. 

MAUNDAY-THUESDAY. 

Article I. 

Preparations, 

1 . In the sacristy, white vestments for High Mass ; 
besides two violet stoles to be used when the priest strips 
the altars; also a third white tunic, with ainice, alb, and 
cincture, but without maniple for the cross-bearer. The 
candlesticks for the acolytes, two censers, with their 
incense-boat, and a sufficient number of candles for the 
procession ; also torches for the elevation. 

2. The principal altar is to be decorated with the most 
precious ornaments, with a white altar-veil, and if it has 
a tabernacle with the Blessed Sacrament, it is to be covered 
with a veil of the same color; the cross on the altar is 
to be covered with a white veil. {Deer, S. M. C^ 
20 Dec, 1783.) 

3. On the table, besides everything necessary for High 
Mass, a chalice for the repository, with pall, paten, and 
a white veil and ribbon ; on the paten used for the 
Mass, two hosts, one of which should be of such a size 
that it may be put in the chalice prepared for the reposi- 
tory; as many white stoles as will be sufficient for the 



236 MAUNDAY-TIIURSDAY. 

priests who are to go to Communion; a ])Yx with pmall 
particles; the commnnion-cloth, and a white cope for 
the celebrant; near the table, a clapper, used instead of 
a bell. 

4. In any convenient place, the canopy and the pro- 
cessional cross, covered with a violet veil. 

5. A proper place, or repository, should be prepared 
in some chapel, or on some altar of the church, and 
decently adorned with hangings, flowers and lights. 
Above the altar, in the most conspicuous and elevated 
part, should be placed an urn, or tabernacle, that may 
be locked, with a corporal in it, w^here the Blessed Sac- 
rament may be kept for the following day. On the 
altar, an unfolded corporal, with the burse and the key of 
the urn. Near the altar, steps, or a stool, that the deacon 
may reach the door of the tabernacle. 

Article IL 
Of the Mass. 

1. This day, at Mass, the Psalm Judica me is not said; 
nor the Gloria Fatri at the Introit and Lavabo. 

2. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria in ex- 
celsis Deo^ one of the acolytes rings the small bell till 
the celebrant has finished it ; all the large bells of the 
church are rung, and the organ is played till the singers 
have chanted the whole of the Gloria in excelsis. 

3. At the Sanctus, and at the elevation, the bells are 
not rung. Neither the rubrics of the Missal nor those 
of the Ceremonial prescribe that the clapper should be 
used instead. 

4. The Pax is not given ; consequently, after the Agiius 
Dei the sacred ministers change places, the deacon goes 
to the left of the celebrant, near the Missal, and the sub- 
deacon to the right, to uncover and cover the chalice at 
the proper time, making the usual genuflections. 

5. Whilst the celebrant says the last of -the three 
prayers that precede the Communion, the master of cere- 
monies carries from the table to the altar the chalice, in 



THE MASS. 237 

which the coTisccratecl Host is to be kept ; also the paten, 
pall, veil, and ribbon, prepared for that purpose. 

6. After the celebrant has received the Sacred Blood 
of our Lord, the ministers make a genuflection, change 
places make another genuflection together with the cele- 
brant; who, rising, takes the Host with reverence on 
the paten, and places It horizontally in the chalice, which 
is presented to him by the deacon, who covers It with 
the pall, over which he places the paten, with the inside 
part turned down, and covers it with the veil, fastening 
it with the ribbon near the knot of the chalice. 

T. Then the deacon places it in the middle of the cor- 
poral, and uncovers the pyx ; here all make a genu- 
flection ; the ministers then retire to the two corners of 
the altar, bowing, and with their faces turned towards 
each other; the celebrant turns towards the clergy ; the 
deacon sings the Conjiteor ; after which the celebrant 
says, Miser eatu)\ etc., Indulgentiam^ etc., and then 
turns towards the altar, and makes a genuflection, whilst 
the deacon and sub-deacon kneel on the platform before 
him. 

8. Whilst the deacon sings the Conjiteor, the second 
master of ceremonies and the censer-bearer go to each 
side of the altar, and make a genuflection there ; they 
kneel, turned towards one another, and v/ait till the 
ministers have knelt before the celebrant; they then 
extend the communion-cloth, which the censer-bearer 
must have carried from the table, and hold it with both 
their hands. 

9. The celebrant, holding in his left hand the pyx, and 
in his right one of the small Hosts, turns towards the 
people, and having said Aynus Dei, etc., gives the Com- 
munion to the ministers, who, having received it, make 
a genuflection, go to the side of the celebrant, at the 
same time changing their places — viz., the deacon goes 
to the right, and the sub-deacon to the left; the censer- 
bearer v.ithdraws the communion-cloth, that they may 
have room to pass. Then the clergy receive the Com- 
munion as usual; the priests, however, having on their 
stoles, which must be given tiiem by an acolyte, receive 
it before the others in inferior orders. 



^38 KAUXDAY-THURSDAY. 

10. After the Communion, the celebrant and the min- 
isters turn towards the altar, and make a genuflection. 
Shonld any Hosts remain, tliey are received by the cele- 
brant. The acolytes, who held the communion-cloth, 
make a genuflection, leave the cloth on the table, and 
retire to their places. 

11. The acolytes return to the sacristy with their 
torches, and distribute the candles to the clergy, who 
light them immediately. The censer-bearers prepare 
their censers, and the cross-bearer puts on the amice, alb, 
cincture, and white tunic. One of the acolytes carries 
the caps of the celebrant and ministers to the chapel of 
the repository. 

12. The celebrant receives both ablutions without 
leaving the middle of the altar. The ministers change 
places, and make a genuflection at each side of the cele- 
brant, both before and after they change places. When 
they minister to the celebrant, they no longer kiss his 
hand, nor anything they present to him, or receive from 
him. The sub-deacon wnpes the chalice, and covers 
it ; leaves room for the celebrant w^ien he says Dominus 
vohiscum ; makes a genuflection on the platform, and 
also on the lowest step, when he passes before the Blessed 
Sacrament ; carries the chalice to the table, and goes 
behind the deacon. 

13. The celebrant, having given the chalice to the 
sub-deacon, makes a genuflection, and goes to read the 
communion. He then returns to the middle, kisses 
the altar, makes a genuflection with the deacon, turns 
towards the people from the Gospel side, so as not to 
turn his back to the Blessed Sacrament, and sings 
Dominus vohiscum. Afterwards the celebrant makes a 
genuflection with the ministers, goes to sing tlie prayer, 
then returns to the middle, kisses the altar, genuflects, 
and turns towards the people, as before, and sings 
Dom^inus vohiscum. In the meantime the deacon makes 
another genuflection, turns towards the people, as the 
celebrant also turns : he sings, Ite^ missa est., after vvhicli 
they all make a genuflection. The celebrant says, 
Vlaceat^ etc., and the ministers go to each side of tiie 
platform, and kneel down to receive the blessing. 



THE PROCESSION. 239 

14. The celebrant, after the Placeat^ kisses the altar, 
and having said Benedicat vos omnipotens Dens instead 
of bowing, makes a genuflection, and turns in the same 
manner as for the Dominus vohlscum, and then without 
completing the circle, or repeating the genuflection, he 
turns on his left to the Gospel side, to read the Gospel 
of St. John, without makino^ the usual sio:n of the cross 
on the altar; he makes it, however, upon himself; when 
he pronounces the words, Et Verhum caro^ he makes a 
genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament. 

15. The Gospel of St. John being ended, the ministers 
go up the platform to each side of the celebrant, and 
havinor made a genuflection, go to the bench by the 
shortest w^ay. 

Article III. 

Of the Procession. 

1. When the ministers arrive at the bench, they assist 
the celebrant in taking ofl" the maniple and chasuble, 
and putting on the cope; they also take ofl" their own 
maniples ; after which they go to the lowest step before 
the altar, kneel on both knees on the floor of the 
sanctuary, rise, and kneel on the lowest step, where 
they adore the Blessed Sacrament for a short time ; at a 
signal given by the master of ceremonies, they rise. In- 
cense is then put into the censer by the celebrant, but not 
blessed. The celebrant, whilst the ministers raise his 
cope, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. Everything is 
prepared tor the procession, which is to be made in the 
church, and not out of doors. {Deer. S. B. 6% 6 Au>-., 
1591.) 

2. Whilst the celebrant incenses the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, the master of ceremonies brings the veil from the 
table, which he puts on the shoulders of the celebrant, 
as soon as he has returned the censer to the deacon. 
The censer-bearers go to each side of the ahar, and the 
acolytes, appointed for the purpose, give the caiic^py to 
the priests dressed in surplices, or to others, according to 
custom. 



2-iO MAUNDAY-THUIISDAY. 

3. The celebrant, having put on the veil, goes up to 
the second step, with the ministers at his si!e; there 
the celebrant and the sub-deacon kneel down, and the 
deacon goes upon the platform to the altar, makes a 
genullcotion, takes the chalice, holding it with his right 
liand at the knob, and with his left at the foot, gives it 
to the celebrant, who takes it with his left at the knob, 
and places his right hand over it; then the deacon 
covers it with both extremities of the veil; and having 
made a genuflection, goes to the right of the celebrant, 
who rises with the ministers, and goes up with them 
to the platform ; there they turn towards tLe people, the 
deacon standing at the right, and the sub-deacon at the 
left of the celebrant, and holding up the border of his 
cope. The singers begi.i the Pange Lingua. 

4. The following order is to be observed in the pro- 
cession: lirst, the cross-bearer, sub-dea'on dressed in 
tunic, between the acolytes. All three should go to the 
middle of the sanctuary, near the rails, whilst the cele- 
brant incenses the Blessed Sacrament, and remain 
standing with their faces towards the altar. When 
the Pange lingua is intoned, they turn towards the 
people, and walk with gravity towards the chapel of the 
repository. Next to them, the rest of the clergy, having 
made a genuflection on both knees before the Blessed 
Sacrament, walk two by two, carrying lighted candles 
in their hands. 

5. Lastly, the sacred ministers descend the steps, place 
themselves under the canopy, and are preceded im- 
mediately by the censer-bearers, wdio keep their censers 
in continual and regular motion, and walk after the 
clergy. 

6. During the procession, the celebrant recites, alter- 
nately with the ministers, psalms and hymns, without 
saying Gloria Patri at the end, whilst the chanters con- 
tinue to sing the Pange lingua. 

7. When the cross-bearer and the acolytes arrive at 
the door of the chapel, they retire a little aside, m order 
that the procession may pass, and they remain there 
standing, with their faces turned towards the procession. 



. VESPERS — STUIPPING THE ALTARS. 241 

Those of the clergy who walked next to the cross-bearer 
stop, the first on each side of the cliapel, and those wlio 
follow stop next to them, so that the clergymen wlio 
walked the last are nearest to the altar of the repository; 
having divided into two lines, the celebrant, with the 
sacred ministers, passes between them. The censer- 
bearers, on entering the chapel, keep their censers still. 

8. The celebrant and ministers havina" arrived at the 
altar, ascend the steps; the deacon, kneeling on the plat- 
form, receives the Blessed Sacrament, rises, and after the 
celebrant has adored It, places It on the altar, makes a 
genuflection, and kneels at the right of the celebrant; 
then the singers begin the Tantmn ergo. After the 
Yenereimir cernui has been sung, incense is put into the 
censer, as usual; the deacon, or a priest in surplice and 
stole, places the Blessed Sacrament in the urn, which he 
shuts at the end of the hymn. 

It is prescribed by the Ceremonial of the Bishops (lib. 2, 
c. 23, n. 13), that the deacon, on receiving the chalice, 
as has been said above, should not place it on the altar, 
but in the urn, which he should leave open till the Sacra- 
ment is incensed, etc. 

Article IV. 
Of Vespers , and of the Stripping of the Altars. 

1. When the urn or tabernacle, is shut, some acolytes 
take the candles from the clergy, who, having prayed for 
a short -time, at a signal from the master of ceremonies 
make a genuflection on both knees, and return to the 
sanctuary, the first in dignity walking first, and so on. 

2. When they have come to the sanctuary, they make 
a genuflection in the middle, and return to their places ; 
where, standing, they say in secret the Pater and Ave ; 
then the clergyman first in dignity, begins in a moderate 
tone of voice, the first antiphon of Vespers, and at the 
proper time, the Magnificat and the Miserere; after 
winch he recites the prayer, Respice^ etc. 

3. The clergy having left the chapel of the repository, 
the ministers and the censer-bearers make a genuflection 



242 MAUi^DAY-THUllS.^AY. 

on both knees on the floor of the chapeh and, liaving 
received their cape, go to the sacristy, preceded by the 
censer-bearers and the cross-bearer, witli the acolytes 
carrying the candlesticks with lighted candles. The 
ministers, on each side of the celebrant, raise his cope. 
After they have entered the sacristy, they make a profound 
bow to the cross, take ofi' their white vestments, and the 
celebrant and deacon pnt on violet stoles. 

4. Towards the end of the Psalm, Misivere^ the cele- 
brant, with the ministers walking after each other, and 
having their caps on, go out of the sacristy, preceded by 
the acolytes, and attended by the master of cei-enionies. 
On entering the sanctuary, the ministers walk on each 
side of the celebrant, and, having giver their caps to the 
master of ceremonies, bow to the clergy, make a genu- 
flection to the cross, with the exception of the celebrant, 
who merely bo\ys ; they then go up the platform,, and 
the prayer, Hesjpice^ being ended, the celobrant begins 
in a moderate tone, Diviserunt sibi, which is continued 
by the clergy, together with the l*sahn, Deus, JJeus, 
mens, etc., which they should recite slowly so as to linish 
them when the celeDrant comes back lo the sanctuary, 
after having stripped all the altars. 

5. The celebrant alternately with the ministers recites 
in a low voice the same Psalm, whilst they strip the 
altars. They first take ofi" the upper cloth, then the 
others ; and the acolytes remove the front veil, the altar 
cards, the carpet, and all the other ornaments, leaving 
only the cross and six candlesticks. Aiterwarde, the 
ministers descend the steps, and having made a genu- 
flection with the acolytes, the celebrai-t orly bowing, 
they bow to the clergy, put on their caps, and walk one 
after the other, preceded by the acolytes, and proceed to 
strip the other altars; when they pass before the chapel 
of the repository, they make a genuflection on botu 
knees. 

In churches that have many altars, whilst the cele- 
brant strips the high altar, other priests in surplice and 
stole may strip the others, reciting the same Psahn. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 243 

6. After the stripping of the altars, tlie celebrant 
havinoj returned to ttie hio-h altar, waits there till the 
antiphon, Divtserunt^ is repeated by the clergy; then, 
after the usual genuflection, they go the sacristy. 



CHAPTER YIL 

good friday. 

Article L 

Preparations. 

1. In the sacristy, the black vestments, viz. : two 
folded chasubles for the deacon and sub-deacon ; a chas- 
uble for the celebrant, two stoles, three maniples, albs, 
cinctures, and amices. 

2. Also three albs, with cinctures and amices, as many 
black maniples, and stoles, and three Missals for the 
deacons, who sing the Passion. Besides, two censers 
and incense-boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs; 
the torches and candles for the procession. 

3. The altar must be undressed, having, however, six 
candlesticks, and candles of unbleached wax, and the 
cross covered with a black veil, fastened in such a 
manner as to be easily and gradually taken off.* 

4. On the edge of the platform of the altar, three 
violet cushions, one on each side, and one in the middle, 
at a proper distance. 

5. On the side-table, a plain linen cloth, projecting 
only a little on each side; and on it the cruets in 
their plate, and the finger towel ; a bookstand with the 
Missal for the celebrant; another Missal for the min- 
isters ; a folded altar-cloth, and a large black stole for 
the deacon ; a small vessel with w^ater, covered with a 
purifier for the ablution of the fingers in case the priest 
should touch the Blessed Sacrament ; a black burse, con- 

*A small cross maybe substituted, if the other cannot be r.oadily 
used. 



244 GOOD FRIDAY. 

taining a corporal, and a purifier on it; a black veil for 
the chalice, two candlesticks with brown wax candles 
for the acolj'tes. The candles should not be lighted. 

6. In any convenient place, the processional cross, 
covered with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 

7. At the Epistle side, in the sanctuary, a violet 
carpet, with a long white veil, and a violet cushion, on 
which the crors may be placed for the adoration. Also 
three bookstands for the Passion. The minister's bench 
must be without ornaments. 

8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy, 
the white veil on the side-table. On the altar, the key 
of the urn, or tabernacle; and near the altar, the 
steps, etc. 

Article II. 

From the Yesting of the Ministers to the Uncovering of 
the Cross. 

1. After the ministers are dressed, they proceed with 
the clergy to the sanctuary, as usual, except that the 
acolytes, without candlesticks, and with their hands 
joined, walk before the clergv. When they arrive at the 
altar, they make a genuflection and retire to their usual 
places. The ministers at the foot of the altar give their 
caps to the master of ceremonies, and make a genu- 
flection with the celebrant, without bowing to the clergy ; 
they prostrate themselves, and lay their hands and faces 
on the cushions. 

2. At the same time the clergy kneel down, and bow 
their heads ; the acolytes having knelt and made a short 
prayer, rise, and with the assistance of the second master 
of ceremonies, extend on the altar a cloth, which should 
hang down only very little on each side ; then the aco- 
lytes go to their places; and the master of ceremonies 
places on the Epistle side of the altar the bookstand, 
with the Missal open. 

3. After a few minutes, the signal being given by the 
master of ceremonies, the sacred ministers and all the 
clergy rise. Immediately, the acolytes remove the 



VESTIN'O. 245 

ciisliions; and the celebrant, with the deacon and sub- 
deacon, goes up to tlie altar; the celebrant kisses it; 
the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, and 
they all go to the Epistle side, as for the Introit."^ 

4. At the same time, one of the acolytes receives the 
Missal from the second master of ceremonies, goes, accom- 
panied by him, to the middle of the altar, makes a genu- 
flection, bows to the clergy, goes to the place where the 
Epistle is usually sung, and there sings the lesson in the 
tone of the prophecies. At the beginning of it the 
clergy sit down, and the celebrant reads it with a low 
voice ; the ministers do not answer, Deo gratlas^ at the 
end, but the celebrant immediately reads the Tract. 

5. The acolyte having sung the prophecy, makes a 
genuflection before the altar, bows to the clergy, and 
returns to his place. The singers chant the Tract^ during 
which the celebrant and ministers may sit down. 

6. When the choir sing the words, Operuit coelos, the 
deacon and sub-deacon go, one after tlie other, behind 
the celebrant. In case they be sitting, they should first 
return to the altar by the shortest way. 

7. After the Tracts the celebrant sings Oremus^ and 
the deacon immediately ^\\h]o\n^, Flectamus genica,kiiQQ\- 
ing, with all the clergy, the celebrant excepted; then 
the sub-deacon answers, Levate^ and all rise. 

8. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer, with his 
hands extended, the second acolyte helps the sub deacon 
to take ofl* his chasuble. The latter, having received 
the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, kneels 
before the altar, bows to the clergy, and sings the lesson, 
without the title, in the usual tone of the Epistle. 

9. The lesson being ended, the sub-deacon kneels to 
the altar, bows to the clergy, and without asking the 
blessing from the celebrant, returns the Missal to the 
second master of ceremonies, puts on his chasuble, and 
returns to his place, as at the IntroiL The celebrant 

*Mgr. Martinucci says that the deacon bnd sub-deacon do not gena- 
flect. He prescribes the same t'ur the ceremonies of the Purification, 
Ash- Wednesday, Palm Sunday, and generally during Holy Week. 
The majority of authors, however, prescribe a genuHeciion. 



246 GOOD FRIDAY. 

having read the lesson with the Tracts goes with the 
ministers to sit down. 

10. Whilst the Tract is sung, three book stands are 
prepared for the Passion, and everything is done as 
directed in the fourth chapter, with the following 
exceptions : the celebrant reads all the Passion at the 
Epistle side, even that part which is sung in the tone of 
the Gospel ; saying before it, Munda cor meum^ in the 
same place, but profoundly inclined, and omitting Juhe 
Domne^ etc. 

11. After the Passion, tliose v/ho sang it having 
returned to the sacristy, the sub-deacon goes down tiie 
step before the altar, and the deacon to the Epistle side; 
the latter takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole, 
and carries the Missal to the altar, making the usual 
bows and genuflection. Then, kneeling on the platform, 
lie says, Munda cor meura^ without asking the blessing; 
he rises, takes the Missal, goes down the steps at the 
right of the sub-deacon, and after the usual genu- 
flection and bows, goes to sing the Gospel, at which 
neither the censer nor the candlesticks are used. 

12. The Gospel being sung, the sub-deacon does not 
carry the Missal to the celebrant, but shuts it, and gives 
it to the second master of ceremonies; and all having 
made a genuflection in the middle, the acolytes go to their 
place; the master of ceremonies lays the Missal on the 
table, and the ministers go, one after the other, behind 
the celebrant at the Epistle side. 

13. Then the celebrant begins to sing the first pre- 
amble, with his hands joined; at the end of it, he 
extends and joins them, bowing to the cross, and sings, 
Oremus ; then the deacon adds, Flectamus genua^ and 
the sub-deacon, Levate^ as in n. T. 

The celebrant immediately sings the prayer in the ferial 
tone, with his hands extended. All the following pre- 
ambles and prayers are sung in the same manner. 

14. At the prayer which begins with the words, Om- 
nipotens sempiterne Deus^ qui salvas^ omnes^ etc., the 
acolytes go to spread the violet carpet, covering the 
lowest step of the altar with one end of it, and extend- 



Ul^CGVERING OF THE CROSS. 247 

ing the other on the floor of the sanctuary ; they also 
lay the cushion on the lowest step, and cover the whole 
with the white veil. 

15. All the prayers being ended, the ministers go by 
the sh >rtest way to the bench, where the celebrant and 
the sub-deacon take oiF their chasubles, go to the Epistle 
side and stop before the lowest step, turned towards the 
people. 

16. Then the master of ceremonies and the deacon go 
up to the altar, having first made a genuflection on the 
lowest step. The master of ceremonies takes the cross, 
and gives it to the deacon, who, having received it, 
reverently carries it by the shortest way to the celebrant, 
having the image of the crucifix turned towards himself; 
the celebrant receives it with great respect, holding the 
crucifix turned towards the people. 

Article III. 
From the Uncovering of the Cross to the Procession. 

1. The celebrant, standing on the lowest step at the 
Epistle side, having the sub-deacon at his left, and the 
deacon at his right, turned towards the people, holds the 
cross in his left hand, and with the right uncovers the 
top of it, as far as the cross-piece, assisted, if necessary, 
by the ministers, raises it to the height of his eyes, and, 
with a grave and moderate voice, sings, Eoce lignum 
Crucis, from the book, which one of the acolytes holds 
open before him. 

2. At these words, the clergy, having uncovered their 
heads, rise; the celebrant, with the ministers and the 
acolytes, continues to sing the whole anthem. At the 
end of it, the choir and the clergy all kneel down and 
answer, Venite adoremus. The ministers also and all 
the others, the celebrant excepted, kneel at the same 
time. 

3. The words Venite adoremus being sung, the cele- 
brant and the ministers ascend in the same order as before 
to the platform, and stop at the Epistle side. The cele- 
brant uncovers the right arm and the head of the 



248 GOOD FEIDAY. 

crucifix, and, raising his voice one tone higher than the 
first time, sings, Ecce lignum^ and everything is done as 
before. 

4. Then the celebrant and the ministers go to the 
middle of the altar, in the same order ; there he uncovers 
the whole cross, giving the veil to the sub-deacon, who 
gives it to one of the acolytes, by whom it is placed on 
the side-table; afterwards, raising his voice one tone 
higher, he sings, Ecce lig7ium^ and the rest is done as 
above. 

5. The clergy having risen, the celebrant, accom- 
panied by the master of ceremonies, who raises his vest- 
ments as he goes up or down, carries the cross, without 
making any bow, to the place prepared for it, and kneel- 
ing, puts it on the cushion and veil ; then rises, makes a 
genuflection, and goes to the bench. 

6. Whilst the celebrant kneels, the clergy rise, and the 
ministers, making a genuflection on the platform towards 
the cross, go by the shortest way to the bench. The 
second acolyte uncovers the processional cross, and 
another acolyte uncovers the other crosses that are in the 
church and in the sacristy, but not the images. 

7. When the celebrant and ministers arrive at the 
bench, they take off their maniples and their shoes. The 
ministers remain at the bench, and the celebrant, attended 
by the master of ceremonies, goes to venerate* the cross. 

8. Towards the extremity of the sanctuary, the cele- 
brant kneels before the cross, and makes a short prayer; 
then rises, and about the middle of the sanctuary kneels 
again, and prays in the same manner; he does the same 
for the third time at the foot of the cross, w^hich he hum- 
bly kisses. Lastly, he rises, makes a genuflection to 
the cross, returns by the shortest way to the bench, 
puts on his shoes, with the assistance of the acolytes, and, 
assisted by the ministers, puts on his chasuble and 
maniple; then he sits down, and puts on his cap. 

9. The ministers bow to the celebrant, and, attended 

* The technical term is adoration; but to prevent misconception, 
we use the one less likely to be misinterpreted. 



UNCOVER TNG OF THE CROSS. 249 

by the second master of ceremonies, go to venerate the 
cross, observinfy what has been said in regard to the cele- 
brant, n. 8. The deacon kisses the cross before the sub- 
deacon. 

10. After the ministers, the clergy go, two by two, first 
the priests, then those in inferior orders; and lastly, the 
laymen, if custom allows them to enter the sanctuary. 

Otherwise, a priest, with a surplice and a black stole, 
carries another Ciucitix to some other place for the vene- 
ration of the people, laying it on the cushion, as above, 
and the same priest removes it, if it be in the way of the 
procession. 

Another method might be followed where the congre- 
gation is very numerous, viz., that one or two clergymen, 
in surplice and stole, should present the crucifix to be 
kissed at the railing. 

11. During the whole time of the veneration of the 
cross, the choir sings the Improjperia. It is not necessary 
to continue them after it, nor to sing them all. 

12. The ministers having returned to the bench, put 
on their shoes and maniples; the sub-deaeon resumes 
also his chasuble, and both sit down at the side of the 
celebrant. Then one of the acolytes brings the Missal 
from the table, bows to the celebrant, opens it at the 
place where the Imjproperia are found, and holds it so 
that the celebrant and the ministers may read them 
alternately. 

13. When the acolytes liave venerated the cross, the 
first of them lights the candles on the table and on the 
altar, and the second goes to hold the Missal before the 
ministers in the place of the censer-bearer, till they have 
finished the Improjperia ; then he shuts it, bows to the 
celebrant, puts it on the table, and returns to his place. 
The censer-bearers having venerated the cross, the second 
of them goes to assist the cross-bearer to put on the 
amice, alb, cincture, and chasuble, and the first prepares 
the censers. 

If there be no snb-deacon besides the one that ministers 
to the celebrant, any acolyte dressed in surplice may 
carry the cross. 



250 GOOD FRIDAY. 

14. Towards the end of the veneration, the deacon 
rises, bows to the celebrant, and carries to tlie altar the 
burse with the corporal and {)urifier. When he has 
reached the platform he kneels to the cross, unfolds the 
corporal as usual, and places the purifier near it, at the 
Epistle side. At the same time the master of cere- 
monies carries the Missal with its stand to the Gospel 
side, kneeling to the cross. The deacon having unfolded 
the corporal, makes a genuflection to the cross, and 
returns by the shortest way to the right of the celebrant, 
sits down and covers his head. 

15. After the veneration, the deacon, invited by the 
master of ceremonies, takes off his cap, rises, and 
attended by the master of ceremonies, goes to the place 
in which the cross was laid, makes a genu flection, takes 
it np with both his hands, and assisted by the master of 
ceremonies, carries it to the altar, and places it between 
the candlesticks, makes a genuflection, and returns to 
the side of the celebrant. At the same time the cele- 
brant, the sub deacon, and all the clergy kneel down at 
their places. 

16. Then the celebrant, ministers, and clergy rise, and 
sit down. In the meanwhile an acolyte removes the 
veil, cushion, and carpet. From this time until N"one, of 
the following days, the usual bows are omitted. {S. R. (7., 
12 Sept., 1857.) 

Article IY. 

Of the Procession, 

1. The cross being placed on the altar by the deacon, 
the censer-bearers go to the middle of the sanctuary, fol- 
lowed by the cross-bearer, who walks between the aco- 
lytes with the candlesticks; then they all proceed to the 
repository by the shortest way; the clergy follow them, 
hrst those in inferior orders, then the priests, lastly the 
ministers, one after the other, with their hands joined 
and their caps on, all making a genuflection be'bre 
the cross. 

2. On arriving at the repository, the censer-bearers 



THE PROCESSION". 251 

make a genuflection in tlie middle on both knees, and 
retire to the Epistle side; the cross-bearer and the f*co- 
lytes, having first genuflected, stop at the entrance of 
the chapel on the Epistle side, as on preceding day; all 
the others, after making a genuflection on both knees, 
place themselves as on preceding day. 

3. The sacred ministers, at the entrance of the reposi- 
tory, give their caps to the master of ceremon-es, who 
gives them to an acolyte to carry to the sanctuary, and 
place them on the bench of the ministers. Then the 
deacon passes to the right, and the sub-deacon to the 
left of the celebrant. When they arrive before the altar, 
they make a genuflection on both knees, rise, kneel on 
the lowest step of the altar, and pray for a few moments ; 
in the meantime candles are distributed to the clergy, 
who light them. 

4. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, 
the deacon rises, makes a genuflection, and goes to open 
the urn, or tabernacle, and having made another genu- 
flection, returns to the right of the celebrant, who puts 
incense in both censers without blessing, and kneeling with 
the ministers, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. The canopy 
is given to be carried either to priests dressed in surplice, 
or to other persons, according to custom. 

5. After the incensing of the Blessed Sacrament, the 
master of ceremonies puts the veil on the shoulders of 
the celebrant ; the deacon takes the Blessed Sacrament 
from the urn, and gives it to the celebrant, as on the day 
before, who, having covered it with the lower parts of 
the veil, turns towards the people, having the deacon 
on his right and the sub-deacon on his left hand. The 
singers, still kneeling, intone Vexilla Regis^ etc. The 
procession moves off; first the cross-bearer wdth the aco- 
lytes, then the others, who make a genuflection as the 
day before. When they are arrived at the sanctuary, 
the cross-bearer leaves the cross at the Epistle side, 
makes a genuflection, and goes to the sacristy to take off 
ttie sacred vestments. The clerg}', on arriving at the 
sanctuary, go to their place, and remain there kneeling. 

6. The sacred ministers having arrived at the high 



252 GOOD FRIDAY. 

altar, the deacon receives the Blessed Sacrament from 
the celebrant, and having placed it on the corporal, 
nnties the ribbon, and extends the veil, as at the begin- 
ning ot Mass; then be makes a genuflection, and returns 
to the right of the celebrant, from whose shoulders the 
veil should have been removed in the meantime by the 
sub deacon. Incense is put into the censer, and the 
Blessed Sacrament should be incensed as nsual. 

T. The clergyman who carried the canopy leave it aside, 
take candles, and kneel down before the altar, forming a 
semi-circle, till after the Communion. If the canopy is car- 
ried by laymen, they remain kneeling at the rails, hold- 
ing lighted candles in their hands. 

8. The censer bearer.-, after the incensing, make a 
genuflection on both knees in the middle, and the second 
of them goes to the sacristy; the first remains at the 
Epistle side. 

Article Y. 
Of the remaining part of the Office. 

1. When the celebrant has incensed the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, he goes up to the altar with the ministers. They 
make a genuflection, bending one knee ; the deacon 
takes the veil from the chalice, and gives it to the master 
of ceremonies; he removes also the paten and the pall 
from the chalice. Then he takes the paten w;th his 
right hand, raises it a little from the corporal, and the 
celebrant, taking the chalice, lets the consecrated Host 
fall gently on the paten, taking care not to touch It; 
but should he happen to do so, he washes his fingers in 
the small vase prepared for this purpose, and the deacon 
presents to him the purifier. Then the celebrant receives 
with both his hands the paten from the deacon who 
kisses neither it nor the celebrant's hand ; and without 
making any cross, or saying anything, the celebrant 
places the Host on the corporal, laying the paten also on 
the corporal at the Epistle side. 

2. The Host being placed on the corporal, the sub- 
deacon makes a genuflection, goes to the right of the 



KEMAIXIXQ PART OF THE OFFICE. 253 

deacon, makes another genullection, and, receiving the 
cruets from an acolyte, takes that which contains wine, 
and gives it to the deacon, wlio puts some of the wine 
into tiie chalice, taking care not to place it on the altar, 
nor to wipe it with the purifier. Then the sub-deacon 
puts a little water into the chalice, w^ithout asking the 
blessing of the celebrant, who does not give it, nor say 
the prayer, Deus qui humanoe, etc. This done, the 
acolyte carries back the cruets to the side-table; the sub- 
deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, making the 
usual genuflections, and the deacon presents the chalice, 
without kissing it, to the celebrant, who, without making 
any cross, or saying any prayer, places it on the corporal, 
and it is covered with the pall by the deacon. 

3. Then the censer-bearer, havino; made a s^enuflection 
below the steps, goes to the platform, and the incense is 
put into the censer as usual, but without blessing or kiss- 
ing the censer, or the hand of the celebrant. Tiie sacred 
oblations are incensed as usual, with the words, In- 
censum istud ; likewise, the cross and the altar, with 
the customary genuflections, and with the words, Dlriga- 
tur Domine^ etc., Accendat, etc. At the Epistle corner the 
deacon receives the censer from the celebrant, and gives 
it to the censer-bearer, who carries it to the sacristy, as 
it is not used again.* 

4. The celebrant, having given the censer to the 
deacon, descends one step on the Epistle side, turned 
towards the people, and washes his hands, the sub-deacon 
pouring the water, and the deacon presenting him the 
towel; the psalm, Lavabo^ is not said; the celebrant 
and the ministers go to the middle of the altar, and the 
acolytes carry everything back to the side-table. 

5. The celebrant and ministers arriving at the middle, 
make a genuflection; the deacon goes to the left of the 
celebrant, near the Missal, and the celebrant, placing his 
hands joined on the altar, and bowing, says with a low 
but audible voice the prayer. In sjpiritu humilitatis, etc. 
He then kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and turn- 

* The deacon does not incense the celebrant. 

82 



251: GOOD FRIDAY. 

ing his face towards the people, and his ba(;k to the 
Gospel side, says, Orate fratres ; he continues what 
follows in a low voice, and without going round, returns 
to the middle. The ministers do not answer, Sus- 
cijpiat^ etc. 

6. The celebrant having said the Orate fratres^ etc., 
sings, in a ferial tone, Oremus : Prmceptis^ salutaribus 
moniti^ with his hands joined, and the Pater noster with 
his hands extended. At the beginning of the Pater^ 
the deacon makes a genuflection, and goes behind the 
celebrant. The master of ceremonies takes his place by 
the Missal. 

1. At the end of the Pater noster^ the choir answers, 
Sed libera nos a malo, and the celebrant says, in a low 
voice, Amen^ continuing to hold his hands extended, and 
not signing himself with the paten. Then he subjoins 
in the same tone of voice, Libera nos quoesumus Domine^ 
etc. After which, the choir answers. Amen. 

8. The celebrant makes a genuflection, places the 
paten under the Host, and holding with his left hand 
the paten on the altar, with his right raises the Host, so 
that it may be seen by all; without, however, taking it 
out of the limits of the corporaL In the meanwhile the 
ministers kneel on the platform; they do not raise the 
lower part of the celebrant's chasuble ; the Blessed Sacra- 
ment is not incensed. The clapper is not sounded.^ 

9. Whilst the celebrant lays the Host on the paten, the 
ministers rise, go to his side, and with him make a genu- 
flection. Then the deacon uncovers the chalice, the cele- 
brant takes the Host, divides It as usual into three parts, 
without making the sign of the cross, or saying anything, 
and places the smallest part in the chalice. 

10. The deacon having covered the chalice, the cele- 
brant, with the ministers, makes a genuflection. The 
ministers change places, and make another genuflection. 
Then the celebrant, omitting the Agnus Dei and the 
first two prayers before the Communion, says only the 
third, which begins, Percejptio Corporis^ etc., holding his 

*See Maunday- Thursday, Art. II, No. 3, p. 236. 



REMAINING PART OF IHE OFFICE. 255 

hands joined on the altar; when lie has finished the 
prayer, he makes a <i^ennflection, with the ministers, 
and rising says, Panem coelestem^ then takes the paten 
and Host, and connnunicates, having previously said, as 
usual, Domine^ non sum dignns. 

11. After the Communion of the Sacred Body, the sub- 
deacon uncovers the chalice, the celebrant and ministers 
make a genuflection, the fragments are collected and put 
into the chalice by the celebrant, who, without saying 
anything, or making the sign of the cross, consumes the 
wine with the consecrated ir*article, the ministers in the 
meantime bowing profoundly. 

12. One of the acolytes carries the cruets to the altar; 
the sub-deacon gives the wine and water to the celebrant, 
who takes the usual ablutions without saying anything. 
In the meantime the clergy sit down, and put out their 
candles. 

13. After the ablution, the ministers change places, 
making a genuflection as they pass by the middle; 
the sub-deacon goes to the Missal, and the deacon to the 
side-table ; where, having taken off" the large stole, and 
put on the folded chasuble, he returns to the platform 
at the right of the celebrant; who, having taken the 
hist ablution, says in the middle, with a low voice, with 
his head inclined, and with his hands joined before iiis 
breast, the prayer, Quod ore sumpsirrius. The sub- 
deacon, as usual, wipes the chalice, and covers it with 
the veil, which one of the acolytes must have brought 
to the altar, and carries it to the side-table, making a 
genuflection to the cross as he passes by the middle; 
then he returns to the left of the celebrant, and closes 
the Missal. 

li. The signal being given by the master of cere- 
monies, the celebrant and the ministers bow to the cross, 
go down to the foot of the altar, make a genuflection, 
together w^ith the master ot ceremonies, and the acolytes, 
who do not carry the candlesticks; and, having put 
on their caps, they go to the sacristy, where they take 
ofl* the sacred vestments. 

15. The sacred ministers having left the sanctuary, 



256 HOLY SATURDAY. 

Yespers are recited as yesterday. In the meantime, the 
censer-bearers remove irom the altar the book-stand with 
the Missal, and the covering, so that it be left quite bare, 
with no other ornament than the cross and the six candle- 
sticks. They carry everything to the sacristy. 

16. After Yespers, the clergy make a genuflection to 
the cross, and return to the sacristy. Then the candles 
on the altar are extinguished. 



CHAPTEE YIIL 

HOLY SATUEDAY. 

Article I. 

Things to he Prepared, 

1 At a convenient and proper time, the church is 
adorned with white and precious ornaments. The high 
altar is prepared as on the greatest solemnities. Tlie 
relic-cases may be placed between the candlesticks, when 
the ministers put on white vestments. A white altar- 
veil should be under another of violet color, which is to 
be removed only before the beginning of Mass; at that 
time, also, the carpet should be pla-^ed on the platform 
and steps of the altar, which, during the tirst part of the 
sacred ofiice, should be left bare. 

2. The lamps of the church should be so prepared as 
to be easily lighted at the proper time. The images of 
the church should be covered. The tabernacle should 
have a white veil under another of violet color, which 
latter ought to be removed when the violet antipendium 
is taken away from the front of the altar. 

3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments of violet color 
for the ministers, viz., a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
amice for the celebrant; two folded chasubles, with tw^o 



THI^-GS TO BE PREPARED. 257 

maniples, a stole, two cinctures, albs, and amices for the 
ministers. Under the same, or in anj^ other place, tlie 
nsual white vestments for the celebrant and the ministers. 
The ce:iser with the incense-boat, the vase for the holy 
water with the sprinkle, a plate with hve large grains of 
incense, the processional cross, the candlesticks, with 
white candles for the acolytes. 

4. At the baptismal font, everything should be cleaned ; 
any water remaining there ought to be put into the 
piscina. A table is to be placed near it, and covered 
w^ith a linen cloth ; on it the vessels containing the oil of 
catechumens, and the sacred chrism in a plate; a vessel 
with water, and a basin; a towel on a plate; sonie slices 
of bread and lemon, likewise on a plate; some cotton on 
another plate ; an empty vessel for holy water, with the 
sprinkle. 

If it is customary to distribute among the people the 
water blessed on this day, a large vessel might be pre- 
pared before the baptismal font, and filled with water, 
which is, in that case, blessed ; before the oils are mixed 
with the water, the baptismal font is filled with part of 
the water blessed in the large vessel, and then the oils 
are put into the water contained in the baptismal font, 
not into that contained in the large vessel. Some small 
vessels ought to be prepared to take the water from the 
large vessel, to put it into the font. 

5. The bench of the ministers must be adorned as on 
the greatest solemnities, and covered with a violet cloth, 
which is removed when the ministers change their vest- 
ments. On this second cloth is to be placed the violet 
chasuble and maniple for the celebrant, also another 
violet maniple for the deacon, and a cap for the sub- 
deacon. 

6. At the Gospel side, a book-stand must be prepared, 
covered with a white veil, and a cushion placed on it 
for the JExultet. On the same side should be a large 
candlestick for the Paschal candle, and on it the Paschal 
candle* itself; als3 a stand for the triple candle, and, 

* See C(Br. Ep. lib. II, Gap. 27, No. 1. 



258 HOLT SATURDAY. 

on the Epistle side, a book-stand, uncovered, for the 
prophecies. 

7. On the side-table, everything necessary for Hiojh 
Mass ; the burse and veil of the chalice, and over them 
the white veil, which must be covered with another 
violet veil. I^ear the table, three violet cushions for the 
ministers during the litany. 

8. In the porch, or if the church have none, in any 
other convenient place, a table covered with a white 
linen cloth, and on it a white dalmatic, stole, and maniple 
for the deacon, a violet maniple for the sub-deacon, a 
Missal, a plate containing a small candle, and matches 
to light it. 

9. A large chafing-pan, with pieces of dry wood so 
arranged that fire may be easily lighted, which must be 
done before the ceremony, and be struck from a flint; 
near it, tongs to put the new fire into the censer. 

10. Near the table, the triple candle on its rod, adorned 
with flowers, at the place the stock of the candle is con- 
nected with the rod. The candle is to be made so as to 
have one common stock, out of which proceed three 
branches at the same distance from each other. 

Article II. 

From the Benediction of the New Fire to the Exidtet. 

1. The sacred ministers being vested as in chap, iv, 
with this difference only, that they do not wear their 
maniples, and the signal being given by the master of 
ceremonies, the sub-deacon takes the processional cross, 
and the procession for the benediction of the new fire is 
arranged in the following order : first, three acolytes ; 
the one who is in the middle carries the vessel with 
holy water, and the sprinkle; the one at the right 
carries the plate witli the five grains of incense, and the 
one at the left carries the censer without fire, and the 
boat with incense, and the small spoon within it. The 
sub-deacon follows, carrying the cross; after him the 
clergy, two by two; lastly, the celebrant, with the 
deacon at his left. The latter, with all the clergy, must 



BEl!q"EDICTIOX OF THE NEW FIIIE. 259 

have tlieir lieads uncovered. As tlicj pass before tlie 
cross of the high altar, they all make a genuilection, 
with the exception of the cross-bearer and the celebrant; 
the latter only bows to the cross. 

2. When the procession arrives at the porch, the snb- 
deacon places himself by the table, turning his back to 
the door, or to the walls of the church, holding the croPS, 
with the image of the crucifix turned towards the cele- 
brant. The clergy divide into two lines, on each side 
of the sub-deacon, so that the highest in dignity amongst 
them may be nearest to the celebrant, who places himself 
opposite the cross, with the deacon at his right. The 
deacon receives the cap from the celebrant, and assists 
him in raising the border of his cope when he makes 
the sign of the cross, or uses the sprinkle or the censer, 
and turning the leaves of the book. 

3. The first acolyte having placed on the table the 
vase with holy water, takes the Missal, and holds it 
open before the celebrant. The two other acolytes stand 
at the right of the deacon, but a little behind him, and 
the master of ceremonies at the left of the celebrant. 

4. All being so arranged, the celebrant, with his hands 
joined, says, in a ferial tone, Dominus vohlscum^ and the 
three prayers that follow, for the benediction of the new 
fire, which is to be made before any other. [Deer. S. B. 
C, 12th April, 1755.) At the end of each prayer the 
clergy answer, Amen. 

5. Then the acolyte who holds the plate with the 
grains of incense comes before the celebrant, who says 
the fourth prayer for the blessing of the five grains of 
incense; and in the meanwhile the censer-bearer puts 
some of the new fire into the censer, and returns to his 
place. 

6. After the fourth prayer, the first acolyte shuts the 
book, and having placed it on the table, takes the vase 
with holy water, and joins the other acolytes. The 
celebrant puts incense as usual into the censer, and 
blesses it, saying. Ah ilo henedicarls, etc. Then the 
deacon, having received from the first acolyte the 



260 HOLY SATURDAY. 

sprinkle, gives it to the celebrant; the celebrant thrice 
sprinkles, first the five grains of incense, tlien the fire, 
sajing, Asperges m^?, without the Psalin and Gloria 
Patri^ and having received the censer, incenses likewise, 
first the five grains, then the fire. 

7. After the incensing, the first acolyte leaves the hoi j- 
water vase on the table, and with one of the matches 
prepared for that purpose lights the small candle froin 
the new fire; the second acolyte, laying the plate with 
the five grains of incense on the table, together with 
the second master of ceremonies, assists the deacon to 
take ofi" his violet vestments, and put on the white, and 
carries the maniple to the sub-deacon, who puts it on. 
Then he takes again the plate with the five grains, and 
returns to the right of the censer-bearer. 

8. The deacon having put on the white vestments, 
goes to the right of the celebrant, to assist at the bless- 
ing of the incense fcr the procession and the Exultet^ 
which is performed as usual. Then he takes the triple 
candle with both his hands, and at a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, the procession advances in the 
following order: 

9. First the censer-bearer, slowly moving his censer, 
and at his right the second acolyte, who carries the five 
grains of incense; the sub deacon follows with the cross; 
then the clergy, two by two ; after them the deacon, car- 
rying the triple candle, having at his left the first aco- 
lyte, with the lighted candle; last of all, the celebrant, 
with his hands joined, and near him the master of cere- 
monies; all walk with their heads uncovered, the cele- 
brant alone excepted. 

10. Daring the procession, an acolyte carries the cap 
and the violet vestments of the deacon to the bench of 
the ministers, and the others things to the sacristy. 

11. As the celebrant enters the church, the second 
master of ceremonies gives a signal to the clergy to stop; 
and the deacon bends the rod of the triple candle 
towards the first acolyte, who lights one of the three 
candies ; then the deacon raises the rod, and bends one 



THE EXULTET. 261 

knee, and all tlie cler^'j do tlie same, tlie cross-bearer 
excepted ; tb.e celebrant uncovers liis head before he 
makes a genuflection. The deacon sings Lumen Christi, 
in puch a tone of voice that it may be raised a tone 
higher twice, and the clergy answer, Deo gratias. Then 
they all rise, and the procession continues to advance. 
IV hen they reach the middle of the church, the same 
ceremony is again performed; and it is repeated the 
third time before the steps of the altar. 

12. After the Deo gratias has been answered for the 
third time by the clergy, they all go to their })laces. On 
arriving before the altar, the censer-bearer stops at the 
Gospel side, the acolyte, with the grains of incense, at 
the Epistle side, and tlie cross-bearer at the right of the 
censer-bearer. The first acolyte, having extinguished 
the small candle, receives the triple candle Irom the 
deacon, and places himself at the left of the second aco- 
lyte; and the deacon, retiring a little tow^ards the Gospel 
side, and turning from his right side, makes room for 
the celebrant, who go'3s up to the platform., and stands 
at the Epistle corner. 

Article III. 

From the Exultet to tlie Prophecies. 

1. The celebrant, on arriving at the Epistle side, turns 
towards the altar; the second master of ceremonies 
gives the Missal to the deacon, w^lio, kneeling on the 
platform, without saying Munda cor meum, asks as 
usual the blessing of the celebrant, who gives it, saying 
as usual, Dornine sit in corde tuo^ etc., but instead of 
saying Fvangelium simm, says, Siium paschale prcBCO- 
nium, making the usual sign of the cross, but without 
giving his hand to be kissed. 

2. The deacon having received the blessing, goes down 
to the foot of the altar, between the cross-bearer and 
the acolyte who carries the triple candle, where, having 
made a genuflection with the acolytes (the cross- 
bearer should not make it}, and bowed to the clergy, 
they go, one after the other, to the place prepared at 



262 HOLY SATURDAY. 

tlie Gospel side, and place themselves in the follow- 
ing^ order : the deacon in the middle, having at his right 
the sub-deacon, who turns the image of the crucifix 
towards the celebrant, and the censer bearer ; and at 
his left hand having the acolyte with the triple candle, 
and the acolyte with the grains of incense. The master 
of ceremonies places himself behind the deacon, who, 
with all the others, are turned towards the book. 

3. When they have arrived at the book-stand, and 
placed themselves in the order already mentioned, the 
deacon lays the book upon it, and opens it ; then, without 
making the sign of the cross on himself, and without 
saying Dominies vobisciim, he incenses it as for the 
Gospel, and, with his hands joined, he sings the Exultet ; 
during which the clergy remain standing, as also the 
celebrant, who turns towards the deacon. 

4. The deacon having said the words, Citrvat iinperia^ 
stops, the clergy sit down, but not the celebrant, and 
the acolyte who holds the plate with the live grains 
approaches the deacon, who, assisted by the master 
of ceremonies, goes with them to place the live 
grains in the Paschal candle, in the form of a cross, in 
this order, 1 which being done, thoy return to their 
place, and 4 2 5 the clergy rise. The acolyte places 
the plate in 3 which were the five grains on the 
side-table, and takes a small candle not lighted. 

5. The deacon having returned to the Missal, con- 
tinues the Exultet^ and having sung the words Rutilans 
ignis accendit^ the clergy sit down ; ho goes with the aco- 
lyte that carries the triple candle, to light the Paschal 
candle with one of them, and returns to continue the 
Exultet. The clergy rise. 

6. The acolyte places the triple candle on the stand 
prepared for it near the altar. 

7. The deacon having sung the words. Apis mater 
eduxit, stops awhile, and the first acolyte lights his small 
candle, either from the Paschal candle or from the triple 
candle, and lights the lamps of the sanctuary ; the deacon 
continues the Exultet^ and bows at the name of the Pope. 

8. After the Exultet^ the clergy sit down ; the sub- 



THE PROPHECIES. 2G3 

deacon leaves the cross at its place, the deacon imme- 
diately shuts tlie Missal, and leaves it on the stand, and 
both, with tlieir liands joined, make a genuflection in the 
middle, and go to the bench — the celebrant also going 
thither at the satne time; the latter, assisted by the sub- 
deacon, takes off his cope, and puts on the violet maniple 
and chasuble. 

9. The deacon, assisted by the first acolyte, takes off 
his white vestments, and puts on violet; then the cele- 
brant and the ministers go by the shortest way to the 
Epistle side, as for the Introlt. The second master of 
ceremonies prepares, in the middle of the sanctuary, a 
book-stand without any covering, and a Missal on it for 
the prophecies. 

Article 1Y. 

From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the Bap- 
tisinal Font, 

1. When the ministers have arrived at the Epistle side, 
the second master of ceremonies invites the clergyman 
who is to sing the first prophecy, as in chapter v, except 
that, before he leaves the book stand with the clergyman, 
he waits till the deacon has said, Flectamus genua^ 
(when there is no Tract)^ then they make a genuflection, 
with all the clergy, and rise at the word Levate, Whilst 
the celebrant sings the prayer, the second master of cere- 
monies invites him who is to sing the second prophecy, 
doing as has been already said ; and so likewise for all the 
other prophecies. 

2. The clergy sit down whilst the prophecies are sung, 
rise at the prayers ; the celebrant reads the prophecies 
in a low voice, and sings the prayers in a ferial tone, 
with his hands extended, the ministers standing behind 
him, one after the other; and the deacon, immediately 
After the celebrant has said, Oremus^ sings, Flectamus 
genua^ and the sub-deacon, Levate. After the prayers, 
the ministers go up near the celebrant, as for the Introlt. 

3. After the last prophecy and prayer, the second 
master of ceremonies removes from the middle of the 



264 HOLY SATUllDAY. 

sanctuary tlie book-stand with the Missal, and the cele- 
brant, with the ministers, goes by the shortest way to the 
bench, where the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, 
takes off his maniple and chasnble, and pnts on the 
cope; and the ministers take off their maniples. 

Akticle y. 

From the Benediction of the Baptismal Font to the 
beginning of Mass.^ 

1. The first acolyte, after the celebrant has put on his 
cope, takes the Paschal candle from its candlestick, and 
goes with it to the middle of the sanctuary ; likewise the 
sub-deacon takes the cross, and places himself imtne- 
diatelybefore the first acolyte; the celebrant, with the 
deacon on his left, goes before the steps of the altar, in 
the middle. At a signal given by the master of cere- 
monies, the first acolyte makes a genuflection, turns 
towards tlie people, and walks slowly to the baptismal 
font; the sub-deacon carrying the cross, without 
making the genuflection, follows him ; then the singers; 
and the rest of the clergy niake a genuflectioii 
in the middle, and follow them; last of all, the cele- 
brant, with his liGad covered, and the deacon at his left, 
accompanied by the master of ceremonies. On the 
way, the tract, Siciit cervus, is sung by the choir. 
Arrived at the font, the cross-bearer stops at one side, 
near the door or entry, the first acolyte at his left; the 
clergy divide into two lines, those in inferior orders 
remaining near the door, and those in higher dignity 
near the font. Before the celebrant enters, he stops, 
takes off his cap, and the second acolyte bringing and 
holding before him the Missal, he says in a ferial tone, 
Borninus vohlscum; etc., and the Ibllow^ng prayer. Then 
he goes, with the deacon at his left, to the font, and 
places himself so as to be turned towards the cross, 
and the clergy. The second acolyte follows him w^ith 
the Missal, and having opened it, the celebrant begins 

* This arlicle has been added by the translator. 



BEXEDICTIOX OF THE BAPTISMAL FOXT. 2G5 

the blessing of the font, saying, in a ferial tone, Dominus 
vohisciim^ with the following prayers; in concluding it, 
lie sings. Per omnia scecida^ in the tone of the ferial 
preface, with what follows; after the words, Gratiam 
de Spiritu Sancto, the celebrant divides the water in 
form of a cross, the deacon holding up the side of his 
cope, and oifering him the towel, which one of the 
acolytes should have brought on a plate. 

2. After the words, Injiciendo corriimjpat^ the cele- 
brant touches the water w^ith his right hand, which he 
afterwards wipes, as before. At the words Per Dexun jJ* 
vivinn^ Per Dexun ^i^ verum^ Per Peum ^ sanctum^ he 
makes the sign of the cross three times on the water. 
After the words Sujper te ferebatiir^ he divides the water 
with his hand, and throws some of it out, towards the 
four parts of the world, in this form, 1 after the words 
^c7^^^/^1^<§(3'(^6;^^7'a, he breathes thrice 3 4 upon the water, 
in the form of a crosss. At the 2 words Menti- 
hu8 efficaces, the first acolyte carries the Paschal candle 
to tiie deacon, that he may give it to the celebrant, 
Avho dips it into the water at three different times, but 
each successive time he dips it deeper, and sings, one 
tone higher, the words Descendat in hanc. Then 
breathing thrice upon the water in this form ^ he goes 
on with the Preface. After the words Fo&cundet effectu^ 
the Paschal candle is taken out of the water, wiped, 
and given back to the first acolyte, who goes to his 
place near the cross-bearer. The celebrant continues 
what follows in the tone of the Preface, as far as the 
words Per Pmninura, exclusively, which, with the fol- 
lowing words, he only recites; the minister answers, 
Amen. Then the clergyman who is first in dignity, 
having first put on a violet stole, takes the sprinkle 
which has been dipped in the blessed water and hands 
it to the celebrant, who first sprinkles himself, then the 
clergyman from whom he received the sprinkle, and lastly 
the deacon and sub-deacon ; then he hands the sprinkle to 
the clergyman, who afterwards goes and sprinkles the 
people; whilst this is being done the celebrant and min- 



266 HOLY SATURDAY. 

isters may sit down. If the water is blessed in another 
vessel, the font is filled with it; but if it is blessed in 
the font, some of it is taken out to satisfy the devotion 
of the people, and to bless their houses and other places. 

3. After this, the celebrant receives from the deacon 
the oil of the catechumens, and pours some of it into 
the baptismal font, in form of a cross, saying, Sanctificetur^ 
etc. The ministers answer, Ame?i, Then he pours the 
chrism into it, in the same manner, saying, Infusio, etc.; 
the ministers answering also, Amen. Lastly, he pours 
the oil and chrism both together into the water, in the 
form of a cross, saying, Commixtio, etc. ; and the min- 
isters answer, A^nen. Then he mingles the oil with 
the water, and with his hand spreads it all over tlie font. 
This done, two acolytes bring everything necessary to 
wash the hands, also the slices of bread and lemon pre- 
pared on a plate; the celebrant, assisted by the deacon, 
washes and wipes his hands. 

4. If any are to be baptized, they are solemnly 
baptized by the celebrant, as in tlie ritual. After tlie 
blessing of the font, they return to the high altar in 
the same order in which they came. Arrived there, the 
first acolyte makes a genuflection, replaces the Paschal 
candle on its candle-stick, and goes to the side-table, 
near which the cross- bearer leaves the cross, and goes to 
the bench. The clergy, having made a genuflection in 
the middle, go to their places and sit down. The cele- 
brant having bowed, and the deacon having made a 
gLnuflection, go to the bench, where the celebrant, 
assisted by the ministers, takes oflf his cope, who also 
take ofi" their chasubles, and, having bowed to the clergy, 
go to the altar. In the meanwhile, the acolytes should 
place on the border of the platform three violet cushions 
at equal distance; the celebrant and the ministers, 
having made the usual reverence to the cross, prostrate 
themselves, laying their hands and their heads on them. 
The clergy kneel down. The acolytes carry the chas- 
ubles to the sacristy. 

5. Two chanters, kneeling before two stools, behind 
the ministers, in the middle of the choir, begin to sing 



THE MASS. 267 

tlie Litany of tlie Saints, and the clergy repeat the same 
words snng by the chanters. The master of ceremonies 
and acolytes kneel by the steps of the altar. 

6. Whilst the chanters sing Peccatores^ which, with 
the rest of tlie Litany, onght to be sung very sluwly, to 
give time to prepare what is necessarj^ tlie celebrant, 
the ministers, and the acolytes, at a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, rise; the ministers receive their 
caps from him, and having made a genuflection (the 
celebrant bowing) to the cross, and bowed to the clergy, 
go to the sacristy ; the acolytes walking first, tlien the 
ministers, and lastly the celebrant, one after anotlier, 
with their heads covered; there they take off their 
violet stoles, and put on the white vestments. 

7. After the ministers have left the sanctuary, the aco- 
lytes appointed for it remove the cushions and the violet 
veil and antipendium from the altar, the violet veil from 
the side-table, and the violet cloth from the bench of the 
ministers; they also spread the carpet on the platform 
and steps of tlie altar, light the candles un the altar, 
and put the altar-cards on. In the sacristy, the acolytes 
light their candles, and the censer-bearer puts fire into 
the censer. 

Article VL 

The Mass. 

1. When the chanters have come to the Agnus Dei, or 
thereabouts according to the greater or less distance of the 
sacristy from the altar, the celebrant and ministers, pre- 
ceded by the acolytes with their candles lighted, walk 
towards the altar, so as to be in the sanctuary at the end 
of Kxaudi nos ; which being repeated by the choir, the 
clergy rise, the chanters go to the desk, to sing the Kyrie 
in a slow and solemn manner, as the procession enters the 
sanctuary (because to-day the Kyrie takes the place of 
the Introit, which the singers should not begin to sing 
before the ministers have arrived at the sanctuary). 
{JDecr. S. E. (7., 14 Apr., 1753.) The ministers bow, as 
usual, to the clergy, make a genuflection (the celebrant 
profoundly bowing) to the cross, and Mass is begun. 



288 HOLY SATURDAY. 

2. Mass to-day goes on as usual, till the end of the 
celebrant's Communion inclusively, with the followino- 
exceptions : the ^^K\vA,Judica me, with the Gloria Pairi^ 
is resumed. After the incensintj^ there is no Introit, but 
the sacred ministers say, as usual, Kyrie eleison. 

3. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria i/i 
excelsis Deo^ the first acolyte rings the bell by the side- 
table, the second rings another in the sacristy, and the 
large bells of the church are also rung, whilst the sacred 
rainisters continue the Gloria to its end, during which 
the picture or statue of the main altar and those of the 
other altars are uncovered. [S. B. O.^ 22 Jul., 1848, in 
l<lorent, ad. 3, 4965). At the same time the organ is 
played, as usual. 

4. The celebrant having given the blessing to the sub- 
deacon after the Epistle, sings thrice. Alleluia., raising 
every time his voice one tone higher; and the choir 
repeats it after each time in the same tone, the ministers 
standing by the celebrant, as for the Introit, who, havinej 
read the Tract., goes to read the Gospel, as usual. 

5. The acolytes, at the Gospel, go as usual with the 
ministers, but do not carry their candlesticks. Tlie Credo 
is not said, neither the Offertory., nor the Agnus Dei ; 
the Pax is not given. 

6. The deacon, having covered the chalice after 'the 
celebrant has put into it the small particle of the conse- 
crated Host, immediately changes places with the sub- 
deacon. 

7. According to the decree of the S. C. P., 22 Mar., 
1806, Commun.on may be given to the faithful at this 
Mass, by which, in parochial churches, they fulfill the 
paschal precept. If it be given, the deacon and sub- 
deacon do not exchange places, and everything for the 
Communion should be done as on Holy Thursday. 

8. After the Communion of the celebrant, the censer 
bearer goes to prepare the censer, puts fire into it, and 
the choir, instead of the Coinmunio, sing Alleluia^ and 
the psalm, Laudate Doininum.^ etc. 

9. The celebrant, having taken the last ablution, goes 
to the Epistle side, where he recites in a low voice the 



THE MASS. 209 

Alleluia^ and the \)^^\m^ Laudate Dominum^ alternately 
with the ministers, who are near him, placed in the same 
position as at the Introit. The choir having repeated 
the anthem Alleluia^ the celebraiit intones Yespere autem 
Sahhati^ and, with the ministers, continues it to the end, 
in a low voice, whilst the choir sing it. 

10. When the chanters be^^in the Magnificat^ the cele- 
brant and the ministers make the sign of the cross, and 
go to the middle of the altar, the snb-deacon at the left 
and the deacon at the right of the celebrant, where he 
presents the incense. Then the altar is incensed, as 
usual at Yespers. 

11. The deacon having incensed the celebrant, goes to 
incense the clergy, as usual. In the meantime, the cele- 
brant and the sub-deacon remain at the Epistle side, as 
at the Introit. After the clergy, the sub-deacon is in- 
censed by the deacon, for which purpose the sub-deacon 
turns towards him, without, however, turning his back 
to the celebrant. Then the deacon goes to the place 
where he usually stands at the Introit, and turns to the 
censer-bearer, who incenses him; he also incenses the 
acolytes and the people. Afterwards he takes the censer 
to the sacristy, and returns to the altar. 

12. The aiitiphon. Vesper e autem, etc., being repeated 
by the choir, the celebrant goes to the middle, the min- 
isters following him, one after the other, kisses the altar, 
says Dominus vohisGum, and finishes the Mass as usual. 
The deacon sings, Ite^ Missa est^ Alleluia^ Alleluia, 



PART V. 



Cinimttmf$ for ^h$$ mh. 00$pir$ 

SOLEMNLY CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP, 
OR IN HTS PRESENCE. 



' CHAPTEE I. 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 

Article I. 
Things to be Prejpared, 

1. The altar is to be covered with a long veil, which 
should not hang down before it, but only on the two 
sides. In the middle of the altar are placed the sacred 
vestments for the Bishop, viz., the amice, alb, cincture, 
stole, and cope; on the Epistle side the ornamented 
mitre ; on that of the Gospel, the golden mitre ; on the 
highest step near the Epistle corner, the crosier, and 
near the vestments, on the Gospel side, on a small plate, 
the pectoral cross and the ring. 

2. On the side-table, the two candlesticks for the aco- 
lytes, the Missal for the prayers to be sung by the Bishop, 
and the hand-candlestick. 

3. In the middle of the sanctuary, two or four stools 
for the cope-bearers, according to their number. 

4. In the sacristy, a cope for the assistant priest; two 
dalmatics, stoles, albs, cinctures, and amices for the assist- 

C27U) 



PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 271 

ant deacons; two or fonr copes for the chanters, accord- 
ing to their number; and a sufficient number of copes, 
chasubles, and dahnatics, with amices, albs, cinctures, etc., 
for the clergy who assist at Vespers, dressed according 
to their order. 

5. In a convenient place, the censer with the incense- 
boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

Frmn the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the 
Churchy to the Beginning of Vespers. 

1. The Bishop, preceded by the clergy, two by tw^o, 
goes from the sacristy to the church, the assistant ])riest 
walking immediately before him, and the two deacons 
at his side ; having adored the Blessed Sacrament, he 
goes up to his seat. There lie sits for a short time ; then 
rising, he takes olf his cape,* and puts on the amice, alb, 
cincture, pectoral cross, stole, and cope; he sits down, 
the first deacon puts the mitre on his head, and the 
assistant priest the ring on his finger. 

2. Being thus vested, and having sat for awhile, his 
mitre is taken oii' by the second deacon. The Bi.-hop 
then rises, and with him all the clergy ; he turns 
towards the altar, and says, secretly, Pater and Ave ; 
then, making the sign of the cross on himself, he sin^s, 
Deus in adjittorium meum intende. Whilst the choir 
sings Gloria Patri, the Bishop and all the clergy bow 
towards the altar. 

*The technical name is mozetta. It is regarded as a mark of juris- 
diction, and is therefore only to be worn by the diocesan, unless ia 
Councils. 



273 POl^TIFICAL VESPERS. 

Article III. 
From the Beginning to the End of Vespers, 

1. In tho meanwhile, two or four chanterR in copes, 
accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, make 
the usual genuflection and bows, go to the Bishop's seat, 
and the first among them gives the tone of the first 
antiphon to the Bishop, who repeats the same words 
aloud ; then having made the accustomed bow^s and genu- 
fiection, they all return to their places. At the begin- 
ning of the first psalm, the Bishop and the clergy sit 
down, and the first deacon puts the plain mitre on the 
Bishop. 

2. At the Gloria jPatri, the Bishop, with his mitre on, 
bows towards the altar, and the clergy do the same, 
taking off their caps. 

3. Two of the singers, in copes, attended by the master 
of ceremonies, go to give the tone of the antiphons as 
follows : the second antiphon to the first assistant deacon, 
the third to the assistant priest, the fourth to the clergy- 
man who occupies the first place in the sanctuary, and 
the fifth to the second assistant deacon. Those to whom 
the tone is given, stand, and with them, if they be 
assistants at the Bishop's seat, all the other assistants; 
but if not, all the clergy who are in the sanctuary. 

4. All the psalms and antiphons being ended, tlie first 
chanter, in cope, or the sub-deacon, attended by the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, goes to the place where the epistle is 
usually sung, and turning towards the Bishop, sing's the 
chapter; the Bishop, w4th his mitre on, and all the 
clergy, with their heads uncovered,, stand whilst it is 
sung. The choir having answered Deo gratlas, the same 
one who intoned the antiphon, accompanied by the mas- 
ter of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, who is still stand- 
ing with his mitre on, to intone the hymn ; immediately 
after, the mitre is taken from the Bishop, who repeats 
the same words of the hymn, and the hynm is continued 
by the choir. 

At the hymns Veni Creator, or Ave Maris Sidla, all 



PON'TIFICAL VESPERS, 273 

the clergy kneel whilst the Bishop intones them ; and 
th-^. Bishop himself, after the intonation, kneels either 
at the faldstool before the middle of the altar, or on a 
cushion near his seat. All rise after the first strophe. 

5. After the hymn, the verses having been sung by the 
four singers in copes, and answered by the choir, the 
antiphon of the Magnificat is intoned in the same 
manner, as the hynm, to the Bishop, who is still stand- 
ing; ; having repeated the first words, he sits down, 
receives the precious mitre, attended by the assistant 
priest, puts the incense into the censer, and blesses it. 
In the meanwhile, two acolytes go to each side of the 
altar, and fold in the middle the veil that covers it, so as 
to leave the half of it near the front uncovered. 

6. As the choir begins the Magnificat^ the Bishop 
rises, with his mitre on; all the assistants likewise rise; 
the Bishop makes the sign of the cross, receives in his 
left hand the crosier from the assistant priest, and walks 
to the altar, between the deacons, who raise his cope on 
each side; when anived before the lowest step, he gives 
the crosier to the assistant priest; the second deacon 
takes ofi' his mitre, he bows to the cross (the othe?s 
making a genuflection), and all go up to the altar, where 
the Bishop, having received the censer from the assistant 
priest, incenses the cross and the altar ; the deacons who 
are at his side, raising the border of his cope, and 
reciting the Magnificat alternately with him. 

7. Tlie Bishop, having incensed the altar, goes to the 
middle, says the Gloria Patri^ bowing to the cross, goes 
below the lowest step, makes a reverence to the altar, 
receives the mitre and crosier, and returns to his seat, 
where he is incensed by the assistant priest; then the 
deacon takes olf his mitre, and the Bishop, holding the 
crosier with both his hands, remains standing till the 
end of Sicut erat in principio, after the Magnificat. 

8. As soon as the Bi3hop leaves the altar, the acolytes 
spread the veil over the altar. 

9. After the Bishop has been incensed by the assistant 
priest, the clergy are incensed by the first of tue four 



274 PONTIFICAL VESPER?, 

singers in copes, and the sin;5er, the maste^' of ceremonies, 
thj acolytes, and the people, by the censer-bearer, as it 
has been said else\vhere. 

The Magnificat is to be sung, so as to give time for 
the incensing. 

10. Whilst the choir repeats the ar^tiplion of the Mag- 
nificat^ the Bishop gives up his crosier, s'ts down and 
receives the mitre. In the meantime, the master of cere- 
monies accompanies the acolytes, carrying the candle- 
sticks with lighted candles, and the four chanters in 
co})es, to the Bishop's seat. After the antiphon, the 
Bishop takes off the mitre, rises, and the assistant priest, 
holding the book before him, he sings Dominus vohis- 
cuTYi^ and the prayer, with his hands joined, during 
which all the clergy stand. While the Bishop says 
Dominus vohiscum^ after the prayer, the four chanters 
in copes, the acolytes, and master of ceremonies bow to 
him, and go to the middle of the sanctuary ; where, having 
made a genufieetion, the acolytes go to the side table and 
the chanters sing the Benedicamus Domino. 

11. Whilst the choir answer, Deo gratias^ the Bishop 
sits down, receives the mitre, ri^es, sings Sit iiomen 
Domini^ etc., and gives the benediction, as usual, from 
his seat, if he can be seen thence by the people ; other- 
wise he gives it from the altar. 

If the celebrant be an Archbishop, the cross is brought 
before him, he bows profuundly to it, and gives the 
benediction without mitre. 

Indulgences are never published at Vesper.^. 

12. After Vespers, the Bishop puts oH* the sacred vest- 
ments as usual. 

13. The pontifical Vespers are sung in the manner 
heretofore described, when the Bishop is to celebrate a 
pontifical Mass the next day, or on the great solemnities 
of the year, such at least, as Easter, Christmas, the Feast 
of the Patron Saint of the Diocese, the Titular of the 
Church, etc. 

14. On other occasions. Vespers are celebrated with 
less solenmity ; then all the clergy do not put on the 
sacred vestments ; four of them only are dressed in copes ; 



POIs'TIFICAL VESPEES. 275 

the antiphons arc intoned, first to the Bishop, then to 
the other clergymen in the sanctuary, according to their 
dignity and order. 

Article IY. 

Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament given hy the 

Bishop. 

1. Besides the preparations mentioned in Chap. XT, 
Art. I, p. 79, the following things are to be prepared : 
The cope, stole, pectoral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, 
and, if the Bishop is in his diocese, the crosier.* Also, 
the hand-candlestick with a candle in. (These articles 
are prepared instead of the vestments for the priest.) 
On the lowest step of the altar a cushion. 

2. The same ceremonies are observed as when a priest 
gives Benediction with the following particulars: The 
Bishop, having put on the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral 
cross, stole, cope, and mitre, takes the crosier, if he be in 
his diocese, to the sanctuary, preceded by the censer- 
bearer, torch-bearers, master of ceremonies, deacon and 
sub-deacon dressed with dalmatics, holding up the borders 
of the cope. Then follow the crosier- bearer and mitre- 
bearer. 

3. On arriving at the foot of the altar, the Bishop 
gives the crosier to the sub-deacon, and the mitre is taken 
oif by the deacon, then he makes a genuflection on the 
floor,t for which purpose the master of ceremonies will 
put the cushion, and replace it on the lowest step, on 
Avhicli the Bishop kneels. 

4. The Benediction veil having been put on the Bishop's 
shoulder, he bows profoundly, rises, with the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and with them ascends the steps, while they 
raise his alb in front. Then he genuflects on the plat- 
form, rises with the deacon who first arranges tiie 
humeral-veil on the Bishop's hands, and then gives him 

* Should the Bishop wash his hands, the pitcher, basin with water, 
and a towel, are prepared, 
t C(Erem.. Ease. lib. 1, ch. xv, and S. B. C, 12th Nov., 1831. 



276 SOLEMN VESPERS. 

the Ostensorium. The Bishop blesses the people with 
three signs of the cross,* i. e.^ the first on the Epistle 
side, the next in the middle of the altar, and the third 
on the Gospel side. 

During the Benediction, the deacon and sub-deacon, 
kneeling on the edge of the platform, raise the cope on 
each side. While standing, the Bishop gives the mon- 
strance to the deacon or priest at his right, and goes 
down the steps, having first genuflected on the platfoim, 
and the humeral-veil is taken off. 

5. The deacon or the priest, having placed the mon- 
strance on the corporal, takes the Blessed Sacrament out 
of it, and places It in the tabernacle, with the usual 
genuflections. 

6. After this, the Bishop takes his mitre and crosier, if 
he use it, makes a genuflection on the floor,f and returns 
to the sacristy. 

If there be no sacred ministers to assist the Bishop at 
the Benediction with the Licssed Sacrament, he will con- 
form to the directions found in Art. I, p. 79, for the 
Benediction given by a priest in a similar case ; however, 
in blessing the people, he will make three signs of the 
cross, as explained above, n. 4. 



CHAPTER 11. 

SOLEMN VESPERS IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP. 

1. When the Bishop does not officiate at Yespers, he 
is vested as usual, with his rochet and cappa : he sits at 
his seat, having two clergymen in surplices at his side; 
he puts incense into the censer and blesses it; he is 
incensed, immediately after the celebrant, by the assist- 

*C(Brem. Episc. lib. ii, ch. xxxiii. 

tib., lib. i, ch. XV, 8. R. (7., 12ih Nov., 1831. 



COMPLIN-E. _ 277 

ant priest ; and after the Benedicamus Domino and Deo 
gratias, the Bishop gives the solemn blessing from his 
seat, if he can be seen thence by the people, otherwise 
from the altar. 

2. The officiating priest is dressed in cope, and sits in 
the usual place on the Epistle side. Before he be^rins 
Deus in adjutorium^ he asks the Bishop's leave by bow- 
ing to him; every time he goes from the altar to his 
seat, or from it to the altar, he bows to the Bishop ; he 
does not bless the incense, or put it into the censer ; he 
is incensed only with two swings, and not at his seat, but 
at the Epistle corner near the altar. 

3. There may be four, or two chanters, in copes, who 
sit on their stools as usual, in the middle of the sanctuary; 
two give the tone of the first antiphon, and that of tiie 
Magnificat^ to the officiating priest; the others to the 
other clergymen, according to their dignity and order; 
and sing the verses, Benedicamus Domino^ etc. The 
two first amongst them accompany the celebrant to the 
altar for the incensing of it, raising his cope on each 
side; and the first of them incenses the celebrant and 
the clergy, including the three other singers. 

4. The acolytes carry their candlesticks as usual in 
other Yespers. 

5. The officiating priest, with the two or four chanters 
in cope, the acolytes, and master of ceremonies, must go 
to the sanctuary before the Bishop, sit at their places 
till he enters it, as he enters, preceded by the rest of the 
clergy, they rise, and whilst he kneels, they kneel also. 



CHAPTER III. 

COMPLINE, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. For Compline, the Bishop is dressed in rochet and 
cappa; he sits in his usual place. 

2. When the chanter says, Jvhe Domne^ etc., he stands 
and answers, Noctem guietam ; after the Lesson, he says, 



278 MATIIs^S. 

Adjutorium nostrum; then the Pr<.z^^r, the c nfession, 
and absolution, etc, Deus in Adjutorium; all of which 
are to be said standing. At the beginning of the psahns, 
he takes his seat. 

3. All the rest is said bj the choir and bj the priest 
who should have officiated if the Bishop were not present, 
with the exception of the prayer and of the Benedicat 
et custodiat nos, etc., which are to be sung by the Bishop. 

4. When the Bishop, althongh present at Compline., 
does not officiate, nothing is to observed in particular, 
except that the officiating priest, at the words Indulgent 
tiam^ ahsolutionem^ and at the Benedicat et custodiat^ 
bows profoundly to the Bishop. 



CHAPTER lY 

MATINS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. The Bishop is dressed in rochet and cappa. He is 
seated at his usual place ; no clergymen sit by him. He 
is attended by the master of ceremonies. 

2. Whilst the Pater^ Ave, and Credo are said, all 
stand ; the Credo being ended, the Bishop, making with 
his thumb the sign of the cross on his lips, sings, Domine 
lahia, and making the sign of the cross on himself as 
usual, he sings, I)eus i/i adjutorium. He remains stand- 
ing during the Invitatorium, and the Psalm, Venite 
exultemus ; at the words, Yeiiite adorem^us et procidainus, 
he kneels, then rises, and remains standing during the 
hymn, (w^hich he intones only in case he is to celebrate 
Mass,) one of the chanters having intoned it. As the 
psalm begins, the Bishop and all the clergy take their 
seats. 

3. The antiphons, are intoned by the chanters in sur- 
plices to the clergy, beginning with those who are first 
in dignity and order. At the Gloria Patri^ all take olf 
their caps and bow. 



MATINS. 279 

4. At the versicles, wliich are siino; by two of tlie 
chanters, after the third antiphon of each nocturn, all 
rise. The Bishop says, in a loud voice, the words. Pater 
noster ; the rest is said secretly, as far as the words, et ne 
nos, w^hicli are sung by the Bishop, who also sings the 
absolution, and the words of the blessintr, after the t/ube 
Domne benedicere. The Bishop does not rise to give the 
second and third blessing at each nocturn, but remains 
fiitt'ng. 

5. After the verses of each nocturn, the second master 
of ceremonies goes to invite, with a bow, the clegyman 
w^ho is to sing the Lesson, beginning by those who are 
inferior in order or dignity. He accompanies him to 
the middle of the sanctuary before the desk prepared for 
the purpose; there they make a genuflection to the altar, 
bow first to the Bishop, then to the clergy on each side 
of the sanctuary; after the absolution for the first 
Lesson of each nocturn, or the response for the two 
others, the clergyman who is to sing the Lesson bows 
profoundly towards the Bishop, and sings, t/uhe Domne 
henedicere. After the words of the blessing, he sings 
the Lesson, at the end of which he kneels to the altar, 
on one knee, saying, Tu autem Domine, then bows pro- 
foundly to the Bishop, who makes the sign of the cross 
towards him, and after having bowed to the clergy as 
before, he returns to his place. The same is done for all 
the other Lessons. The seventh and eighth Lessons are 
sung by those who are to ofiiciate at Mass as assistant 
deacons, at the side of the Bishop. Whilst the text of 
the Gospel is sung, at the seventh Lesson, the Bishop 
and all the clergy should stand. 

6. The ninth Lesson is sung by the Bishop at his seat, 
standing with his face turned tow^ards the altar. Before 
he begins it, the two assistant deacons, and one of the 
acolytes with the hand-candlestick, and another with 
the book, go to him ; the two former place themselves at his 
side, and the latter before him. The Bishop, bowing 
profoundly towards the altar, sings, Juhe Domine^ not 
Juhe Domne; all the clergj^ rise, and answer. Amen. 
Then the Bishop sings the Lesson, during which the 



280 LAUDS. 

clergy remain standing. At the end of it, the Bishop, 
bowing profoundly towards the altar, says, Tu autem 
Domine^ etc. The choir having answered, Deo gratias^ 
the tone of Te Deu7)i is given to the Bishop, who repeats 
the same words, and the choir continue the hymn. At 
the words, Te ergo oucesumus, the Bishop and all the 
clergy kneel down. 



CHAPTEE V. 

LAUDS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 

1. When the Bishop has officiated at Matins, it is 
proper that he should officiate at Lauds also. Every- 
thing is to be done as directed for Yespers, when the 
Bishop is not to celebrate Mass the next day. Soon 
after the Te Deicm, the Bishop, at his seat, puts on all 
the sacred vestments, as for Yespers, and four or six 
clergymen put on copes. 

2. The Bishop begins, Deus in adjutorium, making 
the sign of the cross on himself The antiphons are in- 
toned as for Yespers, and everything else is done as 
directed for the same. 

3. At the Benedictus^ everything is done as at the 
Magnificat / and after the Benedicamus and T>eo gratias^ 
the solemn blessing is likewise given by the Bishop. 



SOLEMN POi^TIFlCAL MASS. 281 

CHAPTER YL 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prepared. 

There should be in Cathedral churches a place or 
chapel to answer the purpose of that which was formerly 
called the Secretarium. It should have an altar, the 
Bishop's seat, seats for all the clergy, and a side-table. 

On the altar of this chapel, all the pontifical vest- 
ments should be prepared; and the copes, chasubles, 
dalmatics, and tunics for the clergy, at their own seats. 
On the side-table, the Bishop's sandals and stockings, 
the candlesticks for the acolytes, the incense-boat and 
censer, the book, and hand-candlesticks, etc., should be 
placed; to this chapel the Bishop and all the clergy 
ought to go, immediately after having adored the 
Blessed Sacrament. There, the Bishop, having begun 
Tierce, should make his preparation for Mass ; the 
clergy should put on the vestments suitable to their order 
and dignity ; the Bishop should put on his sacred vest- 
ments, finish Tierce, and, after having taken olf the 
cope, put on the tnnicella and chasuble; and lastly, 
being preceded h^ the clergy, he should go in procession 
from this place to the high altar. 

Wherever there is not such a convenient place, every- 
thing is to be done in the sanctuary ; we shall, therefore, 
in the present chapter, adapt the instructions to the ordi- 
nary construction of our churches. 

1. The altar is to be prepared with the best and 
richest ornaments; three large candlesticks with aandles 
on each side of the cross, and a seventh one behind it. 
This seventh candlestick with candle is to be placed 
behind the cross only when the Bishop of the diocese 
celebrates a solemn Pontifical Mass. Between the can- 
dlesticks, relic-cases of a suitable size may be placed. 



282 SOLEMN- PON-TIFICAL MASS. 

2. On tlie altar, the pontifical vestments, of suitable 
color should be placed, one over the other, viz., imme- 
diately on the atar-cloth in the middle, the chasuble, 
then the dalmatic, tunic, cope, stole, cincture, alb, and 
over all the others the amice. On the Epistle side, near 
the vestments, tlie pectoral cross and the ring should be 
on a plate; on the Gospel side, the gloves on another 
plate. On the Gospel side the precious mitre, and the 
golden mitre on the Epistle side, standing against the can- 
dlesticks, and the crosier at the same corner, against the 
angle tormed by the altar and the pilaster near it. 

3. The Bishop's seat is to be on the Gospel side, against 
the side-walls of the sanctuary; it should be on a plat- 
form, raised by three steps above the floor of the sanc- 
tuary ; the platform should be large enough to admit two 
wooden stools without backs, decently painted, for the 
two assistant deacons, on each side of the Bishop's chair, 
which should have a high back and convenient arms, 
and be covered with silk cloth; there should be a third 
stool, of the same form with the others, near that of the 
second assistant deacon, but projecting more towards the 
front of the platform, for the assistant priest. Over the 
Bishop's chair there should be a canopy, with hangings 
all around; the walls behind the chair, and the assist- 
ants' stools, should likewise be covered with hangings, 
which ought to be of a color suitable to the festival. 

4. The side-table ought to be placed on the Epistle 
side of the altar, and covered all around and on the top 
with white linen cloth. It should be sufficiently large. 

On this table there should be two candlesticks with 
candles for the acolytes, the chalice with its purilier, 
paten, host, pall, and burse, containing the corporal ; the 
Missal, for the Epistle and Gospel ; behind the chalice, 
standing against the wall, the cruets on a plate, the basin 
and ewer for washing the Bishop's hands, two or three 
fine towels on a plate, the book containing the canon, 
the Missal for the Bishop, with his maniple in it, the 
hand-candlestick, the Bishop's sandals and stockings on 
a plate, covered with a veil. Over the chalice, the long 
veil, the two extremities of which ought to hang down 
on each side of the table. 



SOLEMJT PONTIFICAL MASS. 283 

5. The beneli of the ministers should be on the Epistle 
side, below the table, and atrainst the side-walls of the 
sanctuary. It should be covered with baze. On it the 
maniples of the deacon and sub-deacon should be placed. 

6. A sufficient number of seats for the clergy should 
be placed on each side of the sanctuary; they ought not 
to be the usual chairsj but benches with a back, covered 
with drapery. 

7. There should be a number of acolytes in surplices, 
no fewer than eight. The first of them carries the book, 
and holds it when the Eishop reads out of it ; but when 
he sings, the book nu st be held by the assistant priest. 
The second holds the hand-candlestick whenever the 
Bishop reads or sings anything, either at his seat or at 
the altar. The third acolyte, who, besides the surplice, 
wears a cope, is to carry the crosier. The fourth, if he 
is not dressed in cope, wears on his surplice a long veil, 
hanging from his neck before him, in order to cover his 
hands with it when he holds the mitre. The fifth is the 
censer-bearer. The sixth and the seventh are to carry 
the candlesticks. The eighth carries the apron, wdiich is 
a rich cloth that is spread on the lap of the Bishop, when 
seated. 

8. The faldstool is a kind of folding seat, sufficiently 
large, the four corners of which project about a foot above 
the cushion, when laid on it; tliese corners are con- 
nected together only on the two sides, six mches above 
the cushion, with two cross-pieces, which, as well as tlie 
projecting corners, should be of gilt metal. Thus it 
remains open behind and before, it is covered with a 
silk cloth of the color of the vestments, which hangs 
down to the ground on the four sides, it is used as a 
praying desk for the Bishop, and as a chair, when, for 
ordinations or other ceremonies, he is to sit at the altar. 
Two cushions covered with the same cloth are to be 
prepared; one on the seat and another before it, to 
kneel on. It is to be placed in the middle of the sanc- 
tuary, whenever the Bishop is to kneel. 

9. We suppose in the following instructions that the 
Cathedral church has no Secretariiom or chapel, as men- 



284 SOLEMN" POI^TIFICAL MASS. 

tioned in the baginnin^: of tho chapter; but in case it 
should have one, the Bishop and clergy vest and sing 
Tierce in it. 

10. In the sacristy, the following things are to be pre- 
pared: a cope for the assistant priest, who puts it on 
over his surplice, without stole; two amices, albs, cinc- 
tures, and dalmatics for the two assistant deacons. They 
■wear neither stoles nor maniples. Also two amices, albs, 
and cinctures for the deacon and sub-deacon ; also a stole 
for the deacon. Their maniples are to be placed on 
their seats in the sanctuary. The clergy are to be 
in sacred vestments. Some of them, the lirst in dignity, 
wear copes over their surplices ; some, chasubles over 
their albs; no maniples or stoles are to be used by them. 
The clergymen who are not priests are to be dressed in dal- 
matics over their albs, but without stoles and maniples. 
A sufficient number of these vestments ought to be pre- 
pared in the sacristy. In order to have a sufficient 
number of clergymen in towns and cities, where there 
are several congregations besides that of the Cathedral, 
the service ought to be performed in those earlier than 
usual, so that all the clergy may go to the Cathedral. 
This custom is observed in other countries, and it is con- 
formable to what was practiced in remote antiquity. 
The Bishops can and ought to introduce it into this 
country. 

Article II. 

Of the nesting of the Clergy and of the Bishop. 

1. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy, 
before the Bishop arrives. Those w4io are to officiate as 
assistant priest and assistant deacons, preceded by the 
inferior clergy, who wear no sacred vestments, all in sur- 
plices, accompany the Bishop from his house to the 
sacristy, if there be no street between it and the church ; 
otherwise, from the room where he has put on the rochet 
and cappa magna, and two by two, walk before him ; 
lastly, the deacon and sub-deacon; the assistant priest 
walks alone immediately before the Bishop, and the two 
asiif.tant deacons at each side of him. 



VESTIXG OF THE CLERGY AJ^-D BISHOP. 285 

2. The Bishop having arrived at the sacristy, and 
bowed to the cross, the clergy go to tlie sanctuary, first 
those in surplices, then those in dalmatics, chasubles, and 
copes. The assistant priest goes immediately before the 
Bishop, and the two assistant deacons on each side of 
him. As the clergy arrive at the middle of the sanctuary, 
they make a genuflection, bow to one another, and go 
to their places on each side of the sanctuary ; the inferior 
clergy towards the railing, and those in superior grades 
towards the altar. The deacon and sub-deacon go to 
their bench. The Bishop bows to the cross, and kneels 
for awdiile at the faldstool. All the clergy kneel and 
rise with him. After a short prayer he goes to his seat, 
having at his side the assistant deacons in surplices. 

3. The Bishop, standing with his head uncovered, turn- 
ing towards the altar, says secretly, Pater and Ave. 
Tlien making the sign of the cross on himself, he si:;gs, 
Deus in adjutorium, etc.; then the hymn, Nunc Sancte 
etc. is intoned; one of the singers intones the antiphon, 
then the Psalm, Legem pone ; which having been begun, 
the Bishop and the clergy sit down and put on their 
caps; the assistant priest and deacons alone remaining 
standing by the B: h >p. 

4. The acolytes bring the book and the hand-candle- 
stick to the Bishop; the book-bearer kneels down. The 
Bishop reads the anthem Ne reminiscaris, and the 
Psalms for the preparation of Mass. The sub-deacon, 
accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, brings 
from the table the plate with the sandals and stockings 
covered with the veil; six acolytes follow^ him and sur- 
round the Bishop's seat; the sub-deacon, assisted by the 
second master of ceremonies, takes oiF the Bishop's shoes 
and puts on him the stockings and sandals; afterwards 
the sub-deacon and acolytes retire to their places. 

5. The Psalms having been read, and the anthem, Ne 
reminiscaris^ repeated by the Bishop, he rises, with his 
head uncovered, and turning towards the altar, says, 
Kyrie cleison^ with the verse and prayers that follow. 
Then he takes off the cappa, saying the appropriate 
prayer. The acolytes bring the basin, ewer, and towels, 



286 sole:jn" pontifical mass. 

and the Bisliop washes his hands, saying the prayer, Da 
Donnine. The assistant priest takes off the Bishop's 
ring before he washes his liands, and puts it on after he 
has washed them, and presents him the towel to wipe 
them. 

6. When the Bishop rises, after having read the Psahns, 
the second master of ceremonies goes up to the altar, fol- 
lowed by the acolytes, who, one after another, make first 
a genuflection before the lower step, go up, receive sev- 
erally one of the vestments, make another genuflection 
on the platform, go down and place themselves in a line, 
beginning at the Gospel side. When ail have received 
the vestments, that is, the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral 
cross, stole, cope, and mitre, at a signal given by the 
master of ceremonies, they make a genuflection, and walk 
one after another in a line to the Bishop's seat. When 
the first who carries tlie amice is arrived before the la^^t 
step of the Bishop's seat, he and all the others stop one 
behind another. The second master of ceremonies stops 
at the left hand of the first acolyte, who, having given 
the amice, gives his place to the next, goes to his right 
hand; they both bow to the Bishop, and the first acolyte 
returns to his place; the others do in like manner. 

7. Whilst the Bishop is washing his hands, the deacon 
and sub-deacon go to the throne, and as soon as he has 
washed his hands, tlie assistant deacon and priest go 
down, where, having with the deacon and sub-deacon 
bowed to the Bishop, the assistant priest and deacons 
go to put on their vestments in the sacristy ; the deacon 
goes to the Bishop's right, and the sub-deacon to the left. 
The deacon receives from the acolytes all the vestments, 
with the assistance of the sub-deacon, that is, the amice, 
alb, cincture, pectoral cross, stole, cope, and mitre. After 
which the Bishop takes his seat. The deacon and sub- 
deacon go down, and having made a bow to the Bishop, 
together with the assistant priest and deacons, retire to 
their bench ; the assistant priest and deacons go up to 
their usual places, and seat themselves. 

3. When all the Psalms, with the anthem, have been 
Bungj which ought to be done slowdy, to give sutficieut 



VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 287 

time for the vesting of the Bishop, the second master of 
ceremonies accompanies the sub-deacon to the place 
where the Epistle is sung, and the latter turnins: towards 
the Bishop, sings the chapter. The Bishop, before the 
sub-deacon begins it, rises with his mitre on ; the clergy 
likewise rise with their heads uncovered. The sub- 
deacon having sung the chapter, returns to his plac^e. 
The chanters chant the responses and verses ; wliicli 
being ended, the acolytes with the candlestick, and those 
with the book and hand-candlestick, go to the Bishop's 
seat; the second assistant deacon takes off the mitre, and 
the Bishop sings the Dominus vohisium^ and the prayer 
from the book, which the assistant priest holds before him. 

9. The singers having sung Benedicaimis Domino^ and 
the choir answered Deo gratias, the deacon and sub- 
deacon return to the Bishop's side, exchanging places 
with the two assistant deacons ; they take oiF the cope 
from the Bishop, and give it to an acolyte, who carries it 
to the sacristy. In the meanwhile, the second master of 
ceremonies gives to the acolytes, in the same manner as 
in n. 6, the tunic, dalmatic, the plate with the gloves, 
the chasuble, and the crosier, and the plate with the 
ring. The acolytes with the book and the candle, go to 
the Bishop's seat, and the acolytes with the vestments 
also go at a signal given by the master of ceremonies. 

10. The deacon and sub-deacon vest the Bishop, who 
reads the prayers appointed for each vestment. 

If he be an Archbishop, after he has put on the chas- 
uble, a sub deacon brings from the altar the pallium, 
gives it to the deacon, who, assisted by the sub-deacon, 
purs it on him. 

Then the Bishop sits, and the deacon puts on him the 
mitre, and the assistant priest the ring on his linger. 

11. The Bishop having thus put on all the sacred vest- 
ments, the deacon and sub-deacon retire to their bench, 
and give their places to the two assistant deacons. 

If Tierce has been sung in the chapel, or Seoretarium, 
the censer-bearer comes to the Bishop with the censer 
and boat, gives it to the assistant priest, and the Bishop 
puts the incense into the censer and blesses it. Then 



288 SOLEMiq- POii'TIFICAL MASS. 

they go to the high altar in procession, in the following 
order : the censer-bearer first, the cross-bearer in sub- 
deacon's dress, between the acolytes carrying the candle- 
sticks, the clergy in surplices, those in dalmatics, the 
priests in chasuble, those in cope, all two bv two. Then 
the sub-deacon, who is to officiate at Mass, carrying 
before his breast the Missal closed, with the Bishop's 
maniple in it; after him the deacon, at the le't of the 
assistant priest, in cope; last, the Bishop, between the 
two assistant deacons, with the crosier in his left, and 
blessing the people with his right hand. After the 
Bishop follow the acolytes, who carry the cross, raitre, 
book, hand-candlestick, etc., two by two. 

As the clergy arrive in the sanctuary, they make a gen- 
uflection in the middle, bow to one another, and go to 
their places. The Bishop goes to the altar and begins 
Mass, as will be said hereafter. 

If the pontiff be an Archbishop, the archiepiscopal 
cross is carried by the cross-bearer, in sub-deacon's dress, 
immediately before the clergy in sacred vestments. 

Article III. 
Tlie Pontifical Mass. 

1. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, 
and with his right blesses the clergy (who arise and bow 
to him) and the people as he goes to the altar between 
the two assistant deacons. The deacon and sub-deacon 
put on their maniples. The second master of ceremonies 
gives the Missal with the Bishop's maniple in it to tlie 
sub-deacon, and all go to the altar. 

2. The Bishop having arrived before the lower step, 
in the middle, the two assistant deacons give ])lace to 
the assistant priest, who goes to the Bishop's right, and 
to the deacon, w^io goes to the left, a:id place themselves 
at a little distance behind them ; the sub-deacon goes to 
the left of the deacon, and remains a little behind him, 
giving the book to the master of ceremonies. The aco- 
lytes who carry the crosier and the mitre place them- 
selves a little behind the two assistant deacons. The 



BEOIN"N"IN"G. 289 

Bisliop, after his mitre has been taken off by the deacon, 
makes a profound bow to the cross, and all the others 
make a genuflection. Then the Bishop begins Mass, In 
nomine Patris^ etc. ; at the words Et vos fraires^ he 
turns himself towards the ministers, and they, at the 
words T'lbi^ pater ^ etc., bow to the Bishop. 

3. After the prayer, Indulgentiam^ ahsolutionem, etc., 
the sub-deacon, taking the maniple out of the Missal, 
gives it to the Bishop to kiss, and puts it on his arm. 

4. Whilst the Bishop makes the confession, all the 
clergy in sacred vestments standing, make it alternately, 
two by two. The inferior clergy kneel down during the 
confession. After it, the Bishop goes up to the altar as 
usual, but the assistant priest passes to his left, and the 
deacon to his right hand. The sub-deacon at the Gospel 
side goes up with the Missal, which he with the assistant 
priest present open to the Bishop, who, after having 
kissed the altar, touching it with both his hands, kisses 
it at the beginning of the Gospel to be read on that day. 

5. The incense is then put into the censer and blessed, 
the deacon ofiering the boat, and presenting the censer 
to the Bishop, who incenses the altar, as usual ; and after 
it, standing with his mitre on, by the corner of the altar, 
at the Epistle side, he is incensed by the deacon ; then, 
having received the crosier, and made from the same 
place a reverence to the cross, he goes, between the two 
assistant deacons, to his seat. The deacon and sub-deacon 
go to their bench on the Epistle side. The Bishop, 
standing, without mitre, making the sign of the cross on 
himself, reads the Introit, from the book which the aco- 
lyte holds open before him ; another acolyte holding near 
him the hand-candlestick, and the assistant deacons 
turning the leaves of the book when necessary. Then 
he says, alternately with them, Kyrie eleison. The same 
is said likewise by the deacon and sub-deacon, and by 
all the clergy, two by two, alternately. Afterwards the 
Bishop sits down, and the first deacon puts on him the 
lighter mitre and the apron. All the clergy also sit at 
their places. 

6. After the EJyrie is sung by the choir, all rise, and 



290 SOLEMN POIN'TIFICAL MASS. 

the mitre and apron being taken oif, the Bishop tnrnecl 
towards the altar, sings, Gloria in excelsis Deo^ the assist- 
ant priest holding the book before him, whilst he sings 
those words ; but whilst he reads the rest, the book is 
held by the acolyte. The same is to be observed on all 
other occasions, viz.: when the Bishop sings, the assistant 
priest holds the book ; bnt when he reads, the acolyte 
holds it, and the assistant deacons point out what is to 
be read, and turn the leaves of the book. The assistants 
say with the Bishop, in a low voice, the rest of the 
Angelical Hymn, likewise the deacon and sub-deacon, 
and all the clergy. 

The hymn having been recited, the Bishop and the 
clergy sit down, and the deacon puts the plain mitre on 
the Bishop, and the apron on his lap. The choir having 
sung the Gloria^ the deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre 
and the apron ; all rise; and the Bishop, turned towards 
the people, sings. Fax vobis^ and the prayer; after which 
all sit down, and the deacon puts on the Bishop the mitre, 
and the apron on his lap. 

7. The sub-deacon, having received the Missal from 
the second master of ceremonies and holding it on his 
breast, goes, attended by the same, to the middle, makes 
a genuflection to the altar, bows to the Bishop and to 
the clergy, goes to the Epistle side, and turned towards 
the Bishop, sings the Epistle; after it, he makes the 
usual genuflection and bow, goes to the Bisho|>, ki:eels 
before him, lays the book on his knees, and kisses the 
Bishop's hand, placed on the book, and having received 
his blessing, returns to his place, where he gives the 
book to the master of ceremonies. 

8. After the sub-deacon has kissed the Bishop's hand, 
the acolytes, with the book and the hand-candlestick, go 
before him, and the Bishop sitting, with his mitre on, 
reads the Epistle, Tract, and says the Munda cor meum^ 
etc., and reads the Gospel, with his hands joined, the 
assistant deacons remaining standing, and answering, Et 
cwni spiritu tuo^ and Laus tihi Christe. 

9. Towards the end of this, the deacon having received 
the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, carries 



GOSPEL. 291 

it raised before liim to the altar, bowing to the Bishop 
and to the clergy, and making a genutiection before the 
lower step, places it in the middle of the altar, goes 
down, makes a gennflection, goes to the Bishop, kisses 
his hand, returns to the altar, kneels on the lower 
step, says, in a low voice, Munda cor meiitn^ rises, goes 
np to take the Missal, comes down, and places himself 
below the lower step a little towards the Epistle side, 
with the sub-deacon, who, at the same time, goes to his 
left, they being exactly in the middle, where they wait. 
In the meantime, the censer-bearer having gone to the 
Bishop's seat, with the censer and. boat, the incense is 
put in and blessed, as usual. The censer-bearer, accom- 
panied by the second master of ceremonies, goes behind 
the deacon ; the master of ceremonies behind the sub- 
deacon ; and the two acolytes, with their candlesticks 
and lighted candles, behind them. At a signal given by 
the master of ceremonies, they all make a genuflection, 
bow to the Bishop and to the clergy, and go to the 
Bishop's seat, walking in the order in which they are, 
the deacon and the sub-deacon first. Having arrived 
before the Bishop's seat, they all kneel and remain so ; the 
deacon saying, Juhe Domne^ henedicere, receives the 
blessing, Vominus sit, etc., and kisses the Bishop's 
hand. Then they all rise, and go to the place where 
the Gospel is to be sung. 

10. The master of ceremonies walks first, after him 
the censer-bearer, then the two acolytes with the candle- 
sticks, the sub-deacon, and last the deacon. The sub- 
deacon places himself with his face towards the Epistle 
side, between the two acolytes, and holds the book rest- 
ing on his head. The deacon turns towards the book, 
and the master of ceremonies and censer-bearer are at 
his side. The deacon smgs,Daminus vobiscum, Sequentia, 
etc., making the sign of the cross on the booiv and him- 
self, etc., incenses the book thrice, towards the middle, 
the right and the left of the same. The Bishop, at tlie 
beginning of the Gospel, rises, without mitre, receives 
the crosier, which he keeps between both his hands, 
makes the sign of the cross on himself, bows at the 



292 SOLEMX PO^TTinCAL MASS. 

names of Jesus and Mary, kisses the book, wliich, after 
the Gospel, is brought to liim by the sub-deacon, and 
says, Per evangelica dicta^ etc. ; and lastly is incensed 
by the assistant priest. The deacon and all the others 
return to their places, making the usual genuflections 
and bows. 

11. If the Bishop preach, he should do it from his 
throne. But should this be so placed as to prevent the 
people from seeing or liearing him, the faldstool should 
be placed on the platform of the altar in the middle, 
and five other seats, viz., three at the right, and two at 
the left of the faldstool. The assistant priest sits at his 
right ; near the assistant priest, the deacon of the 
Gospel ; and near him, the first assistant deacon. At 
the left of the Bishop, the sub-deacon, and near him the 
second assistant deacon. If the Bishop should not 
preach, a priest may do it from the pulpit ; but first he 
should go to kiss the Bishop's hand, ask the blessing, 
saying, Jube Domne, 'benedicere^ and ask the Indulgences. 
After the sermon, the deacon of the Gospel sings the 
Conjiteor, near the Bishop, if the Bishop has preached 
at the altar, otherwise before the lowest step of the 
Bishop's seat ; the assistant priest publishes the Indul- 
gences, and the Bishop, standing without mitre, says, 
Precibus et raeritis^ then puts on his mitre, and gives 
the benediction. In case the sermon has been delivered 
by a priest, the preacher publishes the Indulgences in 
place of the assistant priest. 

12. After the benediction, the Bishop returns to his 
seat; or if there has been no sermon, after having been 
incensed, he intones. Credo in xtnurn Deum^ the assistant 
priest holding the book till these words are sung ; then 
he gives it to the acolyte, w^ho remains there with the 
other holding the hand-candlestick, till the Bishop and 
the assistants have finished the Credo^ which is also 
recited by the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, 
two by two, at their respective places. At the words, 
£t incarnatus^ they all kneel. The Creed being said, 
they all sit down, and the first assistant deacon puts the 
plain mitre on the Bishop, and spreads the apron upon 



OFFERTORY. 293 

his knees. When tlie clioir sings the words, Et incar- 
nahis^ the Bishop, with his mitre on, and all the clergy 
in sacred vestments, uncoverino; their heads, bow pro- 
foundly towards the altar; the rest of the clergy kneel. 
However, on Christmas day, and on the festival of the 
Annunciation, the Bishop and all the clergy kneel. 

13. After the Incarnatus has been sung, the deacon 
and the sub-deacon rise; the deacon, attended by the 
second master of ceremonies, goes to the side-table, 
receives the burse from the master of ceremonies, and, 
having made the usual bows and genuflections, carries 
it to the altar, extends the corporal in the middle of it, 
places the burse on the Epistle side, makes a genuflec- 
tion, and returns to his place. Then he and the sub- 
deacon sit down. 

14. Towards the end, of the Creed all the ministers 
rise; the Bishop rises when it is ended, the mitre and 
the apron having been previously taken from him. Then 
standing, he sings, Dominus vohisGum and Oremus^ and 
reads the Offertory out of the book, which is held before 
him by one of the acolytes, attended by the other, 
who holds the hand-candlestick. Afterwards he sits 
down, the deacon puts on him the precious mitre, the 
assistant priest takes off his ring, and the deacons his 
gloves. The two acolytes bring him the basin and 
ewer to wash his hands, and the towel to wipe them ; 
the assistant priest presents the towel, after he has 
washed his hands, and having wiped them, puts the 
ring on his finger. Then the assistant priest having 
received from the master of ceremonies the Missal witti 
its cushion or stand, attended by the same, carries it to 
the altar, and puts it, opened at the proper place, near 
the corporal, on the Gospel side, and waits for the 
Bislioj), retiring to the furtlier corner of the same side 
of the altar. 

15. The Bishop having put on the ring, rises, takes the 
crosier in his left hand, and between tiie two assistant 
deacons, followed by the acolytes of the mitre and of the 
crosier, goes to the altar, blessing on his way the people 
and the clergy; when he has arrived before the lower 



294 SOLEMN PO^^TIFICAL MASS. 

Step, he lays aside the crosier and pnls oiF the mitre, 
makes a profound bow to the cross, goes up to the altar, 
assisted bj the deacon of the Gospel at his right, and 
the assistant priest at his left, kisses the altar in the 
middle, placing his hands on each side. The clerirj sit 
down. The assistant deacons stand on the second step 
on each side. The crosier and mitre-bearers stand at 
a certain distance from the lowest step, behind the two 
assistant deacons. 

16. The snb-deacon, after the Bishop has waslied his 
hands, goes to the side-table, attended by the second 
master of ceremonies and acolytes, who put on his 
shoulders the long veil, with which the chalice and other 
things on the table were covered, leaving it to hang 
lower on his right side. The sub-deacon takes, with his 
left hand, the chalice with the paten, particle, and 
pall, extends the longest part of the veil over it, places 
his right hand on the veil and chalice, lest anything 
should fall, and thus goes to the altar, followed by the 
acolyte who carries the cruets with wine and water; 
when arrived there, at the same time with the Bishop, 
he places the chalice on the altar at the Epistle side, and 
removes the veil from it. 

17. The deacon receives from the sub-deacon the paten 
with the particle, kisses it, and gives it to the Bishop, 
kissing his hand ; the Bishop, as usual, raises it before 
his breast, says, Suscijpe^ Sancte Pater^ etc., places the 
particle on the corporal, and the paten under it at iiis 
right. In the meanwhile, the deacon wipes the chalice 
with the purifier, receives the cruet with the wine from 
the sub-deacon, who had received it from the acolyte, puts 
some wine into the chalice, and the sub-deacon, raising 
the cruet with water a little towards the Bishop, says, 
Berh.dicite^ Pater Reverendissime^ and the Bishop 
having made towards it the sign of the cross, whilst the 
Bub-deacon puts some drops of water into the chalice, 
says the prayer, Dues qui humancB. Then the deacon 
gives the chalice to the Bishop, kissing it first, then the 
Bishop's hand ; the Bishop receives it at the knob, with 
his right hand, and at the foot with his left, and ofi'ers 



OFFERTORY. 205 

it tofrether -vritb the deacon, who, with his left liand, 
eii})})orts the Bishop's elbow, and witli his rio-ht the foot 
of tlie chalice, saying with tlie Bishop the ])rayer, 
Offer innis iil/i, etc. ; afterwards, the sul>deacon liavlnij; 
extended the lower part of the veil hani^inij: on his right 
on the altar, and put his right hand on it, the deacon 
gives him the paten, which he covers with a veil, goes 
down below the steps, and holding the paten raised, 
remains behind the Bishop till the Pater is said. 

IS. Mass is continued as usual, and after the Bishop 
has said the words Benedio hoo sacrificiuri% tuo saiicto 
noraini jprcEparatum^ the censer-bearer goes to the altar; 
incense is put into the censer, the deacon holding the 
censer, and saving Benedicite, Pater Beverendissime, 
the Bishcp blesses it, saying. Per intercessionem^ etc. ; 
then, having received the censer from the deacon, the 
Bishop incenses the Odlata, saying, Bicensura istud — 
the cross, saying Dlrigatur, Domine — the relics, saying 
nothing ; and continues the other prayers, as he incenses 
the altar ; which being done, he gives back the censer to 
the deacon, saying, Accendat^ then having received the 
precious mitre from the first assistant deacon, standing 
at the Epistle corner, he is incensed by the deacon ot the 
]\[ass, who incenses the assistant priest, the two assistant 
deacons, the clergy in the sanctuary, according to their 
rank and order, lastly the sub-deacon ; afterwards he 
gives back the censer to the censer-bearer, who incenses 
the deacon, then the master of ceremonies, the acolytes, 
and the people. 

19. After the Bishop is incensed, he washes his hands 
as usual, and then the first assistant deacon takes ofi" his 
mitre; he continues Mass, the assistant priest and the 
acolyte with the hand-candlestick remaining hy the 
Missal. The deacon standing on the second step 
behind the Bishop, being incensed, remains there 
till the Sanctus^ then he goes up to the right of 
the Bishop, and says it with him and the assist- 
ant priest. Likewise, all the clergy in the sanctuary, 
two by two, say the /Sanctus^ at the same time. After 
the SanctuSy the deacon goes down to the second step 
behind the Bishop. 



296 SOLEMN" PONTIFICAL MASS. 

20. At llie Sanctus^ four or six acolytes, accornpaiiied 
by the second master of ceremonies, go froiri the sacristy 
to the sanctuary, holding in their liand large candles 
lighted ; when they reach the middle of the sanctuary, 
they make a genuflection, bow to the clergy at each 
side of the sanctuary, kneel in a line at a convenient 
distance from one another; those w^ho are at the Epistle 
side hold their candle in their right, and those at the 
Gospel side in their left hand, keeping their arm 
extended, and the end of the candle resting on the 
floor. They remain there till after the elevation, unless 
the Bishop give the Communion ; in which case they 
remain kneeling during the Communion ot the clergy, 
which is given at the altar, and accompany the Bishop 
to the railing, where he gives the Communion to the 
people. After the Communion, they go back to the 
sacristy. 

21. After the Sanctus has been recited by the Bishop 
and the clergy, all in the sanctuary and in the churcli 
kneel down, except the ministers as>isting at the altar. 
When the Bishop says Quam obUiiionem^ the deacon 
goes up to his right during the consecration and elevation, 
kneels down, raises with his lett hand the Bishop's 
chasuble on his side; after the elevation of the conse- 
craied Host, he rises, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, 
raises the Bishop's chasuble as before, and after the 
elevation of the chalice, rises, covers the chalice, and 
makes a genuflection with the Bisliop. The two assist- 
ant deacons, the sub-deacon, and the assistant priest 
remain kneeling at their places during the elevation. 
The assistant priest, with his right hand, raises the 
chasuble of the Bishop on his side during the elevation. 
The master of ceremonies rings the bell at the elevation, 
and the censer-bearer incenses thrice the Blessed Sacra- 
ment at each elevation. 

22. During the elevation, nothing should be sung; 
but some devout and harmonious air may be played 
on the organ. After the elevation, the choir sings Bene- 
dictios^ qui ve?iit, and all rise, and stand until the Com- 
munion. The celebrant continues Mass as usual; the 



AGNUS DEI. 297 

deacon makes a genuflection and goes to liis place beliind 
tlie Bishop. At the words Benedicis et prcestas 7iobis, 
the deacon goes to the right of the Bishop, makes with 
him a genuflection, and uncovers the chalice; at the 
words I^er ipsum, he places two fingers on the foot of 
the chalice, and after the w^ords, Omnis honor et gloria^ 
lie covers the chalice, makes a genuflection with the 
Bishop, and goes to his place behind him. 

23. At the Pater Noster^ when the Bishop says Et 
dirtiitte nobis, the deacon and sub-deacon, having made 
a genuflection, go up to the altar, the deacon to the 
right of the Bishop, and the sub-deacon to the right of 
the deacon ; there, the sub-deacon, placing his hand on 
the altar, the deacon uncovers the paten, receives it from 
the sub-deacon, cleans it with the purifier, kisses it, and 
puts it into the Bishop's hand, which he also kisses, 
whilst the Bishop says, Libera nos quaisumus, etc. As 
the Bishop places the paten under the Host, tlie deacon 
uncovers the chalice, makes a genuflection, and rises 
with the Bishop, who puts the particle of the Host in the 
chalice ; the deacon then covers it, an 1 again makes a 
genuflection. The sub-deacon, having given the paten 
to the deacon, takes oif his veil, gives it to the second 
master of ceremonies, and having made a 2;enuflection, 
returns to his place at the foot of the altar ; he does not 
go up to say the Agnus Dei, but he goes tu the right of 
the Bishop, whilst the deacon remains at his left, in 
place of the assistant priest. 

2i. The assistant priest and the ofl&c'ating deacon say 
the Agnus Dei, with the Bishop ; the rest of the clergy 
say it at the same time, at their places. After the 
Ag?ivs Dei, the assistant priest and tiie deacon make a 
genuflection, exchange places, and again make a genu- 
flection ; the deacon remains near the Missal, and the 
assistant priest kneels down w4iilst the celebrant says 
the prayer, Domine Jtsu Christe qui dixisti ; after 
which, he rises, kisses the altar at the same time with 
the Bishop, receives from him the Pax, approaching his 
left cheek to the left cheek of the celebranr, placing his 
two hands under the celebrant's elbows and answering, 



298 SOLEilX POXriFICAL ^fASS. 

Et cmn spiritii tuo. Then, rising, lie carries tlie Pax to 
the clergy, giving it to the first of them on each side of 
the sanctuary; on returning to the foot of the altar, he 
gives it to the master of ceremonies, by whom he was 
accompanied, and goes up to the left of tlie Bishop. Tlie 
first assistant deacon, after the assistant priest has 
received the Pax^ goes to the Bishop's right, and receives 
it in the same manner; then the second assistant deacon, 
the ofiiciating deacon, and lastly the sub-deacon. 

When the Bishop is to give Communion, after he has 
received the Precious Blood, the deacon and sub-deacon 
at his left, kneel on the platform before the Bishop, who, 
without ^2ijmg Misei'-eatur^ etc., or Ecce Agnus Dei ^ etc., 
gives them Holy Communion. They then receive the 
Fax^ kissing the Bishop's left cheek. The otfi:'iating 
deacon then sings tlie Confiteor for the C^-mm union of 
the clergy. 

25. The deacon, after the Communion, goes to the 
right of the Bishop, receives the cruets from the acolyte, 
serves the wine for the first ablution, and the wine and 
water for the second, after which he places the purifier 
on the Bishop's fingers. After the Bishop has taken the 
first ablution, the assistant priest carries the Missal, on 
its cushion or stand, from the Gospel, to the Episile side, 
followed by the acolyte with tiie candlestick. The 
deacon puts the mitre on the head of the Bishop, who 
washes his hands, two acolytes having brought tiie basin 
and ew^er, with water and the towel. Tlie assistant 
priest takes off his ring, presents him the towel to wipe 
his hands, and replaces the ring on his finger. Then 
the ofiiciating deacon takes off tiie Bishop's mitre. In 
ihe meantime, the sub-deacon, having folded the cor- 
poral, and put it in the burse, and placed the purifier, 
paten, pall, and burse on the chalice, carries it to the 
side-table, and places himself below the lower step 
behind the deacon, who stands on the middle step, 
beliind the Bishop, w^ho, attended by the assistant priest, 
and remaining near the Missal, on the Epistle side, reads 
tlie Communion, goes to the middle, followed by the 



AGNUS DEI. 209 

deacon and sub-deacon, says, Domimis voblscum.^ and 
finishes Mass as usnal. After the last prayer and 
Domimis vohiscum^ the Bishop remains turned towards 
the people, towards whom the deacon also turns, and 
sings, lie Missa est. Then both turn to the altar towards 
the^Epistle side. The Bishop having said, IHaceat tibi, 
etc., gives the solemn blessing, as usual. 

If the celebrant is an Archbishop, he gives the bless- 
ing without mitre, bowing first to the cross which is held 
before him. Then he lays his pallium on the altar, and 
says, Jnitium Sancti Evaiigelii. 

When the Indulgence has not been already published, 
in consequence of no sermon having been prenched, the 
assistant priest publishes it as usual, from the Epistle 
side. 

26. The Bishop then takes off his mitre, begins the 
Gospel of St. John, at the Gospel side, puts on the mitre, 
takes the crosier in his left hand, and continues the 
Gospel while going to his seat, where he finishes it. 

27. The Gospel being ended, the two assistant deacons 
give their places to the deacon and sub-deacon, and retire 
to the ministers' bench. The Bishop, having disrobed, 
washes his hands, and puts on the cappa and pectoral 
cross; then two acolytes bring the book and candle, and 
the master of ceremonies brings the Bishop's shoes to 
his seat, who reads the thanksgiving, whilst the aco- 
lytes take off his sandals and put on his shoes. Which 
being done, and the thanksgiving ended, the clergy and 
Bishop return to the sacristy, and thence the Bishop is 
accompanied to his house, or to his room where he may 
jnit on his rochet and cape. 



100 SOLEMN MASS IN" PPtESEiq-CB 



CHAPTEE YII. 

SOLKAIN MASS CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP 
DRESSED IN COPE. 

1. On solemn festivals, when the Bishop does not cele- 
brate a Pontifical Mass, it is proper tliat he should assist 
at the divine service in mitre and cope. On such 
occasions, what follows is to be observed : 

2. The Bishop's vestments should be placed on the 
altar, viz., amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross on a plate, 
stole and cope ; two mitres, one on each side, and the 
crosier. 

On the side-table, besides everything necessary for 
High Mass, a Missal for the Bishop, the hand candlestick 
with a candle, the basin and ewer, and a towel on a 
plate. 

3. The celebrant and ministers go to the church before 
the Bishop, and seat themselves at the bench, waiting 
for him. The acolytes place their candlesticks on the 
table, and the thurifer with the holy-water vase stands 
near the deacon. 

4. The Bishop, accompanied by the clergy, goes to the 
church, and having arrived at the middle of the sanctuary, 
kneels before the faldstool, rises, after having said a short 
prayer, and with him all the clergy rise. Then, between 
the two assistant deacons, preceded by the assistant 
priest, he goes to his seat, where he puts on all the vest- 
ments before mentioned, and sits down. Then the cele- 
brant and ministers go to the altar, having first made 
the necessary bows. The Bishop rises. The celebrant 
intones the antiphoii and sprinkles the altar as usual, 
then he rises, and, accompanied by the master of cere- 
monies and the cleric carrying the holy-water vase, he 
goes to the throne. The Bishop takes the sprinkle 
from the celebrant and sprinkles himself, the celebrant 
and the assistant at the throne; then he hands the 
sprinkle to the celebrant, who, having made a profound 



OF THE BISHOP IIT COPE. 301 

Low, (which he also does while the Bishop is sprinkling 
him,) returns to the altar and sprinkles the ministers, who 
then rise. The rest is done as prescribed in Part 111, 
Ciiap. 11, Art. YIl, page 176, n. 4. 

AVhen the celebrant and ministers return from the 
bench to the altar they await the Bishop, a little at 
one side. 

5. The Bishop, with mitre and crosier, goes to the 
altar, takes off his mitre, bows to the cross, the others 
making a g:eniiflection, and, having the celebrant on his 
lel't, the assistant deacons standing innnediately behind 
him, and the deacon and siib-deacon of the Mass to the 
left and behind the celebrant, and the acolytes with the 
mitre and crosier behind the a. sistant deacon, he makes 
the Confession, saying, as usual. In nomine Patris^ etc., 
the celebrant and the ministers answering. After the 
prayer, Indulgentiam^ ahsolutionem^ the Bishop makes 
a profound bow, receiv^es the mitre and the crosier from 
the first assistant deacon, and returns to his seat; the 
celebrant having bowed to the Bishop, goes to the middle 
and continues Mass. 

6. The Bishop, on arriving at his seat, lays aside the 
crosier and sits w^ith his mitre on ; then the censer- 
bearer, presenting the censer, and giving the boat to the 
assistant priest, the Bishop puts incense into the ceiiser, 
and blesses it, as usual. Tiie celebrant incenses the 
cross and altar, as usual; then he is incensed with tw^o 
swings only, by the deacon, who gives the ccmser to the 
censer-bearer, by whom it is carried to the Bishop's seat, 
and given to the assistant priest, who is below the 
lowest step, where he incenses the Bishop vvitli three 
swings. Afterwards, the Bisliop sits, and his mitre is 
taken off by the second assistant deacon, and the 
Missal and candlestick are brought betbre the Bisliop 
by the acolytes, who commences the IrUroit^ wlicn 
the celebrant begins to read it at the altar. After tlie 
Introit^ the Bishop says the Kyrie alternately with tlie 
assistants and the priests who are present at Mass in the 
sanctuary dressed in surplices. They go before the 
Bishop's seat, placing themselves in a eemi-circle ; after 



302 SOLEMN" MASS liT PRESENCE 

bavins: bowed to liim, tbey say tbe Kyrie and Gloria 
with the Bishop; at the end of the Kyrie^ they bow and 
return to their place3. The Bishop, as they bow, give:5 
them his blessinir. If the choir has not finished singing 
the Kyrie^ the Bishop sits, receives the mitre, and tlie 
assistants also sit and cover their heads; otherwise, lie 
ren.ains standing. At the Gloria^ he rises witliont his 
mitre ; the book is not held befo^'e him during the Gloria^ 
but he says it by heart with his assistants, standing. He 
sits, witli his mitre on, after the Gloria. During the 
Dominus vohiscum and tho Collects, the Bisliop stands 
with his head uncovered. After the Collects, he sits 
with his mitre on. The sub-deacon, turned towards the 
Bishop, sings the Epistle, and, having sung it, goes to 
kiss the Bishop's hand, and to receive his blessing. Then 
the acolytes come to him with the Missal and candle- 
stick, and the Bishop reads the Epistle and Tract, says, 
JShinda cor meum^ and reads the Gospel. 

7. A little before the Bishop finishes reading the Gos- 
pel, the deacon, having placed the Missal on the middle 
of the altar, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand; he then 
returns to the altar, and says, kneeling, Mimda cor 
Qneam. In the meantime, the censer-bearer carries the 
censer, to the Bi'^hop's seat, and the incense is put in, 
and blessed by the Bishop, as usual. Afterwards, the 
deacon and sub-deacon, with the master of ceremonies, 
censer-bearer, and acolytes, go to the Bishop's seat, as 
has been said elsewhere, and kneel down ; the deacon 
asks and receives the blessing, and sings the Gospei, 
as usuaL After it, the sub deacon carries the boo!: to 
the Bishop to be kissed ; and the assistant priest incenses 
the Bishop. The celebrant is not incensed. 

If there is a sermon, the preacher asks the Bishop's 
blessing. 

8. At the Credo^ the Bishop rises, the priests go before 
his seat, as at the Kyrie and Gloria, say it with him, and 
kneel also with him, at the words Incarnatus est. The 
book is rot carried to the Bisliop, who says the Credo by 
heart. At the Otfertory, the Bishop, standing witii his 
head uncovered, reads it out of the Missal, which the 



OF THE BISHOP 11^ COPE. 303 

acolyte holds open before Lira ; and then sits with the 
mitre oa. Afterwards he puis incense into the censer 
and blesses it. The sub-deacon, without leaving the 
altar, presents the cruet with water to the Bishop, and 
says, Benedicite^ Rtverendisshne Pater ; the Bishop 
then blesses the water. The celebrant incenses the obla- 
tion, the cross, and the altar, as usual, then he is incensed 
twice only by the deacon, who carries the censer to the 
Bishop's seat; and the assistant priest, coming down to 
the foot of the throne, receives the censer, incenses the 
Bishop thrice, returns the censer to the deacon, who 
incenses the assistant priest, the first and second at-sistant 
deacons, and afterwards the clergy in the sanctuary, and 
the sub-deacon. 

9. At the Preface, the Bishop stands with his head un- 
covered ; he recites the Sanctus by heart, with the assist- 
ants and the priests, who go before his seat as at the 
Kyrie and Gloria. After the Sanchis^ the Bishop goes 
to the middle of the sanctuary, between the two assistant 
deacons, and followed by the acolytes carrying the 
crosier and mitre, and there kneels at the faldstool, till 
after the elevation, and the sub-deacon will take care to 
move a little towards the Epistle corner, so as to avoid 
turning his back to the Bishop; the Bishop then returns 
to his seat, and stands till after the Communion of the 
priest. 

10. At the Agnus Dei^ the priests go to the Bishop's 
seat, and say it with him; then they return to their 
places. The assistant priest goes to the right of the 
celebrant, and, with the usual ceremonies, receives from 
him the Pax, and goes to give it to the Bishop, who gives 
it to the first a id second assistant deacons. The cele- 
brant gives it also to the deacon. But the sub-deacon 
receives it from the assistant priest, and then gives it to 
the first clergyman on each side of the sanctuary, as in 
other High Masses. If the celebrant gives Communion, 
the Bisiiop kneels as at the elevation ; after Comnmnion, 
the Bishop reads the communion in the Missal, and sits 
with his mitre on. 

11. At the Bominus voMscum, the Bishop and the 



304 SOLEMN MASS. 

clergy rise, and stand during the prayers. The celebrant 
does not give the blessing, but the Bishop gives it 
solemnly, as usual ; after which the celebrant publishes 
the Indulgence, and finishes Mass, as usual. 

12. After Mass, the celebrant, with the deacon and 
sub-deacon, and the acolytes, with their candlesticks, 
having made a genutlection to the cross, and bowed to 
the Bishop and clergy, go to the sacristy. The Bishop 
takes oli* the sacred vestments, puts on tlie cape and 
pectoral cross, and having prayed a short time before 
the altar, retires, accompanied by the clergy. 



CHAPTEE YIIL 

OF SOLEMN MASS, 

CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP, NOT DRESSED IN COPE 
AND MITRE, BUT IN CAPPA MAGNA. 

1. Everything is to be observed as in the preceding 
chapter, with the following exceptions: 

2. The Bishop is incensed only at the Oifertory. 

3. The celebrant is incensed, as usual, at the begin- 
ning of Mass, after the Gospel, and at the Oli'ertory, 
twice only on each occasion. 

4. The Bishop may go from the sacristy to the sanc- 
tuary, at the same time with the celebrant, but behind 
him, immediately preceded by tho assistant priest, and 
liaving at his side the two assistant deacons; he may 
likewise return to the sacristy behind the celebrant in 
the same manner. 

[The Bishop cannot assist on his throne at a High 
Mass or a Solemn Mass wearing only his rochet and 
mozetta.] 



VESPERS FOE, THE DEAD. 305 

CHAPTER IX. 

VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. 
CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop at these Yespers wears the cape, or the 
pontifical mantle,* over his rochet. He sits in his stall 
in the choir, or on his seat, but without assistant priests 
and deacons. 

2. Yespers are begun with the antiphon, Placebo 
Doinino^ sung by the choir, during which the Bishop 
and the clergy stand w^ith their heads uncovered. Whon 
they begin the Psalm, Dllexi^ they all sit and put on 
their caps. When the Magyiificat \^ begun, they all take 
them oil", and rise. They sit down again, whilst the 
choir repeats the antiphon after the Magnificat; after 
which the Bishop says, in an audible voice. Pater noster^ 
which is secretly continued and finished by all, kneeling. 

3. At the same time, two acolytes, with their candle- 
sticks and lighted candles, and a third one with the book, 
come before the Bishop, who says, still kneeling, Et ne 
nos inducas^ etc., with the other verses, as in the 
Breviary. When he says Dominus vohiscum, he rises, 
and says the prayer, Requiem wternam. Then the 
chanters sing Pequiescant in pace. 

4. Should the Bishop sit at the nsual place, at the 
Pater noster^ etc., he kneels before the faldstool, and 
there finishes the prayers. The same thing is to be 
observed of Matins. 

* The ca;ppa magna is a fall robe with a train. 



306 MATINS AN^D LAUDS TOR THE DEAD. 



CHAPTER X. 

MATINS AND LAUDS FOR THE DEAD. 
CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop at these Matins is vested, and sits as at 
Vespers. 

2. Having sat for a short time, the Bishop rises, and 
with hini all the clergy. The choir begins the Invitato- 
riuTYi: Begem, cui omnia vivunt, etc., during which, 
and the Psalm, Yenite exultemus, all stand. When the 
Psalm of the first nocturn is begun, they all sit, and put 
on their caps. After the verses of the first nocturn, they 
all rise, with their heads uncovered, and say in secret 
the Pater nosier ; after which the Bishop and the clergy 
sit down. The Leseons are sung by the clergy in the 
middle of the sanctuary at the desk. The same is done 
in the other nocturns. 

3. After the ninth response, Lauds are said, the Bishop 
and the clergy sitting. When the Benedictus is begun, 
they all rise, with their heads uncovered. Whilst the 
antiphon is repeated after, it, they sit and cover their 
heads. 

4. After the antiphon, they rise, the acolytes go with 
the candlesticks and the book before the Bishop, and 
everything is done as at Vespers, 



SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. 307 



CHAPTER XL 

SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

Article I. 

Things to he Prepared. 

1. The altar should be dresssed in the plainest manner, 
havin_f>; on it the cross and six candlesticks with candles 
of unbleached wax; before it a black antipendiuin. The 
veil on the tabernacle, if the Blessed Sacrament is there, 
should be of purple color. 

It is contrary to the Rubrics to put about the altar 
vestments, stools, or books, any representation of death, 
cr white crosses."^ 

2. On the side-table, two candlesticks with candles of 
unbleached wax; the basin and ewer, and a plate with 
some towels; the Missal, the canon, a vase with holy 
water and a sprinkle, the chalice, with everything neces- 
sary for Mass. 

3. On the bench of the ministers, the maniples for the 
deacon and sub-deacon. 

4. On the altar the Bishop's vestments, viz., a black 
chasuble, dalmatic, tunic, stole, and maniple, cincture, 
alb, and amice. The pectoral cross and ring on a plate ; 
and a plain white mitre. 

The Bishop does not use sandals, gloves, or crosier at 
this Mass. 

The tabernacle may be covered with purple, or not 
covered. 

5. In the sacristy, a black cope for the assistant priest ; 
two black dalmatics, two cinctures, albs, and amice.-, lor 
tlie two assistant deacons ; also a black dalmatic and 
stole, with a cincture, alb, and amice, for the officiating 

* Caeremoniale Episc, chap, xi, ]ib. ii. 



808 SOLEMK POi^TIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

deacon ; and a tunic, cincture, alb, and amice, for the 
sub-deacon. Moreover, as many black copes, chasubles, 
dalmatics, and tunics, with amices, albs, and cinctures, 
as may be required for the clergy, who assist in sacred 
vestments at the Pontifical Mass. Lastly, a cope for the 
Bishop, to be taken to him by an acolj^te after Alass. 

6. A black carpet and four candlesticks must be kept 
ready, in a convenient place, to be extended before the 
Bishop's seat after Mass, for the absolution, unless a ceno- 
taph or monument be erected in the middle of the 
church; in this case the processional cross is to be pre- 
pared at the Epistle side. 

Article IL 
From the Beginning to the End of Mass, 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as usual. 

2. The clergy should put on their respective vestments 
before the Bishop arrives at the sacristy. 

3. They all go from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 

4. The Bishop, having arrived at his seat, attended by 
the deacon and sub-deacon, and the assistant priest (the 
assistant deacons remaining at the ministers' bench 
whilst the Bishop is dressing"), does not say the anthem, 
JSfereminiscaris^ nor the Psalms which follow; but he 
takes ofP his cape, reading, from the book which is 
held open before him by an acolyte, the prayer, Exxie^ 
etc. ; he then washes his hands, puts on the vestments 
prepared on the altar, as in Art. 1, n. 4, saying the 
respective prayers, and having received the mitre, sits 
for a short time ; the assistant deacons go to his side, and 
the deacon and sub-deacon go to put on their maniples. 

At this Mass, whenever the ministers give anything to 
the celebrant, or receive it from him, they do not kiss it, 
nor the celebrant's hand. 

During the Collects, the clergy in the sanctuary, with 
the exception of the Bishop's assistants, kneel down, as 
also from the Sanctus till the Pater noster. 

6. The Bishop being vested, he, and the assistants and 



FROir BEGIInNIN-G to Eiq-D OF MASS. 809 

ministers, go to the altar, and take their places, as 
directed above. The Psalm, Judica^ is not said. After 
the Confession, he saj^s the usual prayers, goes up 
to the altar with the assistant priest, deacon and sub- 
deacon ; he then kisses the altar, bnt not the Missal ; 
neither does he incense the cross or the altar; having 
kissed the altar, he returns to his seat between the assist- 
ant deacons; and the deacon and sub-deacon go to their 
seat. 

6. The Bishop having returned to his seat, takes oft' 
the mitre; the acoljte holding the book before him, he 
reads the Introit^ and says the Kyrie^ alternately with 
his assistants, which last is said likewise by the deacon 
and sub-deacon, and all the clergy in the sanctuary. 

7. After the choir has finished singing the Kyrie^ the 
Bishop, rising, his head being uncovered, sings, JDominus 
vobiscuin^ and the Collect. He then sits with his mitro 
on. The sub-deacon sings the Epistle as usual ; but 
after it, he does not go to the Bishop to receive his bless- 
ing. The Bishop reads the Epistle, and afterwards the 
Tract and Sequentia ; says, Munda cor meum, etc, but 
not Juhe Domne, etc., and reads the Gospel. The deacon 
and sub-deacon sit at their bench. About the end of the 
Sequentia^ the deacon carries the book to the alt-i!-, 
and without going to kiss the Bishop's hand, kneeling 
01 the highest step, says, Munda cor meum^ etc. The 
sub-deacon, at the same time, places himself before the 
lowest step, so as to be at the leit of the deacon when he 
goes down; two acolytes place themselves behind them, 
without candleticks. At a signal given by tlie master 
of ceiemonies, they go to sing the Gospel. The book 
is not incensed before the Gospel is sung, nor the cele- 
brant after it; nor does the sub-deaeon carry the book 
10 the Bishop; who immediately after the Gospel, sings 
Doininus vobiscum and Or emus ^ reads the Offertory^ 
and washes his hands. 

8. The Bishop, having washed his hands, goes to the 
altar, and everything is done as before, except, 1st, the 
sub-deacon, before he puts water into the chalice, does 
not say Benedicite^ etc., and the Bishop does not bless it; 



310 SOLEMN POiq'TIFICAL MASS FOE THE DEAD. 

2dlj, the sub-deacon does not put on the veil, nor hold 
the paten ; 3dly, after having incensed the altar, the 
Bishop alone is incensed bj the deacon. 

9. At the Sanctus^ four acolytes go from the sacristy 
into the sanctuary with four torches, as directed above, 
and remain kneeling until after the Communion. 

10. The sub deacon, at the elevation, kneels on the 
lowest step of the altar at the Epistle side, and incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament. 

11. The Pax is not given. 

12. At the end of Mass, the blessing is not given. The 
deacon, turned towards the altar, sings, Requiescant in 
pace. The Bishop, having said, Placeat tibl^ begins, at 
the Gospel side, the Gospel of St. John, receives the 
mitre, and continues the Gospel in going to his seat. 

13. If candles are distributed, tiiey are given out 
whilst the Sequentia is being sung ; they are lighted at 
the Gospel, at the elevation, and after Mass during the 
absolution. i^Cmr. Ep.^ lib. 11^ Cap. XI, n. 6.) 

Aeticle III. 
The Absolution after Mass. 

1. The Bishop, having finished the Gospel at his seat, 
takes off the mitre, maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, and 
tunic, and puts on the cope, previously brought by one 
of the acolytes from the sacristy, then receives the mitre, 
and sits down. The deacon and sub-deacon take off 
their maniples before they help the Bishop to disrobe. 
If a funeral oration is to be delivered, tlie preacher, 
dressed in his cassock, without surplice, after a short 
prayer before the altar, without asking the B shop's 
blessing, but having made a profound reverence to him, 
goes into the pulpit, which is to be dressed wiih black 
hangings; and having there made again a profound bow 
to the Bishop, he makes the sign ot the cross, and begins 
his discourse. 

2. After the funeral oration, or if there be none, after 
Mass, a large black cloth is spread before the Bishop's 



THE ABSOLUTION- AFTER MASS. 311 

Beat, and four cancllesticks placed at its corners. In the 
meantime, the Bishop sits down, and the clioir sini^s 
Libera me, etc. ; whilst this response is repeated, two 
acolytes, one with the censer and boat, the other with 
the holy-water vase, go to the Bishop, who, whilst the 
assistant priest holds the boat, puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it; then he rises, his head being 
uncovered, and after the last Kyrie has been sung, he 
says the words Pater noster, in an audible voice ; con- 
tinues the prayer in silence, and having received the 
sprinkle from the assistant priest, sprinkles the black 
cloth three times ; he then gives him back the sprinkle 
and receives the censer, and incenses the cloth thrice 
also ; the assistant deacons holding, during all this time, 
the extremities of his cope on each side. Two acolytes, 
with candlesticks and lighted candles, now come to the 
foot of the Bishop's seat, and another, wdth the book 
immediately before him, and the Bishop sings, Et ne nos, 
etc., with the other verses, and the prayer; after which 
he repeats, Requiem (Bternam, and the chanters sing, 
Hequiescant in pace, etc. ; the Bishop makes, at the same 
time, the sign of the cross towards the cloth. 

If there be a monument, or cenotaph, in the middle 
of the church, the absolution should be made there. All 
go thither in procession in the following order: two aco- 
lytes, one with the censer and boat, and the other with 
the holy-water vase; the sub-deacon carrying the cross 
between two acolytes with candleticks and lighted can- 
dles; then the clergy, two by two, according to their 
order; the deacon at the left of the assistant priest; the 
Bishop between the two assistant deacons, followed by 
the acolytes, who wait on him with the mitre, book, etc. ; 
when they reach the place, the two acolytes, with the 
censer and holy-water vase, stop at the head of it on 
the right side, and the sub-deacon, with the acolytes at 
his side, goes to the foot of the same place ; the clergy 
divide into two lines, one on each side of the monument, 
and the Bishop sits on the faldstool in the middle, at the 
head of the same, where he performs what has been 
directed above. 



312 SOLEMN" MASS FOR THE DEAD. 

On particular occasions, for instance at a funeral ser- 
vice for the Pope, etc., besides the Bishop, there are four 
other prelates or priests, who, after Mass, put on copes, 
and perform four absolutions before that performed bj 
the Bishop; they walk two by two, immediately before 
the assistant priest, and when they come to the cenotapli, 
sit on seats placed at each corner of it. Then all rise, 
and the assistant priest holds the book before the Bishop, 
who reads, Non intres ; the choir afterwards sin^s the 
the response, Suhvenite^ and the prelate first in diojnity, 
who is placed at the right corner at the head of the 
monument, attended by the deacon, puts incense into 
the censer, blesses it, says, at the proper time, Pater 
noster^ sprinkles the monument thrice at each corner, 
going round it, beginning on hiri right side, incenses it in the 
same manner, says, Et ne nos^ and the verses and prayer 
as in the Roman. Pontifical. Then the prelate second 
in dignity, who is placed at the left corner, at the foot of 
the monument, does the same; so also the prelate third 
in dignity, placed at the left corner at the head of the 
monument. The same is done by the prelate fourth in 
dignity, who is placed at the right corner, at the foot of 
the monument. Last of all, the Bishop perlorms the 
same, after the Libera has been sung, as is to be found 
in the Roman Pontifical But if there are no other 
prelates present, the Bishop alone is to bless the incense. 



CHAPTER XII. 

SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD, CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OP 
THE BISHOP. 

1. The Bishop may assist at solemn Mass for the dead, 
either with cappa or with black cope and plain mitre. 

2. Should he assist in cope and mitre, his vestments 
are placed on the altar, and he puts them on, as men- 
tioned above ; but he does not use the crosier. 



IN"STRUCTION" FOR ASSISTANT PRIEST. 313 

3. He makes the Confession at the beginning of Mass ; 
but lie does not say the Psahn, Judlca. 

4. He puts incense into the censer; but he is incensed 
bj the assistant priest at the Offertory only, after the 
deacon has incensed the celebrant twice. 

5. At the Collects, he goes to the middle of the sanc- 
tuary, and kneels during them at the faldstool between 
his assistant deacons. 

6. After the Sanctus^ he goes likewise to the middle, 
and kneels till the Agnus Dei^ which he says at his seat ; 
but the priests in the sanctuary do not go before his seat. 

7. At the Post Communion, he goes again to the 
middle, and kneels as before ; he then returns to his. seat, 
but he does not give the blessing. 

8. After Mass, he performs the absolution, observing 
what has been said in the foregoing chapter. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

PARTICULAR INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE DIFFERENT OFFICERS 
WHO ATTEND THE BISHOP. 

Article I. 

INSTKUCTION FOR THE ASSISTANT PRIEST. 

Section I. — His Quality, Dress, and Place. 

1. The assistant priest, who, in the Pontifical, is some- 
times called by the name of archdeacon, is the first 
amongst all the ministers of the Bishop. Therefore this 
ofiice should generally be exercised by the most con- 
spicuous clergyman, who holds the first rank in the 
diocese. 

2. His dress, when the Bishop ofiiciates pontifically, is 
the amice over his surplice (or rochet, if he be entitled 
to wear it), and the cope. 



314 IKSTRUCTI0IT3 FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

3. He sits on a stool placed on the platform of the 
pontifical chair, and at the rio^ht of the first assistant 
deacon ; however, should the place not allow this arrange- 
ment, he may sit at the left of the second assistant 
deacon ; in either case his stool must not be on the same 
line with those of the assistant deacons, but a little for- 
ward towards the steps of the platform.* 

Section II. — His Office in General, 

1. The assistant priest, after the Bishop is dressed, puts 
the ring on his finger; he also takes it oft* every time 
the Bishop is to wash his hands, and puts it on his finger 
again, and presents to him. the towel; he holds the book 
before the Bishop, whenever he sings anything out of it 
at Vespers or High Mass ; but when the Bishop reads, 
the book is to be held by an acolyte; he holds the 
incense-boat, and presents the spoon to the Bishop every 
time the Bishop is to put the incense into the censer, 
and says, Benedicite^ Pater JRevereiidissime ; bnt at 
Mass, only when he is at his pontifical chair, for the 
deacon is to present it when he is at the altar at Mass. 
He incenses the Bishop when he is at his chair. 

Section III. — His Office at Pontifical Vesj)ers. 

1. The assistant priest holds the book before the 
Bishop when he intones the first antiplion. 

2. Standing at liis place he intones the third antiplion. 

3. He holds the book when the Bishop intones the 
hjmn; after the antiphon of the Magnificat has been 
intoned, he presents the spoon to the Bishop, to put in 
the incense, kissing, as usual, both the spoon and the 
Bishop's hand, and saying, jBenedicite, etc. When the 
Magnificat is begun, he walks before the Bishop to the 
altar; on arriving there, after the Bishop has kissed it, 
he gives him the censer with the usual kisses; after the 

*The Ceremonial says: " He should sit on a stool near and in front 
of the Bishop, on his right, or, if the place will not permit, on his 
left; but his regular place is on the Bishop's rigbt." 



ASSISTANT PRIEST. 315 

incensing, he takes it back, and gives it to the censer- 
bearer; returns to the Bishop's seat, walking before him, 
and there standing below tlie lowest step, he incenses 
the Bishop with three swings, goes up to his seat, is 
incensed with two swings, holds the book before the 
Bishop whilst he sings the prayer, then returns to his 
place, and after Yespers takes off his cope as usual. 

Section IY. — The Office of the Assistant Priest at 
Pontifical Mass. 

1. As the assistant priest particularly attends the 
Bishop at the book, it is his duty to prepare, find, and 
mark, with the usual ribbons in the Missal, the Mass of 
the day, the commemorations, and whatever is to be 
read or sung by the Bishop, to whom he is to point out 
everything, and suggest what he has to sing or read. 

2. The assistant priest puts on the cope over the amice, 
which he puts over the surplice, or rochet, if he bo 
entitled to wear it. Whilst the Bishop reads the Psalms 
for the preparation of Mass, standing near the first or 
second assistant deacon, he answers together with them, 
and alternately with the Bishop ; then he offers the 
towel to the Bishop, when he washes his hands; holds 
the book before the Bishop at the prayer of Tierce; 
puts the ring on the Bishop's ti.nger after he is vested, 
offers the spoon, when the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer, walks to the high altar at the riglit of the 
officiating deacon, places himself near the Bishop, and 
at his right below the lowest step, makes a genuffection, 
answers to the confession, making a profound bow to 
the Bishop, when he says £t tibi Pater, and J^L te Pater. 

3. When the Bishop has kissed the altar, the assistant 
priest holds the Missal, which the sub-deacon off'tjrs to 
the Bishop, and he retires on the Gospel side, below the 
the steps, during the incensing; after it, he walks to the 
Bishop's chair before him; there he stands at his place, 
whilst the Bishop reads the Introit and Kyrie, to which 
he answers with the assistant deacons; after it he s!ts. 
He holds the Missal whilst the Bishop sings Gloria m 



316 IKSTRUCTIOXS FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

excelsis Deo ; gives it to the acolyte after the Bishop has 
sung those words ; holds it again before him whilst he 
sings the prayers; and incenses the Bishop after the 
Gospel. During the sermon, if the Bishop preaches at 
his seat, he sits at his usual place; but if he preaches 
at the altar, he sits at the right of the Bishop, and the 
deacon at the left. After the deacon has sung the Coiv- 
fiteor, the assistant priest publishes the Indulgences. 
But if the assistant priest preaches (for he that preaches 
at the Pontifical Mass, ought to perform the office of 
assistant priest), after the Gospel, having incensed the 
Bishop, he asks his benediction, saying, Juhe^ Doiniie 
henedicere^ kisses his hand, preaches dressed as he is in 
cope, and after the Confiteo7\ sung by the deacon from 
the pulpit, publishes the Indulgences. He holds the 
Missal whilst the Bishop sings the Credo. 

4. The Bishop having read the Oflfertory, the assistant 
priest attends him with the towel, when he washes his 
hands, puts the ring on his finger, carries the Missal to 
the altar, goes to the altar walking before the Bishop; in 
case, for greater convenience, tiie Missal was carried 
thither by an acolyte, the assistant priest attends the 
Bishop, standing at his left near the book, and turns the 
leaves, when necessary ; when the Bishop incenses the 
sacred offerings and the altar, the assistant priest takes 
the Missal with its stand from the altar, and retires with 
it to the Gospel side, below the steps ; after the incens- 
ing, he puts it back in the same place ; assists at the 
washing of the hands, presenting the towel as usual, and 
remains near the Missal to attend the Bishop. He says 
Sanctus^ with the Bishop, kneels only at the elevation, 
and makes a genuflection whenever the Bishop makes it. 
He says with him, Agnus Dei ; after it, he exchanges 
piace with the deacon, and when the Bishop says tlie 
first prayer, Domiiie Jesu Chrlste^ he kneels at his right ; 
after it, he rises, kisses the altar at the same time with 
the celebrant, receives from him the Pax^ approaching 
his lefi cheek to the celebrant's left cheek; and when he 
has said Pax tecum^ the assistant priest answers, Et cum 
sjjiritu tuo. Then he makes a genuflection, and attended 



ASSISTANT PRIEST. 317 

by the master of ceremonies, gives tlie Pax to tliose of 
the clergy on each side of the sanctuary who occupy the 
first places or stalls on each row, making no reveience 
before he gives it, but only after he has given it. Lastly, 
he gives it to the master of ceremonies, by whom he was 
accompanied. 

5. The assistant priest, after having given the Fax to 
the master of ceremonies, returns to his place, at the left 
of tlie Bishop ; after the ablution, he carries the Missal 
from the Gospel side to the Epistle side, attends the 
Bishop, when he washes his hands, presenting to him the 
towel, goes near the book at the riglit of the Bishop, and 
when the Indulgences have not been published, if there 
has not been any sermon, he publishes them alter the 
Bishop has given the blessing. 

Section Y. — The Office of the Assistant Priest^ when the 
Bishop does not celehrate himself, hut only assists at 
Mass or Vesjfei^s celebrated hy others. 

1. When the Bishop does not celebrate, but assists, 
either in cope, or in his large mantle or cappa, the assist- 
ant priest attends him in his usual choral dress, viz., in 
surplice, or in rochet, if he be entitled to use it. 

2. The assistant priest presents the incense-boat to the' 
Bishop, incenses him, if he assists in cope and mitre, 
after the Introit, after the Gospel, and at the Offertory; 
after the Agnus Dei, he goes to the altar, kneels, rises, 
kisses the altar, receives the Pax from the celebrant, 
gives it to the Bishop, who gives it to his assistant 
deacons, and on returning to his seat he gives it to the 
sub-deacon, by whom it is given to the clergy ; but if 
Mass be celebrated by a prelate who has his own assistant 
priest, the latter receives it from the Bishop's assistant 
priest, and gives it to the others. 



318 iJ^'STRucTioiNrs for different officers. 

Article II. 

INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TWO ASSISTANT DEACONS. 

Section" I. — Their Office^ Dress and Place. 

1. Whenever the Bishop officiates pontifical ly, either 
for Mass or for Yespers, two clergymen, the highest in 
dignity i ext to liiin that performs the office of assistant 
priest, ought to attend the Bishop. 

2. They ought to be dressed in rochet or snrplice amice 
and dalmatic; they wear neither maniples nor stoles. 
Custom permits them to wear albs, instead of rochet or 
surplice; and this use prevails througliout this country; 
it may, therefore, be followed. 

8. The assistant deacons sit on each side of the Bishop, 
on two stools placed on the platform, whereon stands the 
Bishop's chair. Tiiey walk at his side, and if he is 
dressed in cope, they raise it, eacli on his own side. 

4. A Bishop officiating out of his diocese is not entitled 
to have the two assistant deacons. 

Section II. — The Office of the Two Assistant Deacons 
at the Pontifical Vespers, 

1. Whenever the Bishop kneels before the altar at the 
faldstool, the assistant deacons adjust the sides of his 
cope. 

2. The second assistant deacon, at the Bishop's left, 
takes off the mitre, and gives it to the acolyte; the first 
assistant deacon at liis right takes off his cap, and gently 
presses down his hair, every time the Bishop is to take 
off his mitre. 

3. The first assistant deacon, at the Bishop's right, 
having first put on his cap, puts the mitre on him, and 
the second assistant deacon helps him, and fixes behind 
him the mitre-bands every time the Bishop is to put on 
the mitre. Everj^ time the Bishop raises his hand, either 
to make the sign of the cross on himself, or to bless 
some person or thing, or to put incense into the censer, 
or to strike his breast, or to incense the altar, or to do 



ASSISTANT DEACON'S. 319 

anytliiiig else, the first assistant deacon raises the cele- 
brant's cope on his side; likewise, whenever the Bishop 
raises both his hands, when he has to read anything out 
of the book, or to give the solemn blessing, both assist- 
ant deacons, on each side of him, raise his cope. When- 
ever the Bishop sings, or reads anything from the book, 
the two assistant deacons, on each side, ])ut their hands 
on the book, the first assistant deacon turns the leaves of 
the book, and the second points out what he has to sing 
or read. 

Sectio:n III. — The Office of the Assistant Deacons at the 
Pontifical Mass. 

1. The assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, 
as soon as he is dressed for Tierce, and sit there till the 
chapter is sung. Then they rise, the second assistant 
deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and they both attend 
him standing till Tierce is finished ; then they give their 
places to the deacon and sub-deacon. When the Bishop 
has put on all the vestments for Mass, they return to 
his side, walk with him to the altar, where, being 
arrived, the second assistant deacon takes ofi" his mitre, 
and they make a genuflection ; the first assistant deacon 
gives his place to the assistant priest, the second assistant 
deacon to the officiating deacon, and retiring each 
behind him to whom he gave way, remain there answer- 
ing, and bowing p otbundly at the Confiieor ; during 
the incensing, they go up to the second step, the first 
assistant deacon towards the Epistle side, and the second 
assistant deacon towards the Gospel side, and remain 
there till it is finished ; then the first assistant deacon 
puts the mitre on the Bishop ; after the Bishop has been 
incensed, they both go at his side to the pontifical chair, 
tho second assistant deacon takes ofi" his mitre, they 
both attend him standing whilst he reads the Introit and 
Kyrie, to which they answer; then the first assistant 
deacon (if the choir have not done singing the Kyrie) 
puts on him the mitre, and both seat themselves. The 
Kyrie being sung, they rise; the second assistant deacon 



320 INSTRUCTION'S FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

takes off the Bishop's mitre ; thej attend him whilst he 
reads the Gloria^ and when he has finished it, and 
seated himself, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre 
on him. After the Gloria has been sung by the choir, 
they both rise, the second assistant deacon takes off the 
Bishop's mitre, and both attend him, whilst he sings the 
prayer and the Collects; after which, the first assistant 
deacon puts on him the mitre, and they both sit, whilst 
the Epistle is sung; they rise after it, and, standing, 
attend the Bishop, whilst he reads the Epistle, Tract, etc., 
and Gospel, and whilst he puts the incense into the 
censer; they then sit; when the Bishop has given the 
blessing to the deacon, and the latter is about to begin 
the Gospel, they both rise ; the second assistant deacon 
takes off* the Bishop's mitre, and they stand whilst the 
Gospel is sung ; after the Bishop has been incensed, if 
there is a sermon, the first assistant deacon puts the 
mitre on him, and they sit during the sermon; after it 
the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre 
before he sings the absolution ; after it, the first assistant 
deacon puts the mitre on him ; at the blessing, they both 
bow profoundly and make the sign of the cross on them- 
selves; after the blessing, the second assistant deacon 
takes off the Bishop's mitre; they both standing attend 
him, and with him say the Ci-edo ; they kneel at the 
Incarnatus ; the Creed being ended, the first assistant 
deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop; whilst the Incar- 
natus is sung, they make a profound bow. The Creed 
being sung, they rise, the second assistant deacon takes 
ofi* the Bishop's mitre, and standing they attend him 
whilst he says the Offertory; after it, the first assistant 
deacon puts the mitre on him, takes off* his glove 
from his right hand, and the second assistant deacon 
from his left, and they give them to the master of 
ceremonies. After he has washed his hands, they go 
at his side to the altar, but the ofiiciating deacon takes 
off* the mitre, they make a genuflection, go up to the 
second step, remain there whilst the Bishop is at the 
altar; the first assistant deacon puts on him the mitre 
before he is incensed, and takes it ofi* after the in- 



OFFICIATING DEACON". 321 

censinor; at tlie elevation they both kneel down at 
their place, and likewise the blessing. After the assist- 
ant priest has received the Pax^ they go to the Bishop's 
right, make a genuflection witliont kissing the altar, and 
receive from the Bishop the Pax. Mass being ended, 
they accompany the Bishop to his seat, where, having 
made him a profound bow^, they give their places to the 
deacon and sub-deacon, go to the sacristy, disrobe, put 
on their surplices, and go to accompany the Bishop to 
his house, or to the sacristy. 

Section 1Y. — T/ie Office of the Assistant Deacons when 
the Bishop does not celebrate, 

1. In this case, they attend the Bishop in their choral 
dress, viz., in surplice, or rochet if they have the privi- 
lege of using it; they do what has been said in the pre- 
ceding article, with regard to the mitre, the incense, and 
the place where they must remain. When the Bishop, 
at Mass, goes to kneel down before the faldstool or desk, 
in the middle of the sanctuary, they go with him, and 
kneel at his side. 

The two assistant deacons are to attend only the Bishop 
in his own diocese ; not even Legates have the right of 
their attendance. However, if the Ordinary should be 
willing to confer this honor on any Bishop, whom he has 
invited to officiate in his place, he may give him the two 
assistant deacons. 

Article III. 

INSTRUCTION FOR THE OFFICIATING DEACON. 

1. The officiating deacon puts on all the sacred vest- 
ments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 

2. During Tierce, he sits at his usual place, at the right 
of the sub-deacon, until the Bishop has read the Psalms 
and prayers for the preparation of Mass. 

3. After the Bishop has read the prayer above men- 
tioned, the officiating deacon goes with the sub-deacon to 
the Bishop's seat, and having made to him a profound 
bow, goes to his right, and there standing, alter he has 



322 IN-STRUCTIONS FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

washed his hands, receives every one of the Bishop's 
vestments from the acolytes who carry them, and vests 
the Bishop, assisted by the snb-deacon. 

4. The Bishop being vested, the deacon retnrns, with 
the sub-deacon, to the bench, where they remain till after 
Tierce is over. 

5. After Tierce, the officiating deacon goes again with 
the sub-deacon to the Bishop's seat, and at his rii^rht 
takes off from him the cope, and puts on him the other 
vestments for Mass ; then he returns with the sub-deacon 
to the bench, and puts on his mauiple. 

6. The officiating deacon goes to the altar for the 
beginning of Mass; if Tierce has been sung, and the 
Bishop has put on the sacred vestments in the cliapel, 
prepared for this purpose, he walks in procession to the 
high altar, at the left of the assistant priest, immediately 
before the Bishop; otherwise, from the bench, he goes 
before the last step of the altar, at the left of the Bishop, 
and there answers him at the Confession as usual ; goes 
np to the altar, and standing at the Bishop's right, 
presents the incense-boat and the spoon, with the usual 
kiss of the latter, and of the Bishop's hand, and says, 
Benedicite, Pater Meverendissime^ receives the censer 
from the censer-bearer, gives it to the Bishop, kissing the 
Tipper part of the chain, which he puts into the Bishop's 
left hand, and the lower part near the cover into his right 
hand, which he kisses, attends the Bishop, kneels when- 
ever he kneels, and makes a profound bow when the 
Bishop bows, raises with his left hand the Bishop's chas- 
uble on his side, and supports his arm whenever he makes 
a genuflection. After the incensing, he receives with the 
usual kiss the censer from the Bishop, goes below the last 
step on the Epistle side of the altar, and after making a 
profound bow to the Bishop, he incenses him with three 
swings, and makes again a profound bow to him. 

7. When the Bishop goes to his chair, the officiating 
deacon returns to the bench, where he stands till the 
Bishop has said Kyrie eleison^ which he also says alter- 
nately with the sub-deacon. Then he sits, rises when the 
Bishop says, Gloria in excelsis Deo, which likewise th<3 



OFFICTATING DEAC^IT. 323 

officiatino^ deaeon continues together witli the sub-deacon. 
Having finished it, he sits. He rises at the Pax vohis^ or 
Dominus vohiscum ; stands durino the prayer and col- 
lects, and sits again during the Epistle sung by the sub- 
deacon. 

8. Whilst the clioir sings the gradual, or Alleluia^ tlie 
officiating deacon receives from the master of ceremonies 
the Missal, carries it shut before his breast to the altar, 
saluting tlie clergy, making a profound bow to the Bishop, 
and a genuflection on the last step; lays it on the middle 
of the altar ; goes to the Bishop, making the usual rever- 
ences, kisses his hand, returns to the altar, kneeling on 
the lowest step, in the mid ule, says with a low voice, 
Miinda cor meurri^ rises, takes the book irom the altar, 
returns to the Bishop at the right of the sub-deacun, 
after having made a genuflection, and salutes the clergy, 
first on the Epistle side, then on the Go?pel side, kneels 
down with the sub-deacon and acolytes, and saj Juhe^ 
Doinne^ henedicere. After receiving the blessing, he goes 
to the place where the Gospel is sung, puts the book open 
into the hands of the sub-deacon, and turned towards the 
wall of the sanctuary, on the Gospel side, with his hands 
joined before his breast, sings Dominus vohiscmn ; when 
he says Sequentia^ or Initium 8. Evangelii^ he makes 
with his thumb the sign of the cross on his forehead, 
mouth, and breast. AVhilst the choir answers, Gl>Tia 
iihi, etc., he receives the censer from the master of cere- 
monies or the censer-bearer, incenses the book with tlave 
swings, one in the middle, the second on the right, the 
third on the left side of the book, gives back the censer, 
and, with his hands joined, sings the Gospel. 

9. The officiating deacon, having sung the Gospel, and 
made a genuflection before the altar, returns to his place. 
If the Bishop preaches from the altar, immediately after 
the sermon, the officiating deacon, at the left of tlie 
Bishop, bowing a little towards him, sings the Confiteor, 
and at the words M tihi Pater, and Et te Pater, maki-s 
a profound bow. But when any other besides the Bishop 
preaches, the officiating deacon goes to the Bishop's 
chair, and standing below the lowest step, sings the Coti- 
jiteor, as before directed. 



324 IN'STRUCTIOKS FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

10. At the Credo^ the officiating deacon rises, and con- 
tinues it together with the sub-deacon, reciting it at the 
same time with the Bishop, and kneeling likewise witli him 
at Incarnatus est ; and whilst the same verse is sung by 
the choir, he remains profoundly inclined ; then he goes 
to the side-table, takes the burse with the corporal, which 
lie carries to the altar supported by both his hands, 
raising it to the height of his eyes, walking slowly, and 
saluting the clergy, making a bow to the Jiishop, and a 
genuflection, to the cross, he goes up, s])reads the cor- 
poral m the middle, places the biirse on the Gospel side, 
makes a genuflection, returns directly by the side steps 
to his place, and sits down. 

11. After the Creed has been sung, the officiating 
deacon goes to the altar at the same time with the 
Bishop, places himself at his right, takes off his mitre, 
makes a genuflection, goes up to the altar with him, 
raising a little his vestments in front, goes to the corner 
of the altar at the Epistle side, takes off' one of the 
particles from the paten, gives the paten with the other 
particle, after having kissed it, to the Bishop, kissing 
also his hand. 

12. Whilst the Bishop says Suscipe^ Sanote Pater^ the 
officiating deacon takes the chalice, wipes it with the 
purifier, puts wine into it, and after the sub-deacon has 
put in some drops of water, he wipes with the purifier 
all the drops that may be within on the sides of the 
chalice, kisses the foot of the chalice, holding it with his 
left hand, and the knob under the cup with his right; 
gives it to the Bishop, kissing his hand, then supporting 
the Bishop's arm with his left hand, and touchin-ji; the 
chalice with his right, he says with the Bishop, Offeri- 
7RUS tihi Domiiie^ etc., and when the Bishop has placed 
the chalice on the corporal, the officiating deacon 
covers it. 

13. When the censer-bearer comes to the altar, the 
officiating deacon receives from him the incense-boat, 
attends the Bishop whilst he puts in the incense, gives 
him the censer, assists him at the incensing, as directed 
above; observing, moreover, at the incensing of the 



OFFICIATIXG DEACON". 325 

sa^'red offerings, to hold with his left hand the Bishop's 
voslnients, to prevent their embarrassing him, or touch- 
ins; the offerings, and with his right the foot of the 
chalice ; w4iich he also removes from the middle, at the 
ii. censing of the cross, and replaces afterwards. 

14. After the Bishop has incensed the altar, the deacoTi 
receives from him the censer, and incenses him as 
directed in n. 6 ; then he incenses the assistant priest, 
the first and second assistant deacons, with two swings 
(but in case other Bishops and prelates are present in 
the sanctuary, thej should be incensed with thre^ swings 
immediately after the Bishop who celebrates) ; after- 
wards he incenses with one swing, the clergy in the 
sanctuary. On returning to the altar, he incenses the 
sub-deacon with two swings, gives the censer to the 
censer-bearer, goes to his place on the highest step 
behind the Bishop, turns towards the censer-bearer, by 
whom he is incensed. 

15. The officiating deacon remains there till after the 
Preface is sung; then he goes up to the right of the 
Bishop, and says with him, Sanctus^ etc., after which he 
returns to his place. At the words Qtoam ohlationein^ he 
goes up to the right of the Bishop ; if there be a pyx 
with small particles to be consecrated, he places it before 
the Bishop, and uncovers it, lineels on the edge of the 
platform during the consecration and elevation of the 
Host, raising the Bishop's chasuble; and when he has 
placed the Host on the altar, the ofiiciating deacon rises 
at the same time with him; he covers the pyx, and places 
it behind the chalice, uncovers the chalice. Kneels again, 
and raises the chasuble during the elevation. When the 
Bishop lowers the chalice on the altar, the oUiciatin <• 
deacon rises, covers it, makes a genutiection witii him, 
and returns to his place behind him. Every time the 
Bishop makes the sign of the cross, either on the sacred 
offerings or on himself, the officiating deacon takes care 
that his vestments should not toucli the offerings. 

16. When the Bishop says Benedicts et 2)r(jBstas nobis^ 
the officiating deacon goes up to his right, uncovers the 
chalice, making a genutiection every time he uncovers it, 



326 INSTKUCTIOITS FOR DIFFEREJqT OFFICERS. 

with the Bishop, before and after. When the Bisliop 
makes the sign of the cross on the sacred offerings, saying 
Per ipsum et cum ipso^ the officiating deacon pnts two 
lingers of his right hand on the foot of the chalice ; and 
when the Bishop puts the host on the corporal, he covers 
the chalice, and returns to his place behind the Bishop. 

17. Towards the end of the Pater ^ when the Bishop 
says Pt dimitte nobis ^ the officiating deacon goes up to 
his right, having previously made a genuflection ; receives 
from the sub-deacon the paten, wipes it with the purifier, 
kisses it, and when the Bishop says Libera nos^ puts it 
into his right hai:d, wdiich he kisses; when the Bishop 
places the paten under the Host, the officiating deacon 
uncovers the chalice, and covers it again, after the Bishop 
has put into it the small part of the Host, making a gen- 
uflection, which he always does when at his side. 

18. Tiie officiating deacon says the Agnus Pei, with 
the celebrant, then makes a genuflection, exchanges place 
with the assistant priest, by going to the Bishop's left; 
there he makes a genuflection, and attends the Bishop at 
the Missal. If the officiating deacon does not receive 
Communion, after the second assistant deacon has 
received the Pax from the Bishop, he goes to receive it, 
making a genuflection first at the Bishop's left, then at 
his right; but he does not kiss the altar. Having re- 
ceived the Pax, he returns to his place, making a genu- 
flection on each side of the Bishop. 

19. When the assistant priest returns to the Bishop's 
left, after having given the Pax to the clergy, the offici- 
ating deacon returns to the Bishop's right. There he 
presents wine for the ablution of the chalice, and wine 
atjd water for the ablution of the Bishop's fingers, and 
puts the purifier on his fingers over the chalice. 

20. But it Communion is to be given by the Bishop, 
and if the deacon and sub-deacon are to receive it, imme- 
diately after the Bishop has consumed the Precious Blood, 
the officiating deacon covers the chalice, makes a genu- 
flection, places the pyx with the consecrated Hosts before 
the chalice, uncovers it, makes a genuflection, kneels at 
the right of the sub-deacon on the edge of the platform, 



OFFICIATING DEACON". 32? 

receives from the Bishop first the Paa?, and answers, Et 
cutn spiritu tuo^ then the Communion, rises, ^oes to the 
Epistle side, bows somewhat, havino; liis face turned to 
the Gospel side, and sings the Confiteoi\ making a pro- 
found bow towards the Bishop at the words Et tibi Fater, 
and Et te Pater. When he does not receive Communion, 
he says the Confit or before the celebrant takes the first 
ablution, as directed above ; after the celebrant has said 
Indul genii am ^ etc.; he changes place with the sub- 
deacon, and going to the Gospel side, he makes a gen- 
ufiection in the middle; takes the paten, holds it under 
the sacred Host, and accompanies the hand of the Bishop, 
as he gives the Communion, going wi:h the paten to the 
railing, if the people are to receive the Com.munion ; 
after it he returns to the altar, goes to the Epistle side, 
and presents the wine and water tor the ablutions. 

21. After the ablutions, the officiating deacon puts the 
mitre on the Bishop, and, after he has washed his hands, 
takes it ofi:', and goes behind him, follows him to the 
middle, and then back to the Epistle side, he returns 
again behind him to the middle, and when the Bishop 
has sung Dorainus voMscmn^ after the last prayer, the 
officiating deacon, turned to the people, sings 7^<?, Missa 
est, or, if the Mass so require, remaining turned to the 
altar, he sings Benedicamus Domino. 

22. Before the Bishop gives the solemn blessing, the 
officiating deacon puts the mitre on him ; unless the 
celebrant be an Archbishop, who does not wear it. In 
this case, after the Archbishop has given the blessing, 
and the Indulgences have been published, the officiating 
deacon takes olf the pallium, and lays it on the altar, 
lie kneels and receives the blessing,"^ accompanies the 
Bishop to the Gospel side, where he begins the Gospel 
of St. John, or reads it entirely, goes below the steps of 
the altar, makes a genuflection ; accompanies the Bishop 
to his seat, and assists him in taking off the sacred vest- 
ments. When the Bishop has washed his hands, he puts 

* AH kneel at the blessing, except Canons and Prelates, who bow 
prolbundly. 



328 IN'STRUCTIOKS FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

on him the cape, gives his place to the first assistant 
deacon, or to one of the two other clergymen who come 
to the side of the Bishop, and returns to the sacristy, 
where he disrobes, and then retires. 

Article IV. 

Instruction for the Sub-deacon Officiating at Pontifical 

Mass. 

1. The sub-deacon, at a proper time, puts on all the 
vestments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 

2. During Tierce, he sits at the bench as usual, at the 
left of the deacon, until the master of ceremonies comes 
to invite him to go to the side-table ; he lays his cap on 
the bench, takes the plate on which are the Bishop's 
stockings and sandals, carries them, covered witli a veil, 
and raised to the height of his eyes, and, assisted by some 
acolytes, puts them on the Bishop's right and left foot. 
Then he returns to the bench, and remains there till the 
Bishop has read the Psalms and prayers of the prepara- 
tion for Mass. 

3. After the Bishop has read them, the sub-deacon 
goes with the deacon to the Bishop's seat, and having 
made to him a profounil bow, goes to his left, and there 
standing, after he has washed his hands, helps the deacon 
to vest the Bishop. 

4. The Bishop being vested, the sub-deacon returns 
with the deacon to the bench, and remains there till 
after Tierce is over. 

5. After Tierce, the sub-deacon goes again with the 
deacon tu the Bishop's seat, and standing at his left, 
assists the deacon to take olf the Bishop's cope, and to 
put on him the other vestments for Mass ; then he returns 
with the deacon to the bench, and puts on his maniple. 

6. When the Bishop is ready to proceed to the altar, 
the sub-deacon receives i'rom the master of ceremonies 
the Missal, with the Bishop's maniple in it, and carrying 
it shut before his breast, walks to the altar before the 
deacon, either from the chapel or Secretarium in proces- 
sion, or from his bench goes to the Gospel side, at the 



sub-deaco:n". 329 

left of tlie deacon, but a little behind him, makes a gen- 
uflection, gives the Missal to the master of ceremonies, 
answers the Bishop at the confession, as usual, makino; 
him a profound bow at the words Et tibi Pater^ and Et 
te Pater ; and while the Bishop says Indulge7itiam^ etc., 
takes the Bishop's maniple from the book, kisses it on 
one side, and offers it to the Bisliop to kiss, puts it on 
liis left arm, and kisses the Bishop's hand, \71ien the 
Bishop goes up to the altar, he follows him with the 
Missal, and on the Gospel side, with the help of the 
assistant priest, offers the Bishop the Missal open, and 
pointing out the beginning of the Gospel of that day to 
be kissed. The sub-deacon gives it to the master of cer- 
emonies, remains at the left of the Bishop, and atteii .'s 
him, whilst he puts incense into the censer, and incenses 
the altar, raising with his right hand the Bishop's chasu- 
ble on his side, and making a genuflection every time he 
passes before the middle. 

T. After the incensing of the altar, the sub-deacon 
goes below the steps by the Epistle side, and remains at 
the left of the deacon, whilst he incenses the Bishop, 
making with him the usual I ows ; then he goes with hiui 
to the bench, stands there at his left, whilst the Bishop 
reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie^ which he says 
alternately with the deacon ; sits till the Kyrie is linished 
by the choir ; rises at the Gloria in excelsis^ says the rest 
of it together with the deacon ; afterwards he sits at the 
same time as the deacon, and all the others, whilst it is 
sung; makes a bow, and takes off his cap at the words 
Adoramics^ gratias^ suscl^e^ Jesu Chrlste ; at the end ot 
it, he rises, and stands during the Collect. When the 
Bishop says I^er Dorninuin nostrum^ or the w^ords of the 
conclusion of the last prayer, the sub-deacon receives 
the Missal from the master of ceremonies, goes to the 
middle, holding it with both his hands, and leaning it 
towards his breast, he makes a genuflection to the altar, 
a profound bow to the Bishop, and a moderate bow to 
the clergy, flrst on the Gospel side, then on the Epistle 
side; goes to his place below the last step, and turned 
to the Bishop, without turning his back to the altar, he 



330 IXSTRUCTIOXS FOR DIFFERENT OFFICERS. 

sings the Epistle, supporting with both his arms the 
open book. 

8. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon goes again to the 
middle, makes a genuflection to the altar, a bow to the 
Bishop, and to tlie clergy on the Epistle side, and the 
Gospel side, goes to the Bishop, kneels before liim, rests 
the book on his knees, and kisses his hand, as he puts 
it on the book, rises, returns to the bench, and gives the 
book to the master of ceremonies; then he goes to the 
middle, at the left of the deacon, makes a genuflection, 
salutes the clergy at the Epistle side, and at the Gos- 
pel side, walks, at the leit of the deacon, to the Bisliop's 
seat, and makes a ])rofoiind bow. On arriving before it, 
he kneels whilst the deacon says, Juhe Domne^ etc., and 
during the blessing; then he rises, makes a profound 
bow to the Bishop, walks to the place where the Gospel 
is sung, receives, the book in his hand, and supports it 
on his head before the deacon ; and whilst the deacon 
sings, he remains without moving. 

9. When the deacon has done singing the Gospel, the 
sub-deacon, still holding the book open, without making 
anj^ bow, carries it to the Bishop to kiss the beginning 
of the Gospel. When the Bishop has kisseJ it, the sub- 
deacon shuts the book, bows to the Bishop, and returns 
to the bench, making a genuflection to the altar as he 
passes before it. 

10. At the Credo^ the sub-deacon, rises, says it together 
with the deacon, and at the same time with the Bishop, 
kneels at the Incarnatus ; and having finished the Credo, 
sits with the rest of the clergy. Whilst the Incarnatus 
is sung, the sub-deacon remains profoundly inclined. 
After the Incarnatus, he rises, stanjing, waits till the 
deacon returns from the altar, and sits. 

11. At the Offertory, the sub-deacon rises, goes to the 
side-table, puts on his shoulder the long veil, and lets it 
hang lower on his right side, takes hold of the chalice 
with his left hand, covers it with the longest part of the 
veil hanging on his right, and places liis right hand open 
over it; then he goes to the altar, whither he should 
arrive at the same time with the Bishop, uncovers the 



SUB-DEACON. 331 

chalice, gives it to the deacon, then he gives also to the 
deacon the wine-cruet which he has received from 
the acolyte, and having received the water-cruet, he 
presents it to the Bishop, saying, Benedicite^ Jieveren- 
dissime Pater ^ and puts a few drops of water into tiie 
chalice. 

12. After the oblation of the chalice, the sub deacon 
receives the paten from the deacon in his bare hand, and 
covers it with the longest part of the veil hanging on 
his right; then he goes down below the lowest step in 
the middle, holding the paten against his breast; but 
when he has arrived there, he keeps it raised co the 
height of his eyes, supporting his elbow with his left 
hand. There he remains without moving, except only 
to kneel in the same place, and on the lowest step, for 
the elevation. "When the celebrant says those words of 
the Pater Noster^ Et dimiite nobisy etc., the sub-deacon 
makes a genuflection, goes up to the altar, at the Epistle 
side, gives the paten to the deacon, takes ofi' the long 
veil, makes a genuflection, returns below the steps in 
the middle, he goes up on the right of the deacon and 
recites the Agnus Pei, then returns to his place. He 
goes up and receives the Pax, from the Bishop after 
the deacon (unless they are to communicate) and remains 
on the platform at the Bishop's right, if the deacon be 
attending to the Missal, whilst the assistant priest gives 
the Pax; if the deacon, however, is on the Bishop's 
right, the sab-deacon will remain on the deacon's rigtit. 
When the deacon sings or recites the Confiteor, the sub- 
deacon goes to the Gospel side, and remains turned 
to the opposite side, till the Bishop has said Indidgen- 
tiam^ etc., then he changes places with the deacon, and 
goes to the Epistle side, remaining by the Bishop, and 
accompanying him to the railing for the Communion of 
the people. Keturning to the altar, the sub-deacon goes to 
the Epistle side, puts wine and water into the chalice fur 
the ablutions ; puts the purifler on the Bishop's tingers, 
unless the deacon has already returned to that side, and 
is there ready to minister for the ablations ; then he goes 
to the Gospel side, wipes the chalice, puts on it the puri- 



332 iNSTRucriON"s fcr different officers. 

fier, paten, pall, veil, and burse with the corporal ; talxes 
bold of it with bis lei't, and places his rigbt band on it, 
goes down, makes a genutiection on the last step, 
and carries it to the side-tai)le, returns to bis place, 
below the last step, bebind the Bisbop, whom he 
follows, when he goes to the iniddle. At the blessing 
the sub-deacon goes np on the higlicst step, and receives 
it kneebng, takes in iiis hand the book, or tbe altar card, 
and presents it to the Bishop, to read the Gospel of 
St. John. After tbe Bisbop has read this, tbe siib- 
deacon goes to bis left side and helps the deacon to dis- 
robe him. Which being done, be goes to tbe sacristy, 
puts oif tbe sacred vestments, and retires. 

Article Y. 

instruction for the inferior ministers w^tio attend 
the bishop at pontifical mass and other functions. 

Section I. — The Master of Ceremonies. 

1. There should be two masters of ceremonies; tbe 
first, if possible, should be either a priest, or at least in 
sacred orders. 

2. The office of the first master of ceremonies, is to 
direct and conduct the whole ceremony ; he should, 
therefore, be perfectly acquainted with what is to be 
done by tbe celebrant and all the officers. He ought to 
be iamiliar with all the instructions given in the present 
w^ork, which he ought to read frequently ; and especially 
be ought to refresh bis memory, by looking at the par- 
ticular ceremonies to be performed, the day before. 

3. He ought to take especial care of what is to be per- 
formed by the Bisbop, either at his seat or at the altar, 
or in any other place, and always be near him. 

4. The second master of ceremonies assists the first ; 
he ought to be likewise w^ell conversant witii this book ; 
and his particular duty is to attend the ministers, and he 
should therefore remain near them. 

5. Durins: Mass, tbe masters of ceremonies never sit, 
except during tbe sermon. They must stand, with their 



CROSIER-r.EAKER. 333 

heads nncovGred. whilst the rest of the clergy sit, the 
first master of ceremonies below the steps of the Bishop's 
seat, the second near the bench of the ministers; and a 
little before a reverence is to be made, or a genuflection, 
they ought to give a signal to the clergy. At the Incar- 
natiis^ and at the blessing, they kneel down. 

6. At the procession, and when the clergy go from the 
sacristy to the church, and from the church to the sacristy, 
the masters of ceremonies never wear their caps, iieitlier 
do they carry them. 

7. At Yespers they may sit during the Psahns; but 
they must rise before the Gloria Patri^ to give the signal 
to the clergy to bow. 

8. The second master of ceremonies, at the altar, 
gives the Bishop's vestments to the acolytes when he is 
to be vested, and receives them back likewise at the altar, 
when he takes them off. 

Section II. — Instruction for the Crosier-bearer. 

1. The crosier-bearer, when the Bishop celebrates Mass, 
or Yespers, pontifically, may be dressed in surplice and 
cope; at least, he must be in surplice. 

2. He holds continually in his hand the Bishop's crosier, 
whenever the Bishop does not use it. He must watch the 
time, in which he is to give or receive the crosier, and be 
always ready. 

3. The crosier-bearer sits either on the steps of the 
Bishop's chair, or at any other convenient place near it. 
He must stand whenever the Bishop stands. 

4. When the Bishop walks, either from the chair to the 
altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the crosier- 
bearer walks after him. at the right hand of the mitre- 
bearer ; he likewise stands at the right of the mitre- 
bearer, at a certain distance from the lowest step, when 
the Bishop is at the altar, and kneels there at the eleva- 
tion and Communion. 

5. In processions, when the Bishop uses the crosier, 
and carries it, the crosier-bearer walks behind him ; but 
at the procession of -the Blessed Sacrament, when the 
Bishop does not carry the crosier, and on similar occa- 



334 IN-STRUCTIOKS FOR DIFFEREKT OFFICERS. 

BiwHS, the crosier-bearer walks alone in the middle, im- 
mediately before the cleriry, dressed in sacred vestments, 
and carries the crosier erect with both hands. 

Section H\.- Instruction for the Mitre-hearer. 

1. The mitre-bearer may wear the cope over his snr- 
plice, Avhen the Bishop celebrates Mass or Yespers pon- 
tifically ; at least, he ought to be in surplice, and wear a 
long white silk veil, hanging from his neck; with the 
lower part of which he covers his hands, whenever he 
holds the mitre. 

2. He goes to receive it at the altar, from the master 
of ceremonies, when the Bishop is to be dressed ; goes 
with the others before him to his seat, and carries it back 
to the altar, after the Bishop is disrobed. 

3. He sits either on the steps near the Bishop's chair 
or in any other .convenient place ; he holds the mitre 
whenever the Bishop does not use it ; he nmst watch the 
moment in which he is to give or receive it, and be always 
ready; he gives it to the deacon that is at the Bishop's 
right hand, and receives it from the deacon that is at his 
left. 

4. The mitre-bearer must stand whenever the Bishop 
stands. When the Bishop walks, either from his chair 
to the altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the 
mitre-bearer walks after him, at the left hand of the 
crosier-boarer ; he likewise stands at his left, at a certain 
distance from the lowes": rtep of the altar, and kneels 
there at the elevation and Communion. 

5. As the Bishop generally uses two mitres, the precious 
and the plain mitre, the mitre-bearer must give tlie 
precious mitre whenever the Bishop first puts it on, after 
having vested; at Yespers, after the first Psalm has been 
commenced, the mitre-bearer places the precious mitre on 
the altar, at the Epistle side, and carries the lighter 
mitre to the deacon. At the beginning of the antipiion, 
before tho Magnificat^ he carries the lighter mitre to the 
altar, and the precious mitre to the deacon. At Mass, 
the mitre-bearer, at the beginning of the Gloria in excel- 
eisy carries the precious mitre to the altar, and the lighter 



BOOK -BEARER — CANDLE-BEARER. 335 

mitre to the deacon, wliich the Bishop uses till the end 
of the Credo. Then the mitre-bearcrcariies the precious 
mitre to the deacon, and the lighter mitre to the 
altar. The Bisliop uses the precious mitre till the end 
of Mass, whenever he has to put it on ; therefore, the 
mitre-bearer holds it in his hand while the Bishop is at 
the altar, standing or kneeling, as has been said before. 
When he holds the mitre, the bands must always be out- 
Bide, and hang down. 

6. In processions, the mitre-bearer walks always behind 
the Bishop. 

Section IY. — Instruction for the Boole-bearer. 

1. The book-bearer is dressed in surplice. He should 
take care that the marks be at the proper place in the 
Missal, and hold it. 

2. He sits in a convenient place by the candle-bearer; 
watches the moment in which the book is necessary, and 
at the first token given by the master of ceremonies, he 
carries it to the Bishop. When the Bishop reads stand- 
ing, the book-bearer holds it likewise standing ; when the 
Bishop sings anything out of the book at his chair, the 
book-bearer gives it to the assistant priest, who is to hold 
it only during that time ; then he receives it back ; wlie i 
the Bishop reads anything sitting, the book-bearer holds 
it kneeling down. Holding the book, he places the 
upper end of it on his forehead, and holds the lower on 
his hands. He never genutiects nor bows whilst he is 
holding the book before the Bishop. 

Section Y. — Instruction for the Candle-bearer. 

1. The candle-bearer, who carries and holds the hand- 
candlestick, which is used whenever the Bishop oiiiciates, 
is dressed in surplice; he sits, and remains at the right 
of the book-bearer; accompanies him whenever he 
carries the book to the Bishop's chair, and remains at his 
side with the candlestick in his hand, but always stand- 
ing whilst the Bishop reads or sings anything. 

2. The candle-bearer, moreover, goes to the altar, and 
there, always at the side in which is the Missal, stands 
by the assistant priest, holding the candle near the book. 



PART VI. 

AT WHICH THE BISHOP OFFICIATES, 
OR IS PRESENT. 

• CHAPTER L 

COMMEMORATION OF ALL THE FAITHFUL DEPARTED. 

1. On All-Saints' Day, for the second Yespers, a black 
altar veil is to be placed under the white one; the latter 
is to be removed by the acolytes, soon after the solemn 
Yespers of the day. 

2. After these Yespers, the Bishop and the clergy take 
oif the sacred vestments, the Bishop at his seat, and the 
clergy (as quickly as possible) in the sacristy; the hitter 
return to the sanctuary, and the Bishop goes to his choir- 
stall. 

3. Yespers for the dead are sung as directed in Part Y 
of this book, chapter ix. 

4. After Yespers, in Cathedral churches. Matins and 
Lauds for the dead are sung, as directe 1 in Part Y, 
chapter x. 

5. The next day, a Pontifical Mass is celebrated by the 
Bishop, as in Part Y, chapter xi. 

6. After Mass, the absolution is made by the Bishop, 
either at his seat, or at the cenotaph, as directed iu 
Part Y, chapter xi. 

(336) 



SUNDAYS IK ADVEKT. 337 

CHAPTEE 11. 

SUNDAYS IN ADVENT. 

1. If tlie Bishop officiates on these Sundays, the assist- 
ant deacons, the officiating deacon and sub-deacon, instead 
of dahnatics, use folded chasubles, which have the same 
form as the usual chasubles, but that part which hangs 
before is shorter, and does not hang further than the 
cincture. Where there are none for this purpose,, the 
others may be used, if folded. The same are used by 
the ministers for all High Masses celebrated either in 
the presence or in the absence of the Bishop. However, 
on the third Sunday in Advent, the ministers use dal- 
matics and tunics of rose color. If the fourth Sunday 
falls on Christmas Eve, dalmatics of violet color are 
also used. 

2. The Bishop, instead of Pax vobis^ says Dominus 
vohisGum. 

3. The sub-deacon, whilst the celebrant sings the last 
Collect, takes off his folded chasuble, sings the Epistle 
without it, and having received the Bishop's blessings, 
puts on the folded chasuble again. 

4. The deacon also, before the first Alleluia is sung, 
takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole over the 
other, and remains so till after the celebrant's Com- 
munion ; he then takes off the large stole, and puts on 
the folded chasuble. 

5. What has been said above, n. 3 and 4, is to be ob- 
served also in other High Masses, celebrated either in 
the presence or in the absence of the Bishop. 



338 PONTIFICAL CEREMOmES. 

CHAPTER III. 

CHRISTMAS. 

1. On Cliristmas Eve, the first Yespers are sung as 
directed, pa^e 272. 

2. The following night, Matins are sung as directed, 
page 278. 

3. What follows is to be particularly observed for these 
Matins. 

4. The church and sanctuary must be illuminated 
with a sufiicient number of candles. 

5. Another table, besides the usual side-table, is to be 
prepared, and all the sacred vestments for the Pontifical 
Mass should be placed on it; also a cope to be worn by 
the Bishop during the Te Deum. 

6. At the third nocturn, whilst the choir sings the 
Psalm, Misericordias Domini^ the Bishop, attended by 
the two assistants in surplice, reads the antiphon and 
Psalms for the preparation of Mass, out of the book, 
which is held open before him by an acolyte, who has at 
his side another acolyte with a candlestick; and in the 
meantime the Bishop's stockings and sandals are put 
on. The deacon and sub-deacon go also, at the begin- 
ning of the third nocturn, to the sacristy, where they 
put on tlie sacred vestments. The Bishop ouglit to finish 
the preparation in time to be ready to sing, A vinculis, 
etc., before the lessons. The two assistant-, after the 
preparation, return to their seats; but they go again to 
the side of the Bishop, when he sings the last Lesson ; 
after which, having intoned the Te Deum, the deacon 
and sub-deacon go to his side, and assist at the washing 
of his hands, and the two assistants go to put on the 
sacred vestments; the acolytes, with the book and candle- 
stick, go before the Bishop; the master of ceremonies, 
having given the Bishop's vestments to the acolytes, goes 
also with them before the Bishop, who, after having put 
on the stole, receives the cope, and remains standing till 



BETWEEN CHRISTMAS Ai^D CANDLEMAS. 339 

the end of the Te Deum ; he then sings Dominies vobis- 
cum and the prayer; after which he repeats Dominus 
vobiscum^ and whilst the singers sing Benedicaraxis 
Domino^ tlie Bishop takes off the cope, puts on the 
other vestments for Mass, which he celebrates as usual. 
During the Te Deum^ the clergy put on the sacred vest- 
ments. 

7. At the Incarnatus, the Bishop and all the clergy 
kneel. 

8. The Bishop does not take the abhitions because he 
is to sing the third Mass ; he washes his fingers in another 
chalice or vessel. 

9. Lauds are sung as directed, page 280. 



CHAPTER lY. 

FESTIVALS BETWEEN CHRISTMAS AND CANDLEMAS. 

1. The Bishop may celebrate these festivals with more 
or less solemnity, as he thinks proper. 

2. However, on ]!!Tew Year's day, he ought to assist at 
Mass in cope, as directed, page 300. 

3. On the Epiphany, he ought to celebrate pontiflcally, 
as directed, page 281. 

On the same day, after the Gospel has been sung, a 
clergyman in cope goes to the pulpit, and publishes the 
movable feasts, singing what is prescribed for this purpose 
in the Koman Pontifical. 

4. On other festivals, the Bishop may assist at Mass in 
cope or in his cappa, as directed, page 304. 



340 POKTIFICAL cekemo:n"ies. . 

CHAPTEE Y. 

CANDLEMAS. 

Tilings to be Prepared, 

1. In the sanctuary, between the Bishop's seat and the 
altar, a table entirely covered with a white linen cloth, 
and on it a sufficient number of candles for the Bishop 
and clergy. 

2. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for 
High Mass celebrated in presence of the Bishop, the 
holy-water vase, the basin, ewer, towels on a plate, and 
some slices of bread on another plate, for cleansing the 
Bishop's hands; an apron beautifully embroidered, to be 
put on the Bishop's knees at the distribution of the 
candles. 

3. ]N"ear the side-table, the processional cross ; and in a 
convenient place the censer with the incense-boat, a 
chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

4. In front of the altar, a violet veil over another of a 
white color, to be removed after the procession, unless 
the Mass be not of the Blessed Virgin. 

5. On the altar, the Bishop's ornaments, viz., the 
violet cope and stole, the pectoral cross, the cincture, 
alb, amice, and mitre, besides the crosier at the angle 
between the altar and the steps. 

6. In the sacristy, a violet cope for the assistant priest, 
two violet chasubles folded, with two cinctures, albs, and 
amices for the assistant deacons, and violet vestments for 
all the clergy, as before directed. 

7. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy; 
the Bishop goes thither as before directed. 

They go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, as 
directed, page 284. 

The Bishop is vested as prescribed at page 286. 

8. The Bishop being vested, takes ofi* the mitre, and 
rises; the acolytes go before him with the book and the 



CANDLEMAS. 341 

candlesticlc, and the Bishop, standing turned a little 
t('Wards the candles, blesses them, singing in the ferial 
tf.ne what is prescribed in the Missal for this purpose. 
When he begins the last prayer, the two acolytes go 
before him with the censer and incense-boat, and the 
holy- water vase. 

9. After the prayer, the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it; then having received the sprinkle 
from the assistant priest, he sprinkles the candles three 
times; afterwards he incenses them also thrice, after 
which he sits, and puts on the mitre. Then the priest 
first in dignity, having been previously invited by the 
master of ceremonies, goes before the Bishop, makes a 
bow to him, and "ives him the candle, which he kisses as 
well, as the hand of the Bishop, who gives the candle 
to the master of ceremonies to be kept by one of the 
acolytes. 

10. Then the apron, prepared for the purpose, is put on 
the Bishop's knees. One ol the acolytes brings the can- 
dles to be distributed, gives them, one by one, to the 
second assistant deacon, who presents them to the 
Bishop, who distributes them, first to the priest from 
whom he received the candle, tlien to the assistant priest, 
the assistant deacons, and all the clergy, who go to 
receive them, according to their order and rank ; all 
receive them kneeling, and kiss the candle and the 
Bishop's hand. In the meantime, the candles are 
distributed to the people by one or two priests; and 
during the distribution the choir sings, Lumen ad revela- 
tionem. 

11. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. 
The antiphon, Exurge^ having been repeated, the Bishop 
takes otl his mitre, rises and sings Oremus; the first 
assistant deacon sings Flectamus gemia, and the second, 
Levate^ only after Septuagesima, but not on Sunday, 
and the Bisliop sings the prayer, Exaudi qitcesumuSy after 
which he sits, puts on the mitre, puts the incense into 
the censer, and blesses it. 

12. In the meantime, the candles are lighted, and 
everything is arranged for the procession around the 



312 POlfTIFICAL CEREMOXIES. 

church. The censer-bearer, with the censer, goes to tlie 
middle of tlie sanctuary, behind the sub deacon, in his 
folded chasuble, carrying the cross, and havino^ the aco- 
lytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, at his 
side. The first assistant deacon sings Procedamus in 
pace, the choir answers, In nomine Christi, Amen. 
Then the procession moves from the sanctuary in the 
following order : lirst, the censer-bearer, then the cross- 
bearer with the acolytes, afterwards the clergy, two by 
two, according to their order, all carrying their candles; 
lastly, the- Bishop, between the assistant deacons, carry- 
ing the candle in his left hand, and blessing the people 
with his right. 

13. During the procession, the priest who is to sing 
Mass, and the deacon and the sub-deacon, go to the sac- 
risty, and put on their respective vestments— white, if 
Mass is of the Blessed Virgin ; violet, if of the Sunday. 
Also the violet altar- veil is removed, if Mass is of the 
Blessed Virgin. 

14:. Alter the procession, the clergy take off their 
sacred vestments in the sacristy, and extinguish their 
candles. The Bishop goes to his seat, takes off the 
violet cope and stole, and puts on the white, which an 
acolyte should bring thither in time. But if Mass is of 
the Sunday, the Bishop does not change his vestments. 

15. Then the celebrant, preceded by the deacon and 
sub-deacon, goes to the altar, and Mass is celebrated as 
directed, page 300. 

16. The clergy hold in their hands lighted candles, 
from the beginning to the end of the Gospel, and from 
the consecration to the Communion, except the Mass of 
Sunday be said. 



ASH-WEDKESDAT. 343 

CHAPTER YL 

ASH-WEDNESDAY. 

Article I. 
Things to te Prepared. 

1. On tlie side-table, besides everything necessary for 
High Mass, the following should be prepared: the holy- 
water vase, the ewer with the basin, a plate with some 
towels, another with slices of bread to cleanse the Bishop's 
hands, a towel to be placed on the Bishop's knees during 
the distribution of the ashes, a Missal for the Bishop, the 
candlestick, and a large stole for the deacon. 

2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a violet 
cope and stole, pectoral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, 
and crosier ; also a vase containing the ashes to be blessed, 
made of branches blessed on Palm Sunday the year 
preceding. 

3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the cele- 
brant, deacon, and sub-deacon (the two latter make use 
of folded chasubles), also two folded chasubles for the 
assistant deacons, a cope for the assistant priest, and a 
sufficient number of sacred vestments for the clergy, 
according to their order and dignity, the censer with the 
incense-boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 

Article II. 

Frovi the entrance of the Bishop into the sacristy^ to the 
end of the blessing and distribution of the ashes. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as before 
directed. The clergy put on their vestments in the 
sacristy ; they go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, 
as directed, page 284, except that the celebrant, preceded 
by the deacon and sub-deacon, walks immediately before 
the assistant priest. 



344 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

2. On arriving at the sanctuary, the clergy go to their 
usual places, the celebrant, with tlie deacon and snl> 
deacon, to their bench, and the Bishop, with his assist- 
ants, to his seat, after having respectively made the 
usual genuflections and bows. The Bishop is vested as 
directed, page 286. 

3. The sub-deacon, attended by the second master of 
ceremonies, goes up to the altar, and taking, with both 
hands, the va^^e containing the ashes, carries it, raised 
before his face, to the throne, and holds it there, kneel- 
ing at the right ot* the Bishop, till the end of the 
blessing. 

4. The acolytes, with the book and the candlestick, go 
before the Bishop, who, sitting witli the mitre on, reads 
the ajiti'phon, jE^xaudi nos ; which being repeated after 
the Psalm by the choir, the Bishop rises, with his head 
uncovered, and sings, in the ferial tone, Dominus vobis- 
cum, Oremtis, and the four prayers as in the Missal. 

5. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the 
censer and blesses it, sprinkles and incenses the ashes 
three times. 

6. Then he sits with his head uncovered ; the celebrant, 
accompanied by the master of ceremonies, goes to the 
Bishop, and having bowed to him, puts ashes on his 
head, saying. Memento homo^ etc. 

T. The Bishop puts on the mitre, the apron is placed 
on his knees, and he puts ashes on the head of the cele- 
brant, who kneels before him;* to whom he says 
Memento^ etc. 

8. Then the Bishop puts ashes on the heads of the 
assistant priest, assistant deacons, officiating deacon, and 
all the clergy, who go for this purpose to receive them, 
according to their respective rank and order, kneeling 
w^iilst the ashes are put on. Last of all, he puts ashes 
oh the people at the railing; in doing w^hich, he may be 
assisted by a priest, if the number of people is great. 

9. Afterwards, he returns to his seat and washes his 
hands as usual ; then rises, with his head uncovered, and 

*()nly canons bow profoundly, the rest kneel. 



su:n'days in lext. 345 

pings, Dominiis voblscum^ and the prayer as in the 
Missal, durino; which two acolytes remain before him, 
witii tlieir candlesticks and lighted candles. 

10. After the prayer, the clergy go to take off the 
sacred vestments; the Bishop keeps his on, and assisted 
and vested as before, does everything at Mass as directed, 
page 300, observing what follows. 

11. At the Collects, the Bishop kneels at the faldstool 
or praying desk, in the middle of the sanctuary, between 
his assistants. Again, he kneels in the same place, but 
with his mitre on, during the whole verse, Adjuva, sung 
by the choir. Also the celebrant, with his ministers, 
kneels before the altar during the same. 

12. The deacon and sub-deacon observe what has 
been said before. 

13. The preacher, after the Gospel has been snng, goes 
to ask the Bishop's blessing, and announces the Indul- 
gences. 

14. The Bishop, having said the Sanctus, kneels as 
for the Collects, till the Per omnia soecula^ before the 
Agnus Dei. So also all the clergy in the sanctuary. At 
the Boat Commnnion, the Bishop kneels in the same 
manner; after the celebrant has sung the last Oremus, 
the deacon, turned towards the people, sings. Humiliate 
capita., etc. The rest is done as usual. What has been 
said in particular for this Mass, is to observed in all 
ferial Masses during Advent and Lent. 



CHAPTER YIL 

SUNDAYS IX LENT. 

1. For the Sundays in Lent, everything is to be ob- 
served a? directed for Sundays in Advent. 

2. What has been said for the third Sunday in Advent, 
is to be observed also for the fourth Sunday in Lent. 

3. Before the first Yespers of Passion Sunday, all the 
crosses and images on the altar and in the church are to 
be covered. 



346 POITTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

CHAPTER YIII. 

PALM SUNDAY. 

Article I. 

Tilings to he Prepared, 

1 On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, as directed, 
page 282. 

2. On tlie side-table, everytliing as there directed; 
also the large stole for tiie deacon. 

3. By the side-table, as there stated. The processional 
cross is to be covered with a violet veil. 

4. Between the Bisliop's seat and the altar, a table 
covered all over with a white linen cloth, and on it the 
palms to be blessed, and that of the Bishop adorned with 
fiow<TS. 

5. In the sanctuary, on the Gospel side, three stands 
for the deacons who are to sing the Passion. 

6. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the cele- 
brant, deacon, and sub-deacon, as directed in chap. vi. 
Also three violet stoles and maniples, with three cinc- 
tures, albs, amices, and books, for three deacons who are 
to sing the Passion. 

Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the 
Church to the beginning of Mass. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as directed, 
pa^e 284. 

2. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy. 

3. All go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 

4. The Bishop puts on the sacred vestments. All is 
done as directed, page 285. 



PALM SUXDAY. 347 

5. The Bishop being vested, the choir sings Hosanna.QiQ.^ 
which the Bishop reads in tlie meantime, and then sings, 
in a ferial tone, Domiwis vobiscum^ and the prayer as in 
the Missah The sub-deacon sings tlie Epistle with the 
nsual ceremonies, and the Bishop reads it as well as the 
Gradual, Munda cor meum^ and the Gospel. The 
deacon sings the Gospel with the usual ceremonies. 
After the Gospel, the siib-deacon carries the book to the 
Bishop, who kisses it, and is afterwards incensed by the 
assistant priest. 

6. Then the Bishop sings Dominus vohiscum, and the 
prayer, Auge^ as in the Missal, and after it the Preface; 
which being ended, the choir sings, and the Bishop says 
the Smictus. Afterwards the Bishop sings the five 
prayers, as in the AJissal. Whilst he is singing the last 
prayer, two ac'jlytes go before him with the censer and 
incense-boat, and with the holy- water and sprinkle. The 
last prayer being ended, the Bishop puts incense into 
the censer, blesses it, sprinkles thrice the palms, saying, 
Asperges me^ without the Psnlm, and incenses them 
thrice. Then he sings Domimcs vohlscum^ and the 
prayer, Deus qui Filiurri^ tuiim ; and having finished it, 
he sits down, and puts on the mitre. 

7. The first in dignity amongst those who are present 
on invitation from the master of ceremonies, goes to the 
Bishop, and gives him the palm, kissing it and the 
Bishop's hand. The apron, prepared for this purpose, is 
then put on the Bishop's knees, and one of the acolytes 
furnishing, one by one, the }>alms to the second assistant 
deacon, the deacon gives them to the Bishop, who dis- 
tributes them, first to the priest from whom he received 
it, then to the assistant priest and assistant deacon, to 
the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, who go 
to receive them, two by two, and kiss both the palm and 
the Bishop's hand, making the usual reverences. The 
choir, during the distribution, sings, Pueri HebrcBorutn. 

8. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. 
Then two acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted 
caudles, go betore the Bishop, who, standing with his 
head uncovered, sings Dommus vobiscuin^ and the prayer, 



348 PO^^TIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Omnipotens sempiterne Deus ; at the end of which he 
sits down, puts on the mitre, and puts incense into the 
censer, as usual. 

In the meanvvhile, everjthino^ is prepared for the 
procession. The first assistant deacon sino^s, Prooeda- 
mus in pace. They all carry the palms in their hands. 
The Bishop, between the assistant deacons, holds the 
palm in his left, and blesses the people with his right. 
The officiatinjj^ deacon walks at the left of the assistant 
priest. The choir sings the antiphons as in the Missal. 

9. The procession moves out of the church ; there they 
divide and place themselves as directed, page 228; two 
or four of the singers remain within the church ; the 
doors are shut, the Gloria^ laus^ is sung, and after it, 
when the sub-deacon knocks at the door with the foot of 
the cross, it is opened, the procession enters the church, 
the choir ^iugmg .Ingrediente Domino. 

10. The procession having returned to the sanctuary, 
the Bishop goes to his seat, and remains for Mass in his 
sacred vestments ; but the others take them off. The 
celebrant comes from the sacristy to the sanctuary, and 
Mass is celebrated, as directed in page 230 and page 300. 

11. What follows, is particularly to be observed at 
Mass. 

12. When the sub-deacon, at the Epistle, sings the 
words, Ut in nomine Jesu om,7ie genu flectatur^ the 
Bishop and all the clergy kneel till after the words, Jit 
i7\fer>ioTum. 

13. Whilst the Epistle and Tract are sung, three 
deacons go to the sacristy, put on amices, albs, cinctures, 
maniples, and stoles, and at the end of the Tract, pre- 
ceded by tlie master of cereii'.onies, go to the sanctuary 
in the toil )vving order, carrying the Book before their 
breast: First the deacon, who sings the words of the 
Evangelist ; second, he who sings the words of the crowd ; 
third, he who sings the words of Christ. They are fol- 
lowed by three acolytes, without candlesticks, and 
without the censer ; after having made the usual genu- 
flection and bows, they go to kiss the Bishop's hand, 



MATINS OF THE TEXEBRiE. 349 

without asking the blessing. They go to the place where 
the Passion is to be sung, and place themselves as 
directed, page 231, the acolytes holding the books. 

14. When they begin to sing the Passion, the Bishop 
and ail the clergy rise, with their heads uncovered, and 
stand with the palms in their hands till the end of it. 
The celebrant reads it at the Epistle side, and when he 
has done reading, he turns towards the deacons of the 
Passion, and stands at tlie corner of the altar, the dea^jion 
also on the middle step, and the sub-deacon before the 
1 'West step, with palms in their hands ; at the words 
Eraisit s^irituin^ the Bishop and all the clergy kneel at 
their places. 

15. After the Passion, the Bishop sits, says Munda 
cor meum, and reads the Gospel ; the deacon takes off 
his folded chasuble, puts on the large stole, carries the 
book to the altar, kisses the Bishop's hand, goes to the 
altar, kneels, and says Munda cor mewm ; at the same 
time, the Bishop puts incense into the censer as usual; 
then the deacon and sub-deacon, with the censer-bearer, 
and two acolytes, without candlesticks, go to the Bishop's 
seat, the deacon asks his blessing, the Gospel is sung as 
usual, and the Bishop, having kissed the book, is incensed 
by the assistant priest. 

16. At the elevation, the Bishop alone holds the palm 
in his hand. The rest is done as in other Masses. 



CHAPTER IX. 

MATINS OF THE TENEBR^. 

1. For these Matins, everything is to be prepared as 
directed, page 233, and when the Bishop officiates at 
them, everything is done as there specified. 

2. If the Bishop, occupies his usual seat, he has no 
other assistant than the master of ceremonies, who sits 
in some place near; but it is advisable that the Bishop 
should sit in a choir-stall with the other clergymen. 



350 PONTIFICAL CEREMON-IES. 

3. The Bishop rises with the clergy, and kneels and 
recites the prayer, Resipice. 

4. On Maunday Thursday, and on Good-Friday, for 
tlie Tenebra3, the altar, the Bishop's throne, and faldstool 
should be quite bare. 



CHAPTER X. 

MAUNDAT THURSDAY. 

Article I. 
Tilings to he Prepared. 

1. A CHAPEL for the repository. 

2. The high altar, as on the greatest festivities, with 
white altar veil, etc. 

3. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, with the excep- 
tion of the cope. A chalice, with a purifier, for cleansing 
the Bishop's fingers. 

4. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for 
the P^ ntifical Mass, two particles on the paten, one of 
which should be of a size to fit the chalice in which it is 
to be placed; a second chalice, with its paten, pall, veil, 
and a white ribbon to fasten the veil round the chalice; 
a pyx, with a sufficient number of small particles, for the 
Communion of the clergy and people; a long linen 
cloth for the Communion of the clergy. 

By the side-table, the processional cross. 

5. In a convenient place, in or near the sanctuary, the 
canopy for the procession. 

6. in the sanctuary, in the middle towards the railing, 
a table covered with fine linen cloth, two candlesticks 
and candles, and the Pontifical on a cushion or stand on 
it, on that side which corresponds to the Gospel side. 
Behind the table, a chair for the Bishop, with three 
stools for the assistant deacons on each side, and for the 



MAUNDAT THURSDAY. 351 

assistant priest on the Gospel side. On each side of tlie 
table, six seats, or a bench sufficient for six persons, 
covered with suitable cloth. Behind the Bishop's chair, 
placed near the table, seats for the seven deacons and 
seven snb-deacons, who assist at the consecration of 
the oils. 

T. In the sacristy, besides the usual white vestments 
for the assistant priest and deacons, and for the officiating 
deacon and sub-deacon, twelve white chasubles, stoles, 
and uianiples, with as many cinctures, albs, and amices, 
for twelve priests ; also seven white dalmatics, stoles, and 
maniples, with as many cinctures, albs and amices, for 
seven deacons, and seven white tunics and maniples, 
witli seven cinctures, albs, and amices, for seven sub- 
deacons, who are all to assist at the consecration of the 
oils; besides, a sufficient number of sacred vestments 
for the other clergy, according to their order and rank, 
if there be any more. Moreover, two censers and incense- 
boat, and a wooden clapper. Candles in sufficient num- 
ber for the procession. 

8. In a suitable place, either in the sacristy, or near 
the baptismal font, three metal vases, large enough to 
contain a sufficient quantity of oil for all the churches 
of the diocese. On one of them there should be engraven 
at least the initials of these words. Oleum Infirmorwni^ 
on another. Oleum Catechumenorum^ and on the third, 
Sanctum Chrisma, The first and second should be 
covered with silk cloth of any color, the third with 
white silk cloth. Near them, should be prepared two 
long veils for the deacons, who are to carry the vases 
containing the oil of catechumens and the chrism. Also 
near the vase, a plate, and in it a small vesst-l containing 
the balsam, and a spatula to mix it. 

9. For the washing of the feet, sliould be prepared 
the necessary vessels to hold the water, which should be 
a litte warm; and basins for washing the feet; also, a 
sufiicient number of towels to wipe them; the ewer, 
basin, and towels for the Bishop to wash and wipe his 
hands; also a large towel with strings, which the Bishop 
puts before him, when he washes the feet; two benches, 



352 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

capable of containing six persons each, higher than 
nsual, before which there should be a step; the book of 
the Gospel, a violet stole, and cope, for the Bishop; and 
white dahnatic, tunic, stole, and maniples, for the deacon 
and sub-deacon; the candlesticks, with lighted candles, 
for the acolytes, and the censer and incense-boat. 

Article II. 

From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the 
sanctuary, to the beginning of Mass. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as before directed. 

2. As soon as the Bishop and clergy arrive at the sac- 
risty, they go into the sanctuary before they put on the 
sacred vestments. After a short prayer, they all rise, 
and say None, which is not to be sung. The Bishop, at 
the same time, reads the Psalms for the preparation of 
Mass, without Gloria Patri, and they put on him the 
stockings and sandals. The Psalms of None being ended, 
the Bishop goes to the middle, kneels before the fald- 
stool, and all the clergy kneel at their places, during 
Christy s, Pater, and Miserere, etc. ; at the end of which 
the Bishop says the prayer Pespice. 

3. The prayer Pespice being ended, the clergy who 
have to put on the sacred vestments, go for this purpose 
to the sacristy. The Bishop goes to his seat ; the deacon 
and sub-deacon, who should take their sacred vestments 
during None, go to the Bishop's side, and help to talve 
ofl* his cape, wash his hands, and put on the sacred vest- 
ments as before directed. 

Article III. 

From the heginning to the end of Mass. 

1. As soon as the clergy have put on their vestments, 
they go to their places in the sanctuary, and the Bishop 
being vested, the de icon and sub-deacon put on their 
maniples, the assistant deacons go to the side of the 
Bishop, and Mass is celebrated as usual, with the follow- 
ing exceptions. 



MAUNDAY THURSDxVY. 353 

2. At tlie Confession the Psalm, Judica^ is omitted. 
Tlie organ is not plaj^ed, nor the bells rung any more 
after the Gloria in excelsis. At the Offertory, the sub- 
deacon carries to the altar, first the ciborium for Commu- 
nion, if necessar3', and then the chalice; and when the wine 
and water are put in the chalice, he returns to the side-tabie 
and leaves oil tlie veil ; as on account of the consecra 
tion of the Holy Oils, he does not hold, the jyaten 
during this Mass; he assists at the incensing with tlie 
deacon; he remains at the foot of the altar until the 
Sancius, which he recites with the Bishop, goinir up to 
the platform for that purpose; he incenses the Blessed 
kSacrament at the elevation. 

3. Before the Bishop says the words, Pei' quern hcBG 
or/mia^ Dominc^ semper bona creas, having made a genu 
liection to the Blessed Sacrament, he retires to the 
Epistle side, near the altar, wliere he washes his 
lingers in another chalice, and wipes them, the deacon 
holding the chalice and the sub-deacon pouring tlie 
wine on his fingers ; he then makes again a genutiection to 
the Blessed iSacrament, goes to the first step of the altar, 
puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his hand, and 
between the deacon and sub-deacon, })receded by the 
assistant priest, goes to the seat near the table, prepared 
as in Art i, n. (j, of this chapter, sits, turned towards 
the altar, having the table before him, and his assistants 
at his side, all the others remaining at their places; the 
assistant deacons take no part in ttie blessing of the -tloly 
Oils; hence they retire to one side during the ceremony; 
then the assistant priest says, with a loud voice, in the 
tone of a Lesson, Oleum injirmorum. Immediately 
after, one of the seven sub-deacons, having at his side 
two acolytes, goes to the sacristy, takes the vessel with 
the oil to be consecrated for the sick, covered as it is, 
and holdinof its foot in his riu:ht hand, and havino^ his 
lelt arm round it, carries it to the Bishop, and gives it 
into the hands of the assistant priest, saying, Oleum in- 
jirmorurn. The assistant priest presents it to the Bishop, 
saying the same words, and puts it on the table. 

4. The Bishop, with his mitre on, rises, and reads the 



354 PONTIFICAL CEREMONfES. 

exorcisms in a low voice, loud enough, however, to be 
heard bj the priests who are round him ; after the exor- 
cisms, the clergy answer. Amen; the Bishop, having 
taken off his mitre, says Dominus vohisciim^ and reads 
also, in a low voice, the prayer, JEmitte quassumus ; 
after which, the vessel is brought back to the sacristy by 
the sub-deacon, accompanied by two acolytes. The 
Bishop puts on the mitre, seats himself, and washes his 
hands; then, rising with his mitre on, returns to the 
altar attended by his ministers, and on arriving before 
the lowest step, takes off his mitre, makes a genuflection, 
goes up to the altar, and continues Mass from the words, 
I*er quein hcec omiiia, etc , as far as the Communion of 
the Sacred Body and Blood inclusively. The deacon goes 
up to the altar with the Bishop; the sub-deacon remains 
at the foot of the steps. The sub-deacon does not go 
up at the Dimitte nobis; the Agnus Dei is said, but 
the Pax is not given. 

5. The Bishop having communicated, places the con- 
secrated Host to be reserved for the following day in 
the chalice prepared for the purpose, which the master 
of ceremonies should have previously carried to the altar, 
with its veil and ribbon; the deacon covers it with the 
pall and the paten; over them he places the veil, which 
he fastens with the ribbon round the foot of the chalice, 
and places in the middle of the altar. 

6. Then the deacon sings the Confiteor^ and the cele- 
brant gives the Communion, first to the deacon and sub- 
deacon, and afterwards to the rest of the clergy, accord- 
ing to their rank, beginning with the priests, who should 
wear the stole. To-day, the Fax is not given to the 
deacon and sub-deacon by the Bishop before the Com- 
munion. 

7. The Communion being ended, the Bishop having 
taken not only the usual ablutions, but also that which 
had been previously left in the other chalice, makes a 
genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament, goes down to the 
second step, puts on the mitre, takes the crosier, and 
attended by the ministers as before, goes to the seat near 
the table. 



MAUNDAY THURSJAT. 355 

8. The Bishop having seated himself, the assistant 
priest, standing near him, says in a loud voice, and in the 
tone of a lesson, Oleum ad Sanctum Chrisma, and im- 
mediately after, Oleuin Catechiunenorum ; then the 
Bishop puts incense into the censer and blesses it. This 
being done, they go to the sacristy for the oils in the fol- 
lowing order: the censer-bearer, tlie two a-jolytes with 
their candlesticks and lighted candles, the seven suo- 
deacons, two by two, and in the third row three; the 
seven deacons lii^ewise; and, lastly, the twelve priests, 
also two by two. The Bishop, and his assistants and 
ministers, remain at their places. 

9. The procession comes out of the sacristy in the fol- 
lowing order: the censer-bearer, the sub-deacon with the 
processional cross, between the acolytes with their can- 
dlesticks, two chanters singing the verses, Bedemptor ; 
six sub-deacons, two by two ; five deacons, in the first 
row two, m the second three; a sub-deacon, carrying 
the vase witii the balsam, two deacons carrying the vases 
with oil, having a long veil hanging from their neck 
before their breast, holding the vases with their left arms 
round tliem, and covering the lower part of the vases 
with that part of the veils which hangs on their right; 
the deacon carrying the oil for tlie chrism, walks at the 
right, and he tliat carries the oil of catechumens at the 
lett; last of all, the twelve priests, two by two. As 
they move from the sacristy, the chanters begin to sing 
the verses, O Redemptor^ etc., which are immediately 
repeated by the choir; as also after each strophe sung 
by the chanters. 

10. When the procession arrives at the sanctuary, the 
censer-bearer and the sub-deacon with the cross, between 
the acolytes, place themselves near the altar at the 
Epistle side; the twelve priests, six on each side of the 
assistant deacons, with their faces turned towards the 
aitar, the deacons behind the Bishop, and the sub- 
deacons behind the deacons. The su .-deacon with tiie 
ba:sam, and the deacons with the oil, stop until the otheri 
have taken their places. Which being done, the deacon 
with the oil lor the chrism goes before tlie Bishop, and 



35G POXTTFTCAL CEREMONTES. 

the assistant priest, reeeiving from him the vase wrapped 
in the veil, which the deacon had round his neck, 
presents it to the Bishop, and lays it on the table before 
him. In the meanwhile, the other deacon holds the 
vessel of the oil of tlie catechumens on his arm. Then 
t'le sub-deacon with the bal?am gives the vase which con- 
tains it to the assistant priest, who, having presented it 
to the Bishop, lays it on the t:able. The Bishop takes 
oli" his mitre, rises, and turned towards the altar, blesses 
the balsam, saying, Dominus vohiscum^ and tlie two 
prayers, as fonnd in th^e Roman Pontifical. The second 
prayer being ended, the Bishop, still standing, puts on 
the mitre, and mixes in a paten, or in another vessel, the 
balsain with some oil, wiiich is taken from the vase, say- 
ing the third prayer. 

11. After the third prayer, the clergy having answered, 
Amen^ the Bishop standing, with his mitre on, breathes 
thrice in the form of a cross over tht3 mouth of the vase, 
which is yet kept wrapped in the veil. Then the twelve 
priests breathe over it in the same manner as the Bishop, 
one after another, making genutlections to the Blessed 
Sacrament on the altar, and bowmg to the Bishop both 
before and after. Which being done, the Bishop rises, 
and, with his mitre on, reads the exorcism; at the end 
of which, he takes olf his mitre, and with his hands 
extended before his breast, he sings the Preface as in 
the Pontifical, and having concluded it with the words, 
Per eunidem Dominum^ etc., which he reads, the clergy 
answer, Airien. 

12. Then the Bishop puts into the vase for the chrism, 
the mixture of ba'sam and oil, saying, Hcbg commixtio^ 
etc., and the deacon, vdio carried the vase of the chrism, 
removes from it the long veil in which it was wrapped. 
Then the Bishop bowing, slugs, Ave, Sanctmn Chrisnia, 
three times, but the second time he raises his voice a 
tone higher, and the third he raises it another tone 
higher. After the third time, he kisses the border of 
the vessel, sits down and puts on his mitre. 

I'd. The twelve priests, one after the other, make a 
genufiection to the Blessed Sacrament and a reverence 



MAUi5"DAY THURSDAY. 357 

to the Bishop, kneel on both knees, in the middle, at a 
distance from the table, and sing, Ave^ Sanctum Chrisma^ 
then rise, ufo nearer the table, kneel again, sing, Ave^ 
Sanctum Chrisma^ a tone higher; rise, appr ach the 
table, kneel, sing Ave Sanctum Chrisma^ another tone 
higher; then rise and kiss the border of the vase. They 
then return to their places, having made a genuflection 
to the Blessed Sacrament on the altar, and a bow to the 
Bishop. This being done by the twelve priests, the 
vase with the chrism is placed on one side of the table. 

14. The deacon who holds the vase of the oil of cate- 
chumens goes before the Bishop, and gives it (without 
the veil, which he retains) to tiie assistant priest, who, 
having shown it to the Bisliop, places it on the middle 
of the table before the Bishop who immediately after 
rises, and breathes over it thrice in the form of a cross, 
and sits down. The twelve priests, one after the other, 
breathe over it in like manner. Then the Bishop rises, 
with his mitre on, and reads in a low voice, the exor- 
cis;ns; at the end of which, the clergy answer, Amen. 
Tlie Bishop takes off his mitre, and standing, says, in a 
low voict', Dominus vobiscum,^ etc., Oremiis^ and the 
prayer, Deus^ increm^entorum^ for the blessing of the 
oil of catechamens, which being end.:d, the clergy 
answer. Amen. Afterwards, the Bishop sings thrice, 
Ave Sanctum Oleum.^ as has been said, n. 12, for the 
chrism, and kisses the brim of the vase; the same is 
done likewise by the twelve priests, as directed in n. 13.* 

15. All this being done, the deacons take the vases in 
their arms, and the procession is arranged as i:i n. 9, to 
bring back to the sacristy the consecrated oil and t!ie 
chrisuj, the chanters singing the verses, Ut novtttir^ and 
the choir repeating after each stropne, (J Liedemptor. 

16. Whilst they go to the sacristy, the Bishop, sitting, 
washes his hands, returns to the altar, and continues 
Mass as usual; but every time he goes to or from the 



*Mgr. Martinucci says that the twelve priests should not genafloct 
in this case, but only make a bow towards the oil ol' catechamens. 
The Pontifical says, tieverenter saiutarU Oleum. 



358 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

middle of the altar, he makes a genuflection to the 
Blessed Sacrament, and when he says Domimts vobis- 
curn,, does not not turn his back to the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, but draws back a little towards the Gospel side. 
After the Ite^ Missa est^ the Bishop standing, without 
mitre, on the Gospel side, without turning completely 
round, gives the solemn blessing. But the Indulgences 
are to be published in the chapel of the repository. 

17. The Bishop, at the words In priuGipio erat Yer- 
hur/i, should not make the sign of the cross, as usual, on 
the altar, but only on himself. 

Article IY. 
The Procession to the depository. 

1. After the Gospel of St. John, he goes to his seat, 
takes off the sacred vestments as far as the stole ex- 
clusively, and puts on a white cope. In the same time, 
another sub-deacon in tunic, takes the processional cross, 
covered with a violet veil, and the acolytes their candle- 
sticks; candles are distributed to the clergy, and lighted ; 
the canopy is brought outside of the railing, and given 
to those who are to carry it. 

2. The Bishop, at his seat, with his mitre on, puts in- 
cense into the two censers, but he does not bless it, 
neither does the assistant priest kiss the spoon, nor the 
Bishop's hand. Then the Bishop, with his assistants, 
goes to the altar, takes oif his mitre, and kneeling on a 
cushion on the lowest step of the altar, he incenses 
thrice the Blessed Sacrament ; the long veil is put on 
his shoulders, and fastened before his breast. The first 
assistant deacon goes up to the altar, and after the usual 
genuflections, takes the Blessed Sacrament, and, stan l- 
ing, presents it to the Bishop, kneeling down on the 
liigliest step; who, having received it, rises, and the 
deacon makes a genuflection, and the choir begins to 
sing Pange Lingua. The assistant deacons, on each 
side of the Bishop, raise the extremities of his cope, and 
the master of ceremonies raises up his vestments in front, 
when he goes up or down the steps. The procession 



MAU2!fDAY THURSDAY. 359 

walks to the repository in the followini^ order: the sub- 
deacon between the acolytes with their candlesticks, the 
chanters, the inferior clergy, the acolyte carrying the 
crosier, the sub-deacons, the deacons, the priests in 
chasubles, the deacon and sub-deacon, the assistant priest, 
the two censer-bearers, moving slowly and regularly 
their censers; the Bishop, between the two assistant 
deacons under the canopy, followed by the acolytes, with 
the mitre, book, candle, etc. 

3. The croiS-bearer and the acolytes, on arriving near 
the door of the chapel, retire a little on one side to 
make way for the procession, and remain there standing 
and turned towards the procession. Those of the clergy 
who walk next to the cross-bearer stop, the first on each 
side of the chapel, and those who follow stop next to 
them, so that the clergymen who walked the last may be 
the nearest to the altar of the repository, and divide 
into two lines, and the Bishop, with the assistant min- 
isters, passes between them. The censjr-bearers, on 
entering the chapel, keep their censers motionless. Those 
who ca(ry ihe canopy, stop at the door of the chapel. 

4. The Bishop, on arriving at the highest step of the 
altar, stops, and the deacon kneeling down, receives from 
him the Blessed Sacrament, and immediately plac( s It 
in the urn, or tabernacle, prepared for the purpose, 
leaving the door opened. Then the Bishop goes down 
to the second step, puts incense into the censer, kneels 
down, and incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament. The 
deacon shuts the door of the urn, and the Bishop 
goes np to the altar, makes a genuflection, kisses the 
altar, takes in his left hand the crosier, and standing at 
the Gospel side, without micro, gives the solemn bless- 
ing; after wh.ch the assistant priest publishes, as usual, 
the forty-days' Indulgences. 

5. The procession returns to the sanctuary in the same 
order as it came ; the Bishop, on arriving at his seat, 
takes otf the sacred vestments. The clergy take 
theirs oif in the sacristy. Then Yespers are recited, 
and the altars stripped. 



360 pontifical ceremonies. 

Article Y. 
The Mandatum, or Washing of the Feet 

1. At a convenient honr, the Bishop and clergy meet 
ill the place prepared for the washing of the feet. The 
Bishop puts on the amice, alb, cincture, with a violet 
stole and cope, and p':ain mitre. The deacon and sub- 
deacon, with the assistant priest, put on white vestments 
as for Mass. 

2. Thirteen poor men, or thirteen clergjnien, sit on 
high benches, with a high step in iront; the covering of 
their right feet should be so arranged as to make it easy 
to remove it, when they are to be washed. 

3. The Bishop, attended as usual by his assistants, at 
his seat or faldstool, puts incense into the censer and 
blesses it. Then the deacon holding the Missal before 
his breast, with the s'lb-deacon, the two acolytes < arry- 
ing their candlesticks, go before the Bishop, kneel down, 
and the deacon ask.- the blessing, saying, Jube Domne, 
etc., which the Bishop gives him as usual, saying 
Domimis sit^ etc. The Gospel is afterwards sum with 
the usual ceremonies; the book is carried to the Bishop 
by the sub-deacon, and the Bishop is incensed by the 
deacon. 

4. After the Gospel, the choir sings Mandatum novum^ 
and what follows a:^ ic the Missal ; the Bishop t ikos otf 
his cope, receives the gremiale, and with his mitre on, 
goes before the first poor man, or clergyman, kneels on 
a cushion, which for this purpose is moved by an acolyte, 
as he passes on, and the ewer and basin being brought 
by the attending clergymen, the Bishop washes the right 
foot, wipes it with a towel, and kisses it; and if a poor 
man, he gives him some alms. He does in like manner 
to the ether twelve. 

5. After having washed their feet, the Bishop returns to 
his seat, washes his hands, takes olf the greniiale^ which 
he had tied on him, puts on the cope, and takes ofi" his 
mitre. The two acolytes with their candlesticks, and a 
third one with the book, and a fourth with the candle- 



GOOD FlllDAY. 361 

stick, ^o before him, and rising, he says, Pater Woster^ 
etc., Et ne nos, etc., with the following verses and 
prayers as in the Missal. After ^vhicb, the Bisliop, 
raising his hands, makes the sign of the cT'SS towards 
those who are present. Lastly, he takes oli' the sacred 
vestments, and retires. 



CHAPTER XI. 

GOOD FKIDAY. 

Akticle I. 
Wliat is to he Prepared. 

1. The altar, the seat intended for the Bishop, the 
sacred ministers's bench, and all the sanctuary, should be 
quite bare, without any ornaments. 

2. On the altar, the cross, covered with a black veil, 
bat in such manner as to render it easy to uncover its 
different parts successively; six plain candlesticks, with 
unbleached wax candles; the Bishop's vestments, viz., 
an amice, alb, and cincture, with a black maniple, stole, 
dahnatic, tunic, and chasuble, the pectoral cross, and 
the plain white mitre. The sandals, gloves, and crosier 
are not used on this day. 

3. On the small table should be sp^-ead a linen cloth, 
which ought not, however, to hang dt)\vn ; and on this 
tab'e should be placed the ewer and basin, with a towel 
on a plate; the cruets, a book-stani with a Missal, 
anot'ier Missal, an altar cloth folded, a large black stole 
for tiie deacon, a black burse with a purifier and a cor- 
poral, a black veil for the chalice, two candlesticks, with 
unbleached wax candles, for the acolytes. 

4. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the deacon 
and sub-deacon, viz., two amices, albs, and cinctures, and 
a stole; a black cope for tiie assistant priest; also two 
foidjd chasubles of the same color, with cinctures, albs. 



362 PONTIFICAL CEREMON"TES. 

and amices, for the two assistant deacons. Likewise, a 
sufficient number of sacred vestments for the cler^j. 
Also, three amices, albs, cinctures, with as many black 
maniples and stoles, and three Missals, for the deacons 
who have to sing the Passion. Two censers with incense- 
boats, a chafing-dish with fire and tongs, the tapers and 
candles for the procession. 

5. At the Gospel side in the sanctuary, a violet carpet, 
with a long white veil, and a violet velvet cushion, 
adorned with gold-lace and embroidery, for the venera- 
tion of the cross. Also, three bare book-stands or desks, 
for those, who are to sing the Passion. 

6. Before the middle of the altar, and at the foot of 
the lowest step, the praying-desk bare, and five cushions, 
to be placed on the highest step of the altar, for the 
prostration of the Bishop's assistants and ministers, three 
on the Epistle side, and two on the Gospel side. 

7. In any convenient place, the processional cross, 
covered witli a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 

8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy^ 
the white veil on the side-table, and the key of the taber- 
nacle on the altar ; also near it, the steps (if necessary) to 
reach the door of the tabernacle. 

9. On the minister's bench, the folded chasubles, and 
maniples for the deacon and sab-deacon. 

Article IL 

From the entrance of the Bishop and clergy into the 
sanctuary^ to the beginning of the Ojjice. 

1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as directed in the 
first part of this book. 

2. From the sacristy, the clergy, before they put on 
the sacred vestments, go with the Bishop to the sanc- 
tuary: only the deacon and sub-deacon remain in ihe 
sacristy, and put on the sacred vestments, the folded 
chasubles and maniples excepted. The Bishop and 
clergy having entered the sanctuary, kneel, pray for a 
short space of time, and rise. Tlie Bishup goes to iiis 



GOOD FTllDAY. 363 

seat; they all say Pater and Ave, in a low voice, and 
when the Psahn Mirabilia is begun, they sit down, and 
continue None. At the end of tliis canonical hour, the 
Bishop p^oes to the praying-desk, and, with the clergy, 
kneels during the Christus and Miserere; the Bishop 
says the prayer Eespice^ at the end of which they all 
rise; the Bishop goes to his seat; the deacon and sub- 
deacon come from the sacristy, go to his side and assist 
him to put on his vestments. 

At the same time, the clergy put on their sacred vest- 
ments in the sacristy.' The two assistant deacons go to 
the side of the Bishop, and the deacon and sub-deacon 
go to their bench, and put on their maniples and folded 
chasubles. 

Article III. 
From the heginning of the Office to the end of it. 

1. The Bishop, being vested, goes to the middle, and 
taking olf his mitre, kneels before the prayint? desk ; at the 
same time the assistant priest and deacons, with the 
otRciating deacon and sub-deacon, prostrate themselves 
on the cushions, which the acolytes place on the steps as 
directed above. All the clergy kneel, and remain pray- 
ing for some time. Meanwhile, two acolytes unfold the 
altar-cloth. 

2. The Bishop and ministers rise, go up to the altar, 
and kiss it. An acolyte places the faldstool on tiie 
platform, at the Epistle side, and the Bishop sits on it, 
turned towards the Gospel side (for to-day he does not '-^-d 
to his seat, before the end of the Oiiice); the assistant 
priest sits on the first step, at the feet of the Bishop, 
and behind him, on the same step, the deacon and suu- 
deacon ; and near these, the two assistant deacons. The 
clergy sit at their usual places. 

3. One of the clergy, attended by the master of cere- 
monies, having made the usual genufiection and rever- 
ences, goes to the place where the Epistle is usually 
sung, and tliere sings the Lesson in the tone of a 



364 PONTIFICAL CEREMOXIES. 

Prophecy. He does not kiss the Bishop's hand ; hut, 
leaving the book in the hands of the master of ceremonies, 
makes the usual genuflection and reverences, and returns 
to his place. Whilst tlie Tract is sung by the choir, the 
Bishop, still sitting, reads the Lesson and the Tract from 
the book, which an acolyte holds before him; but he is 
not accompanied by the other, nor do the acolytes carry 
the candlesticks on this day. The Bishop's assistants 
and ministers stand by him whilst he reads. 

4. After the Tract, the Bishop takes off his mitre, 
rises, and turning towards the altar, sings Oremus. The 
deacon sings Flectamus genua; and the sub-deacon, 
Levate / standing, one after the other, behind the Bishop. 
At the words, Flectamus^ etc., all, except the Bishop, 
kneel, and at the word Levate they rise. Then the 
Bishop sings the praj'er; during which the sub-deacon 
takes off his folded chasuble, and at the end of the 
prayer sings the second Lesson in the tone of the Epistle, 
during which the Bishop, with his assistants and the 
clergy, sit as before. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon 
does not kiss the Bishop's hand; but he resumes his 
chasuble, and returns to his place. The Bishop sits, 
and whilst the choir sings the Tract, he reads the Epistle 
and the Tract, attended as usual. 

5. Whilst the Tract is sung, the three deacons, who 
are to sing the Passion, go to the sacristy, put on the 
sacred vestments, and towards the end of the Tract go 
out to the sanctuary, and sing the Passion. Everything 
is done as at page 349, except that they do not kiss the 
Bishop's hand. 

Tiie Bishop, attended by his assistants, reads the 
]/assion out of the Missal placed oti tue altar at the 
Epistle side, and makes a genuflection there at the words 
Kt inclinato cajpite. 

6. After the Passion, the Bishop and the clergy seat 
themselves; the otiiciating deacon takes off his chasuble, 
puts on the large stole, carries the book to the altar, 
kneels, says, Munda cor meum^ takes the book, and, 
without asking tiie blessing, goes with the sub-deacon, 
and the acolytes without candlesticks, and without the 



GOOD FRIDAY. 365 

censer, to sing the last part of the Passion, in the tone 
of the Gospel ; which being done, they all return to their 
places. 

7. If there is a sermon, the preacher accompanied by 
the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, and asks 
the Indulgences, without, however, asking the blessino^; 
and having made the usual genuflection and reverences, 
goes to the pulpit and preaches. The Bishop sits at tlie 
Epistle side, but turned towards the preacher. All the 
clergy sit during the sermon. After the sermon, the 
preacher publishes the Indulgences. Then the Bishop 
immediately takes off the mitre, and rises; the chair is 
removed, anl the prayers are sung as in the Missal ;. the 
Bishop singing Oreraus^ the deacon Fiectainus genua, 
and the sub-deacon, Levate. Whilst the last prayers are 
sung, the acolytes spread the carpet on tlie steps of the 
altar, and put the cushion on the lower steps, and over 
it the veil on which the cross is to be laid. 

8. After all the prayers, the Bishop takes off his chas- 
uble, goes to the back corner of the altar, at the Epistle 
side, and turns towards the people. The sacristan, 
taking the cross from the altar, gives it to the deacon, 
and tlie deacon to the Bishop, who, having receivej it 
respectfully, with his right hand uncovers the top as far 
as the cross-piece, and raising it with both hands, sings, 
Ecce lignum Crucis, out of the book which the assistant 
priest holds before him ; the deacon being at the Bishop's 
ri^ht and the sub-deacon at the left. All rise with their 
heads uncovered ; the Bishop, assisted hy the ministers, 
continues to sing. In quo salus mundi pejpendit ; and 
the choir and all the clergy, the Bishop oniy excepted, 
kneeling on both knees, and bowing their heads, answer, 
Yenite, adoremus ; after which, tne Bishop, with the 
assistant priest and ministers, goes up to the platform, 
and stops at the Epistle side, where ho uncovers the 
right arm and head of the crucilix, and raising his v^dce 
one tone higher, sings again, Ecce lignum Crucis ; and 
everything is done as before. Afterwards he goes to the 
middle of the altar with all his assistants; there he 
uncovers the whole cross, giving the veil to the sut> 

31' 



366 PONTIFICAL CERi^.MOJ^-IES. 

deacon, by whom it is given to an acolyte, who carries 
it to the small table; and the Bishop then sings, one 
tone still higher than the second time, Ecce llgninn 
Crucis ; and everything is done the third time as before. 
The Bishop goes alone to the place prepared for the 
cross, carrying it raised up with both hands, and lays it 
on the cushion. lie then goes to the faldstool, takes off 
his shoes, and without mitre, goes between the two assist- 
ant deacons to ven-.rate the cross, kneeling the first time 
near the communion-rail, and praying a little; tlie second 
time, at half the distance from it to the place where the 
cross is; and the third time, close to the cross, which he 
reverently kisses, after having prayed, and returns to the 
faldstool, where he puts on his shoes, chasuble, and mitre. 
He afterwards sits and reads. Pop ale meus^ etc. 

9. After the Bishop, the assistant priest, the two assist- 
ant deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the 
clergy, according to their respective order and dignity, 
go to venerate the cross, in the same manner as the 
Bishop. During the veneration of the cross, the choir 
sings tlie Imjprojperia / and about the end of it the candles 
are lighted. The deacon and sub-deacon unfold the 
linen cloth, which had been extended by the acolytes on 
the altar. The deacon carries trora the small table to 
the altar the corporal and the purifier, and having taken 
the corporal out of the burse, unfolds it in the middle of 
the altar; the master of ceremonies carries ttie book- 
stand and the Missal to the altar, and places it at the Gospel 
side. The veneration being ended, the deacon carries 
back the cross to the altar, without making any reveren-je, 
and all the clergy kneel as he passes. The Bishop sits 
down and washes his hands, and puts incense in the 
thurible. 

10. Then the procession is arranged in the following or- 
der : the two censer-bearers with their censers and incense- 
boat ; the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's vestments, between 
the two acolytes with their candlesticks; the clergy; 
the assistant priest between the deacon and sub-deacon, 
and the Bishop between the two assistant deacons. As 
they move trom tlie middle of the altar, they all make a 
genuflection to the cross. 



GOOD FRIDAY. 367 

11. When the procession arrives at the repository, all 
place themselves as yesterday ; the Bishop, on arriving 
at the door or entry of the chapel, takes off his mitre; 
on coming to the altar, he kneels, with all the clergy ; 
and, having prayed for some time, the Bishop rises; the 
assistant priest presents to him the incense-boat. The 
Bishop puts incense into the censers; but does not bless 
the incense; the sacristan, if in Holy Orders, opens the 
tabernacle, and the Bishop having knelt down, incenses 
the Blessed Sacrament thrice ; the long veil is put on 
the Bishop's shoulders, and the first ast:istant deacon 
takes the Blessed Sacrament from the tabernacle, and 
gives it to the Bishop, who is yet kneeling. The deacon 
makes a genuflection, and the Bishop, havino^ covered 
the chalice with the veil hanging from his shoulders, 
holds it with both hands, rises, and all go in procession, 
as yesterday, to the altar; at the same time the choir 
sings, Vexiila Begis^ etc. Those, who carry the canopy, 
stop at the chancel, the others form a double semi-circie 
before the altar, and kneel down till after Communion, 
holding the lighted candles in their hands. 

12. The Bishop, on arriving at the steps of the altar, 
standing, gives the Blessed Sacrament to the offijiatin^- 
deacon, who receives it kneeling, and places it on tiie 
altar. The Bishop, having taken off the veil, kneels on a 
cushion, on the lowest step. He afterwards rises, and 
being attended by the assistant priest, puts incense into 
the censer without blesiing it. He incenses the B.esseJ 
Sacrament thrice, goes up to the altar, takes the Biessud 
Sacrament out of the chalice, and taking care not to 
touch It, places It on the paten which is held by the 
officiating deacon ; and having received the paten from 
the hands of the same, lays the Sacred Host on the cor- 
poral, without saying anything. If he happen to touch 
the Blessed Sacrament, he washes his fingers in some 
vessel prepared for this purpose ; the deacjn puts wine 
into the ctialice, and the sab-deacon water, which is not 
blessed by the Bishop, who does not say the usual prayer ; 
but having received the chalice from the deacon, places 
it on the altar, and the deacon covers it with the pall. 



368 POXTIFTCAL CEREMOXIES. 

13. The Bishop, liavins^ received tlie incense-boat from 
the assistant priest, put incense into tlie censer, without 
blessing it, and ir^censes first the sacred otierin<j:s, sayirio^^ 
Incensum isticd ; secondly, the cross, and thirdly, the 
altar, saving, Dirigatur^ IJomine^ etc., making a genu- 
flection before and after, and every time he passes hefo'*8 
the Blessed Sacrament; and having incensed the altar, 
he gives the censer to the deacon, saying, Accendat in 
nohis^ Doraine, etc. The Bishop is not incensed. 

14. After the incensing, the Bishop retires a little 
towards the Epistle side beyond the altar, and washes his 
hands,without saying anything; thefihegoes to the middle 
of the altar, bows, and joins his hands, saying, In spiritio 
humilitatis ; afterwards receding a little towards the 
Gospel side, he turns towards the people, and says, 
Orate^fratres^ taking care not to make a complete circle, 
turning his face towards the people, and back again, 
towards the altar. He immediately sings in a ferial 
tone, Oremus^ Prmcejptis salutarlhus moiiiti^ etc., and 
having said in a low voice, Amen^ says the prayer. Libera 
nos, etc., in the same tone of voice in which he said the 
Pater. Having finished it, he makes a genuflection, 
puts the paten under the Bies ed Sacrament, and taking 
the latter in his right hand, raises It so that It may i^e 
seen by the people ; then he divides the Sacred Host in 
three parts as usual, and puts the smallest of them into 
the chalice, without making the sign of the cross. He 
does not say Fax Domini^ nor Agrius Dei ; neither does 
he give the Fax, 

15. The Bishop, having put the particle into the chalice, 
makes a genuflection, and having said only, Farceptio 
corporis^ makes again a genuflection, takes the paten 
with the Blessed Sacrament, says, Fanem coelestem accijp- 
iam, etc., signs himself with the Blessed Sacrament, 
saying. Corpus Domini nostri^ etc., and communicates; 
he immediately consumes the wine with a part of tlie 
Host in the chalice, without saying anything; afterwards 
he washes his fingers (the deacon pouring, as usual, the 
wine into the chalice), takes the ablution, and bowing, 
with his hands joined, in the middle of the altar, says 



HOLY SATURDAY. 369 

Gill J, Quod ore sumjpsiimis^ Domine^ etc. After this, lie 
goes to the Epistle side, puts on the mitre, washes his 
hands, and goes to his seat; where, having taken off his 
vestments and put on the cape, he says Vespers with the 
clergy, who have by this time taken off the sacred vest- 
ments and put on their surplices. The caudles are 
extinguished, and after the antiphon of the Magnificat 
has been repeated, the Bishop goes to the middle, kneels 
at the faldstool during the Christus and the Miserere; 
after which he says the prayer, Res^ice^ and retires, as 
usual. 



CHAPTER XII. 

HOLY SATURDA^X. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prepared, 

1. The church, the high altar and the baptismal font 
should be prepared as directed, page 256. Likewise, the 
triple candle, the paschal candle, the new fire, the grains 
of incense, and everything else, as there directed. 

2. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments should be pre- 
pared as usual for the assistant priest, the two assistant 
deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon ; for the clergy 
according to their order and dignity; with this differ- 
ence, that to-day violet vestments must be prepared ; the 
deacon and sub-deacon make use of folded chasubles. 
Under the violet, white vestments must be prepared. 

3. On the altar, two front veils, white and purple; the 
sacred vestments for the Bishop must be double, that is, 
white vestments should be placed immediately upon the 
altar, and over them violet vestments. 

4. The Bishop's chair should be adorned with white 
ornaments, and then covered with purple cloth. 



370 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

Aeticle II. 

The Blessing of the Wew Fire. 

1. The Bishop having entered the sanctuary, prays 
before the high altar for a short time and goes to the 
throne; he takes off his cappa and receives the amice, 
alb, etc., and cope of violet. Meanwhile, the new fire is 
brcnght in and placed near the throne. The Bishop 
rises, and in a low tone says Domimis vohiscum and the 
three ensuing prayers. Near the end of the third prayer 
the thurifer puts some of the new fire in the censer. The 
Bishop then blesses the grains of incense, and sitting 
down, he puts incense in the censer; then he rises and 
receives the sprinkle from the assistant priest, and 
sprinkles the fire and incense, reciting meanwhile the 
Asperges ; then- he incenses them. The acolytes leave 
and the Bishop unvests, assisted by the ministers ; then 
the assistant deacons put on him the cappa, and he sits 
down. 

Article III. 
The Exultet^ and the Blessing of the Paschal Candle, 

1. The Bishop, dressed in cappa, sits on his pontifical 
chair, having at liis side the two assistant deacons and 
the assistant priest, and puts incense into the censer and 
I losses it, the assistant priest presenting to him the 
incense-boat. 

2. The sub-deacon, in violet folded chasuble, taking 
the processional cross, goes with the deacon, who is 
habited in a white dalmatic, with a sufiicient number of 
attending clergymen, to the [)lace where the triple candle 
and other necessary things have been prepared. The 
Bishop, with his assistants, remains at his seat, and the 
rest of the clergy in the sanctuary. 

3. The master of ceremonies walks first ; then the 
censer-bearer, having at his left an acolyte ; after them a 
S'lb-deacon carrying the cross ; the deacon follows; and 
lastly tour acolytes, two by two. 



HOLY SATURDAY. 371 

4. On arriving at the place prepared, the master of 
ceremonies lights a candle from the new fire ; the deacon 
takes the triple candle, and one of the acolytes the plate 
with the grains of incense; after this, they go back in 
the following order : first, the acolyte, carrying with both 
hands the plate with the grains of incense; on his left 
the censer-bearer, swinging the censer gently; second, 
the snb deacon, carrying the cross; third, the deacon 
with the triple candle, and on his left the master of 
ceremonies with the lighted candle ; lastly, the four 
acolytes, two by two. 

5. As the deacon enters the church, he lowers the 
triple candle, that one of tlu^ branches may be lighted 
by the master of ceremonies ; then he raises it again, and 
ho, as well as all the others in the procession, except tlie 
sub-deacon carrying the cross, together with the Bishop 
and all the clergy, kneel on one knee, when Lumen 
Chrwti is sung by the deacon, and rise when Deo gratias 
is answered by the clergy. The same is done a second 
time when they arrive at the middle of the church, and 
a third time when they arrive before the altar; but the 
deacon, at eajh time, raises his voice one tone higher. 

6. Then the Bishop and all in the sanctuary sit down. 
Those of the procession rise, and place themselv iS as 
directed, page 261. The deacon having left the triple 
candle in the hands of one of the acolytes, receives from 
the master of ceremonies the Missal ; and having made 
the usual genuflection to the altar, and reverences to the 
Bishop and the clergy, goes to the Bishop, and without 
kissing his hand, says, Juhe, Doinne^ etc.; the Bishop 
makes the sign of the cross towards him, using ttie 
accustomed form, Dotninus sit, etc., saying, however, 
£*aschale prcBco?iium, instead of Evangelium. 

7. The deacon, having received the olessing, goes from 
the Bishop's seat to the middle before the altar, betw^eeu 
the cross- bearer and the acolyte, who carries the triple 
candle, and having there made a genuflection and the 
usual reverences, he goes to sing tlie Exidtet ; he first 
incenses the book. The sub-deacon, with the cross 
turned towards the Bishop, and the thurifer stand on his 



372 PON"TIFICAL CEREMOIflES.- 

right, and the acoljte with the triple candle and the one 
with the grains of incense on his left. 

8. When the deacon commences, the Bishop and all 
the clergj in the sanctuary rise, and during it stand with 
their heads uncovered. 

Article IY. 

From the end of the Exultet to the Benediction of the 
Baptismal Font, 

1. The Exultet being ended, the deacon shuts the 
Missal, leaves it on its stand, goes to the bench of the 
sacred ministers, takes off his white maniple, dalmatic, 
and stole, and puts on the violet stole; the sub-deacon 
leaves the cross by the side-table, and takes off his folded 
chasuble and maniple, and with the deacon goes to the 
Bishop's seat, and the acolyte places the triple candle on 
its stand at the Gospel side. 

2. The Bishop and all the clergy, standing with their 
heads uncovered, say. Pater et Ave, secretly, aud then 
sit down, and JVone is recited. After tiie last Psalm, 
the Bishop kneels at the faldstool, the clergy kneeling 
likewise during the Christus and the Miserere; after 
which, the Bishop says the prayer, Resjpioe. Then 
having returned to his seat, he reads the Psalm, Qaam 
dilecta, etc., with the Gloria Patri^ and the other verses 
with the following prayers; at the same time he puts on 
the white sandals ; after the prayers he washes his hands, 
and puts on the pontilicai vestments of violet color, includ- 
ing the maniple and the plain mitre, reading the appro- 
priate prayers. The clergy likewise put on their sacred 
vestments; and the Bishop being vested, the two assist- 
ant deacons in violet folded chasubles, and the assistant 
priest in violet cope, go to the Bishop's ciiair, and the 
deacons to their bench, where they put on their violet 
chasubles and maniples, and sit down. 

3. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, 
and attended by his assistants, and the deacon and sub- 
deacon, goes up to the altar, which he kisses, alter 



HOLY SATURDAY. 373 

having ta"k:en off his mitre. Then having made a 
reverence to tlie cross, he puts on the mitre, takes the 
crosier in his left hand, and attended by the assistant 
deacons and priest, goes to his chair, where he sits ; the 
deacon and sub-deacon go to their bench. All in the 
sanctuary sit down. 

4. A book-stand is placed in the middle of the sanc- 
tuary ; an acolyte or chanter, attended by the master of 
ceremonies, goes to it, makes a genuflection to the altar, 
and the usual reverences to the Bishop and to the clergy, 
on each side of the sanctuary, and reads the first 
rophecy, without the title. In the meantime, the 
ishop reads the same prophecy out of the book, wiiich 
an acolyte holds open betore him. Whilst he reads, his 
assistants stand near him. The singer, having finished 
the prophecy, and made the usual genuflection and 
reverences, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand. Then the 
Bishop rises, sings Oremus^ and the first assistant deacon 
says or sings, Flectamus genua. At these words, all in 
the sanctuary (the Bishop only excepted) make a genu- 
flection, and the second deacon &ings, l^evate ; then all 
rise, and the Bishop sings the prayer out of the book, 
which the assistant priest holds open before him. The 
same is done in regard to all the other prophecies, with the 
exception, that after the fourth, eighth, and eleventh 
prophecies, the choir sings the Tract, and the Bishop 
reads it. After the twelfth prophecy, Flectamus genua 
and Levate are not sung. 

Article Y. 

Blessing the Baptismal Font, 

1. After the prayer which follows the la^.t prophecy, 
the Bishop takes off the maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, 
and tunic, and puts on a violet cope ; then, with his mitie 
on, and the crosier in his left hand, preceded by the 
cross, carried by the sub-deacon and all the clergy, 
arranged as directed at page 264, between two assistant 
deacons he goes to the baptismal font, the assistant 



374 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 

priest walking immediately before him at the right of 
the deacon, and he does everything as directed in tlie 
same place, and in the Eoman Missal. 

2. If any child or adult is to be baptized, the Bishop 
baptizes them, as directed in the Roman Ritual. 

3. After the blessing of the font, they return to the 
sanctuary in procession, in the same order as they came 
to the font. 

Article YL 

From the Benediction of the Font to the 'beginning 
of Mass, 

1. The Bishop, on arriving at the high altar, takes off 
his cope and mitre, and kneels, leaning on the faldstool ; 
the assistants, deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, 
likewise kneel ; and the Litany is sung by two chanters 
kneeling before two stools behind the Bishop. 

If there is an ordination, those who are to be ordained 
prostrate themselves during the Litany, which the singers 
interrupt at the proper place when the Bishop is to say, 
Ut hos electos^ etc. 

2. When the chanters sing the verse. Per mysteriiim 
sanctce incarnationis tum^ the deacon and sub-deacon go 
to the sacristy, take off their violet vestments, and put 
on white, and come out immediately. 

3. At the verse, Peccatores, the Bishop rises with the 
assistant deacons and priests; the latter go to the sacristy 
to take off the violet vestments and put on white ; the 
Bishop, standing in the same place, assisted by the deacon 
and sub-deacon, takes off the violet vestments and puts 
on the white; all the clergy in sacred vestments do the 
same. In the meanwhile, the acolytes remove from 
the altar the violet front-veil, and from the tabernacle 
the canopy of the same color, and from the small table the 
violet veil that covered the white ; the candles are lighted, 
the relic cases are placed between the candlesticks, and 
the carpet is spread. The chanters should take care to 
Bing the Litany very slowly from the verse, Peccatores, 



HOLY SATURDAY. 375 

Article YII. 
From the 'beginning to the end of Mass. 

1. The Bishop, having put on the white vestments, 
when the singers begin Kyrie^ makes the Confession 
with his ministers, saying the Psahn Judica and tlie 
Gloria Patri ; goes up to the altar, kisses both it and 
the book of the Gospels; puts incense into the censer 
and blesses it ; incmses the cross and altar, and is in- 
censed, as usnal, by the deacon. Then he goes to his 
seat, where, having said the Kyrie^ he sings, Gloria in 
excelsis Deo. Then all the bells are rung, and the organ 
is played. 

2. After the hymn, Gloria in excelsis^ the Bishop rises 
without mitre, turns towards the people, and sings, Pax 
vohis^ and the prayer. Pens, qui hano sacratissimam 
noctem^ etc. The rest is done as usual. 

3. The sub-deacon, having sung the Epistle, leaves the 
Missal in the hands of the master of ceremonies, and 
forthwith going to the Bishop, says in a clear voice, 
lieverendissime Pater^ Annuntlo vohis gaudium mag- 
num^ quod est Alleluia, and kisses his hand; then, 
either the sub-deacon or chanter intones Alleluia to the 
Bishop, who, rising without mitre, sings thrice, Alleluia, 
raising every time his voice one tone higher, and the 
choir every time repeats it ; and after the third Alleluia, 
sings the verse, Confitemini ; then the Bishop sits down 
and continues Mass as usual. 

4. At the Gospel, the acolytes do not carry the candle- 
sticks, but the book is incensed as usual, and the deacon 
askt, the blessing. Pax Domini sit semper vohiscum is 
said ; but the Pax is not given. Agnus Dei is not said, 
neither the Communio. 

5. The Bishop, after the Communion and the usual 
ablutions, washes his hands, goes to his seat, seats him- 
self, and the choir begins Alleluia, in place of Yespers. 
At the Magnificat, the sub-deacon intones the antiphon 
to the Bishop, which he repeats, standing ; then he sits 
with his mitre on, puts incense into the censer, and when 



376 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. 

the Magnificat is begun, he goes to the altar, takes off 
his mitre, makes a bow to the cross, kisses the altar, 
incenses the cross and the altar, returns to bis seat, is 
incensed, as well as all the clergy, as usual, and stands 
till the end of the Magnificat. Whilst the antiphon is 
repeated, he sits, puts on the mitre, returns to the altar 
at the end ot the antiphon, sings Dorainus vohiscurn^ 
and the prayer; the diQ2,Qon&mg's>^ Beiiedicamus Domino, 
Alleluia^ Alleluia / the Bishf'p gives the solemn blessing, 
and the Indulgences are published. 

Then the Bishop disrobes and retires, as usual. 



CHAPTER XIII. 

CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN PROVINCIAL COUNCILS.* 

Article I. 
What is to he done before it opens, 

1. Previous notice should be given of the celebration 
of the Provincial Council to all the Bishops of the 
province, and others who are to attend. 

2. On the feast of the Epiphany, when the movable 
feasts are published, as directed in the Roman Pontifical, 
Part III, Tit. De publicatione festorum mohilium in 
Ejpijpliania Domini, adding to the usual formula before 
the publication of the movable feast, immediately fol- 
lowing the day of the celebration of the Council, these 
words. Die . . . mensis . . . hujiis anni, quce erit 
dominica . . . Concilium provinciale Deo adjiwante in 
Metropolitana Ecclesia inchoahitur. 

3. On the three Sundays immediately preceding the 
opening of the Council, it should be published from the 

*Ex Cseremoniali Episcoporum, L. i, c. 31 et ex Pontificali Ko« 
mano, Part III, Tit. Ordo ad Synodum. 



HOW THE CHURCH IS TO BE ADORN"ED. 377 

pulpit before the sermon, in all the chnrehes of the 
province, and the prayers of the people requested for its 
success. It is usual on such occasions that the Bishop of 
each diocese order the Collect, De Sjpiritu Sancto, to be 
added at Mass every day till the conclusion of the 
Council. 

Article II. 

Mov) the Metropolitan Church is to he adorned and 
arranged. 

1. The Metropolitan, or any other church in which 
the Council is to be celebrated, should be adorned as 
for the greatest festivals. On the evening before, the 
bells, with festive peals, should announce the opening of 
the Council. 

2. The Archbishop's seat is placed at the altar ; those 
of the Bishop's on each side of the sanctuary ; those 
nearest to the altar are to be occupied by the senior 
Bishops, according to priority of consecration ; they 
should be raised on a platform by one or two steps. 
The other clergymen may sit against the railing of the 
sanctuary; the vicars-general of any diocese, if present, 
taking precedence, according to priority of ordination; 
next, the superiors of clerical congregations ; next, the 
provincials of religious orders; next, the theologians, 
according to priority of ordination. The first place is 
on the Gospel side. This arrangement is not quite con- 
formable to that prescribed by the Koman Pontifical, in 
which it is required that the Bishops should sit in a semi- 
circle before the Archbishop, and behind them the 
priests ; but we have adapted ours to suit best the sanc- 
tuary of our churches. 

3. The Archbishop's usual chair should be likewise 
prepared and adorned as on great festivals, with stools 
on each side for two assistant deacons ; also a third one 
for the assistant priest. 

4. The seats for the deacon and sub-deacon are to be 
placed, as usual, at the Epistle side, where also the side- 
table should be placed. 

38' 



378 PROVINCIAL COUI^TCILS. 

5. On those days on which one of the Bishops sing:;3 
Hio;h Mass, a faldstool should be prepared on the Epistle 
side, on a small platform, wliere the olliciatino: Bishop 
will sit, with his face turned towards the people; on the 
same side, near the side-wall of the sanctuary, and in 
the same direction with it, a bench should be placed, 
w^liere the deacon and fiub-deacon with the asssistant 
priest sit. 

Article III. 

THE OPENING OF THE COUNCIL. 

Section I. — What is to he prepared for it. 

1. In one of the rooms of the Archbishop's house, the 
following vestments are to be prepared : 

For the Archbishop, sandals and stockings, amice, alb, 
cincture, with red stole and cope, crosier, and mitre. 

For the Archbishop's assistant priest, a red cope, which 
he puts over his surplice or on his rochet, if he is entitled 
to use it. 

For the Archbishop's assistant deacons, red vestments 
suitable to their order. 

For each of the Bishops, an amice, cope, and mitre; 
they put the amice over their rochet. 

For the officiating deacon and sub-deacon, the sacred 
vestments of their order. 

For priests, sacerdotal vestments. 

If other deacons and sub-deacons oe present, besides 
those who officiate, a sufficient number of sacred vest- 
ments suitable to their order. 

For the Archbishop on the altar, a chasuble, the dal- 
matic, and tunic and gloves, which he puts on imme- 
diately before he begins Mass, having taken off the cope ; 
also the pallium. 

If the Archbishop does not celebrate Mass, he remains 
in cope and assists at the Mass celebrated by the senior 
Bishop of the Province — who, in this case, puts on the 
pontifical dress in the Archbishop's house, and is attended 
by the deacon and sub-deacon, and an assistant priest. 



THF. PHOCESSION-— MASS. 379 



Section IL — The Procession. 

1. All the prelates and clergy being dressed, the pro* 
cession moves from the Archbishop's house in the follow- 
ing order: 

The censer-bearer and the second master of ceremonies. 

The cross-bearer, between the acolytes carrying their 
candlesticks. 

The inferior clergy in surplicos, two by two. 

Those in sacred orders in dahriatics, two by two. 

The priests in chasubles, two by two. 

The Bishops in mitre and cope, two by two, according 
to the time of consecration, those last consecrated going 
before. 

The senior Bishop — pontifically dressed to celebrate 
Mass, preceded by his assistant priest, and between the 
deacon and sub-deacon, in case the Archbishop does not 
sing it — sliould w^alk after the other bishops. 

The sub-deacon. 

The assistant priest at the right of the deacon. 

The Archbishop's cross. 

The Ar.^hbishop between the two assistant deacons, 
and followed by the crosier and mitre bearers. 

2. During the procession, the bells ring continually, 
and the clergy sing psalms. 

3. The organ is played as the procession enters the 
church. 

4. The clergy, as they arrive at the sanctuary, make a 
genuflection, bow to each other, and go to their places, 
where they remain standing. 

5. When the Archbishop has arrived at his seat, all the 
clergy sit down; and he takes otf his cope, and puts on 
the other vestments for Mass, if he celebrate. 

Section III. — Mass. 

1. The Mass is to be of the Holy Ghost, with Gloria 
and Credo, without any commemoration of the current 
Feast, or Sunday ; the last Gospel is that of St. John. 
The Archbishop wears the pallium 



380 PROVI^q-CTAL COUNCILS. 

2. The Mass is sung as nsnal. The Bishops and priests 
in sacred vestments do not kneel at the Confession ; they 
make it two by two ; the one that is at the rio^ht, begins, 
the other at the left answers, at the Confession, and at 
the Kyrie. Tiiey bow to one another before they beirin, 
and after they have finished, not oniy for the Confession 
and Kyrie^ but also lor the Gloria^ Credo^ Sa?ictus, and 
Agnus Dei, which they recite together. After the sub- 
deacon has kissed the celebrant's hand, the second assistant 
deacon removes the Archbishop's mitre, and the chanters 
begin the Ve7ii Sancte Spiritus, etc., during which all 
kneel. Then the celebrant rises, receives the mitre and 
reads the Epistle and the rest as in other i^Iasses. 

3. The deacon incenses the Bishops with three swings, 
and the priests in sacred vestments with two, in the order 
that will be pointed out for the Pax in the following 
number. 

4. The Pax is carried by the assistant priest, first to 
the senior Bishop, who sits first at the Gospel side, then 
to the second senior Bishop, who sits first at the Epistle 
side; afterwards to the priest who sits first at the Gospel 
side, then to the other, who sits in the first place at the 
Epistle side. 

5. The Archbishop does not give the blessing at the 
end of Mass, but, as it will be said below, at the end of 
the Session. 

Section IY. — The Ceremonies for the first Session, or 
the Ojpening of the Council. 

1. It is more convenient that the sermon, which is 
chiefly intended for the instruction of the people, should 
be preached after Mass; during this time the Arch- 
bishop takes ofi" the ciiasuble and tunic, and puts on the 
cope, either in the sacistry, or in the church at his seat. 

2. The faldstool is prepared below the lowest step of 
the altar, in the middle. The Archbishop, attended by 
the assistant priest and deacon, goes to the middle, salutes 
the Bishops on each side, and kneels before the faldstool ; 
having taken off his mitre, he intones the antiphon, 



CEREMONIES FOR THE FIRST SESSION". 381 

Exaudi nos^ Dominie^ which is continued and chanted 
by the choir; after the antiphon, the chanters intone the 
6Sth Psalm,* Salvum mefac^ Deus^ quoidam intraverunt 
aqucB usque ad a^iimam memn^ which is alternately sung 
by tlie clergy. After the first verse, all rise, the Arch- 
bishop sits on the faldstool, which is placed in the middle 
of the platform of the altar, having at his side the two 
assistant deacons and the assistant priest at the right of 
the first assistant deacon, the book-bearer and the candle- 
bearer holding respectively the book and the candle 
before him. The Bishops likewise, with their mitres, 
and the clergy with their caps on, sit during the Psalm, 

3. After the Psalm is ended, and the anthem Exaudi 
repeated, all rise, and the Archbishop and Bishops tako 
off their mitres. The Archbishop, turned towards the 
altar, sings the prayer, Adsumus, Domine Sancte Spir- 
iius, etc., at the end of which the clergy answer, A77ien. 
Tnen the Archbishop sings Oreinus^ and the prayer, 
Omnipotens^ sempiterne Deus ; after w^iich. the clergy 
answer, Amen. 

4. Then the Archbishop, with his mitre on, kneels 
before the faldstool; the Bishops likewise kneel with 
their mities on, and all the clergy kneel at their places. 
The two chanters, kneeling in the middle of the sanc- 
tuary, sing the Litany of the Saints, to which the 
clergy answer. 

5. When the chanters have sung the verse, Ut oin- 
nibus Jidelibiis defunctis^ etc., and the clergy answered, 
Te rogamus^ audi nos^ the Archbishop alone arises, takes 
the crosier in his left hand, and turned towards the 
clergy, sings, Tit hanc proesentem Synoduni visitare^ dls- 
ponere^ et henedicere dlgneris ; the clergy answ^er, Te 
rogamus^ audi nos. The chanters continue the Litany 
to the end, viz., as far as Kyrie eleison^ Christe eleison, 
and Ky 'ie eltisoii^ inclusively. 

6. The Litanies being ended, they all rise, the Arch- 
bishop and Bishops take oil' their mitres, the Archbishop, 
turned towards the altar, sings Or emus ; the first deacon, 

*lt is fofcmd at the beginning of Matins of the V. Feria. 



382 PROVINCIAL C0U2!?"CILS. 

Flectamus genua^ and the second, Levate. The Arch- 
bishop sings the prayer, Da^ qucBSumus ecclesicB tuoe^ etc. 

7. The prayer being ended the Archbishop goes up to 
the altar, sits on the chair or faldstool placed in the mid- 
dle, turning his back to the altar. The clergy sit in the 
meantime, and the Archbishop puts the incense into 
the censer and blesses it, as usual. The deacon carries 
the Missal, and lays it on the altar, kneels, says, Munda 
cor meum^ asks the Archbishop's blessing, and goes with 
the sub-deacon, master of ceremonies, censer-bearer, and 
acolytes, to the place where the Gospel is usually sung; 
having first made the genuflection to the altar, and 
bowled to the Archbishop, Bishops, and clergy, he sings 
in the usual manner the Gospel, which is taken from 
k^t Luke, c. 9, from v. 1 to 6. 

8. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon carries the Missal 
to the Archbishop, who kisses it; and the deacon 
incenses him, as usual. 

9. After the Archbishop has been incensed, he talces 
off his mitre, and kneels before his chair, or faldstool ; 
the Bishops likewise, having taken off their mitres, and 
all the clergy, kneel at their places. The Archbishop 
intones the hymn, Veni Creator Spiritus^ and the choir 
continues to sing it; after the first strophe, they all rise, 
and stand till the end of the whole hymn. 

10. After the hymn, all sit, and the Archbishop makes 
a Latin allocution to the Council, either as it is in the 
Koman Pontifical, or any other, as he pleases. Should 
he choose to have another discourse addressed to the 
Council by some one else, it may be made at this time. 

11. The A-'ch bishop addresses the Fathers of the 
Council to this efi'ect : Reverendissime Patres^ venerabiles 
fratres, placetne vohis ad Dei yloriam et honorem^ et ad 
Catholicoe Ecclesim arnplificaiionem Counciliuni proving 
dale .... legitime coiivocatmn, et hie congregatum 
hodierno die aperiri et inchoari. The Bisaops severally 
reply, Ploxet aperiatur. Then the Archbishop, in his 
own name and that of his colleagues, turning towards 
the people, says, Chrlste nomiiie invocatOy decej'nimus 



CEREMOXIES FOR THE FIRST SESSION". 883 

Sane tarn Synodicm jprovincialem .... esse apertam et 
ita judicamxis/^ 

12. The Arclibishop then orders his secretary to read 
the names ot those wlioin he proposes as officers of the 
Council; which being read, he says, Placetne vohis vene- 
rahiles fratres^ hosce in Concilii oifbciales elig^^ndos. 
The Bishops severally answer. Placet The Arch- 
bishop's secretary then reads the Decree in these words : 
Reverendissinius D, Archiepiscopus .... una cwm 
Episcojpis in hoc sacro Concilia Provinciali coiigregatis 
decernit hosce Reverendos viros in officiales hujus sancti 
Concilii eligendos esse, et legitime jam electos^ nemjje 
Promotorem .... Secretarios .... Magistros 
Coiremvniarum .... Cantor es. 

13. Tiie Promoter addresses the Archbishop : Illus- 
trissime ac Heverendissime Domine, peto ut legantur 
Sacro-sancti Concilii Tride^itini decreta de Professione 
fi'iei, et de residentia. The Archbishop, addressimj; the 
Bishops, says : Venerahiles fratres^ placetne vohis ut 
legantur decreta Concilii Tridentini de Professione 
fidei et de residentia? The Bishops severally reply, 
Placet legantur. Then the Archdeacon reads the decrees. 

14. Then, such of the Bishops as have not in a former 
Council made the profession of faith, approach to the front 
of the altar, take ofl' their mitres, make a genutlection 
on the lowest step, salute the Arclibishop, and kneeling 
on the step, simultaneously recite the Profession of Faitii, 
as in the Koman PontiH-jal. in saying tlie last words. 
Sic me Deus adjuvet, etc., each Bishop places his right 
hand on the Book of the Gospel. AtVer having made 
the usual genuliection and salutation, they retire to their 
places. 

15. The Archbishop then gives the solemn pontifical 
blessing, which the Bishops receive standing, with their 
heads uncovered, and profoundly inclined. After this, 
they all retire as nsual to the sacristy, where they disrobe. 

* Ex Coacil. Uheincusi, aa. 1583. 



384 PKOVIKCIAL COUNCILS, 

Article TV, 
Mode of Procedure of the Council. 

1. Eacli day, two meetings, called Congregations, are 
usually held ; the one private, consisting of the Bishops 
alone, with the secretaries of the Council, in the sacristy 
of the Metropolitan church, or in the Archbishop's 
house, in the morning, from about nine till twelve; the 
other public, in the atternoon, held in the Metropolitan 
church, from about four to six. To this latter are invited 
the Theologians of the Archbishop and Bishops, with the 
Superiors of the Religious Orders and Clerical bodies, and 
all the officers of the Council. The chief matters, which 
each prelate intends to submit to the consideration of 
the Council, are usually made known by hirn to the 
Archbishop, within a reasonable time before the holding 
of the Council, and by the Archbishop communicated to 
the Bishops generally. The Procnotor, after the open- 
ing of the Council, appoints select committees, called 
also Congregations, of the inferior clergy there assembled, 
to whom sucii matters as the Bishops deem proper are 
referred for examination. They assemble in the morri- 
i g at convenient places to investigate the matters sub- 
mitted to them respectively, and their written reports 
are read in the public Congregations; after the readiuijj 
of the reports, the Promoter suggests that any clergy- 
man who dissents therefrom, or who wishes to propose 
any amendment, or to make any observation, ma." freely, 
but respectfully, deliver his sentiments, if no one rises 
to speak, the Prom)ter proposes that the report be 
referred to the Bishops for private consideration. Should 
any one choose to speak, the reference is made after 
the sentiments have been delivered. In speaking, the 
clergy follow the order in which they are seated. No 
clergyman speaks a second time on the same subject, 
unless he obtains special leave. 

2. In the private Congregations of the Bishops, the 
matters to be submitted to the consideration of the clergy 
are designated ; the reports of the clergy are subsequently 



SECOND S0LE:\[N" SESSIOIT. 385 

read, and the matters finally decided. Each prelate, 
according to priority of consecration, is free to express 
his sentiments on the respective mattters treated ot* in 
the Council. After the matters have been canvassed, 
the question is put by the Archbishop, and the decision 
made by the majority of suffrages, which are given 
according to the order of consecration. 

3. It is usual in Councils, that all propositions be ex- 
pressed in the Latin language and given in writing, and 
that the decrees be in the first instance drawn up in that 
language. 

4. No special exercise of devotion is prescribed for the 
various Congregations. It is usual, however, to begin by 
the recital of the hymn, Veni Creator Spiritus. The 
evening Congregation is opened by the recital of the 
Veni, Sancte Spiritus, etc., and closed by reciting the 

Sub tuum prcEsidium. In this article we have stated 
the usages of the Baltimore Councils. 

Article Y. 
Second Solemn Session, 

1. On some day during the holding of the Council, a 
second solemn session is celebrated ; High Mass for the 
deceased Bishops and clergy is sung by one of the 
prelates, the other prelates assisting in their pontifical 
robes ; a discourse is usually pronounced after Mass, by 
a prelate or priest appointed for that purpose. 

2. A faldstool or chair for the celebrant is placed on a 
small platform in front of the altar, at the Epistle side, 
so that the celebrant when sitting has his face towards 
the people. A bench for the assistant priest, deacon, 
and sub-deacon, is placed near the faldstool, parallel to 
the side-wall of the sanctuary. The assistant priest 
takes his seat on it, nearest to the Bishop's left hand; 
next to him sits the deacon on the same bench; the sub- 
deacon sits at the side of the deacon. 

3. The prelates vest in the sacristy, and proceed 
thence to the church, in the same order as on the first 



386 PROYIKCIAL COUNCILS. 

day, except that the celebrant with his assistants follows 
the other prelates, and walks immediately before the 
Archbishop. 

4. The prelates go to their respective seats, and the 
colebrant with his assistants, liaving made a genuflection 
before the altar, salutes the Archbishop and the prelates, 
and then begins Mass as usual. 

5. The ceremonies of the Mass are the same as on 
other occasions, with the following exceptions : After 
the Confession the Bishop ascends to the altar and kisses 
it, and then, having received the mitre, makes a profound 
bow to the cross, and goes directly, j^^r hremorem, to the 
faldstool, where the sub-deacon, having taken off the 
mitre, the celebrant and assistants standing with their 
faces turned to the altar, the celebrant reads the Introit, 
and says the Kyrie ; he turns to the people to say, 
Dominus voUscum, and turns again to the altar to say 
the prayer. He sits whilst the sub-deacon sings the 
Epistle, which being terminated, he himself reads it 
with the Tract, Sequentia, Munda cor meum^ and the 
Gospel. The Offertory is read by him standing with his 
face towards the altar, which posture is observed when- 
ever he reads or sings anything standing. 

6. At the end of the Mass, the celebrant with his 
assistants retires to the sacristy, and the Archbishop 
from his chair performs the absolution of the dead as 
usual. 

T. After the absolution, the black ornaments are laid 
aside, and the prelates put on copes. The ceremonies of 
the session are performed as prescribed in the Roman 
Pontifical, — for the second day of the synod, beginning 
with the anthem, Propitius esto peccatis nostris^ Domine, 
nequando dioant gentes : uhi est Deus eorumf and the 
Psalm 78, Deus, venerunt gentes in h(£reditatem tuam, etc., 
which may be found in the Breviary, at Fer.Y. ad Matutin. 
The prelates and clergy kneel while the anthem and 
first verse of the Psalm are sung, and then the prelates 
resume their mitres, and sit until the end of the Psalm, 
as directed in the first session. The prayers are then 
sung by the Archbishop, after which he resumes his seat 



THIRD SOLEMN" SESSION". 387 

on tlie platform of the altar, and puts in and blesses the 
incense, and gives the blessing to the deacon; then all 
the prelates and clergy rise, and stand with tlieir heads 
uncovered, while the deacon sings the Gospel, Besignavit 
Dominiis, Luke x, from the 1st verse to the 9th inclu- 
sive, with the usual ceremonies. 

8. Afterwards, all kneel with their heads uncovered, 
whilst the first verse of the hymn, Veni^ Creator 
Spirit us, is sung, which being intoned by the Arch- 
bishop, is continued by the choir and clergy. After the 
first verse, all rise, and stand until the termination of the 
hymn. Then all resume their seats, and the Archbishop 
addresses them in the words of the Pontifical, or others, 
if he thinks proper. Such decrees, as have been already 
agreed on, may be then read, and the assent of the 
Fathers asked, after which the pontifical blessing is 
given, and all depart 

Article YI. 
Third Solemn Session. 

1. On the last day of the Council the third solemn 
session is held. The prelates wear copes and mitres as 
in the other sessions. Solemn Mass is celebrated by the 
Archbishop, or by one of the Bishops. 

2. When one of the Bishops celebrates, he proceeds 
before the Archbishop to the sanctuary, as before 
expressed, and observes the other peculiar ceremonies 
stated in the preceding article. On ascending to the 
altar, after the Confession, he makes the usuul incensing, 
and then, having received the mitre, he stands at the 
Epistle side of the altar, with his face turned towards 
the side-wall, and is incensed by the deacon. He then 
retires to his faldstool and reads the Introit. The 
censer-bearer, in the meantime, carries the censer to the 
assistant priest of the Archbishop, who incenses the 
Archbishop. After the Gospel, the celebrant is incensed 
by the deacon, and then the Archbishop by his assistant 
priest. After the Oifertory, the celebrant is incensed by 



388 PROVIITCIAL COUN-CILS. 

his deacon, the Archbishop by liis assistant priest, and 
the prelates by the deacon, with three swings, the clergy 
in sacred vestments, with two, and the inferior clergy 
with one. 

3. The Pax is given by the celebrant, first to the 
assistant priest of the Archbishop, who, advancing to the 
altar, kneels down as usual, whilst the previous prayer is 
recited. The deacon and sub-deacon then receive the 
Pax from the celebrant. In the meantime, the assistant 
priest of the Archbishop gives the Pax to the Arch- 
bishop, who immediately gives it to his assistant deacons. 
The assistant priest of the celebrant, after the deacon 
and sub-deacon have received the Pax^ goes to the 
assistant priest of the Archbishop, and from him receives 
the Pax^ which he subsequently gives to the first prelate 
on each side, and to the first among the clergymen. 
The Bishop, who- receives from him the Pax^ gives it to 
the next, and so on. 

4. The celebrant does not give any blessing at the end 
of Mass, but having secretly said the prayer, Placeat^ 
etc., recites the Gospel of St. John, and, with his attend- 
ants, retires to the sacristy. 

5. The Archbishop advances towards tlie altar and 
kneels by his faldstool below the lowest step. He begins 
the anthem, Exaudi nos^ DGinine^ quoniam henigna est 
misericordia tua^ est secundum QnuUitudinem miser a- 
tionem tuarum respice nos, Pomine ; which is chanted 
as the Psalm, Salvurn^ me fac^ Deus^ on the first day. 
Then three prayers are sung by the Archbishop, and the 
Gospel is sung, taken from the xviii cliap. of St. 
Matthew, from the loth to the 22d v. The hymn, Yeni^ 
Creator^ is sung as in the preceding sessions. The Arch- 
bishop, seated on his faldstool on the platform of the 
altar, addresses his brethren in the words of the Pon- 
tifical, or in such other terms as he deems expedient. A 
sermon is delivered by a prelate, or priest, appointed 
by the Council, unless it has been already delivered 
during Mass, or subsequently. The secretary of the 
Council, by order of the Archbishop, reads the decrees 
which have been prepared in the private Congregations 



THIRD SOLEMiq" SESSIOK. 389 

of the prelates, and the Promoter solicits that thej be 
publicly approved ot* and confirmed by the Council, in 
these words: Eeverendlssime Pater^ ego N. hujus 
Sancti Concilii jproraotor^ peto ut decreta hoBo quce lecta 
sunt^ a patribus hujus Concilii approbentur et con- 
firmentitr^ ad ecclesice Caiholicm atcgmentum. Then the 
Archbishop proposes theui to the judgment of the 
prelates, in these words : Placettie vohis^ Venerahiles 
Fratres^ hceo qf.ce lecta suM decreta approhare et con- 
jirmare. The Bishops severally reply, Placet^ appro- 
harnus^ confirmavius. Then the secretary reads the decree 
in these words : Nos. iV. N. Archlepiscopus aliique epis- 
copi in hoc Sacro G^ncilio adunati, decreta hoec^ quce 
mox lecta sunt^ approhamus^ et confirmamus. Tiien the 
prelates sign tlie decrees, which are placed by the secre- 
tary on tlie altar; the Archbishop tirst suscbribes, in 
these words, Ego N. Archlepiscopus .... dejiiiiens 
suhscripsi. The Arclibishop, liaving retired from the 
altar to his seat, the other Bishops, according to priority 
of consecration, successively advance towards tlie high 
altar, and, having made a genutiection and saluted the 
Archbishop, severally su))scribe the decrees in these words, 
£go J^. epis. N. definiens suhscripsi. 

6. The Archb shop having returned to the faldst >ol, 
on the platform of the altar, the Promoter solicits that 
the Council be terminated, in words of this import; 
Reverendissime Pater^ Ego N. hujus S. Concilii Pro- 
motor .^ peto ut huic Concilio Provlnciali finis jam 
fioA. The Archbisliop inquires into the wishes of the 
Fathers in words to this effect: Yenerabiles Eratres, 
placetne vohis ad Dei rnnipotentis laudem hujus 
Concilii Provincialis finem jam fieri. The Fathers sever- 
ally answer. Placet. The secretary then reads the 
decree in these terms : Nos. N. Archie yiscopus 

aliique Patres, qui huic Concilio Pro- 

vinciali intersuwMS, cunt absuLuta shit, quoi pro tem- 
poris ratione agi gerique posse videbantur^ cumque pas- 
toralis cur a ad ecctesiarum nostrarum status et pastorales 
vigilias revocet, propter ea huic Bancto Concilio finem. 
irnponi censuimus. 



390 PONTIFICAL CEREMOIS"TES. 

7. The prayer, Nulla est, Domine, as in the Roman 
Pontifical, is then sung by the Archbishop. 

8. Afterwards the Acclamations are sung by the arch- 
deacon, the prelates and clergy singing the responses. 

9. After the Acclamations the Te Deum is sung, and 
after it the prayer, Fro gratiaruin actione ; Deus cujus 
misericordim non est numerus, etc. The Archbishop 
then having returned to his seat, gives the Pax to each 
of the Bishops ; each of them, as he advances to receive 
it, retaining his mitre, salutes the Archbishop. Each 
Bishop subsequently gives the Pax to all of his brethren 
in their respective places. 

The Session closes with the solemn blessing of the 
Archbishop. The deacon sings, Recedamus in pace^ and 
the clergy respond. In nomine Christi. Amen, They 
then return to the sacristy, and disrobe as usual. 



CHAPTER XIY. 

CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN DIOCESAN SYNODS. 

1. The priests and clergymen of every grade, w4io by 
right or custom are bound to come to the Synod, assem- 
ble in the city, or such other place as the Bishop may 
prescribe. 

2. On the first day of the Synod, at a very early hour 
in the morning, the Bishop in his ordinary episcopal 
dress (cappam indutus), accompanied by all the clergy in 
surplice, goes to the church, puts on the pontifical vest- 
•ments at his seat, celebrates the Mass of the Holy Gh(/ot, 
and gives communion to the clergy. At the end of Mass 
the faldstool or seat is placed on the floor of the 
sanctuary, near the lowest step, about the middle of the 
altar; and another seat on the platform of the altar; 
(the faldstool, however, may suffice, and be placed on 
the platform at the proper time). 



DIOCESAN" SYKOI.S. 391 

3. The Bishop, over his rochet, or over his surplice, if 
he hd a regular, puts on the amice, stole, red cope, and 
precious mitre, and bearing his pastoral staff, ^oes before 
the altai ; the deacon and sub-deacon, in red ornaments, 
such as they use at Mass, accompanying him, one on 
each side. Kneeling there before the faldstool, and 
having laid aside the mitre, he begins the antiphon, 
Exavdi nos, Domine^ etc., which the choir continues. 
The Psalm 6S, Salvuin me fao Deiis, is then sung. 
After the first verse, the Bishop sits with the mitre, and 
so remains until the antiphon is repeated, after the 
conclusion of the Psalm. 

4. Tlie Bishop rise-, and turning towards the altar, 
after the mitre has been taken off, says the prayer, 
Adeumus Domine, etc., to which all reply. Amen. He 
then says, Oremus^ Omnijpotens sempiterne Deus^ etc., as 
in the Pontifical. 

5. At the end of this latter prayer, the Bishop, having 
put on the mitre, kneels, leaning on the faldstool, and 
all the clergy kneel, whilst the chanters sing the Litany. 
After the verse, Ut omnibus fidelibus defunctis^ etc., 
the Bishop rises, and holding his crosier in his left hand, 
standing with his face towards the Synod, says, Ut Jiano 
'frcBsentem Synodum, visitarc, disponere^ et henedicere 
digneris^ R. Te rogam^us^ audi nos. In saying this, he 
makes the sign of the cross over all ; and then he again 
kneels as before until the end of the" Litany. 

6. The Litany being sung, all rise, and the Bishop, 
laying aside his mitre, says, with his face turned towards 
the altar, Oremus. Tiie deacon says, Flectamus genua ; 
the sub-deacon, Levate. Then the Bishop recites the 
j.rayer, Da^ qucesumics^ etc. This being finished, he 
losumes the mitre, ascends to the seat prepared for him 
ca the platform of the altar, and sits with his back 
t wards the altar. He puts incense into the censer, 
a id blesses it, as usual. The deacon, in red dalmatic, 
] receded by the censer-bearer and acolytes, and by the 
fub-deacon in tun.c, after the pontifical blessing, sings 
the Gospel, Luke ix, 1, 6. The sub-deacon then presen s 
the book of the Gospels to the Bishop to kiss, and th-e 



392 PONTIFICAL CER:i:MOXIES. 

deacon subsequently incenses liim. The Bishop then 
putting off his mitre, kneels before the seat, with his face 
towards the altar, and all the others kneel at the same 
time, in their respective places. The hjmn, Veni^ 
Creator Sphitus, is begnn by the Bishop, and continued 
by the choir. After the Urst verse, the Bishop rises, and 
stands without his mitre, and with his face towards the 
altar, imtil the end of the hymn ; and in like manner all 
the others rise with the Bishop. Then ail sit, and the 
Bishop having resumed the mitre, and seated himself on 
the platform of the altar, addresses them in the words of 
the Pontifical, or others, at discretioi:. 

T. After the address, or before, as tlie Bishop may 
think proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned 
priest, who in it treats of ecclesiastical discipline, of the 
divine mysteries, and of the correction of abuses, accord- 
ing as the Bishop may think fit. After the discourse, 
any complaints that the clergy may think fit to put 
forward may be made, 

8. Then the Archdeacon reads aloud from the pulpit 
the Decrees of the Council of Trent, regarding residen e 
and the profession of the faith, which all who are bound 
to it make in the hands of the Bishop, according to the 
form prescribed in the Pontifical. 

Finally, all are charitably admonished to conduct 
themselves with edification in all respects during the 
Synod. The Bishop, after the admonition, gives the 
solemn blessing. 

9. On the second day of the Synod, the clergy assem- 
ble again in the church, and Mass being ended, the 
Bishop, dressed as on the first day, proceeds to the foot 
of the altar, accompanied by the deacon and sub-deacon, 
who likewise are dressed as on the preceding day; then 
kneeling before the faldstool, and having laid aside his 
mitre, he begins the antiphon, Prop'Uiics esto^ which is 
continued by the choir. The LXXVIII Psalm, Deus, 
veneriint gentes^ is then sung. After the first verse the 
Bishop sits down, resumes his mitre, and remains se ited, 
until the antiphon is repeated at the end of the P>alin. 

10. The antiphon having been repeatedj the Bishop 



DIOCESAK SYNODS. 393 

lays aside the mitre, rises, and turning towards the 
altar, says the prayer, No^trorurn t'lbl^ etc., and the other 
prayers marked in the PontificaL 

11. Then the Bishop ascends to tlie seat prepared for 
liim on the pUitform o<"* the altar. After this, the deacon 
prei^ents the censer. Tiie Bishop puts incense into the 
censer, then gives his blessing to the deacon, who after- 
wards proceeds to sing the Gospel, with the accustomed 
ceremonies; the Bishop having taken off his mitre, 
stands at his seat turned towards the deacon. 

12. When the Gospel has been sung, the Bishop kisses 
the book, and is incensed. Then the Bi-hop kneels 
before his seat, and the clergy kneeling also at their 
phices, he intones the hymn, Fev^', Creator^ which is 
continued by the choir till the end, as on the first day. 
After the first verse the Bishop rises, and stands with the 
mitre on, his face being towards the altar; the clergy 
likewise stand until the end of the hymn. The hynm 
being sung, they sit in silence. Then the Bishop beiui: 
seated, and having received the mitre, ad iresses the 
clergy in the words of the Pontifical; or others, at his 
discretion. 

13. After the address, or before it, if the Bishop thinks 
proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned priest, 
who treats of ecclesiastical discipline, or of other subjects 
at the pleasure of the Bishop. After this the Arch- 
deacon reads the decrees of the Holy See, or of Pro- 
vincial Councils, which have not yet been promulgated, 
or any others the Bishop may direct. Afterwards tiie 
Diocesan Constitutions are read, which are to be 
approved of by the Synod. Then tlie suffrages are taken, 
and those which are approved of are confirmed. This 
being done, the Bishop rises, and gives his solemn bless- 
ing, as on the preceding day. Then all retire. 

14. On the third day, the clergy being assembled in 
the church, at the end of Mass, the Bishop dressed as on 
the preceding days, accompanied by the deacon and sub- 
deacon, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, in the 
middle of the altar, and laying aside his mitre, com- 
mences the antiphon, Exaudi nos, Deus, which is con- 



394 PON"TIFrCAL CEREM0N"TF<5. 

tinned by the choir. Then is intoned the LXVIII 
Psalm, Salvicm me fac^ Deus^ as on the first day, and tlie 
antiphon is repeated at the end of it. After the first 
verse the Bishop taices his seat in the middle of the 
altar, resumes his mitre, and remains sitting until 
the antiphon is repeated. When this is sung, he puts 
aside his mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, says, 
Or emus. Ad ^^, Domiiie^ and the other prayers men- 
tioned in the Pontifical. When these are said, he 
resumes his mitre, and sits on the faldstool prepared for 
him. Then the deacon, with the censer bearer, comes to 
him, and the Bishop put^ incense into the censer. Then 
he gives his blessing to the deacon, who proceeds to sing 
the Gospel at the accustomed phice, witli the usual cere- 
monies; the Bishop standing before his seat, without his 
mitre, and turned towards the deacon. 

15. After the 'Gospel, the bo^jk is broug'it to the 
Bishop t') be kissed, and the deacon incenses him. The 
Bishop, having taken off his mitre, kneels before his 
seat, turned towards the altar, and alt the others like- 
wise knee ing, he intones the hymn, Veni,, Creator 
Spiritus, which is continued by the choir to the end. 
The first verse havi ig been sung, the Bishop rises, 
turned towards the altar, without his mitre, and remams 
standing till the end. The hymn being ended, all sit in 
silence. Then the Bishop, being seated with his mitre, 
addresses the Synod, if he pleases, in the words which 
folLjw — Yenerabiles^ et dll6Giit<simi fr aires ^ etc \ or he 
may direct that some learned priest sliould deliver a dis- 
course on the topics herein mentioned. 

16. Then the constitutions are read which are to be 
approved by the clergy ; which boiiig approved, if it 
seems good to them, and all things being concluded, the 
Bishop being seated, and having his mitre on, recommends 
himself to tiie prayers of all. When the names of thosj 
who ought to be present are read out, each one rises and 
answers Adsum. A suitable penalty is inflicted on the 
absent. Then the Bishop, being still seated with his 
mitre on, admonishes those wiio are present, in the 
words of the i*ontihi.'al, Fratres dilectissiini^ etc., or in 
other words at discretion. 



COXFIRMATION". 395 

17. Then tlie Bishop L^ys aside his mitre, and, risino^, 
turned towards the altar, says the prayer. Nulla est^ etc. ; 
afterwards, he gives his soleiiin hlessing. After this, the 
Archdeacon, standing by his side, says, R-cedamus in 
pace^ to which all answer, In nomine Christe. Amen. 
Then all rise, and accompany the Bishop to his house. 

18. If either on the first or second day all the business 
of the Synod be terminated, the Synod may be concluded 
in the manner here prescribed for the third day. 



CHAPTER XY. 

SOLEMN ADMINISTRATION OF THE SACRAMENT OF CON- 
FIRMATION. 

Article I. 
Things to he Prepared, 

1. On the Gospel side of the sanctuary, the Bishop's 
chair raised on a platform by two or three steps, with a 
canopy over it and hanginirs behind it. 

2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., the 
amice, stole, cope, mitre and crosier. 

3. On the side table, the Pontifical book, the candle- 
stick with a candle, the vessel containing the holy 
chrism, on a small plate, a siifiicient quantity of cotton 
to wipe the forehead (this cotton should be divided in 
small balls for greater convenience), a ewer and basin, to 
wash the Bishop's hands, clean towels on a plate, some 
slices of bread, neatly cut and arranged on another small 
plate, for the same purpose. 

4. Outside of the sanctuary, but near the rails, some 
benches for those who are to be confirmed ; all the men 
at the Epistle side, and the women at the Gospel side. 

5. Those, who are to be confirmed, should have been 



396 po]^t:fical ceremonies. 

previously instrncted and prepared by the Sacrament of 
Penance; and it is advisable that they receive on the 
same day the Holy Communion, which may be done 
either at the Bishop's Mass, or at the High Mass, as may 
be deemed most convenient. Each ought to have a 
ticket, on which should be written the Christian and 
family name, which each should hold in the hand, when 
lie kneels to receive Confirmation, and give to the cler- 
gyman who attends the Bishop. This will answer the 
double purpose of surgesting the Christian name to the 
Bishop, and of recording it, together with the family 
name, in the Register. 

6. Where it is customary to have sponsors, these 
should be placed behind the persons to be confirmed, 
and should be no more than one for each, and of the 
same sex as the person to be confirmed. 

7. It is customary in some places to add another name 
on this occasion, especially if that which they have be 
not of some saint. The adopted nanie ought to be 
written after the name received at baptism, and called 
with it by the Bishop. 

8. It is proper that the solemn administration of Con- 
firmation siiould be made at High Mass, either before it 
commences, or, as it seems more convenient, especially if 
the persons to be confirmed receive Communion at it, 
after Mass. 

9. There should be four boys dressed as those who 
usually attend at High Mass, one to hold the mitre, 
another the crosier, another the book, and another the 
candlestick. 

Article II. 

The Administration of the Sacrament of Confirmation, 

1. At the stated hour, the Bishop, attended by the 
clergy and preceded by the acolytes, goes to the church ; 
on arriving before the altar, he makes a genuflection, 
kneels on '.he lowest step, and prays for awhile wuh the 
clergy; then he goes to his scat; there he takes ofi' his 
cape, washes his hands, puts on the above-mentioned 



C0N"FiR:NrATi0iq". 397 

vestments, whicli are carried before him by the acolytes 
puts on the mitre, and having taken the crosier in his left 
liand, goes to the altar. 

If Confirmation be given after High Mass, the Bishop 
miglit assist at it in mitre and cope; in this case, after 
lie has been vested, he goes to the altar to begin Mass; 
the priest wlio celebrates Mass ought to come to the 
sanctuary in his vestments, walking immediately before 
the Bishop; having made a genuflection, when the 
Bishop goes to his chair, the celebrant should ^*j to his 
seat, and remain there sitting, until the Bishop is vested, 
then he goes to the altar, places himself at the left of the 
Bishop, and does everyth.ing as directed for High Mass 
celebrated in presence of the Bishop. 

2. On arriving at the altar, the Bishop kneels, and 
although it is not prescribed by the Pontifical, the hymn, 
Veni, Creator Spiritus^ and the prayer, Ueus qui corda 

fidelium^ may be sung. Then, either tlie Bishop, or 
some other clergyman, if the Bishop chooses, gives an 
instruction on tlie holy sacrament of Confirmation. 

3. After the instruction, the persons to be confirmed 
are directed to kneel at tlio rails, holding the tickets in 
their hands; then the Bishop, turned towards them, 
takes off" his mitre, and says, or sings, Spirltus Sanctum, 
etc., and all the rest as in the Roman Pontifical, with 
the prayer, OriinijpotenR^ sempiterne, Deus, extending his 
hand towards tho^e who are to be confirmed. 

4. The prayer bei:ag ended, the Bishop puts on the 
mitre, takes the crosier in his left hand, and goes to the 
rails,^ where he anoints the foreheads of the persons 
whom he confirms, and having said. In nomine Patris^ 
etc., and touched the cheek, says, Pax tecum. Et cum 
spiritu tuo is not said. One of the assistants, at his 
right, holds the vessel with the chrism, the other, at his 
left, wipes the foreheads of those who have been con- 
firmed, with the cotton, whicli an acolyte holds on a 

*If there are only a few to be confirmed, or if it be more conve- 
nient, the persons to be confirmed may kneel before the Bishop silting 
on the laldstool. 



398 PONTIFICAL CEREMOITIES. 

plate near him ; and either he or another clergyman takes 
the tickets from the hands of the persons to be confirmed, 
and suggests their Christian name to the Bishop. While 
each person is being coniirined, the sponsor places his 
right hand on the right shoulder of the reci,jiL'nt. Tiie 
rubric prescribes: Adulti poiiant pedein suum super 
pedem dexUrum jpatrini sui ; but this is difficult, if not 
mipossible, to observe. 

5. When the Bishop has confirmed the men at the 
Epistle side, and as he continues to confirm the women 
at the Gospel side, if there be more than one row of 
them, the men already confirmed are directed to retire, 
walking one after the other, behind the last row, and 
those of the second row take the place of the first at the 
rails, those next to them advancing: forwa-d; the same 
is done when the women at the Gospel side are con- 
firmed ; and so on successively. 

6. The Bishop having confirmed all those \vho were to 
be confirmed, goes to his seat; the acolytes carry to 
him the ewer with the basin, the towel and the plate 
with slices of bread; he washes his hands, and in the 
meanwhile the choir sings, Confirina^ hoc Jjeus, etc., or 
if there be no choir, the Bishop's attendants read it ; then 
he returns to the abar, and turned towards it, sings, or 
says, the verses, Ostende, etc., the prayer, Deus qui apos- 
tolis, etc.; afterwards, he turns towards the confirmed, 
blesses them, as in the Pontifical, gives them the admoni- 
tions suggested by the Roman Pontifical, and tells them 
to say once, / believe in God, Our Father^ and Hall 
Mary, which he may recite with them. 

T. The Bishop returns to his seat, takes off the sacred 
vestments, puts on the capo, and accompanied by the 
clergy, after a short prayer before the altar, retires. 



VISITATION OF PARISHES. 399 

CHAPTER XYL 

episcopal visitation of parishes.* 

Article 1. 

The BishojPs Reception^ when he msits the Parishes of 
his Diocese. 

1. As it would be inconvenient in this country to 
make the solemn procession as directed in the Roman 
Pontifical, the essential part of the ceremony mi<>;ht be 
performed when the Bishop goes to the church to admin- 
ister Confirmation, or the first time the faithful meet in 
it after his arrival in the parish. 

2. He proceeds, accompanied by the clergy, from the 
priest's house, if near the church, oi* from the sacristy to 
the church. On entering it, the clergy or the choir sing 
the response, Ecce Sacerdos magnus, qui in diehus suis 
2)lacuit Deo^ etc., in the ofiice, Confessoris Fontificis ; 
and the priest ofi*ers to the Bishop the sprinkle with holy 
water; the Bishop having received it, first applies it to 
his own forehead, and then sprinkles the others; ther\ 
the priest presents to him the boat, and the Bishop puts 
incense into the censer, and the priest incenses hi n. 
Afterwards, they all go before the high altar, tiiere the 
Bishop kneels before the faldstool, or the praying-desk, 
placed below the steps, in the middle; the clergy like- 
wise kneel, and pray for a short time. In the meantime, 
the priest standing w4th his head uncovered, at the 
corner of the altar, on the Epistle side, sings what 
follows : 

V. Protector noster, aspice, Deus. 
R. Et respice in faciem Christi tui. 
Y. Salvum fac servum tuum. 
E,. Deus mens, sperantem in te. 

*Ex. Pont. Rom., Pait. 3. 



400 POJJ'TIFTCAL CERE^rONTES. 

Y. Mitte ei, Doinine, anxilium de Sancto, 

K. Et de Sion tuere eum. 

V. Nihil proficiat inimicus in eo. 

R. Et filius iniquitatis nori apponat nocere ei. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

K. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

Y. Dominus vobisciim. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Or EMUS : 

Dens, humilium visitator, qui eos paterna dilectione 
consolaris, prfetende societati nostrr^ gratiam tuam ; ut 
per eos, in qui bus habitas, tuum in nobis sentiamus ad- 
ventum. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 

3. After the prayer, the Bishop gives the solemn bless- 
ing to the people, saying as usual, Sit noraen Domini 
henedictum^ etc., and the Indulgences are published.* 

4. He then addresses the people, or, if he chooses, after 
the Gospel at High Mass. 

5. High Mass is then celebrated as usual, with the 
ceremonies to be performed when the Bishop is present. 

6. After Mass, the Bishop puts on the amice, alb, 
cincture, and the black stole and cope, with the plain 
mitre, and standing near the altar, turned towards the 
people, intones the anthem. Si iniquitates^ and says 
alternately with the clergy, the Psalm, De profundls^ 
etc., and after it, Beqviem^ etc., repeats the anthem, Si 
iniquitates ohservaveris^ Domine^ Doinine, quis susti- 
nehitf Then having taken off the mitre, he says: 

Kyrie eleison. 

Christe eleison. 

Kyi'ie eleison. 

Pater noster, etc., which is continued secretly, ani 
during which he sprinkles and incenses thrice beloro 
himself. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

*The PDnlifioal does not prescribe that the antiphou or prayer of 
the patron saint should be said. 



YISITATIOK OF rARISHES. 4.01 

Tl. Sed libera nos a inalo. 

V. In memoria a^terna erunt justi. 

R. Ab auditione mala rion timebunt. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

K. Erne, Doinine, anirnas eorum. 

Y. Requiem ceternam dona eis, Domine. 

K. Et lux perpetna luceat eis. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

Y. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Okemus. 

Deus qui inter Apostolicos Sacerdotes famiilos tuos 
pontiticali fecisti di^nitate vigere; prtesta qufesumus, ut 
eorum quoque perpetuo ag^re2:entur contiortio. Per 
Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 

7. The prayer beinoj ended, if the grave-jard be adja- 
cent to the church, the Bishop, preceded by the cross, 
the acolytes with the candlesticks, and two others wdth 
the censer, and the holy- water vase and sprinkle, and all 
the clergy, two by two, go in procession to the grave- 
yard ; but if it be not convei.ient to t!ie church, they go 
to the middle of the church, where a cenotaph, w^ith at 
least four candles, is placed, and the Bishop makes the 
absoLition of the dead. The choir and clergy, while 
going, sing. Qui Lazarurti resuscitasli a monurriento 
foetidum^ Tu eis^ Domine^ dona requii^m ei locum indul- 
gentice. V. Qaiventurus es jadioare vivos et mortuos, 
et soeculicm per igncm^ Tu eis etc. Tlien the anthem 
ISi iniquitates is mtoned, the Psalm De Profundis is 
sung, and the anthem repeated. 

8. On arriving at the gvave-yard, or at the cenotaph, 
the response Libera me Domine is sung, and repeated as 
usual; the Bishop puts incense into the censer; after the 
Kyrie elelson has been sang tlirice, the Bishop sings 
l*ater noster, which is continued secretly, sprinkles and 
incenses as usual, and says : 

Et ne nos indiicas in tentationem. 



402 POITTIFICAL CEREM0KIE8. 

R. Sed libera nos a malo. 

Y. In memoria seterna erunt justi. 

R. Ab auditioiie mala non timebunt. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

\\. Erne, Domine, aniraas eonim. 

Y. E,' qniem intern am dona eis, Domine. 

H, Et lux perpetua luceat eis. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

Y. Dominus vobisciim. 

E. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Ok EMUS. 

Dous qui inter Apostolicos Sacerdotes famulos tuos 
Sacerdotaii fecisti dignitate vigere, pra3sta qu^sumus ut 
eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. 

Deus venire largitor, et humanfe salutis aniator, qua3su- 
mus clementiam tuam, ut nostne congregation is fratres, 
propinquo3,et benefactores, qui ex hoc saeculo transierunt, 
Beata Maria semper Yirgine intercedente, cum omnibus 
Sanctis tuis, ad perpetuse beatitudinis consortium per- 
venire, concedas. 

Deus, cujus miseratione animse fidelium, requiescunt, 
famulis et famulabus tuis omnibus, hie et ubique in 
Christo quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccacurum, 
ut, a cunctis reatibus absoluti, tecum sine fine hetentur. 
Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 
Y. Requiem teternam dona eis, Domine. 
R. Eo jux perpetua Juceat eis. 

Then two singers sing jRequiesGa7it i?i pace. R. A7ne7i. 

The Bisliop, raising ids Jiand, makes the sign of the 

cross on the grave-yard, or on the cenotapli, puts on his 

mitre, and returns to tiie sanctuary, saying alternately 

with the clergy the Psalm Miserere. 

9. On arriving before the altar, the Bishop takes off 
the mitre, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and 
standing before it in the middle, turned towards the 
altar, says ; 



VISIT ATIOiq^ OF PARISHES. 



40b 



Kyrie eleison. 

Christe eleison. 

Kyrie eleison. 

Pater noster, etc. 

Et ne nos induca^ in intentionem. 

H. Sed libera nos a malo. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

E.. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

E. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

V. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Or EMUS. 

Absolve, quaesumus, Domine, animas famulorum, famii- 
larumque tuarum ab omni vinculo delictorum, utin resur- 
rectionis gloria inter sanctos et electos tuos resuscitati 
respirent. Per Christtim Dominum nostrum. K. Amen. 

10. This beinoj ended, the Bishop takes off his black 
cope and stole, and puts on a white cope and stole, and 
begins the visitation by the tabernacle, wliere the Blessed 
Sacrament is kept ; then proceeds to the baptismal font, 
to the place where the sacred oils are kept, also to that 
where the relics are kept; visits and inspects the altars, 
chapels, sacristy, the sacred vestments, tne confessionals, 
and everything relating to the divine worship; also the 
parish registers, the grave-yard, etc. 



THE THINGS SUBJECT TO THE EPISCOPAL VISITATION ARE THE 
FULLOVVIiNO: 



Tabernacle. 
Veil, and how many. 
Interior lining. 
Corporal spread out. 
'.iborium: bowl silver, 

'^\\l wiibin. 
/cssel for purifjing the 

nu^ers. 



Font. 

Cover. 

Kails. 



Of the Holy Eucharist. 

Veil of ciborium. 
Particles. 
Fragments. 
Renewed, how often. 
Key. 

Lamp, always burning. 
Umbrcllino for proces- 
sions. 

Of the Baptistery. 

Water. 
Drain. 
Shell. 



Pr > cess ion «1 canopy. 
Pyx, for the sick. 
Burse, etc., for Commu- 
nion of the sick. 
MoLftrauce. 

Throne, for benediction. 
Portable Jauterns. 
Uumeral-veil. 



Holy oils. 

Salt. 

Cloths. 



404 



POi^TIFICAL CEREMONIES. 



Anibrv on the Gospel side 

of Sacctuary. 
Inscription (exterior and 

interior.) 



In a public position. 
Pierced grating. 



Arabry. 
Lining. 
Reliquaries. 



High Altar, 
isteps up to it. 
Steps upon it. 
Stone Altar. 
CoDsecration. 
Wax-clolh. 
Altar-cloths. 
Their blessing. 
Crucifix. 



Choir. 

Large Crucifix, in a promi- 
nent place. 

Bishop's throne, steps, 
and canopy. 

Nave and aisles. 

Walls. 

Images of saints. 

Pulpit. 

Windows. 

Vaults. 

Seats. 

Division of sexes. 

Roof. 

Pavement. 

Ambry. 



Ambiies. 
Lavatory. 

Towels. 

Kueeling-desk. 

Prayers before and after 

Mass. 
Prayers for vesting. 
Altar-clo hs. 
Fingei-cloihs 
Conunuuiou-cloths 
Aliar-breads, where made 
Cotias. 

Missal- markers. 
Bier. 
Pall. 

Book-stands. 
Books. 

Supplement to Missal. 
Ordo celebrandi. 
Kiius eervandus. 
Missals, biuding. 



Of the Holy Oils. 

Vessel for holy oils. 
Cutmn wet with oi', dry 

cotton above. 
Purple burse, or cover. 

Of the Confesaionals. 

Thick veil. 
Pictures. 

Of the Holy Belica. 

Names. 

Approbation. 

Exposition. 

Of the Altars. 

Candlesticks. 

Statues. 
Pictures. 
Aliat-cards. 
Covering. 

Cloths lor changing. 
Antependiums, and how 
many. 

Of the Chvrch itself. 

AJras-chests. 

Holy-water sioups. 

L»oors. 

Chnrrhvard. 

Cr():?s therein. 

Trees. 

Bell-tower. 

H.l s. 

1 heir blessing. 

Ladckrs, ropes. 

Kouf. 

Spire. 

v\ eathercock. 

Pave men t. 

Dour. 

Key. 

Of the Sacristy. 

Chalices. 

Patens. 

Puriticators. 

Corporals and Palls. 

^eils. 

Burses. 

Amices. 

Albs 

Girdles. 

Stolen, man'plesand cha*- 
ul>ies. of live c ilors, lor 
feast-days, for leiias. 

Dalmatics. 

Tuiiics. 

Coj)es of different colors. 

Hum ral veils. 

Allar-cushious and book- 
siands. 

Devout images. 

Cruets. 



Tlow brought from the 

cathedral. 
Renewal, 
Buruing the old. 



Doors with bolt. 
Purple stole. 



Key. 

Proper Offices. 

Festivals. 



Cnnopy. 

Predella. 

Credence. 

Piscina. 

Screen, or rails. 

Bell. 

Endowment. 

Obligations. 



Use of bells. 

subterranean chapels. 

Patron. 

improper epilaphs. 

Biir>ii g-place lor the 

cie'gy 
And for children. 
J ilnlar:* of church. 
Dedication. 
IJoth lestivals. 
Utiice, how lu-Id. 
Other festivals. 
Indulgences. 

orty hours Prayer. 
Benediction, bow often. 
Lights, how many. 



Lavabo-dishes. 

Hells. 

Thurible and boat. 

F'rocessional C'oss, 

Jioly-water vessel and 

aspersory. 
Pax. 
Banners. 
Flower-vases. 
Triangular candlestick. 
Paschal candlestick. 
Door. 
Key. 
^afe. 

Pavement. 
Windows. 
Wall. 
Roof. 

rahleof obligations 
Inventory ot the aforesaid 



VISITATION OF PARISHES 



405 



INDEX 0B6ERVAND0KUM IN VISITATIONE rKRSONARTJJI. 



Name, 

Surname. 

Country. 

W'tifTi appointed. 

I'rnl'essiou of faith. 

Income. 

Obliiiations eatisfied. 

Divine office. 

Faculties. 

Pari^ti books and papers. 

Kesidence. 

^]a^^s, how often, 

ISermons. 

Publication of feasts, fasts, 

pastorals. 
Catechism. 
Vespers. 
Processions. 



Proper feasts. 

Customs. 

Monthly conferences. 

Servers' at Mass. 

lilessinjr of ashes, candles, 
palms. 

Holy Week. 

blessing houses. 

Holy teepiilchre. 

Blessing font and Paschal 
candle. 

Pious uictnres. 

i he loug litanies. 

Cer monies in High and 
Low Mass 

The administration of the 
Sacraments. 

Baptism, how long de- 
layed. 



Given in private houses. 

Godfathers and godmoth- 
ers. 

Confessions, where, at 
what time. 

Instructions for first com- 
munion. 

ijick persons, and how 
often. 

Vi:^iting sick, commenda- 
tion. 

Murriages, how. where. 

Other functions. 

Lent sei raous. 

funerals. 

Moral and dogmatic the- 
ology. 

Books, what studied. 



11. He gives Confirmation at the time lie deems most 
convenient, as directed in the foregoing chapter. 

12. When the Bishop has completed the visitation, he 
goes in his usual dress to the church, and standing before 
the altar, at the Epistle side, he says the Psalras Depro- 
fimdiSj liequiem ceternam, the anthem, Si iniquitates, 
Fater noster. 

Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. 

E.. Sed libera nos a malo. 

Y. A porta inferi. 

R. Erne, Domine, animas eorum. 

Y. Requiescant in pace. 

R. Amen. 

Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. 

R. Et clamor mens ad te veniat. 

Y. Dominus vobiscum. 

R. Et cum spiritu tuo. 

Okemus : 



Deus cujus miseratione animse Fidelium requiescunt, 
famu'is et famulabus tuis omnibus hie et ubique in 
Christo quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccatoiaim, 
ut, a cunctis reatibus absoluti, tecum sine fine ia3tentur. 
Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 

R. Amen. 



APPENDIX. 

CHAPTEK I. 

Akticle I. 
Things to he Prepared far the Mass of the Exposition. 

1. The picture or image of the high altar, as well as 
the walls near it, should be covered with precious 
drapery ; bu Irepresenting nothing profane. 

2. The altar ought to be prepared as well as possible. 
No statues or relics of saints should be placed on or about 
it. The figures of angels bearing candelabra need not 
be covered. In the most conspicuous place of it, should 
be erected the throne, or exposition place for the Blessed 
Sacrament, with a pall or corporal on it. It should be 
surrounded with a sufficient number of candles near it, 
besides those that are on the steps of the altar. The 
cross may be left, or taken, away. The front altar- veil 
must always be white, although the Mass may require 
another color, 

3. On the side-table, besides M^hat is usually necessary 
for High Masses, should be a cope of the color of the 
vestments for the celebrant, the book containing the 
Litany and prayers, the remonstrance covered with a 
white veil, and a stole for the priest, who is to expose the 
Blessed Sacrament. 

4. In the sanctuary, a bench covered with a cloth or 
carpet for the clergy w^ho remain at the adoration. 

5. In the sacristy, the usual vestments for the celebrant 
and ministers. 



EXPOSITION-. 407 

6 In any convenieiit place, the processional canopy, 
the ombrellino, the processional cross, two censers, with 
their boats, candles lor tlie procession, and two books 
with the Litany for the chanters. 

Article II. 
Of the Mass for the Exposition, 

1. The Mass for the exposition and reposition, is to be 
sung at the altar where the exposition is made. Tlie 
Mass should be the solemn Yotiva ot* the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, with the Gloria and Credo, and with the com- 
memoration of the Sunday, and of the feasts of either 
double or semi-double rite.* But on Sundays of first or 
second class, on festivals of double rite of first or 
second class, on Ash Wednesday, on Monday, Tues- 
day, and Wednesday in Holy Week, durmg the 
whole octave of Easter, Pentecost, and E])iphany, on the 
vigils of Christmas axid Bentecost, and within all 
privileged octaves, that exclude the celebration of fes- 
tivals of first and second class, either translated or fall- 
ing on those days, the Mass of the Blessed Sacrament 
cannot be sung, but the Mass occurring on that day is to 
be celebrated with the prayer of the Blesocd Sacrament, 
Sub unica condusione, with the Preface, de Nativitate, 
if the Mass of the day has not a proper preface; and 
should those festivals fall on Sunday, the prayer of the 
Blessed Sacrament is to be said, Sub unica conckisione^ 
with that of the Saint, and the commemoration of the 
Sunday is to be made afterwards under its proper con- 
clusion. 

2. This Mass is celebrated as other High Masses, having 
nothing particular, except that another large particle is 
to be consecrated with that of the Mass. 



*This apparent anomaly ia admittinsj commeraorations in a solemn 
Votiva Mass Pro re gravi, arises U'om tlie tact tliat there is no Con- 
ventual Mass of the clay celebrated here, and hence such commemora- 
tions must be made. 



408 APPEN'DIX. 

3. The acolytes, who hold the Ccandles for the elevation, 
must not leave the sanctuary, before the consecrated 
Host is placed in the remonstrance ; and before they go, 
they must make a genuflection on both knees. 

4. The acolytes should light all the candles of the 
altar, prepared for the exposition before the elevation. 

5. After the celebrant has consumed the Precious 
Blood, the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflection, 
exchange places, make another genuflection ; the master 
of ceremonies carries the remonstrance to the altar; and 
the celebrant, assisted by the deacon, places the sacred 
Host in the remonstrance, the deacon shuts it and places 
it in the middle of the corporal ; the deacon and sub- 
deacon again exchange places. During the remaining 
part of the Mass, the ministers omit the usual kisses in 
giving or receiving anything from the celebrant. 

6. The celebrant in the usual place makes the ablution 
of his fingers; after which the ministers make a genu- 
flection and exchange places; the sub-deacon wipes the 
chalice, and covers it as usual, leaving the corporal 
spread on the altar, taking care to retire a little, whilst 
the celebrant sings, Dominus voMscum ; he then makes 
a genuflection on the platform, and on the lowest step, 
as he passes before the Blessed Sacrament, and having 
brought the chalice to the side-table, goes to his place 
behind the deacon. 

7. The celebrant having given the chalice to the sub- 
cZeacon, makes a genuflection, and goes to read the Con^- 
munio ; then he returns to the middle, makes a genu- 
flection with the deacon, kisses the altar, turns to the 
people from the Gospel side, so as not to turn his back 
to the Blessed Sacrament; sings, Dominus vohiscum^ 
makes again a genuflection with the ministers, goes to 
sing the prayers; atter having sung them, returns to the 
middle, makes a genuflection w^ith the ministers, kisses 
the altar, turns to the people as before, sings, Dominus 
vobiscic7ri I in the meanwhile, the deacon makes another 
genuflection, turns to the people in the same manner as 
the celebrant, and sings, Ite^ iiiissa est. Then the cele- 
brant and the ministers make a genuflection ; the cele- 



rOllTY hours' EXPOSITION". 409 

brant sajs, Placeat^ etc., and the ministers kneel on the 
phitforin for the benediction. 

8. The celebrant having said the Placeat^ kisses the 
altar, ^ay^, Benedicet vos ; instead of bowing, makes a 
genuflection, turns as for the Dorninus vobiscum, blesses 
the people, without completing the circle, and without 
making another genuflection, turns on his left, sajs the 
Gospel, does not make the sign of the cross on the altar, 
but he makes it on his forehead, mouth, and breast, and 
saying, Et verhum caro, he makes a genuflection to the 
Blessed Sacrament. 

9. After Mass, the ministers go up to the platform at 
the side of the celebrant, and having made a genuflec- 
tion on one knee, they all go directly by the side steps 
to the bench. 

10. Towards the end of Mass, the acolytes give the can- 
dles to the clergy and light them; the two censer-bearers 
prepare their censers, and whilst the celebrant reads the 
last Gospel, the latter go to the altar and make a genu- 
flection on both knees. 

Article III. 
Of the Procession for the Exposition, 

1. The celebrant and the ministers, on arriving at the 
bench, take ofl' their maniples ; the celebrant, moreover, 
takes oflf his chasuble and puts on the cope, puts incense 
in both censers, without blessing it, the deacon present- 
ing the incense-boat, and goes with them to the middle, 
below the steps, where he makes with thein a genuflec- 
tion on both knees, kneels on the lowest step, and 
incenses the Blessed Sacrament, with three tlirows. 

2. In the meantime, the master of ceremonies brings 
from the side-table the long veil, and puts it on the cele- 
brant, after he has given the censer to the deacon. The 
censer-bearers go to each side of the altar, and the aco- 
lytes give the canopy to those who are to carry it. 

3. The celebrant, having incensed the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, goes up to the second step with the deacon and 



410 APPEN'DIX. 

sub-deacon; the celebrant and the sub-deacon kneel, and 
the deacon goes up to the altar, makes a orenuflection on 
one knee, takes the Blessed Sacrament without bowing, 
and standing gives it to the celebrant; then the deacon 
makes a genuflection, and at the same time bows, goes 
to the celebrant's right, who, with the ministers, goes up 
to the platform, and they turn towards the people in 
Buch a manner that the deacon be at the right, and the 
sub-deacon at the left of the celebrant, whose cope they 
raise on each side ; a priest in surplice holds the ombrel- 
lino opened over the Blessed Sacrament, and the singers 
intone the Pange^ lingua. 

4. The procession moves in the following order: the 
cross-bearer, in surplice, having on each side the acolytes 
wdth their candlesticks, goes to the lower part of the 
sanctuary near the railing, and stands turned to the 
altar. W^hen the chanters intone the Pange Lingua^ 
they turn towards the people, without making any 
genuflection and begin to move ; the clergy, two by two, 
make a genuflection on both knees, follow them, carry- 
ing their candies outside — that is, those who are at the 
right carry them in their right hand, and those at the 
lelt side, in their left hand. 

5. The celebrant, between the deacon and sub-deacon, 
wh^ raise his cope on each side, preceded by the two 
censer-bearers, who gently swing their censers, and sur- 
rounded by four or six acolytes, who carry lighted 
candles on each side of the canopy, walks in the last 
place, reciting, in a low voice, psalms and hymns 
alternately with the ministers, and the choir continues to 
sing the Fange Lingua. 

6. The procession having returned, the acolytes put 
their candlesticks on the side-talle, and the cross-bearer 
leaves the cross at its place, the clergy divide in two 
lines at each side of the altar, and as the Blessed Sacra- 
ment approaches, they all kneel down. The censer- 
bearers, on arriving near the altar, do not swing their 
censers any more, but stop at each side of it, and remain 
there standing. The celebrant stops at the lowest step 
of the altar, and there standing, gives the Blessed 



411 

Sacrament to the deacon, wlio receives it kneeling on 
both knees, and turned a little to the Epistle side. 
Then the celebrant kneels, and takes off the long veil. 
The deacon places the ostensorium on the altar, 
if there be no other priest to place it on the throne; 
otherwise the deacon himself places it thereon, malvcs a 
genuflection on the platform, without bowing his head, 
and goes down by one side to the right of the celebrant. 

7. Those who carried the canopy, having left it at a 
convenient place, receive candles and kn.el down, form- 
ing a scmicii-cle before the altar, if they be clergymen : 
but if laymen, they kneel outside of the chancel. 

8. After the deacon has placed the Blessed Sacrament 
on the throne, and returned to the right of the celebrant, 
the chanters intone Tantum ergo. At the verse Genitori^ 
the celebrant rises with the ministers, puts incense into 
the censer, without blessing it, the deacon presenting the 
incense- boat, and the sub-deacon raising the celebrant's 
cope at his right, while he incenses the Blessed Sacra- 
ment with three throws. After th3 incensing, the 
censer bearer, having received the cer.ser from the 
deacon, goes to the middle, makes a genuflection, with 
the second censer-bearer, and both carry their censers 
back to the sacristy. 

9. After the Tantum ergo, the chanters do not sing 
the verse Panem de Coelo, but they go in the middle, 
kneel, and sing the Litany. At the end of it the 
celebrant intones Pater noster, the rest of which being 
recited secretly, the chanters intone the Psalm IJeus in 
adjutorium y after it, the celebrant, kneeling, sings in s. 
ferial tone the verses from the book which the ministers 
hod on each side; he then rises, and standing, sings 
with his hands joined, Dominus vobiscum, and the 
prayers that follow; these being ended, he knee s, says 
Uomi?ie exaudi orationem meam, and the chanters, 
Exaudiat nos onmipotens et misericors Dommus ; t le 
choir answers, JEt custodial nos semper, Amen; the 
celebrant subjoins, Fidelimn animce, etj., without 
making the sign of the cro:^s; the choir answers. Amen ; 
Then ail tiie clergy pray for a short time in silence ; the 



412 apptlKdix. 

acolytes go t'^ the middle with their candlesticks, kneel 
on both knees, rise, and walk to the sacristy, followed, as 
usrual, by the c ergy and the sacred ministers, who all 
make in the middle a genuflection on both knees; the 
latter, when at a proper distance from the Blessed 
Sacrament, put on their caps. 

If, for want of a sufficient number of persons, or for 
any other cause, the procession cannot be made, the 
celebrant, and the deacon and sub-deacon, after Mass, go 
to the bench, as has been said above, take off their 
maniples, the celebrant taking off also his chasuble, and 
putting on the cope, go to the altar, make a genuflection 
on both knees below the last step, then kneel on it, and 
after a short prayer, rise; the celebrant puts incense into 
the censer, and kneeling, incenses with three throws the 
Blessed Sacrament; then the deacon, or another priest 
in surplice and stole, making the usual L^enufls'ctions, 
places the remonstrance on the throne; the choir sings 
Pange^ lingua; at the verse Genitori the celebrant puts 
incense again into the censer, and incenses, as usual, the 
Blessed Sacrament. After the hymn is finished, the 
chanters sing the Litany immediately. The same is to 
be done at the reposition of the Blessed Sacrament, 
except that the hymn, Pange^ lingua is sung after the 
verse, Domine. exaudi orationem ineam^ and the bene- 
diction is given as usual. 

10. After the clergy have left the sanctuary, the bench 
or stool prepared for the purpose is placed near the last 
step of the altar in the middle, and the two clergymen 
debtined to begin the adoration, dressed in surplice (and 
stole if they be priests), kneel before it, and remain 
there for the space of an hour, after which two others 
go to take their place, and so on till the exposition is 
Snished. 

11. There should be constantly, day and night, during 
the exposition, at least twenty lights ; and when the 
church is shut in the night, at least ten of them should 
be candles and ten lamps.^ 

*The privilege granted in this country with regard to the discon- 
tinuanoe of the exposition during tiie night makes this unnecessary. 



FOKTY hours' EXPOSITION. 413 

Article IV. 
Of the Mass jpro pace. 

1. Everything is to be pre oared for tliis Mass as for 
others, but the color of the ve^tme=its is to be violet. 

2. This Mass ought to be sung on tlie second day of 
the forty hours' exposition, with the assistance of deacon 
and sub-deacon. It should not be sung at the altar 
where the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, or where it is 
usual 1}^ kept in the tabernacle. However, as in most of 
our churches in tiiis country, there is but one altar, the 
Mass here spoken of must necessarily be celebrated at 
the altar of the exposition. The assistance of the deacon 
and sub-deacon must be dispensed with where there is 
only one clergyman. 

3. The Mass, pro pace^ is sung without Gloria and 
Credo^ and with the commemoration of the ijlessetl Sac- 
rament, sub utiica condusione^ and according to the 
rules given above for the votive Mass of the Blessed 
Sacrament. However, if it is celebrated on a Sunday, 
the Credo is to be said. 

4. The days on which this Mass, j?r6> pace^ cannot be 
said, are the same as mentioned above for that of the 
Blessed Sacrament, n 1, art ii. When any other is said 
in its place, the prayer, j?r6> pace^ is to be said, suh unica 
conclusione^ with that of the current Mass, and the com- 
memoration of the Blessed Sacrament is then said sub 
'propria condusione^ should the rite of the day allow it. 

5. All private Masses celebrateJ during the exposition 
are of the current office, with the commenioratiun of tiie 
Blessed Sd'jrament after the others prescribed ior that 
day by tiie Rubrics; and if a feast of the first or second 
class be tlien celebrated, the commemoration of the 
Blessed Sacrament is omitted ; the little bell is not to be 
rung;"^ if, on the days of the exposition, votive Masses 
are permitted by the Kubrics, it is proper that all private 
Masses should be of the Blessed Sacrament, without 
Gloria and without Credo., with the Pre. ace de Natimtate. 

* However, it' Mass is celebrated at the altar of exposition, iLiere 
does U(jt seem lo be aay reason for not riugiui^ tiie bell. Tuis pro- 
hibition was made in order that the minds of the laiihlui might not 
be distracted Irom the main p. ace — .he altar of exposition. 



414 APPEI^DIX. 

Article Y. 
Things to he prepared for the Mass of the Beposltion, 

1. In the sacristy and op the side-table, everything as 
for the first day. 

2. On the altar, the key of the tabernacle, the Missal 
on its stand, the cards and the cross, according to the 
established custom. All the candles are to be lighted 
before Mass. 

3. In the sanctuary, the bench or stools placed in the 
middle for the adoration are to be removed. 

Article YI. 
Of the Mass for the Reposition. 

1. "We think it proper to mention here some general 
rules, before we speak of the ceremonies to be observed 
in Masses celebrated at the altars on which the Blessed 
Sacrament is exposed. 

2. These rules are the following: Durino: Mass, the 
genuflections are made only on one knee, except when 
the priest hrst arrives at the altar, and when he leaves it 
to return to the sacristy; in both these cases, he makes 
the genuflection on both knees. 

The usual reverences to salute the clergy are omitted, 
by the celebrant and ministers, and by every one else."^ 

The ministers and all others in giving anything to the 
celebrant, or receiving it from him, do njt kiss it or his 
hand ; but the sub-deacon, after the Epistle, kisses the 
hand in receiving his blessing; likewise the deacon when 
he goes to receive his blessing before he sings the Gospel ; 
at the Offertory, when he presents the paten and chalice 
to the celebrant, he kisses both the paten and chalice, 
and his hand, as also when he gives him the paten at 
the end of the Pater nosier. Tlie celebrant, at the end 
of the Gospel, sung by the deacon, kisses the Missal, as 
usual. 

*Tlie deacoD, however, salutes the choir before incensiug them. 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION. 415 

3. The sacred ministers being: vested, go from the 
sacristy to the ranctuary as nsnal ; tlie acolytes arriving 
before the altar, make a geniiiiection on both knees, 
and a protonnd bow, retire on each side, and wait for tiie 
ministers. Tiie clergy, as they arrive at the middle 
make likewise a genuflection on both knees, with a pro- 
found reverence, and go to their respective places, 
^vithout bowing to each other. The sacred ministers 
uncover their heads, as soon as they can see the Blessed 
Sacrament, carry their caps till they enter the sanctuarj^, 
then they give them to the master of ceremonies, and, 
on arriving before the last step of the altar, they, with 
the acolytes and the master of ceremonies, make a grenu- 
flection on both knees, and a profound bow, and Mass is 
begun as usual. 

4. Having made the confession, they go up to the 
altar, without making a genuflection, where they make a 
genuflection on one knee. The deacon and sub-deacon 
should observe, that in making the genuflections, tiiey 
must not place their hands on the altar, this being 
allowed only to the celebrant. When the latter has said, 
Oramus te Domine^ they retire a little to tlie Gospel 
side, turned to the Epistle side, to put incense into the 
censer; and before the censer-bearer goes up for this pur- 
pose, he makes below the last step a genuflection, bend- 
ing one knee; the deacon does not kiss the spoon, nor 
the celebrant's hand, as has been observed before for all 
similar cases. 

5. The incense having been blessed, the censer-bearer 
retires to his place, making a genuflection, and the cele- 
brant and ministers go down to the second step, taking 
care not to turn their backs to the Blessed Sacrament; 
on which account tiie celebrant and the sub-deacon go 
down by the Gospel side, and the deacon by that of the 
Epistle, kneel on the edge of the platform; there the 
celebrant, having received the censer from the deacon, 
without the usual kisses, and made a profound bow, 
incenses the Blessed Sacrament with three throws, the 
ministers raising in the meanwhile, his chasuble on each 
side. Then they rise, go up to the altar, making a genu- 
flection on one knee, and incense the altar, as usual. 



416 APPEis^DIX. 

If, according to the custom established in some chnrclios, 
the cross has been placed on the altar, it must not be 
incensed. {Deer. S. R. C, 29 Sept., 1738.) 

6. After the incensing, the celebrant goes down to the 
first step, or below them all, according to the con- 
struction of the altar, and there, turned towards the 
])eople, is incensed by the deacon, who turns towards 
him. Then he goes to read the Introit, etc. 

7. After the choir have done singing the Kyrie^ the 
celebrant with the ministers goes to the middle as usual, 
makes with them a genuflection, and intones the Gloria ; 
the ministers make again a genuflection, go to his 
side, recite the rest of the hymn, make a genuflection, 
and by the side steps go to the bench, where they sit 
without their caps ; after it is sung, they go to the middle, 
make a genuflection below the steps, and go, one behind 
the other, w^ithout making any other genuflection. The 
celebrant, after arriving on the platform and kissing the 
altar, genuflects, and turned a little towards the Gospel 
side, sings the I)ominus vobisomn ; then he returns to 
the middle, makes a genuflection with the (ninisters, and 
goes to sing the prayers as usual ; after w^iich, the sub- 
deacon sings the Epistle, having made the usual genu- 
flections before the altar, then asks the celebrant's bless- 
ing, kisses his hand, and carries the Missal to the Gospel 
side, as usual. 

8. During this time, the celebrant says the Munda 
cor meum^ makco a genuflection before and after, then 
reads the Gospel; and the deacon tak^s the book to the 
altar, having made a genuflection in the middle on the 
lowest step, and again on the platform. 

9. When the celebrant has read the Gospel, he turns 
in his pUice, and puts in the incense as at n. 4; then all 
three go to the middle o.i the platform, the sub-deacuu 
descends to the bottom of the steps, and the deacon 
kneels to say the Munda cor meum. The celebrant, at 
the proper time, gives the deacon his blessing, who, 
liaving kissed his hand, rises, both make a genuflection, 
the celebrant goes to the Epistle side, the deacon goes to 
the floor, makt^s a genuflection with the others, and pro- 



FORTY hours' EXPOSITION". 417 

cecds as usual to sing the Gospel. At the end, the sub- 
deacon takes the Missal to the celebrant to kiss, without 
making a genuflection before, comes down froin tiie 
altar (which he must do without turning his back to the 
Blessed Sacrament), and the deacon incenses the cele- 
brant as usual. 

10. After incensing the celebrant, all three go to the 
middle, one behind the other, make a genuflection, and 
the celebranc intones the Credo ; at the end, the minis- 
ters make a genuflection, and go to recite it with the 
celebrant. Then all three make a genuflection and go 
to the bench, as was mentioned at u. 7. 

11. At the Crucifixus^ the deacon takes the burse from 
the side-table, bows to the culebrant only, goes to the 
middle, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and 
again on the platform, and spreads the corporal in the 
usual manner, makes a genuflection, and returns bj the 
side of the altar to the right of the celebrant. 

12. At the end of the Credo ^ the ministers go to the 
altar, as at n. 7. The celebrant sings the Dominusvohis- 
Gum^ ma'scs a genuflection, and sings Oremus. After 
which the deacon and sub-deacon make a genuflect on, 
and go, the first to the celebrant's right, and the other 
to the side-table, in the usual niMuner, for the chalice, 
which he brings to the altar, making there a genuflec- 
tion. The deacon presents the paten and clialice with 
the usual kiss. In like manner the sub-deacon presents 
the cruets, then takes the paten, and makes a genuflec- 
tion, first on the platform, and again on the lowest step."* 
He does not, however, make a genuflection when the 
celebrant kneels on the platform to incense the Blessed 
Sacrament. {S, C R., 11 Feb., 1761.) 

13. After the oblation of the chalice, ihe deacon gives 
the incense as at n. 4. And the celebrant, without 
making a genuflection, incenses the offerings ; the deacon 
does not remove the chalice from the middle of the cor- 
poral. When till is done, thej descend to the second 
step, kneel on the edge of the platform, and incense the 



*The sub -deacon does not kiss the cruets. 



418 APPENDIX. 

Blessed Sacrament, the altar as at n. 5, and the celebrant 
as at n. 6, and h^ washes liis hands accordinor to tlio 
Kubric of the Missal o.\ Good Friday, and the S. C. R., 
22d August, 1682; then he returns to the midr'le, maizes 
a genuflection, and says the Suscipe, S'lncta Trinitas, etc. 

14. When the deacon has incensed the celebrant, he 
incenses the choir as usual, then the sub-deacon, who 
makes a genuflection, and then turns for this purp :)se a 
little towards the Gospel side. Tins done, the deacon 
gives thj censer to the censer-bearer, goes up to the 
second step, makes a genuflection, and turns in the same 
manner as the sub-deacon, to be incensed, and again 
makes a genuflection. 

15. When the celebrant has said the Suscips^ Sancta 
Trinitas^ he kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and 
turns, as at the Dominus vobiscum^ to say the Orate^ 
Fratres ; but he does not make a jierfect circle; then 
he returns to the middle, makes a genuflection, and con- 
tinues Mass. 

16. At the Sanctus, the acolytes apra-oach with torches, 
and without bowing, kneel down till aft^r Communion, 
as they did on the first day. From this to the end of 
Mass, they observe exactly what is prescribed for the flrst 
day, and make preparations toward the end for the pro- 
cession. 

Article YII. 
From the Litany to the end of the I<orty Hows. 

1. At the end of Mass, the celebrant goes to the bench 
with the ministers, receives the cope, and without putting 
in in ;ense, returns to the middle, makes a genuflection 
on both knees, and kneels on the lowest step ; then the 
chanters sing the Litany, as on the first day, to Domhie, 
exaudi orationem^ etc., inclusive. 

2. At Peccatores^ the acolytes give the candles to the 
clergy, and light them ; the censer-bearers prepare their 
censers, and approach the altar with the usual genu- 
flections. 



FORTY HOURS EXPOSITION-. 419 

3. After the celebrant lias said the Domine^ exaudL 
etc., he rises with tlie ministers, puts incense into the 
censers, without blessing it, and kneeling, incenses three 
times the Blessed Sacrament; and the master of cere- 
monies gives him the veil. 

4. After incensing the Blessed Sacrament, the censer- 
bearers place themselves on each side of the altar, and 
the deacon or a priest with surplice and stole, with the 
usual genuflections, takes It from the throne; if it is 
the deacon, without placing It upon the corporal, he 
places It in the celebrant's hands, who receives It after 
a genuflection ; and as soon as he has delivered It, the 
deacon makes m turn a genuflection. If another priest 
takes It from the throne, ho places It upon the cor- 
poral, makes a genuflection and retires; then the deacon 
goes upon the plattorm, and takes It as said above, and 
as to the remainder, observes what is prcocribed in the 
ceremonies and rite of the procession, 

5. When the procession has returned, and the cele- 
brant has arrived at the lowest step of the altar, the 
deacon makes a genuflection, receives from him the Bles-ed 
Sacrament; the celebrant then immediately makes a 
genuflection, and the veil is taken ofl*. The deacon 
places the remonstrance on the corporal, in the middle 
of the altar, an i returns to the right of the celebrant, 
making the usual genuflections. 

6. As soon as the deacon returns to the right of the 
celebrant, the singers intone the Tantutn ergo; at the 
Geuitori incense is given, and the B.essed Sacrament is 
incensed; and after the verse Panmi de g(bIo (to which 
an Alleluia is added during paschal time, and the octave 
of Vorj^us Chnsti, accord mg to the Decree, S. 0. K., 
10 Jan., 1705), the celebrant rises without making 
another genuflection, or saying Dominus vobisGUTn 
(Decree, S. C. K., iOth June. 1663; ii8th Sept., 1675; 
iid Aug. and 6th Sept., 16^8), and sings the prayers w^ith 
his hands joined, and the ministers hold the IjOjIc. 

7. After the prayers, he kneels, and after saying 
Fidelium anim(£^ as on the tirst day, the deacon adjusts 
the veil on his shoulders, and the sub-deacon ties it in 



420 APPEN'DIX. 

front. Then the celebrant with the ministers ojoes up to 
the altar and gives the Benediction of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment in the usual manner. The celebrant and sub- 
deacon go down to the foot of the altar (the deacon, if 
there is no assisting priest, remaining on the predella to 
replace the Blessed Sacrament) and genuflect, and the 
master of ceremonies removes the huraeral-veil. The 
deacon immediately, or a priest with a stole, observing 
the usual ceremonies, puts the Blessed Sacrament in the 
tabernacle, which must be on the altar where the exposi- 
tion is made, and the consecrated Host must be con- 
sumed during Mass, either the same morning or the fol- 
lowing. {Instruct Clement.) 

8. Whilst the Blessed Sacrament is put away, the aco- 
lytes take their candles from the side-table, and go to 
the middle; the master of ceremonies takes the minis- 
ters' caps, and at the end of the function gives them a 
signal to rise ; all make a genuflection together on the 
floor; he presents the caps, and they go, preceded by the 
censer-bearers and acolytes, to the sacristy, to disrobe as 
usual. 

As it frequently happens that not the celebrant, but a 
Bishop, terminates the function, it may be necessary to 
point out what is to be observed after Mass. At the 
end of the last Gospel, the celebrant, with the ministers 
at each side of him, goes to the middle of the altar, 
makes a genuflection on one knee, without bowing the 
head, and then goes down to the floor, in such a manner as 
not to turn his back to the Blessed Sacrament. When 
they are at the bottom of the steps,. they all make a genu- 
flection together on both knees, together with a prostra- 
tion ; the acolytes with their candles, and the master of 
ceremonies, do the same as they did in the beginning of 
Mass. Then they all depart with their heads uncovered, 
and do not take their caps until they are out of sight of 
the Blessed Sacrament. When they arrive in the sacristy, 
the ministers take ofl* their maniples ; and if they are to 
assist the Bishop, and their vestments be not white, 
they take them ofl' and put on white. (Decree, S. 0. E., 
20th Sept., 1806.) Then they assist the Bishop to vest, 



FORTY hours' expcsitio:n". 421 

and proceed to the altar, preceded by the acolytes with 
their candles, and followed by the train-bearer and mitre- 
bearer. When they come in sight of the Blessed Sacra- 
ment, the deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and after 
making a genuflection on both knees, both kneel on the 
first step, on which the master of ceremonies will put a 
cushion for the Bishop. The function is then continued 
as prescribed above, and the mitre-bearer during the 
benediction kneels down. 

9. The greater part of the ceremonies prescribed in 
this chapter, have been taken from the 6th volume of 
the Collection of Decrees of the S. C. R., Part II, in 
which Gardellini explains the instructions of Clement 
XI on the Forty Hours. 



422 



DIFFEREJ^T INTONATIONS 



CHAPTER 11. 

DIFFERENT INTONATIONS FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN MASS. 

It was deemed advisable to add, at the end of this 
Manual, the different intonations for Yespers and Solemn 
Mass. 

It may be well to remark that the priest who officiates 
or celebrates, if capable of regulating his voice, or 
intoning Deus in adjutorium, &g , or in commencing a 
prayer, &c., should take a moderate pitch, neither too 
high nor too low— such a note, for instance, that would 
answer that of sol or la of tlie organ, would suit the 
generality of voices of the choir that is to sing the 
responses. 

DeUS in ADJUrOEIUM, &c. 

For Festivals. 



V. De- as in ad -ja - to- ri -urn me-ura in-ten-de. 



R. 


Do- 


mi-ne 


ad 


ad -ja-van-dura 


me fes - 


ti - na. 






-^- 


-m- 


-♦ — H — 


— ■ — 


■»q-B:=}-a— ♦- 


_B^_a_j- 


-■— ♦ 


-♦- 


-■- 


r 1 i 1 




Sanc-to Si - cut e - rat in prin -ci - pi - o, et nunc 



et semper, et in saec - u - la saec - u - io-rum. Amen. 



1 



Al - le - lu - ia. 



FOR VESPERS AN^D SOLEMN MASS. 
Vwing Septvagesima ard Lent. 



423 



lEt 



- r— r 



H -p ♦ 



♦— B- 



ib: 



La -us ti-bi Do-mi-ne, rex 3e-ier-nae glo-ri-ae. 
Ferial Jnf ovation. 



-a— I -a ■ 



-H-f-B- 



B — m- 



V. De - us in ad - ju - to - ri-um me- urn in-ten-de. 



■j:3i=r 



S 



□ — ♦ 



Do- mi - ne ad ad - ju-vandiim me fes - ti - na. 



^ 



g_i_H_H- 



■ -B 



Glo - ri - a Pa-tri, &c. Al - le - lu - la. 

Zaus tibi Domine^ as above. 

The Chaptee. 

is sung on the note Do^ recto tono^ all the way through, 
except the last word, which is sung on Za, sol^ la. 



■^ 



-a— B--H-|-q— B- 



j=i7j^zzj^zzg4 



Ec-ee sa-cer-dos magnus, &c. et in tem-po-re 



♦— B-^-*— B 



B-B— ♦^ 



i-ra-cun-di-oe fac-tiis est re-con-ci-li-a-ti- o. 



_*- 



E. De-o gra-ti-as. 

The Yeeses 

Immediately after the Hymn, 



-B-B-B4-E3 -B-B-bTs 



i:^=^ifi 



V.Glo-ri-a et lio-no-re co-ro-nas-ti e-uni, Du-iiii-ue ... 



424 



DIFFEREN-T UTTON-ATIOKS 



- p— >-"^^1i— p-i 



E. Et con-sti-tiiisti . . . tu - - - 



The Yeeses 



For the Commemorations. 



Y. Di - ri- ga-tur, Do-mi- ne, o - ra - ti - o 



me 



E 



■ — ■- 



±=ar=s= 



R. Si -cut in-cen-sum in coii-spec-tu tu - o. 

The tones for Dominus vobiscum and for the prayers 
are marked hereafter at page 425 : and, as the different 
intonations for Beiiedieamus are to be found in every 
missal, we abstain from noting them here. 

After the Deo gratias, in response to the Benedicamiis^ 
the priest sings in the luw note do^ J^idelium animce, in 
the following manner : 



_B^ 






8^ 






1 B ■ ♦ B B ^ B n B ^ 


^ ^ 






) ] 





V. Fi - de - li- um a - ni-mas ... in pa - ce. R. A - men. 

After the prayer that follows the Antiphon of the 
Blessed Yirgin, the othciating priest sings, in a low 
note of voice : 



V. Di - vi-num au - xi - li - um ma- ne - at semper no-bis-cum. 



*^ 



^•F^ 



A-men. 



In a Festival tone the prayers are sung on one note, 
do, with the exception of two variations, do, si, la, do, do, 



FOR YESPERS AND SOLEMiq- MASS. 



425 



and do^ si. The former of these variations is made on a 
principal point, the second on a semi-point. 

Jt will be observed that in every prayer there is the 
address to God, the petition through tiie mystery, or the 
intercession of a saint whose Mass is celebrated, and the 
conclusion. The end of the address is generally marked 
by a semicolon ; and on the word preceding it the 
principal point is sung. It* in the petition, the sentences 
are divided so as to admit a semicolon, the semi-point is 
then sung on the last w^ord of the first part of the 
sentence. In the conclusion the semi-point is sung first, 
and the principal point in the second place, as will be 
seen in the following example : 

Praters. 



-^■ — ♦— B-^-a— ■— B- M -B^ ■ i ^ ^ 



ii 



Do-mi-nus vobiscum Et cum spi-ri-tu tu - o. 



^ .a 


B H 1 


1^1 ^Im ^ 1 


^ ^ 


P H 


BO W 


1 >■ 1 


^ 


■*■■■< 1 ■! HI 


i 1 


1 1 I 



O - re-iiiLis. De - us qui ho - cli - er-nam cli -em, 



r~i ^~T 



-a — a — M-^ B — B 



5 



A-pos - to -lo-rum tu - o-rum Pe - tri, et Pau-li, 

Principal Point. 



-^■-P— i^ 



-a-"- 



-'^^ 



mar-t}^ - rio cou-se-cras-ti ; Da Ec-cle - si -je tu - ae 

Semi-point. 



*:t^ 



-a — a- 



H 



J L 



e - o-rum in om - ni-bus se-qui prae-cep-tum: per 



-^ -a 4— a-— a— ♦— a— H— |— p— a— f— a— ^— ♦— b-|-|— a— |-i - 



quos re - li - gi - o - nis sump-sit ex - or - di- um. Per 



g r^-»-" 



1 — r 



«+■ "^ 



±r^-mrt 



Do -mi-num nostrum Je-sum Christum Fi-ll-um tu-um, 



426 



DIFFERENT INTON'ATIO]SrS 



^* B^ 


9 n ra ■ 1 n 


B S-\--m 1 B ♦ -H B-f* 


ii^ ^ 


I a D 1 s ■ 1 ■ 


T 


1 1 


qui 


te-eiini vi - vit et irg-nat in ii - ni - ta - tc 


^-B- 


-♦--@-4-B~-H-B-B- 








. _.,;,. ' 1, 



Spi-ri-tLis Suiicti De-iis, per oin-Qi-a siec-u-la 



-^ B— ♦ ^-m 


-B-a- 


— 


\ ■ \ 1 







s;t!C-u-lo-rLim. A-men. 

Feeial Tones. 

The ferial tone is more simple, and is used in the 
prayers of ferial Masse?, and in the Mass of Kequiem. 
The inflection is from JJo to Be, and is made at the end 
of the prayer, and at the conchision. When there is 
more than one prayer, the inflection is made at the end 
of the first, at the end of the last, and at the conclusion. 

Mcample, 



1-9-9 



-B— ^ ♦ — B- 



.Zl 



Coii-ce-de, mi-se - ri-cors De-us, fra-gi -li-ta - ti 



'^ m a 


m a 


_«_a_i 


H— 






._^_ 


B 


^ m m 








■ 


1 1 1 


r^ 1 1 " 


1 .. 1 



nos-tra) prae-sid - i-um. . . . Ke - sur-ga - mus. Per 



e-Lindem Christum Do-miiium nostrum. A-men. 

Epistle. 

The Epistle is intoned and continued throughout on 
the note JDo. A prolonging of the voice is made on the 
fourth, fifth, or sixth syllable before the end of a period, 
according as the accents may require an inflection of the 
voice, from Bo to jSL Another inflection, sanctioned by 
custom, may be made at the end, as it may suit the 
accents. 



FOR VESPERS A:N'D SOLEMN" MASS. 



42? 



Examjple. 



-^-■— ♦--■-] -■— H-l--a — ♦— ^— ♦-s-- 


^-a bH B-hfl 


1 1 .11 


I 1 



Lec-ti-o Li-bri Sa-i3i-en-ti-je. Be - a - tus 



-fe- "-i- 


-B— B hH— H^B— ■— |-a — ♦ - E- 


-0-^-B-f-B-|-9 


1 


1 


1 


qui 


in-veii-tiis est si-ne ma -en -la, 


et qui post 


^ B- 




_-B_LB^._^^ 






1 


1 



au-riira non a - bi it, nee spe-ra-vit in pe- 



-H — ^- 



-s— f-a-}— B-|-B { g 



en - ni - a et the - san - ris. Qnis est hie, et 



5: 



-B— B-j— g-^ — ♦— B- ^ 



lau-da-bimns e - ura. . , , Omnis ec-cle-si-a 



'^^ ■ ■ ■ 




s ■ '^ ^ 




1 1 





sancto-rum. 



The Gospel 



is sung on the note Z>6>, as its dominant, with three vari- 
ations. At the end of a period the voice is lowered to 
La in the fourth, fifth, or sixth syllables, returning imme- 
diately to Do, The interrogation point is sung as at the 
Epistle. At the close of the Gospel the voice descends 
to La on the fourth, fifth, or sixth last syllable, which are 
sung on three notes, La^ Si, Do, the remaining syllable 
being sung in Do. 

Example, 



^^-fc^ 



xil 



Do - minus vo-bis-cum. Et cura spi-ri-tu tu - o 



428 



DIFFERENT I:N'T0N'ATI0K"S 



-m-^-m- 



i=ti 



Se-(iiieu-ti - u Saiicti E - v;in-^e - li - i se-cuiidmn 






1 r 



H— B-*- ♦— a^ 



:-g^^*^5 



Murtliemn. Glo-ri-a ti-bi Do-mine. In il - lo 



tciii-po-re dix-it Jesus dis-ci-pu-lis su - is : vos 



^E=l 



i" I w- 



T=i=Ff- 



^E^i 



l_j -B-|-g- 



es-tis sal tev-rae. Quod si sal e-va-iiu-e-rit, in 



g -"-^-^Fi zgizB[z:gz f-B^"-HT--B -B-i Jrg= r-«n'- i: 



quo sa -li- e - tiir? . . Hie magnus vo - ca - bi-tur, in 



^ 



3e5 



res: -no cje-lo-rum. La-us ti-bi Christe. 



CONFITEOK. 



^ 



Con-fi-te-or De-o om - ni - po-ten - ti, Be - a - tae 



■g_._, ,^l,_.^,_-_-__ 


■ ■ ■ ♦ ■ ■- 


^ 



Ma - ri - as semper Vir- gi - ni, be - a - to Michae - li 



^^■-■-T-i- 


^rBm'nmialniia 




■ B B 1 B B B 1 BB ^ 


B HI 1 ■ 


S 1 ♦ ^ 


1 H 


-T 



Archan-ge-lo be -a- to Jo-an-ni Baptis-tae, Sanctis, 



A-pos-to-lis Petro et Paulo, om-ni-bus Sanctis 



^-ii = F^— ^ r-T -^ 



sSE^ 



et ti - bi Pa - ter : qui - a pec - ca - vi ni - mis 



FOR VESPERS AND SOLEMN" MASS. 



429 



i^ -*--»-V:^dazi"djL"jiziLli -i^ 



CUT 



-■-f-+ 



CO - ^\ - ta - ti - o - lie, ver-bo, et o - pe - re : me - a 



£^ 



-H— a---B- 



-a-B-T^^^iT^^ijdzB^ 



cui-pa, me - a cul-pa, me -a max- i- ma cul-pa. 



£ 



♦-- S^ 



I-de-o pi-jBcor Beatam Ma-ri-am semper Virgiiiem, 



tfl: 



♦ — H- 



^— H^ 



be- a- turn Mi- cha -el -em Archaii-ge-lum, be-a-tmn 



-^ a B — B^B— a— ;^; a— g-^-H- 



-^ — ♦— a-f-s-a- 



^ — ^ 

Jo-aii-nem Bap-tis-tam, saiictos A-pos-to-los Petrum 



^S^Egg: 



a — a 



et Pau-lum, om-nes sanctos, et te Pa-ter, 



^^=i^-^-■-4-«-f-«^ +^ 



^ 



o - ra - re pro me ad Do-miaum De-um nostrimi. 



430 APPENDIX. 



(Martinucci Manuale Sac. Cserem., Lib. I, Cap. XXXV.) 

DEFEUTUUM QQl FREQUENTIUS IN MISS.^ CELEBRA^ 
TIOXE ADMILTI tiULEW T, DEMONSTRAll-J. 

I. Ut majoris emolumenti fiant dociiinenta, qnse pro 
celebratione Mis??)3 tradidimus, defectus sen menda qiue 
prsecipiie in re divina conficienda incidere solent, eiiu- 
nierare jiivat, quibns aute oculos ordinatim propositis, ea 
qua3 superius descripta sunt, in mentern revocari facile 
poterunt. 

II. Nisi qua jnsta caussa adsit Matutinutn saltern et 
Laudes non recitasse ante Missam defectus est. 

III. Item convenientem prfeparationem in Ecclesia et 
in Sacrario, bono etiani aliorum exemplo, non pra3mit- 
tere, pn\2sertim si in Sacrario adsint laici lioniines, in 
quibus adniiratio gigni possit, 

IV. Post prj«parationem conimorari in Sacrario tempus 
terendo sermonibus futilibus, loquendo de niigis aut novi- 
tatibus, multo autein magis alios obtrectando prteclpue 
iiieniis tempore circa focum. 

Y. Lavare manus anteqaam Missam in Missali rene- 
riat, aut postquam Caiicem disposuerit, vel etiam 
poptquam se paraverit. 

YI. Non prteparare Caiicem i er seipsum, ait saltern, 
si jam in proniptu esset, non inspicere an regulariter 
pneparatiis sit. 

YII. Ponere corporale extra bursam vel sup^r aut 
infra ipsam ac tali modo ad Altare atferre illud et referre 
in Sacrarium. 

YIII. Loqui cum aliis dum sacra paramenta ind'iet 
sibi. 

IX. Se paramentis induere capite cooperto, Calici 
vel Missali imponere linteolum, biretuni, pileolum, 
conspicilla. 

X. Inclinationem facere priu?quam sibi imponat amic- 
tum, aut se crucis signo munire cum amictu ipso. 

XL Sinistrani sibi albai manicani primo induere, 
deinde dexteram; partem dexteram aiiiictus et stolfB 
non super-imponere sinistra?; adjicere Amen ad unam- 



APPENDIX. 431 

qiiamque orationem staMitam pro paramentis, qnnm ad 
ultitriam tantum id prsescribatur. 

XII. Linteolum coloratum et sordidnm cingulo alli- 
gare, idquo adeo negligenter lit extra planetam appareat. 

XIII. Manipulum ad cubitiiin apponere; stolam 
dejicere per humeros, non earn aptare circa collum, ut 
crux, quixi est in medio, prodeat e plaaeta. 

XIY. Albam aut i lanetam osculari. 

XY. J^escire orationes secretas, quce in Missa sunt 
meuioriter recitandae. 

XYl. Yagari in Sacrario quum paramentis indutus sit 
tain ante, quani post Mis&am. 

XYII. Keverentiam effi ere ad crucem vel ad imagi- 
neni prgeeipuam Sacrarii biretuni mann gestando ; bire- 
tiim ipsum capiti detraliere quum genutiectendum sit 
ante SS. iSacramentum in tabernaculo reconditum, vel 
quum reverentia facienda sit ad Altare maximum 
transeundo ante ipsum. 

XYIil. Calicem ferre nimlum sublime ferme ad oris 
altitudinem, aut nimium demissum et non ad pectus, vel 
eam sustinere sinistra tantuni, non superimposita dextera. 
Ire aut redire ab Altari citato gradu ocu is sublimibus. 

XIX. Post genuflexionem ad Altare, in quo adsit SS. 
Sacratnentum, reverentiam quoque ad Crucem adjicere. 

XX. Sinistra manu applicare bursam ad candelabro- 
rum gradum ; jubere aut permittere ministro ut Missalo 
aperiat et occludat : corporale super mensa non totum 
explicare, sed unam vel plures partes plicatus relinquere. 

XXI. Morad in medio Altari intuendo Crucem aut 
orando priusquam de gradibus in planum descendat ad 
Mis^am exordiendam. 

XXII. Tergum ad Crucem vertere, eo quod pigeat 
paullum recedere versus cornu Evangelii, in aescendendo 
tuin i 1 principio Missae tum in fine. 

XXIII. Non servare debitam gravitatem, tergere 
oculos, scalpere aures, nasum, capillos aptare atque his 
similia. 

XXIY. Missam incipere antequam sint accensas can- 
dehe, aut sinere ut extiuguantur antequam perlectum sit 
Evangelium ultima in. 



432 APPENDIX. 

XXY. Qunm manus jimgendse eriint, non extendere 
et conjungere digitos, nee poUicera dexterum sinistro 
su}3er-imponere in modnm eriieis. 

XXYI. Se signare signc erucis extra seipsum aut 
dimidiate et imperfecto. 

XXVII. Negligere inclinationiiin qnalitatem profun- 
dain^ mediocrem et simjplicem et alteram pro altera 
exseqni. 

XXYIII. Non pati ut minister responsiones siias ex 
toto compleat, neque eura opportuno tempore de incon- 
siderantiis et mendis admonere. 

XXIX. Addere particulam et in repetenda antiphona 
Introibo post psalm um Judica me^ Deus. 

XXX. Pectus ad Confiteor percutere cum strepitu et 
vehementer; se vertere ad ministrnm in dicendis verbis 
voMs fratres et vos fr aires ; respondere Amen postquara 
ille recitaverit Confiteor; addere verbum omnibus vel 
omniuin in precibus m^isereatur et Indulg- ntiam^ aut 
dicere in \\Qi(i peccatorum vestrorum pro nostrormn. 

XXXI. Ad orationem aufer a nohis non inclinari tem- 
pore pr^scripto, ant post oscnlatnm Altare inclinationeni 
facere priusqnam perveniat ad librum. 

XXXII. Exseqni casremonias ante ant post tempus 
assign atnm. 

XXXIII. Legere aut recitare niminm festinanter et 
verba etiam per syncopem contrahere ; alta voce proferre 
qnod secrete dicendum est et vicissim. 

XXXIY. Simnlare Altare osculari, nee reipsa oscnlari, 
vel oscnlari e latere, non vero in medio aut osculandi 
gratia contorquere membra vel capnt. 

XXXY. Incipere Kyrie Eleison prinsquam se sistat 
in medio Altaris, et pra3scriptas inclinationes omittere. 

XXXYI. Convertere se ad populum dum dicit Dom- 
inus vobiscum manibus disjunctis, intuendo adstantes, 
non depositis conspicillis. 

XXX YII. Dicere Oremus antequam veniat ad Missale, 
duplicare literam ita nt pro Oremus dicat lere O oremus. 
Intueri crncem dicendo Oremus. 

XXXYUl. Ilecitare orationes non junctis manibns 
aut non apertis ante pectus manibus, aut uti ad legenduni 



APPENDIX. 433 

parvo conspicillo, quo in casu manus nou possent esse 
apertaB. 

XXXIX. Oculos ad Crucem aut in coelum non inten- 
dere qnnm a rubrica pr^escribitur, contra antem attollere 
quiim non pnescribitur. 

XL. Ad Munda cor meum dicere Juhe Domne pro 
Jvhe Domine^ ant osculari Altare post banc precationem. 

XLI. Manibns insistere Altari ad Munda cor meum^ 
ad Sanctus et ad Agnus Dei. 

XLII. Incipiendo Evangeliura manum sinistram non 
imponere Missali, nt Crucis signnm super textura signet, 
nee, quLim se poUice signabit, manuin eamdem infra 
pectus ponere, nee digitos tenere extensos. 

XLIII. Inclinationem facere versus Crucem in legendo 
Evangelio, aut genufiectere Crucem non librum versus, 
quum genuflexio praescripta sit. 

XLIY. Ad et incarnatus genufiectere utroque genu, 
vel morari in genuflexione, aut caput etiam inclinare. 

XLY. Inchoare Crucis signum prius quam verba et 
vitam venturi sobguU, 

XLYI. Detegere Calicem dum recitatur Credo aut 
quum legit ur offertorium. 

XLYII. Recitare eumdem versum extensis manibus. 

XLYllI. Dum Hostile fiet oblatio intueri Crucem, aut 
tres digitos inferiores sub paten a non extendere. 

XLIX. Detecto Calice, velum post ipsum utcumque 
implicare. 

L. Calicem tergere violenter, aut dum e medio Altari 
transibit in cornu Epistolse : incipere oratiouem Deus qui 
humanoB sulstantim dum vinum in Calicem infundet, aut 
priusquam ampullam vini deponat. 

LI. Patenam cum Hostia vel Calicem in offer torio 
nimis elevare, aut utrumque demisse nimis sustinere. 

LIl. Inclinare caput proferendo nomen Jesu et Mari'Jd 
in oratione suscipe Sancta Trinitas^ itemque in reliquis 
ante communionem orationibus. 

LIII. Crucis signa super Hostiam et Calicem efficere 
aut flectendo digitos in ducendis lineis ad ilia efficienda, 
aut manu fere clausa, vel eadem efficiendo saltuatim. 

LIY. Elata voce dicere Orate fratres^ aut non secrete 



434 APPENDIX. 

dicere ut meum^ etc., aut siibsistere contra populum 
prasdicta verba proferendi gratia; respondere Amen, aut 
continuare secreta priusquam responsio Suscipiat a min- 
istro comploatur. 

LV. Ad Sarsum corda clausas attollere manus aut 
palmis non ad invicem sed ad Altare conversis. 

LYI. Inclinare caput ad ubique gratias agere aut ad 
verba per Christum Dominum nostrum in pra3fatione, 
vel alio etiam loco prseterquam post Memento defunc- 
torum. 

LYII. Pectus percutere dicendo Sanctus aut non 
mediocri voce dicere ipsum ; recitare voce intelligibili 
totum Canonem aut aliquot ejus partes, quum omnia 
secreto dicenda sint. 

LYIII. Non jun^ere manus priusquam signa Crucis 
faciat, aut suspens m tenere sinistram, dum dextera 
actionem aliquam exsequitur. 

LIX. Digitos saliva conspergere ad evolvenda Missalis 
folia. 

LX. Immorari nimis in memento, vel nimia brevitate 
conficere, aut alta voce proferre Memento Domine, etc. 

LXI. Pollices supponere palmis manuum dicendo 
Hano igitur oblationem, etc. 

LXII. Abstergere digitos, antequam accipiat Hostiam, 
non extremo sed medio corporali prope Hostiam. 

LXIII. Imponere brachium sinistrum Altari susti- 
nendo Hostiam ante Consecrationem ad verba henedixit, 
f regit, etc. 

LXIY. Insistere et incurvari indeccnter super Altare 
proferendi caussa Consecratio lis verba. 

LXY. Proferendo verba Consecrationis gesticu'ari 
capite aut contorquere corpus; non proferre ilia secreto, 
eadem verba repetere, dicere sufflando, aut pedem dex- 
terum euspensum tenere ut statim possit genullecti. 

LXYI. Non removere de Altari cubitos nee ferre 
manuum articulos versus frontem Altaris post Consecra- 
tionem, ut commodius genufiectatur. 

LXYII. Post elevationem Hostile detegere Calicem, 
postea genuflectere. 

LXYllI. Accipere Calicem ad verba Accijpiens et huno 



APPENDIX. 435 

prcBclarum Calicem manu dextera tantum, os et nasum 
Calici imponere, aut inclinare eum ad se vel Altari 
applicatum ten ere. 

LXIX. In elevatione non seqiii oculis Hostiam et 
Calicem aut elevare et demittere nimis festinanter, aut 
plus aequo sustinere sublime in eonspectum adstantium, 
aut nimis attollere extensis monstruose brachiis, aut tarn 
parum attollere ut conspici non possint, aut elevando 
super caput ponere, aut Calicem osculari. 

LXX. Yerba Hobc quotiescumque^ etc., tempore eleva- 
tionis dicere, non post Consecrationis verba dum genu- 
flect itur. 

LXXI. ]S"on genuflectere usque in terram, vel genu- 
flectere inconciune et properanter. 

LXXII. JSTon tenere poUices et indices junctos a Con- 
secratione usque ad purificationem, aut Hostiam tangere 
digitis inferioribus, aut digitos istos non extendere quum 
Hostiam accipiet. 

LXXIII. Ponere raanas jiinetas super Altare omnino 
intra corporale post Consecrationem non sequendo pra3- 
scriptiones a rubrica expressas una in perpetuum vice 
sine uUa distinctione aut limitatione. 

LXXIY. Pausam facere in commemoratione defunc- 
torum antequam dicatur qui nos proBcesserunt, etc., aut 
alta voce dix^ere Memento etiam^ Domine^ aut reliquas 
Ij)sis^ Domine, -etc 

LXXY. Pectus non digitis tribus inferioribus percu- 
tere, et reliquis junctis tangere eas«km ad Nobis quoque 
peccatorihus^ ad Agnus Dei, ad Domiu'e non sum dignus. 

LX.^YL Inclinare caput dicendo JVohis quoque pecca- 
torhus^ aut alta voce dicere etiam fainuiis tuis cum 
suspirio, vel dicere Amen ante Per quein hmc omnia. 

LXXYII. Caput etiam inclinare ad PrCB'Xptis salu- 
iarihus, aut recitare ilia apertis manibus, aut oculos non 
detigere in Sacramentum quum recitabitur PaUr noster^ 
aut patenam de corporal! deducere eamque abstergere 
priusquam minister responderit Amen, aut non abster- 
gere manu tantum dextera, sed adjuncta etiam sinistra. 

LXXYIII. Non applicare sinistram infra pectus 
quum signo Crucis se muniat. 



436 APPENDIX. 

LXXIX. OscTilan patenam in parte inferior! ant in 
margine, vel abstergere super planetam aut in alia parte 
postqnam illam osculatns sit. 

LXXX. Purificare digitos fragmentis terendo unnm 
post alternm in labro Calicis. 

L XXXI. Se vertere ad alterutram partem dicendo 
Domine, non sum dignus, aut brachium sinistrum impo- 
nere Altari. 

LXXXIl. Crucis signum Hostia efficere extra limites 
patenfB et frontis sufe in Communionis actu, aut expuere 
dum sumpturus est, vel etiam osculari S. Hostiam ante- 
quam sumat. 

LXXXIII. Nimia vel modica diligentia peccare in 
colligendis fragmentis, et collectis intra Calicem injici- 
endis. 

LXXXI Y. Sumere Calicem strepcndo labiis aut oculis 
sublatis, aut sensim et similia. 

LXXXY. PallampatenaB imponere antequam transeat 
in cornu Epistolse ad accipiendam ablutionem, aut earn 
purilicatorio abstergere, 

LXXXYI. Accipiendo purificationem ponere Calicem 
super Altare, aut extra Altare ilium ministro porrigere 
nulla cogente necessitate. 

LXXXVII. Extergere labia aut os digitis jam ablutis 
vino et aqua antequam purificatorio extergantur. 

LXXXVIII. Corporale complicare elato in altum 
Calice, bursam ponere non versa ante pectus apertura 
ejus, et relinquere velum ex parte anterior! sublatum. 

LXXXIX. Sinere ut minister, quamquam Clericus, 
multo pejus si laicus sit, Calicem cooperiat et accomodet. 

XC. Missale non claudere, ut prsescribitur, et conclu- 
sionem ultimas orationis absolvere veuiendo ad medium 
Altare. 

XCI. Se inclinare ad populum dicendo Ite missa est, 
aut dicendo Benedicamus iJomino se inclinare ad Altare 
aut convert ere ad populum. 

XCII. In discessu de Altari accipere biretum ante- 
quam reverentiam vel genuflexionem eflSciat, aut illud 
sibi de capite detrahere priusquam reverentiam fecerit ad 
Crucem vel imaginem prsecipuam Sacrarii. 



APPENDIX. 437 

XCIII. Paramenta acervatim deponere in exuendo 
se, non osculari stolam, manipulam, amictum, aut sibi 
albara detrahere ex adverse. 

XOIY. Sermones conserere et confabulari in Sacrario, 
aut ex illo et Ecclesia discedere qiiin tempus conveniens 
intercesserit pro debita gratiaram actione. 

XCV. Quod ad defectus spectat in rubricis generalibus 
pluribus capitibus notatos, quuin de rebus agatur, quas 
omnis Sacerdos novisse et probe scire tenetur, quasque 
potest unusquisque in Misssali legere et perpendere, 
potius quam eadam capita retractemus, in totum silentio 
prseterire operse pretium visum est. 



INDEX. 



Absolution after Mass for the dead, 310. 

Acolytes, Instruction for the, at the High Mass, 146; at Solemn 

Vespers, 188. 
A CunctiSy What Saint to be named in, 13, n. 
Adorna thalamum, 91. - 

Advent, Sundays in, when Bishop officiates, 337. 
All Souls, Vespers of, 208 ; when Bishop officiates, 337. 
Altar, Mode of Kissing, 11, n. 
Altar Veil, 87. 
Ambry, 2, n. 

Antependium, what, 1, n. 
Archbishop, 288 ; vesting of, 284. 
Ash- Wednesday, necessary preparations, 92, 217, 343 ; blessing of 

Ashes, 92, 217; Mass, 95, 221 ; when Bishop officiates, 344. 
Asperges, when there is but one priest, 67. 
Assistant Deacon, Instructions for, 318; their quality, dress, and 

place, 318; at Pontitical Vespers, 318; at Pontifical'Mass, 319; 

when the Bishop does not celebrate, 321. 
Assistant Priest, his quality, dress, and place, 313; his office in 

general, 314; his office at Pontifical Vespers, 314; at Pontifical 

Mass, 315; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 317. 

Baptism of Infants on Holy Saturday, 266. 

Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, 79; ceremon'es when but 
one Priest, 80; when assisted by another Priest, 83; when 
assisted by deacon and sub-deacon, 200; by Bishop, 275. 

Bench in Sanctuary, L36, n. 

Bishop, what, to be named in memento, 20, n.; serving: of, at Low 
Mass, 60; when there is but one chaplain, 65; Mass in presence 
of, 46; Solemn Mass celebrated in presence of, when in cope, 300; 
Solemn Mass in presence of, when in Rochet and Cappa 
Magna, 304; Vespers solemnly celebrated bv, 270; Solemn 
Vespers in presence of, 276; Complins by, 277; Matins, 278; 
Lauds, 280; Matins and Lauds for the Dead, 306; Solemn Pon- 
tifical Mass, 281; Seat of, 281; Vespers for the Dead by, 305; 
Instructions for officers who attend, 313; on Ail Souls, 336; 
Sundays in Advent, 337; Christmas, 338; Festivals between 
Christmas and Candlemas, 339; Candlemis,340; Ash- Wednesday, 
343; Sundays in Lent, 345; Palm Sunday, 316; Mannday- 
Thursday, 350 ; the Mandatum, or washing of the f^ et, 360 ; Go »d 
Friday, 361 ; what to be prepared for, ib.; to the beginning of tha 



440 INDEX. 

office, 862; the office, 363; Holy Saturday, 369; what to be pre- 
pared for, 369; Solemn Admiinstratioii of (Jonfirniatioa, 395; 
Visitation of Parishes, 399. 

Blessed Sacrament, how often to be renewed, 30, n. ; Low Mass, when 
it is exposed, 44; Solemn Vespers, when it is exposed, 302; 
when exposed, no bow made to any one in Sanctuary, 204. 

Book-bearer, Instruction for, 335. 

Bows, 6, 71., 54; not made to Sanctuary boys, 68, n. 

Burse, 32, 53. 

Calotte, what, 137, n. 

Candle-bearer, Instructions for, 335. 

Candlemas, blessing of Candles, 86, 213; distribution, 89, 213; pro- 
cession, 90, 215 ; when Bishop officiates, 340 ; Mass after the pro- 
cession, 92, 217. 

Canon, what, 60, n. 

Cappa Magna, 305, n. 

Celebrant, at High Mass, Instruction for the, 176 ; at Vespers, 198. 

Censer-bearer, Instruction for, at High Mass, 142 ; at Solemn Ves- 
pers, 190. 

Ceremonies of Low Mass, 1 ; High Mass, 67 ; PonMflcal High Mass, 
281; High Mass for the Dead, 183 ; Pontifical Mass for the Dead, 
807 ; for the principal Festivals, 211. 

Chapter, Intonation for, 423. 

Choir, Rules for Clergy in, at High Mass, 135 ; at Vespers, 187; order 
to be observed, 136; internal dispositions, 138; order in going 
from. 140. 

Christmas, when Bishop officiates, 338; Festivals between Christmas 
and Candlemas, 339. 

Ciborium, Veil of, 17, n. ; Purification of, 51. 

Cincture, how made, 5. 

Commemoration of all the faithful departed, 208, 336. 

Communion at Masses for the dead, 43, n. ; general rules for Com- 
munion at Mass, 48 ; at other times, 51; at High Mass, 139. 

Complins, when Bishop officiates solemnly, 277. 

Confirmation, Solemn Administration of, 395; things to be prepared 
for, ib. ; the administration of the Sacrament, 396. 

Confiteor, Intonation for, 428. 

Corporal, what, 4, n. 

Corpus Christi, Procession on, and its octave, 206 ; Benediction 
during procession, 207, n. 

Cope bearers. Instruction for the, at Solemn Vespers, 195 ; Vespers 
without, 72. 

Credence, what, 2, n. 

Credo, generally omitted in Votive Masses, 36. 

Crosier- bearer. Instructions for, 333. 

Cross, Veneration of, on Good Friday, 112, 247. 

Cruets, to be of glass, not of silver, 2, n. 

Cum appTopinquaret, 99. 

Deacon, Instruction for the officiating, 166; deacon at Pontifical 
Mass, 321. 



IN^DEX. 441 

Dead, Low Mass for the, 42; High Mass, 183; Vespers for the, 203 

Defectuum Elenclms. Append, in fine. 

Deus in adjutoi'ium, Intouation, 422. 

Dies tree, when said, 43. 

Diocesan Synods, Ceremonies to be observed in, 390. 

Epistle, Intonation for, 426. 

Faldstool, what, 283. 

Ferial tones. 426. 

Font, Blessing of the, 129, 264. 

Forty Hours' Exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, 406; things to 
be prepared, ib. ; of the Mass of the Exposition, 407; of the Pro- 
cession for the Exposition, 409; of the Mas?, pro pace, 413; things 
to be prepared for the Mass of the Reposition, 414; of the Mass 
of the Reposition, 414; from the Litany to the end of the Forty 
Hours, 418. 

Genuflection, how made, 54. . 

Gloria in Excelsis, in what votive Masses omitted, 36. 

Good Friday, what is to be prepared, 110, 243 ; when Bishop officiates, 
361; Office to the uncovering of the Cross, 111, 244; uncovering 
and veneration of the Cross, 112, 247; Procession, 118, 250; re- 
maining part of the office, 120, 252 ; from the entrance of the 
Bishop to the beginning of the office, 362; the office, 363. 

Gospel, Intonation for the, 427. 

High Mass, without deacon or sub-deacon, 67 ; vesting, 68 ; ceremonies, 
69; rules for clergy in choir, 135 ; order to be oi)served. 136 ; in- 
ternal dispositions, 138 ; receiving Holy Communion, 139 ; going 
from Choir, 140; Preparation for, 141 ; Instructions for the officers 
at, 142; Instruction tor celebrant, 176; incensing, 143. {8ee Pan- 
tijkal Mass, Solemn Mass.) 

High Mass for the Dead, what to be observed particularly at, 183 ; 
P(mtifical, 307. 

Holy Saturday, things to be prepared, 123, 256; when Bishop offici- 
ates, 369; office, 125, 258: Benediction of the new fire, 125, 258; 
by Bishop, 370 ; Exultet, 128,261,371; Blessing of the Paschal 
Candle, 128, 261; by Bishop, 371 ; Prophecies, 128, 263; Blessing 
of the Font, 129, 264; by the Bishop. 373; Baptism of Infants^ 
131; Litany, Mass, 132, 267 ; Vespers, zi.; bringing back the Pyx 
to the Altar, 133 ; to the beginning of Mass, when Bishop offici- 
ates, 374; Mass, 375. 

Holy Week and other Festivals, Ceremonies for, 86, SIL 

Host, how broken, 27. 

Incense-boat, 86. 

Incensing, manner of, 144, n. 

Incensing, candles at Candlemas, 89 ; ashes, 94 ; palms, 98 ; the Blessed 
Sacrament in the Repository, 107, 241 ; on Holy Saturday, 126, 
258; at Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, 81,84; at High 



442 INDKX. 

Mass, 180; in High Mass for the Dead, 185; at Solemn Vespers 

190, 199 ; Corpus Christi, 203. 
Inferior ministers, at Pontifical Mass, instructions for, 313. 
Intonation for Mass and Vespers, 422. 

Laetare and Gaud^-te Sundays, 223. 

Lauds, when the Bishop officiates, 280 ; for the Dead, 306. 

Lent, Sundays in, 345 ; when the Bishop officiates, 345. 

Low Mass, Ceremonies of, 1 ; what to be prepared for, 1, 2 ; from Com- 
mencement to Introit, 9 ; Introit to the Epistle, 11 ; Epistle to the 
Offertory, 13; Offertory to the Canon, 15; Canon to the Conse- 
cration, 20; Consecration to the Pater Noster, 24; Pater Noster 
to the Communion, 26; Communion to the end of Mass, 32; Low 
Mass for the Dead, 42; when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 
44 ; in the presence of Prelates, 46 ; manner of serving at, 54 ; 
Bishop at Low Mass, 60. 

Mandatum, or Washing of Feet, 360. 

Mass, Preparations for, 3 ; Ceremonies for Low Mass, 1 ; Votive Masses, 
34; Mass pro Sponso et Sponsa, 35; Low Mass for the Dead, 42; 
High Mass, 141 ; High Mass for the Dead, 183; Pontifical Mass. 
Solemn, 281 ; for the Dead, 307. 

Mass, Solemn, in presence of the Bishop, 300, 304. 

Masses for the Dead, classed among Votive Masses, 37; when pro- 
hibited, 38; when allowed, 38; Dies irce, when said, 43; Low Mass 
for the Dead, 42; Communion at, 43 ; High Mass, 183 ; Poniifical, 
307; things to be prepared, 26. ; the Mass, 308 ; absolution after 
Mass, 810. 

Master of Ceremonies, duty of, at Eigh Mass, 150 ; at Solemn Vespers, 
192. 

Matins, when the Bishop officiates, 278 ; for the Dead, 306 ; of Tene- 
brae, 349. 

Maunday-Tlmrsday, Preparation, 103, 235; Mass, 104,236; Proces- 
sion, 106, 239 ; removal of the Pyx, 108 ; Vespers, 241 ; stripping of 
the Altar, 109, 241 ; when the Bishop officiates, 350 ; repository, 
how prepared, 103, 350. 

Mitre-bearer, Instruction for, 334. 

Monstrance, 80. 

Mozeita, 271, n. 

Newly ordained priest, the three Masses of, 37. 

Obtulerunt Domine, 91. 

Officers, Instructions lor the, at High Mass, 141; censer-bearer, 142; 
acolytes, 146 ; master ol ceremonies, 150; sub-deacon, 158^ dea- 
con, 166; celebrant, 176; instruction for officers who attend Bishop, 
313. 

Officiating deacon. Instruction for, 166 ; at Pontifical Mass, 321. 

Ordo, to be observed by priest celebrating in another church, 39. 

Umbrellino, 202, n. 



INDEX. 443 

Pall, what, 4, n. 

Palm Sunday, Preparation for, 96, 222; blessing of the palms, 97, 223; 
distribution of, 98, 226 ; procession, 99, 227 ; Mass and Passion, 
230; when Bisbop officiates, 346. 

Parishes, Episcopal visitation of, 399. 

Paschal Candles, Blessing of, 127, 261. 

Pax, how given, 138. 

Peace, instrument of, 47. 

Pontifical mantle, 305. 

Pontifical Mass, Solemn, 281 ; things to be prepared, «\ ; vesting of the 
clergy and Bishop, 284 ; the Pontifical Mass, 288: for the Dead, 
307 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; the Mass, 308 ; absolution after 
Mass, 310. 

Papule mens, 114. 

Prelates, what, 46. 

Priest, preparation for Mass, 3; at Low Mass, 6; after Mass, 54; in- 
struction for, at High Mass, 67; assistant prie<t, 313. 

Procession at Candlemas, 90 ; Palm trunday, 99, 227 ; Maund ay-Thurs- 
day, 106, 239 ; Good Friday, 118, 250 ; Corpus Christi and its oc- 
tave, 206 ; at Provincial Councils, 379. 

Prophecies on Holy Saturday, 128, 263. 

Provincial Councils, Ceremonies to be observed in, 376; how the 
Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and arranged, 377; open- 
ing of the Council, 378 ; procession, 379 ; Mass, 379 ; Ceremonies 
for the first session or opening of the couuc-il, 380; Mode of pro- 
cedure, 384 ; second Solemn Session, 385 ; ihird Solemn Session, 
387. 

Purification, Feast of the, necessary preparations, 86, 211; from the 
Vesting to the distribution of the candles, 86, ^12; to the Pro- 
cession, 90, 213; the Procession, 90, 215. 

Purificator, what, 4, n. 

Pyx, of the removal of the, 108 ; bringing back to the altar, 133. 

Quarant 'Ore, 406. 

Remon stance, see Monstrance. 

Repository, how prepared, 104, 236? procession to, on Maunday- 

Thursday, 106, 239 ; on Good Fnd^iy, 118, 250. 
Requiem Masses, 37 ; Communion at, 43. 
Rose Colored Vestments, 222. 

Sacred Species, Renewal of, 30, n. 

Sanctuary, Chairs in, 136, n.\ rules for clergy in, 135, 187; when 

sacristy is behind altar, how to enter, 34, n. 
Serving Mass, Low Mass, 54; Vesting, 55; the Mass, 56; Bishop's 

Low Mass, 60. 
Sign of tbe Cross, how made, 9, n. 
Solemn Mass, in presence of Bishop in mitre and cope, 300; when in 

rochet and cappa, 304; Intonations for, 425. 
Solemnities when Bishop officiates, 336. 
Stole, Use of, 73, n. 
Sub-deacon, Instruction for, at High Mass, 158; Pontifical Mass, 323, 



444 iiq-DEX. 

Tenebrae, Office of, 233 ; when Bishop officiates, 349. ' 
Two Masses on the same day, Order of, 40. 

Unrobing after Mass, 34 

Vespers, without cope-bearer, 72; Solemn, 186; things to be prepared 
ib.'^ general rules for the clergy in the sanctuary, 187; instruction 
for cope-bearers, 195 ; for the celebrant, 198 ; Solemn Vespers, 
the Blessed Sacrament being exposed, 202; for the Dead, on 
November 1st, 208; things to be prepared, «6. ; peculiar cere- 
monies, 209; on Maunday-Thursday, 241; Solemn Ponlifical, 
270; things to be prepared, z&. ; from the entrance to the besjin- 
ning of Vespers, 27 1 ; to the end of Vespers, 272 ; Solemn Ves- 
pers in the presence of the Bishop 276; All Souls, when the 
Bishop officiates, 305 ; Christmas, 338; intonations tor, 422. 

Vesting priest at Low Mass, 55 ; Bishop, 60. 

Vexilla regis, 119. 

Visitation of the Parishes, 399; things subject to the Episcopal 
visitation, 403. 

Votive Masses, 84; Solemn, when can it be said, 35; what Preface to 
be said at, 36 ; prayers at, ib. ; certain Masses not to be said as 
Votive, 36. 

Water, what quantity to be poured into chalice, 17, n. 
Wax candles, only two at Low Mass of priests, 1. 



I'll' 



^i 




f^ii>'..^:. 




,, Deacidified u^ing the Bookkeeper^rocess. 
1 Neutralizing agent: Magnes.um Oxide 
^ Treatment Date: Jan. 2006 



$ PrGservationTechnoiogies 

^ r„V.?".N PAPER PBeSERVAT.OH 

Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
<724) 779-21 11 



vfii«Ef«*-?6l?-J 



«^^i 




Li'ul'" i'hl 



^ 







